Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080200160 | Apparatuses, Methods and Systems for Ambiguous Code-Triggered Information Querying and Serving on Mobile Devices - The disclosure details the implementation of apparatuses, methods, and systems for ambiguous code triggered information querying and serving on mobile devices. Information and/or advertisement providers may use a code triggered information server to serve context, demographic, and behavior targeted information to users via mobile devices. Users, in turn, trigger the provision of information by scanning or observing codes or information. Often, codes scanned by novice users and/or using mobile devices may be ambiguous and/or obscured. Consequently, the present system may implement disambiguation processes to the code scans so as to clarify their identity. The disambiguated scans, together with geographic, temporal, and user-specific information, are obtained by the server that receives, processes, and records the message. Based on these messages and a user profile—which may include continuously updated user-specific behavior information, situational and ambient information, an accumulated history of scanned code messages, and integration with outside database information—the server selects information to serve to the users' mobile devices from an information base. The code triggered information server allows for the serving of information that is demographic, interest, location, and time specific. It also allows providers to track user behavior and provide anticipatory information. | 08-21-2008 |
20080200161 | PROVIDING RELEVANT NON- REQUESTED CONTENT TO A MOBILE DEVICE - A system and method are directed towards providing non-requested content to a mobile terminal based on characteristics of, and tracked usage of the mobile terminal to request content through an online portal service, which provides access to content in multiple subject areas. A mobile user profile is created from the characteristics and patterns of the tracked usage. The tracked usage information includes the time, location, frequency at which the content was requested. Based on the mobile user profile information, content related to previously requested content is provided to the mobile terminal upon a trigger that is related to the requested content. The trigger event may include the mobile terminal returning to a location from which certain content was previously requested. The non-requested content may further be based on a related general user profile that indicates usage of an alternate electronic device to access content through the portal. | 08-21-2008 |
20080207185 | Method For Providing Device Ids In a Mobile Radio Device Which Identify Said Mobile Radio Device in a Mobile Radio Network - The invention relates to a method for providing device IDs in a mobile radio device ( | 08-28-2008 |
20080207186 | RADIO CONTROL METHOD AND RADIO CONTROL APPARATUS - A radio control method is arranged to use a mobile station | 08-28-2008 |
20080207187 | Multimode Mobile Terminal With Automatic Selection of Interface of Radio Access Network During a Service Session - The invention concerns a radio communication mobile terminal (MS) comprising: i) an operating system (OS), ii) at least one internal application (IA | 08-28-2008 |
20080207188 | METHOD OF DISPLAYING MENU IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method of displaying a menu in a mobile communication terminal and a mobile communication terminal are provided. The method of displaying a menu in a mobile communication terminal comprises displaying a standby screen in a display of the mobile communication terminal, selecting one of a plurality of specific directions through an input device of the mobile communication terminal, and displaying each menu corresponding to the selected specific direction on the standby screen. | 08-28-2008 |
20080214169 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System - A method for comparing configurations in a telecommunication system comprises switching S | 09-04-2008 |
20080214170 | System and Method of Updating Presence Information - A network node provides presence updates to mobile users. The node reduces the amount of network traffic by eliminating the need for explicit messaging used to inform a user of presence updates. Additionally, the node reduces network traffic by consolidating presence updates, and sending the user only changed portions of the presence information. | 09-04-2008 |
20080214171 | Mobile communication system and mobile terminal having function of inactivating mobile communication viruses, and method thereof - The present invention provides a mobile communication system and method for inactivating or curing mobile communication viruses. The mobile communication system for inactivating a virus includes: a database associated with the mobile communication system, for storing at least one virus vaccine program; and a virus monitoring unit associated with the mobile communication system, for checking virus infection of received data, analyzing virus information, choosing one of virus vaccine programs that are stored in the database and inactivating the virus. Virus vaccine programs are timely updated over the air (OTA) whenever a new version of vaccine program is available. | 09-04-2008 |
20080220757 | SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO FOR LOADING WAVEFORM COMPONENTS AT RUNTIME IN A SOFTWARE COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE (SCA) FRAMEWORK - A software defined radio includes a radio circuit and an executable radio software system operable with the radio circuit and conforming to the software communications architecture (SCA) specification. An operating environment is defined and includes a plurality of waveform components that are loaded when the radio circuit is initialized or a waveform component is instantiated, and reloaded at runtime after the waveform component is instantiated for transmitting and receiving voice data. | 09-11-2008 |
20080220758 | Broadcast receiver and processing program thereof - When reservation information is inputted, a mobile terminal apparatus (broadcast receiver) | 09-11-2008 |
20080227440 | Methods and apparatus for discovering and updating a mobile device via user behavior - Apparatus and methods for dynamically updating a mobile device in response to a user's behavior. In one exemplary embodiment, a user interface (UI) of the device is capable of being updated based on the user's usage or other behavioral patterns. In one variant, a server and associated mobile portal are utilized to receive input from the mobile device relating to user behavior, emulate the device on the server (or a proxy device), and discover services applicable to that particular device. The user interface of the device is then adaptively modified based on the relevant discovered services, thereby enhancing user interface efficiency and the user's interaction experience. | 09-18-2008 |
20080233937 | Mobile communication terminal and method - It is presented a method for providing a user interface of a mobile communication terminal comprising a mode switch actuator, where the mobile communication terminal has at least two operational modes. The method comprises the: detecting an actuation of the mode switch actuator; determining a first operational mode being a currently active operational mode; determining a second operational mode to switch to; and switching operational mode of the mobile communication terminal from the first operational mode to the second operational mode. This provides a user interface which may be different for each operational mode, enhancing usability by excluding user interface items that are unnecessary for each operational mode. Corresponding multimode devices and computer program product are also presented. | 09-25-2008 |
20080233938 | MARITIME RADIO INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT USING POSITION AND RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRAL ENERGY DETECTION - Embodiments are directed to avoiding interference between a maritime mobile radio network and a mobile radio network provided at a fixed position relative to the maritime mobile radio network. A current geographic position of the maritime network is determined. A minimum separation distance to be maintained between the two networks is determined based on the geographic position. A current separation distance is predicted based a signal detected from the fixed-position network. When the predicted separation distance is less than the minimum separation distance and the detected signal is determined to be persistent, the maritime network is turned off. The detected signal may be determined to be persistent when it is continuously detected over a predetermined time period and has sufficient signal energy for sustaining a cellular telephone call. | 09-25-2008 |
20080233939 | Method for Enhancing Data Transmission Efficiency for a Radio Resource Control Procedure for a Wireless Communications System and Related Apparatus - A method for enhancing data transmission efficiency for a radio resource control, hereinafter called RRC, procedure for a user equipment, also called UE, of a wireless communications system includes initiating an RRC update procedure; sending an update message corresponding to the RRC update procedure to a network terminal; reselecting a serving cell after the update message is sent to the network terminal; and using a common HS-DSCH radio network transaction identifier, abbreviated to common H-RNTI, for a high speed downlink operation corresponding to a CELL_FACH state if the selected serving cell supports the high speed downlink operation. | 09-25-2008 |
20080233940 | Method and Apparatus for Handling Random Access Procedure in a Wireless Communications System - A method for handling a random access procedure in a user equipment, called UE hereinafter, of a wireless communications system includes sending a negative acknowledgement to a network or not sending an acknowledgement corresponding to a message | 09-25-2008 |
20080233941 | Method and Apparatus for Handling Random Access Procedure in a Wireless Communications System - A method for handling a random access procedure in a user equipment, called UE hereinafter, of a wireless communications system includes outputting a message | 09-25-2008 |
20080242286 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LEARNING BASED DEVICE MANAGEMENT - The present disclosure relates generally to systems and methods for learning based device management. In one example, the method includes identifying functions available on a mobile device and determining a usage pattern for each of the functions. A determination is made as to whether each of the functions is to be monitored based on the function's usage pattern, and a device management profile is generated that defines monitoring parameters for each of the functions to be monitored. | 10-02-2008 |
20080254780 | Automated Application-Selective Processing of Information Obtained Through Wireless Data Communication Links - The present invention provides a method for automated application-selective processing of data by a portable processor based terminal device and the portable processor based terminal device enabled to perform the aforementioned method. The data is receivable wirelessly from an external counterpart data provision entity. One or more content data is extracted from the wirelessly received data. Then it is checked whether an application, which is currently carried out on the portable processor based terminal device, is applicable or compatible with the one or more content data and in case a content data is applicable with the current running application, the content data is supplied to the application, which processed on the supplied content data accordingly. | 10-16-2008 |
20080254781 | SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SILENCING COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A system and method for silencing communication devices is disclosed. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a silencing system having a controller element to transmit an RF signal to an RF receiver of a mobile communication device. An audible alerting function of the mobile communication device can be adjusted in response to the RF signal. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 10-16-2008 |
20080254782 | Apparatus, method and computer program product providing inter-operability between legacy and other radio network subsystem - RNCs are assigned different bit length identifiers, for example 12 bits (legacy) and 16 bits (extended). To enable handovers between adjacent RNCs with different bit length identifiers, several solutions are presented. In a first solution, no logical/direct connection is configured between the adjacent RNCs having different bit length identifiers at least for the case where the value of the longer identifier is not compatible with the shorter identifier. In a second solution, some RNCs are given both a long and a short identifier, and use the one matching the length of the RNC with which a handover occurs. In a third solution, for all adjacent RNCs with an Iur logical connection between them but still having different bit length identifiers, the most significant bits of the longer identifier are not the same as the whole of the shorter bit length identifier. Multiple variations and examples are presented, and implementations include method, apparatus, embodied computer program, and integrated circuit. | 10-16-2008 |
20080254783 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR DISPLAYING IMAGE ACCORDING TO CALL THEREIN - A mobile terminal and a method for displaying an image in the mobile terminal. The method includes registering a counterparty's image in a counterparty's phone number information, extracting an image containing the counterparty's image based on the registered image, and displaying the registered image and the extracted image. At least one image from the registered image and the extracted image may be selected and displayed, wherein the at least one selected image may be displayed by sequentially changing the displayed image according to a rule. The mobile terminal and the method enable the mobile terminal to display various images associated with a counterparty, thus providing user satisfaction and eliminating an inconvenience of requiring the user to change an image. | 10-16-2008 |
20080254784 | DYNAMIC RECONFIGURATION OF RESOURCES THROUGH PAGE HEADERS - Methods and systems for reconfiguring communications systems are provided. In one embodiment, a radio head interface for a communications system comprises: a first interface for communicating with a signal processing module digitally performing waveform processing to modulate and demodulate radio signals; a second interface for communicating with a radio head for transmitting and receiving wireless radio signals; a first buffer coupled to the first interface for receiving a page of data from the signal processing module, the page of data comprising a page header for communicating reconfiguration parameters and a plurality of digital radio frequency samples representing a modulated radio signal; at least one digital frequency converter coupled to the second interface; and a configuration management unit, the configuration management unit adapted to receive the reconfiguration parameters from the page header and reconfigure the at least one digital frequency converter based on the reconfiguration parameters. | 10-16-2008 |
20080261578 | Methods and Devices for Set-up of a Call in an Intelligent Network - Methods and devices for set-up of a call in an intelligent network ( | 10-23-2008 |
20080261579 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING VOLUME THEREOF - A mobile communication terminal and method of controlling a volume thereof are disclosed, by which the volume of the mobile communication terminal can be controlled in case of entering a specific mode while a manner mode is set. The present invention includes entering a specific mode for outputting an audio signal while a manner mode is set, selecting a presence or non-presence of an output of the audio signal, and terminating the specific mode, wherein the manner mode is maintained in case of terminating the specific mode. | 10-23-2008 |
20080261580 | Controlled Temporary Mobile Network - A communication device and method for controlling a temporary Mobile Group within a Controlled Temporary Mobile Network. The device is configurable by an administrator to act as a Mobile Group Node within the temporary Mobile Group. The administrator may further configure the device to act as a Mobile Group Leader, which manages and controls the temporary Mobile Group according to an adaptable policy engine. | 10-23-2008 |
20080268827 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE THAT PERMITS A USER TO SELECT ANY OF MULTIPLE USER-SELECTABLE COMMUNICATION TYPES FOR A REPLY - A communication device comprises logic and an input device coupled to the logic. The input device is adapted to permit a user to select a communication type. The logic receives a communication in a first communication type and permits a user to reply to the communication using any of a plurality of user-selectable communication types. | 10-30-2008 |
20080274722 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATE-BASED INTEGRATED PROCESSING OF DATA IN MOBILE TERMINAL - A method and apparatus wherein data generated in a mobile terminal can be classified in an integrated manner based on dates and can be displayed in various forms. User data generated in the mobile terminal can be processed by the mobile terminal or can be sent to and processed by a separate information processing appliance. The data processing method includes executing an integrated data processing application; selecting a reference date; collecting pieces of data created at the reference date regardless of their types; processing the collected pieces of data in an integrated manner according to preset processing conditions; and displaying processing results together with associated screens of the integrated data processing application. The integrated data processing application can be, for example, a life diary application. | 11-06-2008 |
20080287113 | Allocation system and method - A method of recording allocation of resources in response to a request for a data item to be transmitted to a device in the network where the request comprises data indicative of one or more requested items. The device is typically a mobile device and the requested items can be key words making up a search request or can be web site names indicating web sites of interest to the user. In response to the request, data listings having items generating a match with the requested data item are identified and data indicative of a network location corresponding to the or each matched data item are retrieved. In addition data indicative of an amount of data and a resource allocation associated with the set of data accessible via the network location are retrieved and these data, together with a network subscription associated with device and the amount of data, are used to evaluate actual usage of network resources when accessing the set of data. If data are subsequently requested from the network location the evaluated actual usage is offset against the resource allocation so as to identify an amount of usage of network resources to be charged to the network subscription, and a record associated with said data listing is updated so as to log said resource allocation event. | 11-20-2008 |
20080287114 | Adaptive Resource Handling for Radio Link Reconfigurations - The present invention relates to a method and arrangement in a radio base station ( | 11-20-2008 |
20080293395 | USING DOWNLOADABLE SPECIFICATIONS TO RENDER A USER INTERFACE ON A MOBILE DEVICE - A representation is rendered on the user interface of a mobile device using a presentation specification and a behavior specification. The presentation specification defines styles, and the behavior specification defines interactions. Each specification can be used to set corresponding rules and libraries for rendering the user interface. The mobile device can communicate with one or more cellular radio networks and render the user interface using at least one new presentation and behavior specification downloaded and corresponding to a new cellular radio network. | 11-27-2008 |
20080293396 | Integrating Mobile Device Based Communication Session Recordings - Mobile device based communication sessions are recorded and communicated via a receiver to a session data manager. The session data manager processes received representations of the communication sessions in response to metadata generated on the mobile device. In some embodiments, the session data manager is coupled to a data store that indexes the representations. A server identifies and forwards a stored representation in response to a request from a requester with appropriate access privileges. | 11-27-2008 |
20080299959 | MANAGEMENT OF MOBILE DEVICE COMMUNICATION SESSIONS TO REDUCE USER DISTRACTION - Systems, methods and interfaces are disclosed for managing communications associated with a mobile communication device. Mobile communication devices process environmental inputs and transmit mobile communication device context information to a communication management system. The context information may, for example, reflect the motion and/or geographic location of the mobile device, and may reflect the risk associated with using the device to handle a call or other communications session. The communication management system uses the context information, optionally in combination with communication device profiles, to determine how to manage incoming and/or ongoing calls or other communication sessions. Mobile device users may also be inhibited from initiating communication sessions. | 12-04-2008 |
20080299960 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MESSAGE TRANSMISSIONS ON A MOBILE DEVICE - A system and method for managing message transmissions. The messaging system includes at least one messaging application capable of transmitting messages; and a message transmission manager coupled to the at least one messaging application. The message transmission manager is configured to allow a user to select one or more transmission criteria for a first message that is to be transmitted using at least one of the at least one messaging application; determine whether the transmission criteria has been achieved; and cause the first message to be transmitted upon determining that the transmission criteria has been achieved. | 12-04-2008 |
20080305784 | Method for Configuring a Mobile Terminal, Configurable Mobile Terminal and Mobile Radio Network Therefor - A method for configuring a mobile terminal wherein a basic configuration for use of the mobile terminal in differently organized communication networks is set up in the mobile terminal. The basic configuration for use of the mobile terminal in a particular communication network of the communication networks is modified by a change, for which purpose data for a configuration specific to the particular network is loaded into the mobile terminal. The change remains available during the use of the mobile terminal in the particular communication network. Correspondingly a suitable mobile terminal and a suitably embodied mobile radio network implement the method. | 12-11-2008 |
20080305785 | Information processing apparatus - According to one embodiment of the invention, there is provided an information processing apparatus including: an input acceptance unit configured to accept an input of an incoming call condition for causing another information processing apparatus connected to the information processing apparatus; a transmission unit configured to transmit information about the incoming call condition when a call is originated to another information processing apparatus; a determination unit configured to determine whether or not a line disconnection request for requesting disconnection of a line remaining connected to another information processing apparatus, until establishment of a connection to another information processing apparatus is completed; and a line disconnection unit configured to disconnect the line remaining connected to another information processing apparatus if the determination unit determines that the line disconnection request is acquired. | 12-11-2008 |
20080311897 | NETWORK CONTEXT BASED POLICY MANAGEMENT | 12-18-2008 |
20080318562 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR MONITORING THE CONTEXT ASSOCIATED WITH A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Systems, methods and interfaces are disclosed for managing communications associated with a mobile communication device. Mobile communication devices process environmental inputs and transmit mobile communication device context information to a communication management system. The context information may, for example, reflect the motion and/or geographic location of the mobile device, and may reflect the risk associated with using the device to handle a call or other communications session. The communication management system uses the context information, optionally in combination with communication device profiles, to determine how to manage incoming and/or ongoing calls or other communication sessions. Mobile device users may also be inhibited from initiating communication sessions. | 12-25-2008 |
20080318563 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USER PROFILING FROM GATHERING USER DATA THROUGH INTERACTION WITH A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A system, method, and wireless communication device that profiles a user thereof, or a user at a second wireless communication device in communication therewith. The wireless communication device gathers user data for a user thereof, or from a user at a second wireless communication device, and either directly generates, or has generated elsewhere, a user profile, such as a personality or psychological profile, or medical diagnosis of the user, and can display the user profile to the user and/or alter the wireless communication device functionality based upon the user profile. The gathered user data can be from physical user interaction with the wireless communication device, or from other equipment resident at the wireless communication device, such as a camera and medical diagnostic devices. | 12-25-2008 |
20090005025 | METHOD OF MAKING A USER INTERFACE APPLICATION COMPRISING A TEMPORARY INVERSION SEQUENCE - Method of executing an interactive user interface application between a terminal client ( | 01-01-2009 |
20090005026 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING TIMED EVENTS OF A PORTABLE COMPUTING DEVICE TO TRIGGER REMOTE CONTROL OF EXTERNAL DEVICES - One embodiment in accordance with the present invention includes using a portable computing device to remotely control devices and/or systems wirelessly. Specifically, a software timer application operating on the portable computing device enables its user to predefine the time, date, and the operation(s) that one or more properly enabled devices and/or systems perform in the future. That is, the timer software operating on the portable computing device is able at some predefined time to wirelessly trigger an action or a sequence of actions from devices and/or systems. For example, a user of the portable computing device is able to utilize the timer software to program a predefined date and time that the portable computing device will turn on a favorite radio program and turn up the thermostat. The wireless communication of the portable computing device may occur using a radio frequency (RF) technology like Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11, or HomeRF. | 01-01-2009 |
20090011751 | Electronic device and processing program thereof - In a cellular phone | 01-08-2009 |
20090011752 | Methods And Apparatus For Providing Restrictions On Long Distance Calls From A Wireless Communication Device - Methods and apparatus for providing restrictions on long distance calls from wireless communication devices. The wireless devices are preferably combined voice and data communication devices. In one illustrative example, each wireless device receives and stores long distance call restriction information which is pushed from a private computer network through the wireless network. During typical operation, a wireless device determines whether call attempts from the wireless device are restricted by the long distance call restriction information. If a call attempt is restricted by the long distance call restriction information, the wireless device restricts the call attempt from the wireless device and provides for a call restriction alert indication (e.g. an alert tone or visual text). If a call attempt is not restricted by the long distance call restriction information, the wireless device allows the call attempt from the wireless device. Advantageously, control over long distance calls may be established on a per-user basis in the private home network. | 01-08-2009 |
20090017809 | SUPPORT SERVICE ARCHITECTURE FOR A MOBILE VIRTUAL NETWORK OPERATOR - A system and method for implementing content or services customized for a branded company via a choice of data platforms of the brand company's choosing and independent of the wireless data infrastructure offered by the wireless network provider are disclosed. A control module receives a request for content or services from a branded company through an input interface, such as a wireless network interface, a third-party system interface or a brand system interface. The control module is adapted to communicate with a data platform services adapter which associates an external system, such as a third-party system or a data platform, with the branded company providing the request. The data platform services adapter transmits the received request to the associated external system using an output interface which adapted to communicate with the control module. | 01-15-2009 |
20090017810 | METHOD TO SUSTAIN TCP CONNECTION - The present invention relates to network communication systems for managing client/server connections in a wireless environment. In accordance with the invention, a mobile communication unit (i.e., client), deploys keepalive packets at selected times in order to reset a keepidle timer of a server (e.g., host computer). By periodically resetting the keepidle timer a current connection between the mobile communication unit and server can be maintained as long as desired even when the mobile communication unit is in a power suspend mode. When in a power suspend mode, the mobile communication unit can briefly awake long enough to activate its transmitter and send a keepalive packet to the server to maintain the current connection. In this manner, the mobile communication unit can obtain the power savings of being in primarily a power suspend mode, but still prevent the current connection from timing out. | 01-15-2009 |
20090017811 | EVALUATION OF SPATIAL RULES OVER A MOBILE POPULATION - Spatial rules involve locations of entities, such as wireless devices, from a mobile population. When evaluating rules in a communication network, attributes of an entity are determined, where one of the attributes comprises location of the entity. Rules are evaluated to produce one or more results, each of the rules operating on the attributes of the entity. Specified actions for the rules are performed, based on the evaluation of the rules. At least one of the specified actions comprises communicating a result to an application. The communication network may have a portion that is wireless. An attribute of the entity can include subscriber information and an entity generally corresponds to a particular subscriber in the communication network, but the entity may also correspond to multiple subscribers. An entity may be a wireless device, which can subscribe to a network. Rules can apply to particular geographical regions, to particular subscribers, to both, or to additional criteria. | 01-15-2009 |
20090023431 | Systems and Methods for Communicating with a Network Switch - Systems and methods for communicating with a network device are provided. In this regard, a representative system, among others, includes a network switch associated with a telecommunications device; and a wireless interface device that wirelessly communicates with the network switch, the wireless interface device being configured to obtain information associated with the network switch and display at least a portion of the information obtained on a display device. A representative method, among others, for communicating with a network switch includes establishing a wireless link between the network switch and a wireless interface device; obtaining information associated with the network switch by the wireless interface device via the wireless link; and displaying at least a portion of the information obtained on a display device of the wireless interface device. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023432 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TAGGING DATA WITH CONTEXT DATA TAGS IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may be utilized to generate and/or maintain multimedia data files. Context data tags may be created to tag the generated multimedia data files, enabling identification of multimedia data files without directly accessing the contents of the multimedia data files. Context data tags may comprise such attributes as time/date stamps, location, subject, environment, scheduling, and/or biometric information. The WMC device may maintain user preference information, which is unique to the WMC device capabilities and/or to a specific device user. The user preference information may be utilized to specify attributes that may be utilized in creating context data tags for multimedia data files. The user preference information may be maintained in the WMC device and/or externally. Tagging operation may be performed dynamically, and a remote device may be utilized to perform tagging operations and/or to maintain the user preference information. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023433 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING AND MODIFYING USER PREFERENCE INFORMATION TO CREATE CONTEXT DATA TAGS IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A Wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may be utilized to generate and/or maintain multimedia data files. Context data tags may be utilized to tag the generated multimedia data files to enable convenient identification of multimedia data files. Context data tags may comprise time/date stamps, subject, and/or location attribute. User preference information that is unique to the WMC device and/or a specific device user may be utilized to create context data tags for multimedia data files. The user preference information may be modified and/or updated. Modifications and/or updates of user preference information may be based on post-processing operations, biometric information, and/or self-learning techniques that may comprise operations performed on the multimedia data files. Post-processing operations may be performed on multimedia data files in the WMC device and/or a remote device. Tagged multimedia data files may be re-tagged based on modification to user preference information and/or post-processing operations. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023434 | Jurisdiction based parameter setting for wireless transceivers - Low cost semiconductor manufacturing techniques have provided consumers with a wide range of electronic devices supporting communications according to multiple standards. These electronic devices will be deployed within many operational jurisdictions, particularly with roaming features, such as Japan, Europe, Asia-Pacific, South America and North America. However, operational compliance requirements can vary substantially with these different jurisdictions. Current electronic devices are designed, manufactured, calibrated and operated according to a specification providing compliance with broad range of operational jurisdictions despite the performance limitations this applies in many of the operational jurisdictions. Accordingly, there is provided a method of dynamically configuring the electronic device based upon a geographically based determination of the operational jurisdiction from global navigation systems data received by the electronic device. Based upon the determined operational jurisdiction, the operational parameters of a device's communication interfaces are adjusted for improving performance and efficiency of the device within these jurisdictions. | 01-22-2009 |
20090029691 | Base station initiated proximity service discovery and connection establishment - The normal roles of wireless stations and wireless access points in initiating the establishment of wireless connections may be reversed without the need for changes in the network interfaces for either the station or access point device. This capability may be used to allow wireless devices acting as access points, but on which service clients operate, to initiate the establishment of a connection with a station, on which a wireless service provider operates. Discovery of services between wireless devices can be provided prior to establishing a connection between the devices. A service client device providing access point functionality may broadcast an invitation for service advertisements and then receive service advertisements from relevant service providers acting as wireless stations. An information element may be included as part of periodically broadcast administrative messages to wirelessly convey an invitation for service advertisements. In response to a service advertisement, the access point may send to the wireless station an invitation to connect, prompting the wireless station to begin to establish a connection according to a wireless communication protocol. | 01-29-2009 |
20090029692 | Predictive computer network services provisioning for mobile users - A predictive network service provisioning method uses personal schedule information of a user [ | 01-29-2009 |
20090036108 | User terminal for performing a plurality of applications simultaneously - A user terminal for running a plurality of applications simultaneously is disclosed. In the method for running a plurality of applications simultaneously in accordance with the present invention, a first application is run in a foreground mode in accordance with an inputted first operation start command, and then the operation mode of the first application is switched to a background mode if a mode conversion command is inputted. Then, a second application in accordance with an inputted second operation start command can be run in the foreground mode. With the present invention, a plurality of applications can be run simultaneously in a separate operation mode, maximizing the convenience of the user. | 02-05-2009 |
20090036109 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, TRANSMISSION FUNCTION ADJUSTING METHOD AND TRANSMISSION FUNCTION CONTROL PROGRAM FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - To provide a wireless communication terminal enabling to reduce the load on a mobile communication network and saving upstream wireless resources. | 02-05-2009 |
20090036110 | Connecting apparatus, connecting method, and computer product - A large-screen display apparatus recognizes an ID (e.g., user telephone number information) from terminal information, and transmits a telephone connection request to an IC card portable terminal corresponding to the ID. The large-screen display apparatus also transmits an IP telephone connection request to a hotel reception system of a hotel selected by the user of the IC card portable terminal. The large-screen display apparatus connects the user and the hotel system through an IP telephone according to, for example, call control by a third party (3PCC: 3rd Party Call Control). | 02-05-2009 |
20090042551 | DYNAMIC MULTIMEDIA DATA CODING METHOD FOR CELL PHONES - A multimedia data coding method for cell phones is provided, wherein the multimedia data coding method comprises steps as follows: First multimedia data is captured by a first cell phone, and then a coding parameter is determined by selecting a coding mode. Subsequently the multimedia data is coded according to the coding mode and the coding parameter to output a signal. The signal is then transmitted to a second cell phone. | 02-12-2009 |
20090042552 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEPLOYING APPLICATION PROGRAMS - A communication system includes a development sector for registering a plurality of wireless devices, a business sector for controlling utilization of an application program and for receiving application data, a service sector for deploying the application program and for providing the application data to the business sector in accordance with communication with at least one wireless device of the plurality; and a mobile sector comprising the plurality of wireless devices, each device for receiving the application program deployed by the service sector, executing the application program in response to the business sector, and communicating with the service sector to support provision of the application data to the business sector. The wireless device, such as a cell phone, personal digital assistant, or palm top computer may include an auxiliary device such as a bar code scanner, a magnetic stripe card reader, or a printer. The business sector or service sector may monitor or limit utilization of the auxiliary device. Deployment of application programs may be controlled by the business sector or the development sector by rendering an application program or auxiliary device available for use only after a particular time or after receipt of a message. Distributed processing application programs having components in the business, service, and mobile sectors may thereby be updated in an orderly manner. An application program on a wireless device may assist confirmation of an order made by a buyer via a web site. The wireless device is expected to be operated by the buyer. Fraud reporting is accomplished by comparing data obtained by registration of the wireless device with data provided in the confirmation. | 02-12-2009 |
20090047940 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING IDLE SCREEN SERVICE - A method and apparatus for providing an idle screen service are disclosed. A mobile communication terminal receiving contents provided from at least one content provider server in a mobile communication system environment is also disclosed. The mobile communication terminal may include a content receiver module which receives contents provided through a mobile communication system by separating into layers, a handset operating system module which operates the terminal and runs an application and which has a user interface, and a content management application module which synthesizes the contents separated into layers received from the content receiver module into one idle screen layer and which provides it to the idle screen of the mobile communication terminal. According to at least one embodiment of the invention, several contents provided in a mobile communication system environment can be provided at once on a mobile communication terminal idle screen in an idle mode, to satisfy the demands of the user for DIY services and increase the content participation rate. | 02-19-2009 |
20090054045 | Device and Method for Warm Boot Persistence - A mobile device comprises a volatile memory and a processor. The volatile memory is partitioned into first and second storage spaces. The first storage space stores a first data while the second storage space stores a second data. The processor detects a value. The value indicates that the volatile memory is to be partitioned so that a driver for the volatile memory creates the first and second storage spaces. The second data is persisted during a warm reboot of the mobile device. | 02-26-2009 |
20090054046 | Method and apparatus for voice and internet programming of wireless device features - A system and method for use in remotely adjusting, activating, or reprogramming features of a wireless device by utilizing a web interface or portal, such as a computer connected by a network to a server, or by telephone access to an IVR menu on the server, is described. Upon recognition of the command, the server issues a short message service (SMS) message, GPRS message, Bluetooth transmission, WIFI transmission, JAVA, or other data signal, or other type of wireless instruction to the wireless device to modify the desired feature. Alternatively, the wireless device can be prompted by a predetermined caller ID number as a unique programming command to be implemented by the wireless device for adjustments to an operational feature. | 02-26-2009 |
20090054047 | Network Optimisation - There is disclosed an apparatus and method for configuring a set of network elements, comprising: selecting the set of network elements; determining a configuration parameter for each network element in the set; measuring a performance parameter dependent upon said configuration parameter for each selected network element; and selectively adjusting the configuration parameter of at least one network element in dependence on the measured performance parameter for said network elements in the set. | 02-26-2009 |
20090054048 | Apparatus and Method for Configuration of Telecommunication Terminals - An apparatus and a method for configuration of terminals, in which a service detection unit detects a service to be configured for that terminal, and a transmitting/receiving unit transmits/receives at least configuration data via a communication network. A control unit drives the transmitting/receiving unit such that configuration data associated with the detected service is loaded from a configuration server, with a configuration unit configuring the terminal for the detected service by means of the loaded configuration data. In this way, the configuration data that has been entered by a small number of users can be made available easily and at low cost to a multiplicity of other users. | 02-26-2009 |
20090054049 | Telematics system and method of communication - A telematics system and method is provided, wherein the telematics system includes a processor having a core, a cell in communication with the core, and an applications processor in communication with the mobile processor. The system further includes at least one communication channel in communication between the mobile processor and the applications processor, wherein the mobile processor and the applications processor communicate data over the at least one communication channel during normal operation of a telematics system, and the mobile processor and applications processor communicate data over the at least one communication channel when the telematics system is at least one of being developed and manufactured. | 02-26-2009 |
20090061837 | AUDIO FILE INTERFACE - Methods, systems, and computer-readable medium for providing an audio file interface. In one implementation, a method is provided. The method includes, while playing an audio file on a mobile device and displaying a current view in a user interface of the mobile device, receiving first user input requesting that an audio interface be displayed, and displaying the audio interface as an overlay in the user interface, where the audio interface includes information associated with the audio file. | 03-05-2009 |
20090061838 | MOBILE DEVICE WITH MULTIPLE OPERATING SYSTEMS AND METHOD FOR SHARING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MODULE BETWEEN OPERATING SYSTEMS THEREOF - A mobile device capable of running at least two operating systems (OS), and a method for sharing a wireless communication module between the operating systems are provided. A hardware controller is configured to communicate between the two operating systems. First, a first operating system encodes an instruction into a first uniform message and transmits the first uniform message to a second operating system, in which the wireless communication module is installed, through the hardware controller. Afterwards, the second operating system enables the wireless communication module to start receiving positioning data according to the first uniform message, encodes the data into a second uniform message, and sends the second uniform message back to the first operating system through the hardware controller. Finally, the first operating system decodes the second uniform message into positioning data. | 03-05-2009 |
20090069001 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMEI DETECTION AND ALERTING - A system and method for detecting and storing information regarding a mobile communications device within a mobile communications network. Initially, a first data record is received at a subscriber/device database comprising subscriber/device data. Next, a second data record is received at the subscriber/device database comprising additional subscriber/device data. A first data record of a subscriber may then be compared to a second data record of the same subscriber, and if the first data record is different from the second data record a service provider may be notified. | 03-12-2009 |
20090075639 | Device and method for preserving customized user settings when transitioning between mobile communication devices - There is disclosed a system, method, and computer readable medium for applying customized settings to a mobile communications device utilizing a removable storage media. The mobile communications device detects when a removable storage media has been operatively inserted. Next it is determined whether there is a customized settings file stored on the removable storage media. The customized settings file contains fields that define one or more characteristics relating to the mobile communications device's configuration. The customized settings in the customized settings file are then applied such that the mobile communications device is configured with the specific settings contained in the customized settings file. The customized settings file may also be stored at and retrieved from a remote location or received in a message using a mobile messaging service utilizing the RF module within the mobile communications device. | 03-19-2009 |
20090075640 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM TRIGGER SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communication trigger system and method are disclosed. A communications device ( | 03-19-2009 |
20090082000 | Communications system - A second software radio set requests a first software radio set to send a profile analysis result of the second software radio set. If it is stored in the first software radio set, the second software radio set composes an update application delivered from an update server using the profile analysis result received. If not, the second software radio set itself performs a profile analysis and composes the update application using a result of the profile analysis. The second software radio set sends the profile analysis result to the first software radio set and has it stored in the first software radio set. | 03-26-2009 |
20090082001 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING THE FUNCTION OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT - The present invention discloses a method for controlling functions of a mobile equipment. In the method, current location of a mobile equipment is compared with preconfigured location information associated with a function of the mobile equipment and the mobile equipment is controlled, according to a result of the comparing. The present invention may be implemented by an approach that the mobile equipment itself is in control or by an approach that a user identity module or a network is in control on the basis of the existing toolkit technology or over-the-air technology. The present invention also provides device solutions corresponding to the different approaches. With the present invention, an organization may set a restriction for the purpose of information security, while the employees of the organization may use high-end mobile equipments without changing the mobile equipments frequently. A mobile equipment may change its function status depending on different locations. | 03-26-2009 |
20090082002 | Apparatus and method for supporting cells with different characteristics in a broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus and method for supporting cells with different characteristics in a wireless communication system are provided. To operate for communications in a frame divided into a first part of a system common signal structure and a second part of a communication environment-dependent signal structure in a wireless communication system in which cells co-exist under different communication environments, a BS generates physical configuration information about a signal of the second part, transmits the physical configuration information about the signal of the second part in the first part, and conducts communications by processing signals transmitted and received in the second part according to the physical configuration information. | 03-26-2009 |
20090088142 | DEVICE MIGRATION - Personalization data such as settings and/or state is migrated across devices including mobile phones. Device personalizations are pushed to a cloud service or other mechanism for backup and subsequent transmission to other devices. The personalization data can later be employed to configure one or more other devices in the same manner as a first device. | 04-02-2009 |
20090088143 | MOBILE TERMINAL, METHOD OF DISPLAYING DATA THEREIN AND METHOD OF EDITING DATA THEREIN - A mobile terminal, method of displaying data therein and method of editing data therein are disclosed, by which an alignment sequence of data can be changed. The present invention includes a touchscreen displaying a first data and a second data thereon and a controller, if the second data is touched and dragged to the first data, the controller generating a single data file using the first and second data in a specific sequence based on a dragged position of the second data. | 04-02-2009 |
20090093241 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION SETUP - A method for communication setup including transmitting a first message including an indication of a list with a plurality of list elements, wherein each list element specifies a communication service or a communication application computer program; receiving the first message; selecting at least one of the list elements; and transmitting a second message comprising an indication specifying which list element has been selected. | 04-09-2009 |
20090093242 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACCOUNT SETUP FOR MOBILE DEVICES, SUCH AS AN E-MAIL ACCOUNT SETUP - A mobile communication device includes a display configured to provide a graphical user interface, a memory configured to store computer program instructions and a communication-setup database having setup information associated with each of a plurality of different communication account types, and a processor configured to execute the computer program instructions to provide a communication-setup client via the graphical user interface. The communication-setup client enables a user to perform an initial setup of a plurality of different communication account types on the mobile communication device, and subsequent easy access to the communication-setup database to provide access to a specific desired communications client within a limited amount of clicks or data entries. | 04-09-2009 |
20090093243 | RADIO LINK PARAMETER UPDATING METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio link (RL) parameter updating method of a high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) system in a mobile communication system is disclosed. According to a radio channel situation of a terminal, an RL parameter applied to transmission and reception of control information between the terminal and a base station is dynamically controlled. For this purpose, the RL parameter updating method includes: a step in which the base station determines whether to update an HSDPA related parameter and transmits the parameter update information to the RNC to trigger updating of the RL parameter; and a step in which the RNC updates the HSDPA related parameter and transmits it to the terminal. The parameter update information is delivered through an RL parameter update response message, and the RNC is a serving RNC. | 04-09-2009 |
20090093244 | COMMUNICATION SERVER, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PRODUCT - A communication system limits use of compressed dictionary content stored in a mobile communication terminal to only the mobile communication terminal. The mobile communication terminal transmits terminal identification information to a communication server. The communication server uses the received terminal identification information as a master key to encrypt compression parameters and transmits encrypted compression parameters to the mobile communication terminal. The mobile communication terminal decrypts the compression parameters encrypted using the terminal identification information and uses the decrypted compression parameters to decompress the compressed dictionary content. | 04-09-2009 |
20090104900 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus for controlling events, timing and operational characteristics of wireless communications devices. An exemplary wireless communications apparatus comprises a baseband processor, radio frequency (RF) generating circuitry, a programmable event controller, and a memory device. The RF generating circuitry and programmable event controller are integrated in the same integrated circuit. The memory device, which may also be embedded in the same integrated circuit as the event controller and RF generating circuitry, is configured to store a sequence of instructions the event controller executes in response to a baseband command. The memory device is also configured to store control parameter data, which the event controller retrieves and uses to enable, disable, select and deselect various devices on the integrated circuit and to set, adjust or modify the operational characteristics of the RF generating circuitry (e.g., band selection and tuning) and other circuitry (e.g., power control circuitry) of the communications apparatus. | 04-23-2009 |
20090111445 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK TRANSMISSION TIMING IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and corresponding system for controlling uplink timing in a communication network ( | 04-30-2009 |
20090111446 | CellPhone Answering System Without Button or Flip Event - A method and apparatus for operating a cellular telephone are provided. The method includes the steps of detecting a call, monitoring a sensor that detects performance of a predetermined act by a user and activating the cellular telephone to accept the detected call when the monitored sensor changes state in response to performance of the predetermined act. | 04-30-2009 |
20090111447 | Intelligent recipient list - Selecting at least one recipient to receive a communication, identifying and presenting a list of additional recipients to the user, the additional recipient list including contacts who have received messages in combination with the at least one selected recipient in the past, and allowing the user to select one or more of the additional recipients to receive the communication. | 04-30-2009 |
20090111448 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING WIDGET INTERACTION - Methods and systems for transmitting a widget as an interactive component of a broadcast service (e.g., mobile TV broadcast service) in a manner that does not require the widget provider or creator to know or understand the broadcast transmission protocol are described. A widget may be transmitted as a pseudo widget that includes temporary content source information to be replaced by a receiving device with valid content source data. Alternatively or additionally, a content item to be displayed in the widget may be identified by fragment association. That is, a content item may be represented by content and access fragments while a widget may be transmitted as an interactivity fragment. These fragments may be associated with one another such that a content fragment may be identified by inspecting an interactivity fragment and vice versa. | 04-30-2009 |
20090111449 | System apparatus and method for updating communication services - A system for updating communication services includes user equipment configured to communicate using a first communication service standard and a second communication service standard, a subscriber database, an application server, and a network device. The network device detects an update trigger corresponding to a user equipment, requests that the user equipment discontinue using the first communication service standard, and flags the user equipment as updated by communicating with the application server and the subscriber database. The network device also receives a communication from the user equipment and determines whether the communication corresponds to the first communication service standard or the second communication service standard. If the communication corresponds to the first communication service standard the network device communicates an error message to the user equipment. However, if the communication corresponds to a second communication service standard, the network device processes the communication. | 04-30-2009 |
20090111450 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SOFTWARE UPGRADING METHOD - A base station control portion | 04-30-2009 |
20090111451 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SOFTWARE UPGRADING METHOD - A base station control portion selects one or multiple signals in accordance with the state of radio waves from signals received through multiple communication paths. A wireless communication apparatus communicates with a wireless terminal and a wired communication network at multiple frequencies. In response to a request for software upgrading from a network management device, the wireless communication apparatus selects one frequency, controls the state of transmission waves of a wireless interface such that a communication path in which a communication service is being provided can be switched to another communication network without interruption, rewrites software for each wireless interface to software received through a wired interface in advance, and returns the state of transmission waves of the wireless interface. Thus, the software can be upgraded without blackouts of the communication service to the wireless terminal. | 04-30-2009 |
20090117888 | WIRELESS DEVICE HAVING CONFIGURABLE MODES - A wireless device having user defined configurable modes includes a memory have at least one configuration segment containing configuration information relating to at least one application or mode. The user enters the user defined configuration that causes a control processor to configure the wireless device based on the configuration information. | 05-07-2009 |
20090117889 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR HANDLING SOFTWARE OPERATIONS ASSOCIATED WITH STARTUP AND SHUTDOWN OF HANDHELD DEVICES - Systems and methods for improving software operations on startup. A system and method can provide for the storage of volatile memory contents of an application upon shutdown of a mobile device, and restoration of the contents upon startup. | 05-07-2009 |
20090124243 | Methods, Apparatuses, Computer Program Products, And Systems For Providing Proximity/Location-Based Ringing Tones - An apparatus for providing a proximity or location-based ringing tone may include a processor. The processor may be configured to receive an indication of a communication between a sender device and a recipient device along with location data indicating a location of the sender device, identify ringing tone settings based upon the location data, and announcing receipt of the indication of communication in accordance with the identified ring settings. Corresponding methods, systems, and computer program products are also provided. | 05-14-2009 |
20090124244 | METHOD FOR BOOTING UP A MOBILE PHONE QUICKLY AND THE MOBILE PHONE THEREOF - A method for booting up a mobile phone quickly is disclosed. The method includes the steps of: driving hardware devices when the mobile phone is turned on; initializing application software installed in the mobile phone; loading data in the mobile phone from a storage to a memory; creating a table for each kind of data in the memory, and ordering data in each table according to a particular order condition; converting each table into a binary file, and storing the binary file in the storage; loading the binary file of each table directly from the storage to the memory when the mobile phone is turned on. A related quickly booting mobile phone is also disclosed. | 05-14-2009 |
20090124245 | SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATES IN LTE - A method and apparatus for receiving system information updates includes a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) receiving a system frame number. The WTRU also receives system information messages in a modification period. The modification period has a boundary determined by the system frame number. The WTRU receives system information change notification after a first modification change boundary and determines that the system information is valid until a second modification change boundary. | 05-14-2009 |
20090124246 | USER EQUIPMENT, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIMULTANEOUS SESSION CONTROL - A user equipment (UE), method and system for processing session based communications, are discussed. According to an embodiment, the method includes receiving a message from a terminal that informs whether the terminal supports simultaneous PT (push-to) sessions; recognizing that the terminal supports simultaneous PT sessions according to the received message; and transporting data to one or more terminals through the server operating in B2BUA (Back-to-Back User Agent) mode, wherein a simultaneous PT session refers to a session where the server performs a PT session priority function or a PT session locking function. | 05-14-2009 |
20090131027 | METHOD FOR MULTICODE TRANSMISSION BY A SUBSCRIBER STATION - In a radio communications system, several codes for transmitting messages are assigned to a subscriber station. A transmission power differential is determined between the total maximum transmission power of the subscriber station for the codes and the total transmission power of the subscriber station for the codes at the beginning of a message transmission, (the differential being respected by the subscriber station), by a first one of the codes. | 05-21-2009 |
20090131028 | Method and Apparatus for Synchronizing Contacts Stored on Smart Card With Contacts Stored in an Internal Memory - A mobile handset includes a processor configured with software to automatically synchronize the phone book records stored on a smart card and internally in memory. The synchronization process determines if duplicate contact records exist in the target phone book, and whether the synchronization copies records from the smart card to internal memory, or vice versa, before copying contact records. If a duplicate contact record exists, then the copying process is cancelled. The synchronization process may be automatically initiated any time the contact records in the internal memory and the smart card differ. | 05-21-2009 |
20090131029 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR CALL TERMINATION PROCESSING BY A FEMTOCELL SYSTEM - A system, method, and computer readable medium for terminating a call in a network system are provided. A femtocell system receives a notification to terminate a call that includes a user equipment serviced by the femtocell system. The femtocell system conveys a clear command to a base transceiver station of the femtocell system, transmits a release message to the user equipment, receives a clear completion message, and deletes a connection allocated for the call. | 05-21-2009 |
20090131030 | SCHEDULE MANAGING APPARATUS AND METHOD IN MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal including a broadcast receiver configured to receive broadcast program information related to available broadcast programs, a memory configured to store user-schedule information and the received broadcast program information, and a controller configured to update the stored user-schedule information to include a broadcast schedule corresponding to a broadcast program selected from the available broadcast programs included in the broadcast program information. | 05-21-2009 |
20090131031 | VIRTUAL TERMINAL SERVER, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - In order to provide a new service even to a conventional mobile communication terminal without installing a new function when starting a new mobile communication service, a mobile communication terminal includes a virtual terminal server that controls the communication on behalf of the mobile communication terminal according to a request from the mobile communication terminal to realize a service function that is a communication function not included in the mobile communication terminal. The virtual terminal server processes, in accordance with the model information of the mobile communication function, information to be informed to the mobile communication terminal to realize the service function to thereby enable the mobile communication terminal to acquire and transmit information obtained by realizing the service function. | 05-21-2009 |
20090131032 | TERMINAL AND METHOD OF SETTING SERVICE FOR DATA COMMUNICATION THEREIN - A terminal including a wireless communication unit configured to perform data communication with at least one other terminal, a display configured to display a screen for selecting a communication application for executing the data communication and a screen for selectively selecting a communication quality of service corresponding to the communication application, and a controller configured to apply the selected communication quality of service to the communication application for executing the data communication. | 05-21-2009 |
20090131033 | Method of protecting AT commands - A method of protecting AT commands during the interaction between the AT command module of a mobile terminal and the serial communication unit of an external device, comprising the steps of: receiving AT command from the serial communication unit to the AT command module at an initial state; putting the AT command module into an ID verification mode, wherein the AT command module receives a username and password from the serial communication unit in turn, and verifies said received username and password; and putting the AT command module into an AT command processing state, when the ID verification is successful. Therefore, it's impossible for an illegal user to take the control of the mobile terminal through AT command. | 05-21-2009 |
20090131034 | AUTOMATIC USER AVAILABILITY STATUS DETERMINATION FOR A HANDHELD COMMUNICATION DEVICE - To automatically determine the availability status of the user of a handheld communication device, various selected conditions of the device may be checked, which imply whether or not the user is likely Available, or Unavailable or the equivalent. Normally, the selected conditions are checked only if the user has not explicitly or semi-explicitly set his or her status to Unavailable. The conditions to be checked can vary widely, but generally include anything from which it might be inferred or implied that the user is likely either Available or Unavailable or the equivalent. Such conditions can include, for example, whether or not a specified timeout for use of a keypad, trackwheel or other mechanical feature of the device has elapsed yet; whether or not a real-time application is in use; and preferably any one or more of a variety of other conditions, one further example being whether or not there are any unattended-to notifications such as an unanswered phone call, or a missed e-mail, SMS or other message. | 05-21-2009 |
20090137235 | METHOD FOR SETTING DATA TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for setting data transmission parameters of a first communication connection comprising determining information about data transmission parameters of at least one established second communication connection and setting the data transmission parameters of the first communication connection taking into account the information about the data transmission parameters of the at least one second communication connection. | 05-28-2009 |
20090137236 | PORTABLE APPARATUS, METHOD AND USER INTERFACE - A method for handling a plurality of processes running on a portable apparatus including: receiving a first user input and in response to the first user input suspending a subset of the plurality of processes. Corresponding portable apparatus, computer program product and user interface are also presented. | 05-28-2009 |
20090143054 | Apparatus and method for automatic adjustment of ring volume based on perceived volume of digital audio playback - A system and method are for adjusting ringtone volume on a telephony device based on a current user-selected volume level used for digital audio playback. For example, a method according to one embodiment of the invention is implemented within a telephony apparatus having digital audio playback and ringtone playback capabilities, the method comprising: decoding and playing digital audio content in response to user input; monitoring the playback of the digital audio content to determine a first volume level associated with the digital audio content; receiving an incoming telephone call on the telephony apparatus; adjusting a second volume level associated with a currently-selected ringtone based on the value of the first volume level; and playing the currently-selected ringtone at the adjusted second volume level. | 06-04-2009 |
20090143055 | Mobile Application and Content Provisioning using Web Services Technology - A method for provisioning one or more mobile applications. The method including deploying the mobile application as a web service in a UDDI directory, downloading the mobile applications from the UDDI directory by invoking the web service. The method may also include locating the mobile application in the UDDI directory. The method further includes extending a WSDL template to define the mobile application, wherein the extending provides for wrapping the mobile application as the web service, and publishing the WSDL defined mobile application in the UDDI directory. | 06-04-2009 |
20090143056 | MODIFYING MOBILE DEVICE OPERATION USING PROXIMITY RELATIONSHIPS - Described is a technology by which a mobile computing device such as a mobile telephone operates differently based on detected proximity to another mobile device with which the first mobile device has a defined relationship. For example, the first mobile device may transfer content to the second mobile computing device when proximity corresponds to a non-cellular communications coupling, such as Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi coupling. In this manner, content transfer is deferred until a non-cellular coupling exists. The mobile device (or both devices) may output a notification to indicate that the other mobile computing device has been detected within a threshold proximity, such as via GPS data or by being within the same cellular tower. The type and/or settings of an output notification may vary based on different thresholds. | 06-04-2009 |
20090143057 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTINCTIVE ALERT ACTIVATION - An approach is provided activating a distinctive alert in a mobile station. An input from a user is received for generating an alert on a mobile station. In response to the input, a control signal is generated to activate the alert on the mobile station irrespective of any pre-existing alert setting of the mobile station. | 06-04-2009 |
20090143058 | TELEPHONE WITH DYNAMICALLY PROGRAMMABLE PUSH BUTTONS FOR ACCESS TO ADVANCED APPLICATIONS - A device and method for providing simple access to subscriber selected applications that reside in a telephone network. A programmable communication device that includes programmable push buttons operable for providing a user one button access to voice based and text based applications. A storage register is associated with each of the programmable push button and is operable for storing a directory number, such as a telephone number and a server address. The communication device includes a unique programming permission code for security purposes, such as restricting the use/reprogramming of the push buttons. A method of programming device push buttons including entering the programming permission code and selected advanced application information into the device. The method of programming may be done remotely or manually using various provisioning techniques. | 06-04-2009 |
20090149168 | System and method for disabling text message functionality - A system and method for disabling text message functionality is provided. The method includes, for example, determining the velocity of the text messaging capable device, comparing the velocity to a specified threshold value, disabling the text messaging functionality of the device if the velocity of the device exceeds the specified threshold, comparing the velocity of the text message enabled device after a specified time delay and enabling the text message functionality of the device if the velocity does not exceed the specified threshold. | 06-11-2009 |
20090156189 | Configuration of Networked Devices via mobile stations - A method is proposed for configuring a wireless enabled device using a mobile station that is adapted to communicate with a core network portion of a mobile communications network. The mobile station is also arranged to support communication via a wireless interface and the device is capable of communicating via this wireless interface. The method includes the steps of: establishing communication with a support center via the mobile communications network core network portion; receiving a message containing configuration data for the device from the call center; establishing an unlicensed radio link with the device; and transmitting the configuration data to the device via said unlicensed wireless link. By using the mobile phone or other mobile communications device as an interface for configuration data, the end user is relieved of all further interactions and requires no specific knowledge or experience to achieve the configuration and installation of the device. | 06-18-2009 |
20090156190 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DELIVERING CUSTOMIZED INFORMATION TO A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE BASED ON USER AFFILIATIONS - A method and system for customizing a mobile application running on a mobile communication device of a user. In one implementation, the method includes providing the mobile application to the mobile communication device of the user, the mobile application having a generic platform; determining a special interest group (SIG) that is affiliated with the user; and customizing the generic platform of the mobile application based on information specific to the special interest group (SIG) that is affiliated with the user. | 06-18-2009 |
20090156191 | COMPUTING DEVICE WITH CONFIGURABLE ANTENNA - A computing device with a configurable antenna. The antenna is configured through a switching circuit operating under software control. Operating characteristics of the antenna are configured based on connections between conducting segments established by the switching circuit, allowing the nominal frequency, bandwidth or other characteristics of the antenna to be configured. Because the switching is software controlled, the configurable antenna may be integrated with a software defined radio. The radio and antenna can be reconfigured to support communication according to different wireless technologies at different times or to interleave packets according to different wireless technologies to support concurrent sessions using different wireless technologies. | 06-18-2009 |
20090163193 | Method and Apparatus for Launching Activities - A handheld electronic device having a microprocessor housed within a body including a display area and a contact-sensitive area is disclosed. The contact-sensitive area detects contact engagement therewith and produces instruction data based thereupon. A microprocessor-run software program receives instruction data from the contact-sensitive area. The contact-sensitive area has a home zone area and a plurality of activity launch zone areas. The software program is programmed to process the instruction data and determine sweeping contact motion detected on the contact-sensitive area originating at the home zone area and terminating at one of the plurality of activity launch zone areas. The program responsively launches an operator-instructed activity corresponding to the activity launch zone area at which the sweeping contact motion terminated. | 06-25-2009 |
20090163194 | Telematics Unit Having Interactive Radio Features - The present invention provides a method for implementing interactive radio features within a telematics equipped mobile vehicle. The method includes receiving radio station information, detecting an initiation command received from a user interlace, and providing the radio station information to the telematics unit responsive to the detected initiation command. The radio station information may include a radio station message having a telephone number associated with a radio station advertiser. The method may further include receiving a communication command, and initiating a wireless communication via the telematics unit responsive to the received communication command. | 06-25-2009 |
20090170490 | BINDING CACHE SUPPORT IN A LOAD BALANCED SYSPLEX - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, system and computer program product for Mobile IPv6 binding cache support for a load balanced sysplex. In one embodiment of the invention, a load balancing sysplex can be configured for mobile device binding cache support. The sysplex can include a distributor coupled to different targets in a load balancing arrangement, where each of the targets can support a correspondent node enabled to communicate with a mobile device. A master binding cache can be coupled to the distributor and a binding cache manager can be coupled to the distributor. Notably, the binding cache manager can perform return routability with the mobile device and can provide a corresponding entry in the master binding cache for use by a target supporting a correspondent node for the mobile device. In one aspect of the embodiment, a replica of the master binding cache can be provided in each of the targets for use by supported correspondent nodes in communicating with different mobile devices associated with binding cache entries in the replica. | 07-02-2009 |
20090170491 | MDN Switching Between Telematics Devices - Aspects of the present invention provide for a telematics subscriber and provider to facilitate a wireless carrier to associate a cellular telephone number from a subscriber's previous telematics unit to a subscriber's newly purchased telematics unit. In addition, the telematics provider reconfigures a new telematics device in a newly purchased vehicle to retain the same cellular phone number as the subscriber's previous telematics device. | 07-02-2009 |
20090170492 | User-programmed automated communications - A communications device may be programmed to initiate a communications operation when a particular condition is met. The user may set any suitable condition, including for example a date and time, location, event, received or sent communications operation, or any other suitable criteria. The user may select any suitable contact method for the communications operation, including for example telephone, voicemail, email, text message, chatting, fax, or any other suitable method. | 07-02-2009 |
20090170493 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A MOBILE PHONE DEVICE - A method and apparatus for controlling operation of a communication device is provided. In one embodiment, a mobile phone device includes: a communication section configured to perform radio communication; an operation section including number keys and a call-initiating key; and a control section configured to activate, on the basis of an operation that is performed using the operation section, a call-initiating program or a non-call-initiating program, and depending on what operations are performed by a user using the operation section of the mobile phone device, determining whether to interrupt a currently activated program to initiate a predetermined call with increased ease of use and convenience to the user. | 07-02-2009 |
20090170494 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVISIONING SERVICE FLOWS IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS COMMUNICATION - Disclosed is a system and a method for provisioning service flows in broadband wireless access communication. In a broadband wireless access communication system, if a base station receives a registration request message from a mobile station, and if the base station inserts information about service flows to be provisioned by a base station into a registration response message and transmits the registration response message to the mobile station after the registration request message is received, the mobile station determines if the mobile station transits into a normal operation mode corresponding to the information and exactly recognizes a time point at which the mobile station goes into the normal operation mode. | 07-02-2009 |
20090191854 | AUTOMATIC DEVICE MODE SWITCHING - Techniques are described for automatic device mode switching. In an implementation an electronic device provides a variety of functionality through multiple modes of the electronic device. The electronic device may be configured to toggle between modes when inserted into or removed from a corresponding mounting device. In an implementation, one operational mode may be automatically activated upon insertion of the electronic device into the mounting device. Another operational mode may be automatically activated when the electronic device is removed from the mounting device. In another implementation, multiple modes of an electronic device may be associated with multiple orientations of the device. An orientation detector may provide signals indicative of orientation, which when detected causes automatic activation of an associated operational mode. | 07-30-2009 |
20090191855 | CALL TO ACTION LOCKOUT SYSTEM AND METHOD - A Call-To-Action Lockout on a mobile device coupled to a data network is disclosed as a method and apparatus comprising providing a media application configured to respond to a control point associated with media content, providing media content which has at least one associated control point, triggering at least one control point while experiencing the media content; and performing an appropriate Call To Action Script (CTAS) in response to the triggered control point. | 07-30-2009 |
20090191856 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STORING ACTIVATION DATA IN A CELLULAR TELEPHONE - A method and apparatus for programming a cellular telephone with activation parameters. A cellular telephone to be programmed is connected to a computer via a communications interface. A user input device is provided to allow a user to provide programming information, including a cellular telephone type, to the computer. A visual representation of the cellular telephone type is displayed on a display monitor to allow the user to interactively verify the inputted programming information. Upon such user verification, the computer determines activation parameters and transmits the activation parameters to the cellular telephone. In accordance with another aspect of the invention, certain activation parameters are dynamically computed based on the user provided programming information. In one embodiment, the user enters a cellular telephone number to be assigned to the cellular telephone. The computer looks up a system identification associated with the cellular telephone number in a memory unit. Certain activation parameters are dynamically computed based on the cellular telephone number and system identification. | 07-30-2009 |
20090197584 | Controlling Portable Digital Devices - A system for controlling usage of a portage digital device ( | 08-06-2009 |
20090197585 | Quality of Service for Grouped Cellular Devices - Embodiments described herein provide for improving quality of service in a cellular network. A group of cellular devices is identified. Quality of service mechanisms are identified. A quality of service plan for coordinating an execution of quality of service mechanisms by the group is determined. The quality of service mechanisms are applied to the group of cellular devices in accordance with the quality of service plan. | 08-06-2009 |
20090203368 | AUTOMATED RECORDING OF VIRTUAL DEVICE INTERFACE - The present invention provides a means for automated interaction with a Mobile Device to create a graph of the menu system, Mobile Applications, and Mobile Services available on the Mobile Device. The information recorded in the graph can then be played back interactively at a later time. In order to build a graph in this automated fashion, the physical Mobile Device is integrated with a Recording/Control Environment. This environment has a Device Interface, which has the ability to control the user interface of the Mobile Device and record the resulting video and audio data from the Device. An automation Crawler uses the Device Interface to navigate the Mobile Device to unmapped states. A State Listener monitors the data coming to and from the Mobile Device and resolves it to a single state, saving new states to the graph as needed. | 08-13-2009 |
20090203369 | APPOINTMENT APPLICATION FOR USE IN ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT - A method, device and computer program for coordinating a communication session between an individual and a user of a portable communication device. A portable communication device is provided having an appointment application program stored in memory. The appointment application program includes a queue indicative of a plurality of contacts that are required to contact an associated user of the portable communication device during a predetermined period from an authorized contact number. When the user of the portable communication device | 08-13-2009 |
20090203370 | Mobile Device Peer Volume Polling - A system for performing peer volume polling is presented. A request is transmitted to peer mobile devices using a polling function in a mobile device. The polling function requests audible operation level setting data from peer mobile devices within a predetermined distance of the mobile device. A map is computed of the peer mobile devices, along with their associated audible operation level settings, based on responses to the request. The map and audible operation level settings are analyzed using rules to detect an inappropriate volume setting for the mobile device. In response to determining that a current audible operation level setting for the mobile device is inappropriate, a new audible operation level setting is applied to the mobile device. | 08-13-2009 |
20090203371 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING NUMBER AND OPENING ACCOUNT FOR PREPAID SUBSCRIBER - A system, device and method for selecting numbers and opening accounts for prepaid subscribers are disclosed. The system includes at least one device for selecting numbers and opening accounts for prepaid subscribers and at least one terminal for selecting numbers and opening accounts for prepaid subscribers. The technical solution of the present invention separates the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) from the Mobile Station International Integrated Services Digital Network Number (MSISDN); a prepaid subscriber selects a number and opens an account through a terminal and device for selecting numbers and opening accounts; the device for selecting numbers and opening accounts opens an account for the subscriber only after the subscriber selects an MSISDN, and registers the subscriber data with the relevant network entities, thus reducing occupation of equipment resources and costs of network operation and improving equipment performance. | 08-13-2009 |
20090209243 | Message Filter Program For A Communication Device - A communication device is configured to receive messages. The communication device may comprise a display screen upon which messages are displayed. A microprocessor configured to execute at least one message management program on the communication device, filters incoming messages. The message management program comprising a message filter application filters received messages based on a comparison of sender identification data associated with a received message to approved sender identification data. | 08-20-2009 |
20090209244 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SINGLE-STEP ENABLEMENT OF TELEPHONY FUNCTIONALITY FOR A PORTABLE COMPUTER SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for automatic delivery of a phone call on an electronic device regardless of whether other tasks are running on the operating system. A separate background task (“thread”), independent of the operating system, enables telephony functionality without regard to the mode of a graphical user interface. The background task is always active and functions to respond to an incoming call even if the user is in a graphical user interface window that requires some input from the user (e.g. the graphical user interface is blocked). | 08-20-2009 |
20090215438 | METHODS FOR PERFORMING TRANSPARENT CALLBACK - A method for facilitating wireless communication of a client device with a destination telecommunication device is provided. The method includes receiving a first telecommunication signal from the client device by a server managed by an enterprise. The method also includes analyzing the first telecommunication signal to determine if a less expensive telecommunication option is available. The method further includes, the server sending a callback signal to the client device if the less expensive telecommunication option is available. The method yet also includes accepting the callback signal via a non-human initiated response by the client device, thereby establishing a telecommunication connection between the client device and the server. The method yet further includes sending a second telecommunication signal by the server to the destination telecommunication device. The method in addition includes establishing a telecommunication session between the client device and the destination telecommunication device when the second telecommunication signal is accepted. | 08-27-2009 |
20090215439 | TECHNIQUES TO MANAGE AUDIO SETTINGS - Techniques to manage audio settings are described. For example, a mobile computing device may comprise an audio management module to receive information from a sensor and automatically adjust at least one audio setting based on the information. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 08-27-2009 |
20090221275 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION TRIGGERED BY MOTION - Numerals crossed out in abstract and typographical error corrected. A method and system for establishing a connection or service between two mobile devices within a communication network is provided. At least one of the mobile devices includes a motion detector, which detects a movement of the mobile device. Connections between the mobile devices are established based upon the detection of movement of at least one of the devices. | 09-03-2009 |
20090221276 | USER INTERFACE FOR CUSTOM RECORDABLE RING TONES - An electronic device and a method implemented within the electronic device for displaying a user interface window on the electronic device for associating an audible notification with a specific event; activating a record function from the user interface window for recording an audio file; and saving the audio file as the audible notification associated with the specific event. | 09-03-2009 |
20090221277 | DISCONNECTION TECHNIQUES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - An apparatus includes a host, and a communications control module. The communications control module exchanges information with a communications network, such as a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) network. The host determines whether a termination condition exists. Based on this determination, the communications control module performs a signaling connection release indication procedure when a termination condition exists. | 09-03-2009 |
20090221278 | Method for Customizing the Operation of a Telephonic Terminal - A method serves for customizing the operation of a telephonic terminal, in particular a mobile telephonic terminal of a user. A profile file is provided for storing information relating to operation parameters of the telephonic terminal. The information stored in the profile file can be modifiable by the user. Additionally, a policy file is provided for storing information relating to the possibility to modify one or more of the operation parameters by the user. Typically, a profile manager software module manages the profile file and a policy manager software module manages the policy file. When a user attempts to carry out modifications on information stored in the profile file, the profile managing module interacts with the policy managing module in order to check the possibility to carry out the modifications and to get the authorisation or the denial from the policy managing module. | 09-03-2009 |
20090221279 | Medthod And Apparatus For Controlling Use Of Mobile Phone While Operating Motor Vehicle - A method and apparatus for controlling use of mobile communication device while operating a vehicle, wherein the mobile communication device (MS) uses one or more ways to determine its speed while moving in order to alter the default behavior of the device based on a stored safety policy. Using existing technologies such as Global Positioning System (GPS), Assisted GPS (AGPS), Location-Based Services (LBS), Global System for Mobile (GSM), Code Division for Multiple Access (CDMA), or an accelerometer, a MS determines the current or last known state of motion to modify the behavior of the MS based on its speed and a stored safety policy. The human interface of the MS is altered to inform the user of the modification, features and functions can be disabled and enabled, the user is prompted to change their behavior, and automatic functions take place. The logging functions of the MS can be enhanced to record the motion state of the MS while using any feature of the MS. | 09-03-2009 |
20090221280 | PERSONALIZATION SYSTEM AND METHODS - The systems and methods of the present invention project media content associated with a user to devices of a group of the user's friends. Such devices may be web-enabled and/or cellular telephones. The user's information and a list of friends are received from a user via a network and stored in a database. The user information is distributed to the friends' phone. Media content may also be distributed. The media content may include an image, a video, an avatar, or a ring tone. The media content may be stored on a friend's phone so that the media content is played when that phone receives an incoming call from the user. The invention allows users to set the way they will be identified on their friends' phones, even if they don't have that particular media content. Accordingly, a cellular telephone or other web-enabled device can be further personalized. | 09-03-2009 |
20090233589 | IDENTIFYING THE LOCATION OF MOBILE STATIONS - A user of a first mobile station, which is lost either in silent mode or switch-off mode may send a ‘Find-Me’ message to the first mobile station from a second mobile station. The first mobile station, after receiving the ‘Find-Me’ message, may power-on the first mobile station enabling the first mobile station to receive voice call and messages. Also, if the first mobile station is in silent mode, the first mobile station may change the profile of the first mobile station from a silent to a regular-noisy mode. The user of first mobile station may call-up the first mobile station and identifies the location of the first mobile station by tracking the ringing sound. The first mobile station may send a location message to the second mobile station in response to receiving the ‘Find-Me’ message that may be used to identify the location of the first mobile station. | 09-17-2009 |
20090233590 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR CONTROLLING RECEIVERS - Methods and devices for controlling receivers are disclosed. An exemplary method comprises detecting a first event at a device, and in response to the first event, broadcasting a first central signal including a control command, wherein the central signal is transmitted using a frequency modulated signal. | 09-17-2009 |
20090233591 | DATA SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD BETWEEN MOBILE TERMINAL AND SERVER - The present invention relates to a method of data uplink synchronization between a mobile terminal and a server. The server modifies the stored address book data one item by one item. The present invention also relates to a method of data downlink synchronization between a mobile terminal and a server. Before the server sends address book data to the mobile terminal requesting the downlink synchronization, it performs item-by-item adaptation of the address book data according to the item's attribute and parameter supported by the mobile terminal. The present invention relates to another method of data downlink synchronization between a mobile terminal and a server. The mobile terminal, according to the received address book data, modifies the stored address book one item by one item. The present invention implements the operation on each item in the address book, the adaptation to the item's attribute and parameter of the address book according to the specific situation of the mobile terminal, and the mapping to each item according to the meaning of the attribute and parameter so as to effectively avoid information loss caused by inconsistent attributes and parameters and the operations on the record. | 09-17-2009 |
20090239516 | Method of transferring data, computer programme for switching a mobile communication unit, and primary and secondary data converter - The present invention provides a method of transferring data from a primary data converter ( | 09-24-2009 |
20090239517 | MOBILE TELEPHONE HAVING CHARACTER INPUTTING FUNCTION - A mobile telephone having character inputting function, having a display and a plurality of button for inputting characters is disclosed. A first pressing of one button among the plurality of button for inputting characters and a second pressing or releasing of the same one button are done for determining a character. A plurality of character is assigned to each one of the plurality of button for inputting characters. The input from each one of the plurality of button for inputting characters is determined among said plurality of character/string assigned to the same button, according to a time period between the first pressing and the next second pressing or releasing of the same button. After the first pressing, said plurality of character/string that consists of candidates for the input is newly displayed on the display, wherein a candidate character that will be inputted if the second pressing or releasing was done at that point of time is made visually distinguishable from other candidate. | 09-24-2009 |
20090239518 | MANAGING CONTEXTUAL INFORMATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Contextual information for wireless communications is managed in terms of management objects (MO) using device management (DM) protocol. Contextual information management is performed by determining a need to change from an old configuration to a new configuration, retrieving profile information necessary to make a decision about the new configuration, and making a decision about the new configuration based upon the retrieved profile information. The new configuration may include information about access technology and changes in one or more defined profiles. | 09-24-2009 |
20090247137 | POTENTIAL CALL DROP INDICATOR - Mobile device user notifications of highly likely call drops or service losses are provided. A wireless network can determine from the location history of a mobile device if that mobile device is likely to lose connectivity to the wireless network or to a particular wireless service and issue an alert to the user. The form of the alert can be through one of various types of mobile device messages, or through an application on the mobile device. The mobile device's location can be determined using the global positioning system. Alternative directions can be provided to the user so that the user can travel without losing connectivity. The user may provide a destination before beginning travel, and receive a suggested course of travel that keeps the user within a higher quality coverage area. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247138 | OVER THE AIR PROGRAMMING VIA CELLULAR BROADCAST - In a communications system, one or more mobile devices may be programmed through the use of an assigned channel of a logical channel. For example, a broadcast control channel (BCCH) transmission may be received by one or more mobile devices, the transmission comprising a set of instructions to program the mobile devices. The BCCH transmission may be used to program certain mobile devices, such as a type or brand of device, or mobile devices having certain features, such as call waiting. The mobile device may be configured to accept a transmission, such as a packet in a GPRS network, on one channel while rejecting a transmission on other channels. Further, the mobile device may be reconfigured to accept additional channel transmissions or reject currently approved channel transmissions. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247139 | SYSTEM FOR ADAPTING ONLINE ADVERTISING CAMPAIGNS TO INCORPORATE MOBILE ADVERTISING - A system is described for adapting online advertising campaigns to incorporate mobile advertising. The system may include a processor, a memory and an interface being operatively connected. The memory may store ad groups of an advertiser, and mobile advertisements. An ad group may include keywords and web advertisements. The interface may allow the advertiser to associate the ad groups with mobile carriers. The processor may identify the ad groups and may provide the interface to the advertiser. The processor may receive associations of ad groups and mobile carriers. The processor may create mobile advertisements based on the web advertisements and mobile carriers. The processor may associate the mobile advertisements and the mobile carriers with the ad groups. The processor may provide one of the mobile advertisements to a user when the user performs a mobile search for one of the keywords on a mobile device associated with the mobile carriers. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247140 | SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING MOBILE ADVERTISEMENT ACTIONS - A system for providing mobile advertisement actions may include a memory to store a request, mobile carrier data, mobile advertisement data, and mobile advertisement action data. The system may include an interface operatively connected to the memory to communicate with a mobile device. The system may include a processor operatively connected to the memory and the interface. The processor may receive information and a request from the mobile device via the interface and may determine the mobile carrier data relating to a mobile carrier associated with the mobile device. The processor may identify the mobile advertisement data and the mobile advertisement action targeted to the request and the mobile carrier data. The processor may append the mobile advertisement action data to the mobile advertisement data. The processor may provide the mobile advertisement data with the appended mobile advertisement action data to the mobile device via the interface. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247141 | MOVING OF A NODE - A system and a method for moving a node within a real time communications network, where said node is at least connected to a first controller node and the node is disconnected and moved from the first controller node to a second controller node, where the system comprises a macro adapted to handle moving of the node and the method uses the same macro. According to the present invention the macro will delete data in the a first controller node, thereafter generate new data adapted to a second controller node by reusing data associated with said node, and where the node is assigned a identity associated with the second controller node. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247142 | INFORMATION COMMUNICATION PROCESSING DEVICE, INFORMATION COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, INFORMATION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, FUNCTION SWITCHING METHOD AND FUNCTION SWITCHING PROGRAM - Provided is the information communication processing device capable of executing terminal function switching control in linkage with an external communication content on one information communication processing device based on the external communication content without a problem in switching. The information communication processing device has at least one information processing device having a plurality of function environments for executing an application, and a switching control unit for switching a function environment, in which the switching control unit determines a function environment to be switched based on contents of communication with the outside of the information communication processing device and sets context of the function environment to be switched at context of a function environment being executed, thereby executing switching to the function environment to be switched. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247143 | MOBILE PHONE, AND METHOD OF LIMITING OPERATIONS OF MOBILE PHONE - The present invention provides a mobile phone which is capable of giving a high priority to communication with a party that corresponds to a particular phone number, and which is capable of allowing the settings of whether or not the priority function is to be enabled to be easily made. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247144 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MODIFYING SYSTEM FEATURES THEREOF - An exemplary communication apparatus includes at least one system feature. The communication apparatus includes a storage device, a motion sensor, and a controller. The storage device stores a plurality of system parameters for the at least one system feature. The motion sensor detects a movement of the communication apparatus and generates motion data in response to the movement. The controller receives the motion data and the system parameters. The controller selects a system parameter based on the motion data, and modify the at least one selected feature according to the selected parameter. | 10-01-2009 |
20090253421 | LOCAL NETWORK MANAGEMENT OF FEMTOCELLS - A system and method of minimizing signal interference within a wireless network is provided, wherein the wireless network includes a controller communicatively coupled to at least one femtocell, and the femtocell is operative to wirelessly transmit and receive data. A portable electronic device is used to collect signal environment data, and the collected signal environment data is analyzed. Based on the analyzed signal environment data, the at least one femtocell is commanded to alter at least one signal transmission characteristic. | 10-08-2009 |
20090253422 | METHOD FOR READING DYNAMIC SYSTEM INFORMATION BLOCKS - In a wireless mobile communications system, a method of controlling or updating system information included in system information blocks (SIBs). The mobile communication system allows the network (i.e., RNC) to trigger the terminal (i.e., UE) to apply new timer values and information values independently of whether the UE has read the timer and/or values of the SIBs based on a previous timer values. | 10-08-2009 |
20090258638 | MOBILE TERMINAL USING VARIABLE MENU ICONS - A method for controlling a mobile terminal includes setting a variable menu icon to represent different functions for first and second operating modes, displaying a plurality of menu icons including the variable menu icon during the first operating mode, and switching the variable menu icon from a function different from a previous function of the variable menu icon during the first operating mode when the mobile terminal changes from the first operating mode to the second operating mode. The other menu icons may be controlled to maintain previous functions that they assumed during the first operating mode after the function of the variable menu icon is switched. | 10-15-2009 |
20090264115 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ASSIGNING WIRELESS SPECIAL NUMBER CALL ROUTING AMONG CALL ANSWERING POSITIONS - A method for assigning special number wireless call routing responsibilities among special number call answering positions, each respective special number call answering position having a respective designated special number service area, includes: (a) in no particular order: (1) establishing a plurality of cell sector areas for wireless call service; and (2) establishing respective special number service areas in the vicinities of the plurality of cell sector areas; (b) associating respective cell sector areas with the respective special number service areas to establish cell sector-special number areas; (c) establishing at least one population area in the vicinity of the cell sector-special number areas; (d) associating the cell sector-special number areas with the at least one population area to establish cell sector-special number-population areas; (e) determining portions of population attributed to each respective cell sector-special number-population area; and (f) assigning the responsibilities in proportion with the portions of population. | 10-22-2009 |
20090264116 | COMMUNICATION DELIVERY FILTER FOR MOBILE DEVICE - Messages received by a mobile device can be processed in one of at least two modes. In the normal mode, the messages are handled in accordance with the normal settings of the mobile device. In the filtered mode, or “night-time” mode, incoming messages are examined to determine if they are to be filtered or if they are exempt from filtering. If a message is exempt from filtering, it is processed in accordance with the normal mode. However, if the message is to be filtered, the mobile device is prevented from providing normal message reception alert notifications. Messages can be identified as being exempt to being filtered by editing an address book or selecting entries from an address book. All messages not identified as exempt then get filtered. | 10-22-2009 |
20090264117 | METHOD FOR HANDLING INCOMING CALL IN SCREEN LOCK STATE, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND RECORDING MEDIUM THEREOF - A method for handling an incoming call in a screen lock state, a communication device and a recording medium thereof are provided. In the present method, when a communication device in a screen lock state receives an incoming call, the communication device exits the screen lock state and displays an incoming call frame. Then, the incoming call is handled according to an input instruction. After the completion of a handling of the incoming call, an idle time of the communication device that receives no operation is counted. When the idle time reaches a predefined value, the communication device returns to the screen lock state. As a result, a user may conveniently inspect and handle the incoming call even if the communication device is in the screen lock state. | 10-22-2009 |
20090270083 | Communication device intervention system and method - A method of and system for intervening between a wireless communication device and a base station. A receiver is used to scan for transmissions from multiple surrounding base stations. The absolute field strength of all received transmission is measured and the information transmitted by the base stations is recorded. Then the transmission power level of a transmitter is set to have an absolute field strength greater than the highest measured absolute field strength detected from a corresponding base station. When an interface signal from a wireless communication device is received, the corresponding information is transmitted to the wireless communication device to thereafter control the wireless communication device by establishing a communication channel between the wireless communication device and the receiver and transmitter instead of between the wireless communication device and a surrounding base station to prevent use of the wireless communication device proximate the receiver and transmitter. | 10-29-2009 |
20090270084 | HANDHELD ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND SAVING NUMBER METHOD AND DIGITAL STORAGE MEDIA - A method for saving number applied to a handheld electronic device is provided. The method has the following steps. An entered number is shown on a screen of the handheld electronic device. Whether the entered number is one of saved numbers is determined. If the entered number is not corresponding to one of the saved numbers, a save button is shown on the screen, and the entered number is saved after the save button is triggered. | 10-29-2009 |
20090275318 | Method and apparatus for transferring data between mobile telephones and other digital devices - The method and apparatus of the present invention provide a means for users to transfer the data contents of a cell phone memory to a PC. The apparatus of the present invention comprises a low complexity digital device having two I/O (Input/Output) connectors, one for the user's cell phone and one for connecting to the PC. Central to the apparatus of the present invention is an Inter-device Data Transfer Processor (IDTP) which contains the necessary hardware and software to automatically move the data contents of a cell phone memory to a PC using a two step process. | 11-05-2009 |
20090275319 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BASE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TELEPHONE CALL CONNECTING METHOD - A wireless communication terminal apparatus, a wireless communication base station apparatus, a wireless communication system and a telephone call connecting method wherein the message size in a telephone call connection can be reduced. A broadcast information producing part ( | 11-05-2009 |
20090275320 | MEASURING END USER ACTIVITY OF SOFTWARE ON A MOBILE OR DISCONNECTED DEVICE - A hardware and/or software facility measures end user activity associated with a software application or service on a mobile phone or other mobile device. The facility tracks and stores usage data associated with a mobile user's use of the application or service. When the mobile user initiates transmission of the usage data, the facility retrieves from the mobile phone or other mobile device a usage code representing the usage data. The facility relies on user transcription, text input-buffer insertion, or other indirect means of data transport to deliver the usage code from the mobile phone or other mobile device to an application developer, service provider, or another entity. The recipient extracts the usage data contained in the usage code, and may perform various data mining and analysis techniques on the usage data in order to evaluate how the application or service is used. | 11-05-2009 |
20090275321 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VIRTUAL BLOCKING OF NON-VOCAL MESSAGING SERVICES - A blocking system and a method for virtual blocking of SMS/MMS/EMS protocols based on vehicular and handset conditions are disclosed. One aspect of the invention is to virtually block the non-voice related messaging on a handset by disabling the display and keyboard. In one embodiment, a blocking module is installed on the handset and when conditions are met, the blocking module will disable the display and keyboard of the handset. Several parameters are monitored for determining whether the driver is engaged in driving the vehicle or is parked. Furthermore, the method and the blocking system are adapted to disable virtual blocking in times of emergency. | 11-05-2009 |
20090275322 | PREVENTION OF AUDIO POP IN A DIGITAL AUDIO DEVICE - An electronic audio device with a digital audio output channel in which an amplifier output voltage is gradually ramped up and down to avoid causing a popping sound when the device is turned on and off. This is accomplished without employing any additional hardware, by incrementally changing a digital input word applied to a digital audio source, such as a DSP, so as to gradually change the amplifier output voltage between a minimum, such as zero volts, and a DC working voltage. On powering up, the amplifier is only turned on after the digital word is applied, but while it still results in a minimum amplifier output, and on powering down the amplifier is turned off after it's output has been ramped down, but before removing the digital input word. Sources and output channels can also be switched over by powering down, and then powering up, following the same method. | 11-05-2009 |
20090280788 | Method, device or computer program for enabling communication from a remote party to a user of a device while the user participates in an active application at the device - A method, a device and a computer program for enabling communication from a remote party to a user of a communications device while the user participates in an active application at the communications device, including receiving at the communications device data relating to a communication from the remote party; and displaying at least a portion of the received data as an integral part of the active application while the user participates in the active application. | 11-12-2009 |
20090280789 | TELEPHONE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING TELEPHONE - In a telephone having a presence function, it is possible to easily register a presence state. The telephone includes: presence detection means for detecting a presence state of a user; a presence state storage unit for storing the presence state detected by the presence detection means; and control means having a presence modification function for modifying the presence information stored in the presence state storage unit according to the user presence state detected by the presence detection means. When the presence detection means has detected a presence of a user, the control means modifies the presence information stored in the presence state storage unit to presence information indicating a presence. When the presence detection means has detected an absence of the user, the control means modifies the presence information stored in the presence state storage unit to presence information indicating an absence. The control means registers the presence information stored in the presence state storage unit in a presence server. | 11-12-2009 |
20090280790 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING COMMUNICATION SERVICE BLOCKING MODE IN MOBILE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for setting a flight mode in a mobile terminal are provided in which menu items are displayed such that executable functions may be distinguished from non-executable functions. | 11-12-2009 |
20090280791 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING COMMUNICATION RECORDS OF A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for monitoring communication records of a communication device is disclosed. The method generates the communication records of the communication device, and sends the communication records to a controller according to preset data, such as basic information of the monitor and a monitoring mode. A system for monitoring communication records of a communication device is also provided. By utilizing the method and the system, the communication records of the communication device may be monitored by someone needs to control/manage/track the communication device. | 11-12-2009 |
20090280792 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING A MOBILE CONTENT PLAYER TO INTERFACE WITH MULTIPLE CONTENT SERVERS - A system and method is provided for a wireless device for adding a content server as a content source for the wireless device in a push content delivery system having a plurality of content servers configurable for delivering push content to the wireless device. The process operable on the wireless device comprises receiving an invitation from the content server at the wireless device; determining if a mobile content player is to be installed on the wireless device; determining if the invitation is accepted; sending wireless device data to the content server from the wireless device if the invitation is accepted, where the wireless device data is for configuring the content server to push content to the wireless device; and retrieving and installing the mobile content player on the wireless device if the mobile content server is to be installed. | 11-12-2009 |
20090280793 | Method Of Controlling A Communications Device - A method of enabling at least one function of a telephone to be controlled is provided. The telephone is operative to perform the function in response to a command from a computer system. The method includes the steps of: (a) providing a control interface containing information relating to the function, the control interface including coded data indicative of at least one operation relating to the command; (b) receiving, in the computer system and from the sensing device, indicating data regarding the operation and movement data regarding movement of the sensing device relative to the control interface, the sensing device, when moved relative to the control interface, generating the indicating data using at least some of the coded data and generating the movement data; and (c) effecting, in the computer system and from the indicating data and the movement data, the at least one operation. | 11-12-2009 |
20090286523 | COMMUNICATIONS METHOD BETWEEN A COMBINATIONAL TERMINAL AND MULTIMEDIA TERMINAL - Communication method between a first terminal and a second terminal on a communications network includes establishing a first connection between the terminals, the first connection being of a first media type at the first terminal and of a multimedia type at the second terminal; establishing a second connection between a repository apparatus and the second terminal, the second connection being coupled to the first connection and being of a second media type at the repository apparatus different from the first media type; said multimedia type including the first and the second media types; disabling the second connection after a request for a third connection between the terminals, the third connection being of the second media type at the first terminal; and establishing the third connection, the first and third connections forming a combinational session at the first terminal and a multimedia type connection at the second terminal. | 11-19-2009 |
20090286524 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACTIVATING AN APPLICATION ON A MOBILE DEVICE - A system for running an application on a mobile device may include a mobile device having an application associated with a service provider, a computing device in communication with the mobile device and a computer readable storage medium in communication with the computing device. The computer readable storage medium may have one or more programming instructions for determining an inactive time associated with the mobile device, determining whether the inactive time is equal to or greater than a threshold value and in response to the inactive time being equal to or greater than the threshold value, sending a message to the mobile device. The inactive time may represent a length of a period of inactivity associated with the mobile device, and the message may include one or more instructions to activate the application. | 11-19-2009 |
20090291676 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SPIN-HOME FUNCTION FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method and an apparatus for providing a spin-home function for a mobile communication terminal having a key input module, a microprocessor, a program memory, a data storage module, and an LCD display module so that applications are circulated and displayed on an idle screen. The method includes steps of (a) designating at least one application as a spin-home; (b) running a spin-home program stored in the program memory; (c) circulating next application designated as the spin-home and displaying the application on the LCD display module every time the user operates a second key button for circulating the idle screen; and (d) setting an application currently displayed on the LCD display module as the idle screen when the user operates a confirmation key button. | 11-26-2009 |
20090291677 | Media Content for a Mobile Media Device - Various embodiments enable a user of a mobile media device to select one or more channels to load onto the device. Each channel comprises a collection of media content files, such as video content, audio content, and so on. Each collection of media content files can be associated with a particular genre (or genres) of media content. A channel can be managed such that its collection of media content can be rearranged, augmented, and/or otherwise edited to produce a refreshed version of the channel. A user's interaction with content within a channel can be monitored to produce behavior data about the user. The behavior data can be used to customize the playback of a particular channel to reflect user preferences. The behavior data can also be used to produce channels that are custom tuned for the user and can be used to produce a customized version of a mobile media device. | 11-26-2009 |
20090291678 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal and a method of controlling a mobile terminal are provided. The method includes assigning at least a first function and a second function to each of one or more variable function keys and performing a first function assigned to a selected one of the variable function keys when the mobile terminal is in a first operating mode and performing a second function assigned to the selected one of the variable function keys when the mobile terminal is in a second operating mode, while maintaining the functions of non-variable function keys. | 11-26-2009 |
20090298488 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A FEATURE OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION UNIT - A system for controlling at least one feature of at least one mobile communication unit includes: At least one sensor unit coupled with the at least one mobile communication unit. The at least one sensor unit senses at least one parameter associated with the at least one mobile communication unit. Each respective sensor unit of the at least one sensor unit presents a respective indicator relating to a respective sensed parameter of the at least one parameter. The system also includes at least one feature management system coupled with the at least one sensor unit. The at least one feature management system receives a representation of each respective indicator. The at least one feature management system employs the representation in cooperation with the at least one mobile communication unit to effect the controlling. | 12-03-2009 |
20090298489 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A CONVERGED NETWORK-BASED ADDRESS BOOK - A converged address book system having a converged address book (CAB) client for managing contact information, the CAB client including: an interface for interacting with a CAB server; and a synchronization interface for communicating with a synchronization module for interacting with a data synchronization enabler for synchronization between the CAB client and CAB server; the interface allowing the CAB client to manage contact information by making requests to and receiving responses from the CAB server. The CAB server including an interface for interacting with a CAB client; a data synchronization manager for synchronizing information between at least one CAB user device and the CAB server; a data synchronization interface for synchronizing data with the CAB client; a subscription manager for managing CAB subscription and authorization information; a document management interface for communicating with a CAB XMDS; and an XDMC for accessing and manipulate CAB data stored in the XDMS. | 12-03-2009 |
20090305684 | Long-Term Evolution (LTE) Policy Control and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) Selection - The PCRF Selection Function selects the PCRF for an IP-CAN session. In embodiments, the PCRF Selection Function is located in the HSS and/or the 3GPP AAA server. The PCRF Selection Function is only required to be located in the HSS if a Bearer Binding and Event Reporting Function (BBERF) is deployed in the serving gateway. In this case, the PCRF selection takes place at the time that the PDN Gateway is selected and returned by the HSS to the serving gateway over the HSS to MME interface (S6a). | 12-10-2009 |
20090305685 | TERMINAL DEVICE, CONTENT DISPLAYING METHOD, AND CONTENT DISPLAYING PROGRAM - A terminal device capable of displaying content, comprising a content data analyzing means for analyzing content data; a data extracting means for extracting data satisfying a predetermined condition among the content data, based on the analyzed result; a location information associating means for associating to each of the extracted data, corresponding location information in the content obtained as the analyzed result; a display element generating means for generating each of the associated extracted data as selectable display element; a rendering means for rendering the generated display element and for displaying in a mode in which the display element is displayed; and a selecting means for selecting the rendered display element. When a certain display element is selected, the rendering means renders the content data so that the display element appears on a screen, and switches representation to a normal mode in which the content data is to be displayed originally, based on the location information associated with the display element. | 12-10-2009 |
20090305686 | MOBILE UNIT, CALL ORIGINATION CONTROLLING METHOD, AND CALL TERMINATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A mobile unit | 12-10-2009 |
20090312000 | ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIVE MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE OPERATION - A parameter of a mobile telephone operation, such as type of ringtone and/or ringtone volume, is changed upon determination that the mobile telephone is within an enclosed container or environment such as a briefcase, a purse, a pocket, or the like. Near field communication technology is utilized to detect proximity of the telephone within the enclosure. The parameter of the mobile telephone also may be changed upon determination that the telephone is in a noisy environment such as crowded room or stadium. | 12-17-2009 |
20090312001 | Providing subscriber identity for cell traffic trace in E-UTRAN - Embodiments of the invention include methods, apparatuses, systems and computer programs related to providing a cell traffic trace functionality in E-UTRAN. A cell trace activation message is received, a cell traffic trace session is then started for a cell, and call set up is started. A trace recording session is started and, simultaneously, a unique identifier is generated for the recording session. A trace notification may then be sent to a core network or mobility management entity. The trace notification may include a trace recording session reference which comprises the unique identifier for the recording session. The IMSI and/or IMEI may also be determined for the call, and the trace recording session reference is forwarded to a trace collection entity. | 12-17-2009 |
20090318124 | MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT THROUGH AN OFFLOADING NETWORK - System(s) and method(s) are provided for management of content in a mobile device. Content can be firmware associated with mobile functionalities, or data a mobile can process. To effect a content update, a first network platform that serves a multimode mobile device through a first radio access network (RAN) can facilitate establishment of an end-to-end tunnel to the multimode through a second RAN associated with a second network platform; the first network platform can then push the content update to the multimode mobile through the second RAN. Typically the second RAN employs a distinct radiofrequency band than the first RAN; thus the content update is offloaded from traffic in the first wireless network. Content updates can be signaled through the first RAN and implemented upon end-to-end tunnel establishment to the first network platform through the second RAN. Moreover, said updates can be scheduled according to a network-configured subscriber update profile. | 12-24-2009 |
20090325562 | HYPERVISOR FOR MANAGING A DEVICE HAVING DISTINCT VIRTUAL PORTIONS - A single device can be compartmentalized into two or more virtual portions, wherein each virtual portion is associated with a user role. Each virtual portion can retain information, communications, resources, and/or functions separate from the other virtual portions. As a user changes roles, a different virtual portion can be accessed (automatically and/or manually) in order to maintain separation or confidentiality among the portions and associated roles. In such a manner, a user can utilize a single device for multiple roles. | 12-31-2009 |
20090325563 | METHODS FOR SUPPORTING MULTITASKING IN A MOBILE DEVICE - Methods are provided for effectively accessing and managing open applications on a mobile device. In response to an End key key-press event, an open application is terminated and another open application is promptly maximized. In an embodiment, another key may be pressed to access to an Applications Menu which indicates open applications. Open applications can be selected on the Applications Menu and selectively maximized or terminated. In an embodiment a key may be pressed to access an Open-Applications Menu which lists open applications. Open applications can be selected on the Open-Applications Menu and selectively maximized or terminated. | 12-31-2009 |
20090325564 | PROGRAMMABLE MOBILE PHONE TERMINAL - Mobile phone terminal, having a transmitter stage, a receiver stage and an antenna switch-over and adapter stage which each have an arrangement of passive structural elements, which arrangement is assigned a multiplicity of electrostatic-mechanical microswitches or microrelays and which can be programmed by actuating a predetermined configuration of the microswitches or microrelays in, in each case, at least one functional parameter, in particular the frequency characteristic, and a programmable control unit. | 12-31-2009 |
20100003972 | Advanced System And Method For Dynamically Discovering, Provisioning And Accessing Host Services On Wireless Data Communication Devices - A system and method for pushing a service book to a mobile device is provided. A service book includes a plurality of fields relating to a host service. At least one mobile device is identified that is to receive the service book. Wireless propagation information is provided that identifies an address for the mobile device to receive the service book. The service book is transmitted over a wireless network using the address for the mobile device, and is received by the mobile device. | 01-07-2010 |
20100009667 | MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE AND DATA TRANSFER CONTROL PROGRAM - There are obtained a mobile terminal device and a data transfer control program that, even in the case where a plurality of data that become a target of transfer exist, can simply carry out an operation to select data to be transferred from them and to start transfer itself without a mistake. An acceleration sensor | 01-14-2010 |
20100009668 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CUSTOMIZING FUNCTIONS OF A MOBILE PHONE - A system and method for customizing functions of a mobile phone provides different operation modes for different users of the mobile phone. The system and method further provides different function features under the different operation modes. | 01-14-2010 |
20100022231 | COLLABORATIVE COMPUTING FOR MOBILE DEVICES - Embodiments of the present disclosure include systems and methods for collaborative computing for mobile devices. The system includes methods for leveraging a mobile device and computing resources in a peer-to-peer network in a manner that does not require a central controlling entity, nor the transmission and/or downloading of computer-executable code (e.g., program applications) such that mobile device applications can defer the costly execution of said program applications to the collaborative computing resources in a peer-to-peer network where computing resources are cheaper and network bandwidth and connectivity is more reliable and less expensive in comparison to a mobile device. | 01-28-2010 |
20100022232 | Systems for Providing Wireless Account Feature Notifications to Mobile Communication Devices - Systems and methods for providing wireless account calling feature indications to a device are described. Feature indications are provided to inform a user of the device that an incoming call or outgoing call is eligible for an account calling feature based on whether the conditions for the calling feature to apply are currently met. The feature indications are provided to a display of the device and/or to a speaker of the device. | 01-28-2010 |
20100029260 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECOMMENDING A COMMUNICATION PARTY ACCORDING TO A USER CONTEXT USING A MOBILE STATION - An apparatus and method for recommending a communication party according to a user context in an MS, in which log information received and stored in the MS is retrieved, current context information about the MS is estimated using the log information, similarities of all communication parties stored in a phonebook of the MS are calculated, and communication parties are recommended by comparing the similarities. | 02-04-2010 |
20100035595 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC SOURCE DETERMINATION OF PROVISIONING INFORMATION ON A PER-NETWORK SERVICE BASIS FOR OPEN MARKET WIRELESS DEVICES - Systems, apparatus and methods are described that provide for dynamic source determination of provisioning information on a per-network service basis for open market wireless devices. Specifically, systems, apparatus and methods provide for the open market wireless devices and/or the users of such devices to acquire provisioning information for network services in instances in which neither the removable module currently associated with the device or the non-removable memory of the open market wireless device store the provisioning information for the desired network service. In this regard, present aspects provide for a prompt, such as a user notification to presented on an output mechanism of the wireless device when the wireless determines first that the provisioning information is not stored on the removable module and, secondly, that the provisioning information is not stored on the non-removable data storage of the device. | 02-11-2010 |
20100035596 | HANDHELD NAVIGATION UNIT WITH TELEPHONE CALL - A system, apparatus, and method for techniques to retrieve and process information from communication networks on a mobile computing device are described. The apparatus may include a first interface module to receive a query and to display results of said query. The results include location information of at least one entity associated with the query. The apparatus may include a second interface module to transfer the query to a data source server, receive the results from the data source server, and transfer the results to said first interface. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 02-11-2010 |
20100041382 | Unified Settings for Multiple Account Types - Account types that support one or more data classes (e.g., email, contacts, calendar, instant messaging) can be added and configured on a mobile device using a unified settings user interface. The user interface allows the user to easily activate and deactivate one or more data classes for an account type. The user interface can support one or more predefined account types and can allow the user to add and configure new account types. Visual indicators are provided in the user interface to remind the user of the data classes that are active on the mobile device for a particular account. Users can configure settings that effect a particular data class in all accounts on the mobile device. Users can also configure settings that are specific to a particular account. | 02-18-2010 |
20100041383 | Cellular phone use limitation method - A means of limiting the capability of a cellular telephone when said telephone is in motion is disclosed. | 02-18-2010 |
20100048192 | Cellular Device Management - A server device of a communication system provides a web interface to allow a user to modify user interface settings and contact information. The server device communicates the modified settings and contact information to the mobile communication device via a wireless communication network. Accordingly, the user can conveniently configure user interface settings, such as ring tones, alarm settings, or the like, via a web interface, rather than through a cumbersome interface at the mobile communication device. In addition, the user interface settings are communicated to the mobile communication device via the same wireless communication network that carries voice data. Thus, the user interface of the mobile communication device, as well as the stored contact information, can be updated without requiring the user to connect the device to a computer. | 02-25-2010 |
20100048193 | SECURE UPGRADE OF A MOBILE DEVICE WITH AN INDIVIDUAL UPGRADE SOFTWARE OVER THE AIR - The invention concerns a method for securely upgrading a mobile device with an individual upgrade software, the individual upgrade software remaining unusable by a mobile device as long as the individual upgrade software has not been activated. The method includes transmitting its unique identification number to the mobile device management apparatus; calculating a mobile device encryption identity and a management apparatus encryption identity; transmitting only the individual upgrade software and the calculated management apparatus encryption identity; the mobile device calculating an activation encryption identity and an activation decryption identity; comparing the calculated activation decryption identity to the activation encryption identity; and activating the individual upgrade software for use by the mobile device as a result of a positive comparison. | 02-25-2010 |
20100048194 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal equipped with first and second display modules provided at the front and the rear, respectively, and a method of controlling the mobile terminal, is provided. The method includes displaying a screen image related to a first operating mode on the first display module, if it is determined that the mobile terminal has been rotated on a predetermined axial direction, switching the mobile terminal from the first operating mode to a second operating mode; and displaying a screen image related to the second operating mode on the second display module. Therefore, it is possible to control various operations performed by the mobile terminal upon the motion of the mobile terminal using the first and second display modules. | 02-25-2010 |
20100048195 | METHOD AND SAVING ENTITY FOR SETTING SERVICE - A service setting method and a service setting saving entity are disclosed in order to solve the problem that it is impossible to perform distinctive settings according to the equipments in a scenario that one user has several equipments. The method includes the following steps: a service setting saving entity receives user setting information, a user identifier, user equipment (UE) setting information, and UE identifiers uploaded by user terminals (UTs) of the same user, and the service setting saving entity bindingly saves the user setting information and the user identifiers, and bindingly saves the UE identifier and the UE setting information of the same UT. Due to the corresponding binding saving, the equipments can be set distinctively. | 02-25-2010 |
20100056123 | INTER-SECTOR CONTROL CHANNEL TRANSMISSION - Provided is a more efficient manner of transmitting a control message to reach into a neighboring sector (e.g., inter-sector) of a wireless network environment. The control message can be utilized for purposes such as handoff, indicating an amount of interference, inter-sector power control for managing inter-sector interference, sector loading, or other control messages. The control message can be placed on a set of resources utilizing planned reuse and/or statistical reuse. Statistical reuse includes selecting a subcarrier set for carrying the control message. According to some aspects, the control message can be sent over a backhaul channel. | 03-04-2010 |
20100056124 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING MODE CHANGES TO WIRELESS DEVICES - A method of providing mode changes to wireless devices is provided. The method may include receiving a request from a wireless device to connect with a network device and sending a signal to the wireless device to enter a location defined mode. | 03-04-2010 |
20100056125 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE PROVIDING GAMING FUNCTIONS - A portable electronic device includes a keypad, a memory system, and an audio effect system. The memory system includes a video game application and an audio file associated with the video game application. The audio file includes a collection of trigger signals and a collection of notations where each trigger signal is associated with a corresponding notation. The audio effect system includes an audio player, a signal generator, and a control module. The signal generator is configured for generating a trigger signal in response to operation of the keypad. The control module is configured for reading a notation from the audio file, which corresponds to the generated trigger signal and instructing the audio player to play a corresponding music sound associated with the read notation. | 03-04-2010 |
20100056126 | Communication Method, Communication System, Communication Terminal Apparatus and Base Station Apparatus | 03-04-2010 |
20100056127 | System and Method for Application Layer Widgets for Mobile Devices - A communication system includes a wireless device and a computer server that is in communication with the wireless device. The computer server is adapted to receive at least one parameter associated with the wireless device and to select at least one widget that is optimized to be run on the wireless device. The widget is transmitted to the wireless device. A method of selecting a widget that is best suited for a mobile device platform is also disclosed. | 03-04-2010 |
20100056128 | AUDIO FILE EDIT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE TERMINAL - A file edit method and apparatus that allows editing and utilizing various audio files stored in the mobile terminal in an intuitive manner are provided. An audio file edit method for a mobile terminal includes executing an audio file edit application in response to a touch event detected on a touch screen, selecting at least one audio file to be edited by means of the audio file edit application in response to a touch event detected on the touch screen, displaying an oscillation graph representing the at least one audio file within an oscillation window, selecting a part of the oscillation graph in response to a touch event detected on the touch screen, and displaying the selected part of the oscillation graph within an edit window. | 03-04-2010 |
20100062752 | AREA-BASED POSITIONING METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A positioning method in a SUPL based position information (positioning) system, and particularly a positioning method capable of variously efficiently performing an area-based positioning (location tracking) performed by a location server or a mobile communications terminal when the location server and the mobile communications terminal respectively manage triggers generating the area-based positioning. | 03-11-2010 |
20100062753 | INTELLIGENT CONTACT MANAGEMENT - An intelligent contact management technique that automatically manages contacts on a communication device such as a mobile phone is described. The intelligent management technique can automatically determine and display a user's favorite contacts on a display of a mobile device. The technique can also intelligently group contacts based on their contact frequency. It can provide a contact-oriented event notification that notifies a user when a contact event has occurred. The contact-oriented event notification can be associated with a visual representation of an associated contact. | 03-11-2010 |
20100062754 | Cue-aware privacy filter for participants in persistent communications - A cue, for example a facial expression or hand gesture, is identified, and a device communication is filtered according to the cue. | 03-11-2010 |
20100062755 | Handling of Dynamic Neighbouring Cell Relations Using a TimeToLive Concept - The present invention relates to a network element such as a base station controller, for a cellular network comprising one or more cells being served by at least one transceiver for enabling communication sessions with a mobile cellular terminal. The element comprises communication means adapted for communicating with other network nodes. The element further comprises register software adapted for creating, configuring and/or removing information about the cell on which a communication session is running and its relationship to at least one neighbouring cell to which a running communication session can be transferred and resource management software adapted for managing the communication session between the transceiver and the terminal. The element is further characterized in that the register software is adapted for creating and/or configuring a counter value on each relationship to a neighbouring cell, which value limits the time or number of events the neighbouring cell can be part of so that when the counter value corresponds to a removal value the relationship is removed. | 03-11-2010 |
20100069053 | System and Method For Transactional Application Lifecycle Management For Mobile Devices - The present disclosure relates to networks and lifecycle transaction management of mobile devices. There is provided a system and method for managing the lifecycle of applications on mobile devices. The system has components for implementing a method comprising the steps of creating a transaction context comprising a transaction command, sending the transaction context in a transaction context message to a plurality of mobile devices, and evaluating an ending scenario based on transaction statuses of the plurality of mobile devices. | 03-18-2010 |
20100069054 | COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE HAVING A COMMUTE TIME FUNCTION AND METHODS OF USE THEREOF - Apparatuses and methods to operate a commute time function of a communications device are described herein. In one embodiment, the commute time function is automatically activated based on an event and is then performed by (i) determining an up-to-date commute time based on commute information and (ii) displaying or speaking the up-to-date commute time on the device. In one embodiment, triggered by and before the occurrence of a calendar event, a device obtains a current commute time (based on the commute information and based on current traffic conditions). In this embodiment, the device reschedules the calendar event based on the current commute time, by sending an update to the contacts with whom the user is to meet that indicates a change to the calendar event. Other embodiments are also described. | 03-18-2010 |
20100069055 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RESTRICTED ACCESS CONTACT INFORMATION DATUM - A method in a mobile communication device and a network for transmitting, receiving, and processing a user-accessible contact information data entry in a contact information storage medium ( | 03-18-2010 |
20100075648 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO LOCALIZE APPLICATIONS ON A MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICE - A method (and corresponding system and computer program product) for localizing applications on a computing device to the current device geographic location is described. In one embodiment, a method detects the location of the computing device, identifies an applicable location profile based on the device location, the applicable location profile containing a rule for localizing an application on the mobile computing device, and localizes the application based on the rule. In another embodiment, a method correlates multiple local times by determining a local time of the device location, adjusting an existing schedule based on the local time and user preference information, and generating a notification based on the adjusted schedule and the user preference information. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075649 | MOBILE DEVICE DYNAMIC BACKGROUND - A mobile device dynamic background is described. In embodiment(s), a mobile device includes selectable controls via which a selectable input can be received to initiate activation of an operational state of the mobile device. A background image that corresponds to the operational state of the mobile device can be determined, and a current display on the mobile device can be changed to display the background image that is determined to correspond to the operational state when the selectable input is received. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075650 | METHOD OF CHANGING STATUS OF INSTANT MESSAGE SOFTWARE - This invention provides a software status configuration method and a mobile communication device using the same. The mobile communication device has a real-time operation mode and a real-time usage status, respectively representing the status of the user and the usage of the mobile communication device. The mobile communication device further includes a network communication software for performing real-time communication with other contacts online. The network communication software has a user status for indicating whether the user is available for real-time communication. The software status configuration method of the present invention will configure the user status based on combinations of the current real-time operation mode and the real-time usage status. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075651 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Circuit Switched Domain Services Over a Packet Switched Network - A method of establishing a call to or from a mobile station (MS) operating in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) access network. An interface is established between the MS and a Packet Mobile Switching Center (PMSC), and the call is initiated after the network accepts a service request from the MS for an originating call, or after the MS is notified of a terminating call. The PMSC requests packet-switched domain resources from a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) and establishes a voice bearer channel with an endpoint in the network when the requested resources are available. The PMSC facilitates bidirectional voice traffic between the MS and the endpoint. The PMSC may also use the PCRF to modify the bearer. The PMSC then signals the MS to modify parameters for the established call. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075652 | Method, apparatus and system for enabling context aware notification in mobile devices - Mobile devices may utilize various sensors to gather context information pertaining to the user's surroundings. These devices may also include and/or access other types of information pertaining to the user, such as the user's calendar data. In one embodiment, mobile devices may utilize some or all the gathered information to determine the appropriate behavior of the mobile device, in conjunction with the user's preferences. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075653 | Dialed Digits Based Vocoder Assignment - A system and method for providing voice communications with desired characteristics based upon the intended recipient of a voice communication. An apparatus includes a list of dial strings associated with parties having desired voice communication characteristics. A dial string entered by a user and associated with an intended recipient is compared to a list of preferred dial strings to determine the characteristics of an encoded voice signal to be sent to the recipient. The apparatus can include a vocoder having different bit rate modes and a bit rate mode is selected based upon the dial string entered by a user. Dial strings can be stored at the device or on a network. The apparatus can include a mode selector to select a desired vocoder mode to generate an encoded voice signal. | 03-25-2010 |
20100081420 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND MOVING SPEED DETECTION METHOD FOR THE SAME - A mobile communication terminal and a moving speed detection method which are capable of detecting a moving speed with high accuracy are provided. A mobile communication terminal | 04-01-2010 |
20100087179 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING DISTRIBUTED ONLINE SERVICES - A device, system, and method is provided for running mobile applications, including a server for running applications and a client installed in a mobile device. The client may connect to the server via a network. The client may display content, receive user input, and send user input to the server. The server may use the client to receive user input and to display content for running applications for the mobile device. | 04-08-2010 |
20100087180 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A mobile telephone network ( | 04-08-2010 |
20100087181 | SERVER FOR SENDING NEW APPLICATION PORTIONS TO MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES AND RELATED METHODS - A communications system is to communicate with an application server storing a plurality of applications. The communications system includes a mobile wireless communications device configured to store at least one application from among the plurality of applications, the at least one application having stored version information associated therewith. An intermediate server is configured to update the mobile wireless communications device by at least obtaining respective current version information for associated current versions of the plurality of applications and obtaining the stored application version information from the mobile wireless communications device for the at least one stored application. The stored application version information is compared with the current version information for the at least one stored application. New application portions are downloaded from a current application associated with the current version information, and the new application portions are sent to the mobile wireless communications device. | 04-08-2010 |
20100093331 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The disclosed embodiments provide a system and method for configuring a communication device. In one embodiment, a method is presented that includes monitoring for a presence of at least one mobile device that stores a user profile. In response to the communication device detecting the presence of at least one mobile device that stores a user profile, the method retrieves the user profile from the mobile device. The method configures the communication device in accordance with the user profile. | 04-15-2010 |
20100093332 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CHANGING PROFILES OF A MOBILE PHONE - A profile changing system and method of a mobile phone set a task name and schedule time of a task, and predetermine a profile during the schedule time of the task in an electronic calendar of the mobile phone. The profile changing system and method further changes a default profile to the predetermined profile during the schedule time of the task, and restore the default profile when the task ends. | 04-15-2010 |
20100093333 | Systems and Methods for Providing Wireless Targeted Advertising - Systems and methods for providing promotional invitations are described. In various embodiments, a method comprises establishing an account for a user, receiving user preferences from the user, storing the user preferences within a server, receiving a promotional invitation from a business, storing the promotional invitation from the business, determining a position of the user and transmitting a promotional invitation to the user based on the position and the user preferences. | 04-15-2010 |
20100099392 | DEVICES, METHODS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING SEVICES BASED UPON IDENTIFICATION OF DECISION MAKERS AND OWNERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMMUNICATION SERVICES - Devices, methods and computer-readable media for providing services based upon identification of decision makers and owners associated with communication services. Data for providing communication services based upon identification of decision makers associated with communication services is stored, wherein the data including a user profile and default template identifying a default decision maker for a service. Policy rules and the stored data are analyzed. A new decision maker for a particular service is identified based upon the analysis of the policy rules and the stored data. The communication services are provided to the identified new decision maker. | 04-22-2010 |
20100099393 | DEVICE NETWORK TECHNOLOGY SELECTION AND DISPLAY IN MULTI-TECHNOLOGY WIRELESS ENVIRONMENTS - System(s) and method(s) are provided to manage utilization of radio network technology and display thereof when multiple services and radio network technologies are available to a multi-technology mobile device. Management relies at least in part on a subscriber profile that comprises a network selection profile constructed through market policy, subscriber policy, and application policy for radio technology utilization. Network preference(s) profile is generated on per subscriber, or per subscriber type, basis and is conveyed to a subscriber station over the air. Initial subscriber profile can be delivered at a time of provisioning a multi-technology mobile device, and updated based at least upon subscriber demand, a schedule established by a network operator or service provider, or an event related to coverage area relocation or contracted services. Radio technology preferences and display of associated technologies available to a multi-technology mobile device can be dynamically controlled on a per-call and/or per-application basis. | 04-22-2010 |
20100099394 | Method of unlocking a mobile electronic device - A method of unlocking a mobile electronic device and a mobile electronic device are disclosed. The mobile electronic device is operable in a locked state with the touch screen of the mobile electronic device being deactivated. In an embodiment, the mobile electronic device comprises a pressure sensor coupled to the touch-screen for detecting an application of pressure to the touch screen. | 04-22-2010 |
20100099395 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING A FUNCTION EXECUTION RECOMMENDATION ALARM EVENT IN WIRELESS TERMINAL - Disclosed are an apparatus and method for processing function events in a wireless terminal. The apparatus includes a memory for storing a character UI image according to the function events of the wireless terminal; an event collection section for collecting the function events occurring in the wireless terminal, and generating event messages for identifying the function events; an agent control section for including a plurality of specialists for processing the function events, determining a specialist corresponding to the event message among the specialists, selecting and outputting a character UI ID based on the function event of the determined specialist, and processing received user feedback information on a corresponding event according to the user feedback information; and an agent expression section for outputting a character image and text corresponding to the function event and the feedback information. | 04-22-2010 |
20100105372 | Radio Parameter Determination Method and Device for a Radio Communication System - A method for deciding radio parameters that improve a value indicative of the communication service quality of an important area in a wireless communication system. The constitution of the present invention comprises a second step of deciding a second radio parameter, based on the first radio parameter and the weighted sum of the values indicative of the communication service qualities in first and second ones, to which a first weight value is applied, of areas in which a plurality of radio base stations are located; a third step of accepting the constraints related to the foregoing weighted sum; and a fourth step of deciding a third radio parameter, based on the second radio parameter, the constraints accepted in the third step, and the weighted sum of the values indicative of the service qualities in the first and second areas to which a second weight value, different from the first weight value, is applied. | 04-29-2010 |
20100105373 | Location Information For Control of Mode/Technology - A multimode wireless communication device utilizes location information provided by a co-located autonomous position location receiver to determine a preferred provider database and associated operating mode and operating technology when an out-of-service condition is encountered. The multimode wireless communication device can utilize active preferred provider database while in service and while acquired within a network. The multimode wireless communication device can initiate location-based mode and technology control when in an out-of-service condition. The multimode wireless communication device determines its location and based on the location, accesses a database to determine a preferred provider database. The preferred provider database provides a hierarchical list of available systems and associated information for acquiring and registering with the systems. The multimode wireless communication device reduces a search time and associated power consumption using location-based mode and technology control. | 04-29-2010 |
20100105374 | Method and apparatus for automatically changing a call receive mode in a mobile terminal - A method and apparatus for automatically changing a call receive mode in a mobile terminal includes a first process of identifying a current external illumination level and noise level and identifying a preset execution suitability of each call receive mode, a second process of identifying a current user schedule and identifying a preset execution suitability of each call receive mode, a third process of identifying a current position coordinate and calculating a use ratio of each call receive mode, a fourth process of identifying a previous use history of each call receive mode and calculating a current execution suitability by each call receive mode, and a fifth process of calculating an integrated execution suitability of each call receive mode and applying a call receive mode of the highest value. | 04-29-2010 |
20100112995 | METHOD OF PROVIDING MOBILE APPLICATION - A method of providing a mobile application is disclosed. In accordance with the method of the present invention, a transmission time and a loading time of the mobile application, and a limitation on a number and a size of the mobile application are minimized, and providing the personalized mobile application is possible. | 05-06-2010 |
20100120406 | Secure platform management with power savings capacity - An electronic device, for example, a laptop computer includes a processor, a transceiver module, for example, a Bluetooth module and a memory. The memory includes a platform proximity agent, which may be implemented as a series of instructions, which when executed by the processor, causes the processor to receive a Bluetooth signal from a corresponding provisioned Bluetooth device, for example, a cellular telephone. Next, determine whether the received signal exceeds both a strength threshold level and a predetermined time threshold level, where the signal strength and time threshold levels are established when the laptop and a corresponding cell phone are paired during a provisioning process. When the received signal strength and duration both exceed the corresponding policy based thresholds, the laptop enters (or remains in) a full power state with full access to the monitor and the platform. On the other hand, when the received signal strength and duration both fall below (or are less than) the corresponding policy based threshold, the laptop enters (or remains in) a reduced power, or locked state. | 05-13-2010 |
20100120407 | USER REGISTRATION FOR WIRELESS SERVICE ON MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICE - A mobile computing device comprises a display, a radio device and a processing device. The radio device is configured to provide connectivity with a wireless network. The processing device is configured to provide a screen on the display to collect a user registration data and to send the user registration data wirelessly via the wireless network to a server computer to register the user for a wireless service from a service provider. | 05-13-2010 |
20100124916 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING SPAM NUMBER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for managing a spam number in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The method includes determining a spam index for each of at least one phone number using a reception record by phone number, and determining spam number registration or non-registration for each phone number depending on the spam index. | 05-20-2010 |
20100130187 | BASE-STATION CONFIGURATION CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD - Provided are a base-station configuration control apparatus, system and method. The base-station configuration control apparatus includes a user interface and a CPU. The user interface receives a user's request to selection of a standard protocol. The CPU receives one or more programs based on a selected standard protocol from a storage, which is connected to an external bus, to download the received programs to a function block through a host interface, based on a SDR technology. | 05-27-2010 |
20100136960 | Control software for unlocking relocking cellular telephones - Cellular telephone handsets often include electronic or software coding that “locks” them to a specific wireless network. Provided herein, is a method for provisioning locked handsets by unlocking them from their established network and relocking them on a new cellular network. The handset is connected in communication with the control process, identified, and provisioned. The method allows for provisioning of multiple models and brands to be provisioned from different carriers and to different carriers. It further allows multiple handsets to be provisioned simultaneously. During the process, the handset may be sensitivity tested. Further, the identification portion of the method can be used in conjunction with phone support tools beyond the provisioning process. | 06-03-2010 |
20100136961 | Controlling Mobile Terminals - For an automatic control of a mobile terminal, a method is proposed for the control of a mobile terminal by receiving a set of control commands in a mobile terminal comprising a processor, a subscriber module and a communications unit, storing a set of control commands in a memory of a subscriber module of a mobile terminal, and activating of functions of the mobile terminal by the subscriber module as a function of commands of the set of control commands via an interface between the subscriber module and the mobile terminal. | 06-03-2010 |
20100144330 | Downloading - In an embodiment, a mobile device is provided comprising a network interface and download controller. In an embodiment, the download controller is configured to check if a file to be downloaded can be handled by the mobile device and to transmit a download request to a further device if the mobile device cannot handle the file. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144331 | TEMPORALLY LIMITED MOBILE DEVICE CONTACT INFORMATION - Archiving mobile device contact information as a function of occurrence of one or more temporal conditions is provided herein. By way of example, contact information stored in an active contact list of a mobile device can be associated with a temporal condition, such as frequency of use, or location of the mobile device, or the like. If the temporal condition is met, the contact information is archived at remote data store and/or passive portion of mobile device memory. Once the temporal condition is no longer met, the contact information can be re-downloaded into active memory and incorporated into the active contact list. As a result, aspects of the claimed subject matter provide for organizing a mobile device contact list according to temporal condition(s) to provide added efficiency and to manage such information according to a determinable situational context. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144332 | Lightweight Application Level Policy Management For Portable Wireless Devices Under Varying Network - Devices and methods are disclosed which relate to dynamically adapting network policy on a wireless communications device to account for changes in network environment. These network policies are enforced, at least in part, at the device level, as opposed to solely at the network edges. The network policy is broad so as to encompass changes in network environment, such as increases and decreases in available bandwidth and presence or absence of security. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144333 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS THAT CONFORM TO A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION STANDARD AND A NON-CELLULAR COMMUNICATION STANDARD - The present invention provides a software defined radio transceiver that includes a programmable cellular radio front end and a programmable baseband processor. The programmable cellular radio front end is typically a digital radio frequency processor configured to support a cellular communication standard. The programmable baseband processor is connected to the digital radio frequency processor. The programmable baseband processor (a) selectively reconfigures the cellular configured digital radio frequency processor to support a non-cellular communication standard by bypassing one or more cellular communication standard specific function, and modifying one or more operating parameters to conform to the non-cellular communication standard, (b) processes input data in accordance with the non-cellular communication standard and provides the processed input data to the digital radio frequency processor for transmission, and (c) receives output data from the digital radio frequency processor and processes the received output data to obtain transmitted data. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144334 | LIST ELIMINATION FOR DISTRIBUTED DOWNLINK COORDINATED MULTI-POINT (CoMP) FRAMEWORK - Providing for record filtering in distributed dynamic clustering algorithms for coordinated multipoint (CoMP) wireless communication is described herein. By way of example, strategy selection records distributed as part of a belief propagation network are pruned at recipient nodes, thereby reducing processing overhead for dynamic clustering. As a result, cooperative policies can be determined with greater efficiency, and with greater relevance to local clusters of cooperating base stations. In some aspects, record pruning can comprise identifying and discarding redundant or incompatible sets of policy decisions. In at least one aspect, a number of evaluated records can be capped based on relevance, while preserving deployment-wide applicability of the belief propagation network. Accordingly, dynamic distributed CoMP decisions are optimized on a deployment-wide scale that more efficiently converges to maximum utility solutions. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144335 | METHOD FOR INITIATING A CONNECTION BETWEEN COMMUNICATION DEVICES OF AT LEAST TWO PARTIES - A method and system for initiating a connection between at least a first communication device and a second communication device respective of a first party and a second party. According to the present invention initiating a connection includes obtaining a destination subscriber identifier from the first party, wherein the destination subscriber identifier is a string including at least one character different than a numeric character and is respective of the second party. Then, a resolution request that includes data indicative of the destination subscriber identifier is conveyed to a hosting information storage server respective of the destination subscriber identifier, a resolution response including a destination address respective of the second communication device wherein the second party is available is obtained, and then, the present invention includes initiating a connection between the first communication device and the second communication device. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144336 | SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING APPLICATION AND MANAGEMENT SERVICE AND MODIFYING USER INTERFACE AND METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a system for downloading an application from a server and providing the same to a client by using a short message or a subscriber interface module (SIM) card. The system modifies a function key for each application according to a client's selection, and randomly modifies a user interface used for selecting an application. The system extends a usage range of the SIM card. The system periodically checks and analyzes the client' use log for a predetermined time, presents at least one application to the client according to the analysis result on the use log, provides a single application selected by the client to the client, and updates at least one application stored in the client mobile terminal according to the analysis result on the use log. Therefore, the system increases service satisfaction for the client. | 06-10-2010 |
20100151846 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SAVING DATA IN RESPONSE TO OPEN AND CLOSE EVENTS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for automatically saving data in a wireless device is provided. The wireless device has a sensor connected to a processor and a memory connected to the processor. The sensor provides an open signal to the processor indicating an open event when the wireless device is opened and providing a close signal to the processor indicating a close event when the wireless device is closed. The method includes detecting occurrence of the close event while data is being entered in an application; saving the data in the memory; creating and saving a notification in the memory that the data is saved; linking the notification to the saved data; and displaying the saved notification on a primary display screen of the wireless device. | 06-17-2010 |
20100151847 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CUSTOMIZING A USER INTERFACE OF A MOBILE DEVICE - A method and system for coordinating a specific subscribed service on a mobile communication device are provided. In accordance with one embodiment, this is provided a method for coordinating a specific subscribed service on a mobile communication device, comprising: registering the mobile communication device with a node; transmitting identification information to the node, the identification information including an identifier of a device, an identifier of a vendor, an identifier of a user, and an identifier of a subscribed service; receiving information from the node in response to the transmitting; and enabling the specific subscribed service in accordance with the received information. | 06-17-2010 |
20100151848 | Digital Upgrade System and Method - Digital upgrade system and method for translating analog commands and digital commands in wireless customer services premises equipment (CPE). The digital upgrade system receives a command from a CPE Host and translates the command from analog to digital in order to broadcast it over a wireless digital network to be received by a client. Alternatively, the digital upgrade system receives a digital command from a digital network and translates it to an analog command to be received by a functionality module of a wireless CPE Host. | 06-17-2010 |
20100159907 | DYNAMIC CONFIGURABLE TRANSACTION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to the field of electronic transactions and more particularly concerns a dynamic configurable transaction system capable of dynamically configuring a transaction terminal and dynamically processing a transactional operation, as well as to a method associated thereto. There is provided a dynamic configurable transaction system enabling a user to complete a transactional operation through a central server. The system comprises a transaction terminal in communication with the central server via a system network and a server application at the central server. The transaction terminal includes a user interface allowing to exchange input and output information related to the transactional operation with the user and a terminal application in communication with the user interface, the terminal application comprising updatable configuration parameters and a transaction module for dynamically building a transaction flow related to the transactional operation based on the input information received via the user interface and on the updatable configuration parameters. The server application comprises a configuration update module for preparing updated configuration parameters and transmitting the updated configuration parameters to the transaction terminal. | 06-24-2010 |
20100159908 | Apparatus and Method for Modifying Device Configuration Based on Environmental Information - A system for reconfiguring a mobile device based on environmental input is disclosed. The mobile device uses various components, including camera, microphone, and accelerometer, to gather data about the local environment. The system uses these components, separately or together, to determine the level of activity of the local environment. If the system determines that there is little activity in the local environment for a specified period of time, it enters low presence mode. In low presence mode, the system reconfigures the mobile device. The reconfiguration may include pausing or stopping applications, changing the device's volume settings, redirecting incoming telephone calls or text messages, or deactivating individual hardware components. | 06-24-2010 |
20100159909 | Personalized Cloud of Mobile Tasks - A dynamically created and automatically updated personalized cloud of mobile tasks may be displayed on an interactive visual display via a personalized cloud generator application. The personalized cloud generator application may receive and/or capture information representing a mobile task performed by a mobile computing device user. The personalized cloud generator application may then store the information and determine a relevance of a given performed mobile task. If the relevance of the performed mobile task meets a prescribed threshold, the personal cloud generator application may display a selectable visual representation (e.g., selectable icon) of the performed mobile task. Given a user's activity, the visual representation may be automatically updated (displayed, removed, moved, resized, etc.) based on the information received and/or captured. Subsequent selection of the displayed visual representation allows quick and easy access or performance of the associated mobile task. | 06-24-2010 |
20100159910 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE MULTIMEDIA RECEPTION AND TRANSMISSION IN COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENTS - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for configuration of adaptive integrated circuitry, to provide one or more operating modes or other functionality in a communication device, such as a cellular telephone, a GSM telephone, another type of mobile telephone or mobile station, or any other type of media communication device, including video, voice or radio, or other forms of multimedia. The adaptive integrated circuitry is configured and reconfigured for multiple tasks, such as channel acquisition, voice transmission, or multimedia and other data processing. In the preferred embodiment, the configuration and reconfiguration occurs to adaptively optimize the performance of the particular activity over time, such as to increase the speed of channel acquisition, increase throughput rates, increase perceived voice and media quality, and decrease the rate of dropped communication sessions. | 06-24-2010 |
20100167712 | GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE FOR MOBILE DEVICE - A computing device-implemented method includes displaying a receding timeline configured to fade back toward a horizon, the receding timeline including a starting point at a current time that is updated with a changing time. The method further includes receiving a time-related item from a peripheral application and creating a graphic based on the time-related item. The method also includes displaying the graphic at the starting point of the receding timeline and reducing the graphic size proportionally with the changing time of the receding timeline. | 07-01-2010 |
20100167713 | PROGRAMMABLE AGENT FOR MONITORING MOBILE COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods for collecting data related to events that occur in a wireless network. The method comprises receiving a data reporting profile which includes a series of executable commands which include a series of logical rules governing the manner in which reporting data should be generated and reported, compiling the executable commands of the data reporting profile into collection schema for collecting and reporting the reporting data according to the logical rules of the data reporting profile, creating a plurality of triggering criteria when reporting data should be generated based on the collection schema, creating a plurality of memory where the reporting data may be stored according to the collection schema, and scheduling the transfer of reporting data according to the collection schema. | 07-01-2010 |
20100167714 | WIRELESS HANDSET VEHICLE SAFETY INTERLOCK DATABASE - A method and database management system for controlling the operability of a mobile communications device. A geographical location of a vehicle may be determined. A database comprising records correlating location information with mobile communications device laws may be accessed. Based upon the determined geographical location and accessed database record, a determination may be made as to whether the use of a mobile communications device within the vehicle should be restricted. The capabilities of the mobile communications device that are currently available may be configured, in response to the restriction determination. | 07-01-2010 |
20100167715 | Method and Apparatus for Social Networking in a Communication Network - In a communication network, a method and apparatus for social networking in a communication network includes detecting a characteristic motion of a communication device and identifying at least one contact information from a contact list of the communication device in response to detecting the characteristic motion of the communication device. The method further includes initiating a communication session with the identified contact information. | 07-01-2010 |
20100173621 | COMBINED BLUETOOTH/ALTERNATE RADIO ENVIRONMENT WITH CRITERION FOR REPORTING A CONDITION OF THE ALTERNATE RADIO DEFINED IN A PHYSICAL ABSTRACTION LAYER ASSOCIATED WITH THE ALTERNATE RADIO - In a combined Bluetooth/alternate radio environment, an intermediate level software layer interprets operational conditions of a Bluetooth radio for an upper level, supervisory software layer. The intermediate level software layer also interfaces between the upper level software layer and a lower level software layer that interfaces to the alternate radio. The lower level software layer defines therein a criterion for reporting a condition of the alternate radio to the upper level software layer. | 07-08-2010 |
20100178907 | DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING A POWER LEVEL UTILIZING REVERSE ACTIVITY BITS EFFICIENTLY - Systems and methods for dynamically adjusting a metric that influences power management of an access terminal are provided. Initially, an access node is configured to distribute reverse-activity bits (RAB's) to the access terminal, which conveys data, at a particular rate, to the access node. Adjusting the dynamic metric involves establishing a number of slots allocated for a filtered reverse-activity bit (FRAB) window and a hybrid reverse-activity bit (HRAB) window, wherein each of the slots are allocated to accept a RAB. The RAB's accepted to the slots of the FRAB window and the HRAB window are recursively averaged to derive a FRAB parameter and an HRAB parameter, respectively. The dynamic metric is adjusted by incorporating either the FRAB parameter or an HRAB parameter therein based on whether ramping conditions are satisfied. The rate of data conveyed from the access terminal is controlled based on the adjusted dynamic metric. | 07-15-2010 |
20100178908 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATON DATA - A communication device and method for managing communication data include acquiring communication data of the communication device, searching the storage system for communication data of a selected contact according to an inputted name of the selected contact. The communication device and method further include generating a communication report of the selected contact according to the searched communication data of the selected contact, displaying the communication report on a display of the communication device. | 07-15-2010 |
20100178909 | Apparatus and method for managing data in portable terminal - A portable terminal is capable of managing data. The portable terminal includes a controller, a display, a memory and a data management unit. The data management unit can sort pre-stored data in the memory as keyword-related data. The data management unit also can sort the pre-stored data depending on frequency of user's use, and outputting, to the display, the sorted data by layer. | 07-15-2010 |
20100184419 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISPLAYING PRESENCE INFORMATION IN COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A communications system may include a communication device that may be configured to display presence information for one or more contacts. The presence information may include a current time for a location associated with the contact, a time zone associated with the contact, status information, and/or other suitable presence information for the contact. The presence information may be automatically changed in response to a location associated with the contact changing. The presence information may be generated using a schedule associated with a contact and a current time for a location associated with a contact. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184420 | Method and Apparatus for Prolonging Battery Life in a Mobile Communication Device Using Motion Detection - A telecommunication device is equipped with circuitry that can detect phenomena indicative or predictive of motion of the telecommunications device, such as GPS circuitry. When the circuitry determines that the telecommunication device is stationary, it controls the device to perform neighboring cell polling at relatively large intervals or not at all. However, when the circuitry determines that the telecommunication device is moving, it controls the device to poll neighboring cells more frequently. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184421 | A METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR ALLOCATING SERVICE AREA IDENTIFIERS IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for allocating service area identifiers (SAI) for a femto cell ( | 07-22-2010 |
20100190482 | INSTALLATION NOTIFICATION METHOD, INSTALLATION NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, AND INSTALLATION NOTIFICATION SERVER - A mobile terminal is notified of information indicating that an operator pack or the like is downloadable, without need for a user of the mobile terminal to perform any active operation and without need for the mobile terminal to be preliminarily equipped with an extra function for automatic installation. An installation notification system | 07-29-2010 |
20100190483 | MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE - A mobile terminal device having a ringing device includes a first control unit configured to be activated at a first activation time after power on; a second control unit configured to be activated at an activation time that is later than the first activation time; and a sound source configured to output a ringing sound in accordance with a program instruction, based on activation of the first control unit. | 07-29-2010 |
20100197289 | System and method for managing a wireless device from removable media with processing capability - Systems and methods for managing a wireless device from removable media with processing capability are described. One aspect may include a system for operating the radio hardware of a wireless device from a media device, comprising a media device, including a processor; a memory, coupled to said processor; and a radio host side peer layer, adapted to run on said memory and said processor, and adapted to communicate with the radio hardware of said wireless device. | 08-05-2010 |
20100197290 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS POLICY PROGRAM SYSTEMS, PROCESSES AND DEVICES - Telecommunications Policy Program Systems, Processes and Devices for the reduction of radiation hazard and/or other risks involved in the use of wireless telecommunication devices, are disclosed in the present application. According to the invention an Authorized User, using a Policy Program, can enable and/or disable at least one of the sound input and/or output channels of a telecommunication device in order to force a Subordinate User to use radiation-safer, and/or otherwise safer, sound input and/or output channels of said telecommunication device. According to two of the several preferred embodiments described in the application, the Policy program can be transferred to the telecommunication device from an external source or be built-in into said device. | 08-05-2010 |
20100197291 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND PRESENCE INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are a mobile terminal and a presence information management method thereof, wherein a reception range of presence information preset by a user is pre-stored and then presence information is received from a server according to the pre-stored reception range of the presence information upon an initiation of a presence service to thusly display on a screen, whereby upon receiving the presence service, part of presence information can be received according to the preset reception range of the presence information, or presence information relating to contacts who are not in interest or infrequently engaged in a call is not needed to be processed, resulting in reducing a current consumption due to processing of the presence information and improving a UI performance. | 08-05-2010 |
20100203876 | INFERRING USER PROFILE PROPERTIES BASED UPON MOBILE DEVICE USAGE - Demographic information regarding a user of a mobile device is inferred by observing the user's mobile device usage behavior. Bayesian probability principles are applied to the observed usage behavior in order to infer a most likely demographic category classification. Probabilities of the user being a member of various demographic category classifications may be obtained from population surveys. Conditional probabilities of the user being a member of a behavior category classification given a demographic category classification may also be obtained from population surveys. A most likely user demographic category can be determined by calculating the product of the probability of the user being a member of each of the demographic category classifications and the first conditional probability of the user being a member of the behavior category classification, and identifying the demographic category classification that yields a maximum relative likelihood. The user demographic category may alternatively be determined by a table look up using the determined behavior category classification. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203877 | MOBILE PHONE DEVICE, AND ITS CHANNEL SEARCH METHOD AND PROGRAM - To provide a mobile phone device, and its channel search method and program capable of starting up a channel search without requiring a user to manipulate any channel search button, and of returning from out-of-service-range or waiting in the optimal channel. A mobile phone device includes an acceleration sensor that detects an amount of vibration exerted on the mobile phone device, and the control means compares an amount of vibration detected by the acceleration sensor with a predetermined first threshold, and when the amount of vibration is higher than or equal to the first threshold, starts electric field level measurement of a waiting channel or a call channel as a channel search. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203878 | PORTABLE DEVICE INCLUDING A DIGITAL WALKIE-TALKIE MODULE - Provided is a portable device using a digital walkie-talkie module, which includes: a radio frequency unit which forms a call channel based on a mobile communications system; a digital walkie-talkie module which forms a communications channel based on a public frequency band; an input unit which generates an input signal for activation of at least one of the radio frequency unit and the digital walkie-talkie module; an audio processing unit which outputs at least one of an audio signal received by the radio frequency unit and an audio signal received by the digital walkie-talkie module, and collects an inputted audio signal and sends the collected audio signal to one of the radio frequency unit and the digital walkie-talkie module; and a controller which controls processing of a digital signal sent from the digital walkie-talkie module and outputs the processed digital signal to the audio processing unit, or to process an inputted audio signal and send the processed audio signal to the digital walkie-talkie module. | 08-12-2010 |
20100210253 | Cellular telephone audience appreciation display signalling - A cellular telephone is programmed to provide a user input menu for presenting a list of visual signals, from which a user may select one of the signals to be displayed on the screen of the telephone. Such visual signals as monochromatic color displays, national flags, or team emblems or colors may be selected in order to signal appreciation at mass events such as concerts and sporting contests. | 08-19-2010 |
20100210254 | System and Method for Regulating Mobile Communications Use by Drivers - The present invention relates to a system for regulating use of mobile communication functions while driving. The system includes a vehicle diagnostic device configured to generate vehicle diagnostic data indicating a current state of a vehicle, a vehicle diagnostic information port configured to provide the vehicle diagnostic data, a transceiver configured to plug into the vehicle diagnostic information port and transmit the vehicle diagnostic data using a wireless communication protocol; and a vehicle responsive phone including communication blocking software configured to receive the vehicle diagnostic data and to terminate the operation of at least one function of the vehicle responsive phone based on the received vehicle diagnostic data. | 08-19-2010 |
20100216446 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR LOCATING THE MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A mobile electronic device stores a standard voice command and a voice command identification standard. When an incoming call is regarded as a missed call and a voice command is detected, the mobile electronic device compares characteristics of the voice command with characteristics of the standard voice command, so as to determine if the voice command satisfies the voice command identification standard. The mobile electronic device further activates a ringing circuit to play a predetermined ring tone in response that the voice command satisfies the voice command identification standard, so as to help a user locate the mobile electronic device even if the mobile electronic device is in a silent mode. | 08-26-2010 |
20100216447 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR PREVENTING UNINTENDED OPERATION OF THE SAME - A slide type mobile terminal and a method for preventing unintended operation of the same are disclosed. When an event is generated, indicating movement of the assemblies of the mobile terminal with respect to each other, a determination is made whether the movement is detected within a preset time after generation of at least one of a touch down event and a touch up event, and ignores those events determined to be within the preset time by not delivering the touch events to a related application program. | 08-26-2010 |
20100216448 | USER INTERFACE FOR SUPPORTING CALL FUNCTION AND PORTABLE DEVICE USING THE SAME - Disclosed is a user interface for supporting a call function and a portable device using the user interface. With respect to a portable device having a call function, icons are allocated to telephone numbers of devices or indexes corresponding thereto and are displayed on a display unit, and a touch sensor setting is performed to support generation of a touch event with respect to icons output on the display unit, so that various call functions are supported through movement, disposition and removal of the icons. | 08-26-2010 |
20100216449 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CREATING MANAGEMENT OBJECT INSTANCE IN MANAGEMENT TREE OF TERMINAL DEVICE - The present disclosure relates to a method and a device for creating an MO instance in the management tree of a terminal device. The method for creating the MO instance in the management tree of the terminal device comprises adding the node value to an unnamed node or a specified node of the unnamed node in the MO of the management tree in the terminal device, obtaining data information relative to the content of the unnamed node or the specified node of the unnamed node, generating the name of the unnamed node according to the data information, and adding the MO instance into the management tree of the terminal device. The present disclosure accordingly provides a communications device. | 08-26-2010 |
20100222046 | METHOD AND HANDHELD ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR TRIGGERING ADVERTISING ON A DISPLAY SCREEN - A method and handheld electronic device for triggering the display of content on a display screen are provided. In accordance with one embodiment, there is provided a method of triggering the display of content on a display screen of a handheld electronic device, the method comprising: monitoring for the occurrence of trigger conditions comprising one or more of: inputs to change an operational mode of the handheld electronic device, changes in orientation of the handheld electronic device, or changes in a screen orientation of a graphical user interface (GUI) displayed on the display screen; and reproducing content on the handheld electronic device in response to detection of one of the trigger conditions. | 09-02-2010 |
20100222047 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LOCKING AND BRANDING A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE TO A NETWORK - There is disclosed a system and method for locking and branding a generic mobile communication device to a carrier network. In an embodiment, the method comprises: inserting in the device a subscriber or user identification module specifying a selection of a carrier network to which the mobile communication device is to be wirelessly connected; issuing from the device a request to lock and brand the device to the selected carrier network; in response to the request, receiving a customized configuration file for the selected network containing a device locking command, and one or more branding commands to brand the device to the selected carrier network; executing the device locking command to lock the device to the selected carrier network; and executing the one or more branding commands to brand the device to the selected carrier network with one or more customized features specific to the selected carrier network. | 09-02-2010 |
20100222048 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVISIONING MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE UPGRADES - There is disclosed a system and method for provisioning mobile communication device upgrades. In an embodiment, the method comprises: providing an automated web service device management interface (“WSDMI”) accessible to one or more carriers; adapting a supplier provisioning system to receive via the WSDMI one or more upgrade requests from the one or more carriers; adapting the supplier provisioning system to respond via the WSDMI to the one or more upgrade requests from the one or more carriers; and adapting the supplier provisioning system to execute one or more device upgrades on one or more supplier provisioning system connected devices. In an embodiment, the receiving and responding via the WSDMI is based on SOAP encoded XML messages. | 09-02-2010 |
20100222049 | METHOD FOR RELEASING A LOCKING IN MOBILE TERMINAL AND MOBILE TERMINAL USING THE SAME - The present disclosure is related to a method for releasing a locking on a mobile terminal, the method comprising: locking the mobile terminal; generating a locking-release preliminary signal on the locking; creating a locking-release icon based on a generated position of the locking-release preliminary signal; and releasing the locking by selecting the locking-release icon, and to a mobile terminal using the same. | 09-02-2010 |
20100227599 | AMPLIFER SYSTEM FOR CELL SITES AND OTHER SUITABLE APPLICATIONS - In one embodiment, an amplifier system has a tap, a delay filter, a linearized amplifier, and a hybrid combiner. The tapped portion of an input signal is amplified by the amplifier, the untapped portion of the input signal is delayed by the delay filter, and the combiner combines the resulting amplified, tapped portion and the delayed, untapped portion to generate an amplified output signal. By re-combining the delayed, untapped portion of the input signal with the amplified, tapped portion, the power of the untapped portion is not lost, and the amplifier does not have to compensate for all of the distortion that would otherwise be associated with the total output power level. Such an amplifier system is applicable, for example, in upgrading an existing GSM cell site to support both GSM communications as well as UMTS communications without degrading GSM operations. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227600 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MODIFYING NOTIFICATION SETTINGS ON A MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and apparatus for modifying notification settings on a mobile electronic device is provided, the mobile electronic device comprising a processing unit, a display, a memory, an input device, and at least one notification device. It is determined that the at least one notification device has been activated using a given notification setting. A menu list is responsively changed to include a notification setting change option, the menu list associated with the input device and stored in the memory, such that when the input device is activated, the display is controlled by the processing unit to provide a representation of the menu list such that the notification setting option can be selected and the given notification setting changed. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227601 | System for Inhibiting Wireless Communication - A system for inhibiting functions of select wireless communications devices—predominately for driver cell phones—through the use of a radio frequency transmitter synchronized with a software application that is downloaded into the cell phone or provided by the manufacturer in firmware or the operating system of the phone. The radio frequency transmitter is wired into the power supply of the vehicle and its signal is only emitted and received by the cell phone when the vehicle's power is flowing. When the cell phone receives the unique signal, the software application disables most communications and other distracting functions of the cell phone. The radio frequency transmitter also may be portable and plugged into a wall socket so that wireless communication in select rooms is inhibited when the circuit is closed. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227602 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MOBILE PHONE RING TONE PROFILES - A system and method for managing mobile phone ring tone profiles sets a first ring tone profile, a second ring tone profile, and a trigger value. If a phone number of an incoming call or an incoming message exists in a contact list of the mobile phone, or if the phone number exists in a call log and a communicate count of the phone number is more than the trigger value, the first ring tone profile is selected as a current ring tone profile of the mobile phone. If the phone number does not exist in the contact list and the call log, or if the phone number exists in the call log but the communicate count of the phone number in the call log is not more than the trigger value, the second ring tone profile is selected. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227603 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING A COMMUNICATION BETWEEN AN ACCESS POINT BASE STATION AND A NEIGHBORING BASE STATION - Aspects are disclosed for self-configuring an access point via a backhaul connection. A backhaul connection is established between an access point base station and a neighboring base station. Information associated with an external neighbor parameter is then received via the backhaul connection, and an internal neighbor parameter is self-configured based on the external neighbor parameter. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227604 | AUTOMATIC LOCAL ACCESS SURROGATE NUMBERS FOR LONG DISTANCE CALLING - A unique call mapping and routing device combines Voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) and public switched telephone network (PSTN) technologies such that mobile device users are able to dial international calls that are automatically and transparently directed through local access numbers using the mobile carrier PSTN network. | 09-09-2010 |
20100234005 | System for Selectively Limiting the Function of a Communication Device - Described is a system and method for limiting the function of a subservient communication device using a dominant communication device. More specifically, the dominant communication device is capable of limiting the function of the subservient communication device when the user of the subservient communication device does not respond to an attempted communication from the dominant communication device. The function of the subservient communication device remains limited until it establishes communication with the dominant communication device or, in certain embodiments, a secondary communication device. | 09-16-2010 |
20100234006 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DETECTING A SLEEPING CELL IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A node in a telecommunications network having a number of cells is informed of a sleeping cell. Within the telecommunications network, information of a potential sleeping cell detected by a user equipment (UE) operating in the telecommunications network is sent to the node. The UE may determine that the cell is a potential sleeping cell upon failing to receive a response from the cell after a specified number of Radio Resource Control attempts. The node determines whether the potential sleeping cell is a sleeping cell. A status of the sleeping cell is confirmed as an actual sleeping cell in the network, and the node sends an alarm alerting the network of the sleeping cell. A self-healing action may be automatically performed on the sleeping cell. | 09-16-2010 |
20100234007 | MULTIMEDIA CELL PHONE AND METHOD FOR CHANGING VIDEO BACKGROUND THEREOF - A method for changing a video background of a multimedia cell phone includes the following steps. A video image provided with a preset background color is chosen. An original image is recorded. A video communication is activated. A replacement region of the original image is determined, wherein a color of the replacement region is substantially the same as the preset background color. The replacement region of the original image is replaced with a corresponding region of the video image to form a new image. The new image is transmitted by a communication module. | 09-16-2010 |
20100248705 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SOFTWARE UPGRADING METHOD - A base station control portion | 09-30-2010 |
20100261464 | MOBILE TERMINAL, ASSOCIATED STORAGE DEVICES AND METHODS OF USING THE SAME - A mobile terminal and its associated storage devices and various methods of controlling and using them are discussed. According to an embodiment, a method for launching an application for a mobile terminal, includes receiving, by a first storage device connected to the mobile terminal, information on a second storage device after the second storage device is connected to the mobile terminal; and accessing, by the first storage device, a content stored in the second storage device based on at least the received information on the second storage device. | 10-14-2010 |
20100267375 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGEMENT OF WIRELESS DEVICES ABOARD AN AIRCRAFT - A method of management of a wireless device in an aircraft may include transitioning the wireless device from a first mode to a second mode based on data that is indicative of a change in flight condition of the aircraft. One of these modes may be a state of the device in which a transmitter of the device is deactivated and the other mode may be a state of the device in which the transmitter is activated. The data indicative of the change in flight condition may either be downloaded to the device from an external source, acquired from a sensor(s) embedded in the device, or may be determined based on both the data acquired by the sensor(s) and data downloaded to the device. | 10-21-2010 |
20100267376 | Accessory Configuration and Management - The invention provides methods and devices for configuring or displaying parameters of an accessory device at a connected device. A template file including parameters and associated user interface components is stored at the accessory and transmitted when required, and the receiving device may, based on this template file and current parameter values received in a separate message, create a user interface for display and/or configuration of parameters. | 10-21-2010 |
20100267377 | AUTOMATED SWITCHING OF USER NOTIFICATION PROFILES IN A MOBILE DEVICE - A mobile device such as a wireless communication device includes a component to automatically switch between profiles defining user notification options for notifying of device events such as new data or voice communications, calendar or alarm events. Switching is automated upon the happening of a switching condition defined in response to time or location information or both. For example, a user may enable a profile which disables event notification for a particular duration or while the user is at a particular location. That profile may be expired and automatically switched to another profile to re-enable notification upon the expiry of the duration or change to the location. | 10-21-2010 |
20100273468 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURATION OF FEMTOCELLS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus that enable and optimize the simultaneous operation of several wireless femtocells having overlapping coverage areas. In one embodiment of the invention, a resource allocation (e.g., time-frequency grid for an OFDM or TDMA based wireless network) governs the simultaneous operation of several femtocells with overlapping coverage areas by specifying uses for resources. A resource allocation unit (RAU) entity is disclosed for managing and modifying resource allocations for femtocells. The community of femtocells can flexibly share resources according to the time-frequency grid, thereby maximizing spectral efficiency without requiring substantial network overhead. | 10-28-2010 |
20100273469 | WARNING SYSTEM FOR SIGNALING THE PRESENCE OF A RADIO FREQUENCY COMMUNICATION AND MANUFACTURING METHOD - The invention relates to a warning device for signaling the presence of a radio frequency communication. The system includes an indicator perceptible to a user and an activation circuit to sense or detect energy originating from the communication and to activate the indicator. The device is distinguished in that the indicator is a vibrator. The invention also relates to a radio frequency communication device, such as a chip card, a passport, an insert, a mobile telephone, having the warning system, and a method of fabrication. | 10-28-2010 |
20100279672 | Apparatus and Method for Flexible Switching Between Device-to-Device Communication Mode and Cellular Communication Mode - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method is disclosed that comprises receiving a control command to switch from a first communication mode to a second communication mode from a coupled controller; reconfiguring a plurality of protocol entities including at least a first protocol buffer and a second protocol buffer; moving remaining data packets in the first protocol buffer into at least the second protocol buffer; communicating a current data packet sequence number; and forwarding data in the second communication mode. | 11-04-2010 |
20100285785 | METHOD AND USER INTERFACE APPARATUS FOR MANAGING FUNCTIONS OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COMPONENTS - A method and a user interface apparatus for managing functions of wireless communication components are provided. The present method displays a plurality of status bars respectively representing the wireless communication components on a screen of a communication device and arranges the status bars to form a management interface, wherein each of the status bars corresponds to a status switching region and displays a plurality of function icons of usable functions of the corresponding wireless communication component. Then, the communication device detects a selection operation from a user. When the selection operation is selecting the status switching region, an activation status of the wireless communication component corresponding to the selected status switching region is switched. When the selection operation is selecting the function icon, a function corresponding to the selected function icon is executed. Accordingly, the present invention provides a convenient way for the user to manage the wireless communication components. | 11-11-2010 |
20100285786 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND PROGRAM - The environment around mobile phone handset | 11-11-2010 |
20100285787 | Telephone directory data memory device having near field communication function and method for managing telephone directory data - A telephone directory data memory device includes: a communication line connecting element for coupling with a cell phone having a telephone directory data; a memory for storing the telephone directory data; a controller for controlling a memory status of the telephone directory data in the memory; and a telephone number obtaining element for obtaining a new telephone number of a new cell phone. The memory stores a correspondence relationship between the ,telephone number and the telephone directory data. The controller controls the memory to maintain the correspondence relationship when a first predetermined condition is met in a case where the telephone directory data is stored in the memory. The first predetermined condition is met when a first operation input element receives a first operation of the user. | 11-11-2010 |
20100285788 | Method and System for Optimizing the Configuration of a Wireless Mobile Communications Network - A method of upgrading a wireless mobile communications network deployed in the field, including capturing network events from the wireless mobile communications network; obtaining network simulation data from an automated network simulation planning tool; combining the captured network events and the network simulation data to derive diagnostic indicators adapted to evidence criticalities in a current network configuration; and modifying the current network configuration to overcome the criticalities. | 11-11-2010 |
20100291910 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRACKING THE PROGRAMMING OF A MOBILE DEVICE WITH MULTIPLE SERVICE ACCOUNTS - Methods and systems enable mobile devices equipped with software defined radio based chipset modules to seamlessly re-program the mobile device to operate on any of a variety of service provider networks. By re-programming a mobile device equipped with software defined radio based chipset module, the mobile device can support communications over both GSM and CDMA communication networks. The re-programming of the mobile device may commence with the launching of a connection manager supporting a selected service provider. Various embodiment methods and systems are provided to track and monitor a currently activated first connection manager and prevent the launching of a second connection manager while the first connection manager is still active in order to avoid potentially fatal collisions. | 11-18-2010 |
20100291911 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD - It is presented a method for providing a user interface of a portable electronic apparatus. The method comprises: detecting an actuation of a mode switch actuator associated with switching operational modes of the apparatus; determining a switching direction by determining whether the actuation is associated with a first switching direction or a second switching direction; determining a current operational mode; determining a new operational mode considering the switching direction and the current operational mode; and switching operational modes of the portable electronic apparatus from the current operational mode to the new operational mode. Corresponding portable electronic apparatuses and computer program product are also presented. | 11-18-2010 |
20100311402 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SOFT SWITCH OF VIRTUAL SIM SERVICE CONTRACTS - A system and method for providing updated rules governing the switching of enabled provisioning data supporting a wireless service contract. A mobile device may be initially programmed with a profile data table and priority list index data table to automatically enable provisioning data supporting one of the plurality of service providers stored in a VSIM internal memory unit to conduct a wireless communication when certain operational parameter values are satisfied. The profile data table and priority list index data table may be automatically updated in response to a variety of triggers. The profile data table and priority list index data table may be stored remotely. Operational parameters regarding each call request are collected and transmitted to a remote service contract selection server. The selection of an optimal service provider account may be made remotely in the service contract selection server and transmitted back to the mobile device. | 12-09-2010 |
20100317332 | MOBILE DEVICE WHICH AUTOMATICALLY DETERMINES OPERATING MODE - A mobile device such as a cell phone is used to remotely control an electronic appliance such as a television or personal computer. In a setup phase, the mobile device captures an image of the electronic appliance and identifies and stores scale-invariant features of the image. A user interface configuration such as a virtual keypad configuration, and a communication protocol, can be associated with the stored data. Subsequently, in an implementation phase, another image of the electronic appliance is captured and compared to the stored features in a library to identify a match. In response, the associated user interface configuration and communication protocol are implemented to control the electronic appliance. In a polling and reply process, the mobile device captures a picture of a display of the electronic device and compares it to image data which is transmitted by the electronic appliance. | 12-16-2010 |
20100317333 | Wireless Messaging System - Messages are routed via a cellular communications network to multiple cellular communications receivers configured for answering calls placed to a common subscriber number, such that a message originated with a single cellular call may reach multiple recipients. The geographic area of message distribution may be controlled by selectively enabling different cell sites for calling particular subscriber numbers. The cellular receivers may have message storage capabilities for subsequent replay of received messages. Message storage may be provided by downloading messages to a conventional telephone answering device also connected for landline telephone call answering, thereby adding received cellular messages to recorded landline telephone messages. | 12-16-2010 |
20100317334 | APPLICATION SERVICE INVOCATION - An Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) includes a Serving-Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF). The S-CSCF includes a Service Capability Interaction Manager (SCIM) configured to invoke one or more application services in response to a message being received by the S-CSCF. | 12-16-2010 |
20100323678 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SWAPPING MIFARE APPLICATIONS - A mobile communication device ( | 12-23-2010 |
20100323679 | System and Method for Temporarily Reconfiguring a Communications System to Provide Selected Services - A system and method for temporarily reconfiguring a communications system to provide selected services are provided. A method for temporarily providing selected services by a cell of a communications system includes receiving a first command, changing an operating mode of the cell responsive to the first command, and indicating the operating mode to a first selected device and a first non-selected device. The cell operating in the operating mode serves the first selected device based on the first command, and the first non-selected device is a selected device prior to the change in the operating mode and is capable of accessing the cell before the cell changes the operating mode responsive to the first command and is not capable of accessing the cell after the cell changes the operating mode responsive to the first command. | 12-23-2010 |
20100323680 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SINGLE-STEP ENABLEMENT OF TELEPHONY FUNCTIONALITY FOR A PORTABLE COMPUTER SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for automatic delivery of a phone call on an electronic device regardless of whether other tasks are running on the operating system. A separate background task (“thread”), independent of the operating system, enables telephony functionality without regard to the mode of a graphical user interface. The background task is always active and functions to respond to an incoming call even if the user is in a graphical user interface window that requires some input from the user (e.g. the graphical user interface is blocked). | 12-23-2010 |
20100330971 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A PRODUCTION UPGRADE OF COMPONENTS WITHIN A MULTIPROTOCOL GATEWAY - A production upgrade is described for a multiprotocol gateway. This upgrade allows various modules and components within the gateway to be upgraded independently without impacting traffic flow in the gateway. The upgrade can be performed by deploying a new version of the module alongside an older version of the same module. New client requests can then be directed to the new version, while requests requiring the older module can be continued to be serviced by the prior version. A distinction is made between stateless and stateful conversation during the upgrade of various components. For stateful conversations, request traffic can be versioned according to the session to which each request belongs. A highly available state storage scheme allows new versions of the module to consume state information used by the older versions. For stateless conversations, all new requests can be immediately routed to the new version of the module. | 12-30-2010 |
20100330972 | DYNAMIC CONTACT LIST DISPLAY - A dynamic contact list for a mobile device presents address book contacts in varying arrangements based on external factors. The mobile device may receive a request to display a contact list and may retrieve a sort procedure for the contact list. The sort procedure may be based on a user's prior selections from a group of contact sort rules. The mobile device may retrieve a list of contact identifiers and other information associated with each contact identifier that is applicable to the sort procedure. The mobile device may then apply the sort procedure to the list of contact identifiers and to the information associated with each contact identifier so as to displaying a sorted list of contact identifiers based on the applied sort procedure. | 12-30-2010 |
20100330973 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROGRAMMING INTER-(SUB) SYSTEM INTERFACE IDENTITY DATA AT A UNIT OR INDIVIDUAL SUBSCRIBER - A method and device enables programming inter-subsystem interface (ISSI) identity data, which identifies at least one of units or groups operating in a communication network, into at least one unit associated with a first radio frequency subsystem. The method includes receiving the ISSI identity data at the first radio frequency subsystem from an ISSI communication node, wherein the ISSI identity data identifies at least one of unit information or group information associated with a second radio frequency subsystem operating in the communication network. At least a portion of the ISSI identity data is then programmed into the at least one unit associated with the first radio frequency subsystem. | 12-30-2010 |
20100330974 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GENERATING CALENDAR EVENTS ASSOCIATED WITH CONTACT INFORMATION - The described embodiments relate generally to systems and methods for generating calendar events that include contact information. In example embodiments, upon an unanswered incoming call being regarded as a missed call, a calendar event is generated and stored in a calendar database. The generated calendar event includes contact information corresponding to the missed call. The systems and methods also provide notifications based on a scheduled calendar event, wherein the notifications provide an option to directly place an outgoing call to the contact information included in the calendar event. | 12-30-2010 |
20100330975 | VEHICLE INTERNET RADIO INTERFACE - The invention provides a internet radio interface for use in vehicles. The interface allows a device unit, with wireless capability and voice interface technology, to communicate with a vehicle, mobile phone, and portal in order to manage and upload various user preferences to the device unit as set out by the user prior to getting into the vehicle. The device unit interacts with the user to permit various functions and access preferable channels as well as managing secondary functions of the user, including cell phone communications. | 12-30-2010 |
20110003585 | COMMUNICATION MODE SWAPPING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEVICES - Techniques for switching between communication modes on a telecommunications device are described. A telecommunications device creates a logical communication session between itself and another device. The logical communication session accommodates multiple communication modes and multiple communication protocols. The techniques described in this disclosure provide for ways to transition a communication from one communication mode to another communication mode with minimal user input and minimal connection delay. | 01-06-2011 |
20110009104 | METHOD FOR ADAPTING RADIOFREQUENCY SIGNAL SPECTRUM - Method for adapting radiofrequency signal spectrum, particularly in TETRA communications systems. The invention proposes using over-the-air signaling for communications systems according to the TETRA standard, to configure the characteristics of the radiofrequency signal, with the advantage that there is no loss of performance in data transmission speed and no need to change the type of modulation. | 01-13-2011 |
20110009105 | SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORKS USING DIRECTIONAL BEAM ANTENNAS - A method for determining whether to reconfigure a self-organizing network (SON) comprising coverage areas each having a BTS and an antenna and mobile units operating in each coverage area. The method comprises: at each BTS, scanning an antenna beam, measuring performance data, and determining whether measured performance data indicates a network reconfiguration; if a result is negative, at a first BTS returning to the step of scanning the antenna beam; if the result is affirmative, selecting one or more of reconfiguring the SON by changing the RF output power of the first BTS, changing an antenna beam pattern of the antenna at the first BTS, changing an antenna tilt angle of the antenna at the first BTS, changing an operating frequency of the first BTS and updating a proximate cell site list of the first BTS. | 01-13-2011 |
20110009106 | DISPLAY SCREEN AND OPERATION OF SAME - A display screen comprises a receiving module, a control module electronically connected to the receiving module, a backlight drive module, and a backlight module. The receiving module is configured for receiving incoming calls and transmitting the incoming calls to the control module. The control module is configured for converting incoming calls to control signals and transmitting the control signals to the backlight drive module. The backlight module has different operation modes according to the incoming calls. One end of the backlight drive module is electronically connected to the control module, the other end of the backlight drive module is electronically connected to the backlight module. The backlight drive module is configured for driving the backlight module. A method of shining the display screen is also provided. | 01-13-2011 |
20110009107 | Systems, Methods, And Devices For Policy-Based Control and Monitoring of Use of Mobile Devices By Vehicle Operators - Systems, methods, and devices for controlling and limiting use of functions, such as calling, texting, chatting, emailing, Internet surfing, and similar applications, on a mobile device when the mobile device is in a moving vehicle, includes use of an on-board computer installed within the vehicle, a transmitter in electronic communication with the on-board computer that periodically transmits speed data of the vehicle to a receiver installed on the mobile device, wherein the mobile device includes suitable software and a rules-based policy that define and control when and which functions of the mobile device are disabled or interrupted by the software when the vehicle is in motion above a minimum threshold speed. Policies are set by default but may be customized for particular individuals, devices, or circumstances. Policies may also be customized for particular groups or subgroups of employees or contractors for company or legal compliance to reduce distracted driving. | 01-13-2011 |
20110009108 | METHOD FOR PRESENTING TARGET INFORMATION DURING CALL CONNECTION SEQUENCE - An information presenting method is provided for presenting target information by a first communication device during a call connection sequence. Firstly, target information is pre-downloaded to and stored in first communication device. When a call request issued by the user to the second communication device is detected by the first communication device, the target information is automatically presented. When a connection completing signal issued from the second communication device is detected by the first communication device, the information segment that is being presented is completely presented, and then the presentation of the target information is stopped. As such, normal communication between the user through the first communication device and the receiver through the second communication device is permitted. | 01-13-2011 |
20110009109 | EMOTICON INPUT METHOD FOR MOBILE TERMINAL - There is provided a method of easily inputting icons representing user emotions (emoticons). In the emoticon input method in a mobile terminal, a plurality of 5 emoticons, formed by utilizing a plurality of typical characters and special characters in combination, are grouped and stored by groups in the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal enters an emoticon input mode, displays the stored emoticon groups, displays the emoticons of an emoticon group selected by a user, stores an emoticon selected by the user, and transmits an SMS message including at least one emoticon selected by the user. | 01-13-2011 |
20110009110 | PROCESSING METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR COMPONENT INSTALLATION - A processing method, a system, and an apparatus for component installation are disclosed herein. The processing method includes: receiving a component from a server; and determining operations to be performed on the received component according to state information set for a removed component or information about the removed component. After the component is removed, the state information of the removed component or information about the component is set and stored, and the operations to be performed on a subsequent component are determined accordingly, thus preventing repeated installation of the removed component. Moreover, a deadline of storing the removed component information is set so that the information about the component can be removed automatically upon arrival of the deadline. | 01-13-2011 |
20110014903 | METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING A TELECOMMUNICATIONS SUBSCRIBER - The present invention relates to a method for identifying a telecommunications subscriber. According to the method, a call from a second telecommunications device (MFG | 01-20-2011 |
20110014904 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE CONTROL MENU AND SYSTEM TO PROVIDE THE SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE CONTROL MENU - A system to provide a supplementary service control menu includes an information collection unit to collect state information associated with a supplementary service; a level determination unit to determine a level of the supplementary service using the state information; a menu building unit to generate an identifier (ID) of the supplementary service and to build the supplementary service control menu; and a menu display unit to display the built supplementary service control menu including the supplementary service having an effect associated with the level on a screen. A method for providing the supplementary service control menu includes collecting state information associated with a supplementary service; determining a level of the supplementary service; generating an ID of the supplementary service; building the supplementary service control menu including the generated ID; and displaying the supplementary service control menu including the supplementary service having an effect associated with the level. | 01-20-2011 |
20110014905 | QUERYING A USER OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - There is provided a method for providing a question to a user of a mobile communication device connected to a mobile communication network. An exemplary method comprises receiving a command in the mobile communication device via the mobile communication network, the command specifying a question to be presented to the user of the mobile communication device. The exemplary method also comprises passing the command to an application of the mobile communication device, the application controlling the mobile communication device to present the question to the user within a standard graphical environment provided by the mobile communication device. The exemplary method additionally comprises receiving a user input via the application, the user input being made at the mobile communication device in connection with the presentation of the question. The exemplary method further comprises instructing the mobile communication device, via the application, to the send an answer to the question via the mobile communication network, the answer corresponding to the user input. | 01-20-2011 |
20110028137 | END OF CALL SERVICES - A method may include receiving user preference information associated with display of content items. A triggering activity may be identified at a user device. Context information associated with the user device may be determined. A content item may be selected for display on the user device from a plurality of available content items based on the user preference information and the context information. The selected content item may be displayed on the user device. | 02-03-2011 |
20110028138 | METHOD AND APPARTUS FOR CUSTOMIZING A USER INTERFACE MENU - Methods and apparatus enable a mobile device to suggest available applications or features in which a user may be interested to the user based upon the user's past and current mobile device usage patterns. The mobile device may monitor the specific application/features used and their frequency of use. The mobile device may determine other available applications/features that the user may be interested in using based upon the frequency of use of applications or features and information which indicates a likelihood of user interest in one application or feature based upon usage of another application or feature. Applications or features determined to be potentially of interest to the user may be presented to the user in the form of suggestions to be added to the user interface menu so that the user can elect to accept or rejection the suggestion to modify the menu. | 02-03-2011 |
20110028139 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication device, including but not limited to cell phones and personal digital assistants, has one or more functions disabled when, from within the device, it is determined that the device is moving at a speed above a speed threshold. An internal application controls such devices from within the devices, especially for turning them off when their users are driving a vehicle. | 02-03-2011 |
20110034158 | MOBILE USER ACTIVITY INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND METHODS - A machine-controlled method can include a mobile electronic device presenting to a mobile user a graphical user interface (GUI) that allows the mobile user to enter mobile user activity information corresponding to a particular mobile user activity, receiving the mobile user activity information from the mobile user through the GUI, creating a correlation between the mobile user activity information and the particular mobile user activity, and transmitting to a remote database system the mobile user activity information and the correlation between the mobile user activity information and the particular mobile user activity. | 02-10-2011 |
20110034159 | MOBILE DEVICE AUTO REDIALER - An automatic redialer for a mobile device operating in a cellular telecommunications environment. When a communication is terminated, the cause of termination is identified and, if the call was terminated due to a network or mobile telephone issue or failure, the automatic redialer will then proceed to redial the number associated with the dropped call either automatically, under certain conditions, or when instructed by a user of the mobile device. The automatic redialer operates to reconnect the call regardless of whether the call was an outgoing call originated from the user's mobile device or an incoming call wherein another party placed a call to the user's mobile device. In either case, the number can be retrieved from the mobile device, or in some cases even from the network, and a call can be re-established. | 02-10-2011 |
20110034160 | TRUSTED SERVICE MANAGER MANAGING REPORTS OF LOST OR STOLEN MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A Trusted Service Manager (TSM) receives installation requests (INST) from Service Providers (SPx) comprising an application (APPx), a Service Provider identifier (SPx-ID) and an identifier (MOx-ID) of a target mobile communication device (MOx) that is equipped with a memory device (MIF) to store the application (APPx). The Trusted Service Manager (TSM) transmits the application (APPx) to the target mobile communication device (MOx) and keeps a repository (REP) of the received applications (APPx), their associated service provider identifiers (SPx-ID) and their associated target mobile communication device identifiers (MOx-ID). If the Trusted Service Manager (TSM) receives queries (QU) from a Mobile Network Operator (MNO) asking for the Service Providers associated with a specific mobile communication device identifier (MOx-ID) it retrieves from the repository (REP) those Service Providers (SPx) that are associated with the queried mobile communication device identifier (MOx-ID). | 02-10-2011 |
20110039526 | WIRELESS HANDSET CONNECTIVITY TIME OPTIMIZATION - A system includes a user device configured to communicate with an application server over a network. A plurality of network elements are in communication with one another over the network, and each of the plurality of network elements have at least one parameter representative of network behavior. An adaptive server is in communication with the user device, the application server, and at least one of the network elements. The adaptive server is configured to estimate a connectivity time with the application server based on the parameter. | 02-17-2011 |
20110039527 | NETWORK SELECTION AND BASE STATION ACQUISITION WITH OTA PROGRAMMING FOR A VEHICLE TELEMATICS UNIT - A system and method for making vehicle originated calls to a telematics service provider or other call center. The method includes identifying a call type associated with a desired wireless communication of speech or data to the call center, and then carrying out one of a number of different call connection processes depending on the call type. For voice channel cellular connections, an in-band modem cellular connection is preferably established in most instances using a connection retry strategy that includes primary, secondary, and possibly tertiary connection attempts. Cell selection can be carried out using an acquisition task, background scan and inter-country PLMN reselection process that are used to select among available PLMNs and base stations. The system and method can be carried out in connection with various cellular system technologies, but is especially suited for use with GSM systems. | 02-17-2011 |
20110039528 | VEHICLE TELEMATICS DATA LOGGING - A system and method for data logging of telematics events by a vehicle telematics unit. Upon detection of a telematics event, checks are made to determine if location data logging is enabled and if the telematics event is an incoming personal call. If the location data logging is enabled and the telematics event is not an incoming personal call, then a data log entry is created that includes the current vehicle location; otherwise, a data log entry without any location information is created. Thereafter, the data log entries can be uploaded to a call center for analysis. Procedures for handling data logging during a standby mode of the telematics unit are also provided. | 02-17-2011 |
20110039529 | Method And Apparatus For Dynamically Changing The Monitoring Of A Cellular Data Connection - A method and apparatus for changing monitoring of a cellular data connection at a mobile device, the method checking, using a processor at the mobile device, whether the mobile device is connected to both the cellular data connection and an alternative data connection; and if yes, extending the slot cycle or suspending monitoring of a slot for the cellular data connection at the mobile device. | 02-17-2011 |
20110039530 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING PHONEBOOK IN A PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method and apparatus for managing a phone book in a portable terminal are provided. The method includes determining whether at least one of a message and a call is generated for a phone number registered to the phone book, storing information on the at least one of the message and the call by mapping to the phone number and displaying the stored information together when the phone number registered to the phone book is displayed. | 02-17-2011 |
20110039531 | Method for Announcing a Calling Party From a Communication Device - A system and method are disclosed for announcing a calling party from a communication device. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a call processing system can have a controller for processing calls in a communication system. The controller can be programmed to detect an incoming call initiated by a third party communication device over a first voice channel, transmit to a communication device over a control channel a notification signal associated with the incoming call, detect a connection made by the communication device to a second voice channel, transmit to the communication device over the second voice channel audio signals that identify a calling party, and link the first and second voice channels upon detecting over the control channel a call acceptance action by the communication device. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 02-17-2011 |
20110039532 | METHODS FOR TRANSFER OF USER IDENTITY BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Embodiments of methods are provided for transferring a user identity from one wireless communication device to another in a wireless communication system having a network system controller. A first device sends a deactivation request to the network controller, which includes information identifying the first device and a second device. The second device sends an activation request to the network system controller, which includes the information identifying the second device. The first device also sends repertoire information to the second device via the network system controller. The repertoire information is associated with the first device, and is selected from a group consisting of personal phone books, stored messages, stored recent call logs, and calendar information. | 02-17-2011 |
20110045810 | SEMANTIC CALLBACK TRIGGERS FOR AN ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT - Systems and methods relating to callback triggers for mobile or electronic documents are provided. In general, a callback trigger defines a triggering event and a callback action to be performed in response to an occurrence of the triggering event during consumption of the electronic document by an end user. As such, when the triggering event defined by a callback trigger is detected during consumption of the electronic document by an end user, a corresponding callback action is performed. In one embodiment, the one or more callback triggers for the electronic document include at least one semantic callback trigger. | 02-24-2011 |
20110045811 | Parent Telecommunication Device Configuration of Activity-Based Child Telecommunication Device - A telecommunications network offers a subscription plan or feature for parent and activity-based child devices. Configuration choices are made at the parent device and communicated to the activity-based child device. The child device creates a graphical menu showing activities as specified by the configuration information received from the parent device. | 02-24-2011 |
20110045812 | SELECTING INPUT/OUTPUT COMPONENTS OF A MOBILE TERMINAL - A device includes a first microphone at a first position on the device, a second microphone at a second position on the device, a first speaker at a third position on the device, and a second speaker at a fourth position on the device. The first, second, third, and fourth positions of the device are different positions. The device also includes a controller configured to determine a physical characteristic of the device. The controller is further configured to select, based on the determined physical characteristic, among the first microphone at the first position on the device and the second microphone at the second position on the device. The controller is additionally configured to select, based on the determined physical characteristic, among the first speaker at the third position on the device or the second microphone at the fourth position on the device. | 02-24-2011 |
20110045813 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal including a wireless communication unit configured to wirelessly communicate with at least one other terminal, a display unit configured to display information, a user input unit including a hardware input unit having a light emitting device, and a controller configured to control the light emitting device of the hardware input unit to emit light in a predetermined pattern or color to inform a user of the mobile terminal about an unidentified received communication event that has not yet been checked by the user, and to display information about the unidentified communication event on the display unit when the user manipulates the hardware input unit. | 02-24-2011 |
20110045814 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DIAL INPUT USING VOICE IN A MOBILE TERMINAL - A method and apparatus for dial input using a voice in a mobile terminal are provided. The method includes recognizing a voice inputted from a microphone when a call is connected, identifying a numeral corresponding to the recognized voice, and transmitting the identified numeral to a phone number to which the call is connected. | 02-24-2011 |
20110045815 | METHOD FOR SUPPRESSING USE OF A MOBILE PHONE NETWORK IN AN AREA - The invention relates to a method for suppressing use of a mobile phone network ( | 02-24-2011 |
20110053573 | FUNCTION UPDATING SYSTEM AND FUNCTION UPDATING METHOD - A function updating system and function updating method enabling a user to recognize what functions are installed in a mobile terminal of a communicating party, by automatically notifying the functions in the mobile terminal and updating the address book with the functions. When a mobile terminal ( | 03-03-2011 |
20110053574 | MULTIPLE USER PROFILES AND PERSONAS ON A DEVICE - A mobile device is configurable to accommodate multiple personas and associated profiles. Once the mobile device is triggered to configure itself with a selected persona/profile, no more information is required by a user (the provider of the trigger) of the mobile device. Each persona/profile is autonomous from any other persona/profile with which the mobile device can be configured. A persona is indicative of a personality, role, or identity portrayed by the device, such as a phone number, for example. A profile is indicative of functions associated with a persona. The mobile device is easily reconfigured via simple UI operations. | 03-03-2011 |
20110053575 | METHOD OF ACTIVATING A DEVICE - A method of activating a device involves establishing communication between the device and another device and receiving, at the other device, a message including activation information from a third party facility. The activation information includes a header and a mobile dialing number. The method further includes using the header to identify the message as an activation message for the device and, via the device, retrieving the identified message from the other device. The mobile dialing number is stored in a memory associated with the device, where the mobile dialing number enables the third party facility to initiate communication with the device. | 03-03-2011 |
20110053576 | Automatic Profiler - An application called the Automatic Profiler used in a cell phone environment that enables the profile of the cell phone to automatically adjust according to preprogrammed settings. The program will allow the user to initially set-up/program specific times when the individuals' cell phone will transition from one profile to another. A profile being defined as the setting that the unit responds to alerts/stimulus etc. (not only limited to calls). | 03-03-2011 |
20110053577 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING BY VIBRATING OR MOVING MOBILE DEVICES - Methods and systems enable mobile devices to receive communications and inform users about received communications by vibrating based on a vibration pattern. The mobile device may inform a user about the type of communication, the identity of the communicator and the content of a message by generating vibrations according to preset vibration patterns. Vibration patterns may be implemented according to Morse code. The mobile device may also receive commands and instructions from the user in the form of accelerations (e.g., tapping or patting) of the mobile device. The mobile device may translate the accelerations into acceleration pattern data which may be compared to stored patterns or templates to determine a corresponding command. The mobile device may execute the command and verify the execution. | 03-03-2011 |
20110053578 | CENTRALIZED CONTROL OF MULTIPLE SERVICES - An apparatus comprising means for associating at least one service with a hub application; means for displaying an application window comprising a at least one service view; means for associating at least one service with a service view; means for receiving information from a source; means for processing said information to generate result information; and means for distributing said result information to at least one of said at least one service. | 03-03-2011 |
20110053579 | Method for SIM Card Replacement - Method for SIM card replacement, aimed to obtain the functionality of a first SIM card storing a real IMSI number associated to a real MSISDN (MSISDN | 03-03-2011 |
20110053580 | System and Method for Reusing Mobile Phone Numbers - The invention is a method and system for reusing mobile phone numbers so that they can be used in providing “short-term subscriptions” of a mobile network operator (MNO). Firstly, a pool of free MSISDNs for short-term subscriptions is reserved. Whenever a user requests a short-term subscription, a free MSISDN is reserved from the pool; a pre-determined n-digit number is selected; that n-digit number is appended to the reserved MSISDN, giving a new MSISDN; that new MSISDN is assigned to the user; the new MSISDN is assigned to an IMSI (in the HLR of the MNO); and the user is provided with a SIM card having said IMSI associated with the new MSISDN. | 03-03-2011 |
20110053581 | METHOD OF ADJUSTING EVENT PROMPT DEGREE, AND MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT USING THE SAME - A method of adjusting an event prompt degree and a mobile electronic device and a computer program product using the same are provided. In the present method, whether at least two detection regions of the mobile electronic device simultaneously detect a touch when the mobile electronic device executes a vibration prompt corresponding to an event is determined, wherein the detection regions are independent of each other. A vibration intensity of the vibration prompt is reduced when the detection regions simultaneously detect the touch. Thereby, continuous vibration prompt is prevented from bothering other people. | 03-03-2011 |
20110059733 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE MOBILE TERMINAL - A method of controlling a mobile terminal, and which includes displaying, on a display module of the mobile terminal, a first screen corresponding to a current operating mode and including a plurality of objects relevant to the current operating; receiving an input signal indicating a screen reconfiguration event has occurred on the mobile terminal, the screen reconfiguration event including at least one of a predefined movement of a main body of the mobile terminal and a blow signal being obtained by blowing onto the mobile terminal; and reconfiguring, via a controller on the mobile terminal, the first screen by removing at least one of the plurality of objects that do not meet a predefined screen reconfiguration condition from the first screen, and displaying a second screen obtained by the reconfiguration of the first screen on the display module based on the received input signal. | 03-10-2011 |
20110065428 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SELECTING AN OUTPUT MODALITY IN A MOBILE DEVICE - A method and system for selecting the output modality of an application in a mobile device from attributes of the mobile device includes a detection of at least one attribute of the mobile device, automatically identifying available modalities for the output of the application based on the attribute, and selecting a preferred output modality from the available modalities. The output of the application is converted to the output modality and transmitted through an output interface selected based on the attributes measured. | 03-17-2011 |
20110065429 | APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING EFFICIENCY OF ANTENNA IN A MOBILE TERMINAL - An apparatus for enhancing an efficiency of an antenna in a mobile terminal includes an antenna matcher whose setting is changed under control of a controller, the antenna matcher coupled to the antenna, a sensing unit for sensing whether or not a user holds the mobile terminal and a holding pattern in which the user holds the mobile terminal, and a controller for controlling the setting of the antenna matcher according to whether or not the user holds the mobile terminal and the holding pattern. | 03-17-2011 |
20110070873 | Method for Telephony Client Synchronization in Telephone Virtualization - A method for synchronizing telephony applications running on different system software images is provided. When a telecommunications session is conducted by a first telephony application, the first telephony application controls the state of the telecommunications session through a signaling protocol stack executing on the same system software image as the first telephony application (or on a virtualization layer). The present invention allows the sharing of the signaling protocol stack by multiple telephony applications running on different system software images. | 03-24-2011 |
20110070874 | DYNAMICALLY SELECTING A CELL RANGE OF A BASE STATION - Method and system for dynamically selecting a cell range of a base station connected to User Equipments, according to the distances between each of the User Equipments and the base station, and the percentage of a maximum baseband capacity of the base station used by connections with the User Equipments. | 03-24-2011 |
20110070875 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SOFTWARE UPGRADING METHOD - A base station control portion selects one or multiple signals in accordance with the state of radio waves from signals received through multiple communication paths. A wireless communication apparatus communicates with a wireless terminal and a wired communication network at multiple frequencies. In response to a request for software upgrading from a network management device, the wireless communication apparatus selects one frequency, controls the state of transmission waves of a wireless interface such that a communication path in which a communication service is being provided can be switched to another communication network without interruption, rewrites software for each wireless interface to software received through a wired interface in advance, and returns the state of transmission waves of the wireless interface. Thus, the software can be upgraded without blackouts of the communication service to the wireless terminal. | 03-24-2011 |
20110076996 | Automatic short messaging system and/or call suspension for wireless devices in motion - Automatic suspension of call and/or short text message service for a mobile device in motion. The speed of the wireless device is obtained or detected, and compared with a predetermined speed threshold to determine whether the speed has reached or exceeded the predetermined speed threshold. If so, suspension of a text messaging service is automatically triggered in response to the speed exceeding or reaching the threshold. Emergency call and/or text messaging capabilities may be retained even during suspension of service. An indication of the service suspension may be displayed on the mobile device. Suspension of the relevant service may be maintained for a predetermined period of time to provide a hysteresis so that when the device momentarily stops but is generally still in a driven situation, the service(s) remain suspended. The wireless device may permit a user to temporarily disable the suspension of service for a given period of time. | 03-31-2011 |
20110076997 | System And Methods For Data Communications In A Wireless Communication System - In one embodiment, a method of operating a mobile device comprises receiving an enable message at the mobile device, the enable message being indicative of a pending message to be retrieved; opening an application at the mobile device subsequent to the receiving of the enable message; and sending a fetch message to retrieve the pending message, the sending occurring pursuant to the opening of the application. | 03-31-2011 |
20110081897 | DYNAMIC RECONFIGURATION OF CELL SITE SERVICE(S) - The described subject matter relates to an architecture that can dynamically update or set facility variables for adapting cell site (e.g., base station) characteristics in a wireless communication network. In particular, based upon a current configuration or state of facility equipment as well as various operation data, the architecture can determine or infer a reconfiguration of a facility variable that can adjust the configuration or state of the facility equipment. The reconfiguration can be directed to improving efficiency, mitigating errors, and/or more effectively providing services and allocating resources. | 04-07-2011 |
20110081898 | DETERMINING WHETHER SYSTEM INFORMATION CAN BE REUSED AND MANAGING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to determining whether system information can be reused and managing system information in a wireless communication system. A wireless communication device may read and compare a physical cell identity and specific system information of a target component carrier with the physical cell identity and specific system information of a source component carrier to determine whether generic system information needs to be read or can be reused. A base station may determine whether a change in system information impacts generic system information and specific system information. The base station may update a data control variable such that it is synchronized for particular sets of component carriers. | 04-07-2011 |
20110081899 | Mobile Device Panic Function with Recordability - Devices, systems and methods are disclosed which relate to recording a conversation on a portable communications device. This allows the user to press a panic button or a series of buttons on their portable communications device to begin recording the conversation. This conversation may be stored on a memory of the portable communications device or in a network in communication with the portable communications device. With the conversation recorded, there is a record of what was said during the call. This record may later be used if necessary. | 04-07-2011 |
20110086625 | Devices, Systems and Methods for Managing Custom Alpha Tags - Devices, systems and methods are disclosed for a subscriber of services on a network to display a custom operator name or alpha tag on the subscriber mobile communications device. The custom alpha tag (or operator name) is selected or defined by the subscriber via an interface on a communications device, and a custom operator name request is submitted to a provisioning logic on the network. The provisioning logic communicates with a business rule logic on the network, the business rule logic being configured to retrieve and/or update a first account associated with the subscriber with the custom operator name. A billing logic within a billing subsystem may be invoked to debit a second account associated with the subscriber. A programming logic on the network then updates one or more mobile devices with the custom alpha tag. The several logic units may be part of an Over-the-air (OTA) platform on the network. | 04-14-2011 |
20110086626 | Speaker activation for mobile communication device - In one embodiment, an apparatus includes a mobile communication device configured for operation in a first operating mode wherein a speaker function is off and a second operating mode wherein a speaker function is on. The mobile communication device includes a position sensor for detecting placement of the mobile communication device in a specified position and a controller for switching the mobile communication device between the first and second operating modes based on input from the position sensor. A method for speaker activation at a mobile communication device is also disclosed. | 04-14-2011 |
20110086627 | CALL NOTE MANAGEMENT ON COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Displaying call note information on a communication device having stored thereon telephone call log information identifying telephone calls made to or from the communications device, the telephone call log information including the time and date of the telephone calls, wherein associated call note data is stored on the communications device for at least some of the telephone calls, including: detecting an input at the communication device requesting display of a call note history; and displaying on a display of the communication device, after detecting the input, a call note history list that lists telephone calls from the telephone call log information that have associated call note data stored on the communications device, wherein the telephone calls in the call note history list are listed according to the time and date of the telephone calls. | 04-14-2011 |
20110086628 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR DYNAMICALLY AND CONDITIONALLY SETTING SERVICE TRIGGERS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for dynamically and conditionally setting service triggers in a communications network are disclosed. According to one aspect, a system for dynamic and conditional trigger insertion includes a dynamic trigger insertion (DTI) rules database for maintaining conditions or rules for dynamic trigger insertion and a DTI screening module for receiving a first mobility management message that is associated with a mobile subscriber, using the DTI rules database to determine whether a condition or rule for dynamic trigger insertion is satisfied, and, in response to determining that a condition or rule for dynamic trigger insertion is satisfied, generating a second mobility management message that includes a dynamically inserted trigger condition. | 04-14-2011 |
20110086629 | METHOD AND APPARATUS ALLOWING FOR USER-SELECTABLE ACOUSTIC EQUALIZER SETTINGS FOR VOICE CALLS - A user is allowed to select an acoustic equalizer setting from among a plurality of predetermined acoustic equalizer settings. Upon receiving an indication of a selection of a given acoustic equalizer setting, a handheld telephony device processes voice call downlink audio, based on the given acoustic equalizer setting and drives an audio output device with the processed audio signal. | 04-14-2011 |
20110092195 | SELF-OPTIMIZING WIRELESS NETWORK - Optimizing a plurality cell sites or sectors in a wireless network includes calculating modifications to a plurality of network parameters for optimizing wireless network performance; evaluating the modification groups to determine conflicts between modifications for a same network parameter; and eliminating the conflicts between modifications for the same network parameter within the modification groups. The modification groups are used to alter at least one network parameter of the critical cell sites or sectors, or of a best neighbor cells sites or sectors for achieving a desired improvement in communications within the wireless network. Optimization is further enhanced by determining the best previous modifications to the wireless network when performance continues to be degraded. Altering wireless network parameters of the critical cell sites or sectors, or the best neighbor cell sites or sectors is performed continuously using the stored modification groups until the desired improvement in communications in the wireless network is achieved. | 04-21-2011 |
20110092196 | PROVISIONING OF VOICE AND OTHER CS-DOMAIN SERVICES - Disclosed are devices and methods for provisioning of voice and other CS-domain services. A first server ( | 04-21-2011 |
20110098027 | System and method for spectrum split for 1X and HRPD operations of femtocell - A femtocell management system can configure a femtocell base station in a wireless communications network. The femtocell management system determines a list of carriers available per a technology type, without operator action, on per county basis using the county carrier information, Macro database information and resource configuration table. The femtocell management system transmits the list of carriers available per a technology type to the femtocell base station and list of common carriers used by Macro base stations on a county level. The femtocell base station can receive this information and can select an operation carrier from the list of carriers available per a technology type on a county level. The femtocell base station also can use the list of carriers to determine locally available carriers. If no available carriers exist, the femtocell base station can select an operation carrier based on common carriers used by Overlay Macro base stations. | 04-28-2011 |
20110098028 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UPDATING A MOBILE DIALING NUMBER OF A TELEMATICS-EQUIPPED MOBILE VEHICLE - A method and system for updating a mobile dialing number of a telematics-equipped mobile vehicle is disclosed herein. The method involves generating, via a processor operatively associated with an automated system at a call center, a mobile dialing number update trigger in response to an event. The call center is in selective and operative communication with an activated telematics unit having a first mobile dialing number. The method further includes recognizing the mobile dialing number update trigger via the automated system; and in response to the recognizing initiating a mobile dialing number update routine via the automated system. The automated system then selectively automatically updates the first mobile dialing number with a second mobile dialing number in response to the mobile dialing number update routine. | 04-28-2011 |
20110098029 | SENSOR-BASED MOBILE SEARCH, RELATED METHODS AND SYSTEMS - A smart phone senses audio, imagery, and/or other stimulus from a user's environment, and acts autonomously to fulfill inferred or anticipated user desires. In one aspect, the detailed technology concerns phone-based cognition of a scene viewed by the phone's camera. The image processing tasks applied to the scene can be selected from among various alternatives by reference to resource costs, resource constraints, other stimulus information (e.g., audio), task substitutability, etc. The phone can apply more or less resources to an image processing task depending on how successfully the task is proceeding, or based on the user's apparent interest in the task. In some arrangements, data may be referred to the cloud for analysis, or for gleaning. Cognition, and identification of appropriate device response(s), can be aided by collateral information, such as context. A great number of other features and arrangements are also detailed. | 04-28-2011 |
20110105094 | LOCATION INTEGRATION IN SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO - A computing device having a software defined radio (SDR) wireless network interface is automatically configured to support a wireless service in response to a request from the user to access the service. The computing device may determine the appropriate profile and obtain it by querying a remote database. The query may indicate the computing device's current location, though location information may alternatively be determined by a server coupled to the database. The communication profile is downloaded from the remote database using an existing or available network connection. The software defined radio is configured with the communication profile and is used to access an available wireless service. Content obtained from the wireless service is presented through a user interface of the computing device. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105095 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO PROVIDE CONTEXT INFORMATION FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - According to some embodiments, an initiating event may be detected at a mobile communication device via a context application, and responsive to that detection, information may be searched. The searched information may be related to, for example, prior communication events associated with communication applications of the mobile device. Note that the searched information could be locally stored and/or remotely stored (e.g., at a data store of a remote CRM application). At least one result of the search may then be displayed to the user. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105096 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACTIVATING A COMPONENT ON AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - The disclosure describes a system and method for activating an electronic device from a low power state. The method comprises: monitoring a motion detection circuit for a signal indicating a movement of the device; analyzing the movement of the device and if the movement matches a profile for an activation movement for the device then activating a component on the device; and if the movement does not match the profile, then monitoring for additional movement signals for the device and providing data relating to the additional movement signals to a microprocessor in the device at an instance where the microprocessor is expected to be monitoring for receipt of a synchronization signal from a network in communication with the device is expected and when the instance is passed, the device is placed in second power operating mode, the second power operating mode consuming less power than the first power operating mode. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105097 | Controlling Mobile Device Functions - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105098 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING LANGUAGES - A system for synchronizing changes of a telematics language from a current telematics language to a proposed telematics language with changes made to a vehicle language from a current vehicle language to a new vehicle language through involvement of a call center is described. The system includes, but is not limited to an antenna adapted for attachment to a vehicle and configured for communicating with the call center. The system further includes a telematics unit adapted for attachment to the vehicle and communicatively connected to the antenna. The telematics unit is configured to monitor a vehicle bus to detect when a user changes the vehicle language to the new vehicle language and further configured to automatically initiate contact with the call center when the change in the vehicle language is detected to confirm a user desire to change the telematics language to the new vehicle language. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105099 | ANTENNA LINE DEVICE CONFIGURATION SYSTEM - A communications device comprising firmware, storing instructions for controlling a processor to operate communications hardware according to a configuration; memory storage containing static data and at least one set of dynamic data defining the configuration, the dynamic data being dynamically upgradeable to change the configuration of the communications device substantially in real time. | 05-05-2011 |
20110105100 | Portable Electronic Apparatus - A portable electronic apparatus capable of reliably determining whether a load detected by detecting units is caused by water pressure or by some other pressure and performing predetermined control according to the determination. A portable telephone apparatus ( | 05-05-2011 |
20110117900 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PRESENTING CALL RELATED MESSAGES TO A USER - A method is provided for transmitting a communication request to a user device of a first communication type, receiving a message during the communication request or within a predetermined amount of time after the communication request, of a second communication type. If the message received is from the user device, then it may be immediately presented or displayed. If the message is not from the user device, then it is precluded from being presented until the communication request is completed. The first communication type may be in the form of a voice call and the user device may be a mobile phone. The second communication type may be a text message, E-mail, or other mode of communication that differs from the first communication type. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117901 | ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION OVER COMMON PUBLIC RADIO INTERFACE (CPRI) - A distributed radio base station ( | 05-19-2011 |
20110117902 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING MODES - A method of switching operation modes in a mobile device is provided. The method includes receiving current location information; determining an on-the-map location corresponding to the current location information; extracting a location property of the determined on-the-map location; and setting an operation mode of the mobile device based on the extracted location property. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117903 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DISABLING MOBILE DEVICES - An arrangement for disabling suitably equipped mobile devices senses at least one of: acceleration, jerk, velocity, position, orientation relative to a vehicle location trend, and orientation of a direction of motion. Position and orientation sensing elements are becoming increasingly prevalent in mobile devices, be they cell phones, smart phones, portable Internet devices, portable wireless devices, mobile Internet devices, Portable Navigation Devices (PND), iPhones, tablet computers, iPads, or Portable Digital Assistants (PDA). Although the operation of which while driving is illegal in many jurisdictions, mobile devices continue to be used by drivers of motor vehicles. Common perception is that it is dangerous to divide one's attention to activities other than the task of operating motor vehicles, while driving. The present invention discloses a device and method of exploiting intricacies of vehicle movement trends by processing to sufficient fidelity as to permit extraction an indication of location with respect to vehicle, of a navigating portable wireless device and temporarily disable. The disclosure teaches use of at least one of: acceleration, jerk, velocity with sufficient fidelity, and differentiation of position updates with sufficient fidelity. | 05-19-2011 |
20110124324 | Systems and Methods for Providing Wireless Targeted Advertising - Systems and methods for providing promotional invitations are described. In various embodiments, a method comprises establishing an account for a user, receiving user preferences from the user, storing the user preferences within a server, receiving a promotional invitation from a business, storing the promotional invitation from the business, determining a position of the user and transmitting a promotional invitation to the user based on the position and the user preferences. | 05-26-2011 |
20110130132 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INHIBITING TEENAGERS' TEXTING WHILE DRIVING MOVING VEHICLES - A system is disclosed for preventing teenage moving vehicle drivers from cellphone texting while that vehicle is moving. This system comprises a motion detector, ignition key input that indicates whether the driver is a teenager, and courtesy signal transmitter in a vehicle which sends the state of its motion detector and ignition key to a cellphone having a text keyboard, a microphone, and a courtesy signal receiver disposed in the microphone which is in the keyboard. Said vehicle may have a moving vehicle driver, who may also be the aforementioned cellphone user, disposed to operate these cellphone devices. The cellphone may enable or disable the driver's keyboard based on the motion indicator, closeness to the driver, or driver's maturity, but this determination may be overridden by the cellphone service provider, or person inserting an ignition key that permits texting while driving. | 06-02-2011 |
20110136478 | SELF-OPTIMIZING NETWORKS FOR FIXED WIRELESS ACCESS - An embodiment of the invention relates to a method of modifying communication parameters of a wireless network, the wireless network having at least two antennas, and each of the antennas providing coverage to at least one sector. The method including obtaining measurement data for at least two sectors of the wireless network, determining, from the obtained measurement data, if a signal strength indicator of one or more sectors of the at least two sectors is at or below a target value, determining, if the one or more sectors is at or below the target value, a communication parameter to be applied to the wireless network such that the signal strength indicator of the one or more sectors is above the target value, and modifying the communication parameters of the wireless network such that the determined communication parameter is applied to the wireless network. | 06-09-2011 |
20110136479 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - A mobile terminal that controls the output of an audio based on contact or approach of an external object and a method of controlling the mobile terminal, are discussed. According to an embodiment, the mobile terminal includes an audio output module configured to output an audio; a sensing unit arranged to sense an object approaching the audio output module; and a controller configured to stop the outputting of the audio, when the sensing unit senses the object approaching the audio output module while the audio is being output through the audio output module. | 06-09-2011 |
20110136480 | System for Preventing Text Messaging While Driving - A system and method are described to disable texting while driving a moving vehicle. The position and speed of a user's cell phone are compared with that of a registered master phone. If the position and speed track that of the master phone, it is assumed that the user is a passenger and not a driver, and texting is enabled for that user. Texting at speed is disabled for a master phone user who may be an ordinary citizen or may be a professional driver of a mass transit vehicle. The user of a master phone may utilize a different service provider than a passenger. Information parameter measurements such as cell phone position, velocity, and direction of travel are time stamped and then passed between service providers or alternately made available to other service providers by way of a central database. | 06-09-2011 |
20110136481 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY CHANGING TELEPHONY MODE IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for automatically changing a telephony mode in a portable terminal is provided. The apparatus includes a mode changing unit. The mode changing unit determines a distance between the portable terminal and a user's body and changes the telephony mode using the determined distance. | 06-09-2011 |
20110136482 | METHOD FOR OVER-THE-AIR PERSONALIZING OF CHIP CARDS IN TELECOMMUNICATIONS - The invention relates to a method for commissioning and personalizing a subscriber identification module SIM, wherein the SIM is set up with a non-individual and preliminary set (S*) of initial identifying and authenticating parameters prior to first commissioning, said set comprising at least one non-individual and preliminary subscriber identification (IMSI*) and a non-individual and preliminary secret key (K*), wherein the parameter set (S*) allows first commissioning of the SIM in a mobile telecommunications network by means of a mobile terminal device, wherein personalizing is performed after the first commissioning of the SIM, in that an individual and final subscriber data set (S) is transferred to and stored on the SIM, particularly comprising a unique final subscriber identification (IMSI) and a unique final secret key (K), particularly in that the final subscriber data set (S) is transferred by means of a regular connection of the mobile telecommunications system using the preliminary set (S*). The number of potential preliminary subscriber data sets is prescribed and is particularly much less than the total number of subscriber identification modules (SIM) equipped with said data sets. It can also be reused cyclically. The final subscriber data set is first stored after the mobile terminal device confirms that the personalization process was successful. Otherwise, the personalization request is automatically repeated, or the personalization data are sent again. | 06-09-2011 |
20110143737 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING BASE STATION INFORMATION OF FEMTOCELL BASE STATION, AND FEMTOCELL BASE STATION APPLIED THEREWITH - A method for setting base station information of a femtocell base station includes: upon a power application to the femtocell base station, setting all or some of terminals accessing the femtocell base station as console terminals; and receiving a radio environment parameter related to radio environment around each console terminal from the console terminals through a communication interface unit. The method further includes setting the base station information including an operation mode of the femtocell base station and a cell identifier of a femtocell covered by the femtocell base station based on the first radio environment parameter. | 06-16-2011 |
20110143738 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING AUTONOMOUS SEARCH IN VARIOUS MODES IN A LONG-TERM EVOLUTION ENVIRONMENT - A method for wireless communication in a Long-Term Evolution (LTE) or LTE-equivalent environment which allows a mobile device to manage autonomous search functions (ASF) is disclosed. In an LTE-equivalent environment, a mobile device may function in several modes, including idle and connected. In either mode, the mobile device may need to use an autonomous search function (ASF) to find or exchange information with base stations. The mobile device first determines the mode the current operation pertains to. When modifying the availability of an ASF, the mobile device distinguishes between the modes that will execute the ASF. When calling an ASF, the mobile device determines the availability of that function based on the device's current mode. In idle mode, the mobile device uses the idle mode ASF. Conversely, in connected mode the mobile device uses the connected mode ASF. The two functions are distinctly managed and operated by the mobile device. | 06-16-2011 |
20110143739 | Methods and Apparatus for Wireless Phone Optimizations of Battery Life, Web Page Reloads, User Input, User Time, Bandwidth Use and/or Application State Retention - This disclosure teaches using a wireless phone by a user to save and/or send a state in response to the user turning away. The user may interact with a web view to send the state as a non-empty transaction list in response to the user triggering a web navigation activator, with an application by storing the application state after the user looks away, and/or through an operating environment with at least two applications by storing the application state of the previous active application in response to the active application changing. The wireless phone may embody at least one of these interactions and may include a processor. Also disclosed, a program system, installation package and/or a download server in accord with at least one of these embodiments. A wearable display configured to wirelessly communicate with the phone and display web view presentations and/or application displays is also disclosed. | 06-16-2011 |
20110151851 | Methods and Communication Devices Configurable for Silence Mode and Exceptions to the Silence Mode - The disclosed are methods and communication devices include a user interface configured receive input to place the device in silence mode and to make exceptions to the silence mode and an indicator to provide an announcement that there is data stored related to incoming communications so that even when the device in silence mode, the user may not miss important notifications. The exceptions to the silence mode include at least one of receipt of an identified communication signal, an identified application indication or an identified event notification. The disclosed methods and communication device may further include a sensor to that the processor will provide an indication whether there is data stored related to detect a user action with respect to the device so incoming communications since a silence mode commenced. The disclosed methods and devices may provide a user choice in how to control incoming communications of the mobile device. | 06-23-2011 |
20110151852 | I am driving/busy automatic response system for mobile phones - A cell phone which has been modified by the addition of software which responds to the press of one or more Busy keys by automatically sending a pre-typed text message to the sender of the latest text message just received or automatically answering an incoming call immediately upon pressing the Busy key and playing a pre-recorded audio message. The outgoing text or audio message can inform the sender of the incoming text or the caller that the user is driving or otherwise engaged and cannot respond immediately. In some embodiments, one or more Busy keys can be added keys or one or more existing keys on the cell phone or on the keypad of the cell phone or on a touchscreen or a visual depiction of a keypad on a touchscreen of the cell phone. In some embodiments, only the text of the automated reply message is entered automatically, and all other commands to launch the SMS service, select the text message to reply to and send the automated reply message are manually given. | 06-23-2011 |
20110151853 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR LIMITING DATA TRANSITION AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A communication device includes a switch, a sensor, a controller, an indication module and a wireless communication module. When the communication device is in a safety mode, the sensor detects a velocity of the communication device when an incoming call of the communication device is received, the wireless communication module communicates with at least one terminal by answering the incoming call. When the velocity exceeds a preset threshold value after a buffer time, the controller terminates the communication. | 06-23-2011 |
20110159862 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING THE LOCATION OF MOBILE DEVICES INDEPENDENT OF LOCATION FIXING HARDWARE - Implementations relate to systems and methods for determining a location of a mobile device. The mobile device can query other mobile devices within service range for identification information, and send the identification information to a remote server for storage therein. The remote server can receive location information from other mobile devices corresponding to the identification information. The mobile device can send a location query to the remote server, which can determine or calculate a location of the mobile device based on the identification and/or location information of the other mobile devices. The remote server can provide the location of the mobile device to the mobile device for use in associated mobile applications. | 06-30-2011 |
20110159863 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD THEREOF - The disclosure provides a mobile communication device, comprising: a communicating module for establishing wireless link with an external communication device; a memory module for storing a preset information message and a preset time; a processor unit for generating a communication request and transmitting the communication request to the communicating module; a user interface; wherein the processor starts to count time after establishment of the wireless link, and synchronously detecting whether accumulated time is greater than or equal to the preset time, then, the user interface displays an information message. The disclosure further provides a mobile communication method. | 06-30-2011 |
20110159864 | ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MODE SWITCHING APPARATUS AND METHOD BASED ON SKIN CONTACT, MOBILE PHONE FOR SWITCHING CALL INCOMING ALARMING MODE ON THE BASIS OF SKIN CONTACT WHEN CALL IS RECEIVED, AND METHOD OF AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHING CALL INCOMING ALARMING MODE OF THE MOBILE PHONE - The present invention relates to an electronic equipment mode switching apparatus and method based on a skin contact made by a user using the electronic equipment, thereby being capable of minimizing the power consumption of electronic equipment and also of instantly operating electronic equipment as soon as skin contact is made. The electronic equipment mode switching apparatus includes skin contact detection means for detecting electricity generated when a user's skin is touched, logic circuit means for generating a mode switching signal to switch a power supply mode of an electronic device when skin contact is detected by the skin contact detection means, and mode switching means for switching the power supply mode of the electronic device in response to the mode switching signal generated by the logic circuit means. | 06-30-2011 |
20110159865 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, INCOMING COMMUNICATION NOTIFICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Means is provided for, even when a user does not previously register information that can identify a counterparty, such as a telephone number or mail address, determining the priority with respect to an incoming from a counterparty of which there is an outgoing record to respond efficiently and effectively. In a portable communication terminal | 06-30-2011 |
20110165869 | Apparatus and Methods Thereof for Effective Exporting of Services from an Old User Device to a New User Device - A method for enabling service transfer from a first mobile device to a second mobile device. the method comprises identifying the first mobile device model; identifying the second mobile device model; retrieving a list of services installed on the first mobile device; accessing a two-dimensional matrix contained in a database, wherein the two-dimensional matrix includes a plurality of services in a first dimension of the matrix and a plurality of mobile device models in a second dimension of the matrix, and containing an indication of compatibility of at least one service of the plurality of services to at least a mobile device model of the plurality of mobile device models; determining using the compatibility indication which of the services in the list of services are compatible with second mobile device; and installing an executable code of each of the compatible service on the second mobile phone. | 07-07-2011 |
20110171943 | Safety promoting techniques for mobile communication - A method for controlling operation of an active mobile communication device, including the following steps: performing a first determination of whether the device is in a moving vehicle at a relevant location; performing a second determination of whether the user of the device is the vehicle operator; and producing a risk indication signal as a function of the first and second determinations | 07-14-2011 |
20110171944 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, REMOTE ACCESS DEVICE, AND BASE STATION DEVICE - A wireless communication system includes a base station including a determining section that determines control information indicating signal processing for each of wireless resources used for wireless communication with terminal equipment units, and remote access sections each including a first signal processing section that performs first signal processing on a first downlink signal received from the base station so as to generate a second downlink signal to be transmitted to the units via the wireless communication, and a second signal processing section that performs second signal processing on a second uplink signal received from the units via the wireless communication so as to generate a first uplink signal to be transmitted to the base station, and at least one of the first signal processing and the second signal processing being performed for each of the wireless resources based on the control information. | 07-14-2011 |
20110171945 | Handheld Electronic Device with Dedicated Standby Key - A handheld electronic device comprises a dedicated standby key for initiating a standby mode in the handheld electronic device. The handheld electronic device further comprises means for disabling at least a portion of a keyboard and any navigation actuator of the handheld electronic device upon entry into the standby mode. The dedicated standby key is embedded along a first edge of the handheld electronic device. | 07-14-2011 |
20110171946 | MOBILE TELEPHONE WITH INERTIAL SENSOR - At least one inertial sensor is configured to sense movement of a mobile telephone. Information derived at least in part from data output by the inertial sensor related to the movement of the mobile telephone is used as an input to a user interface implemented by software executing on the mobile telephone. | 07-14-2011 |
20110171947 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SOFTWARE UPGRADING METHOD - A base station control portion | 07-14-2011 |
20110177802 | CONTEXT-AWARE MOBILE INCORPORATING PRESENCE OF OTHER MOBILES INTO CONTEXT - A first mobile device (for example, a cellular telephone) learns of the presence of second mobile devices (for example, other cellular telephones) that are located nearby the first mobile device. A relatively short range wireless communication mechanism (for example, Bluetooth) of the mobile devices may be used to discover other nearby devices automatically by establishing direct mobile-to-mobile communications without use of the cellular telephone functionality of the mobile devices. Regardless of how the presence of other nearby mobiles is detected, information on the presence of these nearby mobiles can be matched with other information on the users of the nearby mobiles such as user class information. The collected information is then used as an input to a context-aware functionality. The context-aware functionality applies a rule that causes the first mobile to be configured in a way that is better suited the situation and/or to who the other nearby cellular telephone users are and what they are doing. | 07-21-2011 |
20110177803 | Card device for loading applications to a mobile device - A system for loading application identifiers to a mobile device includes a mobile device, a card device insertable into the mobile device, and an application center. The card device is adapted to determine an effective mobile device identifier of the mobile device, and transmit the effective mobile device identifier to the application center. The effective mobile device identifier is based at least in part on the result of a process performed by the card device. The application center is adapted to (1) determine zero or more allotted application identifiers and zero or more application identifiers of applications loaded on the mobile device based at least in part on the effective mobile device identifier, (2) identify at least one application identifier of the zero or more allotted application identifiers which does not form part of the zero or more application identifiers of applications loaded on the mobile device, and (3) load the at least one application identifier to the mobile device. | 07-21-2011 |
20110183658 | Mode Changing of a Mobile communications Device and Vehicle Settings When the Mobile Communications Device is in Proximity to a Vehicle - A driver of a vehicle is identified and a command is sent to a mobile communications device that is associated with the identified driver and that is in proximity of the vehicle to force the mobile communications device to change modes such as to enter a hands-free or other suitable mode. The driver may be identified through one or more techniques including biometric sensing, key detection, switch controls, and so forth. Additionally, the driver and/or feature settings preferred by the current driver may be identified by receiving data from the mobile communications device. The data may identify the driver ID with preferred feature settings, the mobile communications device which has an association to a driver ID with preferred feature settings, or the data may specify the preferred feature settings. | 07-28-2011 |
20110195697 | SLEEP MODE CONTROLLING APPARATUS AND METHOD IN CELLULAR SYSTEM - In a cellar system providing various packet services, sleep mode operation of a terminal in an idle state is controlled. The cellular system determines a discontinuous receiving (DRX) period according to a QoS of a packet service provided to the terminal, and runs the sleep mode according to the determined DRX period. The cellular system runs the sleep mode divided into shallow sleep duration and deep sleep duration. With this manner, a paging delay to the terminal and a power consumption of the terminal may be reduced. | 08-11-2011 |
20110195698 | Methods And Apparatus For Providing Restrictions On Communications Of A Wireless Communication Device - Techniques in a wireless device for use in providing restrictions on communications via a cellular network are described. The wireless device communicates with a host enterprise server of a private network which is external to the cellular network for performing data synchronization in association with a personal information manager (PIM) application. The wireless device receives communication restriction information from this same host enterprise server in the private network, and stores this information in its memory. The wireless device determines whether a communication is restricted by comparing a user selected code of a communication attempt with one or more codes of the stored information. If the communication is determined to be restricted, the wireless device disallows the communication via the cellular network. If the communication is determined to not be restricted, the wireless device may allow the communication via the cellular network. | 08-11-2011 |
20110195699 | Controlling Mobile Device Functions - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features, along with systems incorporating these devices and methods. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 08-11-2011 |
20110201322 | INTERFACING A MULTIMEDIA APPLICATION BEING EXECUTED ON A HANDSET WITH AN INDEPENDENT, CONNECTED COMPUTING DEVICE - Embodiments are directed to interfacing a multimedia application being executed on a handset with an independent computing device. A connection between the handset and the computing device is established, which triggers a proxy application to be launched on the computing device. The proxy application is configured to interact with an agent application that runs on the handset. The computing device receives one or more user inputs associated with the multimedia application, and one or more messages are sent from the proxy application to the agent application based on the user inputs. The handset modifies the execution of the multimedia application based in part on the one or more messages conveyed to the agent application from the handset, and the handset also sends media and/or signaling related to the multimedia application to the computing device. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201323 | System Information Update For Carrier Aggregation - A method for providing SI updates for a carrier aggregation system is described. The method includes, for each other CC of a configured set of CCs, determining a start time for the other CC when updated SI for the other CC becomes valid. A first time prior to each start time for the at least one other CC is determined. A message including the updated SI for the at least one other CC and an indication of the first time is sent on a first CC. A UE configured for a set of CCs receiving the message. For each CC of the configured set of CCs, a next time for the other CC which begins after the first time is determined and the UE is configured to use the updated SI for the other CC beginning at the next time. Apparatus and computer readable media are also described. | 08-18-2011 |
20110207448 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE USE OF A HANDSET COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The invention provides a system and method for controlling use of handset communication device for communication by driver. A system in accordance with an embodiment includes: an obtaining component for obtaining driving state information of the vehicle; a directional antenna for capturing a wireless communication signal of the handset communication device around the driver; a judging component for judging whether a driving state of the vehicle is in an unstable state based on predefined criteria and the driving state information of the vehicle; and a control component for transmitting a remote control signal, based on a judging result of the judging component, to intervene in a communication of the handset communication device during a call. | 08-25-2011 |
20110212715 | Dynamic Switching Between Software and Hardware Graphics Rendering for Power Consumption - An apparatus and method for providing a user interface are provided. The method includes determining a status of the mobile terminal, and rendering a user interface using one of the software mode and the hardware mode based on the status of the mobile terminal. Accordingly, because a hardware mode provides a high quality user interface but requires more power as compared to the software mode, the mobile terminal is able to reduce power consumption by automatically switching to the software mode based on the status of the mobile terminal. | 09-01-2011 |
20110212716 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SERVER DEVICE - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes step of determining to change a manager of a radio base station from a first network device to a second network device, step of notifying the first network device and the second network device of the determination result, step of transmitting a reset request to the radio base station, step of performing reset operation by the radio base station, step of notifying the radio base station of address information of the second network device and step of connecting to the second network device by the radio base station using the notified address information. | 09-01-2011 |
20110217967 | EARPIECE WITH VOICE MENU - An ear-level device which can be operable in multiple modes supports a voice menu by which more complex functions executable by the ear-level device or by a companion module can be selected using input at the ear-level device. By pushing a button on an earpiece for example, a voice menu is activated announcing a set of functions such as voice dial, last number redial and so on. When the function that the user wants is announced, the user presses the same button which activates the execution of the function. | 09-08-2011 |
20110217968 | Changing settings of a mobile terminal - A device enabling a change of settings of applications is implemented in a mobile terminal. In order to facilitate a change of such settings, the device comprises a storage portion for storing a plurality of configurations. Each stored configuration is associated to at least one location and each stored configuration defines settings for applications implemented in the mobile terminal. The device further comprises a controlling portion for receiving information on a current position of the mobile terminal, for retrieving automatically a configuration associated to a location identified by the position information from the storage portion, and for changing settings of applications implemented in the mobile terminal according to the retrieved configuration. The device can be either a mobile terminal, or a module for a mobile terminal. The invention relates equally to a corresponding system and to a corresponding method. | 09-08-2011 |
20110230177 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RESTORING TRANSFERRED MOBILE TERMINAL BY MOBILE TRANSFER SERVICE - The present invention relates to a method and system for restoring a transferred mobile service by a mobile transfer service. | 09-22-2011 |
20110237234 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR REMOTE MAINTENANCE IN AN ELECTRONIC NETWORK WITH MULTIPLE CLIENTS - A client supported by remote maintenance in an electronic network configured to serve a plurality of clients may comprise a plurality of nodes, a first virtual machine (VM), a second virtual machine, and a virtual machine manager (VMM). The first VM may handle data associated with an external data center. The second VM may be associated with one of the plurality of nodes. The VMM may be configured to manage data transfer between the first VM and the second VM. The first VM may be configured to assess a state of the client system and identify a software update for installation on the one of the plurality of nodes. The software update may be configured to maintain identity between the data in the one of the plurality of nodes and the data center. The VMM may manage an attestation process prior to delivering or installing the software update on the client system using the first VM. | 09-29-2011 |
20110237235 | SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE FOR DUAL MODE PHONE AND METHOD OF USE - Alternative software architectures for a dual mode wireless communication device and methods of use are provided for efficient and effective use of the processor and memory capabilities of first and second air interface processors on a dual mode wireless communication device. The alternative architectures efficiently distribute a plurality of operational modules across the processors for efficient dual mode operation of a dual mode wireless communication device. Procedures for transitioning into a second air interface mode from a first air interface mode and vice versa are also disclosed. These seamless transitions can be based on user preferences and/or real time environmental variables such as signal strength or availability. | 09-29-2011 |
20110244844 | MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, METHOD OF OPERATION NOTIFICATION, AND PROGRAM OF OPERATION NOTIFICATION - A mobile terminal device includes: input sensing means for outputting an operation signal when sensing an operation on an input device; operation determining means for determining that a long-period operation is performed in the case where a period for which the input sensing means outputs the operation signal is not less than a predetermined period, and determining that a short-period operation is performed in the case where the period for which the input sensing means outputs the operation signal is less than the predetermined period; and user notifying means for performing notification in a different mode by changing an operating mode of notifying means, depending on whether the operation determining means determines that the long-period operation is performed or determines that the short-period operation is performed. | 10-06-2011 |
20110250875 | LOCATION-BASED APPLICATION PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - Methods, program products, and systems for location-based application program management are described. A mobile device can receive a first application program to be executed in an application subsystem. The first application program can be configured to be invoked or notified when the mobile device is located at a defined location. The mobile device can register the first application program to a second application program that executes in a baseband subsystem. The mobile device can set the application subsystem to a power-saving operating mode. The second application program can monitor a current location of the mobile device. When the mobile device is currently located at the defined location, the second application program can set the application subsystem to an active operating mode, and invoke the first application program. | 10-13-2011 |
20110256855 | Method for base station to obtain radio capability information of user equipment in long term evolution system - A method for a base station to obtain radio capability information of a User Equipment (UE) in long term evolution system comprises that: a mobility management entity sends an initial context setup request message to the base station, and the base station determines whether the received initial context setup request message contains an Information Element (IE) of forbidden inter radio access technologies; when contains, the base station writes the radio access technology types which are not included in the IE of forbidden inter radio access technologies into a query message, and sends the query message to the UE; otherwise, the base station writes all radio access technologies supported by protocol into a query message and sends the query message to the UE; after receiving the query message, the UE sends the UE radio capability information of radio access technologies supported by the UE itself to the base station. The above method avoids the blindness of writing query message for the base station, which reduces the overhead of the air interface, thereby shortens the connection delay of the UE in the long term evolution system. | 10-20-2011 |
20110256856 | UE Detach - The present invention relates to a method for closing all network connections to a detached user equipment. The local mobility anchor (LMA) receives and reads a control message saying that the user equipment is detached and all the network connections must be closed. The LMA performs the instructions in the control message, i.e. closes all the network connections to the user equipment. After the instructions have been executed, the LMA sends an acknowledgement back to indicate which actions have been performed. Thus, the closing of all network connections is done using only one message exchange and thereby saving signalling in the Core Network. | 10-20-2011 |
20110263237 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR ASSIGNING POLICY SETTINGS TO A MOBILE STATION - An apparatus, and an associated method, automatically calculates and assigns policy settings to be implemented at mobile stations. Information is collected relating to groups, such as groups within an enterprise, to which users of the mobile stations are members. Policy-setting conflicts between different groups, if the user is a member of more than one group, are reconciled, and the policy settings that are assigned are of reconciled settings. | 10-27-2011 |
20110263238 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR AUTOMATIC, RECURRENT ENFORCEMENT OF A POLICY RULE - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for automatic, repetitive enforcement of a policy rule according to a schedule are disclosed. According to one aspect, a method for automatic, recurrent enforcement of a policy rule includes providing, to a node for enforcing policy rules in a telecommunications network, an automatically recurrent policy rule, the policy rule defining an enforcement activation condition and including an enforcement recurrence attribute; and using, at the node, the enforcement activation condition and the enforcement recurrence attribute to recurrently activate the enforcement of the policy rule according to the enforcement recurrence attribute. | 10-27-2011 |
20110263239 | MOBILE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE - A mobile station (UE) according to the present invention includes a CSG cell management unit ( | 10-27-2011 |
20110263240 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR MONITORING THE CONTEXT ASSOCIATED WITH A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Systems, methods and interfaces are disclosed for managing communications associated with a mobile communication device. Mobile communication devices process environmental inputs and transmit mobile communication device context information to a communication management system. The context information may, for example, reflect the motion and/or geographic location of the mobile device, and may reflect the risk associated with using the device to handle a call or other communications session. The communication management system uses the context information, optionally in combination with communication device profiles, to determine how to manage incoming and/or ongoing calls or other communication sessions. Mobile device users may also be inhibited from initiating communication sessions. | 10-27-2011 |
20110269441 | CONTROLLING MOBILE DEVICE CALLS, TEXT MESSAGES AND DATA USAGE WHILE OPERATING A MOTOR VEHICLE - Disclosed are an system and method of regulating mobile device communications while operating a motor vehicle. One example method may include determining a speed event indicating that a speed of the motor vehicle has performed at least one of exceeded a first threshold above which mobile device usage restriction policies are invoked and fallen below a second threshold allowing the mobile device restriction policies to be removed. The first threshold may be equal to or greater than the second threshold. As a result of obtaining the speed event, the method may also provide transmitting the speed event to a remote edge gateway server located remotely from the motor vehicle, which stores the speed event for reference purposes when determining a policy for routing a particular mobile device call, text message and/or mobile data session. | 11-03-2011 |
20110269442 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECONFIGURING CONTROL CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for receiving control information by a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes monitoring channel quality of a control channel, determining whether reconfiguration of the control channel is needed, based on the channel quality of the control channel, if the reconfiguration of the control channel is needed, requesting an evolved Node B (eNB) to reconfigure the control channel, and receiving the control information through the reconfigured control channel. | 11-03-2011 |
20110269443 | APPARATUS, AND METHOD, FOR IMPLEMENTING DETECTION OF SYSTEM INFORMATION CHANGES IN UNIVERSAL MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - In a mobile telecommunications system comprising a network of a plurality of cells and at least one user equipment device, the user equipment is arranged, when the user equipment re-configures itself to enter a new state or performs cell reselection, to read broadcast system information and, when the broadcast system information indicates a change in system information, to update the system information of the user equipment device. | 11-03-2011 |
20110269444 | MOBILE DEVICE MANNERS PROPAGATION AND COMPLIANCE - The present invention includes methods and technologies for defining and administering device manners policy (“DMP”), propagating DMP, reception and recognition of, and compliance with DMP. Such policy may be used to communicate to various mobile and other devices the “manners” with which compliance is expected or required. Similar to some of the social manners honored among people, such as with “no smoking” or “employees only” zones, “no swimming” or “no flash photography” areas, and scenarios for “please wash your hands” or “no talking out loud”, devices may recognize and comply with analogous “device manners” policy. | 11-03-2011 |
20110269445 | MOBILE DEVICE MANNERS PROPAGATION AND COMPLIANCE - The present invention includes methods and technologies for defining and administering device manners policy (“DMP”), propagating DMP, reception and recognition of, and compliance with DMP. Such policy may be used to communicate to various mobile and other devices the “manners” with which compliance is expected or required. Similar to some of the social manners honored among people, such as with “no smoking” or “employees only” zones, “no swimming” or “no flash photography” areas, and scenarios for “please wash your hands” or “no talking out loud”, devices may recognize and comply with analogous “device manners” policy. | 11-03-2011 |
20110275357 | METHOD FOR ASSOCIATING COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES - Methods and systems for enabling at least two parties to create a potential for associating communications devices are provided. In a first case, a first communications device has a first network address and a second communications device has a second network address. A server receives a first input pattern from the first communications device, a second input pattern by the server from the second communications device whereby the second input pattern may be created by the same human operator. Alternatively, the input patterns may be digitized representations of ambient or environmental sound or optical signals. When the server determines that the first input pattern substantively matches the second input pattern, the server issues a reference number and associates the first network address and the second network address with the reference number. The server may then communicatively connect the first device and the second device upon receipt of the reference number. | 11-10-2011 |
20110281570 | METHOD TO CONTROL CONFIGURATION CHANGE TIMES IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method to control configuration change times is performed at a mobile wireless communication device when the mobile wireless communication device is connected to a wireless network. The mobile wireless device is connected in a first configuration mode. The mobile wireless communication device receives a control message from a radio network subsystem in the wireless network at a local receive time. The received control message includes a time indication for when to start a configuration mode change of the mobile wireless communication device, which the device extracts from the control message. The mobile wireless communication device reconfigures to a second configuration mode, different from the first configuration mode, based on the extracted time indication and the local receive time. | 11-17-2011 |
20110281571 | IDLE ACCESS TERMINAL-ASSISTED TIME AND/OR FREQUENCY TRACKING - An access point (e.g., a femto cell) that is connected in an active call with an access terminal may cooperate with that access terminal or another access terminal to derive timing information from one or more neighboring access points (e.g., macro access points). In addition, an access point may cooperate with an idle access terminal to derive timing information from one or more neighboring access points. For example, an access terminal may determine the difference between pilot transmission timing or frame transmission timing of a femto cell and a macro cell, and report this timing difference to the femto cell. Based on this timing difference, the femto cell may adjust the timing and/or frequency of its transmissions so that these transmissions are synchronized in time and/or frequency as per network operation requirements. | 11-17-2011 |
20110281572 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION OF MULTIPLE-STANDBY MOBILE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for a communication by a multiple-standby mobile terminal is provided. The apparatus includes a master communication module that directly receives a signal from a communication network and then processes it, or processes a signal to be transmitted and then directly transmits it to the communication network. Additionally, the master communication module indirectly receives a signal from the communication network through a slave communication module and then processes it, or processes a signal to be transmitted and then indirectly transmits it to the communication network through the slave communication module. Therefore, even though the slave communication module has only elements for transmitting and receiving a signal with the other elements eliminated, the multiple-standby mobile terminal may operate favorably. | 11-17-2011 |
20110281573 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING DEVICES - A connected-device-information managing unit that obtains connection information that is predetermined information for connection from a connected device as a communication counterpart, holds it, and, when a communication process is completed normally, holds a parameter value used in the communication process as normal connection information which is a part of the connection information for each connected device, and a hands-free controller that performs a communication process based on the connection information. When a communication process is started with a device that normal connection information has been already stored in the connected-device-information managing unit, the hands-free controller sets a parameter based on the normal connection information to perform the communication process. | 11-17-2011 |
20110287752 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO MAKE OPEN MARKET HANDSETS (C.S0023-D OR C.S0065-B COMPLAINT) BACKWARD COMPATIBLE WITH OLD RUIM CARDS - A method and apparatus for enabling backward compatibility in open market handsets (OMH) is provided. The method may include determining a type of an identity module based on one or more internal parameters of the identity module, and obtaining one or more credentials based at least in part on the determined the type identity module. | 11-24-2011 |
20110287753 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF THE MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal and a method for controlling the operation of the mobile terminal are provided. In a mobile terminal including a first processor and a second processor, the first processor controls execution of a first operation and displays a screen corresponding to the execution of the first operation on a display module. When a predetermined user command is input, the first processor is deactivated and the second processor performs a control operation for continuously executing the first operation with reference to operation information associated with the first operation and displays a screen corresponding to the continuous execution of the first operation on the display module. The first processor or the second processor is selectively activated according to a user command such that the user can use a phone mode suitable for the environment in which the mobile terminal is used. | 11-24-2011 |
20110287754 | Cell Phone with Automatic Dialing Lockout - A cell phone prevents inadvertent dialing or answering of the cell phone by detecting a low light condition consistent with the phone being in a pocket, purse or the like. The ability to use the phone unencumbered in low light situations is provided by using the low-light detection not to disable the phone but to cause a user prompt that requests a user decision on rejecting the phone activity. The user input is tailored to a particular predetermined button for either condition to ensure the results of this prompt are unlikely to be satisfied by an accidental keypress. | 11-24-2011 |
20110287755 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POWER SAVING OF CSG FEMTO BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and an apparatus for power saving of a CSG femto base station in a wireless communication system. A method of controlling a femto base station according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes: a macro base station to which the femto base station belongs to verify whether or not terminals registered in the femto base station exist in a service coverage of the macro base station, verifying an operation mode of the femto base station if at least one of the registered terminals exists in the service coverage of the macro base station on the basis of the verification result; and allowing the macro base station to direct the switching to an active mode to the femto base station when the femto base station operates in a sleep mode on the basis of the verification result. | 11-24-2011 |
20110287756 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POWER SAVING OF FEMTO BASE STATION USING ANR FUNCTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and an apparatus for power saving of a femto base station operating as a CSG cell in a wireless communication system. A femto base station according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes: a reception unit receiving signals from adjacent second femto base stations; a transmission unit transmitting signals to second femto base stations, and a control unit controlling to be transitioned to an active mode when a mode transition command is received from at least one second femto base station while operating in a sleep mode, in a wireless communication system constituted by a plurality of femto base stations using automatic neighbor relation (ANR). | 11-24-2011 |
20110294483 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING NETWORK FUNCTIONS BASED ON USER DATA - Techniques for identifying network functions include determining first data that indicates a concept represented in content provided by a device. A function provided by a network service is determined based on the first data. In some embodiments, techniques include forming a data structure that associates each function of a plurality of functions provided by a plurality of network services with at least one identifier for a concept. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294484 | System and Method for Performing a Light Weight, Wireless Activation of a Mobile Communication Device - A method, mobile device and activation server for wirelessly activating a mobile communication device at an activation server sends an activation summary to the mobile communication device in response to receiving a request for activation. The activation summary provides notification of a number of services that can be activated on the mobile communication device. Responsive to receiving a selection of at least one of the services, the method downloads at least one of configuration information and routing information for the selected service to the mobile communication device. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294485 | Methods And Apparatus For Increasing Voice Call Performance Through Controlled Interruption Of Data Transfer In A Relay Network - Methods and apparatus for use by a mobile communication device (MCD) operating in a wireless communication network for increasing call performance through controlled temporary interruption of data transfer by the relay network outside of the wireless network. One illustrative method involves identifying a voice call request at the MCD operating in the wireless network and, in response to identifying the voice call request, performing the following actions of sending a pause data indicator to the relay network over the wireless communication network; sending a call confirm or setup voice call message to the wireless communication network for establishing the voice call; and maintaining the voice call at the mobile communication device. The pause data indicator is defined to pause data transfer for the MCD at the relay network. The method may further involve identifying a voice call termination request during the voice call and, in response to identifying the voice termination request, performing the following actions of sending a disconnect voice call message to the wireless communication network; and sending a resume data indicator to the relay network over the wireless communication network. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294486 | EXTENSIBLE PHONE APPLICATION - The present invention provides an extensible phone application that uses extensions to interact with other applications executing in a mobile communication device. The extensible phone application is operable to handle wireless communication for the mobile communication device. Another application may interact with the extensible phone application by incorporating an extension. The extensible phone application enables the extension to register with the phone application for receiving a notification associated with an event. In response to the event, the extensible phone application sends the notification to the extension. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294487 | MANAGING SUBSCRIBERS ON A CELLULAR NETWORK - In embodiments of managing subscribers on a cellular network, a service provider tracks subscriber devices that are connected for voice communication via a network. The service provider can estimate an increased service load on the network by combining a number of the subscriber devices estimated to still be connected at an appointed time with a number of additional subscriber devices estimated to request connection at or within a predetermined range of the appointed time. The service provider can then cause a number of inactive subscriber devices to be disconnected for at least a predetermined period of time in anticipation of the increased service load. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294488 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING TRANSMIT POWER FOR MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICES WITH MULTI-MODE OPERATION OF ANTENNA - A radio control system in a communication device is disclosed, the radio control system comprising: (a) a sensor capable of detecting a change in use mode of said device; (b) a power controller connected to said sensor to determine a power configuration based on the use mode; and (c) a power regulator connected to said power controller to apply the power configuration to a transmitted signal. A method of controlling a power configuration in a communication device is disclosed, comprising the steps of: (a) detecting a use mode; (b) changing the power configuration as a function of the use mode; and (c) communicating at the changed power configuration. A radio control system in a communication device is disclosed, comprising: (a) a sensor capable of detecting a change in use mode of said device; (b) a radio controller connected to said sensor to determine a radio configuration based on the use mode; and (c) a radio configuration module connected to said radio controller to apply the radio configuration to the transmitted signal. | 12-01-2011 |
20110300842 | Method for Installing a Radio Base Station - The present invention relates to a method for installing an end user controllable radio base station in a wireless communications network. The radio base station is adapted to provide access for the end user of wireless user equipment in the wireless communications network. The radio base station further comprises a display and a power level adjusting equipment. The method is characterized by a first step of connecting the radio base station to the wireless communications network. A second step is to activate a self configuration procedure of the radio base station. As a third step the display on the radio base station further displays instructions to the end user as part of the installation procedure. These instructions comprise a request for wireless user equipment activity. The activity of the wireless equipment is monitored, and the power level is adjusted, if needed, as a following step for completing the installation. | 12-08-2011 |
20110300843 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING THE LOCATION OF A COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN A VEHICLE BASED ON SIGNAL STRENGTH - A system for locating a personal communication device (PCD) in a vehicle is provided. A controller is configured to receive a first signal from the PCD at a first antenna in a driver zone and to generate a first signal strength value for the first signal. The controller is configured to receive the first signal from the PCD at the second antenna and to generate a second signal strength value for the first signal. The controller is configured to determine whether the first signal at the first antenna and the second signal at the second antenna are received within a predetermined amount of time of one another and to compare the first signal strength value to the second signal strength value if the first signal at the first antenna and the second signal at the second antenna are received within the predetermined amount of time. | 12-08-2011 |
20110300844 | METHOD FOR RESTRICTING COMMUNICATING SERVICE IN ROAMING IN MULTI MODE TERMINAL AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method for performing roaming in a dual mode terminal, which includes a first wireless communication module corresponding to a first communication network and a second wireless communication module corresponding to a second communication network, is disclosed. The method comprises acquiring a public land mobile network (PLMN) identifier by camping on the first communication network; determining whether connection to the first communication network is roaming by comparing roaming decision information included in the PLMN identifier with roaming decision information stored in the dual mode terminal; turning off the second wireless communication module if it is determined that connection to the first communication network is roaming; and transmitting and receiving a signal to and from the first communication network. | 12-08-2011 |
20110300845 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING FUNCTION THEREOF - A method of controlling a function of a portable terminal having a touch screen is provided. In the method, ultrasonic waves are outputted through a speaker when a communication event is performed. Whether the outputted ultrasonic waves are inputted through a microphone is determined. A lock function of the touch screen is performed when the outputted ultrasonic waves are inputted through the microphone. | 12-08-2011 |
20110300846 | AUTOMATED SWITCHING OF USER NOTIFICATION PROFILES IN A MOBILE DEVICE - A mobile device such as a wireless communication device includes a component to automatically switch between profiles defining user notification options for notifying of device events such as new data or voice communications, calendar or alarm events. Switching is automated upon the happening of a switching condition defined in response to time or location information or both. For example, a user may enable a profile which disables event notification for a particular duration or while the user is at a particular location. That profile may be expired and automatically switched to another profile to re-enable notification upon the expiry of the duration or change to the location. | 12-08-2011 |
20110306331 | Selectively Terminating Camel Dialogues - Described are methods and apparatuses, for selectively terminated custom application in a telecommunications network. A Gateway Mobile Switching Center (GMSC) receives a request to initiate a call session to a subscriber device in a service area of a first Mobile Switching Center (MSC). The GMSC established a dialogue to implement the custom application on the subscriber device. The GMSC receives a message indicating that the subscriber device is moving from the first MSC to a second MSC. The GMSC analyzes a service key of the custom application to determine if the dialogue should be terminated and determines that the dialogue should be terminated so that the custom application is continued on the subscriber device. | 12-15-2011 |
20110312311 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR GESTURE BASED REMOTE CONTROL - Methods and apparatuses are provided that may be implemented in and/or with a mobile device to allow gesture based remote control of one or more controllable devices. | 12-22-2011 |
20110312312 | Determining Network Quality - Method, communications device and computer program product for determining network quality for the communications device which is capable of communicating over a communications network. The method comprises determining location information associated with a location of the device, querying a database using the determined location information, wherein the database stores a plurality of entries each comprising location information and corresponding network quality information, and obtaining, from the database in response to the query, network quality information from at least one entry of said entries which comprises location information corresponding to the determined location information. | 12-22-2011 |
20110312313 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER AND METHOD - A radio network controller connected to multiple exchanges in a mobile communication system includes an exchange side interface configured to communicate with the multiple exchanges, a mobile station side interface configured to receive a call connection signal from a mobile station via a radio base station, a management unit configured to manage congestion levels indicative of congestion states of the respective exchanges and a control unit. The exchange side interface acquires the congestion levels from the respective exchanges, and the control unit determines to transfer a predefined ratio of call connection signals destined for an exchange having a higher congestion level to an exchange having a lower congestion level, the ratio being predefined corresponding to the congestion level. | 12-22-2011 |
20110319064 | METHOD AND DEVICE WITH DYNAMIC DORMANCY | 12-29-2011 |
20110319065 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO LIMIT PERIODIC UPLINK TRANSMISSIONS - In accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the invention, there is at least a method, apparatus which may include operations that result from operation of computer program code, and a plurality of coupled logic circuit elements constructed to carry out the associated functions for, in response to signaling received from a network access node, prematurely terminating operation of a timer running on a user equipment, the timer being used to control how long the user equipment is considered uplink time aligned, and performing operations defined to be executed upon the timer expiring. Further, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the invention there is signaling a user equipment to prematurely terminate operation of a timer running on the user equipment, the timer being used to control how long the user equipment is considered uplink time aligned, and reserving an uplink resource for the user equipment. | 12-29-2011 |
20120009909 | Feasibility, Convergence, and Optimization of LTE Femto Networks - Methods and systems used to plan, optimize, and manage LTE femtocell networks describes an analytical framework and algorithms that allow analysis and planning of various femtocell aspects including dynamic adjustment of femtocell power for interference mitigation, and optimization according to user selectable policies. The framework recommends using a hybrid of both distributed control and centralized policy enforcement. An algorithm having two closely related aspects is provided. The first part is an Iterative and Distributed Algorithm (IDA), which is intended to be executed inside the femtocells. The second part of the algorithm is intended to be used as a toolset and is called Analytic Computational Algorithm (ACA), which is intended to be used in a centralized planning and operations center. The ACA provides a set of conditions that are used to check for convergence of the IDA. | 01-12-2012 |
20120009910 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR APPLYING CIPHERING IN A UNIVERSAL MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Apparatus and a method for ciphering messages in mobile telecommunications system user equipment and network are disclosed. The apparatus is arranged to store a plurality of current ciphering configurations and/or a plurality of old (previously applied) ciphering configurations and/or a plurality of new (future) ciphering configurations. Thus different ciphering configuration may be applied at different times and for different radio bearers. | 01-12-2012 |
20120009911 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING DISCOVERABILITY AND USABILITY OF DATA NETWORK CAPABILITY OF A MOBILE DEVICE - In a technique for enhancing discoverability and increasing usage of a web browser in a mobile device on a wireless network, a server system coupled to the wireless network receives a signal representing initiation of a voice call from the mobile device. In response, the server system performs a lookup to determine whether a website is associated with the telephone number being called. If a website is associated with the telephone number being called and the mobile device has the capability to access and display the website, the server system sends an Alert to the mobile device, causing the mobile device to notify its user about the website. The user may then input a selection to either access the website instead of completing the call or to proceed with the voice call. | 01-12-2012 |
20120009912 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING SELF-OPTIMIZATION SWITCH - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for controlling a self-optimization switch. By using technical solutions provided in embodiments of the present invention, enabling and disabling of self-optimization can be controlled, and a state of the self-optimization switch can be obtained. A technical solution provided in embodiments of the present invention is as follows: A method for controlling a self-optimization switch includes: obtaining a target state of a self-optimization switch; and sending a setting command that includes the target state to a managed unit, where the setting command instructs the managed unit to change the state of the self-optimization switch to the target state. | 01-12-2012 |
20120009913 | FEMTOCELL ACCESS NODE, FEMTOCELL SYSTEM, AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR THE SYSTEM - A femto cell connection node, a femto cell system, and a data transmission method of the system are disclosed. | 01-12-2012 |
20120015640 | Handling of applications of mobile terminals in a serving node - A method of supporting a communication between a mobile terminal UE and a serving node of a telecommunication network, the serving node comprising an application interface, a programming module and a basic code module storing and processing basic functions. The serving node receives an initialization message from the UE and determines a call reference number for the incoming call. An incoming call listener is activated to listen to incoming calls that are related to the call reference number. A signal is created which listens for a trigger-signal in basic functions in the basic code module. After the incoming call, related to the call reference number is detected, the signal listener is allocated to the incoming call, wherein an application in the programming module is executed after the signal listener detects the trigger signal related to the call reference number. | 01-19-2012 |
20120015641 | CONTROL SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, CONTROLLED DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE NON-TRANSITORY RECORDING MEDIUM STORING CONTROL PROGRAM - Provided are a control system, a mobile terminal device, a controlled device, a control method, and a computer-readable non-transitory recording medium storing a control program which are capable of reducing misoperations by a user. The mobile terminal device of the control system includes an instruction determining unit for determining specifics of an instruction based on a signal from an input unit, according to a current operating mode of either a first mode (controlled-device operating mode) or a second mode (terminal-itself operating mode), a process executing unit for executing a process corresponding to determined specifics of an instruction when in the second operating mode, a change determining unit for determining whether or not the operating mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode, and an informing process unit for performing a process of informing of a change in operating mode by at least one of vibration, light, and, sound if it is determined that a change in operating mode is made. | 01-19-2012 |
20120021731 | Cloud computing system configured for a consumer to program a smart phone and touch pad - A cloud computing system is provided to support a consumer for programming a smart phone/touch pad. Set of accessory members is provided to enable said consumer to build and program a consumer designed article that comprises said consumer programmed smart phone/touch pad. | 01-26-2012 |
20120021732 | Cloud computing system configured for a consumer to program a smart phone or touch pad - A cloud computing system is provided to support a consumer for programming a smart phone/touch pad. Set of accessory members is provided to enable said consumer to build and program a consumer designed article that comprises said consumer programmed smart phone/touch pad. | 01-26-2012 |
20120021733 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A HOSTED MOBILE MANAGEMENT SERVICE ARCHITECTURE - A hosted mobile management service is provided for enabling a user to access a centralized account through a user interface on a terminal in order to manage the user's media information, such as digital music and photos. Any modifications made by user through the user interface are transparently sent to the user's mobile device where a module receives such modification information and interacts with the mobile device to reconcile such modifications. | 01-26-2012 |
20120028623 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING BETWEEN USERS - A social networking system comprises a mobile telephone device relating to a first user. that facilitates telephone calls between the first user and other users. User data including identity data and contact data of the other users is initially resident upon the mobile telephone device. The mobile telephone device comprises a resident client application, a social network server and a network providing communication between the mobile telephone device and the social network server. User data is obtained from the device and transmitted to the social network server. The social network server analyzes the user data to identify which other users are also users of the social network server and to form a social network group accordingly and to receive update data relating to any user of the group. The social network server further selects the update data and transmits it to the client application for presentation to the first user. | 02-02-2012 |
20120028624 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING MOBILE DEVICE SAFETY BY SELECTIVELY DISABLING DEVICE FEATURES DURING UNSAFE OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS - A system for improving safe operation of mobile communication devices includes an operational module installable on a mobile communication device. The mobile communication device is able to communicate wirelessly over a mobile communications network and has a plurality of internal sensors, a plurality of external sensors, a user interface, and a plurality of communications modules. The operational module is able to monitor at least one of the internal sensors and the external sensors, to determine whether the mobile communication device state is one of a plurality of predetermined device states. The predetermined device states represent predetermined watch list operations, which are determined based on improving the safe operation of the mobile communication device. The operational module executes predetermined operations in the event the mobile communication device state is one of the plurality of predetermined device states, which include controlling operation of the user interface and at least one of the plurality of communications modules. | 02-02-2012 |
20120028625 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERATING A MESSAGE NOTIFICATION BASED ON SENSORY DETECTION - An electronic device ( | 02-02-2012 |
20120040654 | APPARATUS, AND AN ASSOCIATED METHOD, BY WHICH TO ACTIVATE A WIRELESS DEVICE FOR A TEMPORARY PERIOD - An apparatus, and an associated method, for providing secured effectuation of a communication service at a substitute mobile station. A user desiring temporarily to use a substitute mobile station to carry out the communication service initiates a request at the mobile station for its use. The communication service is available to be performed at the substitute mobile station for a selected period. Upon termination of the selected period, the communication service session ends, and data associated with the communication service session is deleted from the substitute mobile station. | 02-16-2012 |
20120040655 | Cell Phone Based Tampon Monitoring System - A cell phone based tampon monitoring system features a tampon with a sensor in it, a sensor hub in a wired signal connection with the sensor and in a wireless signal connection with a cell phone. Software installed on the cell phone initially identifies the sensor hub upon connection of a fresh tampon, communicates with the sensor hub via a secondary wireless port of the cell phone, processes the received signals, and utilizes the cell phone's user interfaces to privately inform the tampon user and/or telephone forward logged sensor data to a remote third party device. By utilizing conventional cell phones, women may simply and privately monitor their currently inserted tampon and get timely forecasts and alerts. Through ongoing use, a wealth of information about menstruation cycle and other related health issues may be utilized by women and/or their doctors without having to carry along any extra device. | 02-16-2012 |
20120040656 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE WORKING MODE THEREOF - An electronic device includes a display, a location-positioning module, a timer, a storage unit. The location-positioning module detects a current location. The timer determines current time. The storage unit includes a mode switch module. The mode switch module controls a current working mode based on the current location or the current time. | 02-16-2012 |
20120040657 | Distributing an Application - A network node comprising an input, a processor and an output, the processor being coupled to the input and the output; the input and output both being connected to at least one network; in which the processor is arranged so as to receive from the input an executable application and an associated set of requirements for the application, in which the processor is arranged to determine, on receipt of an application and the associated set of requirements, a set of destination network nodes which are reachable through at least one network, to which the output is connected based upon the requirements and to send the application to the destination nodes through the output. Thus, an application can be distributed through a telecommunications network specifying only the requirements that a destination network must satisfy, rather than the addresses of the destination network nodes. Furthermore, the application can be transferred between network nodes should user equipment move through the network. | 02-16-2012 |
20120040658 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SECURE IMMEDIATE WIRELESS ACCESS IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A wireless telephone and messaging system provides Secure Immediate Wireless Access (SIWA) to wireless telephones onto existing wireless networks. The SIWA protocol uses existing wireless network messaging to exchange information between wireless devices and a network server, referred to herein as an Intelligent Service Manager (ISM). The ISM acts as a gateway between wireless devices and wireless service provider, and provides the wireless devices with an immediate limited or unlimited access to the wireless network. The ISM can also deny access to the wireless network from unauthorized wireless devices. | 02-16-2012 |
20120046019 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR RESTRICTING MOBILE DEVICE SERVICES - In a mobile communications network one or more altered service zones may be defined. When a location aware mobile device enters an altered service zone, an application executing in the mobile device can alter the services of the device that are available to users. In one example, text or other screen-intensive services of a mobile device may be restricted or altered to voice based services as a user of the device drives through a school zone. | 02-23-2012 |
20120046020 | System and Method for Deactivating Mobile Communication Devices within a Vehicle - A system and method of deactivating complete functionality of mobile communication devices while in a moving automobile. The system comprises a series of integrated chips that communicate vehicle status to a universal cell phone mount, which communicates to corresponding cell phones within the vehicle. While the vehicle is in a state of motion or when the transmission is not in ‘Park’, all mobile communication functions are prohibited except that phone placed in the universal mount, which allows hands free and voice entry command via the vehicle sound system. The goal is to reduce the use of cell phones and other mobile devices while operating a motor vehicle, improving roadway safety for all drivers. | 02-23-2012 |
20120046021 | DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURABLE IP BASED WIRELESS DEVICE AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless communication and control system including a wireless device. There is a central server for storing communication protocols and control protocols and communicating the communication protocols and selectively communicating the control protocols between the wireless device and the central server. A communication protocol configures the system for communication and control protocols configure the system as one of a selection of intelligent appliance controllers. Alternately the control protocols configure the system as one of a selection of Internet terminals. The wireless device is any hand-held communication device, such as a hand-held computing device, wireless telephone, or cellular phone. | 02-23-2012 |
20120064873 | Method and apparatus for managing communication of compressed mode capabilities - A method in a mobile communications apparatus, the mobile communications apparatus operable to communicate with a wireless communications network using a plurality of frequency bands, the mobile communications apparatus being capable of performing a measurement of one frequency band while using another or the same frequency band, the method comprising sending a measurement capability message to the wireless communications network, the measurement capability message including an information element designating the requirement for compressed mode for more than one of a plurality of combinations of a particular frequency band being used when another or the same frequency band is measured. | 03-15-2012 |
20120064874 | MOVIE MODE AND CONTENT AWARDING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method is presented for awarding content to users of mobile devices for attending events, appearing at locations, or viewing audiovisual content. One embodiment also automatically alters the configuration of mobile devices, which is particularly useful in movie theaters. An application on the device recognizes an audible signal provided at the location or in the audiovisual content. The signal can also be used to unlock content. In this way, desired content is available only when the user has attended an event such as an event sponsored by the content creator. The content can relate to the event, and can be synchronized to the event. The signal can also trigger an application or unlock content at a store location. For example, a scavenger hunt can be guided by an application on the mobile device. | 03-15-2012 |
20120064875 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PROVIDING MESSAGING SERVICE AND CALLBACK FEATURE TO MOBILE STATIONS - Disclosed are an apparatus and method of performing automated administrative operations on a mobile device. The mobile device user may be unaware of any updates or other administrative operations being performed. One example method may include detecting that an event has occurred, interrupting a previously executed program, initiating a new program different from the previously executed program to perform a new function and notifying an application of the program interruption. The message may be a SMS type message. | 03-15-2012 |
20120064876 | HANDHELD ELECTRONIC DEVICE INCLUDING CROSS APPLICATION USE OF PHONE RELATED INPUTS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD - An improved handheld electronic device and an associated method provide added convenience for the user by enabling the user to quickly and easily initiate telephone related functions from applications other than the device's phone and address book applications using a dedicated phone related key. The device includes a plurality of use states and each one of the use states has an associated function that is to be initiated upon depression of the phone related key. When the phone related key is depressed, the current use state is determined and the function that is associated with the current use state is executed. | 03-15-2012 |
20120064877 | Method and Apparatus Having Improved Handling of State Transitions - A method, in a wireless communications device, for transitioning between communication states, the wireless communications device compliant for use in a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), the method comprising: checking for radio bearer mapping information for the communication state being transitioned to prior to sending an update message, where the transition between communication states is not a transition from a paging state to a bidirectional communication state using shared channels; and transitioning to the state to be transitioned to using the checked radio bearer mapping information for that state and sending the update message. | 03-15-2012 |
20120064878 | POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL METHOD, NETWORK ENTITIES, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM THEREFOR - It is provided a policy and charging control method carried out in a communication network. The communication network comprises a first network entity ( | 03-15-2012 |
20120071149 | PREVENTION OF ACCIDENTAL DEVICE ACTIVATION - The present application allows wake-up and unlock operations to occur using a single event, such as a single keystroke. Additionally, a check is made to ensure that activation was caused by human touch, not an object. In one embodiment, an area of a mobile device is designated as a wake-up area, which is separate from the touch screen. A user can touch the wake-up area to both activate the mobile device from a sleep mode and unlock the mobile device. In another embodiment, the wake-up area can be integrated into the touch screen, so that there is not an appearance of a separate button. Fingerprint checking and/or proximity sensors can also be integrated into the mobile device. | 03-22-2012 |
20120071150 | CALL MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR MOBILE PHONE - The present disclosure provides a call management method for a mobile phone. The mobile phone may be set with a preset period and a preset phone number. The mobile phone determines whether a call time of an incoming call is in the preset period. If the call time is in the preset period, the mobile phone may further determines whether a phone number of the incoming call conforms to the preset phone number. The mobile phone denies the incoming call when the phone number does not conform to the preset phone number. | 03-22-2012 |
20120071151 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY RESTRICTING IN-VEHICLE MOBILE DEVICE USAGE - Systems and methods are disclosed for computing various determinations at one or more mobile devices and/or central machines. In part, such determinations are computed based on analysis of one or more inputs originating at one or more sensors of one or more devices. Such determinations include determining an in-vehicle role, an in-vehicle location, a handheld state, and a vehicle class. Various transformations, modifications, and outputs can result from such determinations. Also disclosed are systems and methods for restricting operation of a mobile device, including restrictions that impede operation by a driver moreso than operation by a passenger. Also disclosed are systems and methods for orienting a coordinate system of a mobile device. | 03-22-2012 |
20120077480 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ROTATING A USER INTERFACE FOR A MOBILE DEVICE - A system and method for determining the orientation of a mobile device for displaying a graphical user interface and for activating an audio user interface in response to an incoming call or outgoing call. For the graphical user interface, depending on the detected orientation of the mobile device, the graphical user interface can be displayed in a first vertical orientation, a second vertical orientation, a first horizontal orientation, and a second horizontal orientation. For the audio user interface, depending on the detected orientation of the mobile device, a speaker and a microphone can be activated based on the detected vertical orientation so that the activated speaker is near the top of the mobile device and the activated microphone is near the bottom of mobile device. | 03-29-2012 |
20120083258 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO MANAGE PROCESSES OF A MOBILE DEVICE BASED ON AVAILABLE POWER RESOURCES - A system and method to manage processes of a mobile device based on available power resources is disclosed. In a particular embodiment, an apparatus is disclosed that includes an interface configured to receive a user selection of a scheduled program to be received at a mobile device. The apparatus also includes a battery threshold calculator configured to determine a battery charge threshold based on at least one of a duration of the scheduled program and a processing complexity of the scheduled program. The apparatus includes an alert generator configured to generate a battery alert notification prior to receiving the scheduled program in response to a determination that a battery charge of the mobile device at a starting time of the scheduled program does not satisfy the battery charge threshold. | 04-05-2012 |
20120083259 | Methods, Devices and Computer Program Products for Presenting Screen Content - Screen content from a first telecommunication device, such as a smartphone, is cast wirelessly and received by a second telecommunications device. The received screen content is formatted for presentation on the second telecommunications device. Screen content from among the received screen content may be selected for transmitting to a third telecommunications device. The selected screen content is transmitted to the third telecommunications device for presentation on a virtual screen of the third telcommunications device. | 04-05-2012 |
20120083260 | INFORMATION TERMINAL, INFORMATION PRESENTATION METHOD FOR AN INFORMATION TERMINAL, AND INFORMATION PRESENTATION PROGRAM - [Object] To enable a user to simply and easily confirm update information of a plurality of pieces of content data handled by a plurality of various application programs without any troublesome operation. [Solving Means] A plurality of update information display cards ( | 04-05-2012 |
20120088482 | AUTOMATED LAC ASSIGNMENTS FOR ENTERPRISE FEMTOS - In accordance with an example embodiment, there is disclosed herein an apparatus comprising an interface, and processing logic coupled with the interface. The processing logic receives via the interface a list of location area codes detected by an access point associated with a site group to be provisioned with a location area code (LAC). The processing logic removes from a predefined list of location area codes the location area codes detected by the access point. The processing logic selects a LAC from the predefined list for the site group after removing the location area codes detected by the access point. The processing logic provisions the access point with the selected LAC via the interface. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088483 | STANDBY MODE SWITCH SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE HAVING SAME - A standby mode switch system includes a mode selection module, a control module, and a position detection module. The mode selection module has a vibration mode. The control module is in communication with the mode selection module and the position detection module. The control module turns on the vibration mode when the mode selection module selects the vibration mode and an incoming call. The control module turns off the vibration mode when the position detection module detects a distance from the position detection module to an adjacent object element is greater than a predetermined value. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088484 | Sending messages with user generated content via a mobile communication network - The subject innovation relates to an add-on device for modifying a message which is to be transmitted from a mobile communication device to a recipient via a mobile communication network. The add-on device intercepts the message sent from a smart card of the mobile communication device to a radio module of the mobile communication device. Additionally, the add-on device modifies a visible content of the message and forwards the message with the modified visible content to the radio module for transmitting the message to the mobile communication network. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088485 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD - An information processing system includes a first apparatus including a position information transmission unit to transmit information on the position of the first apparatus; and a second apparatus including, a position information acquisition unit to acquire a position of the second apparatus; a position information receiving unit to receive the information on the position of the first apparatus; a relative-position information acquisition unit to acquire relative-position information of the second and the first apparatus on the basis of the information on the position of the second and the first apparatus; and a control unit to control a coupling mode of the second and the first apparatus on the basis of the relative-position information. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088486 | PERI-CRITICAL REFLECTION SPECTROSCOPY DEVICES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - Spectroscopy apparatuses oriented to the critical angle of the sample are described that detecting the spectral characteristics of a sample wherein the apparatus consists of an electromagnetic radiation source adapted to excite a sample with electromagnetic radiation introduced to the sample at a location at an angle of incidence at or near a critical angle of the sample; a transmitting crystal in communication with the electromagnetic radiation source and the sample, the transmitting crystal having a high refractive index adapted to reflect the electromagnetic radiation internally; a reflector adapted to introduce the electromagnetic radiation to the sample at or near an angle of incidence near the critical angle between the transmitting crystal and sample; and a detector for detecting the electromagnetic radiation from the sample. Also, provided herein are methods, systems, and kits incorporating the peri-critical reflection spectroscopy apparatus. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088487 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVISIONING LOCATION SPECIFIC CONTENT INFORMATION TO A MOBILE DEVICE - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for provisioning location specific content information to a mobile device are disclosed. In one example, a method includes detecting the presence of a mobile device at a designated area and receiving a location identifier associated with the designated area and a mobile device user identifier associated with the mobile device at a backend server. The method further includes utilizing the location identifier to obtain local flavor content data, wherein the local flavor content data provides customized information specific to the designated area, providing the local flavor content data to the mobile device using the mobile device user identifier, and applying the local flavor content data to a generic application in the mobile device to generate a local flavor application that is customized for use at the designated area. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088488 | METHOD TO CONTROL CONFIGURATION CHANGE TIMES IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method to control configuration change times is performed at a mobile wireless communication device when the mobile wireless communication device is connected to a wireless network. The mobile wireless device is connected in a first configuration mode. The mobile wireless communication device receives a control message from a radio network subsystem in the wireless network at a local receive time. The received control message includes a time indication for when to start a configuration mode change of the mobile wireless communication device, which the device extracts from the control message. The mobile wireless communication device reconfigures to a second configuration mode, different from the first configuration mode, based on the extracted time indication and the local receive time. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088489 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PORTABLE TERMINAL - Provided is an apparatus and method for controlling a portable terminal. The apparatus includes a contact sensing unit which senses an area of an external surface of the portable terminal contacted by a user as the user holds the portable terminal, a recognizing unit which recognizes a function mode of the portable terminal based on information about the contacted area sensed by the contact sensing unit, and a control unit which changes the portable terminal to a function mode recognized by the recognizing unit. Since a function mode of the portable terminal is controlled according to the way a user holds the portable terminal, convenience of changing a function mode of the portable terminal is provided through a single manipulation. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088490 | System and Related Circuits and Methods for Detecting and Locating Cellular Telephone Use Within a Geographical Area or Facility - A system for detecting and locating illicit cellular telephone use within a facility includes an array of radio frequency (RF) receivers, each receiver being placed in a predetermined location in the facility, and a central server, the receivers being in electrical communication with the central server. The server commands a group or groups of receivers to tune to a frequency of interest and to perform detailed sample rate measurements of the RF signal level received at the receivers. The array of receivers is organized into a plurality of measurement areas covering widely separated areas of the facility or different buildings of the facility, and the plurality of receivers of a measurement area is organized into a plurality of measurement groups covering areas of approximately uniform RF propagation conditions. Each receiver scans a frequency band of interest non-synchronously and independently of the other receivers in the array. Also, each receiver is preferably a direct-conversion receiver. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088491 | Method, Base Station and System for Adjusting Cell Wireless Configuration Parameter - The present invention relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular to a method, a base station and a system for adjusting a cell wireless configuration parameter. The method includes: obtaining system performance information of an adjustment participating cell and a peripheral cell of the adjustment participating cell under different wireless-configuration-related information; and adjusting a wireless configuration parameter of the adjustment participating cell according to the system performance information of the adjustment participating cell and the peripheral cell of the adjustment participating cell. According to the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present invention, by analyzing the system performance information of the adjustment participating cell and the system performance information of the peripheral cell of the adjustment participating cell at the adjustment participating cell, an adjustment work load can be decentralized, and a coverage adjustment of the entire system is accelerated. | 04-12-2012 |
20120094643 | OVER-THE-AIR CONTENT MANAGEMENT OF WIRELESS EQUIPMENT IN CONFINED-COVERAGE WIRELESS NETWORKS - System(s), apparatus(es), and method(s) are provided for managing content of wireless equipment (WE) over-the-air (OTA). Content is germane to feature(s) of the WE and is related to operation thereof. Management of the content is automatically implemented in response to attachment of the WE to a confined-coverage access point (AP). The WE and a network server enable, in part, such management. The confined-coverage AP enables exchange of signaling and data associated with management of the content amongst the WE and the network server. Content includes software (SW); management OTA of SW can include update of an in-use version of a SW application or related SW component(s). SW update signaling can comprise message(s) conveying a WE identifier and in-use version(s) of SW; request(s) for an update instruction; request(s) for at least one file associated with the SW; message(s) indicative of availability of version(s) of SW newer than the in-use version(s). | 04-19-2012 |
20120094644 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, NAVIGATION SYSTEM, AND DATA UPDATING METHOD - An information processing apparatus includes a data storage portion that stores data records in which second data is associated with first data; a communicating portion that communicates with an external device; an updating portion that receives the data records from the external device and updates the data records; a screen controlling portion that displays one or more of the first data or the second data, and that receives a specifying operation specifying the first data; a determining portion that determines whether the information processing apparatus is in a state, in which control that uses the first data will be started in response to the screen controlling portion receiving the specifying operation; and a caching portion that caches the first data specified by the specifying operation separately from the data records stored in the data storage portion, when it is determined that the information processing apparatus is in the state. | 04-19-2012 |
20120094645 | TASK SWITCHING BETWEEN TWO COMPUTING DEVICES - A method is provided to enable a user to operate a computing device to share data with another device. An event may be detected, where the event indicates the intent of the user to share content to the other device while already using a first computing device. Once the event is detected, information may be received on the second computing device. This information may be used to initiate an application on the other computing device. | 04-19-2012 |
20120094646 | BASE STATION AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - Provided is a base station capable of maintaining a communication quality of a communication terminal (mobile station) having registered its position with the base station itself, even if an operating frequency is changed. According to the present invention, the base station includes a transmission and reception unit | 04-19-2012 |
20120100841 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING A MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - According to embodiments described in the specification, a method, system and apparatus for configuring a mobile electronic device are provided. The method comprises storing, in a memory of a provisioning server, a plurality of service records and one of a plurality of operation type parameters in association with each service record; receiving, at the provisioning server, a registration request for the mobile electronic device, the registration request including one or more identifiers identifying ones of the service records that are maintained in the mobile electronic device; selecting, based on the received identifiers and the operation type parameters, at least one service record for transmission; and, transmitting the at least one selected service record. | 04-26-2012 |
20120100842 | EVOLVING ALGORITHMS FOR NETWORK NODE CONTROL IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK BY GENETIC PROGRAMMING - A method is provided of evolving algorithms for network node control in a telecommunications network by genetic programming to (a) generate algorithms (b) determining fitness level of the algorithms based on a model of the telecommunications network and (c) select the algorithm that meet a predetermined fitness level or number of generations of evolution. The model is updated and the steps (a), (b) and (c) are repeated automatically to provide a series of algorithms over time adapted to the changing model of the network for possible implementation in the network. | 04-26-2012 |
20120100843 | METHODS FOR HANDLING PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TRANSMISSIONS BY MOBILE STATION WITH SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY CARDS AND SYSTEMS UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for handling packet-switched data transmissions by a mobile station with a first subscriber identity card coupled to a first radio frequency (RF) module and a second subscriber identity card coupled to a second RF module, executed by an adapter of the mobile station, is provided. An uplink Internet protocol (IP) packet is received. Information regarding at least one of the received packet and hardware status of the mobile station is collected. One subscriber identity card is determined from the first and second subscriber identity cards according to the collected information. The received packet is transmitted to an IP network via the RF module corresponding to the determined subscriber identity card. | 04-26-2012 |
20120100844 | Method and Arrangements to Reconfigure a Radio Base Station in a Wireless Communication System - A Radio Base Station (RBS) and method of operating the same are provided. The RBS may enable a fast and flexible reconfiguration of the system from a first configuration to a second confirmation where the RBS is triggered to initiate a system reconfiguration and the reconfiguration is performed by starting a new cell with the wanted new configuration in parallel with the original cell. During a certain time period, both the original and the new cell are available. Thereafter, the original cell is shut down. The time offset between the start up of the new cell and the shut down of the original cell may be long enough to ensure that user equipment associated with the original cell can be handed over or can reselect the new cell. The time offset may be short enough to reduce the interference between the original and new cells. | 04-26-2012 |
20120100845 | Power Saving in a Radio Base Station by Determining Number of Active and Idle Users Camping on Cell - Methods of operating a radio base station of a first cell in a wireless cellular network are disclosed. Each of one or more user equipment devices of the wireless cellular network has an idle mode in which the radio base station is not aware of whether the user equipment device is currently camping on the first cell, and an active mode in which the radio base station is aware of whether the user equipment device is currently camping on the first cell. By setting the radio base station in a disabled state based on various criteria, energy may be saved in the radio base station. | 04-26-2012 |
20120108223 | FREQUENCY CONFIGURATION OF FEMTO-CELL BASE STATIONS - A method and apparatus for reconfiguring an operational frequency and associated bandwidth used by a femto-cell base station are disclosed. The femto-cell is configured to provide coverage to a User Equipment by connecting to a core telecommunications network via a gateway device. The method includes checking a list of frequencies and associated bandwidths available to a wireless network interface of the femto-cell base station and determining if any of the frequencies in the list matches the operational frequency supported by the User Equipment to which the femto-cell base station is providing coverage. If at least one frequency matches the one supported by the User Equipment, a second frequency is selected from the list of frequencies, said second frequency being established as the operational frequency of the femto-cell base station. | 05-03-2012 |
20120108224 | USING QUALITY OF SERVICE TO CONTROL HARDWARE FOR LOW BATTERY SCENARIOS - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure relate to methods for reducing power consumption of a mobile device while maintaining QoS of communication links. If the available battery power is below a predefined threshold, then several power-saving techniques may be triggered that increase an air time of the mobile device by shutting down one or more modem hardware components. | 05-03-2012 |
20120108225 | MOBILE TRAFFIC CATEGORIZATION AND POLICY FOR NETWORK USE OPTIMIZATION WHILE PRESERVING USER EXPERIENCE - Systems and methods of mobile traffic categorization and policy implementation for network use optimization are disclosed. In one aspect, embodiments of the present disclosure include a method, which may be implemented on a system, of detecting an activity state of an application on a mobile device to which traffic is originated from or directed to, detecting a time criticality of data contained in the traffic to be sent between the mobile device and the host server, determining a timing with which to allow the traffic to pass through, based on the activity state or the time criticality and/or controlling radio use on the mobile device based on the timing with which the traffic is allowed to pass through. The method may further include selecting a network configuration in the wireless network for use in passing traffic to and from the mobile device. | 05-03-2012 |
20120115453 | SELF-AWARE PROFILE SWITCHING ON A MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICE - In one implementation, a computer-implemented method includes detecting, by a mobile computing device, a current context associated with the mobile computing device, the current context being external to the mobile computing device and indicating a current state of the mobile computing device in its surrounding environment. The method can also include identifying, based on at least a first portion of the current context, a location description for the mobile computing device, wherein the location description includes a textual description of the location; and determining, based on the identified location description and at least a second portion of the current context, whether to switch the mobile computing device from operating using a current profile to operating using a second profile, wherein the current profile and the second profile each define one or more settings of the mobile computing device. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115454 | Timer Configuration Method and Related Communication Device - A timer configuration method for a core network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The timer configuration method comprises receiving a mobility management request from a mobile device; and setting a mobile reachable timer to a value no less than a back-off timer value when the core network rejects the mobility management request with the back-off timer value. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115455 | SECURE BOOTSTRAP PROVISIONING OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES IN CARRIER NETWORKS - Disclosed herein is a secure initial provisioning system for communicating data between an electronic device and a management server in a carrier network. The management server may be adapted to facilitate secure initialization provisioning or bootstrap provisioning. An initialization-provisioning table may be made available in the electronic device during manufacturing, or may also be provided in a SIM card. The initialization-provisioning table provides security information, such as keys, for example, and enables secure and spoof-proof push-based initial/bootstrap provisioning or bootstrap of electronic devices. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115456 | LOW POWER DUAL PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE FOR MULTI MODE DEVICES - A mobile computing device with multiple modes, for example, wireless communication and personal computing, has an application processor and a communication processor. In the computing mode, the application processor is the master processor. In the communication mode, the application processor is deenergized to conserve battery power, with the communication processor functioning as the master processor by accessing the device's peripheral bus using the memory interface of the communication processor. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115457 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSOCIATING A SUBSCRIBER DIRECTORY IDENTIFIER TO A SUBSCRIBER IDENTIFIER - According to one embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a method, in a communication network, of associating a subscriber directory identifier to a first subscriber identifier. The method comprises receiving a request to connect a communication device to the network, the request including a subscriber identifier derived from the first subscriber identifier, determining the first subscriber identifier from the received subscriber identifier, and associating a subscriber directory identifier with the determined subscriber identifier. | 05-10-2012 |
20120122440 | Positioning Reference Signal Assistance Data Signaling for Enhanced Interference Coordination in a Wireless Communication Network - A method in a wireless communication terminal is disclosed. The method includes receiving a first signal including a desired second signal and an interference component, wherein the interference component includes at least a third signal transmitted in an Almost Blank Subframe (ABS) by a neighbor cell, and configuring the wireless communication terminal to employ interference reduction to process the first signal based on a configuration of the interference component. | 05-17-2012 |
20120122441 | DATA COMMUNICATION SETTING CONTROL METHOD BASED ON SUBSCRIBER IDENTIFICATION MODULE AND PORTABLE DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method and a portable device that support the control of a data communication setting are provided. The portable terminal includes a Subscriber Identification Module (SIM) card interface into which the SIM is inserted. The device further includes a control unit, a memory unit, and a radio frequency unit. The control unit extracts Mobile Country Code/Mobile Network Code (MCC/MNC) information from the inserted SIM, determines data communication setting information corresponding to the MCC/MNC information from a policy table containing the data communication setting information for each MCC/MNC information, and establishes a data communication by using the determined data communication setting information. The memory unit stores the policy table, and the radio frequency unit performs the established data communication with a specific service operator network related to the SIM under the control of the control unit. | 05-17-2012 |
20120122442 | ESTABLISHMENT OF A TRANSCODER-FREE OPERATION CONNECTION - When a request is sent by a switching unit, relating to the use of at least one subset of a codec mode configuration for the establishment of a transcoder-free operation connection by a radio network controller, it is checked whether the at least one requested subset is supported by the radio network controller. If the at least one subset of at least one codec mode configuration is supported, a transcoder-free operation connection to the switching unit and to the communication terminal is established by the radio network controller. Furthermore, a message relating to the at least one subset of the codec mode configuration to be used is signalled from the radio network controller to the communication terminal for the transmission of data. | 05-17-2012 |
20120122443 | SOFTWARE OUTPUT DESTINATION HANDLING TERMINAL, SYSTEM, METHOD, AND PROGRAM FOR THE SAME - A software output destination handling terminal that handles a display terminal as a software output destination. Data indicating a type of the display terminal is received from the display terminal with which communication connection has been established, and data indicating a usage status of the user is obtained. Data indicating a display rule for a software application to be displayed under the usage status is obtained. In the rule, information designating the display terminal type is associated with information designating a category of the software application to be displayed at the display terminal having the type. Based on the rule, the category of the software application to be displayed at the relevant display terminal is specified. Based on the category, a software application belonging to the category is specified among software applications. Data indicating an instruction to the display terminal to display the software application is generated and sent thereto. | 05-17-2012 |
20120129509 | OPTIMIZING LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) CAPACITY USING AN ADAPTIVE DORMANCY TIMER - A device classifies access or control channel signals into a first class or a second class, initializes a dormancy timer associated with the device, and sets the dormancy timer to a default value. The device also sets a signal target utilization threshold, receives actual signals via the access or control channel, and identifies, when a number of the actual signals exceeds the signal target utilization threshold, a particular signal, from the actual signals, as belonging to the first class or the second class. The device further increases the default value of the dormancy timer when the particular signal belongs to the first class, and decreases the default value of the dormancy timer when the particular signal belongs to the second class. | 05-24-2012 |
20120129510 | METHODS FOR REMINDING A USER OF A TASK ASSOCIATED WITH A COMMUNICATION - Methods for reminding a user of a task associated with a communication are disclosed herein. One example of the method involves reminding the user of a task associated with an incoming communication, and another example of the method involves reminding the user of a task associated with an outgoing communication. | 05-24-2012 |
20120129511 | MOBILE PHONE AND OPERATING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile phone operating method including the following steps is provided. A first key of a mobile phone is pressed. The mobile phone is shaken as the first key is pressed, such that a first gesture is sensed by a g-sensor of the mobile phone. Whether a combination of the first key and the first gesture corresponds to a preset function is determined by a processing unit of the mobile phone. The preset function is performed by the mobile phone if the determination is affirmative. | 05-24-2012 |
20120129512 | CORDLESS TELEPHONE SET - Disclosed is a cordless telephone set capable of suppressing power consumption during power failures to lengthen the time for a call. A cordless telephone ( | 05-24-2012 |
20120135723 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A PUBLISH/SUBSCRIBE MECHANISM OVER AN AD-HOC MESH NETWORK - An approach is provided for a publish/subscribe mechanism over an ad-hoc mesh network. A module receives a request to either publish or subscribe to information provided over an ad-hoc mesh network. The module then determines at least one data schema associated with the information, wherein an identification of the information for publication or subscription is based, at least in part, on the at least one data schema. | 05-31-2012 |
20120142327 | System and Method of Wireless Communication - A method of providing wireless communication service to a mobile phone is provided. The method comprises identifying common mobile phone applications and selectively supported mobile phone applications, installing the common mobile phone applications and the selectively supported mobile phone applications in read only memory of the mobile phone, each of the selectively supported applications associated with a selection switch initially disabled. The method further comprises, when activating the mobile phone, enabling at least one of the selection switches and writing at least one reference to branded content to a random access memory of the mobile phone based on a service plan associated with the mobile phone. | 06-07-2012 |
20120142328 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ASSISTING IN POWERING ON SLEEPING NETWORK ENTITIES - Techniques are provided to facilitate offloading of mobile entities from a serving network entity. For example, there is provided a location-based method that involves, in response to a load of the requesting entity exceeding a load threshold, identifying candidate network entities to which to offload a user equipment (UE), each of the candidate network entities being in sleep mode. The method may involve determining coverage and location information for the candidate network entities, and determining location information for the UE. The method may involve selecting a given network entity to turn ON based at least in part on the coverage information and the location information. The method may involve sending an ON-request message to the at least one selected network entity, the ON-request message including a timer that can be used to deactivate the selected network entity in case it is not useful in offloading the serving network entity. | 06-07-2012 |
20120142329 | System and Method for IMEI Detection and Alerting - A system and method for detecting and storing information regarding a mobile communications device within a mobile communications network. Initially, a first data record is received at a subscriber/device database comprising subscriber/device data. Next, a second data record is received at the subscriber/device database comprising additional subscriber/device data. A first data record of a subscriber may then be compared to a second data record of the same subscriber, and if the first data record is different from the second data record a service provider may be notified. | 06-07-2012 |
20120142330 | System and Method For Transactional Application Lifecycle Management For Mobile Devices - The present disclosure relates to networks and lifecycle transaction management of mobile devices. There is provided a system and method for managing the lifecycle of applications on mobile devices. The system has components for implementing a method comprising the steps of creating a transaction context comprising a transaction command, sending the transaction context in a transaction context message to a plurality of mobile devices, and evaluating an ending scenario based on transaction statuses of the plurality of mobile devices. | 06-07-2012 |
20120142331 | EVOLVING ALGORITHMS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK NODES BY GENETIC PROGRAMMING - A method is provided of evolving algorithms for network node control in a telecommunications network node by updating a model of the network node, and genetic programming by (a) generating algorithms, (b) determining fitness level of the algorithms based on the model of the network node, and (c) selecting the algorithm that meet a predetermined fitness level. The steps (a), (b) and (c) are repeated automatically to provide a series of algorithms over time adapted to the changing model of the network node for possible implementation in the network node. | 06-07-2012 |
20120149350 | STEALTH MODE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A device is configured to enter a stealth mode in response to a trigger and/or triggering event. The trigger/triggering event can be a voice command, a depression(s) of a button(s) or pattern of buttons on the device, a keyboard and/or softkey entry, entry of a pattern on the display of the device, a designated movement of the device, detection of an event, and/or lack of detection of an event. The device activates the stealth mode without any indication to the user of the device that the device is activating the stealth mode. The stealth mode operates concurrently with all other functions of the device. A virtual secure channel can be established that allows communication with the device without providing an indication that the device is communicating via the virtual secure channel. A token can be utilized for authentication and to discriminate be stealth and normal modes. | 06-14-2012 |
20120149351 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK ASSISTED DISCOVERY OF FEMTO CELLS - Method and system for a femto serving switch system. A request for registering a wireless device with a femto cell environment is received. The wireless device is registered based on the request with respect to the femto cell environment. Information related to the femto cell environment and one or more applications is then obtained, based on which a femto discovery notification (FDN) is generated. Such generated FDN is then delivered to the wireless device to assist the wireless device to operate in the femto cell environment. | 06-14-2012 |
20120149352 | CONTEXT AWARE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT FOR RESOURCE CONSERVATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods of context aware traffic management for network and device resource conservation are disclosed. In one aspect, embodiments of the present disclosure include a method, which may be implemented on a system, for using characteristics of user activity on the mobile device to locally adjust behavior of the mobile device to optimize battery consumption on the mobile device, using characteristics of user activity on the mobile device to locally adjust behavior of the mobile device to optimize battery consumption on the mobile device, and/or using characteristics of user activity on the mobile device to locally adjust behavior of the mobile device to optimize battery consumption on the mobile device. | 06-14-2012 |
20120149353 | DECISION SUPPORT - Decision support information is exchanged over a secure wireless network among mobile computing devices, and also optionally a central command computer. Each of the mobile computing devices has one or more sensors connected and interfaced to it. Output data from the sensor(s) can be sent over the network to one or more other devices on the network. A command for a sensor also can be sent over the network to cause the sensor to take some action such as turning on or turning off. The mobile computing devices on the network automatically share plug-in software components needed by any of the devices to view transmitted sensor output data and/or act on sensor commands. | 06-14-2012 |
20120149354 | VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM - A vehicle information system includes: a vehicle-mounted device, a network processing device and a service center which is adapted for providing service for the vehicle-mounted device. A service configuration channel is configured between the network processing device and the service center and is adapted for transmitting configuration data which are adapted for configuring service that is provided for the vehicle-mounted device. The service configuration channel is established on basis of connection to internet. A service channel system is configured between the vehicle-mounted device and the service center. A complete solution for providing information service may be provided by the vehicle information system, thereby improving the quality of user experience while using a vehicle. | 06-14-2012 |
20120149355 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVISIONING A THIRD PARTY MOBILE DEVICE EMULATOR - A method and apparatus for provisioning a third party mobile device emulator from desktop provisioning software, the method having the steps of: designating a common file space between the third party mobile device emulator and the desktop provisioning software; writing files to the common file space from one of the third party mobile device emulator and the desktop provisioning software; and reading the files from the other of the third party mobile device emulator and the desktop provisioning software. | 06-14-2012 |
20120157069 | Selective Alert Processing - A computer-implemented method includes receiving, at a vehicle computing system, a notification that an incoming communication is being sent to a wireless device in communication with the vehicle computing system. The method also includes determining that a do not disturb function is active in the vehicle computing system and blocking a notification to a driver regarding the incoming communication. Finally, this method includes sending a command from the vehicle computing system to the wireless device to silence any notification that the wireless device provides in conjunction with the incoming communication. | 06-21-2012 |
20120157070 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO EXECUTE INSTRUCTIONS ON MOBILE DEVICES - A method and system for executing instructions on a mobile device is provided. The method may involve the steps of dialing an alphanumeric code on the mobile device, transmitting the alphanumeric code to a server, requesting the server for an instruction corresponding to the alphanumeric code, receiving the instruction from the server, and executing the instruction on the mobile device. | 06-21-2012 |
20120157071 | Local circuit switched fallback cancellation mechanism - A Method of cancelling a Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) procedure from a source network, particularly E-UTRAN, to a target network, particularly GERAN or UTRAN, for a user equipment is described, wherein a first message for initiating a CSFB procedure is sent from the user equipment to the source network and wherein the cancellation of the CSFB procedure is performed after the first message for initiating the CSFB procedure has been sent, characterised in that after the cancellation of the CSFB procedure has been initiated, the user equipment sends a second message to the source network comprising a new cause value said cause value characterising the cancellation of the CSFB procedure. | 06-21-2012 |
20120157072 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-STANDBY MODE IN A COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method for communication in a communication terminal having a single communication module and at least two Subscriber Identification Module (SIM) cards is provided. The method includes performing a first call mode when a call is connected through a first base station in a standby mode by using the communication module and a first SIM card through a first time slot in each frame allocated by the first base station, and performing, when a second call is connected through a second base station while performing the first call mode, a second call mode using the communication module and a second SIM card through a second time slot in each frame allocated by the second base station, the second time slot being spaced apart from the first time slot. | 06-21-2012 |
20120157073 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal including a wireless communication unit configured to wirelessly communicate with at least one other terminal; a touchscreen configured to display information and receive touch inputs; a sensor unit configured to detect a gravity characteristic of the mobile terminal; and a controller configured to output a user-settable gravity sensitivity threshold option for setting a gravity detected sensitivity of the sensor unit, to receive a selection signal indicating a selection of a first gravity sensitivity threshold, to determine the mobile terminal is in a state of falling when the detected gravity characteristic of the mobile terminal is less than or equal to the selected first gravity sensitivity threshold, and to automatically execute a predetermined function mapped to the determined falling state. | 06-21-2012 |
20120157074 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING NETWORK RESOURCE PLANNING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Prior to being admitted into the network, a base station establishes a set of operating parameters. Next, a search is performed to determine the presence and configuration of neighboring base stations and current network conditions. Based on the search results, an improved operating configuration is determined for the base station and the base station's operating parameters are adjusted. Once the base station is admitted to and is operating in the network, the base station continues to monitor neighboring base stations and network conditions and adjusts its operating parameters accordingly. | 06-21-2012 |
20120157075 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USER PROFILING FROM GATHERING USER DATA THROUGH INTERACTION WITH A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A system, method, and wireless communication device that profiles a user thereof, or a user at a second wireless communication device in communication therewith. The wireless communication device gathers user data for a user thereof, or from a user at a second wireless communication device, and either directly generates, or has generated elsewhere, a user profile, such as a personality or psychological profile, or medical diagnosis of the user, and can display the user profile to the user and/or alter the wireless communication device functionality based upon the user profile. The gathered user data can be from physical user interaction with the wireless communication device, or from other equipment resident at the wireless communication device, such as a camera and medical diagnostic devices. | 06-21-2012 |
20120164999 | MOBILE TERMINAL INCLUDING A PLURALITY OF USER IDENTIFICATION MODULE AND SERVER CONTROLLING OPERATION OF THE MOBILE TERMINAL - Provided is a mobile terminal including a plurality of user identification modules. The mobile terminal includes a first user identification module configured to be assigned with a first identification number and receive a service from a first service network, a second user identification module configured to be assigned with a second identification number and receive a service from a second service network, and a controller configured to request the second service network to perform a predetermined service using the second identification number when a user requests the predetermined service using the first identification number and when the first user identification module is in an inactive state and the second user identification module is in an active state. | 06-28-2012 |
20120165000 | Method and System for Bypassing Called Intelligence - The invention provides a method for bypassing intelligent services of a called user, applied in the case that a GMSC and VMSC are not the same MSC. The method comprises: the GMSC sending information to the VMSC as to whether the intelligent services of the called user are bypassed in the GMSC; the VMSC determining whether the intelligent services are bypassed in the GMSC, and determining whether the intelligent services are bypassed in the VMSC; and when the VMSC determines that the intelligent services are bypassed in the GMSC and are not bypassed in the VMSC, the VMSC not triggering the intelligent services; when the VMSC determines that the intelligent services are not bypassed in the GMSC and are bypassed in the VMSC, the VMSC sending a call release message to the GMSC. The invention further provides a system and VMSC for bypassing intelligent services of a called user. | 06-28-2012 |
20120165001 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND BASE STATION FOR CONFIGURING MULTI-MODE BASE STATION - A method and system for configuring a multi-mode base station is disclosed so that a network system may specify a radio access mode for the base station. In the present invention, a configuration control unit inside the base station reports resource capabilities of the base station to a configuration decision unit. The configuration decision unit determines a mode for the base station according to network planning and the reported resource capabilities, generates a configuration file for the base station according to the determined mode, and delivers the configuration file to the base station. The configuration control unit configures relevant resources of the base station according to the received configuration file. | 06-28-2012 |
20120165002 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TIMING OF NETWORK PERFORMANCE LOGGING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system controls timing of network performance information logging of a cellular network by configuring a mobile device to automatically collect data about physical characteristics of the cellular network and log that data. The mobile device initially receives network performance information logging configuration from its registered cellular network. Based on the configuration, the mobile device configures itself to collect and log the network performance information relating to physical characteristics of the cellular network. While in idle mode, the mobile device collects and logs the information. A logging duration timer corresponds to a specified time duration over which the mobile device logs network performance information. If the mobile device starts the logging duration timer at the time of configuration, it maintains the timer even after the transition to idle mode. The mobile device may also start the logging duration timer after it transitions to idle mode. | 06-28-2012 |
20120172022 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING ETIQUETTE CALL MODE IN MOBILE DEVICE - An apparatus and method are provided to output a received call with a volume adjusted to a reference level range in the etiquette call mode. In the method for providing the etiquette call mode of a mobile device, the apparatus determines whether the etiquette call mode is activated in a call mode. When the etiquette call mode is activated, the apparatus establishes a transmission gain to a given gain value and also establishes a reception gain to a specific gain value corresponding to a minimum receiving volume level. Then the apparatus amplifies a received call by means of the established reception gain, adjusts a volume of the amplified received call to a given reference level range, and outputs the adjusted received call through a speaker. | 07-05-2012 |
20120172023 | MOBILE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR COLLECTING LOCATION BASED USER QUALITY DATA - A mobile device executes software. The software collects realistic and accurate user quality information without degrading the user experience of the mobile device during the data collection process. The software operates as a background application, and may have a user interface, and the software is remotely controllable and updatable by an external server. | 07-05-2012 |
20120178429 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A WIRELESS TERMINAL AS AN ACCESS POINT AND WIRELESS TERMINAL - A method for operating a wireless terminal as an access point—access point terminal ( | 07-12-2012 |
20120178430 | PROPAGATION OF CHANGES IN A NETWORK - A network of nodes and connections is provided, each connection connecting two nodes. A method of operating a first node in the network includes detecting a change in a node connected to the first node, identifying that the number of nodes connected to the first node with the detected change is above a predetermined threshold, and executing the detected change at the first node and/or propagating the detected change to one or more nodes connected to the first node that do not have the detected change. | 07-12-2012 |
20120184258 | Hierarchical Device type Recognition, Caching Control & Enhanced CDN communication in a Wireless Mobile Network - The present disclosure describes an apparatus and method for recognizing the mobile device type by information monitored from multiple means, such as by transparently monitoring Control Plane protocols, and monitoring user plane protocols (for example user agent header in HTTP protocols), and using such information for controlling data-caching operations, selectively delivering content, and selecting alternative interfaces/networks when available. Additionally, the invention discloses methods to propagate the learned information through header enrichment to external devices, such as content servers or CDN devices. The apparatus and methods are applicable to an application/content-aware caching device in a wireless mobile network that operates as an inline transparent device intercepting control plane and user plane protocols. | 07-19-2012 |
20120184259 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING QoS SERVICE OF APPLICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and a system are capable of supporting a Quality of Service (QoS) service in a wireless communication system. The method for supporting the QoS service includes checking a service capability of an application; when the application provides a QoS service, requesting QoS configuration to a QoS server; and when receiving a QoS configuration response signal from the QoS server, checking whether QoS of the application is allocated, in the QoS configuration response signal. | 07-19-2012 |
20120184260 | HANDHELD ELECTRONIC DEVICE INCLUDING CROSS APPLICATION USE OF PHONE RELATED INPUTS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD - An improved handheld electronic device and an associated method provide added convenience for the user by enabling the user to quickly and easily initiate telephone related functions from applications other than the device's phone and address book applications using a dedicated phone related key. The device includes a plurality of use states and each one of the use states has an associated function that is to be initiated upon depression of the phone related key. When the phone related key is depressed, the current use state is determined and the function that is associated with the current use state is executed. | 07-19-2012 |
20120184261 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME, AND RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS - A mobile communication system according to the present invention capable of efficiently reducing power consumption of a radio base station apparatus includes a radio base station apparatus | 07-19-2012 |
20120190352 | Method and Apparatus for self-adaptive adjustment of Pilot Power of Femto Cell - A method and apparatus for self-adaptive adjustment of pilot power of Femto Cell are provided in the present disclosure, which adopt a new power control mechanism. After the pilot power of a Femto Cell is initialized, the Femto Cell determines the adjustment value of the pilot power according to the signal-to-noise ratio reported by the HUE in real time, accordingly controls the pilot power of the Femto Cell accessed by each HUE, and enables the pilot power of the current Femto Cell to just satisfy the lowest transmission signal power required by the signal of the HUE in the coverage of the Femto Cell. The present disclosure can maximally reduce the interference from the pilot power of the Femto Cell in the macro cell users and the interference between the Femto Cells, while still guarantees the lowest transmission power needed by the HUE. | 07-26-2012 |
20120196585 | Global Automatic Cellular Provisioning - The described method and system provide for the provisioning of a telematics unit on a telematics-equipped vehicle with cellular service information without pre-loading the information during manufacture of the vehicle or telematics unit. A telematics unit may be manufactured without cellular service information (e.g. MIN, MDN, carrier information) pre-loaded. At the vehicle assembly plant where the telematics unit is installed on a vehicle, the assembly plant's programming system may determine the final country destination for the vehicle and program the destination of the vehicle into the telematics unit. The assembly plant may further obtain vehicle attribute data (including a cellular identifier for the telematics unit) and send the data to a TSP. The TSP may then work with the wireless carrier in the destination country to assign the telematics unit a phone number and other cellular service information. After the telematics unit has determined that the vehicle is at the destination, the telematics unit may connect to a network using cellular commands to request an “over-the-air” cellular programming session. The wireless carrier may then push a phone number and other cellular service information into the telematics unit through the over-the-air cellular programming session. | 08-02-2012 |
20120196586 | TRANSFERRING CONTENT TO A MOBILE DEVICE - In general, apparatuses, methods and computer program products for transferring content to a mobile device are disclosed. Particularly, a system is disclosed that provides for pushing content from an external apparatus such as an automated teller machine (ATM), smart poster, contactless payment terminal, etc. to a mobile device or allowing the mobile device to pull such content from the external apparatus. The content may include one or more coupons, ads, or offers, images, financial receipts, account-related documentation, a reissued card, a new card, a prepaid card, or the like. | 08-02-2012 |
20120196587 | Methods And Apparatus For Use In Switching User Account Data And Operations Between Two Different Mobile Communication Devices - A host server is configured to switch communications associated with an account between first and second mobile devices. The server stores a mapping of the account to a first PIN which identifies the first mobile device, and communicates messages via a wireless network based on the stored mapping using the first PIN for data synchronization therebetween. The server then receives a request for device switching. In response, the server switches the mapping of the account to a second PIN which identifies a second mobile device, and communicates messages via the wireless network based on the switched stored mapping using the second PIN for data is synchronization therebetween. The mapping of the account to the first PIN may be maintained even after switching the stored mapping to the second PIN, for a subsequent request for switching back to the first mobile device for the account. | 08-02-2012 |
20120202475 | Lightweight Application Level Policy Management For Portable Wireless Devices Under Varying Network - Devices and methods are disclosed which relate to dynamically adapting network policy on a wireless communications device to account for changes in network environment. These network policies are enforced, at least in part, at the device level, as opposed to solely at the network edges. The network policy is broad so as to encompass changes in network environment, such as increases and decreases in available bandwidth and presence or absence of security. | 08-09-2012 |
20120202476 | METHOD OF ACTIVATING A DEVICE - A method of activating a device involves establishing communication between the device and another device and receiving, at the other device, a message including activation information from a third party facility. The activation information includes a header and a mobile dialing number. The method further includes using the header to identify the message as an activation message for the device and, via the device, retrieving the identified message from the other device. The mobile dialing number is stored in a memory associated with the device, where the mobile dialing number enables the third party facility to initiate communication with the device. | 08-09-2012 |
20120208514 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA, DISPLAY DEVICE AND MOBILE TERMINAL USING THE SAME - A method of transmitting and receiving data between a mobile terminal and a display device is provided. The method establishes network connection for communication with the mobile terminal, detects a touch location of the mobile terminal when the mobile terminal touches the display device, transmits and receives data to and from the mobile terminal over the connected network, and processes the transmitted and received data according to the detected touch location of the mobile terminal. | 08-16-2012 |
20120208515 | Cross-Technology Coverage Mapping System and Method for Modulating Scanning Behaviour of a Wireless User Equipment (UE) Device - A method for modulating scanning behavior of a wireless user equipment (UE) device includes determining a geographic area location where the wireless UE device is located and responsive to determining that a radio access technology (RAT) previously available in the geographic area location is not currently available, modifying the frequency of searches for the radio access technology. A corresponding wireless user device is also shown. | 08-16-2012 |
20120208516 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING A MESSAGE FROM A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method, apparatus, and computer-readable media for sending a message from a multi-mode wireless device in a multiple communication mode environment. A preferred communication mode is selected from a plurality of communication modes supported by the wireless device. A preferred message service is selected based on contents of the message and the preferred communication mode. Then, compatibility of the preferred message service with an active communication mode of the wireless device is determined If the preferred message service is compatible with the active communication mode, the message is sent by using the preferred service according to the active communication mode. | 08-16-2012 |
20120208517 | IDENTIFYING THE LOCATION OF MOBILE STATIONS - A user of a first mobile station, which is lost either in silent mode or switch-off mode may send a ‘Find-Me’ message to the first mobile station from a second mobile station. The first mobile station, after receiving the ‘Find-Me’ message, may power-on the first mobile station enabling the first mobile station to receive voice call and messages. Also, if the first mobile station is in silent mode, the first mobile station may change the profile of the first mobile station from a silent to a regular-noisy mode. The user of first mobile station may call-up the first mobile station and identifies the location of the first mobile station by tracking the ringing sound. The first mobile station may send a location message to the second mobile station in response to receiving the ‘Find-Me’ message that may be used to identify the location of the first mobile station. | 08-16-2012 |
20120214460 | ADVANCED MULTI-NETWORK CLIENT DEVICE FOR WIDEBAND MULTIMEDIA ACCESS TO PRIVATE AND PUBLIC WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless device (e.g., a wireless smart phone) uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data, or other position-indicating data, to accurately determine its location in relation to multi-layered wireless networks that the device may see concurrently. If location information is available, the device employs a user-defined priority table to select the order of user-contracted networks available at that location in which the device will register. If location information is unavailable, the device employs a technology priority table to select Common Air Interface (CAI) options for the invention device radio parameters (e.g., GSM, cdma2000, IS-136, IEEE 802.11x, etc.) to search for an available network to access. Information is gathered and stored in databases within the invention device allowing it to be registered in multiple wireless networks. The inventive device provides unique access codes to each wireless network with which a user has contracted, without the intervention of any “anchor” (home) network. The invention facilitates equivalent “home”, or personalized, service in any network by using these features for automatic technology adaptation. This allows the invention device to receive service as if it is in a “home” network no matter what network it is traveling through. The invention provides a ubiquitous experience allowing the user to traverse multiple wireless networks with seamless access to multiple systems and services provided by those networks. It also provides a platform to facilitate the customization of wireless services for business customers. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214461 | WIRELESS DEVICES AND METHODS OF OPERATING WIRELESS DEVICES BASED ON THE PRESENCE OF ANOTHER PERSON - A method of operating a device for a user is provided. The method includes operating the device in a first mode; receiving an indication of a first person in the presence of the user; retrieving a first profile associated with the first person; and operating the device in a second mode based, at least in part, on the first profile. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214462 | WIRELESS CHARGING METHOD AND APPARATUS - A terminal can include a wireless charger configured to wirelessly receive a power signal from a charging pad to charge power; and a controller configured to control an incoming call notification mode to be changed from a vibration mode to a bell sound mode or silent mode when an event is generated on the charging pad. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214463 | DETECTING USE OF A MOBILE DEVICE BY A DRIVER OF A VEHICLE, SUCH AS AN AUTOMOBILE - A system and method for detecting that a driver of a vehicle is using a mobile device is described. In some examples, the system uses information identifying a rate of speed of a vehicle and information identifying a location of a mobile device, such as information extracted from images taken of the vehicle and/or distance measurements performed within the vehicle, to determine whether a driver is using a mobile device. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214464 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVING ROAD SAFETY USING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A wireless communication device includes an antenna coupled to a wireless communications transceiver, a processor, and a vehicle safety application. When the vehicle safety application is executed, it causes the processor to cause the wireless communication device to join a basic service set through the antenna and wireless communications transceiver. The application also causes the processor to determine a location of the wireless communication device, receive location information indicative of a location of another wireless communication device in the basic service set, and generate an alert based on the determined location and the received location information. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214465 | LOCATION-BASED CONTROL OF FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A mobile personal communication device, such as a mobile telephone (cellular, satellite, or the like), that is capable of determining its geographic location, through an on-board GPS unit or other geographic locating mechanism, has a function that is disabled, enabled, modified or otherwise controlled when the personal communication device is determined to be within a defined area. The function controlled based on geographic region may include: the transmission of a data stream, such as a video or audio data stream, from or to the personal communication device; the disamblement or modification of ringers or other mechanism for audible notification of an event, for example, an incoming call or message from an external caller; the disablement or modification of an on-board camera or other on-board recording mechanism; and/or the disablement or modification of screen savers, disabling or modification of display lighting or backlighting or other functions of the personal communication device. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214466 | Method and System for Modifying Mobile Device Functions - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214467 | Method and System for Receiving Forwarded or Delegated Mobile Device Functions - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214468 | Method and System for Forwarding or Delegating Modified Mobile Device Functions - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214469 | Method and System for Restoring Mobile Device Functions - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214470 | Method and System for Dynamic Configuration for Mobile Communication Device Functions - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214471 | Method and System for Using Multiple Transceivers for Controlling Mobile Communication Device Functions - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214472 | Method and System for Controlling Mobile Device Functions via a Service or Background Process - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features, along with systems incorporating these devices and methods. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 08-23-2012 |
20120220281 | Using the IMSI Value From the SIM Card Data to Make an External Call - A method and apparatus are disclosed for a network node which processes a call request from an enterprise user's mobile device to initiate origination of an outgoing cellular call to a called party by making an external call to the mobile device which does not have a country code encoded in its SIM card by transforming an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) value from the SIM card into a country code value, and then using the country code value to construct a dialing sequence for calling the mobile device. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220282 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING APPLICATION IN MOBILE DEVICE - A method, system and mobile device for searching for and acquiring a desired application by using Near Field Communication (NFC) regardless of time and location are provided. In the method, the mobile device reads a keyword from an NFC tag of a target structure in response to a tagging event between the mobile device and the NFC tag. Then the mobile device performs an application search using the keyword, and downloads a specific application found using the keyword. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220283 | Method and System for Restoring and Status Communication of Multiple Mobile Device Functions - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220284 | Method and System for Communicating Status or Warning Regarding Mobile Device Functions - This provides for controlling mobile device functions and features. For example, it limits or disables the use of some of mobile device features which could cause distraction to the user, when the user is engaged in another activity. In an example, it enables other mobile device features based on occurrence of events related to the user or environment. Another example addresses controlling the mobile device features, such as SMS, while the user is in a vehicle or driving. Another example restricts the ability of the driver of a vehicle to text, while the vehicle is in motion, by automatically disabling the texting ability of mobile device within and around the perimeter of the driver's seat. Other variations, examples, improvements, detection mechanisms, models, techniques, calculations, verification mechanisms, and features are also described in details. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220285 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROTECTING PRIVACY WHEN A MOBILE DEVICE IS LOCATED IN A DEFINED PRIVACY ZONE - A system, method and apparatus for protecting privacy when a mobile device is located in a defined privacy zone are described herein. The available features that a user of a mobile device may use are controlled while the mobile device is located in a define privacy zone. Once a mobile device is detected in the define privacy zone, a database is accessed to determine if the mobile device has the features available that are to be disabled. If the features are available, a disable signal is sent via the communications network to the mobile device and the feature is disabled. Once the mobile device is detected to be outside of the defined privacy zone, the previously disabled mobile device feature is enabled. | 08-30-2012 |
20120225645 | Low Cost System converting any Smartphone to a Remote Controller - Low cost system converting any Smartphone into an Infrared or radio controlled Remote Controller, as a green and advanced alternative to conventional remote controllers for toys, audio-video devices, alarms, gate openers, and more. | 09-06-2012 |
20120231776 | Communicating a Broadcast Message to Change Data Rates of Mobile Stations - A wireless communications network includes a base station to communicate with plural mobile stations over a wireless link. A broadcast message is sent to the plural mobile stations, with the broadcast message containing an indication for indicating to the plural mobile stations that the mobile stations are to change data rates for transmissions over a reverse wireless link. | 09-13-2012 |
20120231777 | REGISTRATION NOTIFICATION FOR MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT - System(s) and method(s) are provided for notification of registration of a mobile device with femto coverage for firmware content management. An attachment component that administers location of mobile devices or a femto access point (AP) conveys a notification to a network platform that manages firmware content updates when a mobile device for which firmware update is available hands off from wireless macro coverage onto femto coverage through the femto AP. The notification is triggered in response to firmware update notification received by the attachment component, or an update flag received by the femto AP. Upon reception of the notification, to exploit wireline bandwidth, the network platform delivers firmware content(s) update through backhaul link to the femto AP to which the mobile device is registered. Femto APs not provisioned to serve a mobile device can be incentivized to authorize the mobile device for coverage and thus facilitate firmware updates. | 09-13-2012 |
20120231778 | MICROPHONE PROXIMITY DETECTION - A mobile communications device contains at least two microphones. One microphone is located away from the handset receiver and serves to pick up voice of a near end user of the device for transmission to the other party during a call. Another microphone is located near the handset receiver and serves to pick up acoustic output of the handset receiver (a far end signal). A signal processor measures the frequency response of the receiver. The signal processor performs spectral analysis of the receiver frequency response to determine whether or not the device is being held at the ear of the user. On that basis, the device automatically changes its operating mode, e.g., turns on or off a touch sensitive display screen during the call. Other embodiments are also described. | 09-13-2012 |
20120231779 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE MANAGEMENT - A method and system that limits the use of a communication device present in an area controlled by an intelligent controller. The intelligent controller detects any present communication devices in the area and conducts an inventory providing information about each detected device. The intelligent controller compares that information to a standard of use data, which specifies the conditions need to be present for allowing the usage of a communication device. If such conditions are not met, the intelligent controller sends commands to the communication device to restrict its functionality. Else if, the intelligent controller is incapable of restricting the communication device, it can notify authorities of unauthorized usage of a communication device in the restricted area. | 09-13-2012 |
20120238257 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY RESTRICTING PORTABLE INFORMATION HANDLING SYSTEM FEATURES - Wireless telephones retrieve feature restrictions from a wires telephone network, the feature restrictions having associated predetermined conditions. A wireless telephone applies the feature restrictions if the predetermined conditions are met to disable functions at the wireless telephone as defined by the feature restrictions. For example, a wireless telephone disables camera operations if the position of the wireless phone is in an academic testing location during an academic testing period. | 09-20-2012 |
20120238258 | PARAMETER CONFIGURATION METHOD AND CONFIGURATION DEVICE FOR MOBILE TERMINAL - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a parameter configuration method and a configuration device for a mobile terminal. A parameter configuration method for a mobile terminal includes: obtaining a current channel change rate; comparing the current channel change rate with a maximum channel change rate and a minimum channel change rate in each scenario respectively; determining a channel change rate range to which the current channel change rate belongs, and setting a scenario corresponding to the channel change rate range as a target scenario; and obtaining a parameter configuration value group corresponding to the channel change rate range in the target scenario according to a corresponding relationship between a preset parameter configuration value group and the channel change rate range, and configuring a corresponding parameter of each module of the mobile terminal by using each parameter configuration value of the parameter configuration value group. | 09-20-2012 |
20120244849 | Safety system to disable and activate functions in Smartphone's, mobile phones and portable communication devices while driving - The present invention is a safety system that prevents the use of certain Smartphone functions and replace the blocked functions with alternative ways to communicate while in a car. These functions include text, voice (manually dialing to make calls) and internet. Smartphone includes any mobile phone or portable communication device that allows software applications to be downloaded and run on its operating system. The system uses a local RF transmitter located and mounted in the car to send a signal that can be detected by one or all of the Smartphone's in the car. The Smartphone's, which have downloaded the application, will decode the RF signal and disable and/or activate certain functions of the Smartphone. Which functions to disable and/or activate are previously chosen by a user of the downloaded application. By use of this system, young drivers, but not limited to, will not be distracted while driving, and thus forced to pay attention to their surroundings. Therefore automobile accidents will be reduced. | 09-27-2012 |
20120244850 | MEID-BASED PAGING TO REACH DE-ACTIVATED TELEMATICS MODULES - A method of operating a telematics unit includes replacing a mobile identification number (MIN) or a mobile dialed number (MDN) stored in a telematics unit with a temporary geographical mobile identification number (GMIN) that prevents the telematics unit from using all of its features; associating the GMIN with a mobile equipment identification number (MEID) of the vehicle telematics unit; storing the associated GMIN and MEID at a central facility; paging the telematics unit using the associated GMIN and MEID; and instructing the telematics unit via the page to communicate with the central facility over a wireless data connection. | 09-27-2012 |
20120244851 | INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, SERVER DEVICE, INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, CONTROL PROGRAM AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM ON WHICH SAME HAS BEEN RECORDED - An information management system includes a mobile telephone and a server device. The mobile telephone includes: an image sensing section; an operation control section for controlling an operation of the image sensing section on the basis of an operation control signal (operation disabling signal; disablement canceling signal) received from the server device; and a questionnaire information transmitting/receiving section for transmitting information about a user of the mobile telephone to the server device. The operation control section, upon receipt of the operation disabling signal, disables the operation of the image sensing section. The server device includes: an operation control signal transmitting section for transmitting the operation disabling signal; and a work information transmitting section for, upon receipt of the user information from the mobile telephone, transmitting, to the mobile telephone, work information inputted by the image sensing section. | 09-27-2012 |
20120252423 | FEMTO PARAMETER PROFILES BASED UPON NEARBY ACCESS POINT - A system and methodology that facilitates efficiently and accurately defining operating parameters for a femto access point (FAP) is provided. In particular, during provisioning of the FAP, the system obtains operating parameters utilized by a nearby FAP expected to have a substantially similar radio environment as the provisioning FAP. Moreover, weighting is applied to the nearby FAP to determine which set of operating parameters to utilize at the provisioning FAP. Accordingly, pre-existing operating parameters, optimized by the nearby FAP are employed to augment initial network listen measurements performed at the provisioning FAP, and thus improve speed and accuracy of initial FAP parameter provisioning. | 10-04-2012 |
20120252424 | MANAGING MOBILE COMMUNICATION IDENTITY - The disclosure addresses technology for identifying a mobile subscriber integrated services digital network number (MSISDN) of a mobile communication device in an extended enterprise voice network comprising the mobile device, an enterprise server, a private branch exchange (PBX), and a service management platform (SMP). The need to determine an MSISDN is detected. At least one of disable calling line identification restriction at the mobile communication device, and enable calling line identification restriction override at the SMP is implemented. The SMP is contacted from the mobile communication device. The incoming contact is identified at the SMP. The MSISDN is transmitted to the mobile device from the SMP. The transmitted MSISDN is written to the SIM card. | 10-04-2012 |
20120252425 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN WHICH OPERATING CONTEXT IS USED TO REDUCE OPERATING COST AND METHODS FOR OPERATING SAME - A mobile device has operating resources available to it. A measurement generator provides measurements of the operating resources and a context awareness engine identifies which of the operating resources may be efficiently utilized by a service application in view of context conditions in which the mobile device is operating. A selection controller selects, based on the measurements, at least one of the identified operating resources for use by the service application to improve or optimize a cost of the mobile device. | 10-04-2012 |
20120252426 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND SCHEDULING CONTROL COMPUTER PROGRAM - A mobile phone includes a condition storage unit storing therein a condition related to periodically-scheduled events that involve ringing of a device. In addition, the mobile phone includes a judging unit that judges whether an input operation input via an input unit of the device matches the condition stored in the condition storage unit. The mobile phone also includes a skip processing unit that, when the judging unit determines that the input operation matches the condition, inhibits the ringing scheduled at a nearest ringing time from being performed, calculates a ringing time that arrives following the nearest ringing time according to a periodical schedule, and configures a setting so as to enable the ringing scheduled at the calculated ringing time. | 10-04-2012 |
20120252427 | BROAD QUALITY OF SERVICE OPTIMIZATION USING POLICY-BASED SELECTIVE QUALITY DEGRADATION - Devices, methods and computer-readable media for providing broad quality of service optimization using policy-based selective quality degradation. Data associated with a quality of service for customers and QoS policy rules are stored. Customers are grouped for potential degradation. Levels of degradation are defined for each type of user device. Degradation for the group of customers is optimized using policy rules. Degradation is adjusted to account for variations in user treatment within the group. The adjusted degradation is then implemented. | 10-04-2012 |
20120252428 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A mobile communication device having the capability of using the Internet does the same depending on a situation. For example, in the home country, to which a flat rate applies, larger amounts of data are downloaded during Internet use than in foreign countries, to which a flat rate does not apply. Corresponding situation profiles can be set by a user. The Internet can then be used in a cost-optimized manner. | 10-04-2012 |
20120252429 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A PLURALITY OF PARAMETERS IN A DEVICE - The present invention concerns a cellular device access point device and a method at a cellular access point device for configuring a set of parameters at the cellular access point device comprising receiving and storing a set of identifiers and a set of parameters values, each identifier corresponding to a different set of parameters values, receiving, from a cellular management system, an identifier corresponding to an environment where the cellular access point device is located, and setting the parameter to the values corresponding to the identifier. | 10-04-2012 |
20120252430 | ESTABLISHING PROXIMITY DETECTION USING 802.11 BASED NETWORKS - A method includes presenting a set location setting capable of being selected by a user within a graphical user interface (GUI) of a mobile device. The method proceeds by detecting on-site location information of the mobile device in response to a selection of the set location setting and detecting at least one on-site 802.11 based network in communication with the mobile device in response to a selection of the set location setting. The method proceeds by identifying an on-site IP address associated with the at least one on-site 802.11 based network, and then associating both the on-site location information and the on-site IP address with an on-site zone of a site associated with the mobile device. The method proceeds by altering an operating condition of a network device located at the site in response to a location of the mobile device relative to the on-site zone. | 10-04-2012 |
20120258699 | METHOD FOR OPERATING PORTABLE TERMINAL TO REDUCE POWER DURING SUPPORT OF COMMUNICATION SERVICE AND PORTABLE TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method for operating a portable terminal so as to reduce power consumption during the support of a communication service and a portable terminal supporting the same is provided. The method includes activating a Radio Frequency (RF) communication unit, downloading a part of data of predetermined contents through the RF communication unit, buffering the downloaded part of the data in a buffer so as to output the buffered downloaded part of the data, and executing an idle time for terminating or reducing a power supply of the RF communication unit when the downloading of the part of the data of the predetermined contents is completed. | 10-11-2012 |
20120258700 | SMART PHONE THAT INCLUDES A TOUCH SENSITIVE SCREEN AND A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION UNIT COMPATIBLE TO BLUETOOTH AND/OR IEEE802.11 STANDARDS FOR TRANSMITTING AUDIO CONTENT - Smart phones are herein disclosed and enabled. The smart phones include a graphical user interface, a touch sensitive screen, a digital camera, a wireless communication unit compatible with Bluetooth® and/or IEEE802.11 standards, and an Internet browsing application. The user may install additional applications to the smart phones. In one example, the smart phones may connect wirelessly to a Bluetooth® wireless audio output device. To setup wireless connection, the smart phone provides an interface over the touch sensitive screen to initiate wireless discovery, discovers one or more wireless devices for user selection, and locks a wireless communication connection between the smart phone and the selected wireless audio output device for wireless output of the audio content. A password or code may be required for connection. A security key may be stored in the smart phones to facilitate future connections. The smart phones also may support IEEE802.11 standards for direct wireless communication. | 10-11-2012 |
20120264412 | NETWORK SELECTION MECHANISMS - An operator identity for an ANDSF management object is described. The operator identity identifies the server that originally provided the data concerned to the management object. In this way, it is possible to determine the operators that are responsible for different branches of an ANDSF management object. The operator identity may take the form of a PLMN identity. | 10-18-2012 |
20120264413 | OFFICE SYSTEM COMPRISING A TELEPHONY APPLICATION - An office automation system comprising a portable computer ( | 10-18-2012 |
20120270528 | MAGNETIC STRIPE ATTACHMENT AND APPLICATION FOR MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A mobile electronic device such as a mobile phone includes wallet application software for receiving, storing, encrypting, and transmitting selected payment card data. A tab including a programmable magnetic stripe is associated with a controller for receiving transmitted payment card data and programming the stripe with selected data. The tab is mounted directly to the electronic device or to an attachment device removably coupled to the electronic device. The attachment device may comprise a case for the mobile electronic device that allows access to a user interface and display of the mobile electronic device. | 10-25-2012 |
20120270529 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE IN FEMTO CELL - When a femto cell base station used for a communication system provided with a function of providing a predetermined supplementary service receives first information indicating supplementary service control from a radio terminal, the femto cell base station converts the received information to a SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) message including the first information and transmits the SIP message to a higher apparatus in the communication system. | 10-25-2012 |
20120270530 | ALERT SIGNAL CONTROL USING RECEIVER VELOCITY - An electronic communication system provides text or voice messages to remote receiving devices, such as cell phones or PDA's. The remote receiving devices are equipped with velocity sensors, or position sensors from which velocity may be inferred. The remote receiving devices periodically report a velocity or current position to an alert signal control node of the communication system. The alert signal control node determines a most recent-determinable velocity for each receiving device before transmitting a message alert signal. If the velocity exceeds a predetermined threshold, the alert signal may be delayed until the velocity drops below the threshold. The system may be operated as a safety measure to prevent reception of distracting alert signals while driving, thereby silencing messaging devices at appropriate times. | 10-25-2012 |
20120276885 | Controlling a communication system - In a communication system, a plurality of communication entities can establish a plurality of communication links that can potentially interfere with each other. A control of the communication system involves repetitively carrying out a probabilistic parameter setting step for respective communication links. In such a probabilistic parameter setting step, a parameter setting to be applied to a communication link is randomly determined according to a probability distribution. This probability distribution is such that a probability that a particular parameter setting is applied decreases with, on the one hand, a relative level of interference that the communication link is expected to experience from other communication links if the particular parameter setting is applied and, on the other hand, a relative level of interference that other communication links are expected to experience if the particular parameter setting is applied. | 11-01-2012 |
20120276886 | Method and Apparatus for Acquiring Information Related to a Position - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method and an apparatus are shown comprising receiving status information of an apparatus, and determining a probability for an update of information related to a position being obtained based on the status information. Based on the determined probability and an elapsed time since a last update of the information related to a position, it is determined whether to activate a receiver in order to obtain the update of information related to a position. | 11-01-2012 |
20120276887 | DEVICE MANUFACTURING USING THE DEVICE'S EMBEDDED WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY - Embodiments describe manufacturing, programming, testing, and servicing of wireless computing devices utilizing their embedded wireless technology. An embodiment method ensures that the wireless computing devices are successfully programmed in the event a disruption to the manufacturing, programming, testing and servicing process flow occurs. The method includes retrieving a last known location of the wireless device before the disruption event and comparing the last known location with the location of the wireless of the wireless device after the disruption event. A wireless device may be returned to the last known location before the disruption event if there is a difference in locations. The programming at the last known location before the disruption event occurred may be successfully completed. Further embodiments include configuring the manufacturing, programming, testing, and servicing of wireless computing devices utilizing the embedded wireless technology in the device based on a reported location of the device within a facility. | 11-01-2012 |
20120282908 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - A method for controlling mobile communications involves identifying an operator of the mobile vehicle, where the operator is associated with a mobile communications device. Via a telematics unit disposed in the mobile vehicle, the method further involves recognizing, while the vehicle is in motion, that the mobile communications device is not located in a predefined location inside a cabin area of the vehicle, and in response to a command generated by the telematics unit based on the recognizing, automatically adjusting a functionality of an audio system disposed in the vehicle. | 11-08-2012 |
20120282909 | WIMAX FEMTO NETWORK SUPPORT FOR WIMAX FEMTO CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT - Embodiments of the present invention relate to wireless communication and, more specifically, to network support for configuration management in a Worldwide Interoperability Microwave Access Femto Network. In one exemplary embodiment, offline and/or updated configuration information is obtained by a WiMAX Femto Access Point from a management server whether the WiMAX Femto Access Point is active or inactive and before or after initial network entry. Configuration information synchronization may also be performed before or after initial network entry. | 11-08-2012 |
20120282910 | Management of a Wireless Communication Interface of a Terminal - The management method of the invention comprises: an obtaining step (E | 11-08-2012 |
20120282911 | Smartphone-Based Methods and Systems - Arrangements involving portable devices (e.g., smartphones and tablet computers) are disclosed. One arrangement enables a content creator to select software with which that creator's content should be rendered—assuring continuity between artistic intention and delivery. Another utilizes a device camera to identify nearby subjects, and take actions based thereon. Others rely on near field chip (RFID) identification of objects, or on identification of audio streams (e.g., music, voice). Some technologies concern improvements to the user interfaces associated with such devices. Others involve use of these devices in connection with shopping, text entry, sign language interpretation, and vision-based discovery. Still other improvements are architectural in nature, e.g., relating to evidence-based state machines, and blackboard systems. Yet other technologies concern use of linked data in portable devices—some of which exploit GPU capabilities. Still other technologies concern computational photography. A great variety of other features and arrangements are also detailed. | 11-08-2012 |
20120282912 | LOW RADIATION WIRELESS COMMUNICATOR - A wireless communicator, including a modem operable to transmit and receive voice communication phone calls, a power amplifier coupled with the modem operable to dynamically apply a variable gain factor to voice communications transmitted by the modem, to produce an appropriate power output, and a controller coupled with the modem including a radiation monitor operable to monitor the power output of the power amplifier, the controller being operable to restrict operation of the modem, based on data provided by the radiation monitor, when the cumulative power output produced by the power amplifier exceeds a pre-designated daily cumulative power limit. | 11-08-2012 |
20120289214 | METHOD FOR LIMITING THE USE OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - The present invention relates to a method for limiting the use of a mobile communications device, the mobile communications device comprising a user interface, the steps of the method comprising determining the physical speed at which the mobile communications device is travelling; comparing the physical speed to a preset threshold speed; and limiting the functionality of the mobile communications device if the physical speed thereof is above preset threshold speed. | 11-15-2012 |
20120289215 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY ENABLING A CAR MODE IN A PERSONAL COMMUNICATION DEVICE - In one embodiment, a system for transmitting information to a personal communication device (PCD) is provided. The system includes a communication module for being positioned in a vehicle. The communication module is configured to generate a vehicle status signal indicative of the vehicle being in a moving state and to generate a device name signal indicative of an identity of the communication module in the vehicle. The communication module is further configured to transmit the vehicle status signal and the device name signal to the PCD for limiting the operation of the PCD. | 11-15-2012 |
20120289216 | System and Method of Wireless Communication - A method of providing wireless communication service to a mobile phone is provided. The method comprises identifying common mobile phone applications and selectively supported mobile phone applications, installing the common mobile phone applications and the selectively supported mobile phone applications in read only memory of the mobile phone, each of the selectively supported applications associated with a selection switch initially disabled. The method further comprises, when activating the mobile phone, enabling at least one of the selection switches and writing at least one reference to branded content to a random access memory of the mobile phone based on a service plan associated with the mobile phone. | 11-15-2012 |
20120289217 | SAFETY FEATURES FOR PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A portable device includes a safety feature that prevents some forms of use when the device is moving. The device may detect its speed or movement, compare that to a threshold, and provide a response or blocking function upon exceeding that threshold. The device may be a cell phone configured to disable transmission and reception of voice/text, conceal its display screen, and disable incorporated features and functions, if the cell phone is moving faster than walking speed or the movement is uncharacteristic of walking. The blocking function may be partially overridden based on a safety policy, which can be managed and customized. The introduction of hands-free devices may serve to override a blocking function and enable other functions. | 11-15-2012 |
20120289218 | HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A wireless communications device and method for providing an output signal. The device includes a control unit for controlling the operation of the wireless communications device; a selection element connected to the control unit and configured to allow selection of several modes of output coupling for generating the output signal of the device; and, a processor connected to the control unit for processing a received signal with parameters selected according to a selected mode of output coupling. The several modes of output coupling correspond to several modes of input operation for a hearing aid to improve coupling between the device and the hearing aid. | 11-15-2012 |
20120295603 | Accessing a Base Station - Method, base station and computer program product for controlling access to the base station, the base station being arranged to serve a zone, the zone comprising a first cell implementing an access mode as one of an open access mode, a hybrid access mode, and a closed access mode. Operating conditions of the zone served by the base station are determined and then the access mode of the first cell is controlled based on the determined operating conditions of the zone served by the base station. | 11-22-2012 |
20120302221 | Methods and Systems for Self-Tuning Network Search Algorithms - Systems and methods provide a method for accessing a radiocommunication system. The method includes: selecting one of a plurality of access configurations, wherein each access configuration includes a plurality of software modules; executing the selected one of the plurality of access configurations on a processor of a user equipment (UE); determining a result of the execution of the selected one of the plurality of access configurations; and associating the result of the execution of the selected one of the plurality of access configurations with the selected one of the plurality of access configurations. | 11-29-2012 |
20120302222 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ASSOCIATE A MOBILE DEVICE WITH A PANELIST PROFILE - Methods and apparatus are disclosed to associate a mobile device with a panelist profile. An example method includes initializing a metering application on the mobile device to operate with partial functionality, parsing a message log with the metering application to identify an installation message, extracting a telephone number from the installation message and saving to a memory of the mobile device, sending an initialization message based on the extracted telephone number to prompt an authorization message, and enabling full functionality of the metering application in response to receiving the authorization message. | 11-29-2012 |
20120302223 | Selective Prioritization of Voice Over Data - Systems, methods, and computer-readable media are described herein for allowing a user or a service provider to selectively prioritize voice communications over data communications. By selectively prioritizing voice communications over data communications, the number of dropped calls in the mobile telecommunications network can be significantly reduced. | 11-29-2012 |
20120302224 | MOBILE NETWORK OPERATOR IDENTIFICATION - A mobile device can send a mobile operator identification request to a mobile operator identification server to determine the mobile network operator for a mobile device. The request comprises mobile operator identifier data, which can include data stored at mobile device smart cards and in mobile device memory. The identification server comprises an identification engine that determines whether the identifier data satisfies one of a plurality of mobile operator rules. If a rule is satisfied, mobile operator identification data is sent to and stored at the mobile device. The mobile device can share the mobile operator identification data with mobile device provider online marketplaces to take advantage of business relationships between the mobile operator and the mobile device provider. Identification of the mobile operator is also useful for determining the appropriate billing methods and ensuring the proper mobile operator branding information is presented at the mobile device. | 11-29-2012 |
20120302225 | Remote Control of Electronic Devices - A controlling device (e.g., a telephony device) can remotely control various tasks associated with a controlled device (e.g., a personal computer), including the navigation of user interfaces associated with applications or an operating system associated with the controlled device. A task can be controlled at the controlled device by mapping user input received at the controlling device to control commands suitable for execution at the controlled device. | 11-29-2012 |
20120309374 | Identity Management for Mobile Devices - A method of managing identities for use in a mobile telecommunications device in a telecommunications network has the following features. The identity management process is triggered and one or more parameters of a currently available mobile telecommunications network detected. An identity database is searched—each record in the identity database comprises an identity and additional identity information for each identity. The additional identity information includes the one or more parameters. The identity management process involves selecting an identity when a first record comprising the one or more parameters detected is found in said searching and modifying an active identity of the mobile telecommunications device to be the selected identity when the active identity is not already the selected identity. This process can be carried out by a subscriber information module of a mobile telecommunications device. | 12-06-2012 |
20120309375 | Automatic Control Of Rate Of Notifications For UMTS And Other Simultaneous Voice/Data Networks - A system and method for automatically controlling the rate of updates for data applications running on a mobile device. The method includes monitoring the data applications running on the mobile device, determining the data applications that receive updates to the mobile device, detecting the set-up of a voice call, and adjusting the time between updates based on the detecting step. The detecting step may include detecting an input by a user, detecting a call set-up request by the mobile device, or detecting that the mobile device is positioned near a head of a user. The determining step may include measuring the time between updates to the data application or detecting a signal from the data application indicating that updates may occur or detecting a signal from the data application indicating that automatic updates of the data application are enabled. The adjusting step may include lengthening the time between updates or suspending updates to the data application during a voice call. | 12-06-2012 |
20120309376 | BASEBAND ON-BOARD LOCATION MONITORING - Methods, program products, and systems for baseband location monitoring and related functions are disclosed. A mobile device can monitor its own current location using its baseband subsystem and decide whether to selectively activate its application subsystem based on whether particular conditions are satisfied by the current location. The mobile device can also correlate location and cellular signal information using its baseband subsystem and provide the correlated location and cellular signal information to a server. The server can receive the correlated location and cellular signal information from the baseband subsystems of a large number of widely distributed mobile devices and generate respective profiles of cellular network base stations that transmitted the cellular signals to the mobile devices. The profiles of the cellular network base stations can be used by the server in fulfilling subsequent positioning requests from mobile devices that do not currently have the baseband location monitoring enabled. | 12-06-2012 |
20120309377 | OVER-THE-AIR DEVICE CONFIGURATION - Methods, program products, and systems of over-the-air device configuration are disclosed. In general, in one aspect, a mobile device can determine, in an application subsystem of the mobile device, that the mobile device requests an initial setup. The application subsystem can send a request to a baseband subsystem of the mobile device. The request can include an indicator specifying that the baseband subsystem is to operate in a service configuration mode. The mobile device can request the configuration information from a registration server using the baseband subsystem that operates under the service configuration mode. Requesting the configuration information from the server can include connecting to the server over the air using a cellular network, through a specified carrier and under a specified data transfer cap. The mobile device can then configure the mobile device using configuration information received from the server. | 12-06-2012 |
20120309378 | MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, OPERATION PROCEDURE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND OPERATION COMMUNICATION METHOD - An operation procedure communication system includes an information processing device for communicating an operation procedure and an information processing device for receiving the operation procedure. The information processing device for communicating the operation procedure includes: an operation acquisition unit for identifying and storing an input applied to an own terminal device and various states of the own terminal device in a period from application of a first predetermined operation to application of a second predetermined operation; an operation conversion unit for converting operation log stored by the operation acquisition unit to a text and/or a file to be reproduced as depiction; and an operation procedure transmission unit for transmitting an operation explanation acquired by the conversion by the operation conversion unit via communications means. The information processing device for receiving the operation procedure includes an operation procedure presenting unit for presenting the operation explanation which is transmitted from the information processing device for communicating the operation procedure and acquired via the communications means to a user. | 12-06-2012 |
20120315885 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, NETWORK-SIDE DEVICE, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROGRAM AND METHOD OF CHANGING OPERATION PERIOD OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - When it is determined that a terminal is present in a femtocell, a request signal for requesting a network-side device to change a cycle of a cyclic operation is transmitted from the terminal to the network-side device, via a communication path that includes the femtocell. In response to the request signal, the network-side device changes the cycle of the cyclic operation, and transmits, to the terminal, a response signal for notifying of a change to the cycle, via the same communication path. In response to the response signal, the terminal changes the cycle of the cyclic operation. | 12-13-2012 |
20120322431 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REPLACING A BATTERY IN A PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for replacing a battery in a portable terminal are provided, in which there are a main battery and an auxiliary battery, a cover removal sensor senses the removal of a battery cover, and a controller switches from the main battery to the auxiliary battery for supplying a power in response to the battery cover removal, wherein the auxiliary battery supplies the power to some component of the portable terminal under the control of the controller. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322432 | FEATURE BASED MANAGEMENT - The present invention relates to feature based management in which a request to activate or deactivate a service in a telecommunication network. The at least one prerequisite features necessary to activate or deactivate the requested service are identified and it is determined if each of the at least one prerequisite features are fulfilled such that the requested service in the telecommunication network is activated or deactivated in the event that all of the prerequisite features are fulfilled. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322433 | MOBILE ROUTER WITH VALET MODE - A mobile router comprises: a valet mode program to provide valet mode functionality in a vehicle in which the mobile router is disposed; a processor operable to execute the valet mode program; a predetermined distance limit; and a predetermined speed limit. The mobile router responds to externally generated commands from a predetermined source to activate or deactivate the valet mode. The processor is operable to determine if the predetermined distance limit is exceeded from the location of the vehicle when the valet mode is activated; and the processor is operable to determine if the vehicle exceeds the predetermined speed limit when the valet mode is activated. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322434 | KIT FOR AN AUDIOVISUAL DEVICE OF A VEHICLE - The invention relates to a kit for an audiovisual device of a vehicle, including a car radio module without a front surface, for installation in a recess of the dashboard, in interaction with an electrical power supply, a radio antenna, and at least one electroacoustic transducer, said car radio module being capable of automatically searching for stations, as well as a means for controlling said car radio module. Said audiovisual device also includes: a base for a so-called smart mobile telephone, the base being provided for installation on the dashboard, and including a connector for the telephone, and the power supply thereof, at least one radio application software program unit to be installed on the telephone to manage the radio functions of the car radio module, the telephone itself including telephone application software, and audio management application software, a relay conditioner having a processor, arranged to be interconnected between the base and elements of the car radio module, to receive the audio signals of the application software with sound from the telephone, and to receive the radio audio signals from a tuner; said relay conditioner includes an input selection switch to power a preamplifier, and an audio input manager which monitors the most recently launched application software, to control the input selection switch in accordance with whether or not the most recently launched application software is a radio application software. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322435 | Method and System for Communication Between a Plurality of Femtocells to Mitigate Interference Between the Femtocells - Aspects of a method and system for communication between a plurality of femtocells to mitigate interference between the femtocells are provided. In this regard, a first of a plurality of femtocells in a network may receive interference information from one or more other femtocells, one or more base stations, and/or one or more communication devices in the network. The first femtocell may determine configuration information for the first femtocell and one or more other femtocells in the network based on the communicated interference information. The first femtocell and the other femtocells in the network may be configured based on the determined configuration information. The interference between the plurality of femtocells may be mitigated based on configuring the first femtocell and the other femtocells in the network based on the determined configuration information. | 12-20-2012 |
20120329439 | MOBILE DEVICE CAPABLE OF AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHING OPERATION PROFILES AND METHOD THEREOF - A mobile device includes an acceleration sensing unit, a storage unit, a parameter obtaining unit, and a processing unit. The acceleration sensor senses acceleration of the mobile device. The storage unit stores an operation profile database having a plurality of operation profiles, an operation profile table mapping a sensed acceleration and a current status of a user of the mobile phone to one of the operation profiles, and a parameter obtaining table mapping a sensed acceleration to a parameter. The processing unit determines to obtain which parameter according to the sensed acceleration and the parameter obtaining table, directs the parameter obtaining unit to obtain the determined parameter, determines a current status of the user according to the obtained parameter, and switches the mobile device to a target operation profile according to the sensed acceleration, the determined current status of the user, and the operation profile table. A related method is also provided. | 12-27-2012 |
20120329440 | RFSP Selective Camping - A UE including one or more processors configured to, responsive to determining that the UE has a voice service solution, set a “selective camping capability bit” and transmit the bit to a network. | 12-27-2012 |
20120329441 | Location-Specific Desktop Display - In general, the subject matter described in this specification can be embodied in methods, systems, and program products. A mobile computing device presents a desktop display, wherein the desktop display includes (i) a desktop background display, and (ii) one or more user-selectable application program shortcut icons. A first geographic location of the mobile computing device is determined. The mobile computing device updates the desktop background display to include a first image of a map that depicts the first geographic location. A second geographical location of the mobile computing device is determined. The mobile computing device updates the desktop background display to include a second image of the map, wherein the second image of the map has panned to depict the second geographic location. | 12-27-2012 |
20120329442 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING ACCESS AND UPDATE REQUESTS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus that enable a wireless network to detect and manage impending congestion events caused by a plurality of mobile devices attempting to access the network in a brief space of time. In one embodiment, the network comprises a 3g (UMTS) cellular network, and includes a congestion management and avoidance entity that preemptively triggers a collision mode upon detecting an impending congestion event. This mode advantageously reduces processing burden on the base station by causing the mobile devices (UEs) to halt current access attempts, and invoke a multiple access scheme (e.g., wait a random amount of time before attempting further access attempts). The comparatively early detection and avoidance of collisions reduces the mobile device's power consumption, while addressing congestion events early in the wireless communication process so as to maintain optimal network conditions. | 12-27-2012 |
20120329443 | DYNAMIC OPTIMIZATION OF MOBILE SERVICES - A method, system, and article of manufacture are disclosed for transforming a service process definition. This service process definition is comprised of computer readable code. The method comprises the steps of expressing a given set of assumptions in a computer readable code; and transforming said process definition by using a processing unit to apply said assumptions to said process definition to change the configuration of the process definition. The process definition may be transformed by using factors relating to the specific context in or for which the process definition is executed. Also, the process definition may be transformed by identifying, in a flow diagram for the service process definition, flows to which the assumptions apply, and applying program rewriting techniques to those identified flows. | 12-27-2012 |
20120329444 | System for Safe Texting While Driving - Systems and methods are described to allow safe texting with speech-text conversion for vehicle drivers, with provisions to prevent a user from defeating or bypassing the speech-text conversion. Some embodiments include a special software application in a driver's phone while other embodiments require only software changes at a service provider. If the velocity of a phone exceeds a disable threshold, it is assumed that the user may be texting while driving. That the user is a driver is then determined by one or more of multiple methods including registration. Conventional texting is then disabled for their phone and a safe texting capability is enabled instead. Where persons in the same vehicle utilize different service providers, parameters such as for instance cell phone position, velocity, and direction of travel are time stamped and passed between service providers or alternately made available to other service providers via a central database. | 12-27-2012 |
20130005318 | RADIO EQUIPMENT DEVICE SHARING DEVICE | 01-03-2013 |
20130005319 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A short-range wireless communication apparatus is disclosed. The short-range wireless communication apparatus comprises: multiple connection devices and a control device. The connection devices are capable of simultaneously connecting multiple communication interfaces to a communication counterparty apparatus to enable sound data transfer. When the control device determines that, in cases where the communication interfaces are communicably connected, there arises a request to start outputting the sound data transferred by one of the communication interfaces, the control device disconnects another one of the communication interfaces while keeping the one of the communication interfaces connected and causes a sound data output device to output the sound data transferred from the communication counterparty apparatus by the one of the communication interfaces. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005320 | SERVICE PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS BASED ON ANDROID SYSTEM - A service processing method and apparatus based on Android system are provided in the embodiments of the present invention. The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention enable the Android platform to support more PDPs other than one PDP by creating corresponding PDP based on the service type of a specific service, therefore avoiding the complicated procedure during which when the current Android platform is processing services and one pending service type can not be processed by an active PDP, interrupting the service in the processing and deactivating the current PDP, reestablishing a new PDP to process service and recovering the former PDP after processing the service, and therefore the parallel processing capability for various services in the Android system is achieved and the user experience is greatly improved. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005321 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE WITH HUMAN INTERFACE DIVERSITY ANTENNA AND RELATED METHODS - A mobile wireless communications device may include a portable handheld housing, and a wireless transceiver carried by the housing. A pair of an antennas are positioned in side-by-side relation preferably in the upper portion of the portable handheld housing. A human interface diversity controller is connected to the wireless transceiver to preferentially operate with the plurality of antennas based upon a relative position of the portable handheld housing with respect to a hand of a human user. The device can select or weight the antennas based upon the position of the device when being held by a user. | 01-03-2013 |
20130005322 | Open Development System for Access Service Providers - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, a software developers kit is provided for implementing a verifiable service processor to be stored on a communications device, in which the software developer kit facilitates development of a plurality of service processors for controlling network service usage of a plurality of communications devices and includes one or more tested service processor versions for more or more communications device types. | 01-03-2013 |
20130012179 | ENHANCED SMARTPHONE IN-VEHICLE ACCOMMODATION - A system and method for configuring communications between a wireless device and a vehicle telematics unit over a short-range wireless communication link includes receiving a serial port profile (SPP) software application at a wireless device from a central facility; storing the SPP software application at the wireless device; identifying third-party software applications stored on the wireless device using the SPP software application; sending the identity of the third-party software applications to the central facility; and communicating between the wireless device and a vehicle telematics unit via a short-range wireless communication link using the stored SPP software application and data transmitted using one or more software templates that have been received by the vehicle telematics unit in response to the identity of the third-party software applications sent. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012180 | MOBILE DEVICE RADIO USE OPTIMIZATION BY BATCHING LOW PRIORITY REQUESTS - Systems and methods of mobile device radio use optimization by batching low priority requests are disclosed. In one aspect, embodiments of the present disclosure include a method, which may be implemented on a system, for optimizing radio use on a mobile device. The method includes, in one embodiment, detecting multiple events having a first priority type initiated on the mobile device and cumulating the multiple events having the first priority type, at least some of which occurred at different instances in time for batched wireless transfer. The batch transfer can occur when interactive traffic or user activity is detected at the mobile device. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012181 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CHANGING OPERATION MODE OF PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for changing an operation mode of a portable terminal includes checking a moving distance of the portable terminal during a predetermined time period using received location information, checking a moving speed of the portable terminal from the checked moving distance and the predetermined time period, and changing the operation mode of the portable terminal to an airplane mode if the checked moving speed is higher than a preset speed. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012182 | Method of Handling Access Network Discovery and Selection Function and Related Communication Device - A method of handling an access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF) for a network of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises determining a first plurality of closed subscriber group (CSG) cells of the wireless communication system with a first CSG identity, for a mobile device of the wireless communication system to communicate with an evolved packet core (EPC) network of the wireless communication system via the first plurality of CSG cells, after the network determines the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) as an access technology for the mobile device; and configuring an inter-system mobility policy (ISMP) node such that a value of an AccessTechnology leaf of a PrioritizedAccess node is configured as the 3GPP, and a value of a first AccessId leaf of the PrioritizedAccess node is configured as the first CSG identity of the first plurality of CSG cells. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012183 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING TRANSMIT POWER FOR MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICES WITH MULTI-MODE OPERATION OF ANTENNA - A method is performed by a wireless communication device. The device uses a first transmission rate upon initiation of a wireless communication. During the wireless communication, the device detects that the device has entered a predetermined use mode. In response, the device automatically switches to a second transmission rate different than the first transmission rate. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012184 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR INITIALIZING INTERNET DEVICE - This disclosure discloses a method, system and device for initializing an internet device. The method mainly comprises: an application module queries, through a handshake negotiation with a communication module, network standard information, sends the hardware configuration information needed to the communication module, and then informs the communication module of the determined hardware configuration information; and the communication module initializes hardware devices according to the initialization operation information in a stored set of available initialization operation information matched with the hardware configuration information. This disclosure avoids the setting of different software versions corresponding to different hardware ports and parameter configurations and reduces the complexity of system maintenance and management. Besides, the application module can use the same set of codes to adapt to communication modules of different network standards, thus further reducing the complexity of system maintenance and management. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012185 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REMOTE CONFIGURATION OR RE-CONFIGURATION OF SOFTWARE RESIDING ON A SIM CARD - A system for manipulating a communication device, the system comprising at least one re-configuration server for remotely re-configuring software installed on a SIM card residing on the communication device by sending a re-configuration to the communication device from a remote location. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012186 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACTIVATING CARRIERS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for activating carriers in a mobile communication system, and includes determining, when an instruction message for aggregating multiple carriers is received, a bit position per carrier according to an identifier per carrier in the instruction message; checking, when a carrier state message including a state bitmap indicating state per carrier, the state per carrier according to the bit position per carrier in the state bitmap; and activating/deactivating the carriers according to the per-carrier states. According to the present invention, it is possible to minimize signaling overhead caused by carrier activation and deactivation. | 01-10-2013 |
20130017814 | Holster Profile Detection via Electric-Field Proximity Sensor TechnologyAANM Ali; Shirook M.AACI MiltonAACO CAAAGP Ali; Shirook M. Milton CAAANM Labrador; ChristopherAACI WaterlooAACO CAAAGP Labrador; Christopher Waterloo CAAANM Warden; James PaulAACI Fort WorthAAST TXAACO USAAGP Warden; James Paul Fort Worth TX US - A mobile electronic device is used with a case and contains a processor, at least one electric-field proximity detector adapted to detect a non-magnetic proximity activator in the case and a component configured to effect setting a state indicator in a device profile in dependence on an output from the at least one electric-field proximity detector. | 01-17-2013 |
20130017815 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR EFFICIENT BATTERY UTILIZATION DURING CONTENT DELIVERY IN TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Apparatuses and methods for controlling a manner of delivering content to a content user in a mobile telecommunication network are provided. The content is sent to the content user using first a first transmission rate when the content user is in a first radio state and uses a first battery power, and then using a second transmission rate that is lower than the first transmission rate, when the content user is in a second radio state and uses a second battery power that is smaller than the first battery power. The sending is performed such as, (A) while delivering the content, an amount of the content already received by the content user to exceed an amount of the content used by the content user, and (B) to minimize an energy used by the content user during delivery. | 01-17-2013 |
20130017816 | BLUETOOTH LOW ENERGY APPROACH DETECTIONS THROUGH VEHICLE PAIRED CAPABLE DEVICES - A method of enabling communications between a Bluetooth low energy master communication device in a vehicle and a slave communication device. The slave communication device is successfully paired with a Bluetooth high energy master communication device in the vehicle. An identifier of the slave communication device is stored when it is successfully paired with the Bluetooth high energy master communication device. The Bluetooth low energy master communication device identifies an advertising event broadcast by the slave communication device. The advertising event relates to a notification by the slave communication device of the availability of its services. A determination is made whether the identifier of the slave communication device matches the stored identifier. Wireless communications between the Bluetooth low energy master communication device and the slave communication device is autonomously established without a manual pairing operation in response to an identifier of the slave communication device matching the stored identifier. | 01-17-2013 |
20130017817 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION OF BASE STATION AND TERMINALAANM Kim; Won-IkAACI DaejeonAACO KRAAGP Kim; Won-Ik Daejeon KRAANM Kim; EunkyungAACI DaejeonAACO KRAAGP Kim; Eunkyung Daejeon KRAANM Kim; Sung KyungAACI DaejeonAACO KRAAGP Kim; Sung Kyung Daejeon KRAANM Chang; Sung CheolAACI DaejeonAACO KRAAGP Chang; Sung Cheol Daejeon KRAANM Cha; Jae SunAACI DaejeonAACO KRAAGP Cha; Jae Sun Daejeon KRAANM Yun; Mi YoungAACI DaejeonAACO KRAAGP Yun; Mi Young Daejeon KRAANM Lee; HyunAACI DaejeonAACO KRAAGP Lee; Hyun Daejeon KRAANM Yoon; Chul SikAACI SeoulAACO KRAAGP Yoon; Chul Sik Seoul KRAANM Lim; Kwang JaeAACI DaejeonAACO KRAAGP Lim; Kwang Jae Daejeon KR - A method of performing communication of a terminal includes the terminal transmitting state information thereof to a base station, and the terminal receiving a mode change request from the base station when the terminal is selected by the base station. | 01-17-2013 |
20130017818 | APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURATION OF WIRELESS OPERATION - An integrated circuit (IC) includes a plurality of circuit modules, a millimeter wave (MMW) transceiver coupled to a configurable antenna structure, and a controller. The controller is operably coupled to: receive parameters for an inter-chip MMW communication link; interpret the parameters to determine a range of operational requirements; compare the range of operational requirements with configuration options of the MMW transceiver and the configurable antenna structure; and, when one of the configuration options compares favorably with the range of operational requirements, generate a configuration signal to instruct the MMW transceiver and the configurable antenna structure to implement the one of the configuration options. | 01-17-2013 |
20130017819 | Method for State Transition and Network Device - A method for a state transition includes determining whether a user equipment (UE) is a UE frequently performing state transitions. When the state of the UE is required to be transitioned to the idle state, a state of the UE is transitioned to a paging channel (PCH) state if the UE is a UE frequently performing state transitions. If the UE is a UE infrequently performing state transitions, the state of the UE is transitioned to the idle state. | 01-17-2013 |
20130023255 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING BLUETOOTH SIM ACCESS PROFILE OF COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of configuring a Bluetooth SIM access profile (SAP) of a communication device is provided, wherein the communication device is coupled to a plurality of SIM cards, and the method comprises: connecting the communication device with a target communication device according to a Bluetooth protocol; and executing an automated operation. Further, the automated operation comprises: detecting a connection status of at least one of SIM card of the SIM cards, and accordingly generating a checking result; and configuring the Bluetooth SAP of the Communication device to use a specific SIM card selected from the plurality of SIM cards according to at least the checking result. | 01-24-2013 |
20130023256 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD USING SAME - A communication device and method selectively establishes or cuts off a communication with an external communication device. The communication device stores a number of communication conditions. The communication device acquires identification information of the external communication device. The communication device determines whether the identification information of the external communication device satisfies the communication conditions. The communication device selectively establishes or cuts off the communication with the external communication device according to the determination. | 01-24-2013 |
20130023257 | System and Method for Providing Configurations of Local Network - A system for providing a user terminal with configurations of a local network is provided. The system includes an obtaining unit configured to obtain the configurations of the local network and a telephone number corresponding to the local network, a storage unit configured to store the obtained configurations and the obtained telephone number such that the obtained configurations and the obtained telephone number are associated with each other, a receiving unit configured to receive a request for the configurations from the user terminal, the request comprising the telephone number corresponding to the local network, a retrieving unit configured to retrieve the configurations associated with the received telephone number from the storage unit, and a response unit configured to respond the retrieved configurations to the user terminal. | 01-24-2013 |
20130023258 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - Disclosed are a mobile terminal and a method of controlling the same. The mobile terminal according to the present invention includes a Near Field Communication (NFC) module and a controller configured to set up a first communication link with at least one first terminal, placed within a specific distance, by using the NFC module, activate a first operation mode based on data obtained through the first communication link, and execute at least one function included in the activated first operation mode. In accordance with the present invention, the mobile terminal can be easily set so that it is operated in a specific operation mode based on data obtained through a communication link using the NFC module. | 01-24-2013 |
20130023259 | MOBILE PHONE HAVING A NON-TELEPHONE FUNCTION AND TIMING RESET UNIT - A mobile phone having a non-telephone function (e.g. a radio function) that is different from a telephone function, and including: a timer operable to count time; a camera unit operable to execute the camera function; a camera function stop unit operable, during execution of the camera function to automatically stop the execution of the camera function when the timer indicates an elapse of a predetermined time period; a telephone unit operable to execute the telephone function; and a reset unit operable, if the timer is being operated in response to the execution of the camera function, to reset the timer to an initial state when a predetermined operation relating to the telephone function is executed, wherein when the timer is reset to the initial state, the timer starts to measure the predetermined time period, and the camera function stop unit stops the execution of the camera function at the elapse of the predetermined time period from the execution of the predetermined operation relating to the telephone function. | 01-24-2013 |
20130023260 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARIER TRAFFIC THROTTLING - Various embodiments for data throttling are disclosed. One embodiment is a method performed by a mobile device for managing a voice call. The method comprises determining a voice call status. Based on the voice call status, a determination is made on whether at least one application executing on the mobile device is concurrently accessing data via the mobile device during an active call. In response to the occurrence of an active call and concurrent data access by the mobile device, the data access mode used by the mobile device for accessing the data is determined. Based on the determined data mode, data access by the at least one application is suppressed. | 01-24-2013 |
20130023261 | REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION OF WIRELESS DEVICES - Described in example embodiments herein are techniques that combine at least two network (communication) technologies (such as protocols, signaling methods, etc.) and limit when a wireless device employs one of the technologies. In an example embodiment, a passive technology, such as a Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) technology, can be employed to determine whether a certain network technology is available. | 01-24-2013 |
20130023262 | PROFILE SWITCHING METHOD BASED ON MOBILE PHONE WIFI AND A MOBILE PHONE - The present invention relates to a field of mobile communication, a profile adjusting method based on mobile phone WIFI is disclosed herein. An acquired SSID of the WLAN is compared with a pre-stored SSID, when the acquired SSID of the WLAN and the pre-stored SSID are determined to be the same, a user is prompted and the profile of the mobile phone which corresponds to the pre-stored SSID is activated. The profile switching method based on mobile phone WIFI provided in the present invention utilizes the existing mobile phone WIFI under the control of the mobile phone software to prompt that the user's mobile phone is in different locations based on the different WIFI connecting statuses, and automatically switching the profiles which correspond to locations which is pre-set by the user is achieved, as well as the user is provided convenience. | 01-24-2013 |
20130029651 | Wireless Device, Processing System and Method of Operating a Wireless Device - A wireless device is wirelessly connected to a wireless network which is controlled by network control apparatus. The wireless device operates in a first activity state in which data can be transmitted to and received from the wireless network over one or more dedicated logical channels. The wireless device transitions to operate in a second activity state having lower power consumption than the first activity state if it is determined by the wireless device that data has not been transmitted by and has not been received at the wireless device for a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period of time is known to both the wireless device and the network control apparatus. The transition takes place synchronously without requiring control signals to be passed between the wireless device and the network control apparatus. | 01-31-2013 |
20130029652 | Network-Extended Data Storage For Mobile Applications - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to methods and subsystems directed to increasing the amount of memory accessible to software and hardware components of mobile electronic devices as well as to increasing security and reliability of data storage for mobile electronic devices. In the described embodiments of the present invention, the local memory within a mobile electronic device is extended by transmitting data from the local memory to one or more remote computer systems for storage and by requesting and receiving data from the one or more remote computer systems for storage in the local memory of the mobile electronic device. In the described embodiments of the present invention, a portion of the local memory within a mobile electronic device is employed as a local window into a much larger amount of data stored on one or more remote computer systems on behalf of the mobile electronic device. | 01-31-2013 |
20130029653 | FEATURE MANAGEMENT OF A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A system and method for the real-time management of a device, and more particularly to the establishment and enforcement of policies or rules associated with the feature or functions that may be performed with the device, such as making and receiving calls, exchanging data, playing games and music, sending and receiving email, accessing web sites, and paying for goods and services. If a child or employee is using the device, there may be a need to regulate how that device can be used and to determine who will pay for what goods or services. In addition to providing all of the features associated with a device, service providers need to be able to establish and enforce rules (policies) regulating how and when that device can be used and who will pay for a good or service requested by the user of the device. | 01-31-2013 |
20130029654 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LIMITING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF A MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - In a method for assuring compliance with a mandated requirement, a control component resident in said mobile electronic device is implemented in response to receiving an indication to limit the operation of the mobile electronic device in a moving vehicle. A position determining component disposed within the mobile electronic device is used to determine the speed of the mobile electronic device. The speed of the mobile electronic device is determined to exceed a speed threshold and the functionality of the mobile electronic device is restricted based upon the determination that the speed threshold has been exceeded. | 01-31-2013 |
20130035083 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROACTIVE AND DYNAMIC CROSS-LAYER OPTIMIZATION OF DATA TRANSMISSION TO VEHICLES - A method of controlling electronic data transmission between a mobile communication device located in a movable or moving vehicle and a mobile communication network includes obtaining at least one of location data and movement data relating to the current position of the vehicle. At least one of location data and movement data relating to a predicted position of the vehicle is calculated based on the at least one of location data and movement data relating to the current position of the vehicle. A current capacity situation of the mobile communication network is determined and a future capacity situation of the mobile communication network is predicted. Network and service parameters associated with a mobile communication system are dynamically adapted based on the current position and the predicted position of the vehicle and on the current capacity situation and the predicted future capacity situation of the mobile communication network. | 02-07-2013 |
20130035084 | ADAPTIVE RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL RETRANSMISSION - A mobile wireless device adapts transmit power levels and number of retransmissions of a preamble sent to a wireless network. The mobile wireless device measures characteristics of a downlink signal received from the wireless network. The mobile wireless device transmits a series of preambles to the wireless network, each successive preamble having an increased power level, starting at a power level based on the measured received signal characteristics and on parameters received from the wireless network, up to a maximum transmit power level. When the transmit power level of the preamble exceeds the maximum transmit power level and when the measured downlink signal quality falls below a threshold, the mobile wireless device limits the number of preamble retransmission to less than an allowed maximum number of retransmissions. A minimum number of retransmissions is determined and adapted to higher values for larger measured values of downlink signal quality. | 02-07-2013 |
20130040625 | NETWORK NODE CONTROL - Methods of controlling a network node, network nodes and a computer program product are disclosed. A method of controlling a network node, comprises the steps upon determining a proposed change to characteristics of said network node, providing a first indication of said proposed change to other network nodes within a predefined network node cluster of which said network node is a member; in the absence of a second indication from said other network nodes within said network node cluster rejecting said proposed change to said characteristics of said network node, making said proposed change to said characteristics of said network node. | 02-14-2013 |
20130040626 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING, DELIVERING, DISPLAYING AND INTERACTING WITH CONTEXTUAL APPLICATIONS FOR MOBILE DEVICES - It concerns a method for delivering temporarily a plurality of software applications each based on respective contextual data, to one or more wireless mobile end-user devices ( | 02-14-2013 |
20130040627 | Data Cut-over Method and Apparatus - The present invention discloses a data cut-over method and apparatus, wherein the method includes: obtaining a model mapping relationship between a source Operation Maintenance Module (OMM) and a target OMM of different system versions (S | 02-14-2013 |
20130040628 | CAPACITY MANAGEMENT OF AN ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSFER MODE INTERFACE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION INFRASTRUCTURE - Methods and apparatus that effectively manage capacity of a wireless-based communication infrastructure are presented herein. An evaluation component can generate configuration data associated with a base station of a cellular wireless network. Further, a radio network controller component can determine capacity of a physical port coupled between a radio network controller and the base station. The radio network controller component can configure the radio network controller to utilize an increase in capacity of the physical port based on the determined capacity of the physical port. A base station component can configure the base station to utilize the increase in capacity of the physical port based on the configuration data generated by the evaluation component. | 02-14-2013 |
20130045729 | LOCATION-BASED PROMOTION OF APPLICATIONS - Architecture that integrates location-based information and application-driven devices (e.g., cell phones). Users can now be provided the most relevant application and/or application data based on the user location. Thus, users are assisted in finding the relevant application(s) to accomplish a task based on their current location. More specifically, given a location (e.g., business) registered to a service, the user's client application is automatically updated to comprise the data relevant to that location. Alternatively, or in combination therewith, the service can suggest installing a new application relevant to the location. | 02-21-2013 |
20130045730 | PROGRAMMING OF A DECT/CAT-IQ COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for programming a processor in a communication device arranged for communication according to a DECT/CAT-iq protocol. The method has three steps: 1) A high level language program code is provided, the program code being arranged to influence a function of the communication device. E.g. this program code may be an application program code. 2) The program code is then interpreted into a corresponding machine language code arranged for execution on the processor in the communication device. 3) Finally, this machine language is executed by the processor in the communication device. This method allows a user to program the DECT/CAT-iq device in a high level language without the need for a compiler to compile the high level language program into a processor specific machine code. Preferably, the interpreting of the high level program code is performed by the processor (P) in the communication device. Especially, the processor (P) may be programmed to operate as a virtual central processing unit (VCPU). | 02-21-2013 |
20130045731 | System And Method To Communicate Targeted Information - A method for targeted advertising is disclosed. The method includes accessing at least one piece of demographic information associated with a user of a portable device, selecting an advertisement to be delivered to the user based at least in part on the demographic information, and initiating communication of a version of the advertisement configured for presentation at the portable device. | 02-21-2013 |
20130053013 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGEMENT OF BACKGROUND APPLICATION EVENTS - Systems, methods, and devices for implementing a communication access policy are described herein. In some aspects, a wireless device is configured to execute a plurality of applications and to communicate with a communication network. The wireless device comprises a receiver configured to receive a plurality of rules specifying how one or more of the plurality of applications should communicate with the communication network. The wireless device comprises a processor configured to delay communication by one or more of the plurality of applications in compliance with the rules. The processor is further configured to allow transmission of the communication by one or more of the plurality of applications after termination of the delay. In one aspect, the processor is configured to separately record communication statistics based on whether the device is in a background or foreground state. | 02-28-2013 |
20130053014 | METHOD OF WIRELESSLY CONNECTING AT LEAST TWO DEVICES AND WIRELESSLY CONNECTABLE DEVICE USING THE METHOD - A method of wirelessly connecting at least two devices for data communication and a device that is wirelessly connectable by using the method, the method including: generating and wirelessly sending service set identifier (SSID) information of the at least two devices, the at least two devices performing the generating and the wireless sending, collecting and analyzing the wirelessly sent SSID information, the collecting and the analyzing to be performed by the at least two devices, setting one of the at least two devices as a server based on a result of the analyzing, and wirelessly connecting the at least two devices, the wirelessly connecting to be performed by the device set as the server. | 02-28-2013 |
20130065572 | DEVICE NETWORK TECHNOLOGY SELECTION AND DISPLAY IN MULTI-TECHNOLOGY WIRELESS ENVIRONMENTS - System(s) and method(s) are provided to manage utilization of radio network technology and display thereof when multiple services and radio network technologies are available to a multi-technology mobile device. Management relies at least in part on a subscriber profile that comprises a network selection profile constructed through market policy, subscriber policy, and application policy for radio technology utilization. Network preference(s) profile is generated on per subscriber, or per subscriber type, basis and is conveyed to a subscriber station over the air. Initial subscriber profile can be delivered at a time of provisioning a multi-technology mobile device, and updated based at least upon subscriber demand, a schedule established by a network operator or service provider, or an event related to coverage area relocation or contracted services. Radio technology preferences and display of associated technologies available to a multi-technology mobile device can be dynamically controlled on a per-call and/or per-application basis. | 03-14-2013 |
20130065573 | Presence and Geographic Location Notification based on a Delegation Model - A user of an instant messaging system may store names of other users of the instant messaging system on a participant list (which may be referred to as a “buddy list”), and the names may be categorized into one or more groups. Similarly, a user of a mobile device, such as a mobile telephone, may store contact information about people on the mobile device. Information describing the on-line presence of the user within the instant messaging system or geographic location of a mobile device, such as a mobile telephone associated with the user system, may be disseminated to users on the participant list or people on the contact list based on notification information that is associated with groups of users or contacts. A delegation model is used to control whether a user is permitted to make modifications to the notification information. | 03-14-2013 |
20130065574 | Presence and Geographic Location Notification based on a Delegation Model - A user of an instant messaging system may store names of other users of the instant messaging system on a participant list (which may be referred to as a “buddy list”), and the names may be categorized into one or more groups. Similarly, a user of a mobile device, such as a mobile telephone, may store contact information about people on the mobile device. Information describing the on-line presence of the user within the instant messaging system or geographic location of a mobile device, such as a mobile telephone associated with the user system, may be disseminated to users on the participant list or people on the contact list based on notification information that is associated with groups of users or contacts. A delegation model is used to control whether a user is permitted to make modifications to the notification information. | 03-14-2013 |
20130065575 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING, CONFIGURING AND TESTING NEW WIRELESS DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS - A system, apparatus, and method are provided for connecting, configuring and testing new wireless devices and applications. For example, one embodiment of a computer-implemented method for enabling a trial wireless device comprises: automatically pre-provisioning one or more trial SIM cards for operation on a particular wireless cellular network on behalf of a prospective customer; automatically pre-configuring a trial wireless machine-to-machine (“M2M”) device on behalf of the prospective customer; wherein the trial M2M device includes testing and monitoring program code which, when the trial M2M device is connected to a computer system, performs the operations of: automatically connecting to the wireless cellular network execute a plurality of test operations for testing the SIM card and the trial M2M device, the test operations including determining whether the SIM card is correctly provisioned for the wireless network; determining whether the trial M2M wireless device is operating properly; and determining the existence of wireless data connectivity. | 03-14-2013 |
20130072173 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGEMENT OF PERSONAL DEVICE ALERT MODES VIA PROXIMITY TO A TOTEM - Alert mode configuration of a mobile device can be automatically modified based on the mobile device's proximity to a totem transmitting a beacon signal. The beacon signal can include a totem ID and/or a command. When the mobile device receives a totem ID, the mobile device can access and execute stored user selected alert mode configuration. When the mobile device receives a command, the mobile device may execute alert mode configuration that is site or location selected. For totems IDs previously unknown to the mobile device, the mobile device can allow the user to store the new totem ID in addition to associated user selected alert mode configuration. | 03-21-2013 |
20130072174 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISABLING CERTAIN COMMUNICATION FEATURES OF A VEHICLE DRIVERS WIRELESS PHONE - A method and an apparatus for disabling certain features of a vehicle driver's wireless device include a control module strategically mounted within a vehicle passenger compartment, i.e., beneath the steering wheel. The module includes a Bluetooth device that activates a wireless-transmission device upon the slightest movement of the vehicle. The driver's wireless phone is loaded with an application that disables the ability of the user to receive emails, SMS messages or other data upon receipt of a discrete wireless signal from the transmission device. Accordingly, when the ignition is activated and the vehicle moves, the text-transmission feature is disabled. A remote server may be utilized to monitor the wireless device and notify a parent or manager if the user attempts to disable the software application. | 03-21-2013 |
20130072175 | Controlling Functions of Mobile Communications Devices - Function-control instructions for controlling a function or feature of a device can be created remotely, locally, or both. A device can receive a function-control instruction or a function-control instruction embedded in received content. Additionally, or alternatively, a function-control instruction can be created locally based on user information or calibration information. Function-control instructions can be passed to an instruction execution application that interprets the function-control instruction. The instruction execution application can pass instructions, based on the function-control instruction, to the device for implementation. | 03-21-2013 |
20130072176 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE CONTROL MENU AND SYSTEM TO PROVIDE THE SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE CONTROL MENU - A system to provide a supplementary service control menu includes an information collection unit to collect state information associated with a supplementary service; a level determination unit to determine a level of the supplementary service using the state information; a menu building unit to generate an identifier (ID) of the supplementary service and to build the supplementary service control menu; and a menu display unit to display the built supplementary service control menu including the supplementary service having an effect associated with the level on a screen. A method for providing the supplementary service control menu includes collecting state information associated with a supplementary service; determining a level of the supplementary service; generating an ID of the supplementary service; building the supplementary service control menu including the generated ID; and displaying the supplementary service control menu including the supplementary service having an effect associated with the level. | 03-21-2013 |
20130072177 | APPLICATION CATALOG ON AN APPLICATION SERVER FOR WIRELESS DEVICES - A system, method, and computer program for providing an application catalog of served applications and data to wireless devices on a wireless network seeking to download the applications and/or data. The application catalog is displayable to a wireless device across the wireless network, and the application catalog lists at least a plurality of applications and/or data downloadable to wireless devices and the application catalog is optimized based upon predetermined criteria such that the preferred application and/or data to be downloaded by a wireless device is initially displayed to a wireless device attempting to access the application catalog. | 03-21-2013 |
20130072178 | INTELLIGENT TEXT MESSAGE TO SPEECH SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VISUAL VOICEMAIL - A visual voicemail system can convert visual voicemail message content to an alternate format based on the location of the recipient device, whether and how the recipient device is in motion, a priority of the message content, user preferences, or other criteria. Alternately, a recipient wireless device may also convert content to an alternate format based on the similar criteria. Content may be presented automatically to a user on recipient device based on such criteria. Content may be converted from audio to text, text to audio, or from any format to any other format. Location, motion data, user preferences, etc. may be obtained from a location based service system, a recipient wireless device, or any other source. | 03-21-2013 |
20130072179 | SWITCHING METHOD AND SYSTEM OF MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT MODE - A switching method and system for a Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) mode are provided by the disclosure. The method comprises that: a NodeB determines to perform MIMO mode switching for a cell (S | 03-21-2013 |
20130078976 | ADJUSTABLE MOBILE PHONE SETTINGS BASED ON ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS - A mobile communication device automatically adapts to different environments based on the ambient audio it detects. Device message indicators (e.g., ringers, haptic feedback devices) are automatically adjusted based on ambient audio levels and possibly other environmental parameters so that they are less intrusive in quieter environments and, in noisier environments, more intrusive so that they are more able to gain the attention of the user. | 03-28-2013 |
20130078977 | Method and System For Selecting a Thermally Optimal Uplink For A Portable Computing Device - A method and system for selecting a thermally optimal airlink for a portable computing device includes monitoring a temperature of the portable computing device as well as determining if the portable computing device has reached a threshold temperature range. Next, an estimated volume of data to be sent over one or more airlinks may be calculated in addition to determining an estimated duration for the data using one or more airlinks. A quality of service needed for the data in connection with the one or more airlinks may be determined. With this estimated data, one or more available airlinks for the data to be transmitted may be compared. After this comparison, one or more thermally optimal airlinks may be selected based on the estimated volume, estimated data rate, and estimated duration. Determining if the portable computing device is proximate to an operator may be used when considering airlinks. | 03-28-2013 |
20130078978 | END USER CONTROLLED TEMPORARY MOBILE PHONE SERVICE DEVICE SWAPPING SYSTEM AND METHOD - User controlled temporary mobile phone and/or data service device swapping systems and methods including particular implementations and embodiments comprising a plurality of mobile phone user control accounts at least a first telephone number or other registration number registered with each of the plurality of phone service or cellular service user control accounts, and at least two different phone devices registered with each of the plurality of user control accounts, and a mobile phone user interface configured to receive input from the mobile phone user to indicate which of the at least two different mobile phone or cellular devices associated with the mobile phone user control account is to be associated and to transmit data indicating the association to a phone number or other service access number registry. | 03-28-2013 |
20130078979 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR ENFORCEMENT OF POLICIES UPON A WIRELESS DEVICE - Apparatus and methods for changing one or more functional or operational aspects of a wireless device, such as upon the occurrence of a certain event. In one embodiment, the event comprises detecting that the wireless device is within range of one or more other devices. In another variant, the event comprises the wireless device associating with a certain access point. In this manner, various aspects of device functionality may be enabled or restricted (device “policies”). This policy enforcement capability is useful for a variety of reasons, including for example to disable noise and/or light emanating from wireless devices (such as at a movie theater), for preventing wireless devices from communicating with other wireless devices (such as in academic settings), and for forcing certain electronic devices to enter “sleep mode” when entering a sensitive area. | 03-28-2013 |
20130078980 | VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A vehicular communication apparatus establishes, by a narrow area communication channel establishment unit, a narrow area communication channel to a cellular phone that is brought into a vehicle compartment, and establishes a wide area communication channel to an access point outside of a vehicle. Upon detecting a stop condition of the vehicle by using a stop detection unit, the vehicular communication apparatus disconnects the narrow area communication channel by using a narrow area communication channel disconnection unit. | 03-28-2013 |
20130078981 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR ADAPTIVELY SWITCHING A MOBILE DEVICE'S MODE OF OPERATION - A system and methods are provided whereby a user of a mobile device can adaptively switch the mobile device from speakerphone mode to handset mode without needing to look at the mobile device or without the need to activate a button or key sequence. In a preferred embodiment, modules are provided in the mobile device which allow for the detection of a voice conversation, the sampling of the user's voice and the switching between the two modes of operation. If the user's voice volume is above a certain threshold the mobile device operates in handset mode. If the user's voice volume is below a certain threshold the mobile device operates in handset mode. Through the inclusion of the embodiments described herein, a mobile device can allow a user to safely and quickly switch from one mode of operation to the other without a requirement for additional hardware in the mobile device. | 03-28-2013 |
20130078982 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method is provided for controlling operation of a wireless device, including: receiving an initial incoming signal from a remote device in a first operational mode, the initial incoming signal including information related to an initial remaining battery power in the remote device; determining that a second operational mode will be a first possible mode if the initial remaining battery power in the remote device is within a first power range; determining that the second operational mode will be a second possible mode if the initial remaining battery power in the remote device is within a second power range; and transmitting instructions to the remote device in the first operational mode to transmit and receive in the second operational mode. | 03-28-2013 |
20130078983 | End to end application automatic testing - This invention describes remote management of end to end automated mobile application tests to be executed on the mobile devices that may be connected to network emulators or on live (real time) networks. Further, this invention relates to mobile data applications that need to connect to the packet data network over the radio network, and associated automated test systems and methods. Discloses is a method of having an end to end extraction of user actions, application behaviors, device state, and IP and radio layer messaging that can be centrally analyzed to understand the application impact on the network and device, as well as the application behavior for different network conditions. | 03-28-2013 |
20130078984 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CREATING MANAGEMENT OBJECT INSTANCE IN MANAGEMENT TREE OF TERMINAL DEVICE - The present disclosure relates to a method and a device for creating an MO instance in the management tree of a terminal device. In the method, a processor in the device adds the node value to an unnamed node or a specified node of the unnamed node in the MO of the management tree in the terminal device. The processor sets the node value of the specified node under the unnamed node as the name of the unnamed node. The specified node is a sub-node of the unnamed node or a node from other MOs. | 03-28-2013 |
20130078985 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING A NETWORK INTERFACE PREFERENCE POLICY - A method and apparatus are provided for determining a network interface preference policy. An example method may include determining a network address family preference policy signaled to a host apparatus by an access point for a first network interface. The example method may additionally include selecting an interface from the first network interface and a second network interface for network traffic of the host apparatus based at least in part on the signaled preference policy. A corresponding apparatus is also provided. | 03-28-2013 |
20130084842 | Mobility Management of User Equipment - There is provided a method, including obtaining, by a user equipment, information related to the speed of the user equipment in at least one first radio access technology; and applying the obtained information in a second radio access technology upon changing to the second radio access technology, wherein the second radio access technology is different from the present first radio access technology. | 04-04-2013 |
20130084843 | FUNCTION EXPANDING METHOD AND MOBILE DEVICE ADAPTED THERETO - An expanded function supporting method and a mobile device adapted thereto are provided. The method includes receiving input signals for activating a user function related to a system installed to a mobile device, establishing a basic function supporting path used to operate the system when the user function is activated, and an expanded function supporting path to operate an expanded function of the system when an input signal for operating the expanded function is received, and transferring, when receiving an input signal for operating the expanded function, a command for operating the expanded function via the expanded function supporting path. | 04-04-2013 |
20130084844 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication device is capable of communication by utilizing first and second wireless access networks and has a storage unit, a wireless device, and a processor. The wireless device detects a wireless state of the first wireless access network and writes flag information in accordance with the detected wireless state to the storage unit. When a suspend state is cancelled, the processor controls connection with the second wireless access network based on the flag information stored in the storage unit. | 04-04-2013 |
20130084845 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD AS WELL AS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A terminal intermittently operates while receiving paging information and other necessary information from a base station. In the terminal cycles of DRX with different lengths are combined in a hierarchy manner to determine an intermittent operation period. Upper DRX in the hierarchy has a longer cycle than lower DRX. A period using a cycle of the immediately lower DRX is determined based on information on the cycle of the upper DRX. An intermittent operation of a communication processing unit is controlled based on information on the cycle of DRX in a period using information on a cycle of the lowermost DRX. | 04-04-2013 |
20130090103 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SAFE CONVEYANCE OF NOTIFICATIONS AND/OR ALERTS TO A MOBILE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for a mobile terminal including a display unit to safely convey notifications or alerts to a user of the mobile terminal are provided. The mobile terminal includes a display unit for safely conveying notifications or alerts to a user of the mobile terminal, the mobile terminal comprising, a cellular band transceiver for transmitting and receiving Radio Frequency (RF) signals in a cellular band, a controller for controlling operations of the mobile terminal, at least one sensor for one or more criteria, and a hazardous condition determining unit for determining a hazardous condition exists according to the sensed one or more criteria. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090104 | METHOD OF MANAGING MOBILITY MANAGEMENT LAYER OF A MOBILE DEVICE - After a mobility layer of a mobile device enters a waiting state, a timer is activated. The mobile device is configured to await further instructions from a network system before the timer expires and control the mobility layer to leave the waiting state if the timer expires, thereby improving system efficiency. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090105 | Control Software for Unlocking and Relocking Cellular Telephones - Cellular telephone handsets often include electronic or software coding that “locks” them to a specific wireless network. Provided herein, is a method for provisioning locked handsets by unlocking them from their established network and relocking them on a new cellular network. The handset is connected in communication with the control process, identified, and provisioned. The method allows for provisioning of multiple models and brands to be provisioned from different carriers and to different carriers. It further allows multiple handsets to be provisioned simultaneously. During the process, the handset may be sensitivity tested. Further, the identification portion of the method can be used in conjunction with phone support tools beyond the provisioning process. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090106 | AUTOMATING ACTIONS WITHIN A PHONE NETWORK BASED UPON SCANNED WIRELESS SIGNALS - A method for automating actions within a network includes receiving at least one wireless signal from at least one wireless network device; determining identifying information associated with the at least one wireless signal; determining a scanned wireless fingerprint associated based upon the identifying information; matching the scanned wireless fingerprint to a stored wireless fingerprint; and initiating an action in response to matching of the scanned wireless fingerprint to the stored wireless fingerprint. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090107 | DEVICE BASED TELECOMMUNICATIONS INITIATED DATA FULFILLMENT SYSTEM - A system and method for service fulfillment is based on service invocation with a preprogrammed communication device. The communication device recognizes special multi-function code digit sequences to cause service invocation. The preprogrammed communication device, upon recognition of a multi-function code, selects a communication channel or messaging protocol and forwards information related to the service invocation to a service fulfillment platform. The communication channel or messaging protocol may be selected based on availability, optimization, preprogrammed logic associated with the multi-function code, or other parameters related to the service invocation, such as user, subscription, registration, location or device ID. The preprogrammed communication device permits service invocation without reconfiguration of a communication network to which the communication device is coupled. The communication device can be reconfigured or reprogrammed to recognize and respond to different multi-function codes. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090108 | METHOD OF MANAGING MOBILITY MANAGEMENT LAYER OF A MOBILE DEVICE - After a mobility layer of a mobile device enters a waiting state, a timer T | 04-11-2013 |
20130090109 | PROVIDING SERVICES BASED UPON IDENTIFICATION OF DECISION MAKERS AND OWNERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMMUNICATION SERVICES - Devices, methods and computer-readable media for providing services based upon identification of decision makers and owners associated with communication services. Data for providing communication services based upon identification of decision makers associated with communication services is stored, wherein the data including a user profile and default template identifying a default decision maker for a service. Policy rules and the stored data are analyzed. A new decision maker for a particular service is identified based upon the analysis of the policy rules and the stored data. The communication services are provided to the identified new decision maker. | 04-11-2013 |
20130095809 | PROVISIONING A TELEPHONY NETWORK IN RESPONSE TO AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE ATTACHING TO THE NETWORK - A technique includes, in response to an electronic device attaching to a telephony network, selecting a telephony number from a plurality of available telephony numbers to assign to the electronic device for a given session in which the electronic device is attached to the telephony network and provisioning the telephony network based at least in part on the assigned telephony number. | 04-18-2013 |
20130095810 | System and Method for Providing Contactless Payment with a Near Field Communications Attachment - A system and method in accordance with exemplary embodiments may include an attachment with a near field communication antenna, a secure element, a plug capable of connecting the attachment to an audio jack on a mobile device. Further, a system and method in accordance with exemplary embodiments may include receiving a payment initiation instruction from a customer, using a near field communication antenna, sending payment information to a point of sale device, using one or more computer processors, encoding data related to the payment as audio data, and transmitting the data related to the payment through an audio jack. | 04-18-2013 |
20130095811 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Disclosed is a radio communication system which has: a radio base station (eNB# | 04-18-2013 |
20130102299 | System and Method for Supporting Multiple Phone System - The present invention provides a method for supporting multiple communication systems in a mobile communication device. The method includes providing at least two communication channels, each communication channel comprising a communication module; receiving a communication request; directing the communication request to a selected communication channel among the at least two communication channels according to a communication type information; and transmitting data associated with the communication request through the selected communication channel. Wherein each communication module of the at least two communication channels supports different transmission protocol. | 04-25-2013 |
20130102300 | System And Method For Forming Automatically Launching User Set Default App From Smartphone - A system is disclosed for automatically restarting an application running on a smartphone present in a predetermined environment, after the application has been paused. A hardware interconnect apparatus may be configured to establish a first communications link with the smartphone, and also to establish a second communications link with an electronic device present at the predetermined environment. A processor executable auto launch application may be adapted to run on the smartphone to detect when a previously selected application has been at least one of stopped or paused, and to automatically re-start the previously selected application without a command being physically entered on the smartphone by a user of the smartphone. | 04-25-2013 |
20130102301 | CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD, AND NODE APPARATUS - A control apparatus controlling an operation state of functions which are included in a node apparatus connected to a network. The control apparatus includes a forecasting part, and a control part. The forecasting part forecasts a maximum traffic amount in a target term in the node apparatus. The control part controls the operation state of the node apparatus to stop functions, other than a function which is demanded to process the maximum traffic amount, in the target term. | 04-25-2013 |
20130109368 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR SUPPORTING STATE RECONFIGURATION OF USER EQUIPMENTS | 05-02-2013 |
20130109369 | CONTROLLING ACCESS TO A MOBILE DEVICE | 05-02-2013 |
20130109370 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING PERFORMANCE OF APPLICATIONS ON A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE | 05-02-2013 |
20130115933 | AFTERMARKET TELEMATICS UNIT AND METHOD FOR DETECTING A TARGET MOUNTING ANGLE THEREOF - An aftermarket telematics unit is disclosed herein. The aftermarket telematics unit includes, but is not limited to a housing that is configured to be mounted to an internal surface of a vehicle. The aftermarket telematics unit further includes an angle detection unit that is associated with the housing and that is configured to detect a mounting angle of the housing. The aftermarket telematics unit still further includes a processor that is associated with the housing. The processor is configured to perform an initial configuration procedure and is further configured to discontinue the initial configuration procedure when the mounting angle is out of a target range. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115934 | BASE STATION, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR OPERATING A COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - According to one embodiment, a base station of a mobile communication network is provided comprising a message generator configured to generate a message indicating that at least one mobile communication terminal should use a reception enhancement functionality and a transmitter configured to transmit the message to the at least one mobile communication terminal. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115935 | METHOD OF MANAGING INCOMING COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTACTLESS APPLICATIONS WITHIN A WIRELESS APPARATUS SUCH AS AN NFC ENABLED MOBILE PHONE - An NFC controller analyzes incoming commands, by name, and decides, according a predefined name table, to which secure element the actual command and following commands are sent for processing. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115936 | Method for State Transition and Network Device - A method for a state transition includes determining whether a user equipment (UE) is a UE frequently performing state transitions. When the state of the UE is required to be transitioned to the idle state, a state of the UE is transitioned to a paging channel (PCH) state if the UE is a UE frequently performing state transitions. If the UE is a UE infrequently performing state transitions, the state of the UE is transitioned to the idle state. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115937 | Control of Electronic Devices Based on Capability Descriptions - Methods, systems, apparatuses, and computer readable media for controlling one or more electronic devices are described. According to one described aspect, an embodiment of a method includes providing a plurality of schemes, each scheme defining features that are operable on an electronic device and which features each of the features in the scheme can use, and receiving data for identifying the type of the electronic device, and selecting, based on the type, one of the schemes, and controlling the electronic device based on the selected scheme. | 05-09-2013 |
20130122882 | AUTOMATED PROVISIONING OF CELLPHONE PLANS TRIGGERED BY MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ALERTS AND USAGE THRESHOLDS - Disclosed is a method for tracking a wireless communication plan and plan usage to control access costs for a mobile communication device having a resident mobile device management agent comprising: determining a geographic location for the mobile communication device; if the geographic location is determined to be in a first wireless connection network, automatically provisioning a first wireless communication plan for the mobile communication device; and if the geographic location is determined to be in a second wireless connection network, automatically provisioning a second wireless communication plan for the mobile communication device. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122883 | DEACTIVATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A TRANSFERABLE DEVICE - Methods and systems for deactivation of one or more applications operating on a transferable device are provided. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122884 | CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND CONTROL METHOD - A control apparatus includes a memory, and a processor that executes a procedure stored in the memory, the procedure including, comparing a first index value with a second index value, the first index value indicating a magnitude of a difference between a coverage in an area to which a communication service is provided by a radio base station to be controlled and a first target value, the second index value indicating a magnitude of a difference between a capacity of the communication service in the area and a second target value, and controlling an operation state of the radio base station that varies at least one of the coverage and the capacity so as to decrease a difference between the first and second index value when the result of the comparing indicates that the magnitude of the difference between the first and second index value exceeds a given value. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122885 | PARAMETER SETTING APPARATUS AND PARAMETER SETTING METHOD - A parameter setting apparatus includes a memory, and a processor that executes a procedure in the memory, the procedure including, selecting and executes one of a plurality of optimization operations to optimize a control parameter of a mobile communication network in accordance with a common value function, in response to a state variable in each of a plurality of different areas in the mobile communication network, the common value function determining an action value of each optimization operation responsive to the state variable of the mobile communication network, determining a reward responsive to the state variable in each of the plurality of areas, and performing reinforcement learning to update the common value function in response to the reward determined on each area. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122886 | MOBILE INFORMATION APPARATUS AND MANNER MODE SHIFTING PROGRAM | 05-16-2013 |
20130122887 | Method and Device for Communication - The present invention relates to a method for processing a channel conflict between services and a communication device. The method includes: when a service channel required by a first service initiated by a user is occupied, saving information required for processing the first service; and when the service channel is released, processing the first service according to the saved information required for processing the first service. By using the method or device, the case where a service is directly interrupted when a service channel is occupied is prevented, and user experience is enhanced. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122888 | SYSTEM FOR DEVICE STATE TRANSITION CONTROL - There is provided a method of operating a device state controlling entity, the method comprising using a state transition algorithm to determine when to perform operational state transitions in at least one wireless communications device, wherein the state transition algorithm is based upon an indication of the control plane load. | 05-16-2013 |
20130130669 | MOBILE DEVICE SESSION SWITCHING - A method includes identifying, by a mobile device, a time, a day, a date or a location, and accessing a database storing first information correlating the time, day, date and location to a personal mode or a business mode for the mobile device. The method also includes identifying, exception information associated with the time, day, date, or location, and identifying user preference information associated with the personal mode and the business mode. The user preference information identifies a background associated with a home screen, icons provided on the home screen, or links to information accessible via the home screen. The method further includes configuring the mobile device in the personal or business mode based on the first information and the exception information, wherein the configuring includes providing, on the home screen, information corresponding to the user preference information associated with either the personal or business mode. | 05-23-2013 |
20130130670 | METHOD FOR OPERATING AN ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM IN A WIRELESS RADIO NETWORK - For allowing a particularly economic operation of a network with a high degree of energy conservation a method for operating a wireless radio network, especially a radio access network, is claimed, wherein the wireless radio network includes a core network, a number of base stations and at least one mobile host for wireless communication via at least one base station, wherein the method is characterized in that an association of powered on and powered off base stations within definable base station partitions will be arranged in a coordinated manner, thereby maintaining a minimum number or the smallest possible number of powered on base stations being necessary for accommodating a current traffic demand. Further, a network is claimed, preferably for carrying out the above mentioned method. | 05-23-2013 |
20130130671 | AUDIO SYSTEM FOR A MOTOR VEHICLE - An audio system for a motor vehicle is provided. The system includes a radio with loudspeakers for outputting a sound pattern. The radio comprises a data connection with an engine control of the vehicle. The system also includes a mobile telephone with computer functionality, including a data connection with the radio via which audio data is transferable from the mobile telephone to the radio, and further data is transferable from the radio to the mobile telephone. This results in a sound pattern being generated which is an artificial driving noise. | 05-23-2013 |
20130130672 | INTERACTION ANALYSIS AND PRIORITIZATION OF MOBILE CONTENT - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for receiving interaction information relating to a first mobile communication facility, weighting content based at least in part on the interaction information, and ordering the content for presentation on a second mobile communication facility based at least in part on the weighting. | 05-23-2013 |
20130137411 | Optimized Energy Consumption Management in Wireless Base Stations - A method, apparatus and a non-transitory computer readable medium include comparing two or more access points in a wireless communication network based upon one or more scenarios to minimize energy consumption, identifying one or more energy conservation constraints in the wireless communication network and controlling each of the two or more access points by selectively distributing traffic based upon the one or more energy conservation constraints. | 05-30-2013 |
20130137412 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DECENTRALIZED MANAGING OF NEIGHBORING FEMTOCELLS - Methods and systems to decentralize managing of neighboring femtocells. The methods and systems include communication to a first femtocell from a second femtocell of next information that includes communicated information of: i) the interference requirement constraint of an active user of the second femtocell, and ii) one or more parameters characterizing a physical radio channel defined from the first femtocell to the at least one active user of the second femtocell; the self-configuration of the transmission parameters of the first femtocell based upon the communicated information i) and ii). Another method (and system to implement the method) includes the mutual adjustment of the interference requirement constraints between a first and a second femtocell, regarding their active users, in a decentralized manner, on the basis of not affecting the transmission performance of the rest of the plurality of femtocells. | 05-30-2013 |
20130137413 | Method and Apparatus for Controlling Device Operating Mode - In a non-limiting and example embodiment, a method is provided for remotely managing operating modes of a mobile communications device, comprising: detecting an operating mode change command received by a mobile communications device in a message from a wireless access device, and changing an operating mode of the mobile communications device in response to the operating mode change command, the operating mode change affecting user interface output of the mobile communications device. | 05-30-2013 |
20130137414 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A first communication apparatus for performing wireless communication with a second communication apparatus includes a memory storing a predetermined wireless setting and a confirmation unit confirming whether it is possible to perform wireless communication with the second communication apparatus using a current wireless setting in the first communication apparatus. The first communication apparatus includes a first change unit changing the current wireless setting to the predetermined wireless setting if it is not possible to perform wireless communication using the current wireless setting and specific information is received from the second communication apparatus, and holding the current wireless setting if it is not possible to perform wireless communication using the current wireless setting and the specific information is not received from the second communication apparatus. Further, the first communication apparatus includes a first communication execution unit receiving first target data from the second communication apparatus using the predetermined wireless setting. | 05-30-2013 |
20130137415 | VEHICLE ON-BOARD UNIT AND MOBILE DEVICE LINKAGE SYSTEM - A system that links a mobile device with a vehicle on-board unit includes a data control section that restricts use of at least one of a plurality of registered application software products provided on the mobile device, and a data output section that outputs an indication representing the at least one registered application software product to a display section of the vehicle on-board unit when the at least one application software product is available according to conditions of the vehicle. | 05-30-2013 |
20130137416 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT STATION, AND METHOD FOR MANAGING - In order to properly expel one or more mobile terminals from a cell that a wireless base station is accommodating, the management station includes at least one processor configured to obtain, for each of the plurality of mobile terminals, speed data indicating a moving speed of the mobile terminal; select one or more mobile terminals each having a moving speed, indicated by the speed data, satisfying a first criterion among the plurality of mobile terminals; and control the wireless base station such that the selected mobile terminals are out of communication with the cell. | 05-30-2013 |
20130137417 | System and Method of Wireless Communication - A method of providing wireless communication service to a mobile phone is provided. The method comprises identifying common mobile phone applications and selectively supported mobile phone applications, installing the common mobile phone applications and the selectively supported mobile phone applications in read only memory of the mobile phone, each of the selectively supported applications associated with a selection switch initially disabled. The method further comprises, when activating the mobile phone, enabling at least one of the selection switches and writing at least one reference to branded content to a random access memory of the mobile phone based on a service plan associated with the mobile phone. | 05-30-2013 |
20130143541 | CENTRALIZED FEMTOCELL OPTIMIZATION - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for centrally optimizing femtocells are presented herein. A scanning component can receive information from femtocells indicating respective operating conditions of the femtocells. Further, an optimization component can categorize the femtocells into groups based on the information, and direct a change of a parameter set of a group of the groups to a femtocell of the group. A method can include receiving, from femtocells, information associated with respective operating conditions of the femtocells; sorting the femtocells into groups based on the information; and directing a change of a parameter set that is associated with a group of the groups to a femtocell of the group. In an example, the method can further include directing a change of a parameter of a macrocell communicatively coupled to a femtocell of the femtocells. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143542 | Content And RAN Aware Network Selection In Multiple Wireless Access And Small-Cell Overlay Wireless Access Networks - Methods for steering the access technology selection by a mobile device in an overlay Small-Cell and Macro Network, such as UMTS, LTE, CDMA, or WIFI are disclosed. This selection determination is based on the observed, real-time correlated and estimated network congestion, content-awareness, application/service expectations, and other criteria. Methods and procedures to influence network selection or control currently selected networks by propagating real-time correlated and consolidated information on a plurality of Radio Access Technologies to Access Points, or modifying the list of alternative Radio Access Technologies available at a location using standards defined mechanisms and parameters are identified. Additionally, steering content access and delivery through alternative access technologies, based on anticipated network usage by user's service activation, and the knowledge of the type, state and resource usage of a plurality of access networks when a mobile device connects to multiple access technologies through in-band or out-of-band mechanisms is identified. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143543 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHING A PROFILE OF A MOBILE PHONE - A device and a method for automatically switching profiles in mobile phones based on the environment of a user are disclosed. The device and the method take into consideration various parameters for changing the profile. The parameters include acoustic parameters, accelerometer parameters, network strength and clock time. Based on all these measured parameters the method builds a graphical model. The graphical model is trained for different profiles. Further, as and when the environment of the user changes, the parameters change. Based on these parameters the graphical model is employed to analyze the probability of different states or profiles. Accordingly, the mobile phone is switched from one profile to another automatically. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143544 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, COMPUTER PRODUCT, AND INCOMING CALL PROCESSING METHOD - A communication terminal apparatus includes a computer configured to receive an incoming call request from a caller device; identify a communication service requested by the caller device, based on the received incoming call request; retrieve from among a plurality of OSs running on the communication terminal apparatus and based on communication services processable by each OS included among the OSs, an OS capable of processing the identified communication service; and allocate the incoming call request to the retrieved OS. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143545 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus, when performing the transmission controls of pico base stations, can perform an appropriate transmission control for each pico base station, while suppressing the increase of the amount of feedback information from a macro terminal to a macro base station and also suppressing the increase of the amount of transmission control information from the macro base station to the pico base station. In this apparatus, a transmission control unit ( | 06-06-2013 |
20130150011 | PERFORMANCE ZONES - Performance of a mobile device can be regulated base on the performance zone in which the mobile device is located. Applications can be executed via the mobile device in accordance with locally imposed rules and policies associated with the performance zone. The rules and policies can be stored on the mobile device. The rules and policies can be associated with a color codes that are associated with respective performance zones. | 06-13-2013 |
20130150012 | MECHANISMS TO IMPROVE MOBILE DEVICE ROAMING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A mobile wireless device adapts roaming parameters used to determine searching for and switching among access points. The roaming parameters are adjusted based on a wireless network characterization for access points that includes a detected wireless network type. In an embodiment, the wireless network type is characterized by a service set identifier and a number of unique basic service set identifiers associated with the service set identifier per radio frequency band. Roaming parameters include a scan threshold, a roam threshold and a time interval between successive scans. | 06-13-2013 |
20130150013 | Intelligent Resource Control in Multiple SIM User Equipment - Systems and methods are presented to support operation of a multiple subscriber identity module (SIM) device. A timing conflict may exist when a scheduled high priority communication of a first SIM overlaps with a scheduled paging monitoring activity for a second SIM. The multiple SIM device may preempt transitioning communication resources to the second SIM when the first SIM executes high priority communications. Or, the multiple SIM device may execute a rescheduling action to resolve the timing conflict. The high priority communication of the first SIM may be rescheduled. Alternatively, normal priority paging monitoring actions may be rescheduled to resolve the timing conflict. | 06-13-2013 |
20130150014 | Background Paging Monitoring For Multiple SIM User Equipment - Systems and methods are presented to support operation of a multiple subscriber identity module (SIM) device. A first SIM may monitor paging indicators while a second SIM performs a data transfer or voice call. During the second SIM's data transfer or voice call, paging transition times are identified to transition communication resources to the first SIM for use in monitoring paging indicators. The transition time may be short so as to limit the impact on the second SIM's data transfer or voice call. When the first SIM receives a paging indicator indicating an incoming call, the device may retrieve caller identification information of the incoming call and automatically reject the incoming call. The communication resource may be returned to the second SIM to continue the data transfer or voice call. | 06-13-2013 |
20130150015 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CACHING - A method and caching server for enabling caching of a portion of a media file in a User Equipment (UE) in a mobile telecommunications network. The caching server selects the media file and determines a size of the portion to be cached in the UE. The size may be determined depending on radio network conditions for the UE and/or characteristics of the media file. The caching server sends an instruction to the UE to cache the determined size of the portion of the media file in the UE. | 06-13-2013 |
20130150016 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION DEVICE - When an instruction operation given by a user to start communication parameter setting is detected, an operation mode of a communication device is determined. According to the determined operation mode, it is determined whether to provide a communication parameter through another communication device operating in a base station mode, or provide a communication parameter directly by the communication device. | 06-13-2013 |
20130157637 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND APPARATUS TO PREPARE A MOBILE DEVICE FOR PROVISIONING - Systems, methods, and apparatus to prepare a mobile device for provisioning are disclosed. An example method includes recording information about a mobile device via wireless communications in response to detecting a presence of the mobile device in a first location, determining a software version of the mobile device via wireless communications, and updating the software of the mobile device via wireless communications prior to provisioning the mobile device to a user. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157638 | DETECTING INDOOR AND OUTDOOR USAGE OF A MOBILE DEVICE - Mobile devices may be subject to different operational constraints in different geographies or circumstances. For example, power levels may be limited for transmissions in certain countries. The geographic position of a mobile device may be identified and used for determining the applicable local regulations. The local regulations may allow for different operational constraints depending on whether a device is located indoors or outdoors. Accordingly, a determination of indoor/outdoor state may be used to maximize device performance while also complying with appropriate regulations/circumstances. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157639 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICES UTILIZING RECONFIGURABLE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES TO ENABLE HIGHER SPEED APPLICATIONS WITH LOWERED POWER CONSUMPTION - Disclosed herein are mobile electronic devices utilizing reconfigurable processing techniques to enable higher speed applications with lowered power consumption for, inter alia, increased device battery life. The techniques disclosed herein enable greatly enhanced compression/decompression as well as encryption and decryption functionality to be provided in addition to overall greater processing capability particularly in those applications wherein minimization of power consumption is desired. Package-on-package and other assembly techniques may be used to provide the reconfigurable processor in a small footprint package. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157640 | Safe Vehicular Phone Usage - The present invention discloses a system comprising a vehicular unit and a cellular phone application, which, after a series of digital security confirmations, communicate freely. Using the application to start the automobile notifies the phone that the cellular user is the driver. When this information is conveyed along with velocity information from the vehicular unit, the application will proceed to restrict access to the phone. As such, the phone will perform a predetermined number of actions ranging from complete cellular communication disablement to activation of a hands-free communication mode. Upon stopping the vehicle, full phone functionality will resume. The phone could also act as an interface with the vehicle allowing method for locking and unlocking doors, opening and closing windows, and engaging the vehicular alarm remotely. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157641 | AUTOMATIC MOBILE COMMUNICATOR DEPOT SYSTEM AND METHODOLOGY - An automatic mobile communicator depot system including a mobile communicator acceptor for accepting mobile communicators and providing mobile communicator acceptance inputs, a mobile communicator dispenser for dispensing substitute mobile communicators in response to substitute mobile communicator dispensing instructions, a customer interface receiving customer inputs identifying a specific mobile communicator with a specific customer, and a depot controller responsive at least to the customer inputs and the acceptance inputs and including dispenser control functionality for providing dispensing instructions to the mobile communicator dispenser to dispense a specific substitute mobile communicator to a specific customer and automatic telephone number transfer functionality for transferring a telephone number from a mobile communicator received by the mobile communicator acceptor from a given customer to the substitute mobile communicator dispensed by the mobile communicator dispenser to the customer. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157642 | EFFECTIVE ENERGY SAVING METHOD OF NEXT GENERATION MOBILECOMMUNICATION - Disclosed is an operating method of a base station which includes searching user equipment, having a machine to machine (hereinafter, referred to as M2M) communication function, from user equipment under communication; sending an M2M call setup request to the searched user equipment; sending a handover call setup request to the remaining user equipment from among the user equipment under communication; and entering a power-saving mode. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157643 | SMALL CELL BASE STATION MANAGING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MANAGING SMALL CELL BASE STATION - Disclosed is a small cell base station managing method of a small cell base station managing system which manages a plurality of small cell base stations. The small cell base station managing method includes receiving a reconfiguration request; selecting a radio access technology (hereinafter, referred to as RAT) of a selected small cell base station according the reconfiguration request; and requesting the selected small cell base station to operate using the selected RAT. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157644 | AUTONOMIC ERROR RECOVERY FOR A DATA BREAKOUT APPLIANCE AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - A mechanism provides autonomic recovery for a breakout appliance at the edge of a mobile data network from a variety of errors using a combination of hardware, software and network recovery actions. The recovery actions proceed upon a sliding scale depending on the severity of the problem to achieve the goals of minimizing disruption to traffic flowing through the NodeB while also maintaining an acceptable cost of ownership/maintenance of the system by automatically recovering from as many problems as possible. The error recovery functions within the breakout system hide the error recovery complexities from the management system upstream in the mobile data network. For critical, non-recoverable errors, the autonomic recovery mechanism works in conjunction with a fail-to-wire module to remove the breakout system in the event of a failure in such a way that the mobile data network functions as if the breakout system is no longer present. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157645 | CROSS DOMAIN NOTIFICATION - A method for a mobile communication device to indicate activity associated with an operating domain includes establishing a plurality of operating domains for the mobile communication device each operating as an independent virtual machine. The method also includes providing a trusted indicator at the mobile communication device for indicating activity associated with a high-side domain. The method also includes providing an input on the mobile communication device for switching from a low-side domain to the high-side domain. The method also includes providing a trusted element for the mobile communication device that is independent of either the high-side domain or the low-side domain. The trusted element may be configured to receive a signal from the input for switching from the low-side domain to the high-side domain and to perform user authentication for switching from the low-side domain to the high-side domain. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157646 | POWER CONSERVATION FOR MOBILE DEVICE DISPLAYS - Power conservation for mobile device displays. An embodiment of a method includes generating display images for a display screen of a mobile device, and transitioning the mobile device to a reduced power consumption state. The reduced power consumption state includes reducing one or more illumination factors for the display screen; and reducing one or more animation factors for the display screen. | 06-20-2013 |
20130165098 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - An information processing apparatus that receives, from another information processing apparatus, first displacement information; senses second displacement information corresponding to movement of the information processing apparatus; and establishes a connection with the another information processing apparatus based on a predetermined relationship between the first displacement information and the second displacement information. | 06-27-2013 |
20130165099 | Enhanced System and Method for Custom Programming of Large Groups of Phones Without Requiring Additional Equipment - A system and method for custom programming of mobile computing devices. The system and method include receiving, by a server computer and before activation of a mobile computing device by a user, a code from the mobile computing device over a wireless data connection; and in response to the receiving of the code, transmitting, by the server computer to the mobile computing device over the wireless data connection, a software module, the software module for execution on the mobile computing device and for installing software on the mobile computing device in response to the execution. | 06-27-2013 |
20130165100 | MODULAR WIRELESS COMMUNICATOR - A wireless communication system including a wireless communicator, including a housing, wireless communication functionality, a first subscriber identifier module for accessing a wireless network, native user interface functionality, and pouching responsive electrical interconnection functionality responsive to pouching orientation of the housing in a pouch of an enhanced function device for causing the wireless communication functionality to adapt to cooperating with parenting user interface functionality forming part of the enhanced function device at least partially instead of with the native user interface functionality, and an enhanced function device, including a pouch, a second subscriber identifier module for accessing the wireless network, and parenting user interface functionality, wherein the wireless communicator is able to access the wireless network using either the first subscriber identifier module or the second subscriber identifier module, when the wireless communicator is pouched with the enhanced function device. | 06-27-2013 |
20130165101 | METHOD FOR FEATURE ACTIVATION OF MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION AND MTC DEVICE THEREOF - The present disclosure provides a novel method for feature activation in the Machine Type Communication and a device thereof. According to the present disclosure, the MTC device may actively trigger entry into or exit from a feature state of the MTC device, and inform the network to perform suitable configuration, so as to meet the requirements of the MTC scenario and optimize the network performance. Furthermore, for the Extra Low Power Consumption feature, it is also proposed to set a MTC device specific DRX cycle as its actual cycle such that the actual cycle may be not limited by the system default DRX configuration information. Therefore, power consumption for the MTC device in the Extra Low Power Consumption state may be reduced. | 06-27-2013 |
20130165102 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND TERMINAL CONTROL METHOD - Execution of an application that functions when a mobile communication terminal is performing communication in a particular mobile communication network. A mobile communication terminal includes an application execution unit for executing one or more applications, a mobile communication unit for performing location registration in a mobile communication network for establishing a communication state, a communication network specifying unit for specifying the mobile communication network in which location registration is made, and an application control unit for performing control on the application execution unit so as to start an application corresponding to the specified mobile communication network. | 06-27-2013 |
20130165103 | METHOD FOR THE CONDITIONAL TRANSMISSION OF A CELLULAR FRAME OVER A NETWORK AND DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING THE SAME - The invention relates to a method for the conditional transmission of a cellular frame by a cellular device (10) over a cellular network ( | 06-27-2013 |
20130178199 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SHORTCUT SERVICE IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method provide a shortcut service to execute a service in a portable terminal. The method for setting the shortcut service includes when a shortcut service setup event generates, determining a service to map onto a shortcut service button among at least one service provided by the portable terminal; and storing the shortcut service button and service information mapped onto the shortcut service button. | 07-11-2013 |
20130178200 | UTILIZING SPEED AND POSITION INFORMATION TO SELECT AN OPERATIONAL MODE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for determining an operational mode for use in a wireless communication system based on a location, a velocity, or both, of a wireless communication device (WCD) in relation to a wireless network infrastructure is described. The selected mode can be used by various devices within the communication system. Modes that are selected include transmit diversity and site selection diversity. | 07-11-2013 |
20130183951 | DYNAMIC MOBILE APPLICATION CLASSIFICATION - In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a process for classifying a mobile application is provided. The process may detect, by an application classification module, a mobile application located on a mobile device. The process may further extract, by the application classification module, a set of embedded data from the mobile application; and obtain a classification for the mobile application by analyzing the set of embedded data using a pattern and training set database. | 07-18-2013 |
20130183952 | Smartphone-Based Methods and Systems - Arrangements involving portable devices (e.g., smartphones and tablet computers) are disclosed. One arrangement enables a content creator to select software with which that creator's content should be rendered—assuring continuity between artistic intention and delivery. Another utilizes a device camera to identify nearby subjects, and take actions based thereon. Others rely on near field chip (RFID) identification of objects, or on identification of audio streams (e.g., music, voice). Some technologies concern improvements to the user interfaces associated with such devices. Others involve use of these devices in connection with shopping, text entry, sign language interpretation, and vision-based discovery. Still other improvements are architectural in nature, e.g., relating to evidence-based state machines, and blackboard systems. Yet other technologies concern use of linked data in portable devices—some of which exploit GPU capabilities. Still other technologies concern computational photography. A great variety of other features and arrangements are also detailed. | 07-18-2013 |
20130183953 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING CHARACTER BETWEEN PORTABLE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A system and a method are provided to execute a bi-directional character transfer between portable communication devices to share information and functions thereof After one of first and second devices is recognized in the other device, a character stored in the first device is transferred to the second device. Then the transferred character is driven in the second device. First information stored in the first device may be transferred with the character. The first information is then extracted from the character in the second device. The character may be transferred from the second device to the first device. Second information produced by operation of the character in the second device may be transferred with the character to the first device, and extracted from the character in the first device. | 07-18-2013 |
20130183954 | INTELLIGENT DETECTION INTERFACE FOR WIRELESS DEVICES - In a method for controlling a wireless device assembly coupled to a host assembly, a clock signal is received at the wireless device assembly from the host assembly. The clock signal is supplied to an interface module in the wireless device assembly during a power save mode of the wireless device assembly and is used to operate the interface module. An initialization command is received at the wireless device assembly from the host assembly and is detected with the interface module. In response to detecting the initialization command, at least a portion of the wireless device assembly, other than the interface module, is activated. | 07-18-2013 |
20130183955 | MOBILE PHONE LOCATOR - A mobile phone, including a protocol sniffer for capturing a beacon from a wireless access point, a beacon parser, coupled with the protocol sniffer, for identifying an alert request within the captured beacon, and at least one speaker, coupled with the beacon parser, for sounding an audible alert in response to the beacon parser identifying the alert request. | 07-18-2013 |
20130183956 | METHOD FOR MANAGING MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARERS IN A SINGLE HANDSET - A method for managing a voice call while simultaneously running a data application on a handset having a display includes determining whether the display on the handset is on or off; and if the display is off, then suspending data transfer supporting the data application. Other conditions for suspending data transfer include whether an application is in the foreground of the display; whether the handset is in proximity to a user's head, or if network reception quality exceeds a threshold. | 07-18-2013 |
20130189968 | SMART PHONE SYSTEM FOR DIALING THROUGH LOCAL CALL AND METHODS THEREOF - A smart phone system includes a smart phone with wireless local area communication function, a home phone, a public switched telephone network (PSTN) or Internet, a radio base station, a smart wireless phone gateway and an outside phone, the system utilizing the wireless local area communication system for the smart phone to register in the smart wireless phone gateway, and utilizing the smart wireless phone gateway for dialing out through the public switched telephone network (PSTN) or Internet. | 07-25-2013 |
20130189969 | MANAGEMENT OF MULTI-MODE WIRELESS DEVICES - Devices and methods are disclosed for concurrently managing multimode communications devices. In various embodiments, a wireless communication device comprises a first radio configured to use a first Radio Access Technology (RAT) and a second radio configured to use a second RAT. Processing logic in the wireless device is configured to monitor and manage the state machines of said first and second radios. The processing logic is further configured to place the first radio in an active operational mode and to place the second radio in a reduced functionality operational mode. Control messages for the second radio are then received and processed via the first radio while the second radio is in the reduced functionality operative mode. | 07-25-2013 |
20130196642 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RECORDING MEDIUM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile phone, into which a voice call function is embedded, includes a processor that controls the entire mobile phone, and a function DB that stores control content of respective voice processing which is to be performed on a call voice, in association with each call category. In addition, the processor estimates a call category type on the basis of an amount of transmitting voice of current communication content, and reads the control content of the respective voice processing corresponding to the call category type from the function DB. Furthermore, the processor performs the respective voice processing on the call voice being communicated, on the basis of the read control content of the respective voice processing. | 08-01-2013 |
20130196643 | DYNAMIC SPACE, FREQUENCY AND TIME DOMAIN COEXISTENCE - Various methods and systems are provided for space, frequency and time domain coexistence of RF signals. In one example, among others, a communication device includes a coexistence manager capable of monitoring operating conditions of a cellular modem and a coexistence assistant capable of monitoring operating conditions of a wireless connectivity unit. The coexistence manager is capable of modifying operation of the modem and/or unit based on an operating condition change. In another example, a method includes detecting a change in antenna isolation and/or operating temperature of a FE filter, determining filtering characteristics of the FE filter based at least in part upon the change, and modifying communications of coexisting communication protocols based at least in part upon the filtering characteristics. In another example, a TX/RX configuration for coexisting communication protocols is determined and communications in a protocol is modified based at least in part upon the TX/RX configuration. | 08-01-2013 |
20130196644 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MODULE SETTING METHOD - According to one embodiment, an information processing apparatus includes a wireless communication module including an event notifier, an embedded controller and a setting module. The embedded controller registers event information configured to indicate that supply of electrical power to the wireless communication module was cut in a register and turns on the apparatus, when the embedded controller is started or reset. The setting module sets the wireless communication module to enable the event notifier, if the event information is registered in the register of the embedded controller when the apparatus is turned on. | 08-01-2013 |
20130196645 | METHOD FOR PERSONALIZING SIM CARDS WITH A PRODUCTION MACHINE - A method for personalizing a SIM card may include loading the SIM card on a conveyor belt of a production machine, programming the SIM card, and unloading the programmed SIM card from the conveyor belt. If the intermediate result is wrong, the method may check an intermediate result of the programming and re-program the SIM card. | 08-01-2013 |
20130196646 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR EXCHANGING INFORMATION ON DEVICE IN COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES - To provide information of a device in communication between devices, an operating method of a device includes including device information of the device in a message defined by a communication protocol used to connect to the other device; and transmitting the message comprising the device information using the communication protocol. The device information comprises at least one of a device type, support of a mirror link, mobile communication network connection support, automatic execution of an application corresponding to the device, vendor identification information, and product identification information. | 08-01-2013 |
20130196647 | Mobile Device Activation Via Dynamically Selected Access Network - Within a network system, a wireless device sends a message to a network element over a first wireless access network, the message including a first device credential and being configured to obtain information to assist in presenting an on-device user service plan selection choice through a user interface of the wireless device. After sending the message, the wireless device determines that it lacks authorization to connect to the network element over the first wireless network and, in response, attempts to connect to the network element over a second data access network. | 08-01-2013 |
20130203397 | PHONE THAT PREVENTS ACCIDENTAL DIALING TO A CONTACT - The present invention includes a phone having a contact list. At least one contact on the contact list may be associated with an indication that outgoing phone calls, that are attempted to be placed from the phone towards that contact, are to be blocked by the phone. The blocking of the attempt to place an outgoing phone call to a contact may be overridden by the user of the phone, for example, by confirming in response to a confirmation question, or by correctly providing a password or a pre-defined response to a question. Optionally, the phone may automatically analyze call logs and other data in order to recommend to the user contacts that are suitable for being associated with outgoing call blocking; for example, a contact corresponding to a person or entity that the user have not called frequently or for a long time. | 08-08-2013 |
20130203398 | System and Method for Selecting Operating Parameters in a Communications System - A method for configuring a first base station within a cluster in a communications system having a plurality of cluster includes optimizing an operating parameter of the first base station in accordance with first utility function results from a first utility function associated with the first base station and second utility function results from a second utility function associated with a second base station within the cluster, the first utility function results and the second utility function results according to multiple settings for the operating parameter of the first base station, a first initialized setting of the operating parameter for the second base station, and a second initialized setting of the operating parameter for an external base station outside the cluster. The method also includes sharing the optimized operating parameter with the external base station. | 08-08-2013 |
20130203399 | HANDLING DUAL PRIORITY APPLICATIONS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques for handling dual priority for a machine-to-machine device in a wireless communication network. The device may include computer-readable media having instructions and one or more processors coupled with the computer-readable media and configured to execute the instructions to configure, as a default configuration, the device with a first priority level for machine-type communications, receive a notification from an application associated with the device, the notification indicating that the application generated a communication to a network controller, the communication being associated with a second priority level that is higher than the first priority level, and in response to the notification, configure, as an override configuration, the device with the second priority level for machine-type communications. If a backoff timer is running for low priority application, and a current communication is not for a low priority, the communication is allowed to proceed. | 08-08-2013 |
20130203400 | ON BOARD VEHICLE PRESENCE REPORTING MODULE - The present disclosure describes a microprocessor executable presence reporting module operable to determine, based on one or more of a vehicle occupant context and requirement of law applicable to a current geographic location of the vehicle, whether the vehicle occupant is present and available for receiving an inbound communication and/or by what communication channel and/or modality to contact the vehicle occupant. | 08-08-2013 |
20130210402 | CONTROL METHODS FOR COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A control method for a communication device is provided. The control method includes the steps of: determining whether the communication device is in a wrong communication state when a call of a communication function is made from the communication device, and if the communication device is in the wrong communication state, prohibiting the communication function from being performed by the communication device after the call is finished. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210403 | Enhanced Power Conservation For Mobile Phones - A mobile phone initially probes while in an open-loop mode with an estimated power level based on the received power level from a base station. If a response is not received, power is incremented, and a subsequent probe is sent. The process is repeated until a response is received or when maximum power is reached. If a response is still not received, the mobile phone tests for changing its location state. When BTS probes are unsuccessful and maximum power is reached, available sensors are sampled and tested for a change of state, e.g., by way of an inclinometer, an accelerometer, a magnetometer, a GPS, standard | 08-15-2013 |
20130210404 | LOCAL DOWNLOADING OF TEMPORARY APPLICATIONS FOR MOBILE DEVICES - A system and related methods of managing computer-executable applications for a mobile device are provided. The method determines when the mobile device is located within an application support area corresponding to an application provider, and wirelessly downloads a temporary application at the mobile device. The downloaded temporary application is installed at the mobile device, resulting in an installed temporary application. Thereafter, the method detects when the mobile device has left the application support area and, in response to the detecting, the mobile device is configured such that the installed temporary application cannot be executed. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210405 | Autonomous Location Of Objects In A Mobile Reference Frame - An apparatus and method for estimating a location of an object within a mobile reference frame. Sensor data is received from an accelerometer associated with an object followed by determining from the sensor data that the mobile reference frame is executing one of a set of pre-determined maneuvers. In response to such determination: (1) the sensor data is applied to a mathematical model associated with the executed maneuver, the model trained with previously obtained data from one or more reference accelerometers positioned at known locations within the mobile reference frame and estimating the location of the object by applying the sensor data to the mathematical model; and/or (2) incorporating reference accelerometers in the mobile reference frame and comparing the sensor data with the reference accelerometers and estimating the location of the object. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210406 | PHONE THAT PREVENTS TEXTING WHILE DRIVING - The present invention includes a phone able to detect or determine that a user of the phone is sitting in a driver seat of a moving vehicle. The determination may be based on, for example, captured front-side images, captured back-side images, captured audio, contextual analysis of textual messages, contextual analysis of phone conversations or intra-vehicular conversations, GPS data or other location data, or other parameters. Upon such determination, the phone may block one or more features or applications, such as texting or messaging. The present invention may reduce, eliminate or block occurrences of concurrent texting-and-driving, or other unsafe or illegal operations. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210407 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH IMPROVED NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - Methods and systems for applying power to a mobile device responsive to user actions are disclosed. An exemplary method includes detecting, while a mobile device is powered down, actions made by a user in connection with the user handling the mobile device without pressing a power button of the mobile device. A prediction is then made that the user is about to power up the mobile device based upon particular actions made by the user. And before the user presses the power button, power is applied to processing and network communication components of the mobile device so that if the user presses the power button, the processing and network communication components are already powered; thus reducing an amount of time it takes for the mobile device to access a network with the mobile device. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210408 | METHOD OF REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION WITHIN A PORTABLE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of reducing power consumption within a portable communication device uses spatial sensing modules to identify a stationary state or to sense motion of the device, and continuously monitors the device's surroundings. The device includes a control module coupled to the spatial sensing modules, which include a global positioning system, and a module that identifies the location of the device through a cellular wireless communication network. The method uses the control module to switch on or switch off the spatial sensing modules based on identifying that the device has been in a spatially static state for a time period or has been suddenly moved, or if any sudden changes have been detected in the device's surroundings. Furthermore, if the device is identified to be at an indoor location for a specific period of time, the control module switches off the global positioning system of the device. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210409 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TUNING IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving a radio related message including derived information for a particular cell in a heterogeneous network; and changing one or more self-optimizing network parameters of a small cell in the heterogeneous network to attract user equipment, where the change can be based on the derived information. In more specific embodiments, the derived information is provided in a relocation command message. In addition, the derived information can include cell load information for a macro cell. Certain methodologies may include receiving small cell derived information for a plurality of small cells in the heterogeneous network; and increasing a plurality of self-optimizing network parameters of the plurality of small cells in the heterogeneous network to attract a plurality of instances of user equipment, the increase can be based, at least, on information within Radio Access Network Application Part (RANAP) messages. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210410 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING ALERT MODES OF THE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device receives a message periodically broadcast by a wireless broadcast device placed within a location, and determines a type of the location and a broadcast period of the message. The wireless communication device sets a check period for periodically checking whether the wireless communication device receives the message, and checks if a present alert mode of the wireless communication device is suitable for the type of the location in a present check period. When the present alert mode of the wireless communication device is not suitable, the wireless communication device automatically switches the present tone mode to a new tone. When the wireless communication device does not receive the message within a next check period, the wireless communication device is determined as having left the location and automatically switched back to the present alert mode from the new alert mode. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210411 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF DEVICE CALIBRATION - A method includes receiving, at a device to be calibrated, a data packet from a second device that is directing the calibration. The data packet includes at least two segments, where each segment corresponds to at least one calibration instruction. The method includes conducting a calibration of the device according to the calibration instructions corresponding to the at least two segments. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210412 | METHOD FOR EMBEDDING DEVICE-SPECIFIC DATA TO ENABLE PROVISIONING A DEVICE WITH A MOBILE DEVICE - The invention provides methods for providing a unified single-scan user interface for accessing and managing a remotely located device throughout its life cycle, including cellular network provisioning, cloud data provider registration, initialization and activation, as well as providing end users with easy access to the device and its data. The end user simply powers the device on and the device automatically connects with the communication network and the cloud data provider. The device comes to the end user already provisioned and paired and activated with the cloud data provider and the communication network provider. The end user may provision the device by scanning an optically scannable identification label having device-specific data embedded thereon using a mobile device such as a smartphone or the like. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210413 | METHOD OF INHIBITING FUNCTIONS OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A method of inhibiting a function of a multi-function portable personal communications device includes determining a first position of the personal communications device, after a predetermined time interval, determining a second position of the personal communications device, determining the distance between the first position and the second position, determining the time interval in which the personal communications device moved from the first position and the second position, calculating an average velocity of the personal communications device based on the first position, the second position and the time interval and, if the average velocity of the personal communication device exceeds a predetermined value, inhibiting a function of the personal communications device. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210414 | FIXED LOCATION REGISTRATION - Systems, devices and techniques for machine to machine (M2M) communications include optimizing performance of an M2M network based on knowledge about a fixed, or non-mobile, operation of an M2M service. In various embodiments, paging operation, direct channel assignment operation and timer based registration are optimized. The fixed operation may be communicated by a user device receiving the service to a network server providing the service. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210415 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR INTELLIGENT WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY SELECTION - Methods and apparatus for intelligently selecting and operating one or more air interfaces of a mobile wireless device for e.g., call setup time reduction. In one embodiment, operation of a high speed cellular interface is selectively adjusted or disabled or switched out when not required so as to minimize call setup times by, e.g., using a different cellular interface to receive pages. In one implementation, the wireless device includes a high-speed cellular interface, a lower-speed cellular interface, and a WLAN (e.g., Wi-Fi) interface. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210416 | Processing Method, Device, and System for Bandwidth Control - A processing method, device, and system for bandwidth control are provided in embodiments of the present invention, where the method includes: acquiring, by a mobile communications network device, when detecting that a mobile terminal is activated or a mobile terminal is performing a cell handover, a set of configuration parameters including a cell identifier of a cell where the mobile terminal is located; and dynamically configuring, by the mobile communications network device, a bandwidth control policy for the mobile terminal according to the set of configuration parameters and a set of bandwidth control policies preconfigured by an operator, where the set of bandwidth control policies includes a bandwidth control policy corresponding to the cell identifier. According to the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention, not only bandwidth resources are made rational use, but also the processing efficiency of bandwidth control is effectively improved. | 08-15-2013 |
20130217375 | AUTOMATED BILLING AND DISTRIBUTION PLATFORM FOR APPLICATION PROVIDERS - Systems and methods according to certain embodiments of the invention include integrating a network-enabled application with a platform having a plurality of users and a plurality of communication channels with a respective plurality of wireless network carriers. The systems and methods include providing a developer library for use by developers in creating their network-enabled applications. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217376 | CONTROLLED MOBILE COMMUNICATION AS A SERVICE IN A COVERAGE AREA BOUNDED BY RADIATING CABLES - A method of providing controlled mobile communication as a service includes storing, in a memory associated with a data processing device and/or a base station controller, a level of control of wireless communication associated with a mobile device of a customer of the controlled mobile communication as a service. The wireless communication is provided through a mobile network operator. The method also includes identifying, through the base station controller, the mobile device based on an identification data associated therewith when the mobile device is within a controlled area associated with the controlled mobile communication service, and controlling the wireless communication associated with the mobile device of the customer through the base station controller in accordance with the level of control stored in the memory following the identification of the mobile device. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217377 | LANGUAGE SETTING METHOD FOR MOBILE TERMINAL AND MOBILE TERMINAL - The disclosure discloses a language setting method for mobile terminal and mobile terminal, wherein the method includes: the mobile terminal acquires the language used by the current location of the mobile terminal; and the mobile terminal sets the acquired language as the current default language of the mobile terminal. The disclosure achieves the effect of improving the user experience. | 08-22-2013 |
20130225144 | Methods And Apparatus For Interference Management - Systems and techniques for managing interference between pico cells in a pico cluster. Pico eNodeBs are configured in groups for each of a plurality of UEs, based on factors such as signal to noise ratio and geographic location. All signals from UEs may be measured by all eNodeBs in the cluster, but a pico group decodes packets only of UEs associated with the pico group. Decoded packets are exchanged between pico groups, and when a pico group is unable to decode packets of an associated UE, is uses the decoded packets received in exchanges to reconstruct an interference signal. The interference signal is subtracted from the received signal and the resulting received signal is used to decode the packets of the UE. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225145 | OPTIMIZING SIGNALING LOAD OVERHEAD AND BATTERY CONSUMPTION FOR BACKGROUND APPLICATIONS - The disclosure relates to managing applications configured for execution on a mobile device. An embodiment of the disclosure receives one or more network access requests from one or more applications executing on the mobile device, determines that the mobile device is operating in a background mode, suppresses transmission to a network of the one or more network access requests to a network based on the determination, and transmits a subset of the one or more network access requests upon transition out of the background mode. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225146 | DUAL NETWORK TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR STARTUP AND SHUTDOWN THEREOF - The present invention discloses a method for startup of dual-network terminal. The method includes: the application subsystem receiving a push-button signal of startup, and initializing peripherals and an application program after powering up; the application subsystem controlling the 2G wireless communication subsystem to power up, the 2G wireless communication subsystem constructing a first virtual SIM proxy module in a protocol stack thereof, reading information in the SIM card in the subscriber identity module, and storing information in the SIM card into first virtual SIM proxy module; and the application subsystem controlling the 3G wireless communication subsystem to power up, the 3G wireless communication subsystem constructing a second virtual SIM proxy module in a protocol stack thereof, reading information of SIM card in the first virtual SIM proxy module into second virtual SIM proxy module. The present invention further discloses a method for shutdown of dual-network terminal and a dual-network terminal. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225147 | CALENDAR-BASED POWER RESERVE - Implementing calendar-based power reserve includes identifying a new calendar entry scheduled into a calendar application of a mobile communications device. The new calendar entry specifies a telephone call. Upon determining a priority indicator has been set for the new calendar entry in the calendar application, the calendar-based power reserve also includes directing a power management component of the mobile communications device to reserve an amount of power for the telephone call, and updating a battery power indicator on the mobile communications device to reflect a capacity of a battery of the mobile communications device. The capacity reflects a current amount of available power for the battery minus the amount of power to reserve. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225148 | TERMINAL WITH MODULE PROTECTION AND MODULE MANAGING METHOD - The present disclosure relates to a terminal with a module protecting feature and a module managing method. The terminal includes: a module execution management section that collects and manages information to execute modules; a module installation and deletion management section that collects and manages information relating to installation or deletion of the modules; and a history management section that detects an association relationship between the modules on the basis of the information, which is received by the module execution management section and the module installation and deletion management section, and determines an associated module which may be affected at the time of module execution by deletion of a specific module when the specific module is deleted on the basis of the detected association relationship. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225149 | MITIGATING CROSS-DEVICE INTERFERENCE - A device in a wireless system may determine when communications of a first radio access technology (RAT) experience interference from communications of a second RAT and may alter the communications of at least the first RAT or the second RAT to reduce the interference. In some instances, altering the communications include controlling a transmission rate to the second RAT based at least on a determined channel capacity. | 08-29-2013 |
20130225150 | Searching For Mobile Content - Methods and apparatus, including computer systems and program products, for searching for mobile content. A method includes receiving, via a user interface, at a computer system independent of the mobile device, information identifying the mobile device to receive computer data; receiving, at the computer system, information identifying the computer data to be downloaded to the mobile device; using the computer system to search computer data offerings from mobile device content providers for the computer data; and wirelessly transmitting to the mobile device data corresponding to a search result. Another method includes an application, on a mobile device, querying a computer system independent of the mobile device for a result of a search for the computer data, and causing the downloading of the computer data. | 08-29-2013 |
20130231098 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR INITIATING MULTI-MODE SYSTEM SELECTION AT USER EQUIPMENT POWER UP - The present disclosure presents methods and apparatuses for managing Multimode System Selection in one or more user equipment in a wireless system. According to some aspects of the present disclosure, such a method may include discovering whether a user equipment (UE) contains at least one 3GPP network subscription and at least one 3GPP2 network subscription, determining whether 3GPP2 network subscription information is stored on a Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC) or a nonvolatile memory (NV) associated with the UE where the UE contains at least one 3GPP network subscription and at least one 3GPP2 network subscription, and performing a read operation on one or both of the UICC and NV to obtain one or more Multimode System Selection (MMSS) base files based on the determining. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231099 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING MOBILITY PARAMETERS BASED ON NEIGHBORING ACCESS POINTS - Methods and apparatus are provided for configuring mobility or paging parameters of a femto node. A method includes determining capabilities of one or more neighboring access points based in part on signals received from the one or more neighboring access points. The method includes comparing the capabilities to one or more capabilities of the femto node to determine a mobility or paging parameter adjustment. The method includes adjusting one or more mobility or paging parameters based on the mobility or paging parameter adjustment. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231100 | Method and Systems to Dynamically Enable and Control Communication Link Optimizations on a Communication Device - Embodiment methods and systems include external hardware that can be fitted to a wireless communication device that stores a communication application, communication presets and/or data that are downloaded to the wireless communication device where it may be implemented to optimize group communications on the wireless devices. The wireless device may be coupled to an external case configured with a physical button that enables group communication such as push-to-talk and other push-to-experience capabilities. Optimizations for push-to-talk communication may be implemented in a push-to-talk mode in response to detecting connection to the external hardware. Signaling between the external case and the wireless device allows detection of the switch to (or from) push-to-talk mode when a user depresses (or releases) the hard key. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231101 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROTECTING PRIVACY WHEN A MOBILE DEVICE IS LOCATED IN A DEFINED PRIVACY ZONE - A system, method and apparatus for protecting privacy when a mobile device is located in a defined privacy zone are described herein. The available features that a user of a mobile device may use are controlled while the mobile device is located in a define privacy zone. Once a mobile device is detected in the define privacy zone, a database is accessed to determine if the mobile device has the features available that are to be disabled. If the features are available, a disable signal is sent via the communications network to the mobile device and the feature is disabled. Once the mobile device is detected to be outside of the defined privacy zone, the previously disabled mobile device feature is enabled. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231102 | Detecting Subscriber Input Via A Wireless Communication Device For Initiating Network Provisioning Of Such Device - Subscriber input detected via a wireless communication device for initiating network provisioning of the wireless communication device is presented herein. A method can include receiving, via an interface of a wireless communication device, a first input from a subscriber of a wireless service associated with the wireless communication device; sending, by the wireless communication device based on the first input from the subscriber, a request for provisioning the wireless communication device via a wireless network associated with the wireless service; and outputting, via the interface of the wireless communication device, a first message including a condition for the provisioning the wireless communication device via the wireless network based on the request. In an example, the method can further include receiving, based on the request, the condition from a component of the wireless network. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231103 | CORE NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A core network connected to a mobile communication network and a network and establishing voice communication between communication apparatuses receives a termination notification response indicating at least one codec that can be used by a terminating mobile communication apparatus from the mobile communication apparatus. The core network specifies either a common codec that belongs to the intersection of the at least one codec that can be used by the terminating mobile communication apparatus, indicated in the termination notification response, and an originating codec, or a codec that can be used by the terminating mobile communication apparatus and the core network and that has a transmission rate closest to the transmission rate of the originating codec, as a codec that should be used by the terminating mobile communication apparatus. | 09-05-2013 |
20130237197 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUBSCRIPTION MANAGEMENT IN DUAL SIM SINGLE STANDBY DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for subscription management in dual SIM devices may include using a first subscription associated with a first SIM card of a wireless device to communicate with a network. The methods and apparatus may further include detecting a presence of a second SIM card in the wireless device and automatically initializing a second subscription associated with the second SIM card in response to the detection. The methods and apparatus may also include attempting to connect to the network using the second subscription. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237198 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING DATA CALLS - A wireless device described herein may be configured to wait for a period of time before originating a data call after receiving a data call termination request from another device. The period of time may be selected to ensure that a page request, such as for a voice call, is received by the wireless device before attempting to originate the data call. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237199 | Systems and Methods for Personalizing the surrounding environment of a user with a personal computing device - The field of the invention relates to wireless-based applications, and more particularly to systems and methods for personalizing the atmospherics of a user with a personal computing device. In one embodiment, a computer-based system for personalizing one or more parameters of a surrounding environment based on a user identification associated with a personal computing device includes a personalization engine subsystem coupled to a computer network having a local area defined by a distance from the personalization engine subsystem, wherein the personalization engine subsystem is configured to identify when the personal computing device is within the local area and to obtain the user identification associated with the personal computing device. The system further includes a personalization database and one or more parameter controllers communicatively coupled to the personalization engine subsystem to enable personalization of the surrounding environment. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237200 | Cloud-Based Connectivity Information Discovery - A method includes detecting a change in connectivity information for a mobile device. The connectivity information allows another device to connect to the mobile device at least while the mobile device is wirelessly connected to a network. In response to the change in connectivity information for a mobile device, performing an update with a service provider to indicate the change in connectivity information. Another method includes receiving an update from a first electronic device, where the update indicates one or more changes in connectivity information for the first electronic device. The method includes updating one or more second electronic devices with changed connectivity information of the first electronic device. Another method includes receiving from a service provider an update of changed connectivity information for a first electronic device for which a second electronic device is subscribed at the service provider for updates to connectivity information for the first electronic device. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237201 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION AND CONTROL STATION - A radio communication system, a radio communication method, a radio base station and a control station in which, even when a radio base station performs state control, radio parameters in neighboring base stations may efficiently and appropriately be self-optimized, are disclosed. The radio communication system includes a plurality of radio base stations (eNB | 09-12-2013 |
20130237202 | USING LOW-POWER ACCESS POINTS TO IDENTIFY TRAFFIC CONGESTION ZONES - Low-power access points are used to identify traffic congestion zones in a network. The low-power access points collect metrics that are used identify high demand areas. The locations of the traffic congestion zones are then determined based on the locations of the low-power access points that identified high demand. In some embodiments, metrics are collected and processed in a distributed fashion at each femtocell. Each femtocell then outputs an indication of high demand in the area and/or takes action to address the high demand at an identified traffic congestion zone. Alternatively, the femtocells may collectively take action to address the high demand at one or more identified traffic congestion zones. In other embodiments, metrics may be collected from the femtocells at a central entity and processed to identifying any traffic congestion zones near the femtocells, whereby the central entity takes appropriate action to address the high demand. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237203 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PERFORMING OVER-THE-AIR ACTIVATION WHILE ROAMING - Methods, systems and devices are provided for over-the-air activation of a mobile device that include provisioning the mobile device with an activation identifier linked to a particular home network, initiating over-the-air activation of the mobile device, forwarding the activation identifier to a network, and replacing the activation identifier with a different and unique identifier linked to the mobile device during over-the-air activation. The over-the-air activation may be performed when the mobile device is within the home network or when the device is outside the home network, and thus “roaming” in another service provider's network. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237204 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UPLOADING LOCATION INFORMATION BASED ON DEVICE MOVEMENT - Systems and methods for uploading location information based on device movement are disclosed. In some embodiments, location information may be received or determined by a mobile communications device. The location information may be associated with a physical location of the mobile communications device. A rate of movement of the mobile communications device may be identified. In some embodiments, the location information may be transmitted or uploaded from the mobile communications device to a server. The frequency of the transmitting or uploading of the location information may be based on the rate of movement of the mobile communications device. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237205 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR ENABLING PARTIAL FUNCTIONALITY OF A MOBILE TERMINAL - A method is provided for enhancing a user interface with a mobile terminal while reducing battery consumption by selectively activating input sensors based upon the actions of a user of the mobile terminal. The method may include providing for operation in accordance with a first level of functionality having a first number of inputs that are operable, providing for operation in accordance with a second level of functionality having a second number of inputs that are operable, and providing for operation in accordance with a third level of functionality having a third number of inputs that are operable, wherein the third number of inputs is greater than the first number of inputs. The method may further include receiving an input while operating in accordance with the first level of functionality and causing operations to change from being conducted in accordance with the first level of functionality to being conducted in accordance with the third level of functionality. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237206 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELF-SERVE PROVISIONING OF SERVICES ON A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - There is disclosed a system and method for provisioning a mobile communication device on a network. In an embodiment, the method comprises: identifying one or more devices on the network to which a notification of an offer of service, should be sent; pushing the notification of an offer of service to the identified devices over the network; if the offer of service is accepted at the device, then initiating a provisioning request from the device to one or more of a carrier, service provider or management authority; and upon authorization of the provisioning request by the management authority, provisioning the service from the service provider. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237207 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and database management system for controlling the operability of a mobile communications device. A geographic location of a vehicle is determined. A position of the mobile communications device with in the vehicle is determined. Conditional parameters of the mobile communications device are determined. Database records correlating location information with restrictions are accessed. A determination is made whether use of the mobile communications device should be restricted within the vehicle in response to the geographical location, the position of the mobile communications device within the vehicle, the conditional parameters, and the database records The capabilities of the mobile communications device are configured in response to the restrictions. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237208 | Carrier Aggregation Management and Related Device and System - Method for managing activation or deactivation of a secondary serving cell, SCell, for a base station ( | 09-12-2013 |
20130244634 | MOBILE INTEGRATION PLATFORM (MIP) INTEGRATED HANDSET APPLICATION PROXY (HAP) - Systems, software and methods are disclosed for using a mobile phone ( | 09-19-2013 |
20130244635 | AUTOMATIC IN-VEHICLE MOBILE DEVICE DETECTION - A system and method for automatically configuring a communications system between a local mode in which a local communications device (such as an in-vehicle device or “land-line phone”) is active and a remote mode in which a mobile communications device is active and coupled to the communications system. One example of the method includes searching for a Bluetooth™ enabled device, selecting the remote mode of operation responsive to detection of the Bluetooth™ enabled device, and selecting the local mode of operation responsive to failure to detect the Bluetooth™ enabled device. In one example, selecting the local mode of operation includes activating the local communications device, and selecting the remote mode of operation includes activating local Bluetooth™ systems to connect the Bluetooth™ enabled device to the communications system. | 09-19-2013 |
20130244636 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING CALL DROP RATE - Methods and apparatus for reducing voice call drop rate. Existing devices do not account for the added burden of background services on voice calls. Specifically, multi-RAB scenarios (e.g., a voice call and background services) can experience significant reduction in call quality. Accordingly, in one exemplary embodiment, background services that are not time-critical and/or application-critical can be suspended while a voice call is in progress. By suspending background traffic during a call, the device can avoid unnecessary multi-RAB voice call operation, which significantly improves overall network operation and user experience. | 09-19-2013 |
20130244637 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM, AND TERMINAL APPARATUS - The present disclosure provides an information processing apparatus, an information processing method, an information processing program, and a terminal apparatus for offering information in more quantity and in further detail than before by having a plurality of devices linked with one another. The information processing apparatus includes a first device and a second device interconnected with each other. Application information about an application executing on the first device is acquired through a communication block included in the second device. Display on a display block included in the second device is controlled based on the application information. | 09-19-2013 |
20130244638 | System and Method for Processing MEID Data - A system, method, computer readable medium, and computer program for processing wireless communication device identification numbers such as MEID numbers | 09-19-2013 |
20130252597 | CONTROLLING APPLICATIONS IN MOBILE DEVICE BASED ON ENVIRONMENTAL CONTEXT - A method for controlling an application in a mobile device is disclosed. The method includes receiving environmental information, inferring an environmental context from the environmental information, and controlling activation of the application based on a set of reference models associated with the inferred environmental context. In addition, the method may include receiving a sound input, extracting a sound feature from the sound input, transmitting the sound feature to a server configured to group a plurality of mobile devices into at least one similar context group, and receiving, from the server, information on a leader device or a non-leader device and the at least one similar context group. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252598 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT OF POWER AND FREQUENCIES IN A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - Aspects of a method and system for dynamic adjustment of power, antenna direction and frequencies in a femtocell network are provided. In this regard, a communication system may comprise a plurality of femtocells, one or more base stations, and a femtocell management entity that coordinates operation of the plurality of femtocells. One or more parameters may be communicated from one of the plurality of femtocells and/or one or more base stations to the femtocell management entity. The femtocell management entity may be enabled to utilize the one or more parameters to determine configuration information for one of the plurality of femtocells and/or for one or more remaining ones of the plurality of femtocells. One of the plurality of femtocells may be enabled to receive the determined configuration information from the femtocell management entity. One of the plurality of femtocells may be configured utilizing the received determined configuration information. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252599 | Systems, Methods, Circuits and Associated Software for Augmenting Contact Details Stored on a Communication Device with Data Relating to the Contact Contained on Social Networking Sites - Disclosed are methods, circuits, systems and applications for providing messaging services which may provide for download, synchronization, voicemail-message to text-message translation, direct access and handling of selected voicemail messages through a user's user interface. Further disclosed are systems, methods, circuits and associated software for retrieving data associated with contacts stored on a communication device from social networking sites and integrating the retrieved data into the operation of the communication device. | 09-26-2013 |
20130260730 | CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTAINER FOR MOBILE OPERATING SYSTEMS AND/OR DEVICES - Systems and methods for providing a custom application container for a mobile operating system are provided herein. A container that encapsulates an application layer of a mobile operating system can be provided. Thus, the container can include all applications that reside in the application layer and operate as a proxy for system calls issued by the applications to the mobile operating system. In particular, the container can intercept core service request and forward those requests to pluggable extensions relating to a core service requested by the core service request. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260731 | MULTIPLE MAJOR VERSION SIGNALING ON SESSION INITIATION - Embodiments of the invention provide an improved major release negotiation mechanism between an initiating node and a receiving node during Diameter session establishment in a 3GPP network. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260732 | TECHNIQUES FOR POWER SAVING FOR MULTIMODE WIRELESS DEVICE USING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK DEPLOYMENT INFORMATION - A method for operating a multimode wireless device, and the multimode wireless device thereof, are provided. The method includes determining whether the multimode wireless device is located at a location, or within a threshold distance of the location, in which the multimode wireless device can be serviced by a first wireless communication network based on a determined location and wireless communication network deployment information, when it is determined that the multimode wireless device is located at the location, or within the threshold distance of the location, controlling a first communication module corresponding to the first wireless communication network to be in an active state, and when it is determined that the multimode wireless device is not located at the location, or within the threshold distance of the location, controlling the first communication module to be in an inactive state. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260733 | METHOD AND CAPABILITY MANAGER FOR SUPPORTING PROVISION OF CAPABILITIES - A method and capability manager for supporting provision of capabilities of a first user terminal to a second user terminal. Filtering rules have been pre-configured in the capability manager for the first user terminal to control exposure of capabilities. When the capability manager receives a capability message issued by the first user terminal, filtering rules are applied on the capabilities in the capability message, to modify the capability message by omitting at least one of the capabilities based on the filtering rules. The modified capability message is then forwarded towards the second user terminal. Thereby, options for communication will be indicated at the second terminal in accordance with the capabilities in the modified capability message, i.e. in a way that can be controlled by the user. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260734 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR DETECTING AND MANAGING CHANGES ASSOCIATED WITH MOBILE WALLETS - System, methods, and computer program products are provided for detecting and managing changes associated with a mobile wallet. Current mobile wallet data is retrieved from at least one memory, and new mobile device attributes are retrieved. It is determined whether a change has occurred based on a comparison of the current mobile wallet data and the new mobile device attributes. A request to process a change is transmitted to a server on a communications network. Update data is received over the communications network, and the current mobile wallet data is updated in the at least one memory with the update data. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260735 | Radio Configuration for a Wireless Device and Base Station - A base station detects a change in timing of signals received from a wireless device in a first secondary cell in a first cell group. If the base station determines that the first secondary cell needs to be assigned to a different cell group than the first cell group, the base station transmits at least one second radio resource control message configured to cause in the wireless device release of the first secondary cell. The base station assigns the first secondary cell to a second cell group different from the first cell group. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260736 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SIGNALING NETWORK CAPABILITIES FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE - Methods and apparatus for wireless communication in a wireless communication network include maintaining a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) list and receiving an information request from a network, wherein the information request is associated with configuration parameters associated with the PLMN list. Aspects of the methods and apparatus configuring the UE based on the configuration parameters associated with the PLMN list. Aspects also include replying to the network that the UE is configured with the configuration parameters associated with the PLMN list. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260737 | DYNAMICALLY PROVISIONING A DEVICE - A wireless communication device comprises a first wireless interface configured to communicate with a device over a first wireless network, and a second wireless interface configured to communicate with a remote server over a second wireless network, the remote server storing one or more executables. The wireless communication device includes a configured to receive device configuration information from the device over the first wireless network, the device configuration information identifying at least processing hardware resources in the device. The controller is configured to select an executable based on the device configuration information, the executable for configuring the device to process data in a particular format and determine whether the selected executable is stored within the wireless communication device, and if not, to retrieve the selected executable from the remote server by way of the second wireless network, and download the selected executable to the device over the first wireless network. | 10-03-2013 |
20130267213 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING POWER-CONSUMPTION AND SIGNALING OVERHEAD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for optimizing power consumption in a wireless device by determining optimal signal release timing are disclosed. An accumulated data volume of one or more data calls received and transmitted in a device is measured during a first time period in which the device is in a connected state. After this period, the accumulated data volume is compared to a data volume threshold. Based on this comparison, a second time period may be set to either short or long time values, where the second time period is a time of the connected state of the device. After the second time period expires, SCRI signaling is sent to release the connected state of the device. By selectively setting the timing of the connected state of a device based on accumulated data volume during a first period, the timing for signaling of release from a connected state is optimized. | 10-10-2013 |
20130267214 | PROFILE SELECTION AND CALL FORWARDING BASED UPON WIRELESS TERMINAL GPS LOCATION COORDINATES - A wireless terminal adjusts its profile settings based upon its GPS coordinates. The wireless terminal accesses its GPS receiver to determine its location coordinates, which may include elevation. The wireless terminal then accesses a plurality of location based profile rules, each of which includes location parameters and corresponding profile settings. The wireless terminal selects a location based profile rule of the plurality of location based profile rules based upon the location coordinates of the wireless terminal. The wireless terminal enacts corresponding profile settings of the selected location based profile rule. The profile settings may cause the wireless terminal to adjust its ringer on/off settings, its ringer volume settings, the number of rings it provides in response to an incoming communication, the ringer cadence, the number of repeat rings for incoming communications, vibration settings, call filtering settings, call forwarding settings, or message receipt settings, for example. | 10-10-2013 |
20130267215 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A COMMUNICATION-BASED SERVICE USING AN INTELLIGENT INFERENCE ENGINE - A system, method and terminal are provided for performing a communication-based service using an intelligent inference engine. The system includes a user terminal including the intelligent inference engine that automatically performs at least one of information processing and output according to a use of a terminal function, and at least one connection terminal that performs at least one of a response to information provision related with the use of the terminal function of the user terminal and information transmission of the user terminal, and an output of received information. | 10-10-2013 |
20130267216 | DEVICE NETWORK TECHNOLOGY SELECTION AND DISPLAY IN MULTI-TECHNOLOGY WIRELESS ENVIRONMENTS - Radio network technology and display thereof can be managed when multiple services and radio network technologies are available to a multi-technology mobile device. Management relies at least in part on a subscriber profile that comprises a network selection profile constructed through market policy, subscriber policy, and application policy for radio technology utilization. Network preference(s) profile is generated on per subscriber, or per subscriber type, basis and is conveyed to a subscriber station over the air. Initial subscriber profile can be delivered at a time of provisioning a multi-technology mobile device, and updated based at least upon subscriber demand, a schedule established by a network operator or service provider, or an event related to coverage area relocation or contracted services. Radio technology preferences and display of associated technologies available to a multi-technology mobile device can be dynamically controlled on a per-call and/or per-application basis. | 10-10-2013 |
20130267217 | DIGITAL UPGRADE SYSTEM AND METHOD - Digital upgrade system and method for translating analog commands and digital commands in wireless customer services premises equipment (CPE). The digital upgrade system receives a command from a CPE Host and translates the command from analog to digital in order to broadcast it over a wireless digital network to be received by a client. Alternatively, the digital upgrade system receives a digital command from a digital network and translates it to an analog command to be received by a functionality module of a wireless CPE Host. | 10-10-2013 |
20130273897 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR MULTI-TASKING IN A CLIENTLESS MOBILE PHONE - A method for supporting execution of a plurality of applications over a clientless mobile phone is disclosed. The method comprises displaying over a display of the mobile phone a menu of at least one application of a plurality of applications executed by a clientless mobile interaction (CMI) server, wherein the CMI server communicates the menu of the plurality of applications to the mobile phone using a USSD protocol; receiving an input responsive of a selection of one application of the at least one application displayed in the menu; communicating the selected application to the CMI server using the USSD protocol; receiving contents of the selected application from the CMI server using the USSD protocol; and displaying the received contents over the display of the mobile phone. | 10-17-2013 |
20130281075 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING TRAFFIC BY TIME-BASED POLICY - A method of controlling traffic, particularly, a method of setting and executing a traffic control policy in which a time condition is additionally combined is provided. At any specific step of a network that executes a time-based policy, an execution time point of the time-based policy can be determined. Further, a network service provider can provide various application services to a network user using a time-based policy. | 10-24-2013 |
20130281076 | SMALL CELL ACTIVATION PROCEDURE - A method of wireless communication includes configuring a small cell with activation parameters. The activation parameters include a new carrier type having a reduced periodicity. The method also includes configuring a UE with time restricted measurements. The time restricted measurements correspond to the new carrier type and the reduced periodicity. The method further includes receiving small cell signal measurements from the UE and initiating an activation sequence in response to the small cell signal measurements. | 10-24-2013 |
20130281077 | Service management platform for configuring, monitoring, and managing mobile devices - A service management platform provides a manager device the ability to provision, manage, and monitor managed devices through a manager device interface to the service management platform. The service management platform allows for a manager device to configure and modify various profiles by determining one or more governing policies to be associated with respective profiles. The service management platform allows for the manager device to provision managed devices by the service management platform applying selected profiles to respective selected devices. The service management platform further allows for the manager device to monitor one or more managed devices by providing managed device usage data to the manager device, based on requests originating at the manager device. | 10-24-2013 |
20130281078 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATIONS OF THE MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for controlling communication of a mobile communication device that connects to one or more slave devices. Data is written into a storage system of the mobile communication device, and the method determines whether an incoming call is received by the mobile communication device or whether an outgoing call is dialed by the mobile communication device according to the monitored data. When the incoming call is received by the mobile communication device, the method answers the incoming call using either the mobile communication device or one of the slave devices according to data stored in the storage system. The method further dials the outgoing call using the mobile communication device according to the data stored in the storage system. | 10-24-2013 |
20130281079 | PHONE THAT PREVENTS CONCURRENT TEXTING AND DRIVING - The present invention includes a phone able to detect or determine that a user of the phone is sitting in a driver seat of a moving vehicle. The determination may be based on, for example, captured front-side images, captured back-side images, captured audio, contextual analysis of textual messages, contextual analysis of phone conversations or intra-vehicular conversations, GPS data or other location data, or other parameters. Upon such determination, the phone may block one or more features or applications, such as texting or messaging. The present invention may reduce, eliminate or block occurrences of concurrent texting-and-driving, or other unsafe or illegal operations. | 10-24-2013 |
20130288655 | USE OF PROXIMITY SENSORS FOR INTERACTING WITH MOBILE DEVICES - Various arrangements for handling a call by a mobile device and/or selecting a function for execution by the mobile device are presented. A phone call may be commenced by a mobile device. During the phone call, the mobile device may collect proximity data that indicates the mobile device is not proximate to an ear of a user. The microphone of the mobile device may be muted in response to the proximity data that indicates the mobile device is not proximate to the ear of the user. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288656 | MULTI-MODE USER DEVICE AND NETWORK-BASED CONTROL AND MONITORING - Methods, devices, and storage media for user devices to operate in multiple modes and provide mode indicators that indicate the mode in which the user device operates, and a network that provides multimode services that include monitoring service events associated with the multiple modes, control modes of operation, and allow users to view, manage, and classify service usage information that includes service event information and correlated mode information. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288657 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING PHONE NUMBERS USING THE SAME - In a method of switching between phone numbers of a communication device, a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card of the communication device receives Location Area Identity (LAI) information. Upon receiving the LAI information, the SIM card determines whether a Mobile Country Code (MCC) of the LAI information is consistent with an MCC of International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of an activated phone number. The communication device switches an inactivated phone number to be activated when the MCC of the LAI information is inconsistent with the MCC of the activated phone number. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288658 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REALIZING ENERGY SAVING IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for energy saving in communication system, where a base station enters idle state if no residence of user equipment is detected in a cell, comprises: receiving, by the base station in idle state, a response signal from user equipment after receiving a paging signal sent by the base station with a period N times a length of a radio frame; switching, by the base station, to active state. An energy saving base station and a microcell access gateway are also disclosed. Since the method is independent of whether a user equipment has been sent a signal to a macro network, application scope is enlarged. Since whether to enter active state is determined according to the feedback of user terminal, whether there is residence of user equipment in the microcell can be sensed more accurately, improving accuracy of state switching and reliability of smart energy saving of the microcell. | 10-31-2013 |
20130295900 | Detecing a mobile communication device in relationship to a vehicle oerator and implimenting administrative control thereof - Arrangements for controlling operation of a mobile communication device (MCD) are disclosed. The method can determine an identifier associated with the MCD, detect that the MCD is associated with an operational vehicle and that the MCD is associated with an operator of the vehicle. The MCD can query a data base and can determine if the MCD is associated with a MCD feature control profile. One or more MCD features can be deactivated in response to the control profile when it is determined that the operator of an operable vehicle is associated with the MCD having a control profile. Additional embodiments are also disclosed. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295901 | System and Method for Sensor-Based Determination of User Role, Location, and/or State of One of More In-Vehicle Mobile Devices and Enforcement of Usage Thereof - Systems and methods are disclosed for computing various determinations at one or more mobile devices and/or central machines. In part, such determinations are computed based on analysis of one or more inputs originating at one or more sensors of one or more devices. Such determinations include determining an in-vehicle role, an in-vehicle location, a handheld state, and a vehicle class. Various transformations, modifications, and outputs can result from such determinations. Also disclosed are systems and methods for restricting operation of a mobile device, including restrictions that impede operation by a driver moreso than operation by a passenger. Also disclosed are systems and methods for orienting a coordinate system of a mobile device. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295902 | Method And Apparatus For Remotely Managing Devices Utilizing Request-Response Protocols - An approach is provided for remotely managing mobile devices utilizing one or more request-response protocols. The web client determines a management operation for a device, a resource associated with the management operations, or a combination thereof. The web client processes and/or facilitates a processing of the management operations, the resources, or a combination thereof to determine a transaction command for completing the management operations, wherein the transaction commands are realized via a request-response protocol. The device management platform processes and/or facilitates a processing of a transaction command from a device to determine a resource associated with a management operation. The device management platform causes a generation of a resource associated with a management operation for the device based on the transaction commands. The device management platform causes a transmission of address information associated with the resources, the other resources, or a combination thereof via a request-response protocol. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295903 | Parental Notification of Prohibited Activities - Methods, systems, and products notify parents of child activities. A child's device stores rules that prohibit certain activities. When the child's device attempts a prohibited activity, a message is sent to a notification address associated with the parent. The message, for example, may be sent to the parent's cell phone. The instant message describes the prohibited activity. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295904 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA FOR TIMER-BASED MANAGEMENT OF COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method of management of a communication device in an aircraft may include transitioning the communication device from a normal mode to a disabled mode based on a calculated device sleep time based on data associated with transportation information of the device. One of these modes may be a state of the device in which a transceiver of the device is deactivated and the other mode may be a state of the device in which the transceiver is activated. Therefore, the device sleep time determines when the wireless device's transceiver may not be activated. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295905 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STATE/MODE TRANSITIONING - A method and apparatus for transitioning states or modes on a user equipment, the method having the steps of receiving, at a network element, a transition indication; checking a radio resource profile for the user equipment; and making a transitioning decision at the network element based on the received transition indication and the radio resource profile. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295906 | MICROPHONE PROXIMITY DETECTION - A mobile communications device contains at least two microphones. One microphone is located away from the handset receiver and serves to pick up voice of a near end user of the device for transmission to the other party during a call. Another microphone is located near the handset receiver and serves to pick up acoustic output of the handset receiver (a far end signal). A signal processor measures the frequency response of the receiver. The signal processor performs spectral analysis of the receiver frequency response to determine whether or not the device is being held at the ear of the user. On that basis, the device automatically changes its operating mode, e.g., turns on or off a touch sensitive display screen during the call. Other embodiments are also described. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295907 | INFORMATION PROVIDING SERVER AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal which receives at least one service through wireless communication with a wireless base station, including: a wireless communication interface which communicates by radio with the wireless base station; a memory that stores at least one piece of application software where the at least one service is provided; and a control module; wherein the control module is configured to: receive service information that is transmitted via the wireless base station as a response to the connection request or cyclically transmitted from the wireless base station, the service information includes application identification information of at least one piece of application software that is available within a wireless service area of the wireless base station; and execute customization processing that starts up or displays of the at least one piece of application software stored in the memory according to customized setting that is set beforehand. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295908 | In-Vehicle Electronic Device Usage Blocker - A method for controlling the operability and functionality of an electronic device with an electronic device detection system begins by determining whether an electronic device is located within the vehicle and proximate to an operator of the vehicle. The electronic device detection system defines a restricted zone in which electronic device use is partially or fully prohibited and a safe zone in which all or some of the functionality of electronic devices is enabled. Once it is determined that an electronic device is in use and within a restricted zone, a determination is made as to whether any usage prohibition conditions are satisfied. If usage prohibition conditions are satisfied, then particular functions of the electronic device may be disabled in a restricted zone. If prohibition conditions are not met, the electronic device may be totally enabled, partially enabled to allow certain functions, or the electronic device is never disabled. | 11-07-2013 |
20130303142 | Self-Identification of Brand and Branded Firmware Installation in a Generic Electronic Device - A mobile phone that is delivered by an original equipment manufacturer in an unbranded state. The mobile phone comprises a near-field-communication radio transceiver, a memory, a processor, and an application stored in the memory. When executed by the processor, the application reads brand information, using the near-field-communication radio transceiver, from a radio frequency identity (RFID) tag coupled to the mobile phone during an order fulfillment process in a distribution center of a communication service provider and, based on the brand information, loads brand firmware into the memory, whereby the mobile phone presents a branded look and feel. | 11-14-2013 |
20130303143 | MOBILE DEVICE SAFE DRIVING - In embodiments of mobile device safe driving, a mobile device can display a device lock screen on an integrated display device, and transition from the device lock screen to display a driving mode lock screen. The transition to display the driving mode lock screen occurs without receiving a PIN code entered on the device lock screen. The mobile device implements a safe driving service that is implemented to activate a safe driving mode of the mobile device, and disable features of the mobile device while the safe driving mode is activated. | 11-14-2013 |
20130303144 | System and Apparatus for Controlling a Device with a Bone Conduction Transducer - A mobile communication device that may include a vibration sensor that is arranged to detect vibrations; an instruction generator that is coupled to the vibration sensor and is arranged to: detect a pattern in said vibrations caused by a user contact with either the mobile communication device or a head of the user, and translate said pattern into a set of instructions that is associated with the pattern and is to be executed by the mobile communication device. | 11-14-2013 |
20130303145 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUDITING AND CORRECTING CELLULAR ANTENNA COVERAGE PATTERNS - A method for adjusting a base station antenna may include receiving measured data including signal strength data for a signal received from the base station and location data from one or more user equipment, receiving planned radio coverage data, comparing the measured data with the planned radio coverage data, generating adjustment parameters based on a result of the comparison, and adjusting the antenna based on the adjustment parameters. | 11-14-2013 |
20130303146 | Multiple Domain Smartphone - A smartphone is adapted, through software modifications, to provide multiple operating domains or domains that provide differing levels of security and reliability. Each operating domain is isolated from the others. Detection of unauthorized modification is provided in some embodiments. Cross domain activity notification is provided in some embodiments. | 11-14-2013 |
20130303147 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING BASE STATION POWER - The present invention discloses a method for controlling base station power and a network device. In the embodiments of the present invention, traffic volumes of a primary site and a secondary site associated with the primary site are acquired, and power of the secondary site associated with the primary site is controlled according to the traffic volumes, so that the power of base stations is controlled flexibly and that resources are utilized rationally. | 11-14-2013 |
20130303148 | Multimode Mobile Communication Device With Configuration Update Capability - A system and method in a multimode mobile communication device for providing communication configuration update capability. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise establishing a first communication link characterized by a first communication mode of a plurality of communication modes in which the multimode communication device is capable of communicating. Such a first communication link may, for example, be established utilizing a first communication interface module. Communication configuration (or profile) information for a second communication mode may be received over the first communication link. The communication configuration information for the second communication mode may then be utilized to configure the mobile communication device to perform communications in the second communication mode (e.g., utilizing a second communication interface module). | 11-14-2013 |
20130303149 | Disabling Operation Of Features On A Handheld Mobile Communication Device Based Upon Location - Methods and devices for implementing subsystem or functional aspect restrictions on a wireless handheld communication device. Data defining geographical boundaries of a restricted operating area is stored on the device. The present position of the device is ascertained and a determination is made whether the device is located within the restricted operating area. A restriction on the subsystem or functional aspect is imposed when it is determined the device is within the restricted operating area. The subsystem or functional aspect restriction can be communicated to the device via a wireless communication network. Additionally, the restrictions and boundaries can be communicated to the device as part of an IT security policy. | 11-14-2013 |
20130303150 | Apparatus and Method for Saving Power of Base Stations - The invention discloses a method and a device for status management of base stations in a communication network. The method comprises measuring overall traffic load of the base stations ( | 11-14-2013 |
20130310015 | INTELLIGENT LONG TERM EVOLUTION PEER-TO-PEER MANAGEMENT - A device may receive a peer-to-peer communication, receive a capability of a second device associated with the peer-to-peer communication, and provide instructions to adjust a peer-to-peer communication based on the capability of the device. | 11-21-2013 |
20130310016 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PARAMETER UPDATE INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DEVICE USING SAME - Disclosed are a method for transmitting and receiving parameter update information in a wireless communication system, and a device using the same. A machine to Machine (M2M) device for receiving parameter update information in a wireless communication system according to the present invention includes a receiver for receiving a first message, which includes information regarding the parameter update, from a base station. The information regarding the parameter update may include information indicating that a position update of M2M devices in a specific M2M group to which the M2M device belongs is required. The receiver may be further configured to transmit a second message including a position update request to the base station and receive a third message including position updated information on the M2M devices in the specific M2M group from the base station in response to the second message. The m2M device may further include a processor for performing a position update on the basis of the updated position information in the third message. | 11-21-2013 |
20130316686 | Systems and Methods for Group Communication Using a Mobile Device With Mode Transition Based On Motion - Methods and systems of communication using a mobile device that include detecting a movement of the mobile device associated with transitioning from speaker phone mode to earpiece mode, or vice versa, and in response to detecting such movement, automatically transitioning the device to a different mode of operation. The detected action may be the motion and/or positioning of the device handset, such as the movement of the handset towards or away from the user's ear, and/or the placement of the handset on a surface in a face-up or face-down position. Further methods and systems for transitioning between communication pathways and security modes in response to a detected movement of the mobile device. | 11-28-2013 |
20130316687 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GROUP COMMUNICATION USING A MOBILE DEVICE WITH MODE DEPENDING ON USER PROXIMITY OR DEVICE POSITION - Methods and systems for controlling group communications using a mobile device includes detecting a motion of the mobile device corresponding to a user placing the device on a surface, maintain a communication session with another mobile device while the user is detected in proximity to the first mobile device, and entering a non-active communication mode when the user is not detected in proximity to the device. The communication session may be maintained for a time-out period before entering the non-active mode. Further methods and systems include transitioning to a non-active communication mode in response to detecting a motion of the mobile device corresponding to a user placing the device on a surface. | 11-28-2013 |
20130316688 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR CONTROLLING A MOBILE TERMINAL IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK TO TRANSITION BETWEEN A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION STATES - The present invention relates to methods and devices for controlling a mobile terminal in a radio access network to transition between a plurality of communication states. This object is attained in a first aspect of the present invention by a method comprising the step of acquiring (S | 11-28-2013 |
20130316689 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - There is provided an information processing device including a communication unit that performs short-range wireless communication with another information processing device, and a control unit that performs control of supplying, via a memory, a display device with display information supplied from the other information processing device through the short-range wireless communication and causing the display device to display the display information, and supplying the display device with the display information supplied from the other information processing device and retained in the memory and causing the display device to display the display information, when a wireless communication quality of the short-range wireless communication with the other information processing device satisfies a predetermined condition. | 11-28-2013 |
20130316690 | Systems and Methods for Interacting with Portable Electronic Devices - Systems and methods for interacting with a portable electronic device are provided. In this regard, a representative system includes: a cover sized and shaped for removable attachment to an exterior of the portable electronic device; a first antenna disposed on the cover; and a first wireless controller coupled to the first antenna and disposed on the cover and configured for transmitting a first data from the cover to the portable electronic device via the first antenna to identify the cover to the portable electronic device. | 11-28-2013 |
20130316691 | VARIABLE BEAMFORMING WITH A MOBILE PLATFORM - A mobile platform includes a microphone array and is capable of implementing beamforming to amplify or suppress audio information from a sound source. The sound source is indicated through a user input, such as pointing the mobile platform in the direction of the sound source or through a touch screen display interface. The mobile platform further includes orientation sensors capable of detecting movement of the mobile platform. When the mobile platform moves with respect to the sound source, the beamforming is adjusted based on the data from the orientation sensors so that beamforming is continuously implemented in the direction of the sound source. The audio information from the sound source may be included or suppressed from a telephone or video-telephony conversation. Images or video from a camera may be likewise controlled based on the data from the orientation sensors. | 11-28-2013 |
20130316692 | COMMON RADIO ELEMENT APPLICATION MANAGER ARCHITECTURE FOR WIRELESS PICOCELLS - A multi-modal multi-modulation base station such as a picocell is disclosed. The base station can include multiple radio devices that can be configured to communicate with user devices using different protocols and different frequencies. The base station includes a backhaul interface to core networks that can also operate according to multiple protocols. A common radio element application manager control operations of the radio devices including core network connectivity, mode-to-mode communications, and synchronization of picocell features. | 11-28-2013 |
20130316693 | MOBILE STATION AND TIME ADJUSTMENT METHOD - A mobile station includes a time information reception determining unit configured to determine whether time information is received from a residing network, a table configured to associate networks where the mobile station may reside with time zones for areas where the networks are operated, and a time adjustment unit configured to, in the case where it is not determined by the time information reception determining unit that the time information is received, refer to the table, and perform time adjustment based on the time zone corresponding to the network where the mobile station resides. | 11-28-2013 |
20130324097 | Location-Based Application Management Methods and Systems - An exemplary method includes a location-based application management system 1) determining that a mobile device associated with a user is located within a geographic vicinity associated with an entity, 2) automatically identifying, in response to the determining, an executable application associated with the entity, and 3) facilitating execution by the mobile device of the identified executable application while the mobile device is located within the geographic vicinity associated with the entity. Corresponding methods and systems are also disclosed. | 12-05-2013 |
20130324098 | Methods and Apparatus for Determining Environmental Factors to Modify Hardware or System Operation - Methods and apparatus for an environment analysis tool on a mobile device which may construct a model of the surrounding environment in order to determine whether or not characteristics of the model implicate a degradation in wireless signal quality. In response to an analysis of the constructed model to determine signal quality, the environment analysis tool may alter the behavior of any number of hardware or software functions to avoid or reduce efforts to receive or use the affected signal over the duration of the mobile device's presence within the environment with the signal-degrading characteristics. | 12-05-2013 |
20130324099 | System and Method for Running Mobile Devices in the Cloud - Systems and methods comprise a network in which a mobile device is configured as an input/output interface for a user such that actual processing, storage and network interfaces are performed or provided by a remote server. | 12-05-2013 |
20130324100 | POSITION INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, POSITION INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND WIRELESS TERMINAL - A position information management system which includes a communication apparatus and a wireless terminal which communicates with the communication apparatus is disclosed. The communication apparatus includes a storage unit which stores therein position information of the communication apparatus and operation control information which is determined in accordance with the position information of the communication apparatus and which controls an operation of the wireless terminal; and a position information transmitting unit which transmits, to the wireless terminal, the position information and the operation control information stored in the storage unit. The wireless terminal includes a position information receiving unit which receives the position information and the operation control information by the communication apparatus; and an operation control unit which controls an operation of the wireless terminal in accordance with the operation control information received by the position information receiving unit. | 12-05-2013 |
20130324101 | Dynamically Configurable Wireless Device and Server Communication System - A wireless communication and control system including a wireless device. There is a central server for storing communication protocols and control protocols and communicating the communication protocols and selectively communicating the control protocols between the wireless device and the central server. A communication protocol configures the system for communication and control protocols configure the system as one of a selection of intelligent appliance controllers. Alternately the control protocols configure the system as one of a selection of Internet terminals. The wireless device is any hand-held communication device, such as a hand-held computing device, wireless telephone, or cellular phone. | 12-05-2013 |
20130324102 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESTRICTING COMMUNICATIONS AT A NETWORK LEVEL - The disclosed embodiments include a method, apparatus, and computer program product for restricting communications at a network level. For example, one disclosed embodiment includes a system that includes at least one processor and at least one memory coupled to the at least one processor. The memory stores instructions that when executed by the at least one processor performs operations that includes receiving location coordinates such as, but not limited to, a building's coordinates, a name of a business, and a freeform shape that defines a boundary. The operations include restricting, at the network level, communications associated with a device determined to be within a boundary corresponding to the location coordinates. | 12-05-2013 |
20130331076 | DUPLICATE CONNECTION DETECTION FOR DEVICES USING RANDOM ADDRESSES - An electronic device is described. When this electronic device receives an advertising packet containing an address from another electronic device, the electronic device determines if a connection has already been established with the other electronic device using another address. If so, instead of establishing another connection with the other electronic device using the address, the electronic device continues to use the connection with the other electronic device using the other address. In this way, the electronic device may avoid duplicate connections with the other electronic device, which can occur in communication protocols in which encoded information in advertising frames that specifies an address of the other electronic device is periodically changed. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331077 | RF CHAIN MANAGEMENT IN A CARRIER AGGREGATION CAPABLE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for managing radio frequency (RF) chains in a carrier aggregation capable wireless communication device is provided. The method can include a wireless communication device using a first RF chain associated with a first component carrier and a second RF chain associated with a second component carrier to support a connection to a network. The method can further include the wireless communication device formatting a deactivation message configured to trigger deactivation of the second component carrier. The method can additionally include the wireless communication device sending the deactivation message to the network to trigger deactivation of the second component carrier. The method can also include the wireless communication device discontinuing usage of the second RF chain to support the connection to the network via the second component carrier after sending the deactivation message. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331078 | System And Method To Inhibit User Text Messaging On A Smartphone While Traveling In A Motor Vehicle - A system is disclosed for selectively inhibiting text message operation of a smartphone being used by a user while travelling in a motor vehicle, where the motor vehicle incorporates a vehicle audio subsystem. A smartphone may have a detection circuit and a processor. The detection circuit detects a signal from the audio system that indicates to the smartphone that the smartphone is located within the vehicle. A navigation system may also be included in the smartphone that generates navigation signals indicating when the smartphone is in motion. The processor receives the navigation signals and, using a software module, inhibits text messaging operation on the smartphone while the vehicle is detected to be in motion. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331079 | Self-Organizing Network - According to a method of operating a cellular telecommunications network to implement self-organizing network (SON) functionality, a network manager (NM) SON function is implemented in a NM, and a plurality of network elements (NEs) each implement a NE SON function. Each NE SON function is associated with one or more network cells. The NM SON function obtains operational data relating to the network and evaluates a current network condition. Based on the current network condition, the NM SON function determines an allowable set of configuration parameters and conditional actions, which defines combinations of cell configuration parameters that a NE SON function is permitted to use when reconfiguring a cell. The NM SON function provides the allowable set in a NE configuration attribute sent to the NE SON function. The conditional actions are configured in the NE SON function and ensure consistency and integrity of decisions taken at individual cells. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331080 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING, CONFIGURING AND TESTING NEW WIRELESS DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS - A system, apparatus, and method are provided for connecting, configuring and testing new wireless devices and applications. For example, one embodiment of a computer-implemented method for enabling a trial wireless device comprises: automatically pre-provisioning one or more trial SIM cards for operation on a particular wireless cellular network on behalf of a prospective customer; automatically pre-configuring a trial wireless machine-to-machine (“M2M”) device on behalf of the prospective customer; wherein the trial M2M device includes testing and monitoring program code which, when the trial M2M device is connected to a computer system, performs the operations of: automatically connecting to the wireless cellular network execute a plurality of test operations for testing the SIM card and the trial M2M device, the test operations including determining whether the SIM card is correctly provisioned for the wireless network; determining whether the trial M2M wireless device is operating properly; and determining the existence of wireless data connectivity. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331081 | Method and Arrangement for Reducing Power Consumption in a Communication Device - A method in a communication device ( | 12-12-2013 |
20130337793 | BUNDLED MOBILE DEVICE PURCHASE SYSTEM - Generally, this disclosure relates to a bundled mobile device purchase system. The system may include a mobile device and a bundle service. The mobile device may include transponder circuitry configured to receive and store a bundle identifier including an application identifier related to an application, the bundle identifier provided to the transponder circuitry during a transaction that includes purchasing the mobile device and the application. The mobile device may further include memory circuitry configured to receive and store the application after the transaction. The bundle service may include a bundle download module configured to provide the application to the mobile device in response to receiving the application identifier from the mobile device. | 12-19-2013 |
20130337794 | BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING BASE STATION, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM THEREFOR - A base station includes a memory that stores identification information of a cell of the base station and identification information of one or more neighboring cells. The base station also includes a receiver that receives a neighboring cell information message. The received neighboring cell information message includes source-indicating data that indicates a source base station and indicates cell identification information of a respective cell of the source base station; neighboring cell information that includes received identification information of one or more neighbor cells adjacent to the respective cell of the source base station; and sender-indicating data that indicates a sender of the neighboring cell information message. The base station also includes a controller adapted to (1) analyze the received identification information to detect any instance in which the stored identification information of the cell of the base station is present more than one time in the received identification information; and (2) in response to detecting the instance, to carry out an update function of the stored identification information using the received identification information. The sender-indicating data of the received neighboring cell information message indicates a sender other than the source base station. | 12-19-2013 |
20130344856 | AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION OF A VEHICLE DRIVER BASED ON DRIVING BEHAVIOR - A method and apparatus are disclosed that identify a motor vehicle operation and whether a driver is operating a mobile device. One example of operation may include a method that includes receiving vehicle data based on active operation of a vehicle and compiling a candidate driver identification profile (DIP) based on the received vehicle data. The method may also include comparing the candidate DIP to a pre-stored DIP and determining a match between the candidate DIP and the pre-stored DIP. The method may also include applying a restriction to a mobile station operated by a driver of the vehicle responsive to the match determination. | 12-26-2013 |
20130344857 | Subscriber Identity Module Activation During Active Data Call - Methods and systems are disclosed that provide refresh procedure to ensure successful subscriber identity module activation during active data and voice calls. A request to update a subscription data on a network application housed on a Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC) is processed by a mobile equipment (ME) and is forwarded to the UICC smart card. The UICC smart card updates the requested parameters on the network application and probes the ME to read the updated parameters. The ME polls its services to check if the network application can be refreshed. If the network application was not previously activated, the voting mechanism on refresh procedure is skipped and the ME proceeds with refreshing the network application for updating its copy of the subscription information. | 12-26-2013 |
20130344858 | CONTROL DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - There is provided an apparatus including a control device including an acquisition section configured to acquire an action performed by a first user and a position at which the action is performed, and an activation control section configured to control, based on a history regarding an activation state of a function in a case where the action has been previously performed at the position, the activation state of the function while the first user is performing the action at the position. | 12-26-2013 |
20130344859 | DEVICE CONTEXT DETERMINATION IN TRANSPORTATION AND OTHER SCENARIOS - Systems and methods are provided for context determination. In one implementation one or more indications can be received, each of the one or more indications corresponding to a perception of one or more access points in relation to a user device. The one or more indications can be processed to determine one or more characteristics of at least one of the one or more access points. Based on the one or more characteristics, a context of the user device can be determined. | 12-26-2013 |
20130344860 | TELEPHONY APPARATUS COMPRISING A MULTIPURPOSE MOBILE PHONE WITH LOW-POWER TRANSMISSION SWITCHING FUNCTION FOR HOUSEHOLD USE AND A RESPECTIVE RADIO BASE - Telephony apparatus including a mobile phone ( | 12-26-2013 |
20130344861 | MANAGEMENT OF NETWORK TECHNOLOGY SELECTION AND DISPLAY IN MULTI-TECHNOLOGY WIRELESS ENVIRONMENTS - Utilization of radio network technology and display thereof are managed when multiple services and radio network technologies are available to a multi-technology mobile device. The management relies at least in part on a subscriber profile that comprises a network selection profile constructed through market policy, subscriber policy, and application policy for radio technology utilization. Network preference(s) profile is generated on per subscriber, or per subscriber type, basis and is conveyed to a subscriber station over the air. Initial subscriber profile can be delivered at a time of provisioning a multi-technology mobile device, and updated based at least upon subscriber demand, a schedule established by a network operator or service provider, or an event related to coverage area relocation or contracted services. Radio technology preferences and display of associated technologies available to a multi-technology mobile device can be dynamically controlled on a per-call and/or per-application basis. | 12-26-2013 |
20130344862 | Mobile Device with User Interaction Capability and Method of Operating Same - In one embodiment a method of operating a mobile device includes sensing either an orientation or a movement of the mobile device, determining a command based on the sensed orientation or sensed movement, sensing a proximity of an object in relation to at least a portion of the mobile device, and executing the command upon the proximity of the object being sensed. In another embodiment, a method of operating a mobile device governs a manner of interaction of the mobile device relative to one or more other mobile devices. In at least some embodiments, at least one of the mobile devices includes an accelerometer and an infrared proximity sensor, and operation of the mobile device is determined based upon signals from those components. | 12-26-2013 |
20140004840 | MOBILE COMMUNICATOR DEVICE INCLUDING USER ATTENTIVENESS DETECTOR | 01-02-2014 |
20140004841 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF ANALYZING A PLURALITY OF CELLS OF A CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK | 01-02-2014 |
20140004842 | Technique for Managing Activity States for Multiple Subscriptions in a Terminal Device | 01-02-2014 |
20140018053 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal and controlling method thereof are disclosed, by which data can be shared with a counterpart terminal in the course of a phone call. The present invention includes a touchscreen, a sensing unit configured to sense an action of a user, a communication unit configured to communicate with a counterpart terminal via at least one of a first communication network and a second communication network, and a controller, in response to a first user command inputted via at least one of the touchscreen and the sensing unit in the course of performing a voice call to the counterpart terminal via the first communication network, controlling a first data sharing screen with the counterpart terminal to be displayed on the touchscreen, the controller controlling a data sharing via the first data sharing screen to be performed together with the voice call. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018054 | SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING ARS INTERLOCKING DATA USING RING DATA AND METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are a system for providing ARS interlocking data using ring data with drastically improved convenience and economic efficiency by allowing a user to transmit screen data packets output on a screen at a time in interlock with each number to be selected by his/her telephone when the user attempts a call connection to receive the ARS, and a method thereof. According to the present invention, the system for providing ARS interlocking data using ring data and a method thereof can rapidly select the desired items on the screen without the requirement of listening to all the ARS guide messages at the time of selecting specific items. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018055 | Method of Operating a Module for Wireless Communication or the Like Wireless Communication Terminal, Module for Wireless Communication and Device of an Integrated Circuit Card and a System of a Communication Equipment for Operating the Module - The invention relates to a method of operating a module 100 or the like wireless communication terminal for wireless communication, wherein in operation the module 100 is in signaling relation to a device 3 of an integrated circuit card, wherein the operation is adapted for signaling between the module 100 and the integrated circuit card device 3 (ICC-device) via an interface system 10, the interface system 10 comprising at least one command interface instance 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3 adapted for direct command signaling between the module 100 and at least one application 1, 2, and a card application toolkit 80 (CAT) for direct command signaling between the module 100 and the integrated circuit card device 3 (ICC-device). | 01-16-2014 |
20140018056 | VEHICULAR APPARATUS, MOBILE PHONE, AND INSTRUMENT COORDINATION SYSTEM - A vehicular apparatus includes a communication portion and a vehicular display portion to communicate with a mobile phone having a touch panel. The vehicular apparatus acquires pixel information about a screen of the touch panel and displays the pixel information on the vehicular display portion. When a user performs a press manipulation onto the vehicular display portion, the vehicular apparatus transmits a signal indicating a manipulation target area to the mobile phone via the communication portion. The vehicular apparatus performs changeover to handsfree phone call when detecting that the mobile phone enters a phone call state within a specified time since detection of the press manipulation onto the vehicular display portion. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018057 | Method for Transferring Base Station Energy-Saving Information and Method and System for Implementing Energy-Saving - The invention discloses a method for transmitting energy-saving management information. The method includes: a base station and its neighboring base station encapsulating and transmitting the energy-saving management information through an interface message. The invention further discloses a corresponding method for implementing base station energy saving, a system for transmitting the energy-saving management information, and a system for implementing base station energy saving. The invention can be used to solve transmission of the energy-saving information between base station devices of a network, and avoid the problems, for example, handoff and coverage loss caused by the base station being required to be shut off due to reasons such as energy saving, etc., thus guaranteeing network performance and user experience when the base station is performing the energy saving operation. | 01-16-2014 |
20140024354 | PREDICTION FOR POWER CONSERVATION IN A MOBILE DEVICE - Architecture that facilitates power conservation in mobile devices such as cell phones using prediction. The architecture is an algorithmic-based solution that transforms infrequently-captured geolocation data of an entity into a continuous probable location approximation. Given the location history and additional data about the recent location of the mobile device, the current location of the device can be estimated with some probability. Additionally, given the location history and additional data about the recent location of the device, the probability of the device actually being at a given point on a map is computed. | 01-23-2014 |
20140024355 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE CAPABLE OF CONTROLLING FUNCTIONALITY DEPENDING ON LOCATION - A portable communication device contains a processor and a storage unit configured to store a number of applications executable by the processor. The communication device communicates with a server and further includes a receiver. The processor can determine whether one of applications belongs to a restricted category when an input unit receives a user input to start any application. The processor can obtain a current location of the portable communication device from the positioning unit, set up a connection with the server, and send a request including the current location to the server. The processor can determine whether the one of the applications are allowed to run in the current location according to a feedback from the server, and start the application if the application is allowed to run in the current location. | 01-23-2014 |
20140024356 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING SCREEN OFF DURING AUTOMATIC RESPONSE SYSTEM SERVICE IN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method of avoiding screen off during an Automatic Response System (ARS) service is provided. The method includes enabling a proximity sensor in a call connection, detecting one of a first gesture and a second gesture during a call, and upon detecting the first gesture, disabling the proximity sensor. | 01-23-2014 |
20140024357 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL TYPE SPECIFIC MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION - Various methods for providing cell type specific measurement configuration are provided. One example method may include receiving configuration data comprising an indication of one or more events configured to trigger a report. The configuration data may comprise an indication of one or more cells associated with the one or more events. The method of this example embodiment may further include providing for transmission of a report, wherein the report is provided for transmission in response to an occurrence of at least one of the one or more events associated with at least one of the one or more cells. Similar and related example methods, example apparatuses, and example computer program products are also provided. | 01-23-2014 |
20140024358 | Methods and Systems for Regulating Operation of One or More Functions of a Mobile Application - Various embodiments include a method for regulating operation of mobile applications executing on a nomadic device. Signals for determining a speed of travel may be received at the nomadic device. The speed may be determined based on the one or more signals. If the determined speed exceeds a speed threshold, a speed restriction flag may be set and one or more functions of the mobile applications may be restricted. If, after setting the speed restriction flag, a speed cannot be determined, the application functions may be continually restricted until a speed can be determined. | 01-23-2014 |
20140024359 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION OF A FEMTOCELL - Aspects of a method and system for installation and configuration of a femtocell are provided. In this regard, information for configuring a femtocell to operate in a specified location may be received by the femtocell and may be utilized to configure one or more parameters of the femtocell. Once the femtocell is operational the parameters may be updated and/or optimized based on one or both of characterizations of cellular signals and/or information received from a femtocell registry. In this manner the femtocell may be reconfigured utilizing the updated and/or optimized parameters. The one or more parameters may be configured based on attributes of the location in which the femtocell is to operate. The one or more parameters may be configured based on a location, number, and/or coverage area of other femtocells The parameters may comprise one or more of power levels, frequency of operation, and/or antenna beam pattern. | 01-23-2014 |
20140024360 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF USER EQUIPMENT BASED ON SELECTIVE MOBILITY COUNTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method for supporting a mobility of a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: acquiring mobility context; performing the mobility with a target cell; determining whether non-updating criterion is satisfied based on the mobility context; updating a mobility counter of the UE based on the result of the determining; performing a mobility state estimation (MSE) by estimating a mobility state of the UE based on the updated mobility counter of the UE; and scaling a mobility parameter based on the estimated mobility state. | 01-23-2014 |
20140031021 | System and Method for Controlling Mobile Device Operation - Implementations herein include receiving a first signal from a first mobile computing device, the first signal indicative of a first state change and receiving a second signal from a second mobile computing device, the second signal indicative of a second state change. The method may also include determining that the first state change and the second state change are related, and that the first mobile computing device and the second mobile computing device are currently located at a common geographic location. The method may further include determining that a third mobile computing device is currently located at the common geographic location. The method may also include transmitting to the third mobile computing device, a third signal indicative of a recommended state change, the recommended state change being based on the first state change at the first mobile computing device and the second state change at the second mobile computing device. | 01-30-2014 |
20140031022 | Using Access Technology and Location Information to Smartly Initiate Bearer Independent Protocol Sessions - A user identity module (UIM) is incorporated in user equipment such as a mobile phone or mobile device. The UIM is configured to provision itself while roaming away from a home network as follows. The UIM may: send to the UE a request for information identifying a current radio access technology (RAT) that the UE is camped on; receive the current RAT information from the UE; send to the UE a request for network location information, where the network location information identifies a network in which the UE is currently camped; receive the network location information from the UE; generate an access point name (APN) using the current RAT information and the network location information; and open a channel through the network to a remote agent (e.g., a provisioning server) using the access point name. | 01-30-2014 |
20140031023 | Communication Device for a Vehicle - A communication device for a vehicle has a programmable memory circuit into which access data of a service provider is programmed for the purpose of establishing communication via one of the communication channels provided by the service provider. The communication device has a transmission and/or receiving device to transmit and receive data via the communication channel. Access data of the service provider intended to be programmed into the programmable memory circuit is received by the transmission and/or receiving device, and made available by the same for the purpose of being programmed into the programmable memory circuit. | 01-30-2014 |
20140031024 | Method and system for providing controllable trusted service manager - Techniques for realizing or providing controllable trusted service management are disclosed. The techniques are related to empowering a service provider with application provisioning and applet and secure element (SE) management capabilities. A service management module, herein referred to as Controllable TSM or CTSM, is provided to a service provider to provision certain applications distributed through the service provider. A system or platform contemplated in this invention allows a service provider to operate under a supplementary security domain (SSD) installed by an SE issuer or an updated SSD key set exclusively known to the service provider. Such a platform is designed to support embedded SE (eSE) and can be extended to support UICC-based SE. With the CTSM, a service provider can use the SSD to personalize applets installed on each SE securely and independently. | 01-30-2014 |
20140031025 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR SECURITY CONFIGURATION COORDINATION DURING A CELL UPDATE PROCEDURE - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for maintaining synchronization with respect to the security configurations of the network and a mobile terminal, even during a cell update procedure. A method may include causing a cell update message to be provided during performance of a cell update procedure and including, with the cell update message, a security configuration information element indicating that a mobile terminal has applied an updated security configuration in an instance in which the mobile terminal has applied the updated security configuration. The method may also include, with the cell update message, the information element indicating that the mobile terminal has reverted to a prior security configuration in an instance in which the mobile terminal has reverted to a prior security configuration. | 01-30-2014 |
20140031026 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING A CLEANING PROCESS ON A PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - Methods and devices for performing a cleaning process on portable electronic devices are described. The method includes monitoring a system reaction to one or more instructions; determining that the system reaction does not satisfy predefined criteria; and, in response to determine that the system reaction does not satisfy the predefined criteria, performing a cleaning process on the portable electronic device. | 01-30-2014 |
20140031027 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCOMMODATING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION IN A HANDOVER DETERMINATION - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided that continue to obtain the power saving advantages provided by discontinuous reception, while obtaining the measurement samples that are desired during a sampling time period, such as during a time to trigger period, to determine of handover is appropriate. In the context of a method, a measurement sample is caused to be obtained during a discontinuous reception monitoring period. The method may determine that a sampling time period has been commenced based upon a measurement sample. During the sampling time period, one or more additional measurement samples are to be obtained. The method may also determine that the additional measurement samples will not be obtained prior to commencement of the sleep period between monitoring periods and, as a result, cause one or more additional measurement samples to be obtained at respective times that would otherwise have been in the sleep period. | 01-30-2014 |
20140038577 | PROHIBITING ELECTRONIC DEVICE USAGE BASED ON GEOGRAPHICAL LOCATION - A system and method for prohibiting electronic device usage based on geographical location are provided herein. In examples, a geographical location of the electronic device is determined. Any policies associated with the geographical location of the electronic device are determined, and the policy may be obtained from a remote location. The functions of the electronic device are disabled based on the policy. | 02-06-2014 |
20140038578 | Conversation Assistant - Usage data associated with a user of a telephonic device is accessed by a remote learning engine. A service or a product that is likely to be of interest to the user is identified by the remote learning engine based on the accessed usage data. A recommended voice bundle application for the user is determined by the remote learning engine based on the accessed usage data, the recommended voice bundle application being a voice application that, when executed by the telephonic device, results in a simulated multi-step spoken conversation between the telephonic device and the user to enable the user to receive the identified service or the identified product. A recommendation associated with the recommended voice bundle application is transmitted from the remote learning engine to the telephonic device. The recommendation is presented by the telephonic device to the user through voice communications. The user through voice communications has accepted the recommendation determining is determined by the telephonic device. In response to determining that the user has accepted the recommendation, the recommended voice bundle application on the telephonic device is executed by the telephonic device. | 02-06-2014 |
20140038579 | Controlling Communication Mode Setting - Measures for controlling a communication mode setting, such as a power saving procedure in a UE. A UE sends a communication mode preference indication to a communication network control element under consideration of a default prohibit timer. When a response to the communication mode preference indication is received by the UE, it determines whether a change of the behavior for transmitting the power preference information, e.g. a change of a prohibit timer value, is to be executed. | 02-06-2014 |
20140038580 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION OF BASE STATION AND TERMINAL - A method of performing communication of a terminal includes the terminal transmitting state information thereof to a base station, and the terminal receiving a mode change request from the base station when the terminal is selected by the base station. | 02-06-2014 |
20140038581 | GLOBAL MOBILITY INFRASTRUCTURE FOR USER DEVICES - A global mobility system and computer program product for providing a global mobility framework. The system includes a mobility data collection unit, a mobility data management unit, and a device management unit. The data collection unit acquires real-time mobility data relating to a user and associated mobile and stationary devices. The data management unit manages mobility data and applies data to the devices in use. The device management unit activates and controls the operation of the devices based on available device and environmental data, and the mobility services subscribed by the user. The data management unit configures a device using the collected mobile data and prepares the device for operation in a respective environment. The device management unit prepares device work flows, activates and deactivates the devices, and controls the device operations based on the collected mobility data. | 02-06-2014 |
20140038582 | Apparatus and Method for Communication - Apparatus and method for communication are provided. The solution includes controlling a relay node to provide an out-band wireless service; setting up and maintaining a first connection with a primary radio access network of a donor cellular system supporting in-band cellular access relays, setting up and maintaining a second connection with a radio access network of a donor cellular system, the second connection providing a mobile backhaul connection for the out-band wireless service, and the first connection carrying control signalling required to control and manage the first and second connection and the out-band wireless service. | 02-06-2014 |
20140045474 | SELF-ACTIVATION THROUGH A NON-ACTIVATED DEVICE - A method of permitting self-activation of a mobile device is presented. The device is able to be activated without accessing the Internet or relying on a customer service representative when a device with a SIM card is initially powered on. A device client resident on the mobile device detects that the SIM card is self-activation capable, and then provides a customized interface to walk the user through a self-activation process. The interface provides various features associated with the communication functionality of the device, whether or not the functionality is dependent on the make and model of the mobile device. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045475 | Techniques for Improving Cache Effectiveness of Caches with Low User Population - Techniques for improving cache effectiveness in areas with low user population are provided. In one aspect, a computer-based method for managing user traffic in a cellular network using proxy caches is provided. The method includes the following steps. A group of the proxy caches that has correlated user traffic is identified. Cache requests for each of the proxy caches in the group are observed. One or more patterns are found in the cache requests. A prediction is made as to which items will be requested from the proxy caches in the group in the future based on the one or more patterns found in the cache requests. The proxy caches in the group are pre-populated with the items. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045476 | Techniques for Improving Cache Effectiveness of Caches with Low User Population - Techniques for improving cache effectiveness in areas with low user population are provided. In one aspect, a computer-based method for managing user traffic in a cellular network using proxy caches is provided. The method includes the following steps. A group of the proxy caches that has correlated user traffic is identified. Cache requests for each of the proxy caches in the group are observed. One or more patterns are found in the cache requests. A prediction is made as to which items will be requested from the proxy caches in the group in the future based on the one or more patterns found in the cache requests. The proxy caches in the group are pre-populated with the items. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045477 | MOBILE COMMUNICATOR DEVICE INCLUDING USER ATTENTIVENESS DETECTOR - Disclosed herein is a mobile communicator that includes a speed detection system for determining whether the mobile communicator is moving faster than a threshold speed. The mobile communicator further includes a user attentiveness detector configured to determine whether a user is inattentive and a sensor element configured to determine orientation of the mobile communicator. The mobile communicator further includes a circuit configured to ensure that a functionality of the mobile communicator is in a turned off state when the speed detection system determines that the mobile communicator is moving faster than the threshold speed and at least one of: (a) the user attentiveness detector determines that the user is inattentive; and (b) the sensor element determines that the mobile communicator is in a substantially vertical position. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045478 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A DISTRIBUTED CONFIGURABLE TRANSCEIVER ARCHITECTURE AND IMPLEMENTATION - In communication device comprising a plurality of distributed transceivers and one or more corresponding antenna arrays, a first distributed transceiver is configured to receive signals comprising one or more first data streams and a second distributed transceiver is configured to receive signals comprising one or more second data streams. One or more components within a transmit processing chain of the first distributed transceiver and/or one or more components within a transmit processing chain of the second distributed transceiver are adjusted to maximize beamforming gain for the one or more first data streams and/or second data streams. A phase of the one or more first data streams and/or the one or more second data streams may be adjusted by the one or more components within a transmit processing chain of the first distributed transceiver and/or the one or more components within a transmit processing chain of the second distributed transceiver. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045479 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication control apparatus includes an acquirer that acquires operation information of a moving object having a shielded space therein, and a controller that controls at least one of a channel between a first base station installed in a car in the moving object and a second base station installed on each floor where the car is stoppable, transmission power of the first base station and transmission power of the second base station, and location information for locating a position of a mobile terminal for each floor where the car is stoppable, on the basis of the operation information. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045480 | Wearable Communication Device - Wearable communication devices, e.g. implemented in a watch, using short range communication e.g. to a cell phone allow a user to talk and listen, place and answer calls, send and receive text messages, initiate voice commands to mobile search for information and find locations, and be notified of incoming calls, texts, and events, all while a phone is nearby but not visible. Notification is performed with vibration, an LED light or OLED text display of incoming calls, texts, and calendar events. It allows communicating hands-free. The watches can be directly connected to a smartphone allowing using the watch as “remote control” for home appliances or any other devices via voice and buttons. Motion sensors such as accelerometer, magnetometer and gyroscope, together with audio generation device can be used for gaming applications. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045481 | Mobile Device Management System - A mobile device management system stores network parameters so that certain functionality can be disabled or placed in sleep mode to optimize and lengthen battery life. The mobile device analyzes its user calendar schedule to download navigation data and network parameters so that tasks such as downloading information and updates are performed during times that the mobile device is connected to lower cost network access such as WiFi networks. By performing tasks such as the downloading of information based on availability of low cost network resources, the battery life of the mobile device may be lengthened. By storing network parameters such as the location of dead zones and roaming zones, the constant pinging of the RF baseband chip can be disabled and only enabled when the mobile device knows it is close to an areas where the mobile device must switch networks, further reducing power consumption. | 02-13-2014 |
20140051415 | REDUCING DATA TRANSFER LATENCY CAUSED BY STATE TRANSITIONS IN MOBILE NETWORKS - Examples of reducing data transfer latency caused by state transitions in mobile networks are disclosed. A first disclosed example method comprises, while operating in a first state having fewer available radio resources than would be available in a second state, setting a traffic volume indicator if a wireless device determines that a radio link control (RLC) buffer occupancy is larger than a traffic volume measurement threshold, and sending the traffic volume indicator to a network in a transmitted message other than a CELL UPDATE message having uplink data transmission as an update cause. A second disclosed example method comprises, while operating in a first state, receiving a message that is to cause a wireless device to transition to a second state having fewer available radio resources than are available in the first state, and rejecting the message if the wireless device has pending uplink data to send to a network. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051416 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MODE DRIVEN NODE MONITORING - Method and apparatus are provided to reduce the amount of performance indicator (PI) data to retrieve from a network node ( | 02-20-2014 |
20140051417 | Number Port Error Resolution - Embodiments describe computing systems and methods for providing directed service activation error resolution to service subscribers. During service activation, a request to port a telephone number from an existing service of a subscriber to a new service of the subscriber is transmitted to a carrier activation service. In response to the request, an error message is received from the carrier activation service that indicates a number port error. Based on the error message, it is determined that the number port error is resolvable, and a user interface is provided to the subscriber that enables the subscriber to cause submission of a corrected request to port the telephone number. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051418 | SECURE METHOD TO EXCHANGE DIGITAL CONTENT BETWEEN A SCANNING APPLIANCE AND SMS-ENABLED DEVICE - A method and apparatus for exchanging digital content between a scanning appliance and a mobile device are disclosed. In one embodiment, the method comprises: transferring digital content via a network to a remotely accessible data storage server, the digital content being generated from a document; receiving, in response to user input via a first graphical user interface, a phone number; sending a first text message to a first device after validating the phone number, the first text message including a code; receiving, in response to user input via a second graphical user interface, the code being input by a user; sending a second text message to the first device, the second text message including an address of the digital content in the network; monitoring whether the digital content has been accessed; receiving a request for the digital content from the first device, the request including the address retrieved from the second text message; and sending, in response to the request, the digital content and an indication of a type of the digital content to the first device, the type information for use by a browser in determining software on the first device capable of rendering the digital content on a display of the first device. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051419 | NETWORK NODE AND METHOD - A method, a network node and a computer program product are disclosed. The method of controlling an operating state of small cell base stations, said operating state comprising one of a non-sleeping state in which a small cell base station is operable to support communications with user equipment and sleeping state in which a small cell base station is inoperable to support communications with user equipment, comprises the steps of: determining whether a predetermined event has been experienced by at least one small cell base station of a group of small cell base stations and, if so, instructing at least a sub-group comprising a plurality of small cell base stations of said group of small cell base stations to transition between said non-sleeping state and said sleeping state. Such an approach helps to optimize energy savings made by small cell base stations within the network, whilst ensuring that appropriate levels of service are maintained for user equipment. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051420 | Call Method of Terminal and Terminal Using Call Method - A call method of a terminal and a terminal using the call method, are provided to adjust voice quality of a call in real time. The method includes analyzing a spectral component of a voice signal during a call and selecting a corresponding frequency response channel according to an analysis result of the spectral component of the voice signal. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051421 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, CONTROL METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND PROGRAM - A communication terminal includes a memory that stores cell information pertaining to cells managed by a wireless base station, an input unit that receives an operation input, a first communication unit that connects to the wireless base station which manages cells represented by the cell information stored in the memory when a connection request for connection to the wireless base station is input to the input unit, a second communication unit that connects to a terminal in the vicinity as another communication terminal, and a controller which is triggered by a prescribed event to acquire cell information stored in the terminal in the vicinity through the second communication unit and update the cell information stored in the memory with the acquired cell information. | 02-20-2014 |
20140057615 | APPARATUS TO SELF-ACTIVATE AND SELF-CONFIGURE A DEVICE AND SYSTEM AND A METHOD THEREOF - Embodiments of the present invention allows a telecommunications provider to embed activation and configuration logic into SIM cards that consumers install in their wireless devices. The activation and configuration logic on a SIM card ensures that a wireless device is activated and properly configured to operate on a network. In some embodiments, the configuration logic on the SIM card also ensures that the wireless device is properly configured with backed up personal data and provisioned with services that a consumer had previously or is subscribed to. Typically, the wireless device is able to self-activate and self-configure when the SIM card is installed the wireless device. | 02-27-2014 |
20140057616 | MONITORING MOBILE DEVICE CONTEXT - Systems, methods and interfaces are disclosed for managing communications associated with a mobile communication device. Mobile communication devices process environmental inputs and transmit mobile communication device context information to a communication management system. The context information may, for example, reflect the motion and/or geographic location of the mobile device, and may reflect the risk associated with using the device to handle a call or other communications session. The communication management system uses the context information, optionally in combination with communication device profiles, to determine how to manage incoming and/or ongoing calls or other communication sessions. Mobile device users may also be inhibited from initiating communication sessions. | 02-27-2014 |
20140057617 | RADIO DEVICE AND RADIO SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD - A radio device includes: a processor configured to execute radio communication processing; a first memory configured to store a program module of the radio communication processing, and to operate at a first clock; a second memory configured to store the program module that is transferred from the first memory, and executed by the processor, and to operate at a second clock a speed of which is higher than that of the first clock; and a control circuit configured to: determine the program module that is to be executed by the processor, based on a transition state of radio communication, and control the determined program module to be transferred from the first memory to the second memory. | 02-27-2014 |
20140057618 | Configuring Power Distribution Within Cooperation Areas of Cellular Communication Networks - There is provided a method for configuring a power distribution within a cellular network system. The cellular network system includes at least one cooperation area. The at least one cooperation area is defined by at least two base stations, each including at least one antenna, wherein each base station has at least one beam. The method includes configuring the base stations to transmit at a first transmit power level for providing a first receiving power level for a user equipment at a center region of the cooperation area, and configuring the base stations to transmit at a second transmit power level for providing a second receiving power level at a border region of the cooperation area, wherein the second receiving power level is lower than the first receiving power level. | 02-27-2014 |
20140057619 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING OPERATION MODES OF A MOBILE DEVICE - A computer-implemented method is performed by a mobile device for automatically activating a particular operation mode. The method includes: dividing a predefined time window into multiple time segments for the mobile device based on a user's schedule; for each time segment, defining an operation mode and associated information for the mobile device, wherein the associated information includes a set of instructions for processing incoming calls or messages during the time segment; and upon detection of the start of a particular time segment: identifying a corresponding operation mode; and activating the identified operation mode on the mobile device such that, in response to an incoming call or message, the mobile device performs a set of instructions associated with the operation mode. | 02-27-2014 |
20140057620 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND TERMINAL FOR PERFORMING SYSTEM UPDATE BETWEEN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINALS - A method, a system, and a terminal for performing a system update between mobile communication terminals. The method includes: determining, by a target mobile terminal, whether hardware is compatible with a source mobile terminal; if the hardware is compatible between both terminals, obtaining, by the target mobile terminal through a wireless network, a system backup file transferred by the source mobile terminal; and performing, by the target mobile terminal, a system update according to the system backup file. A system update can be implemented between mobile phones through a wireless network without depending on an update server or downloading an update file from the update server, thereby reducing the burden of the update server, and facilitating exchange of systems between mobile phone users. | 02-27-2014 |
20140066038 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE WITH REDUCED POWER CONSUMPTION - In order to improve the management of the power consumption of electronic devices (such as cellular telephones), the operating mode of an interface circuit in an electronic device may be changed when certain commands are received. In particular, when one or more commands are received that disable data communication via the interface circuit and a cellular-telephone network and/or enable communication via another interface circuit in the electronic device and a wireless local area network (WLAN), the interface circuit may be transitioned to an operating mode in which data communication via the cellular-telephone network using a communication protocol that supports only data and no voice is disabled. For example, the communication protocol may include a Long Term Evolution (LTE)-compatible communication protocol. | 03-06-2014 |
20140066039 | Mobile Device Remote Control System and Apparatus, and Road Safety Monitoring Apparatus - The present invention discloses a mobile device remote control system. It includes a remote control unit and a mobile device unit; the mobile device unit for example is a mobile phone. The remote control unit includes a sensor and a wireless transmitter; the sensor is for generating a sensing signal and the wireless transmitter is for transmitting a wireless signal corresponding to the sensing signal to the mobile phone, for controlling the mobile phone to execute a corresponding function. If the mobile phone is replaced by a car computer system, then the system becomes a road safety monitoring apparatus. | 03-06-2014 |
20140066040 | OVER-THE-AIR UPDATE METHOD FOR CONTINUOUS DELTA OF ANDROID HANDHELD DEVICE - An over-the-air update method for continuous delta of an Android handheld device is provided, having advantages of transmitting a plurality of update packages, rebooting once to complete all updates after the update packages are executed, and meeting the update power failure recovery requirement. A command document is continuously processed from the interrupt row according to update information and processing progress after rebooting in cases of abnormal power failure in the update process. In addition, an update power failure recovery method for an Android handheld device is provided. Rebooting is only required once no matter how many update packages are installed. Obstacle to release of a plurality of packages does not exist. The plurality of update packages are provided with update power failure protection. Processing is convenient and realization is reliable. | 03-06-2014 |
20140066041 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FACILITATING COMMUNICATION IN AN ADAPTIVE VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT - The present disclosure relates generally to a communication technologies, and more particularly to a system and method facilitating communication in an adaptive virtual environment. In one embodiment, an adaptive virtual environment communication system is disclosed, comprising: a processor; and a memory storing processor-executable instructions comprising instructions to: create one or more virtual images of one or more communication devices via a virtual network; emulate one or more features of the one or more communication devices; synchronize the emulated features in real-time by receiving data from the one or more communication devices at pre-determined intervals of time; and execute one or more of the images of the one or more communication devices. | 03-06-2014 |
20140066042 | PLAYBACK PAUSE BEFORE SIGNAL LOSS OF A MOBILE DEVICE - One embodiment described herein may take the form of a system and/or method for monitoring a position of a mobile device and pausing play or recording a multimedia presentation when the mobile device enters or approaches a zone where a wireless signal may be degraded or lost. In one embodiment, the mobile device may utilize a global position system (GPS) signal to determine the location of the mobile device. Further, the mobile device may be configured to display one or more multimedia presentations and may, in response to the mobile device being located near or within a dark zone, pause play of the multimedia presentation until the mobile device returns to a zone of sufficient wireless signal coverage. In this manner, the mobile device may prevent the user from losing or missing portions of the multimedia presentation due to lost or degraded wireless signal of the mobile device. | 03-06-2014 |
20140066043 | AUTOMATING ACTIONS WITHIN A PHONE NETWORK BASED UPON SCANNED WIRELESS SIGNALS - A method for automating actions within a network includes receiving at least one wireless signal from at least one wireless network device; determining identifying information associated with the at least one wireless signal; determining a scanned wireless fingerprint associated based upon the identifying information; matching the scanned wireless fingerprint to a stored wireless fingerprint; and initiating an action in response to matching of the scanned wireless fingerprint to the stored wireless fingerprint. | 03-06-2014 |
20140066044 | CROWD-SOURCED CONTACT INFORMATION AND UPDATING SYSTEM USING ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE - A method and system for crowdsourcing and managing contact and profile information of a user's contacts, and exchanging business and personal contact information through a mobile device, personal computer, or a web application. The system comprises a crowdsourcing intelligence module that provides the software, analysis, and algorithms for automatically populating and updating an individual's contact information in a user's address book based on contributed information and changes made to the individual's profile by a large community of users. The module also automatically populates and updates business profile, captures business's external social and business profiles, and analyzes demographic information which can then be transmitted to users. Users may also search for job opportunities, review and purchase products and services, review the location of contacts in proximity to the user, and manage sales and account activities including lead generation, lead qualification, and better understanding their customer base. | 03-06-2014 |
20140066045 | TERMINAL DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION MODULE FOR THE SAME - A terminal device includes: a terminal controller which interprets only one of command schemes of a wireless communication unit and a near-field communication unit, and controls a function of the terminal device; and a control unit which controls communications between the wireless communication unit and the terminal controller and between the near-field communication unit and the terminal controller. The control unit includes: an identification number addition unit which adds an identification number to a command from the near-field communication unit or the wireless communication unit; and a command converting unit which converts a command of the other command scheme into a command of one command scheme, using a command conversion table. | 03-06-2014 |
20140073302 | Sensor and Context Based Adjustment of the Operation of a Network Controller - A method to adjust operation of a network controller of a device is disclosed. The method may include receiving contextual data from a sensor communicatively coupled to the device. The method may also include analyzing the contextual data to determine the context of the device. The method may also include modifying the network controller operation based on the analyzed contextual data. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073303 | HISTORIC PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS FOR MODIFICATION OF NEIGHBOR RELATIONS - Adjusting RAN performance by adapting cell coverage area can help optimize a wireless communications network. RAN topology can be adapted based on analysis of historical performance of base stations. Analysis of the historical performance of base stations can be performed in the core-network of a wireless carrier rather than distributing the analysis to RAN elements. Analysis can be based on receiving historical information relating to key performance indicators such as call failure rate, call success rate, handover attempt count, handover attempt failure count, etc. Further, analysis can include the application of predetermined rules relating to preferential performance of the base stations. This can facilitate ranking neighboring base stations, adding new base stations, deleting base stations, black/white listing base stations, etc., in neighbor relations data structures, such as automatic neighbor relations structures for self-organizing networks, e.g., eNodeBs in LTE networks. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073304 | DISTANCE-BASED MODIFICATION OF NEIGHBOR RELATIONS - Adjusting RAN performance by adapting cell coverage area can help optimize a wireless network. Base station coverage areas can be determined by distance analysis of detected neighbor base stations. This can be in response to determination of a physical cell identifier (PCI) conflict condition. When a PCI conflict is determined, a unique identifier for each base station can be employed to facilitate determining location information for the base stations. Location information can be employed to determine distance-based characteristics that can facilitate adaptation of wireless network neighbor relations to adapt the RAN coverage area topology. Distance-based characteristics can include nearest neighbor, proximity to a predetermined distance, etc. Additionally, PCI information can be updated to correct the PCI conflict condition. Moreover, radio parameters can be adapted, including elevation, azimuth, and transmit power, to correct the PCI conflict condition by reducing overlap of coverage areas with matching PCI information. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073305 | PREEMPTIVE HARDWARE ACTIVATION - Implementations are disclosed for activating hardware on a device preemptively based on whether a service associated with the hardware will be required or likely be used by an application, or if the application's access to the service is granted by a user of the application. The disclosed implementations provide a perceived improvement of performance by applications supported by slow starting hardware. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073306 | FORCED DRX DURING AUTOMATIC NEIGHBOR RELATION (ANR) IN LTE - A method and mechanism to use a serving evolved Node B, eNB, to force a User Equipment, UE, (being served by that eNB) into Discontinuous Reception, DRX, mode despite pending data transactions at the UE. This results in timely reading of Extended Cell Global Identity, ECGI, of neighboring cell(s), thereby facilitating entry of a target cell into the serving cell's neighbor list via Automatic Neighbor Relation, ANR, and subsequent handover (if needed) to that target cell. The serving eNB may instruct its scheduler to not allocate any Resource Blocks, RBs, to the UE (especially when the UE has high volume of pending data transactions and/or when the UE is in motion and its retransmission rate is beyond a specific threshold) such that the UE automatically goes into the DRX mode. The duration of the DRX cycle also may be optionally extended until ECGI measurements from the UE are received. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073307 | DEVICE WITH REDUCED COMMUNICATION-PROTOCOL TRANSITION TIME - In order to reduce the time delay when transitioning between different communication protocols used to communicate information via a cellular-telephone network, an electronic device (such as a cellular telephone) may only partially disable a software stack associated with a current communication protocol. In particular, after receiving an indicator that there is a message to be communicated using a second communication protocol while the electronic device is currently configured to communicate using a first communication protocol, the electronic device may disable a portion of a software stack associated with the first communication protocol and may enable a software stack associated with the second communication protocol. Then, the electronic device communicates the message using the second communication protocol. Next, the electronic device: may disable the software stack associated with the second communication protocol and may enable the portion of the software stack associated with the first communication protocol. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073308 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RUNNING CAR APPLICATION CONNECTED TO MOBILE DEVICE - A method of running a car application connected to a mobile device is provided. The method includes determining, by the mobile device, whether a wireless charging event occurs; determining, by the mobile device, whether the mobile device is located in a car, if the wireless charging event occurs; and running the car application if the mobile device is determined to be located in the car. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073309 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FILTERING A MOBILE HIGH-DEFINITION LINK SIGNAL - A method and an apparatus perform Mobile High-definition Link (MHL) signal filtering. The method of performing the Mobile High-definition Link (MHL) signal filtering in a terminal includes determining whether a transmission device for MHL signal transmission is connected; determining whether a call continues when the transmission device is connected; and determining whether to perform the MHL signal filtering in the terminal based on whether the call continues. Accordingly, there is an advantage of improving picture quality of an image output from a multimedia device by effectively removing a common mode noise even when an RF weak electric field is formed due to call generation. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073310 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULES ON WIRELESS NETWORKS FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE APPLICATIONS - A mobile station connected to a wireless network can comprise a subscriber identity module. The subscriber identity module can maintain a list of networks. The list can comprise forbidden public land mobile network data. Software can manage the forbidden public land mobile network data. For example, an applet transmitted to the subscriber identity module can periodically delete entries from the list and/or reset the subscriber identity module on predefined time intervals or when specified events occur. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073311 | ENERGY SAVING METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR BASE STATION - An energy saving method, system and device for a base station are applicable to the field of communications technologies. The energy saving method for a base station includes: sending, by a coverage station or an OAM equipment, a second activation request to a capacity station in a second energy saving state under the coverage of the coverage station if it is detected that the load of the coverage station is higher than a preset value, so as to activate the capacity station to enter a first energy saving state. The energy saving system for a base station includes: a coverage station and at least one capacity station under the coverage of the coverage station. Another energy saving system for a base station includes: a coverage station, at least one capacity station under the coverage of the coverage station and an operations, administration and maintenance OAM equipment. | 03-13-2014 |
20140080466 | SMART PHONE CONTROL SYSTEM - A Smart Phone control system includes a Smart Phone device and a controlled device. The controlled device is an electronic device required to be set up by a user for the first time. The user uses the Smart Phone device to wired/wirelessly connect the controlled device. At this time, the Smart Phone device obtains a setup program stored in the controlled device to activate the setup program. The user uses the Smart Phone device to input the setup data, thereby setting up the controlled device for the first time. After the setup, the user ends the setup program to complete the first setup of the controlled device. When the program installed in the controlled device is to be updated, the Smart Phone device downloads the latest program and wired/wirelessly connect to the controlled device, thereby updating the controlled device. | 03-20-2014 |
20140080467 | Generic Mobile Devices Customization Framework - A method for open mobile alliance (OMA) device management (DM) and over-the-air customization of a generic mobile device is disclosed. The method comprises receiving an activation message from the generic mobile device to register with a service provider, wherein the generic mobile device is pre-configured to support a plurality of functions. The method also comprises associating the generic mobile device with a service provider from the service providers as indicated by the activation message. The method further comprises sending one or more OMA service objects to customize the generic mobile device according to the service provider, wherein the one or more OMA service objects enable or disable each of the pre-configured functions on the generic mobile device to support one or more service features available by the service provider. | 03-20-2014 |
20140080468 | CELL RECONFIGURATION - There are provided measures for a cell reconfiguration, more specifically a cell reconfiguration in a relay-enhanced network environment. Such measures exemplarily include recognizing a decision on a change of a configuration of a base station, informing a user equipment served by the base station in view of a forthcoming change of the configuration before the configuration of the base station is changed, and providing the user equipment being served by the base station with a synchronization signal indicating a new configuration after the configuration of the base station is changed from an old configuration to the new configuration. | 03-20-2014 |
20140080469 | METHOD OF EXECUTING APPLICATION AND TERMINAL USING THE METHOD - A method of executing an application by a first terminal is provided. The first terminal executes an application with at least one external device connected to the first terminal, and the first terminal transmits, to a second terminal, information about the application and connection information regarding the at least one external device. The second terminal establishes a connection with respect to the at least one external device based on the connection information, and executes the application with the at least one external device connected to the second terminal based on the information about the application. | 03-20-2014 |
20140080470 | PAYMENT APPLICATION DOWNLOAD TO MOBILE PHONE AND PHONE PERSONALIZATION - A method and system of personalizing a mobile phone over a wireless network is provided. The method is fast, reliable, and eliminates the need for an uninterrupted online connection to a host server in order to achieve successful download of user information. With the method and system, a mobile phone can be personalized for various purposes, such as for conducting financial transactions. | 03-20-2014 |
20140087707 | Method and Device for Indoor Position Resolution - The present invention relates to a system and method for managing energy consumption in a multi-sensor user-carried device during indoor navigation. In an embodiment of the invention, the device calculates a motion mode, a location mode, or an operational mode, each of which is used to modify sensor behavior, e.g., sampling rate, and/or CPU load, e.g., filtering and modeling complexity. The motion mode describes the manner in which the user is moving (standing still, walking, passive transport for example), the location mode describes a feature of the user's location (near level change or intersection for example), and the operational mode describes the manner in which the user is interacting with the device (holding and monitoring, holding and not monitoring, not holding for example). | 03-27-2014 |
20140087708 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS RESTRICTION - Methods and related systems monitor a mobile communications device to determine if it is in a moving vehicle. If the device is determined to be in a moving vehicle, a database is accessed. The database contains information on locally imposed restrictions on usage of mobile communications devices while driving. The obtained information is used to impose appropriate communication restrictions on the mobile device. As long as the mobile communications device continues to be in the moving vehicle, its geographical location is monitored and, if it is determined that the device has entered a new geographical location, the database is again accessed and the restrictions are modified accordingly. | 03-27-2014 |
20140087709 | ASSOCIATING A PARTICULAR ACCOUNT CONFIGURATION DURING THE OUT OF BOX EXPERIENCE FOR A MOBILE DEVICE - A method of providing particular account configurations to a user of a mobile device based on a predetermined account configuration offering between a mobile device manufacturer and a third-party service provider based on a code stored on the mobile device. During the out-of-box experience (OOBE) when the user is initially configuring the mobile device, the third-party provider receives user information, a code, and a mobile device identification number. The third-party service provider confirms that the mobile device is eligible for the particular account configuration by using the code and mobile device identification number. Once account configuration eligibility is confirmed, the third-party service provider associates the particular account configuration with either an existing user account or with a new user account established during the OOBE. | 03-27-2014 |
20140087710 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM STORING COMMUNICATION TERMINAL CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication terminal, a communication method, and a communication terminal control program stored in a non-transitory recording medium, each of which is capable of receiving location data indicating a location at which at least one transmission device of a transmission system is located, using a receiver. The receiver is activated so as to start receiving the location data, when a stop of a movement of the communication terminal is detected. | 03-27-2014 |
20140087711 | MOBILE DEVICE CONTEXT INCORPORATING NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATIONS - A communication environment includes of one or more subscriber terminals capable of receiving and transmitting data over a communication network via a communication management system. The communication management system receives mobile communication device context information based on near-field sensor information and mobile communication device identification information from the mobile communication device. The communication management system then processes the mobile communication device profile. | 03-27-2014 |
20140094156 | METHOD AND APPARATUS RELATING TO A MOOD STATE OF A USER - Apparatus configured to:
| 04-03-2014 |
20140094157 | Method and System for Automatically Controlling the Insertion of Control Word in CPRI Daisy Chain Configuration - A method and apparatus automatically controls the insertion of information flow data over a shared CPRI link ( | 04-03-2014 |
20140094158 | TERMINAL APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CHANGING SETTING THEREOF - A terminal apparatus includes a memory and a processor. The memory stores group information in association with identification information for identifying respective nearby apparatuses within a certain range from the terminal apparatus. The group information indicates first groups to which the respective nearby apparatuses belong. The processor receives first identification information of respective first nearby apparatuses in a certain period of time. The processor identifies, based on the group information, second groups to which the first nearby apparatuses identified by respective pieces of the received first identification information belong. The processor determines a setting description for the terminal apparatus in accordance with the identified second groups. The processor changes setting of the terminal apparatus in accordance with the determined setting description. | 04-03-2014 |
20140094159 | Controlling Mobile Device Communications On a Roaming Network Based on Device State - A device that determines an aspect of a service policy based on a state of the device, and applies the service policy. The state is based on a user interaction, or a lack of user interaction, with the device. The service policy applies a first control to a first activity over a roaming network and a second control to the first activity over a home network, wherein the first control controls the first activity differently than the second control controls the first activity. The first activity is caused by a first software component on the device and comprises a first set of prospective or successful communications over an available wireless network. The aspect of the service policy controls the first activity differently from a second activity over a roaming network, where the second activity is associated with a second software component on the device. | 04-03-2014 |
20140094160 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SHARING DEVICE CAPABILITIES OF UNIVERSAL PLUG AND PLAY (UPNP) DEVICES WITH A SERVICE NETWORK ENTITY - Methods and apparatus are provided for sharing device capabilities of Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) devices with a service provider entity. Device capabilities of one or more UPnP devices in a UPnP home network environment are obtained. The device capabilities are aggregated. The aggregated device capabilities are mapped in a user agent profile. The user agent profile including the device capabilities is communicated to the service provider entity so that the service provider entity delivers telephony services to the one or more UPnP devices according to respective device capabilities. | 04-03-2014 |
20140099933 | NETWORK ACCESS CREDENTIAL MIGRATION - A method for network access credential migration is provided. The method can include deprovisioning a network access credential for a wireless network from a first wireless communication device. The method can further include determining that the network access credential has been successfully deprovisioned from the first wireless communication device. The method can additionally include provisioning the network access credential to the second wireless communication device after the network access credential has been successfully deprovisioned from the first wireless communication device. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099934 | PORTABLE DEVICE WITH SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY CARDS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION POWER THEREOF - A portable device is provided. The portable device comprises a first wireless module, a second wireless module, a first subscriber identity card coupled to the first wireless module, a second subscriber identity card coupled to the second wireless module and a battery. The first subscriber identity card camps on a cell via the first wireless module. The second subscriber identity card camps on the same cell or a different cell via the second wireless module. A first transmission power of one of the first and second wireless modules is maintained, and a second transmission power of another one of the first and second wireless modules is dynamically adjusted according to a variation in a voltage of the battery. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099935 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UPDATE OF NETWORK-RELATED INFORMATION, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE SUPPORTING THE SAME - A system and method for network-related information is provided. In a method for updating network-related information, an electronic device determines whether the network-related information is received from a currently accessed service network, and accesses another service network if the network-related information is not received, and receives the network-related information from the newly accessed service network. | 04-10-2014 |
20140106724 | CONTROLLING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN A MOBILE DEVICE AND A BASE STATION - Some embodiments of a telephone system and its operations are described herein. In some embodiments, the operations include establishing a communication link between a mobile device and a base station. The communication link enables an exchange of communications between the mobile device and the base station. The operations can further include detecting, at the base station via the communication link, initiation of a telephone call of the mobile device received via a mobile network. The operations can further include determining that the mobile device will be stationary during the telephone call. The operations can further include terminating location tracking of the mobile device within the mobile network during at least a portion of the telephone call in response to determination that the mobile device will be stationary during the telephone call. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106725 | Distraction Avoidance System - A mobile device includes a motion sensing device, a distraction source, and a processor communicatively coupled to the motion sensing device and distraction source. The processor is configured for disabling the distraction source in response to a threshold amount of motion sensed by the motion sensing device. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106726 | System and Method for Monitoring Apps in a Vehicle to Reduce Driver Distraction - A system and method for monitoring apps in a vehicle to reduce driver distraction is disclosed. A controller operating inside or in combination with the head unit of the vehicle may monitor operation of the vehicle, and generate alerts indicative of operation of the vehicle (such as an alert indicative that the vehicle is operating at a predetermined speed). In response to the alert, the operation of the app in the vehicle may be modified. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106727 | Network Data Optimization - Techniques for alleviating network congestion are described. A telecommunications device may be configured to selectively poll a cellular telecommunications network. The telecommunications device may be configured such that polling of the cellular telecommunications device may be activated and deactivated. The telecommunications device may be configured to poll in response to receiving a notification that a firmware update is available and may be configured to deactivate polling upon successful downloading of the firmware update. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106728 | Method for Activating an Unlocked, Inactive Mobile Device Using a Universal Integrated Circuit Card Pre-Provisioned With a Service Plan - A service plan is delivered to a mobile phone user without direct user communication with a mobile network operator or providing of personal details. A method comprises packaging a service plan, and at least one of a phone number and data plan, from a mobile network operator; associating the plan and phone number or data plan with a non-provisioned Universal Integrated Circuit Card; cueing service plan loading and activation of the UICC post purchase of the UICC by a user in communication with a provisioner by at least one of 1) product code scanning of the UICC and messages generated thereby; 2) automatic messaging generated by an activation application on the UICC; 3) user directed short messaging; 4) interactive voice responses between user and a provisioner system; 5) network detection software; 6) user interaction with a website; and 7) user entry of a zip code. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106729 | Method, Apparatus, and Media Gateway for Codec Rate Adjustment - The present invention discloses a method for codec rate adjustment. A media gateway (MGW) determines whether an initial codec rate of a first interface is consistent with an initial codec rate of a second interface or an initial codec rate of a third interface, where the first interface is an A interface, the second interface is an Nb interface, and the third interface is an lu interface; when determining that the initial codec rate of the first interface is inconsistent with the initial codec rate of the second interface or the initial codec rate of the third interface, the MGW adjusts the initial codec rate of the second interface or the initial codec rate of the third interface to the initial codec rate of the first interface. Therefore, quick and convenient codec rate adjustment can be implemented and voice service quality can be improved. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106730 | Location-Based Profile - A location determination subsystem of a mobile device can determine a location of the mobile device. A monitoring subsystem of the mobile device can be configured, using a profile, to monitor states of a wireless connection between the mobile device and a communications network. When the monitoring subsystem detects an interruption of the wireless connection, a virtual geofence can be constructed around the location of the mobile device when the interruption occurred. The geofence can indicate a boundary of an enclosed geographic area. The geofence can be associated with a diagnostics profile stored on the mobile device or dynamically retrieved from a server upon occurrence of the interruption. When the mobile device enters the area enclosed by the geofence, the monitoring subsystem can be configured using the diagnostics profile in anticipation of interruptions of connections. Information relating to the interruptions can be anonymously sent to a server for analysis. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106731 | INTER-RAT COVERAGE DETERMINATION FOR ENERGY SAVING MANAGEMENT - Embodiments of systems and techniques are described for determining inter-radio access technology (inter-RAT) coverage for energy saving management (ESM). In some embodiments, a network management (NM) apparatus may determine that a source cell of a network of a first RAT is triggered to activate an energy saving state and that the source cell is partially overlapped by each of a plurality of cells of one or more networks of one or more RATs different from the first RAT. The NM apparatus may instruct the source cell to activate the energy saving state when a combination of the plurality of cells provides coverage of the source cell. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106732 | AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION OF A VEHICLE DRIVER BASED ON DRIVING BEHAVIOR - A method and apparatus are disclosed that identify a motor vehicle operation and whether a driver is operating a mobile device. One example of operation may include a method that includes receiving vehicle data based on active operation of a vehicle and compiling a candidate driver identification profile (DIP) based on the received vehicle data. The method may also include comparing the candidate DIP to a pre-stored DIP and determining a match between the candidate DIP and the pre-stored DIP. The method may also include applying a restriction to a mobile station operated by a driver of the vehicle responsive to the match determination. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106733 | CONFIGURING APPLICATION PARAMETER OF MOBILE TERMINAL - Embodiments of the present application disclose a method, related apparatus, and system for configuring an application parameter of a mobile terminal, so as to configure an application parameter of a mobile terminal conveniently. The method includes: establishing, by the mobile terminal, a near field communication (NFC) connection with a configurator; negotiating, between the mobile terminal and the configurator, a type of an application parameter to be configured and a manner for receiving the application parameter through the NFC connection; receiving, by the mobile terminal, the application parameter from the configurator according to the negotiated manner; and performing, by the mobile terminal, an application parameter configuration for the mobile terminal according to the received application parameter. | 04-17-2014 |
20140113608 | Periodic Assistance Data Flow Control - An apparatus and method are provided for handling a periodic assistance session flow. Each periodic assistance data provision includes a session identification so that interlinked messages within the periodic assistance data delivery can be linked in the receiving end. Any modifications to the session are handled via the periodic session identification so that the changes to the assistance data delivery can be pointed to the right session. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113609 | NOTIFYING A USER EQUIPMENT UE, OVER A MOBILE NETWORK, OF AN UE APPLICATION TRIGGER REQUEST FROM A NETWORK APPLICATION SERVER - In an embodiment, there is provided a method for notifying a User Equipment UE (or a group of UE), over a mobile network, of an UE Application trigger request from a Network Application Server, said method comprising:
| 04-24-2014 |
20140113610 | Wireless Device Configured to Operate Under a Plurality of Different Brands and a Plurality of Different Networks and Configured to be Customized to One Brand and One Network - A process of configuring an electronic device and an electronic device configured to operate under a plurality of different brands and with a plurality different networks. The brand and network to be utilized are designated at the point-of-sale, during activation, by the seller, and/or by the user. The electronic device including a processor configured to execute instructions and a display device configured to generate an interface based in part in response to the processor. The electronic device further including a memory configured to store the instructions to operate the electronic device. The processor further configured to execute a component to designate a brand and network to be utilized at the point-of-sale, during activation, by the seller, and/or by the user. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113611 | TRAFFIC CONTROL METHOD AND DEVICE - A traffic control method and device are provided. The method may include: monitoring a user behavior status of an application, where the user behavior status includes an active state or an inactive state; according to predefined correspondence between a user behavior status and a traffic control threshold, determining a traffic control threshold corresponding to the monitored user behavior status; and controlling traffic of the application by using the determined traffic control threshold. Therefore, the traffic of the application can be dynamically monitored and the intelligence of traffic control can be improved. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113612 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SPECTRUM MANAGEMENT - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus comprising a receiver configured to receive information from a mobile device, the information comprising at least an indication of a location of the mobile device, at least one processing core configured to determine availability information concerning a 5 cell based at least in part on the information received from the mobile device, the availability information defining the cell to be available or not available, a transmitter configured to transmit to the mobile device advice concerning the cell determined to be available or not available, the transmitter being further configured to transmit to the cell determined to be available or not available an instruction, wherein the instruction is 10 configured to cause the determined cell to become active or inactive. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113613 | Location-Based Application Program Management - Methods, program products, and systems for location-based application program management are described. A mobile device can receive a first application program to be executed in an application subsystem. The first application program can be configured to be invoked or notified when the mobile device is located at a defined location. The mobile device can register the first application program to a second application program that executes in a baseband subsystem. The mobile device can set the application subsystem to a power-saving operating mode. The second application program can monitor a current location of the mobile device. When the mobile device is currently located at the defined location, the second application program can set the application subsystem to an active operating mode, and invoke the first application program. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113614 | Method and Terminal for Adapting Frequency Band of Terminal - The present invention discloses a method and a terminal for adapting a frequency band of the terminal. The method includes: acquiring location information of a terminal; according to configuration information of the terminal, determining a forbidden frequency band of the terminal at a location indicated by the location information; and forbidding the terminal to register for the forbidden frequency band. The method and the terminal provided in embodiments of the present invention can implement adaptation of a frequency band of the terminal at the terminal side, and achieve a purpose of restricting the terminal from using a forbidden frequency band of the terminal within a preset area (where the preset area may be a country), thereby reducing alteration costs of a network side. | 04-24-2014 |
20140113615 | Remote Controlled Headset with Built-In Cellular/Mobile Telephone Module - A headset for wireless telecommunication comprising a speaker, a microphone, a short-range transceiver for establishing a short-range wireless link to a peripheral electronic device comprising a corresponding short-range transceiver and a user interface. The headset also comprises a long-range transceiver for establishing a long-range wireless link to a Base Transceiver Station, whereby the headset is able to make telephone calls. The headset is adapted to receive instructions from the peripheral electronic device via the short-range transceiver to initiate cellular telephone calls. | 04-24-2014 |
20140120890 | ENFORCEMENT OF REGULATORY GUIDELINES ASSOCIATED WITH A DRIVE MODE OF A VEHICLE - In an example, a method of enforcing regulatory guidelines related to functionality of an electronic device associated with a vehicle when the vehicle is in a drive mode includes interfacing an application of an electronic device associated with a vehicle with an Application Programming Interface (API). The method additionally includes determining that the vehicle is in the drive mode. In the method, the API may modify a functionality of the application of the electronic device in accordance with regulatory guidelines associated with operation of the electronic device when the vehicle is in the drive mode. The modification may be based on the determination that the vehicle is in the drive mode. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120891 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DETECTING AND PREVENTING UNINTENDED DIALING BY A PHONE DEVICE - An exemplary method includes an unintended-dialing detection and prevention system 1) determining, based on an unintended-dialing detection heuristic, a phone dialing pattern associated with a phone dialing event of a phone device, 2) determining, based on the unintended-dialing detection heuristic, that the phone dialing pattern associated with the phone dialing event matches a predefined phone dialing pattern indicative of unintended dialing, and 3) automatically performing, in response to the determining that the phone dialing pattern associated with the phone dialing event matches the predefined phone dialing pattern indicative of the unintended dialing, an operation configured to prevent a placement of a phone call by the phone device in response to the phone dialing event. Corresponding methods and systems are also disclosed. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120892 | SPEECH RECOGNITION FUNCTIONALITY IN A VEHICLE THROUGH AN EXTRINSIC DEVICE - Speech recognition in a vehicle through an extrinsic device includes detecting, via the vehicle, a presence of a mobile communications device that is configured with a speech recognition component. A vehicle processor encodes data lists stored in the vehicle and transmits the data lists and a vehicle identifier to the mobile communications device. In response to receiving a request to initiate a voice recognition session, the vehicle transmits the request and the vehicle identifier to the mobile communications device that causes activation of the speech recognition component. The mobile communications device retrieves the data lists via the identifier. In response to a voice command received by the speech recognition component, the speech recognition component interprets the voice command, determines an action by evaluating the voice command in view of the data lists, and transmits an instruction to the vehicle processor directing the vehicle to implement the action. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120893 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED NEW CARRIER TYPE IN WIRELSS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methods providing an enhanced new carrier type (eNCT) operable to adapt cells of a wireless communication network for opportunistic behavior that adapts to the geo-temporal traffic distribution are disclosed. Embodiments of eNCT operation provide for transmission of downlink common channels by cells employing eNCT techniques only when needed. Base stations implementing eNCT techniques herein may transition between two or more operational states, such as an active state wherein full base station functionality is performed and a dormant state wherein limited base station functionality is performed, based upon geo-temporal traffic distribution within the network. Thus, when a base station is not actively serving a user equipment (UE), the downlink transmission by the base station, and resulting interference, may be reduced or even eliminated. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120894 | Mobile Device and Method for Controlling Application Procedures of the Mobile Device Thereof - A mobile device and a method for controlling application procedures of a mobile device are provided. The mobile device includes a motion sensor configured to detect motion of the mobile device and generate a motion signal, and a micro-processor configured to receive the motion signal, determine whether the mobile device has been continuously knocked for a predetermined number of times, and control an application procedure accordingly. The method for controlling the application procedures for the mobile device is also disclosed. Therefore, a user can control the mobile device conveniently, even in an occasion not convenient for the user to control the mobile device by its touch panel or physical buttons. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120895 | CELL IDENTIFIER CONFLICT AVOIDANCE - The technology described automatically resolves cell identity collisions/conflicts in a cellular radio communications network. A detecting node determines that a first cell identifier associated with a first conflicting cell is the same as a second cell identifier associated with a second conflicting cell. One of the first and second conflicting cells is selected to change its cell identifier. A different cell identifier is determined for the selected cell. The different cell identifier is then provided to other cells and preferably to user equipment (UE) terminals without disrupting ongoing UE communications. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120896 | ALARM OPERATION METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE SAME - An alarm operation system for use by a mobile terminal receives input data used for setting an alarm. The system sets alarm content comprising a category of multiple items of content including at least one of, (a) audio data and (b) video data, to be played in response to detection of an alarm trigger condition. The system selects an alarm content item for playback from the category in response to the detection of the alarm trigger condition. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120897 | COMMUNICATION INTEGRATION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A communication integration system includes a first portable device and a second portable device. Wherein when the first portable device utilizes a first mobile communication module to communicate with a communication device, a first communication coupling module of the first portable device transmits communication data and first voice data received by the first portable device to a second communication coupling module of the second portable device, so as to display the communication data and play the first voice data on the second portable device, and the second communication coupling module transmits second voice data of the second portable device to the first communication coupling module, so as to transmit the second voice data to the communication device via the first mobile communication module. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120898 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL AND, COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus internally generates a virtual terminal (emulator) of a mobile terminal. The virtual terminal performs handover to a 3G network in place of the mobile terminal. In the event of an incoming call to the mobile terminal, the virtual terminal receives the call in place of the mobile terminal and notifies the mobile terminal of the call. Consequently, without having to perform handover, the mobile terminal is able to receive communication notification, whereby telephone communication by the mobile terminal remains enabled without the expenditure of power for handover, enabling a reduction in power consumption. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120899 | MOBILE DEVICE PROFILING BASED ON SPEED - Systems and methods for modifying settings of mobile device are provided. Method includes determining first geographic location of mobile device. First geographic location is associated with first time. Method also includes determining second geographic location of mobile device. Second geographic location is associated with second time. The method also includes determining a speed of the mobile device based on the first geographic location, the first time, the second geographic location, and the second time. The method also includes associating at least the speed of the mobile device with a device profile. The device profile is a member of a set of device profiles stored within the mobile device. The method also includes adjusting at least one user-interface setting of the mobile device based on the device profile. The at least one user-interface setting is associated with an audio or visual user-interface element of the mobile device. | 05-01-2014 |
20140128049 | VEHICULAR DISPLAY SYSTEM - A vehicular display system includes a mobile device having a mobile display part, and a vehicle on-board unit which is previously fixed in the vehicle. An application of the mobile device is booted up by a boot-up signal produced by setting the mobile device in the vehicle. Preferably, the application receives vehicle information (e.g., a vehicle speed) collected in the vehicle from the vehicle on-board unit, and displays the vehicle information on the mobile display part. | 05-08-2014 |
20140128050 | PROVISIONING CONNECTIVITY SERVICE DATA IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method is proposed of provisioning connectivity service data for a device when the device attaches to a telecommunications network. The connectivity service data comprises information required to enable connectivity between the device and at least one further device of the network. Dynamic data relating to the device is obtained as part of one of the device attaching to the telecommunications network and a previous attachment of the device to the network. The dynamic data is of a type that may change from one such attachment to another such attachment of the same device. The connectivity service data is then selected based on the obtained dynamic data. It is then arranged for the selected connectivity service data to be provisioned to the device. | 05-08-2014 |
20140128051 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RANGING TRANSMISSION BY MOBILE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a ranging transmission method comprising: a mobile station receiving a message including backoff window information from a base station; and the mobile station performing ranging transmission on the basis of the backoff window information, wherein the message includes a ranging backoff window indicator indicating an increase or decrease in a backoff window size for ranging retransmission. | 05-08-2014 |
20140128052 | COMMAND INTERFACE FOR OUTDOOR BROADBAND UNIT - A method implemented by an outdoor broadband unit includes receiving, by a broadband home router within the outdoor broadband unit, a request for services associated with a wide area network (WAN), the request originating from a device within a local area network (LAN) associated with the broadband home router; generating, by the broadband home router and based on the request, an attention (AT) command to a Long-Term Evolution (LTE) module, within the outdoor broadband unit, the LTE module providing an air interface for the WAN; executing, by the LTE module, the AT command; receiving, by the broadband home router and from the LTE module, a return value based on the executed AT command; and sending, by the broadband home router and to the device within the LAN, a response to the request based on the return value. | 05-08-2014 |
20140134990 | Operating Mode Switching Method - An operating mode switching method for a electronic device is disclosed. The operating mode switching method includes receiving a notification message via a proximity-based wireless communication technology; switching from an initial operating mode to an environmental operating mode corresponding to the notification message; and switching from the target operating mode back to the initial operating mode when not effectively receiving an environmental signal corresponding to the notification message via a short-ranged wireless communication technology. | 05-15-2014 |
20140134991 | Self-Configuration of Wireless Networks - A cellular communications network includes multiple base stations. In order for the network to provide the best possible coverage for users, it is necessary for the radio configuration of each base station to take into consideration the radio configurations of nearby base stations. Operational context information for the access point is transmitted according to a publish-subscribe messaging pattern. Information is received identifying at least one other access point meeting proximity criteria. The access point subscribes to publish-subscribe messages from the or each other access point identified in said information, and sets its radio configuration information in view of the received messages from the or each other access point. | 05-15-2014 |
20140134992 | INTRA-VEHICULAR MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT - The illustrative embodiments described herein provide a computer-implemented method, apparatus, and computer program product for managing mobile device usage in a moving vehicle. In response to detecting that a user is traveling at a speed consistent with vehicular travel, optical data from an interior of the moving vehicle is detected. The optical data is analyzed to identify a set of vehicular markers. The user's intra-vehicular location is determined in relation to the set of vehicular markers. If the user's intra-vehicular location is the driver's seat, then restricted use protocols are initiated. | 05-15-2014 |
20140134993 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING OPERATION STATE OF BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus are provided for controlling transition of an operation state of a cell in a wireless communication system. The cell includes a transceiver configured to transmit and receive signals to and from a terminal and another cell. The cell also includes a controller configured to transition an operation state of the cell from an active state to a dormant state, transmit a discovery signal, determine whether a cell activation signal is received from a node that controls the cell, and transition the operation state of the cell from the dormant state to the active state when the cell activation signal is received. | 05-15-2014 |
20140134994 | BROADCAST MODE CONTROL METHOD AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for controlling a play mode, and a mobile terminal. The method includes: detecting whether a mobile terminal is in a preset status according to an operation of a user on the mobile terminal; if the mobile terminal is in the preset status, acquiring a distance between the user and the mobile terminal; and if the distance between the user and the mobile terminal is smaller than a preset threshold, controlling the mobile terminal to enter an earphone play mode. Trough the present invention, the play mode of the mobile terminal can be effectively and accurately controlled, thereby avoiding unnecessary operations and improving the intelligence of the mobile terminal. | 05-15-2014 |
20140141759 | MODIFYING A FUNCTION BASED ON USER PROXIMITY - For modifying a function based on user proximity, a proximity module determines a distance between an electronic device and a transported device in wireless communication with the electronic device. The proximity module further modifies a function of the electronic device if the distance is within the specified range. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141760 | SYSTEMS, APPARATUS, AND METHODS FOR MANAGING INFORMATION IN A SMART STORAGE DEVICE - This disclosure provides systems, methods, and apparatus for refreshing information stored on a smart storage device. In one aspect a smart storage device is provided that is configured to be coupled to a wireless communications apparatus operating in a wireless communications network. The smart storage device includes a memory configured to store network access information for accessing services of the network. The smart storage device further includes a controller configured to send a message to the wireless communications apparatus including data notifying the wireless communications apparatus of an update to the network access information. The data further includes a command that the wireless communications apparatus suspend an active operation of the wireless communications apparatus and initiate updating information managed by the wireless communications apparatus based on one or more conditions. The updating of the information is based on at least a portion of the updated network access information. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141761 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PORTABLE DEVICE BY USING HUMIDITY SENSOR AND PORTABLE DEVICE THEREOF - A method of controlling a portable device having a humidity sensor is provided. The method includes measuring a humidity level around the portable device using the humidity sensor when a call event occurs, comparing the measured humidity level with a preset threshold value, and controlling on/off of a display unit of the portable device according to a comparison outcome. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141762 | GENERIC FEATURE-LICENSING FRAMEWORK - Disclosed is an arrangement to enable customers to provision devices with feature licenses that enable specified features in the devices. The arrangement includes a feature-licensing system for performing feature-licensing processes to provision the devices with feature licenses and a feature-licensing process configuration system. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141763 | METHOD FOR SETTING TERMINAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention pertains to a method and apparatus for setting a mobile communication terminal. A method for setting a mobile communication terminal according to one embodiment of the present invention may comprise the steps of: transmitting, by the mobile communication terminal, an information provision request message to an information provision entity; and receiving, by the mobile communication terminal, information for access to the mobile communication terminal, which is generated by the information provision entity, from the information provision entity. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a user can directly set a service provider during initial use of a terminal or efficiently change the service provider. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141764 | INTEGRATED NUMBER MANAGEMENT MODULE AND SERVICE ORDER SYSTEM - A number inventory system is disclosed. The number inventory system manages the relationships between SIM cards, IMSI numbers, and MSISDN for a mobile telecommunications service provider. The number inventory system provides the software and hardware for receiving SIM card inventory data, including associated IMSI numbers, and efficiently stores the SIM card inventory data in a database. The number inventory system further provides for the opening of a range of available MSISDN. SIM cards, IMSI and MSISDN may be assigned to customer orders, and the number inventory system manages the associations between IMSI numbers and MSISDN and monitors the status of SIM cards, IMSI numbers and MSISDN. The number inventory system may also manage an MSISDN classification system for identifying MSISDN numbers having various desirable sequence characteristics. | 05-22-2014 |
20140148140 | POLICY-BASED MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (MDMS) BASED ON ACCESS HISTORY INFORMATION - Embodiments of the invention described herein provide approaches relating generally to location position management of mobile devices. Specifically, a policy-based mobile device management system (MDMS) is provided for determining a location of a mobile device based on the user's access history information and controlling the mobile device based on the location. | 05-29-2014 |
20140148141 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION OF SELECTED COMMUNICATIONS TO A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE CARRIED BY A VEHICLE - A system for use with a vehicle to control transmission of communications to a traveling mobile communication device in the vehicle includes: (a) a vehicle activity monitoring unit coupled with a self diagnostic device installed on the vehicle; and (b) a server unit coupled for controlling communications with served mobile units coupled with a mobile network that includes a plurality of elements configured for effecting selected types of communications with the served mobile units. The vehicle activity monitoring unit is communicatingly coupled with the server via the mobile network. The server unit cooperates with the activity monitoring unit to identify which served mobile communication unit is a traveling mobile communication device. The server unit cooperates with particular elements of the mobile network to control particular types of communications with the traveling mobile communication device when the vehicle activity monitoring unit indicates the vehicle is engaged in a predetermined activity. | 05-29-2014 |
20140148142 | Apparatuses and Methods for a Communication System - Apparatuses and method for communication are provided. The solution includes determining that user equipment is out of network coverage; switching to out of network coverage operating mode; monitoring properties of out of network coverage operation; and if one or more predetermined conditions related to the properties are fulfilled controlling the transmission of a message using resources reserved to out of network coverage operation, the message comprising indication of the fulfilled conditions. | 05-29-2014 |
20140148143 | Methods And Apparatus For Optimization Of Femtocell Network Management - Methods and apparatus that reduce network management overhead required for the operation of wireless femtocells. In one aspect of the invention, a central network entity governs the simultaneous operation of several femtocells by specifying modes of operation, and operational parameters for one or more of the femtocells. In one embodiment, at least one of the specified modes of operation directs a femtocell to operate in a substantially autonomous manner within the network-defined operational parameters. The network-defined constraints are provided to the femtocell for example, responsive to a successful registration attempt. | 05-29-2014 |
20140148144 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PLANNING BASE STATION CONTROLLERS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing planning of a plurality of base station controllers in a wireless network are disclosed. For example, the method obtains input data, and determines a limit for at least one base station controller parameter in accordance with the input data. The method determines if the limit for the at least one base station controller parameter is exceeded and determines an optimal output for an objective function, wherein the objective function is based on a plurality of penalty factors, if the limit for the at least one base station controller parameter is exceeded. | 05-29-2014 |
20140148145 | METHOD OF REPORTING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING SAME - The present invention relates to a method for a terminal to report system information in a wireless communication system. The method includes: transmitting a previously-obtained system information availability indicator that indicates to a serving cell that there is previously obtained system information on a neighboring cell; and receiving a system report request from the serving cell; and transmitting a system information report to the serving cell in response to the system report request. The system report request includes a previously obtained system information report request indicator. When the previously obtained system information report request indicator indicates that there is a report on the previously obtained system information, the system information report includes the previously obtained system information and the previously obtained system information is system information obtained from the neighboring cell before the system report request is received. | 05-29-2014 |
20140148146 | METHOD FOR REPORTING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - A method for reporting in a wireless system, according to one embodiment, is provided. The method comprises: receiving a measurement setting from a serving cell, wherein the measurement setting comprises a system information report indicator for indicating a system information report of a cell to which a measurement result is reported; deciding whether a report condition is satisfied based on the measurement setting; and transmitting to the serving cell a measurement report message comprising the measurement result of the cell to which the result is reported, which satisfied the report condition. The measurement report message further comprises system information of the cell to which the report is made. | 05-29-2014 |
20140155046 | UNIVERSAL NEAR FIELD SELF-CONFIGURING FEMTOCELL - Embodiments of the present invention include a method for configuring a femtocell. In one embodiment, the method includes identifying a cellular device within near-field communication range of the femtocell. The method identifies a carrier network associated with the cellular device and automatically configures the femtocell to operate on the carrier network associated with the cellular device. | 06-05-2014 |
20140155047 | Systems and Methods For Managing The Toilet Training Process Of A Child - Systems and methods for managing the toilet training process of a child are provided. In one aspect, a computer system for managing toilet training a person is provided. The computer system includes a memory device, a display device, and a processor in communication with the memory device and the display device. The processor is programmed to provide a first set of functionality accessible using the display device. The processor is also programmed to provide a set of enhanced functionality configured in a disabled status. The processor is further programmed to utilize the first set of functionality to identify completion of a toilet training milestone, and reconfigure the second set of enhanced functionality to an enabled status based on identifying completion of the toilet training milestone. | 06-05-2014 |
20140155048 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMIC ENABLEMENT OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE FUNCTIONALITIES - An apparatus operable in a communication system is described. The apparatus includes means for determining a set of wireless communication device functionalities. The apparatus determines the set of wireless communication device functionalities using a functionality table based on a network identifier. The apparatus also includes means for enabling the set of wireless communication device functionalities. | 06-05-2014 |
20140155049 | Method and Apparatus for Adjusting Layer 3 Filter Coefficients - A UE configured to adjust a L3 filter coefficient, comprises initializing a first filter coefficient of a first filter and a second filter coefficient of a second filter based on a primary filter coefficient of a primary filter received from an associated wireless network entity; adjusting the primary filter coefficient by one of: setting the primary filter coefficient to the first filter coefficient if a first difference between a measurement result of the primary filter and a first measurement result of the first filter is less than a first coefficient threshold and setting the primary filter coefficient to the second filter coefficient if a second difference between the measurement result of the primary filter and a second measurement result of the second filter is less than a second coefficient threshold; and applying the adjusted primary filter coefficient to measurements of one or more cells in an active cell set. | 06-05-2014 |
20140155050 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING CONTENT BASED ON STATUS OF TERMINAL - A terminal status-based content receiving method and an apparatus that receives a differential content based on a change in a status of a terminal are provided. The content receiving apparatus includes a low-power short range communication unit, and a controller configured to determine a status of the terminal, to include status information of the terminal in an advertising packet so as to periodically broadcast the advertising packet through the low-power short range communication unit, and to receive content corresponding to the status of the terminal from an external device that scans the advertising packet. | 06-05-2014 |
20140155051 | JURISDICTION BASED PARAMETER SETTING FOR WIRELESS TRANSCEIVERS - Low cost semiconductor manufacturing techniques have provided consumers with a wide range of electronic devices supporting communications according to multiple standards. These electronic devices will be deployed within many operational jurisdictions, particularly with roaming features, such as Japan, Europe, Asia-Pacific, South America and North America. However, operational compliance requirements can vary substantially with these different jurisdictions. Current electronic devices are designed, manufactured, calibrated and operated according to a specification providing compliance with broad range of operational jurisdictions despite the performance limitations this applies in many of the operational jurisdictions. Accordingly, there is provided a method of dynamically configuring the electronic device based upon a geographically based determination of the operational jurisdiction from global navigation systems data received by the electronic device. Based upon the determined operational jurisdiction, the operational parameters of a device's communication interfaces are adjusted for improving performance and efficiency of the device within these jurisdictions. | 06-05-2014 |
20140162616 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INHIBITING PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES - This accessory is apparatus capable of implementing a method that can affect one or more features of a portable electronic device when brought into a vehicle having a radio with a right and a left speaker. The accessory has a sender for initiating transmission of an RF test signal at the portable electronic device. The RF test signal is arranged to cause the radio to produce a distinct pair of audio responses from the right and the left speaker. The accessory has a discriminator for determining for the right and the left speaker the corresponding return delay between transmission of the RF test signal and arrival of the distinct pair of audio responses at the portable electronic device. | 06-12-2014 |
20140162617 | METHOD FOR DEVICE CONFIGURATION, DATABASE, MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND NETWORK ENTITY - A method for device configuration is described comprising storing information about whether a mobile communication system comprising a mobile communication device operates correctly when a configuration is applied in a context of a configuration history to the mobile communication device; receiving a request for a configuration to be applied to mobile communication devices; and determining a configuration to be applied to the mobile communication devices based on the stored information. | 06-12-2014 |
20140162618 | DISABLING OF WIRELESS TRANSMISSION OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES USING MESSAGES - Systems, methods, and apparatuses are directed to facilitating disabling of wireless transmission of wireless communication devices using messages. In one embodiment, logic is configured to generate a disabling message that indicates disabling of wireless transmission, and wirelessly transmit the disabling message to cause disabling of a transmitter portion of a wireless transceiver of a wireless communication device that receives the disabling message. In another embodiment, logic is configured to generate a disabling message that indicates disabling of wireless transmission, and wirelessly transmit the disabling message to cause disabling of a transmitter portion of a wireless transceiver of a wireless communication device that receives the disabling message. In some embodiments, the disabling message may cause the transmitter portion of the wireless transceiver to be disabled while a receiver portion of the wireless transmitter remains enabled. | 06-12-2014 |
20140162619 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR SECURING COMMUNICATIONS - An apparatus for securing communications includes a processor and memory storing executable computer code causing the apparatus to at least perform operations including receiving a request to activate a service transferring communications of a cellular network to a wireless local network. The computer program code may further cause the apparatus to provide an activation key to a device responsive to an indication that the device is authorized to utilize the service based on determining an identifier(s) of the request is valid. The computer program code may further cause the apparatus to provide a private key to the device, to enable the device to utilize the private key to subsequently register to transfer communications of the cellular network to a wireless local network(s), responsive to receiving a message for the private key from the device and a message from the cellular network. Corresponding methods and computer program products are also provided. | 06-12-2014 |
20140162620 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING A DEVICE CONFIGURATION - Methods and apparatus are provided for device configuration (e.g., feature segment loading and system selection). Certain aspects of the present disclosure generally relate to operating a user equipment (UE) in a first radio access network (RAN) with a first set of modem features that supports the first RAN, detecting a second RAN not supported by the first set of modem features, and rebooting the modem software to load a second set of modem features that supports the detected RAN. For certain aspects, the first RAN may be a Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) network and the second RAN may be a Wideband-Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA) network or Long-Term Evolution (LTE) network. This allows features to be loaded into memory (e.g., only) when they are required to support a detected RAN, rather than loading an entire image, thereby conserving DRAM and increasing efficiency. | 06-12-2014 |
20140171052 | LOCATION-AWARE MOBILE APPLICATION MANAGEMENT - Described herein are techniques related to managing mobile applications (“apps”) of a mobile device based, at least in part, upon the determined location of the device. The techniques described herein are especially suited for situations where the present location differs from the locations associated with particular apps that are already installed on the mobile device. This Abstract is submitted with the understanding that it will not be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 06-19-2014 |
20140171053 | TECHNIQUES AND APPARATUS TO MANAGE POWER IN WIRELESS DEVICE - An apparatus may include a sensor, a processor circuit, and an adaptive scanning component for execution on the processor circuit to receive sensor data from the sensor, to determine activity state based upon the received sensor data, and to adjust a wireless network scanning procedure in accordance with the received sensor data. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 06-19-2014 |
20140171054 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSISTED SERVING CELL CONFIGURATION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - Methods, systems and apparatus are provided for camping, assisted serving cell addition or removal, and discontinuous reception (DRX) in networks having a macro cell and at least one assisted serving cell. In other aspects, enhancements to Layer 1 channels and uplink timing alignments are provided in networks having a macro cell and at least one assisted serving cell. In further aspects, assisted serving cell Layer 2 architecture and transport channels are provided in networks having a macro cell and at least one assisted serving cell. In further aspects, collaborated HARQ solutions are provided in networks having a macro cell and at least one assisted serving cell. | 06-19-2014 |
20140171055 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ANNOUNCEMENT CONTROLLING METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM - A portable electronic device includes: a wireless communication unit that transmits and receives data to and from an external device via near field communication; a measuring unit that measures a physical quantity for determining a predetermined kinetic state of the portable electronic device; an announcement unit that issues a predetermined announcement; an announcement setting unit that makes a setting for whether to permit the announcement and/or for an announcement mode based on the kinetic state of the portable electronic device, which is determined based on the measurement by the measuring unit, and the kinetic state of the external device, which is acquired via the wireless communication unit; and an announcement controller that controls the announcement unit to issue the announcement based on the setting made by the announcement setting unit. | 06-19-2014 |
20140171056 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVED COMMUNICATION ON A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods for wireless communication are disclosed. In one aspect, a method includes generating, by an apparatus, a first message comprising a first indicator indicating a number of beacon intervals that each have a window during which one or more devices are permitted to communicate with the apparatus; and transmitting, by the apparatus, the first message. | 06-19-2014 |
20140171057 | MOBILE OBJECT LOCATION-BASED PRIVACY PROTECTION - A system, method and apparatus for creating and implementing a privacy zone around a mobile object are described herein. A privacy zone is a geographic location proximate to a mobile object in which mobile device functionality is reduced when a mobile device is inside the boundaries of the privacy zone. A locator subsystem tracks the location of the mobile object to update the location of the privacy zone. Further, the locator subsystem monitors for mobile devices that may interface with the privacy zone. Once a mobile device is found to be within a privacy zone, the pre-determined mobile device features will preferably be disabled. | 06-19-2014 |
20140171058 | CONTROLLING MOBILE DEVICE CALLS, TEXT MESSAGES AND DATA USAGE WHILE OPERATING A MOTOR VEHICLE - Disclosed are an system and method of regulating mobile device communications while operating a motor vehicle. One example method may include determining a speed event indicating that a speed of the motor vehicle has performed at least one of exceeded a first threshold above which mobile device usage restriction policies are invoked and fallen below a second threshold allowing the mobile device restriction policies to be removed. The first threshold may be equal to or greater than the second threshold. As a result of obtaining the speed event, the method may also provide transmitting the speed event to a remote edge gateway server located remotely from the motor vehicle, which stores the speed event for reference purposes when determining a policy for routing a particular mobile device call, text message and/or mobile data session. | 06-19-2014 |
20140179295 | DERIVING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTEXT AND ACTIONS FROM AD-HOC STATE BROADCAST - Context state decisions of other users, based on the state of their mobile devices in the vicinity, are used to determine if it reasonable to have your device make or suggest a similar state change. By broadcasting state changes or identifiable actions to all other devices in the vicinity using short-range communications, devices can anonymously notify others in their vicinity of actions they or their users have taken. By collecting and analyzing these notifications, devices can then build their own understanding of the current context and autonomously decide on appropriate actions to take for themselves. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179296 | Over The Air Modification Of The Telephone Number Of A Mobile Unit - The telephone number, such as the MSISDN or MDN, of a mobile unit can be changed with Over the Air (OTA) messaging without replacing the SIM/UICC device or changing the IMSI of the mobile unit. The user of a mobile unit can add or change a telephone number of a mobile unit without having to go to a service center or replace the SIM card of the mobile unit. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179297 | Dynamic Communication - The disclosed embodiments relate to provisioning of a service, such as a financial service, to a device, such as a mobile device operative to access the service wirelessly or otherwise, in a manner which efficiently provides a consistent user experience which meets a user's expectations as to the functionality and quality of the service, including the user interface therefore and service delivery, which leverages the available capacities of the devices through which the service is provided so as to maximize the functionality and quality of the provided service without diminishing the experience, i.e. without substantially reducing the quality or functionality. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179298 | LOW POWER ALWAYS-ON DETERMINATION OF INDOOR VERSUS OUTDOOR STATE - Methods, systems, computer-readable media, and apparatuses for determining indoor/outdoor state of a mobile device are presented. In some embodiments, a mobile device may maintain an indoor/outdoor state. The mobile device may include at least one first sensor and at least one second sensor, the first sensor associated with higher power consumption than the second sensor. The mobile device may gate off the first sensor and using the second sensor to obtain a sensor reading, if the second sensor can generate a reading indicative of the indoor/outdoor state of the mobile device. The mobile device may use the first sensor to obtain a sensor reading, if the second sensor cannot generate a reading indicative of the indoor/outdoor state of the mobile device. The mobile device may update the indoor/outdoor state of the mobile device based on a reading received from one of the first and the second sensors. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179299 | CONTENT DELIVERY DURING CALL IDLE TIME - A method for effective utilization of call idle time, including detecting by the processor of a phone, that a first person using the phone has initiated a phone call to a second person, and that the second person has not yet answered the call, wherein the phone is operative in an idle mode to present content pre-designated by the first person, and is operative in a normal mode to send and receive voice communications to and from the second person and to not present the pre-designated content, activating the idle mode of the phone in response to the detecting, subsequently detecting, by the processor of the phone, that the second person has answered the call, and subsequently activating the normal mode of the phone in response to the subsequently detecting. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179300 | TERMINAL FOR ENTERING COVERAGE OF SMALL BASE STATION, SMALL BASE STATION, NETWORK APPARATUS, AND METHOD - A terminal for entering a coverage of a small base station, a network apparatus, and a method for operating the same are provided. The network apparatus controls small base stations, on which the terminal is camped, to operate in an active mode in which the small base station emits radio frequency (RF) signals, and controls small base stations, accessible by the terminal but not camped on by the terminal, to operate in an inactive mode in which the small base station does not emit RF signals. | 06-26-2014 |
20140187219 | DETECTING A USER-TO-WIRELESS DEVICE ASSOCIATION IN A VEHICLE - A location of a wireless device relative to a vehicle is determined using received data. Data may be received from the vehicle sensors. Data may also be received from the wireless device sensors of a wireless device. The presence of one or more persons may be determined using received data. A user-to-wireless device association may be detected based, at least in part, upon the presence of one or more persons in the vehicle and the location of the wireless device relative to the vehicle. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187220 | GPS CONTROL IN A MOBILE DEVICE - Exemplary embodiments disclose a method, computer program product, and system for controlling a GPS receiver in a mobile device. In an exemplary embodiment, a mobile device receives a signal relating to a current date and time, and a signal relating to a current location of the mobile device. The mobile device determines if the current location of the mobile device is during daylight by comparing the current date and time to the sunrise and sunset time for the current location. The mobile device senses a light level by a light sensor of the mobile device to determine if light is present. The mobile device selectively enables the GPS receiver in the mobile device based on the light level, the current location of the mobile device, and the current date and time. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187221 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING COLLABERATIVE INTERACTIONS AMOUNG DEVICES ON A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for collaboratively communications among device are provided in which a communications device is operable to receive a message from a peer device in the communications environment which indicates that an event associated with the peer device has occurred. Further, based on reception of the message, the device may be operable to change at least one of functionality from a normal operating state to a modified operating state. Similarly, a device may be operable to receive a message indicating various functionalities active on a peer device. When the device detects occurrence of an event, it may determine whether any of the various functionalities associated with the peer device may be affected. Where any of the functionalities are affected, the device may generate a message for the peer device associated with the affected functionality and may transmit the message to the peer device. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187222 | Status Switching Method for Mobile Device - A status switching method for a mobile device is disclosed. The status switching method includes receiving a first request for switching a radio function of the mobile device from a first status to a second status; keeping the radio function in the first status for a specific duration; switching the radio function to the second status if not receiving a second request for switching the radio function of the mobile device from the second status to the first status during the specific duration; and remaining the radio function in the first status if receiving a second request for switching the radio function of the mobile device from the second status to the first status during the specific duration; and switching the radio function to the first status. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187223 | ADAPTIVE THRESHOLDING FOR IMAGE RECOGNITION - Various approaches for providing textual information to an application, system, or service are disclosed. In particular, various embodiments enable a user to capture an image with a camera of a portable computing device. The computing device is capable of taking the image and processing it to recognize, identify, and/or isolate the text in order to forward the text to an application or function. The application or function can then utilize the text to perform an action in substantially real-time. The text may include an email, phone number, URL, an address, and the like and the application or function may be dialing the phone number, navigating to the URL, opening an address book to save contact information, displaying a map to show the address, and so on. Adaptive thresholding can be used to account for variations across an image, in order to improve the accuracy and efficiency of text recognition processes. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187224 | PROTOCOL VERSION NEGOTIATION METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL, BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a protocol version negotiation method, a mobile terminal and a base station. The method includes: receiving, by a mobile terminal, an air interface message sent by a base station according to a 3GPP protocol, where the air interface message includes an information element for indicating a highest protocol version supported by the base station, and the air interface message is sent before the base station sends a request message for querying the mobile terminal capability set; obtaining the highest protocol version supported by the base station according to the information element; and if the highest protocol version supported by the mobile terminal is later than the highest protocol version supported by the base station, configuring, by the mobile terminal, a protocol version used by the mobile terminal to a protocol version same as the highest protocol version supported by the base station. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187225 | CONFIGURABLE PHONE WITH INTERACTIVE VOICE RESPONSE ENGINE - A land-based or mobile phone and methods are provided for receiving inbound communications as either voice or text, and then based on the user's configuration settings, the inbound communication is provided to the user as it was received or is automatically converted into a format that is desired by the user. The phone also takes voice or text that is input by the user of the phone and converts the user's input to either voice or text based on the configuration settings stored in the user's contact list or otherwise. The outbound communication is configured according to how the intended recipient wants to receive a communication based on the configuration settings stored in the user's contact list or otherwise. The phone includes a controller that determines how the phone will handle and process inbound and outbound communications. The controller includes a speech recognition engine. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187226 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF DISPLAYING ACCORDING TO ENVIRONMENTAL DATA - The present invention provides a mobile terminal, comprising: a detection module for detecting the environment that the mobile terminal is in; and a display module for displaying corresponding control buttons according to detected environmental data. Accordingly, the present invention also provides a method of displaying according to environmental data. The technical solution of the present invention can effectively avoid users' misoperation of an incoming call and the like when the mobile terminal is put in a pocket or bag. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187227 | APPARATUS HAVING A FLEXIBLE DISPLAY AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - A mobile terminal including a wireless communication unit configured to wirelessly communicate with at least one other terminal; a flexible display; at least one sensor arranged in a prescribed form on the flexible display and configured to convert a flex state of the flexible display into an electric signal; and a controller configured to determine the flex state of the flexible display using the electric signal input from the at least one sensor, and control a visual effect corresponding to the determined flex state and output the visual effect on the flexible display. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187228 | Customized Application For Proximity Transactions - A method and system for customizing a mobile application running on a mobile communication device of a user. In one implementation, the method includes providing the mobile application to the mobile communication device of the user, the mobile application having a generic platform; determining a special interest group (SIG) that is affiliated with the user; and customizing the generic platform of the mobile application based on information specific to the special interest group (SIG) that is affiliated with the user. | 07-03-2014 |
20140187229 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHOD - A wireless transmission apparatus that transmits transmission data in each of a plurality of system frequency bands using a transmission power controlled so that a total transmission power of each of the plurality of system frequency bands is less than a maximum transmit power, where the maximum transmit power incase of transmitting the transmission data simultaneously using two or more system frequency bands in the plurality of system frequency bands is less than a maximum transmit power in case of transmitting the transmission data using single system frequency band in the plurality of system frequency band. | 07-03-2014 |
20140194101 | ALTERNATE NOTIFICATION SELECTION - Embodiments of the invention relate to management of notifications responsive to the arrival and departure of mobile devices in a defined area. A prioritized list is shared among mobile devices in a defined area. Upon detection, mobile devices add their respective selected notifications to the prioritized list. A mobile device entering the defined area receives the prioritized list and in response to detecting a shared selected notification on the prioritized list, one of the mobile devices in the area changes its selected notification to an alternative notification. A second mobile device entering the defined area would likewise receive the prioritized list and change its selected notification to a second alternative notification responsive to a shared selected notification on the list. At such time as a device leaves the area, the list is again updated and all notifications exclusive to the device are removed from the list. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194102 | INTELLIGENT MUTING OF A MOBILE DEVICE - A device includes a transceiver, a microphone, a sensor, and a controller coupled to receive signals from the sensor and to place the device into a mute mode when the signals from the sensor are indicative of a user action to reduce transmission of the user's voice. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194103 | SOFTMODEM ACTIVATION AND CUSTOMIZATION - Systems and methods are provided for activating, configuring, and/or re-configuring a “softmodem” in a computer device. The softmodem can be specially configured to accept firmware specifications that control the operation of communication by the softmodem. According to one embodiment, in conjunction with a firmware download and installation, at activation an unlocking key can be provided to enable, for example, data service through any selected provider using the softmodem. In some embodiments, the softmodem is specially configured to accommodate a variety of data signal protocols (e.g., CDMA, GSM, etc.) through firmware downloads and configuration. Installation of the firmware on the softmodem enables the softmodem to communicate according to a selected communication protocol and further enables re-configuration of the softmodem between the variety of data signal protocols. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194104 | Alternate Notification Selection - Embodiments of the invention relate to management of notifications responsive to the arrival and departure of mobile devices in a defined area. A prioritized list is shared among mobile devices in a defined area. Upon detection, mobile devices add their respective selected notifications to the prioritized list. A mobile device entering the defined area receives the prioritized list and in response to detecting a shared selected notification on the prioritized list, one of the mobile devices in the area changes its selected notification to an alternative notification. A second mobile device entering the defined area would likewise receive the prioritized list and change its selected notification to a second alternative notification responsive to a shared selected notification on the list. At such time as a device leaves the area, the list is again updated and all notifications exclusive to the device are removed from the list. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194105 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION FUNCTION IN A PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method of providing a Near Field Communication (NFC) function in a portable terminal are provided. The method includes recognizing a tag and reading an NFC message from the tag, storing second data in the memory when the NFC message includes first data of a predetermined record type, the second data corresponding to other data except for the first data among all data included in the NFC message, determining whether a particular application corresponding to the first data has been installed, and when the particular application has been installed, executing the particular application and providing the second data to the particular application so as to enable the particular application to execute a particular function by using the second data. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194106 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING MOBILE DEVICE OPERATION - Implementations herein include receiving a first signal from a first mobile computing device, the first signal indicative of a first state change and receiving a second signal from a second mobile computing device, the second signal indicative of a second state change. The method may also include determining that the first state change and the second state change are related, and that the first mobile computing device and the second mobile computing device are currently located at a common geographic location. The method may further include determining that a third mobile computing device is currently located at the common geographic location. The method may also include transmitting to the third mobile computing device, a third signal indicative of a recommended state change, the recommended state change being based on the first state change at the first mobile computing device and the second state change at the second mobile computing device. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194107 | Personalized Cloud of Mobile Tasks - A dynamically created and automatically updated personalized cloud of mobile tasks may be displayed on an interactive visual display via a personalized cloud generator application. The personalized cloud generator application may receive and/or capture information representing a mobile task performed by a mobile computing device user. The personalized cloud generator application may then store the information and determine a relevance of a given performed mobile task. If the relevance of the performed mobile task meets a prescribed threshold, the personal cloud generator application may display a selectable visual representation (e.g., selectable icon) of the performed mobile task. Given a user's activity, the visual representation may be automatically updated (displayed, removed, moved, resized, etc.) based on the information received and/or captured. Subsequent selection of the displayed visual representation allows quick and easy access or performance of the associated mobile task. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194108 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and an arrangement for reducing a state transition time from a power saving state for a user equipment ( | 07-10-2014 |
20140194109 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MEASURING NETWORK OPERATION RELATED PARAMETERS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for measuring network operation related parameters in a mobile communication network with a core network and a radio-access network, preferably in form of a LTE- or UMTS-network, includes the steps of a) configuring an entity in the mobile communication network for measuring including network operation related parameters to be measured, b) selecting a measuring entity, c) measuring the network operation related parameters by the measuring entity, and d) analyzing the measured parameters wherein a filtering is performed prior to step d), wherein the filtering is performed on an entity in the radio access network of the mobile communication network and wherein the filtering reduces the amount of data of the measured network operation related parameters for step d). A system for measuring network operation related parameters is also described. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194110 | ENERGY SAVING IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of energy saving is applied to a mobile communications network comprising at least two radio access technology systems ( | 07-10-2014 |
20140199979 | APPLICATION DRIVEN FAST DORMANCY - Aspects of the present disclosure are directed to a user equipment, an RNC, or an application operable in a wireless communications network and methods in which the user equipment can be transitioned into a dormant state controlled by an application driven scheme. According to the application driven scheme, a request is received from an active process at an application server to trigger a wireless device to enter a dormant state, and network traffic information corresponding to a time interval is received from a wireless device. If the network traffic information indicates that the active process is solely responsible for network traffic at a transport layer of the wireless device during the time interval, one or more commands are transmitted to the wireless device such that the wireless device enters the dormant state. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 07-17-2014 |
20140199980 | Location- Assisted Service Capability Monitoring - A digitally stored map can indicate the signal quality for each of the map's regions. A device can determine its location, speed, and direction using global positioning system (GPS) and other sensors. Based on this information, the mobile device can predict a field of locations within which the device will probably be located within a specified future time frame. Based on both the information indicating signal quality and the probable future field of locations, the device can estimate a moment at which the device will probably begin to suffer from low-quality or absent signal. Using this prediction, the device can proactively perform a variety of anticipatory remedial actions. For example, the device can begin allocating a greater portion of currently available wireless network communication bandwidth to the reception of data packets that represent content that is being streamed to the device, so that the device can proactively buffer those packets. | 07-17-2014 |
20140199981 | MOBILE PHONE TO APPLIANCE COMMUNICATION VIA AUDIO SAMPLING - The present subject matter relates to systems and methodologies for communicating between an appliance and a mobile device using audio signaling. An appliance is provided with an audio generating device controlled by a processor to cause the audio device to produce encoded sounds. The sounds may correspond to a series of tones. The tones are sampled using the microphone in a smartphone or other mobile computing device and decoded by an application running on the smartphone or device to provide information and/or instructions to the appliance user. | 07-17-2014 |
20140199982 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INDICATION OF CELL STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting an expanding request in a wireless communication system is provided. A first cell transmits an expanding request, which includes a cell off state indication which indicates the first cell is going to be turned off, and a cell off timer, to a second cell, receives an expanding request acknowledge as a response to the expanding request from the second cell, and turns off power. Alternatively, a method and apparatus for transmitting a shrinking request in a wireless communication system is provided. The first cell transmits a shrinking request, which includes a cell on state indication which indicates the first cell is going to be turned on, and a cell on timer, to a second cell, receives a shrinking request acknowledge as a response to the shrinking request from the second cell, and turns on power. | 07-17-2014 |
20140199983 | CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT OUTSIDE A COVERAGE AREA - According to some embodiments, a wireless communication device within a coverage area of a first network is configured to act according to first configuration information associated with the first network. The wireless communication device detects when it has moved outside the coverage area of the first network and, in response, applies an out-of-coverage configuration management rule. The rule indicates how to manage the first configuration information outside the coverage area of the first network. | 07-17-2014 |
20140199984 | Speakerphone Control For Mobile Device - A speakerphone system integrated in a mobile device is automatically controlled based on the current state of the mobile device. In one implementation, the mobile device is controlled based on an orientation or position of the mobile device. In another implementation, the control of the speakerphone includes automatically controlling one or more graphical user interfaces associated with the speakerphone system. | 07-17-2014 |
20140199985 | Apparatus and Methods for Enforcement of Policies Upon a Wireless Device - Apparatus and methods for changing one or more functional or operational aspects of a wireless device, such as upon the occurrence of a certain event. In one embodiment, the event comprises detecting that the wireless device is within range of one or more other devices. In another variant, the event comprises the wireless device associating with a certain access point. In this manner, various aspects of device functionality may be enabled or restricted (device “policies”). This policy enforcement capability is useful for a variety of reasons, including for example to disable noise and/or light emanating from wireless devices (such as at a movie theater), for preventing wireless devices from communicating with other wireless devices (such as in academic settings), and for forcing certain electronic devices to enter “sleep mode” when entering a sensitive area. | 07-17-2014 |
20140199986 | SELECTIVE DELIVERY OF PRESENCE MESSAGES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A wireless communication system generates operating information indicating if a monitoring wireless communication device is in active mode or in idle mode for a wireless data service. The wireless system receives location information that indicates geographic locations of a monitored wireless communication device for delivery to the monitoring wireless communication device. The system stores the location information if the monitoring wireless communication device is in idle mode. The system wirelessly transfers the location information to the monitoring wireless communication device if the monitoring wireless communication device is in active mode. If the monitoring wireless communication device transitions from idle mode to active mode and has stored location information, the system generates summary location data for the monitored wireless communication device based on the stored location information and wirelessly transfers the summary location data to the monitoring wireless communication device. | 07-17-2014 |
20140206327 | Method and Apparatus For Automatically Adjusting the Operation of Notifications Based on Changes in Physical Activity Level - A processor-based personal electronic device (such as a smartphone) is programmed to automatically respond to data sent by various sensors from which the user's activity may be inferred. One or more of the sensors may be worn by the user and remote from the device. A wireless communication link may be used by the device to obtain remote sensor data. Data from on-board sensors in the device—such as motion sensors, location sensors, and the like—may also be used to deduce the user's current activity. In one embodiment, an extended period of inactivity triggers a reminder to the user to get up, stretch and move about. In other embodiments, transitions in a user's activity level may be used to trigger reminders and/or set the state of the device (such as a Do Not Disturb state wherein notifications and alarms are suppressed). | 07-24-2014 |
20140206328 | Method and Apparatus for Automatically Adjusting the Operation of Reminders Based on Device Event History - A processor-based personal electronic device (such as a smartphone) uses combinatorial logic to automatically adjust alarms, notifications reminders, and the like based on data from device event histories, on-board sensors, user-entered data, and similar information. One particular representative embodiment comprises a process for automatically deleting an unneeded reminder. For example, a user may have a personal electronic device that is set to issue a reminder for a meeting in a certain place, on a certain date at a certain time. If location sensors detect that the user is already at the certain place on the certain date at (or reasonably before) the certain time the now superfluous reminder is automatically cancelled. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206329 | METHODS, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR USE IN MEASUREMENT REPORTING - In measurement reporting in a cellular telecommunications network, a measurement control message is generated, the measurement control message specifying at least one measurement event for configuring reporting of measurements by at least one wireless device operating in a cell of the cellular telecommunications network. The at least one measurement event is configured with a neighbour list that is specific to the at least one measurement event. The measurement control message is transmitted for receipt by the wireless device. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206330 | MEASUREMENT REPORTING - Measures for use in measurement reporting in a cellular telecommunications network. One or more configuration parameters for configuring a plurality of Cell Individual Offset (CIO) values for use in measurement reporting in a given cell are generated. Signalling information comprising the generated configuration parameters for the plurality of CIO values is transmitted to at least one user equipment in the given cell. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206331 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIALLY CONFIGURING WIRELESS DEVICES BY USING WIRELESS GATEWAY IN INTERNET ENVIRONMENT - Disclosed are methods and apparatuses for initially configuring a wireless device using a wireless gateway in an Internet environment. A method of initially configuring a wireless device using a wireless gateway in an Internet environment may include receiving pairing information by a smart device from the wireless gateway, and completing pairing with a target device, the pairing information including information on the target device emitting a pairing signal to the wireless gateway. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206332 | SERVER FOR SENDING NEW APPLICATION PORTIONS TO MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES AND RELATED METHODS - A communications system is to communicate with an application server storing a plurality of applications. The communications system includes a mobile wireless communications device configured to store at least one application from among the plurality of applications, the at least one application having stored version information associated therewith. An intermediate server is configured to update the mobile wireless communications device by at least obtaining respective current version information for associated current versions of the plurality of applications and obtaining the stored application version information from the mobile wireless communications device for the at least one stored application. The stored application version information is compared with the current version information for the at least one stored application. New application portions are downloaded from a current application associated with the current version information, and the new application portions are sent to the mobile wireless communications device. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206333 | OFFLINE DEVICE PAGING - The network resources allocated to Machine Type Communication (MTD) devices (also referred to as Machine-to-Machine (M2M) Devices) can be reduced through the introduction of a new device state in a network. The network device state, referred to as a sleep state, allows the network to offload context information about the device to another network element so that the resources allocated to the sleeping device can be released. When the device needs to be contacted by a network element, the stored context information can be retrieved to facilitate paging the otherwise offline device. | 07-24-2014 |
20140213232 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVATING AND DE-ACTIVATING ADJACENT RADIO SITES - A radio site controller is configured to dynamically activate adjacent radio sites by first identifying, based at least on a current location of a subscriber unit in a currently activated first radio site, a currently de-activated second radio site located adjacent to the first radio site, and subsequent activating the identified second radio site. The identified second radio site may be a single de-activated adjacent second radio site, all de-activated adjacent second radio sites, or a subset of de-activated adjacent second radio sites based on a subscriber unit travel direction determination. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213233 | MOBILE EQUIPMENT CUSTOMIZATION USING A SINGLE MANUFACTURING CONFIGURATION - Personalization of a mobile device, including receiving at the mobile device a unique code; selecting, from a plurality of personalization policies stored on the mobile device a personalization policy that corresponds to the unique code; and storing the selected personalization policy in a persistent protected storage element of the mobile device. Customizing a mobile device, including determining at the mobile device a unique code; selecting, from a plurality of customized data sets stored on the mobile device a data set that corresponds to the unique code; and activating the selected data set on the mobile device. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213234 | System for selectively disabling cell phone text messaging function - A selective cell phone text messaging function disabling system prevents a cell phone user from text messaging while within a transmission zone. The user's cell phone text messaging functionality is turned off by a signal broadcasting system as the user enters a transmission zone. When the user exits the transmission zone, the cell phone resumes its texting capability, preserving text messaging functionality while the user is not within the transmission zone. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213235 | Method of Robust Transmit (Tx) Processing for Radio Frequency Coexistence Management in Dual-SIM-Dual-Active communication Devices - The various embodiments include a dual-SIM-dual-active (DSDA) device and methods for implementing robust transmit (Tx) processing to resolve radio frequency coexistence interference between two subscriptions operating on the DSDA device. The DSDA device may detect when one subscription (the “aggressor”) de-senses the other subscription (the “victim”) as a result of the aggressor's transmissions, and in response, implement robust Tx processing to mitigate the effects of de-sense on the victim. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213236 | CALL CONTROL SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION AND CALL RESTRICTION METHOD - A control system includes: a storage device configured to store a list of priority callees for a plurality of mobile stations; and a controller configured to execute a procedure, including determining, based on call restriction information for call-restricted areas in which a plurality of restricted mobile stations and priority callees included on the list for the restricted mobile stations are respectively located, an allowed calling time period in which calling is allowed to the priority callees on the list for the restricted mobile stations, the restricted mobile stations being a plurality of the mobile stations located in a call-restricted area, and transmitting information indicating the allowed calling time period to the restricted mobile stations. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213237 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING A CONFIGURATION FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE - Systems and methods related to reducing a cost of operation and/or manufacture of wireless devices under appropriate conditions are disclosed. In one embodiment, a wireless node in a cellular communication network determines a configuration for a wireless device. In one particular embodiment, the wireless device is a Machine-Type Communication (MTC) device. The configuration includes at least one of a retransmission configuration and an advanced receiver configuration. The wireless device is then configured according to the configuration. In this way, the operation of the wireless device can be more cost efficient, particularly in terms of radio resource and energy efficiency, based on the conditions in which the wireless device is operated. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213238 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR MOBILE APPLICATIONS USING VEHICLE TELEMATICS DATA - Operating state information is received at an on-board telematics control unit (TCU) from an on-board diagnostic (OBD) system of a vehicle. The TCU transmits an indication of vehicle state over at least a wireless data link component of a communications network for delivery to a mobile computing device. The mobile computing device receives the indication of vehicle state and utilizes the indication of vehicle state at a mobile application program. In one example, the mobile application program presents vehicle state information via a graphical display of the mobile computing device. In another example, the mobile application program augments a functionality of the mobile computing device responsive to the indication of vehicle state. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213239 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A SMALL CELL ON OR OFF PROCEDURE - The present application provides methods for controlling a small cell on or off procedure in a Small cell specific Gate Way (S-GW). One of the methods comprises steps of receiving a cell indication message from a Source Small Cell (SSC), the cell indication message includes a cell state change indication parameter indicating whether the SSC is to be on or off and a cell on/off timer parameter indicating a time duration for a cell on process or a cell off process; transmitting request message requesting to expand or shrink a cell coverage of a Target Small Cell (TSC) according to the cell state change indication parameter; and receiving a complete indication message indicating the cell on process or the cell off process is complete after the time duration indicated by the cell on/off timer parameter from the SSC. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213240 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MEMORY OF MOBILE TERMINAL - This disclosure relates to an apparatus and method for managing the memory of a mobile terminal. The mobile terminal includes a main system that operates with normal power, and a subsystem that operates with low power. The subsystem operates at least one feature of the mobile terminal while the main system is in a sleep mode. Binary data may be used to operate the at least one feature of the mobile terminal. When binary data is stored in memory operatively coupled to the main system, the binary data is retrieved and copied to memory operatively coupled to the subsystem, allowing the subsystem to operate the feature while the main system is in sleep mode. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213241 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication device capable of changing a communication parameter to be used according to a surrounding situation includes a learning database that stores, in association with each other, the surrounding situation of the wireless communication device and a communication performance in a case where communication is performed by using a given communication parameter, a plurality of sensors, surrounding situation determination unit configured to determine the surrounding situation of the wireless communication device from information obtained from the plurality of sensors, communication parameter candidate determination unit configured to refer to the learning database to determine candidates for the communication parameter that are appropriate in the determined surrounding situation, communication parameter determination unit configured to determine the communication parameter used in communication from among the candidates determined by the communication parameter candidate determination unit based on the requirement of the communication, and wireless communication unit configured to perform communication by using the communication parameter determined by the communication parameter determination unit. With this, it is possible to select an appropriate communication parameter according to the surrounding situation of the wireless communication device. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213242 | METHOD FOR REPRODUCING MUSIC FILE OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND MOBILE TERMINAL IMPLEMENTING THE SAME - A mobile communication terminal is provided including an audio processing unit, a speaker, a connecting unit that connects to an external audio output device and indicates whether the external audio output device is connected, and a control unit configured to, while in a silent mode, control the audio processing unit to reproduce a music file and to output audio signals, corresponding to the reproduced music file, through the speaker, the silent mode being a mode wherein a vibration signal is generated upon receiving an incoming call, if the external audio output device is connected to the connecting unit, output the audio signals to the external audio output device, and if the external audio output device is disconnected from the connecting unit while the audio signals are being output to the external audio output device, control the display unit to display a user interface for continuing reproduction of the music file. | 07-31-2014 |
20140220949 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR OPTIMAL SCHEDULING OF ENVELOPE UPDATES TO SIM CARD - Aspects of the present disclosure are directed to an apparatus and methods that may improve scheduling of envelope updates to a SIM. An apparatus for wireless communication is configured to receive a plurality of updates in one or more envelope commands, categorize the updates into a plurality of groups having respective priorities, and send the updates to a SIM at the apparatus in order according to the respective priorities. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220950 | INFORMATION SYSTEM - An information system is located in a mobile communication device which includes a receiver and a processor. The processor contains a disconnect program linked to a communication processing program in the processor. When the receiver receives a special command the disconnect program is activated and the communication processing program is notified to suspend communication operation, therefore can save communication fare, and also prevent conversation from being overheard by unrelated people to avoid causing unnecessary concerns. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220951 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a cellular telecommunications network that facilitates communication connections for terminals having identification modules that are not associated with a subscriber record or MSISDN number, the invention provides a method for temporarily associating unique connection numbers with those terminals, the method comprising at least: providing a pool of unique connection numbers; in response to a request for communication with a device incorporating a token identification module, assigning a selected one of the pooled numbers to the token identification module in a location register; and initiating a reconnection event, thereby providing the assigned number to the device by associating the device with a temporary unique connection number in the location register Embodiments described are directed to M2M client terminals with embedded token identification modules. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220952 | Multi-SIM Enabling Application and Use of EUICC in Legacy Terminals - A methods enabling use of multiple SIM applications in UICCs is described. One method includes determining whether a physical component of a device is a secure module which supports subscription provisioning. If the physical component is a secure module which supports subscription provisioning, the physical component is instructed to operate as a legacy UICC. The physical component is operated as a legacy UICC via a virtual UICC. Another method includes downloading a first subscription related data which provides information for operating in a wireless network. The first subscription related data is stored on a memory component of a device. The device includes a UICC storing a second subscription. The method also includes operating the device as a multiple profile device using the first subscription and the second subscription. Apparatus and computer readable media are also described. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220953 | ENERGY SAVING MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR BASE STATION, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - An energy saving (ES) management method for a base station includes: An integration reference point manager (IRPManager) initiates an ES enable/disable procedure or an ES activation/resumption procedure to an integration reference point agent (IRPAgent), where the ES enable/disable procedure is used to allow or prohibit an ES operation on the base station or a cell, and the ES activation/resumption procedure is used to cause the base station or the cell to go into or go out of an ES state. The technical solutions according to the embodiments of the present invention enable operators to perform unified management on an ES procedure for a base station at a base station level or a cell level. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220954 | METHOD FOR EXECUTING APPLICATION DURING CALL AND MOBILE TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method and a mobile terminal for executing application during a call and a mobile terminal supporting the same are provided. The method for executing an application in an electronic includes receiving a first sensing information from a sensing unit during a call, recognizing, when the first sensing information is received, a voice, identifying an application corresponding to the recognized voice, and executing the identified application. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220955 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING RADIO OPERATIONS ON A WIRELESS COMPUTING DEVICE - Embodiments of the invention provide for a wireless computing device that comprises a set of one or more radio components to transmit and receive wireless communications on the device. Additionally, the wireless computing device includes processing and memory resources that individually or in combination provide multiple wireless applications, a radio object, and an arbitration component. The multiple wireless applications are each capable of generating a user-interface for enabling user-input in connection with wireless activities performed with that wireless application. The radio object interfaces the multiple applications with the set of one or more radio components. The arbitration component is configured to arbitrate at least one of (i) requests made by each of the wireless applications to the radio object for access to one or more of the radio components in the set, or (ii) responses from the radio object to requests made by each of the wireless applications. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220956 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND TERMINAL OPERATION PROGRAM - An object of the present invention is to quickly and surely acquire icon information without passing through a plurality of hierarchies. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220957 | CELL SITE POWER GENERATION - A system, apparatus, method, and manufacture for generating backup power in a wireless communications system such as a wireless communications service base station. The system includes a communications interface, a primary power interface, a generator, rectifiers, and a battery circuit. During normal operation, the communications interface is powered from the primary power interface. During a power outage, the communications interface is powered from either the generator or the battery circuit. The generator is cycled on and off during power outages to charge the battery circuit while conserving fuel. To decrease rectification loss, rectifiers are run near full load while rectifying the generator output. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220958 | NETWORK SYSTEM, TERMINAL CUSTOMIZATION METHOD, AND CUSTOMIZATION SERVICE METHOD - A first terminal notifies an LFC service functional unit of LFC package related information for customization of a second terminal, an address of the second terminal to be customized, and an account of the user of the first terminal to a contents provider. As a result, the LFC service functional unit acquires an LFC package from the contents provider, then the LFC service functional unit customizes the second terminal based on the obtained LFC package. | 08-07-2014 |
20140220959 | ELECTRONIC TERMINALS AND CONTROL METHODS THEREOF - An electronic terminal includes at least one input and output unit. The electronic terminal further includes: a communication detection unit configured to detect whether a communication event exists, so as to obtain a first detection result; a condition sensing unit configured to detect whether a prohibition condition for prohibiting an input and output function of the at least one input and output unit is satisfied, so as to obtain a second detection result; a prohibition unit configured to prohibit a part of the input and output function of the at least one input and output unit which is unrelated to the communication event, when the first detection result indicates that the communication event exists and the second detection result indicates that the prohibition condition is satisfied. | 08-07-2014 |
20140235216 | USING BODYCOM TO MODIFY THE CONFIGURATION OF A DEVICE BASED UPON CONTEXT - Context of a device is controlled by a short-range wireless connectivity technology that uses the human body to transport wireless signals that may be easily distinguished between proximate locations, e.g., a vehicle driver location and a passenger location. The devices that communicate with this short-range wireless connectivity technology must be within a few centimeters of a user's body. Visual features of the device may be disabled when the user is located in a certain specific location, e.g., driver seat while driving the vehicle. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235217 | Systems and Methods For Facilitating The Acquisition of Content - The present invention provides systems and methods for acquiring content (e.g., a ring tone or a ring view) for a communication device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235218 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A SMALL CELL ON OR OFF PROCEDURE FOR COVERAGE EXTENSION - The present invention relates to methods and apparatuses for supporting or controlling a small cell on or off procedure. The method may comprise steps of receiving, by the MSC from a Source Small Cell (SSC), a Cell Off Indication message including a Cell State Change Indication parameter indicating a cell status of the SSC; transmitting, by the MSC to the SSC, an Expand Indication message indicating an expanding of the MSC when the Cell State Change Indication parameter indicates a cell off status, the Expanding Indication message including a Time to Start Expand parameter indicating when the MSC starts an expanding of its coverage and an Expand Timer parameter indicating a time period during which the expanding is performed; and starting the expanding of its coverage at a time indicated by the Time to Start Expand parameter during the time period indicated by the Expand Timer. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235219 | Control Software for Unlocking and Relocking Cellular Telephones - Cellular telephone handsets often include electronic or software coding that “locks” them to a specific wireless network. Provided herein, is a method for provisioning locked handsets by unlocking them from their established network and relocking them on a new cellular network. The handset is connected in communication with the control process, identified, and provisioned. The method allows for provisioning of multiple models and brands to be provisioned from different carriers and to different carriers. It further allows multiple handsets to be provisioned simultaneously. During the process, the handset may be sensitivity tested. Further, the identification portion of the method can be used in conjunction with phone support tools beyond the provisioning process. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235220 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING APPLICATION PROGRAM, AND MOBILE TERMINAL THEREFOR - The present disclosure, pertaining to the field of computer technologies, discloses a method and apparatus for processing an application program, and a mobile terminal therefor. The method includes: determining a current running state of an application program currently opened on a mobile terminal; performing a corresponding operation for the opened application program according to the determined running state. The apparatus includes: a determining module, configured to determine a current running state of an application program currently opened on a mobile terminal; an operation performing module, configured to perform a corresponding operation for the opened application program according to the determined running state. According to the present disclosure, current running states of application programs opened on a mobile terminal are determined, and corresponding operations are performed for the opened application programs according to the determined different running states. This, as compared with performing the same operation for all opened application programs, saves system processing resources, power, and network bandwidth resources. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235221 | PROCESSING METHOD OF USER EQUIPMENT, PROCESSING METHOD OF MOBILITYMANAGEMENT ENTITY, USER EQUIPMENT, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY, ANDCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a processing method of a user equipment, including: detecting, by a user equipment in an active status, that user equipment capability of the user equipment has changed; and sending, by the user equipment, the changed user equipment capability of the user equipment to a base station. An embodiment of the present invention further provides a processing method of a mobility management entity, a user equipment, a mobility management entity, and a communications system. When the user equipment capability of the user equipment has changed, the user equipment can report the changed user equipment capability to the network side, so that the network side can timely save or stop saving power for the user equipment, thereby achieving a trade-off between power saving of the user equipment and the service quality. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235222 | SYSTEMS AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE PERSONAS ON MOBILE TECHNOLOGY PLATFORMS - A mobile technology platform equipped with a display and a processor is provided. The platform comprises an operating system executed by the processor; and a software program configured to run on the operating system and further configured to establish a plurality of personas for a user of the mobile technology platform, wherein each of the plurality of personas has a unique set of user preferences associated with a persona, wherein each of the unique set of user preferences corresponds to a unique execution environment, and wherein the software program is further configured to allow toggling between the plurality of personas. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235223 | CONCIERGE - Providing a contextual reminder to a mobile station includes determining a locus of the mobile station based on the position of the mobile station in both time and space. A first entry is read, where the first entry can be at least a task or an event. Both tasks and events can include a time, a date, and/or a location. The locus and the first entry can be compared to determine if the contextual reminder should be provided to the mobile station. The contextual reminder can be provided to the mobile station based on the comparison. The reminder can be provided when at least one of the time, the date and the geographical position of the mobile station is proximate to at least one of the time, date, and location of the entry. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235224 | EVENT HANDLING SYSTEM - A service that determines what event has occurred and provide a list of actions that the service can be performed in order to help the user through a hectic time period is disclosed. In one example, one or more modules can identify one or more events and transmitting an indication of the at least one event to a mobile device. Then, one or more modules can receive an indication that a mobile device has selected at least one of the at least one event, and determine at least one action to perform, wherein the at least one action can be associated with the at least one selected event. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235225 | CONTROLLING ACCESS TO A MOBILE DEVICE - Various arrangements for customizing a configuration of a mobile device are presented. The mobile device may collect proximity data. The mobile device may determine that a user has gripped the mobile device based on the proximity data. A finger length of the user may be determined using the proximity data. Configuration of the mobile device may be customized at least partially based on the determined finger length of the user. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235226 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATIONS WITH A MOBILE-ORIGINATED-ONLY MODE - A method and apparatus for supporting machine-type communications (MTC) are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may configure itself to operate in a mobile-originated-only mode. The WTRU may perform no, or a subset of, radio resource control (RRC) idle and/or non-access stratum (NAS) idle/standby state procedures in the mobile-originated-only mode. For example, the WTRU may perform cell reselection but not paging monitoring in the mobile-originated-only mode. Alternatively, the WTRU may perform paging monitoring but not cell reselection and location update. The operation in the mobile-originated-only mode may be triggered explicitly or implicitly. For example, the WTRU may operate in the mobile-originated-only mode if an inactivity timer expires. The WTRU may switch the mode in accordance with a pre-configured schedule. After transition of the operation mode, the WTRU may send a message to the network indicating such mode switch. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235227 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - There is provided a relay server | 08-21-2014 |
20140235228 | MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, AND CONTROL METHOD FOR MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE - A mobile telephone includes a communication module, and a control module configured to perform background communication with respect to an application via the communication module. The control module restricts background communication, based on an activation history of the application in foreground. The control module includes a determination module configured to determine whether background communication is unnecessary based on the activation history of the application in foreground with respect to each of the applications, and a setting switching module configured to switch communication setting of the application, of which background communication is determined to be unnecessary, from a first setting of permitting the background communication to a second setting of restricting the background communication. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235229 | Connection Release Timers and Settings - In accordance with the exemplary embodiments of the invention there is at least a method and an apparatus to generate a message including mobile device-specific information related to operation of a state transition timer for the mobile device, and send receiving a message from a wireless communication the generated message towards an access point associated with a wireless communication network. Further, in accordance with the exemplary embodiments of the invention there is at least a method an apparatus to receive a message from a wireless communication network, the message including mobile device-specific information related to operation of a state transition timer for the mobile device; based on the mobile device-specific information, setting optimal connection parameters for the mobile device; and sending an indication of the optimal connection parameters towards the mobile device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140242960 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SMALL CELL CONFIGURATION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - A method at a UE operating in a hybrid network, the method receiving a separate discontinuous reception configuration at the UE for the macro cell than for a small cell; and configuring a receiver on the UE according to the separate discontinuous reception configurations. Further, a method at a macro cell, the method determining a mobility state of a UE; finding a service at the UE; and limiting the UE to associate only with the macro cell based on at least one of the determining and the finding. Further, a method at a UE in an environment with a macro and small cell using the same frequency, including receiving a first allocation for small cell within a common small HARQ subframe set; and receiving a second allocation for a macro cell within a common macro HARQ subframe set, wherein the sets do not overlap. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242961 | WIRELESS LOCATION OPTIMIZATION - Systems and methods are provided for configuring settings of a mobile device based on an inferred location. The mobile device can use stored indicia of trip (e.g., an electronic ticket or itinerary) to identify origination and destination locations. The start and end of the trip can be inferred based on changes in operation of the mobile device. For instance, if the user is on an airplane, the user may turn off network connectivity at the origination location just prior to takeoff, and may turn the network connectivity back on upon landing at the destination location. If the time that elapsed between the changes in operation is consistent with the duration of the trip indicated by the stored indicia, the mobile device can infer that the current location is the destination location. The mobile device can then configure location-specific settings in accordance with the destination location to establish a network connection. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242962 | COMMUNICATING DATA IN A PREDEFINED TRANSMISSION MODE - Traffic data is communicated between a wireless device and a core network control node in a predefined transmission mode in which traffic data is communicated in a control channel for carrying control messages. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242963 | NETWORK-ASSISTED MULTI-CELL DEVICE DISCOVERY PROTOCOL FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS - A method includes determining, at a first eNodeB (eNB) associated with a first cell of a network, that a first user equipment (UE) is to engage in a device discovery process. The method also includes coordinating parameters of the device discovery process with a second eNB. The second eNB is associated with a second cell of the network and with a second UE. The parameters define one or more resources to be used in the first and second cells during the device discovery process. The method further includes communicating at least some of the parameters to the first UE. The device discovery process includes a process in which the first UE identifies one or more other UEs with which the first UE is able to engage in device-to-device communications. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242964 | APPLICATION CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE TERMINAL, EARPHONE DEVICE AND APPLICATION CONTROL SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to controlling an application in a mobile terminal. The present disclosure includes an application control method and apparatus for a mobile terminal, earphone device, and application control system. The method for application control in a mobile terminal may include detecting connection of earphones having a sensor for sensing earphone wearing, sending, upon detection of earphone connection, an interrogation signal to the sensor of the earphones, receiving a response signal, corresponding to the interrogation signal, from the earphones, determining whether the earphones are worn by a user on the basis of the response signal, and controlling, when the earphones are not worn, an application being executed to stop output of an audio signal to the earphones. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242965 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REGISTERING POSITION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for registering a position, which periodically update a position of a user in a mobile communication system are provided. The method includes determining whether to stop reporting position information based on a current operation state for a mobile communication service and controls whether to maintain or stop reporting the position information based on a result corresponding to the determination. Accordingly, it is possible to increase an energy efficiency by preventing an unnecessary position registering step from being performed by a User Equipment (UE) in an Out of Service (OS) area. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242966 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING MODE CHANGES TO WIRELESS DEVICES - A method of providing mode changes to wireless devices is provided. The method may include receiving a request from a wireless device to connect with a network device and sending a signal to the wireless device to enter a location defined mode. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242967 | PORTABLE DEVICE HAVING THE TOUCH LOCK STATUS AND OPERATION SYSTEM THEREOF - A mobile device with a touch panel and a touch-lock operating method thereof are provided. The mobile device preferably includes an RF communication unit for supporting communication services; a touch panel for sensing input touches; a display unit for displaying a screen, where the screen includes at least one of a preset image, text, and map; and a controller for setting a touch-lock in the touch panel according to a preset condition. The controller also controls the display unit to display at least one of a text and image or at least one particular icon corresponding to the information reception event that occurs, based on the RF communication unit, in the touch-lock state. A portion of the display screen can be locked, or only certain predetermined touch functions permitted. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242968 | Automatic Setting of an Alert Mode on a Wireless Device - Embodiments are provided for automatically setting an alert mode on a wireless device. Scheduling data is received which defines a predetermined period utilized to set the alert mode. The scheduling data may be received either by direct input in the wireless device or alternatively from an external edge device, such as a network server, in a communications network. In response to receiving the scheduling data, an alert mode on the wireless device is automatically set for the predetermined period. The alert mode may include a silent alert mode on the wireless device. The wireless device may include a sensor for receiving data indicative of a current external state. The sensor data may include location data, temperature data, and ambient noise data. The received sensor data may be utilized to automatically trigger the setting of an alert mode in the wireless device. | 08-28-2014 |
20140248862 | METHODS TO ENABLE EFFICIENT USE OF MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A device and method are provided for concurrently using a plurality of radio access technologies (RATs) to support a wireless-enabled communications session. A set of data is processed at a client node to identify a subset of priority data. The set of data and the subset of priority data are respectively provided to a first and second protocol stack, which correspond to a first and second RAT. The first and second protocol stacks are then used to control the transmission of a first and second set of transmitted data, which in turn respectively comprise the set of data and the subset of priority data. The first and second sets of transmitted data are received by an access node, which uses corresponding first and second protocol stacks to control their reception. The first and second sets of transmitted data are then processed to generate a set of received data. | 09-04-2014 |
20140248863 | METHOD OF DETERMINING USER INTENT TO USE SERVICES BASED ON PROXIMITY - A method for accessing functionality of a mobile electronic device through a vehicle system onboard a motor vehicle. The method includes making functionality of the mobile electronic device accessible through the vehicle system based on where a sensor that the mobile electronic device is paired with is physically located about the vehicle. | 09-04-2014 |
20140248864 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SAFETY SERVICES RELATING TO MOBILE DEVICES - An approach for providing feature configuration management is described. A service controller platform, monitors at least one environmental parameter of a mobile device; determines an event according to a threshold, the event being based on at least a change in the at least one environmental parameter; determines a feature configuration setting associated with at least one of the threshold or the event according to a device profile, wherein the device profile specifies a feature configuration setting that includes at least one of locking the mobile device, limiting access to at least one predetermined application, or disabling the mobile device; and causes the mobile device to change a feature configuration according to the feature configuration setting. | 09-04-2014 |
20140248865 | MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT - Aspects of the present disclosure correspond to the utilization of criteria for distinguishing between temporary changes to mobile communication device movement state in determining whether a mobile communication device context has changed. A mobile communication device can be configured to manage one or more aspects of functionality of the mobile communication device based on a mobile communication device context. At some point, the mobile communication device can determine a transition to a substantially stationary state. Rather than immediately transitioning the mobile communication device context, the mobile communication device can define a period of time in which additional changes to the mobile communication device movement state can be detected. Accordingly, if the mobile communication device movement state transitions again to a non-stationary movement state within the guard period, the mobile communication device context remains in the non-stationary movement state and never transitions. | 09-04-2014 |
20140248866 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - There is provided a wireless communication device including a control-message creation/transmission-instruction unit which sends notification information via a wireless communication network and also sends response information in the case of receiving notification information sent from another device, a reception/interpretation processing unit which receives, from another device which has received the notification information of the wireless communication device, response information of such other device and also receives the notification information sent from such other device, and an operation mode determination unit which determines, based on operation mode determination information included in the notification information of such other device or the response information of such other device, that the wireless communication device is caused to operate as one of a master device and a slave device. | 09-04-2014 |
20140256302 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR USING A COMMUNICATION SERVICE - A communication terminal is described including a transceiver, a plurality of subscriber identity modules, wherein the transceiver is configured to receive a signal for each of the subscriber identity modules, a determiner configured to determine, for each subscriber identity module, a rating of the received signal and a controller configured to select a subscriber identity module from the plurality of subscriber identity modules for a communication service based on the ratings and configured to control the transceiver to use the communication service by means of the selected subscriber identity module. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256303 | PREVENTING DRIVER DISTRACTION - In some embodiments, a processor-implemented method for disabling at least one text application on a mobile device may comprise: processing an image captured in a vehicle by a mobile device to identify a seat belt in the image; determining a slope of the seat belt relative to a horizon, wherein the horizon is determined using information pertaining to a position and an orientation of the mobile device relative to a frame of reference at a time when the image was captured; determining a speed of the mobile device; and disabling at least one text application on a mobile device based, on the slope of the seat belt and the speed of the mobile device. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256304 | INTERFACE DEVICE FOR PROVIDING VEHICLE SERVICES USING A VEHICLE AND A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A method and system for providing vehicle services using a vehicle and a mobile communications device includes receiving at a vehicle a wireless communication sent from an interface device physically attached to the mobile communications device; linking the interface device with one or more vehicle modules; and communicating between one or more vehicle modules and the mobile communications device via the interface device. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256305 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MODE SCHEDULING IN MOBILE DEVICES - Embodiments described herein provide a method and system for controlling an operation of a mobile device. The method can include selecting one or more modes of the mobile device, based on one or more predefined mode restrictions, respectively. The method can further include defining one or more selectable functions performable by the mobile device while in a respective mode, such that the mobile device is automatically configured to perform the one or more functions when the mode is activated, based on the one or more predefined mode restrictions. Methods and systems described herein allow a user to easily activate and deactivate various combinations of communication functions for various predefined modes, for a predetermined time period or at a predetermined location, for example. Moreover, a supervisor or parent can actively monitor and control the modes of subordinate or subject mobile devices remotely, as necessary. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256306 | Operating Geographic Location Systems - Among other things, we describe a method that includes receiving, on a mobile device, an indication that an application executing on the mobile device has entered a background state, receiving, from the application, a value indicating a condition for providing location data to the application, disabling a resource associated with the application, while the resource associated with the application is disabled, storing location data received from a location system of the mobile device, and when the condition indicated by the value is met, enabling the resource associated with the application, and providing the stored location data to the application. | 09-11-2014 |
20140274009 | LOCATION-AWARE NETWORK SELECTION - Systems, apparatus and methods in a mobile device for saving power by powering down all transceivers not carry traffic are presented. The traffic may be voice and/or data traffic. A mobile device may select single transceiver to carry voice traffic and the same or different transceiver to carry data traffic. A mobile device first determines its position (e.g., a coarse position estimate) then consults a database or map to determine which networks are theoretically available. The mobile device executes a rule against the theoretically available networks to select the single network, then enables the transceiver for the one network to determine if the network is actually available for use. If the database inaccurately states a network is available from a current position but the transceiver shows that the network is actually not actually available, a next network from the database or map and corresponding transceiver are selected. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274010 | ALERT PERIPHERAL FOR NOTIFICATION OF EVENTS OCCURING ON A PROGRAMMABLE USER EQUIPMENT WITH COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES - An alert peripheral device that provides sensory notification to a user of the device includes: a power subsystem; a communication mechanism by which notification signals is received from a first user equipment (UE) that generates and transmits the notification signals in response to detection of specific events at the first UE; and a response notification mechanism that provides a sensory response of the peripheral device following receipt of a notification of a detected event (NDE) signal. The device further includes an embedded controller coupled to each of the other components and which includes firmware that when executed on the embedded controller configures the embedded controller to: establish a communication link between the communication mechanism and the first UE; and in response to detecting a receipt of the NDE signal from the first UE, trigger the response notification mechanism to exhibit the sensory response. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274011 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING OPERATION OF A USER EQUIPMENT BASED ON PHYSICAL LAYER PARAMETERS - Techniques for controlling internal operation of a user equipment (UE) based on physical layer (PHY) parameters of a wireless network are disclosed. The PHY parameters may include a system bandwidth, an uplink-downlink configuration, a number of antennas, a number of carriers, etc. In one design, the UE may receive system information from the wireless network. The UE may obtain at least one PHY parameter of the wireless network, at a physical layer on the UE, based on the system information and/or other signaling. The UE may provide the at least one physical layer parameter to at least one entity (e.g., a memory and flow controller, a clock controller, a thermal mitigator, an application processor, etc.) within the UE for use to control internal operation of the UE. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274012 | SYSTEM INCLUDING VEHICLE SPEED ALERT BASED COMMUNICATION WITH A VEHICLE AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM AND RELATED METHODS - A system for a vehicle having a data communications bus extending throughout the vehicle, and an audio entertainment system coupled to the data communications bus may include a vehicle wireless transceiver and a vehicle controller to be coupled to the data communications bus. The vehicle controller may be configured to determine and send a vehicle speed alert via the vehicle wireless transceiver, and selectively set the audio entertainment system to link with the vehicle wireless transceiver in a hands-free mode. The system may also include a mobile device to be carried by a user remote from the vehicle that may include a remote wireless transceiver configured to link wirelessly with the vehicle wireless transceiver. The mobile device may also include a remote controller cooperating to command, based upon receiving the vehicle speed alert, the vehicle controller to set the audio entertainment system into the hands-free mode. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274013 | PASSIVE ENTRY CELL PHONE AND METHOD AND SYSTEM THEREFOR - A system for a vehicle including: a bluetooth receiver configured to be installed in a vehicle and connected with an electronic system of the vehicle; and a phone including a long-range radio frequency (RF) transceiver configured to transmit signals to and receive signals from a cellular network and a bluetooth transmitter configured to communicate with the bluetooth receiver in the vehicle within a predetermined range. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274014 | ENHANCED DEVICE CONFIGURATION - Systems, devices and methods described herein provide or possess functionality that enables providing enhanced device configuration. In one implementation, one or more communication stations are provided. A wireless communication device in close proximity may be configured to communicate with the one or more communication stations. Once a communication session is established between the wireless communication device and the one or more communication stations, configuration particulars, such as configuration data, may be provided to the wireless communication device via the one or more communication stations. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274015 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR A CELLULAR ENABLED CONTENT PLAYBACK DEVICE - Systems and methods are provided for a cellular enabled content playback device. A storage device is configured to store content for display on a display device. A cellular modem in communication with the storage device is configured to receive the content from a remote device over a cellular network. An embedded media player in communication with the storage device is configured to display at least a portion of the stored content on the display device. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274016 | WIRELESSLY PROVISIONING A VEHICLE TELEMATICS UNIT - A system and method for wirelessly configuring vehicle electronics prior to delivery of the vehicle to a customer. The method carried out by the system includes (a) receiving a notification at a central facility indicating that a vehicle has been delivered to a dealership; (b) receiving a data message from a vehicle telematics unit installed on the vehicle while the vehicle is in a logistics mode (LM); and (c) terminating the logistics mode and/or initiating provisioning of the vehicle telematics unit using the established data connection. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274017 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HANDLING INCOMING COMMUNICATIONS DIRECTED TO A TELEPHONY DEVICE - Systems and methods for terminating telephony communications to a mobile telephony device via a data network make use of a forwarding termination service. The forwarding termination service causes a native mobile telephony service provider that provides service to the mobile telephony device to forward incoming telephony communications directed the native telephone number of the mobile telephony device to a forwarding access number. The forwarding termination service receives telephony communications directed to the forwarding access number, and then terminates the telephony communications to the mobile telephony device via any one of multiple different methods. The mobile telephony service provider can be instructed to implement and cancel call forwarding instructions by a forwarding agent that is separate from the forwarding termination service. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274018 | SAFETY ENHANCING CELLPHONE FUNCTIONALITY LIMITATION SYSTEM - Apparatus for the management of mobile telephone device functionality while the mobile telephone device is located within a vehicle, comprising a plurality of wireless sensors is disclosed. Each of the sensors receives position indicating signals emitted by the mobile telephone device, and the signals indicating the position of each sensor relative to the mobile telephone device, the wireless sensors being positioned at different positions in the car. A transmitter transmits a signal to the mobile telephone device, causing the mobile telephone device to transmit the position indicating signals to the sensors. A software algorithm resident on a storage device associated with the computational logic unit controls the functionality of the mobile telephone device in response to the position of the mobile telephone device within the vehicle and the speed of the vehicle. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274019 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING NETWORK RE-SYNCHRONIZATION IN STATIONARY M2M DEVICES - Techniques for determining if it is safe for a mobile device to transition directly from a traffic session to a paging mode and for avoiding network re-synchronization procedures in stationary M2M devices are disclosed. It may be safe for direct transition if before-call and in-call network parameters correspond. If safe, the mobile device may transition from the traffic session directly to the paging mode to begin immediately monitoring the paging channel. In stationary M2M devices, paging information is stored before the traffic session and, once the traffic session is complete, the M2M device may be configured to receive paging messaging based on the stored paging information. The M2M device may also store system access information and confirm the validity of the information before returning to the sleep state. The stationary M2M device avoids network re-synchronization procedures. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274020 | SAFETY ENHANCING CELLPHONE FUNCTIONALITY LIMITATION SYSTEM - Apparatus for the management of mobile telephone device functionality while the mobile telephone device is located within a vehicle, comprising a plurality of wireless sensors is disclosed. Each of the sensors receives position indication signals emitted by the mobile telephone device, and the Mets signals indicating the position of each sensor relative to the mobile telephone device, the wireless sensors being positioned at different positions in the period a transmitter transmits a signal to the mobile telephone device, causing the mobile telephone device to transmit the position indicating signals to the sensors. A processor is coupled to receive the signals indicating the position of each sensor relative to the signals indicating the position of each sensor relative to the mobile telephone device. The processor comprises a computational logic unit and a data storage device for storing software for computing the position of the mobile telephone device. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274021 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING USE OF EXTERNAL DATA NETWORK VIA MOBILE ACCESS POINT - A method and a device for controlling external data network use via a mobile Access Point (AP) are provided. A host device set as the mobile AP determines whether a data-less mode is set, blocks a client device from using the external data network via the mobile AP, if the data-less mode is set, and permits the client device to use the external data network via the mobile AP, if the data-less mode is released. A client device connected to a mobile AP determines whether a data-less mode is set for a host device set as the mobile AP, if the client device is connected to the host device in a state of being connected to a wireless data network, maintains the connection to the wireless data network, if the data-less mode is set, and releases the connection to the wireless data network, if the data-less mode is released. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274022 | APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR ANALYZING MOVEMENTS OF TARGET ENTITIES - The present disclosure relates to apparatus, systems, and methods for providing a location information analytics mechanism. The location information analytics mechanism is configured to analyze location information to extract contextual information (e.g., profile) about a mobile device or a user of a mobile device, collectively referred to as a target entity. The location information analytics mechanism can include analyzing location data points associated with a target entity to determine features associated with the target entity, and using the features to predict attributes associated with the target entity. The set of predicted attributes can form a profile of the target entity. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274023 | App for Preventing Phone functionality while Driving - An app designed to prevent using distracting phone functionality, including texting, on a mobile phone while driving a vehicle is disclosed. The app first detects a speed at which the phone is travelling. If the speed is above a threshold, typically 5 mph the user is given a challenge that require either that both hands, or both eyes, are required on the phone. If the challenge is not met, the user is assumed to be the driver and the distracting phone functionality, including texting, is disabled. If the challenge is met, the user is assumed to be a passenger and the distracting phone functionality, including texting remains enabled. | 09-18-2014 |
20140287733 | METHOD, DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MANAGING RADIO STATES IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE USING DEVICE MOBILITY INFORMATION - This disclosure is directed to a method, computer program product and mobile communication device configured for managing radio states in a mobile communication device using device mobility information. A mobility state is determined from the number of cell changes over a predefined period of time. If the mobility state transitions to medium or high, such as when the user is in a vehicle, a Bluetooth radio is enabled. If a connection to a Bluetooth-enabled device is available, a connection is established. When the connection is disconnected, a configurable timer is started. If the timer expires without re-establishing the connection or the mobility state transitioning to medium or high, the Bluetooth radio is disabled to reduce power consumption. According to an embodiment, a Wi-Fi radio may then enabled to establish a Wi-Fi connection. Various configurations of computer program products and mobile communication devices are also described. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287734 | METHODS OF SWITCHING OFF POWER OF BASE STATIONS WITHIN CELLULAR NETWORKS BY USING MESSAGE PASSING, AND BASE STATIONS AND CELLULAR NETWORK SYSTEMS USING THE METHODS - A method of determining whether to switch off a base station's own power in the base station within a cellular network may comprise: receiving terminal messages having real number values from terminals within cell coverage of the base station; calculating real number values of base-station messages individually regarding the terminals based on the received terminal messages; transmitting the base-station messages having the calculated real number values individually to the terminals; repeatedly performing the receiving, the calculating, and the transmitting until the calculated real number values of the base-station messages are converged to constant values; when the real number values of the base-station messages are converged, calculating a base-station message convergence value, which is one real number value regarding the terminals, based on the converged real number values of the terminal messages; and/or determining whether to switch off the base station's own power based on the base-station message convergence value. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287735 | PORTABLE TERMINAL, METHOD FOR MANAGING DATA IN PORTABLE TERMINAL, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING DATA MANAGEMENT PROCESSING PROGRAM - A portable terminal includes: an activity delimiter condition storage unit in which a category of activity state data and an activity delimiter condition of the activity state data are stored, for each of categories of applications; a detection unit that detects the activity state data, for each of the categories of applications; an accumulation unit that accumulates the detected activity state data; a judgment unit that judges whether or not each piece of the activity state data accumulated by the accumulation unit matches the corresponding activity delimiter condition, on the basis of a detection result of the detection unit; and an activity accomplishment registration unit that registers, when the judgment unit judges that any one piece of the activity state data accumulated by the accumulation unit matches the corresponding activity delimiter condition, the one piece of activity state data accumulated by the accumulation unit as an activity accomplishment data. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287736 | LIMITING FUNCTIONALITY OF A PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE BASED ON THE LOCATION OR SPEED THEREOF - Implementations of the present disclosure allow an administrator of a portable electronic device (e.g., a parent, employer) through a web application to register a portable electronic device and then set a minimum speed at which the portable device 100 becomes limited (for example, limiting calling and/or texting). In some implementations, the administrator also can set locations or geographical areas where and dates and times when the portable electronic device will be limited (“TextLimit Zones”). In some implementations, the administrator can set a maximum speed at which the administrator (or another designated recipient) will receive an alert message 105 when the portable electronic device exceeds that speed. In some implementations, the administrator can specify one or more telephone numbers (“Go Through Numbers”) that the portable electronic device can still communicate with when the portable electronic device is limited due to the setting established by the administrator. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287737 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CHANGING MOBILE TELEPHONE OPERATION MODE BASED ON VEHICLE OPERATION STATUS - In a first aspect, a method is provided that includes (1) detecting a presence of mobile telephone proximate a vehicle; (2) establishing communication between the mobile telephone and the vehicle; (3) determining an operating status of the vehicle; and (4) changing the mobile telephone to or from a restricted mode of operation based upon the determined operating status of the vehicle. Numerous other aspects are provided. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287738 | In-Vehicle Device Location Determination and Enforcement of Usage Thereof - Systems and methods are disclosed for computing various determinations at one or more mobile devices and/or central machines. In part, such determinations are computed based on analysis of one or more inputs originating at one or more sensors of one or more devices. Such determinations include determining an in-vehicle role, an in-vehicle location, a handheld state, and a vehicle class. Various transformations, modifications, and outputs can result from such determinations. Also disclosed are systems and methods for restricting operation of a mobile device, including restrictions that impede operation by a driver moreso than operation by a passenger. Also disclosed are systems and methods for orienting a coordinate system of a mobile device. | 09-25-2014 |
20140295813 | SELECTION OF A BASESTATION PHYSICAL LAYER IDENTIFIER - In one example embodiment, a method for selecting a physical layer identifier for use in a basestation is disclosed. The basestation may be comprised within a mobile communications network, which may also comprise a plurality of other basestations. The method comprises receiving a pool of identifiers available for use by basestations within the network and assigning a temporary identifier for the basestation. The method further comprises receiving from connected UEs reports of identifiers from among the received pool that are in use by basestations detected by the connected UEs and assigning a final identifier selected from the received pool of identifiers, the final identifier being different from the temporary identifier. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295814 | METHOD AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR IDENTIFYING ACCESSORY - An electronic device and method of controlling the electronic device are disclosed. The method includes identifying, by an electronic device, an identification (ID) of an accessory that is coupled to the electronic device. The method also includes receiving, by the electronic device, at least one software program, based on the identified ID of the accessory. Additionally, the method includes installing, by the electronic device, the received software program. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295815 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING PROXIMITY-BASED SERVICE MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for routing a message for a Proximity-based Service (ProSe) by a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes sending, to a server, an authorization request message requesting authorization for ProSe usage by an application installed in the UE, the authorization request message including an application ID (ID) for identifying the application and a UE ID for identifying the UE; and receiving an authorization response message including a validity time for a ProSe of the application from the server in response to the authorization request message. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295816 | Dynamic Geographic Beacons for Geographic-Positioning-Capable Devices - In one embodiment, a mobile device may receive information on entities socially connected to a user of the mobile device. The information may comprise a location for each of the entities, an affinity score with respect to the user for each of the entities, and a relevancy score for any advertisement corresponding to each of the entities. The user may be socially associated with the entities through an on-line social network. For each of the entities, the affinity score may be adjusted based on the relevancy score. The mobile device may periodically determine a current location of the mobile device, a radius from the location of each entity (based on the adjusted affinity score for the entity), and whether the current location is within an area defined by the radius. If the current location is within the one of the radii, then the mobile device may be woken. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295817 | CONTROLLING USE OF A COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MOTION OF THE DEVICE - A wireless communications device is controlled in accordance with motion thereof. If the device is determined to be in motion, such as in a vehicle, use of the device is restricted. Discrimination between vehicular motion and ambulatory motion is provided. While in motion, use of the device can be allowed under specific exception conditions. Exception conditions include the device being used by a passenger of a vehicle, a 911 call, or a call to a designated number. The ability to control the device in accordance with motion thereof can be remotely activated and deactivated, thus allowing, for example, parental control of a device belong to a child. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295818 | Method, Base Station, and Network System for Automatic X2 Configuration Deletion - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, a base station, and a network system for automatic X2 configuration deletion, where implementation of the method includes: acquiring, by a first base station, neighboring-cell configuration data of a second base station; determining, by the first base station according to neighboring-cell configuration data of the first base station and the neighboring-cell configuration data of the second base station, whether a neighboring-cell relationship exists between the first base station and the second base station; and if no neighboring-cell relationship exists between the first base station and the second base station, deleting X2 configuration data corresponding to an X2 interface between the first base station and the second base station. The foregoing solution implements automatic deletion of redundant X2 configuration data and does not require that the first base station and the second base station be managed by a same network management system. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295819 | AUTOMATIC MOBILE COMMUNICATOR DEPOT SYSTEM AND METHODOLOGY - A mobile telephone device distribution system including a customer interface allowing a customer to select a mobile telephone device and a telephone number to be associated with the mobile telephone device and a computerized mobile telephone dispenser operative to dispense a preselected mobile telephone having a customer preselected telephone number to the customer who earlier selected the mobile telephone device and the telephone number and automatically activate the mobile telephone device. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295820 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFECTIVELY REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION OF TERMINAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a method and apparatus for effectively reducing power consumption of a terminal in a mobile communication system. A method of controlling a discontinuous reception operation of a signal for a terminal in a wireless communication system includes the steps of: measuring velocity-related information of the terminal; transmitting the measured velocity-related information to a base station; receiving from the base station, in response to the transmission of the velocity-related information, discontinuous reception operation set information for a variable discontinuous reception operation; and performing the discontinuous reception operation according to the received discontinuous reception operation set information. | 10-02-2014 |
20140302834 | MOBILE DEVICE TRACKING MONITORING SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR ENFORCING ORGANIZATIONAL POLICIES AND NO DISTRACTED DRIVING PROTOCOLS - A solution to mitigate organizational risks and exposure from damages and harm related to distracted driving. The invention includes a system, method, and devices that enable the organization to manage, monitor, and enforce corporate Mobile Device policies, in particular policies to deter and prevent distracted driving and encourage safe alternatives. A system for preventing distracted driving, including an Organizational Policy for anti-distracted driving including a rule and a Mobile Device configured to restrict, disable, or enable a feature of the Mobile Device based upon the rule. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302835 | System and method for adapting an electronic device for different desired persona - A system and method are described for automatically or manually adapting the user interface of a mobile electronic device (“MED”) for a desired persona of the system user. This will permit the system user to provide a desired personal image to the outside world. The ability of a system user to adapt the MED for a system user's persona will include the changing the user interface consistent with the persona the system user desires to represent internally and externally. This will also permit the system user to change the external connections of his/her MED consistent with that persona, which will remain the active persona until the system user decides to change the persona. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302836 | APPARATUS ENABLING AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTING FUNCTIONS OF CPMPONENTS THEREOF - An apparatus for automatic switching functions of components thereof, includes a housing having an upper end and a lower end, a first microphone fixed on the upper end of the housing, a second microphone fixed on the lower end of the housing, an orientation detecting unit having an acceleration sensor for detecting the current orientation of the apparatus for generating an orientation signal, a switching control unit for switching the functions of the microphones when the orientation signal indicates the apparatus is reversed. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302837 | Mobile Application Performance Prediction - The present invention provides methods of and systems for predicting performance of a mobile application. A first mobile application is installed on a first plurality of wireless mobile devices. Operational data resulting from operating the first mobile application on the first plurality of mobile devices is collected. A second mobile application is installed on a second plurality of mobile devices. Test data resulting from operating the second the mobile application on the second plurality of mobile devices is collected. The performance of the second mobile application is predicted using the operational data and the test data for combinations of mobile device configuration and wireless network connection type not represented by the second plurality of mobile devices. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302838 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PHONEBOOK SYNCHRONIZATION - A device and method for controlling synchronization in a device including receiving, from an access requesting program, a request for accessing a phonebook object stored in a terminal; determining whether the phonebook object is permitted to interoperate with the access requesting program; and providing information of the phonebook object if the phonebook object is determined to be permitted to interoperate with the access requesting program. | 10-09-2014 |
20140302839 | Power Saving Method, Apparatus and Communication Terminal - A power saving method, apparatus and communication terminal are provided to reduce power consumption of a communication terminal and prolong standby time by reducing the number of wakeup times of the communication terminal in a standby state. The method includes: acquiring use time of each function of a communication terminal in one sampling cycle; executing a statistical algorithm on the use time of each function of the communication terminal to separately obtain a duration of frequent use of each function of the communication terminal in the sampling cycle; and correspondingly activating each function of the communication terminal in the duration of frequent use of each function. Embodiments of the present invention are used for power saving of the communication terminal and relate to the field of wireless communication. | 10-09-2014 |
20140308940 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING OPERATION MODE OF MOBILE PHONE - A method and apparatus for setting an operation mode of a mobile terminal are provided. The apparatus includes an atmospheric pressure measuring unit measuring an atmospheric pressure at a current location of the mobile terminal; and a controller determining whether the measured atmospheric pressure is a cabin atmospheric pressure, and setting the operation mode of the mobile terminal according to the determination. | 10-16-2014 |
20140308941 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY CONTROLLING ACCESS TO FEMTO CELL ACCESS POINT - An apparatus and method are disclosed for dynamically controlling access to a Femto Cell Access Point (FAP). The apparatus includes a policy configuration unit, a mode setting unit, a use information acquisition unit, and an available information extraction unit. The policy configuration unit configures a policy for switching between a first mode in which a Mobile Station (MS) of a non-subscriber of the FAP is prevented from being connected to the FAP and a second mode in which the MS of the non-subscriber of the FAP is permitted to be connected to the FAP. The mode setting unit sets an access mode of the FAP to the first or second mode according to the policy. The use information acquisition unit obtains use information. The available information extraction unit extracts available information. | 10-16-2014 |
20140308942 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR SELECTING SERVICES OF MOBILE NETWORK OPERATORS - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for detecting, by a first device including a least one processor and a first Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC), a second device having a second UICC, detecting, by the first device, that the second UICC is unprovisioned, selecting, by the first device, one of a plurality of selectable options, where the selection identifies a first network operator selected from a plurality of network operators, receiving, by the first device, first credential information of the first network operator, and transmitting, by the first device, to the second device the first credential information for enabling the second device to facilitate establishment of communication services with network equipment of the first network operator according to the first credential information. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 10-16-2014 |
20140308943 | MODEM DEVICES, APPLICATION PROCESSORS, COMMUNICATION DEVICES, METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A MODEM DEVICE, METHODS FOR CONTROLLING AN APPLICATION PROCESSOR, AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A modem device may be provided. The modem device may include: a transceiver structure configured to transmit and receive data using at least one of a plurality of communication technologies; a memory configured to store a profile, the profile including or being information specifying a configuration of the transceiver structure for each communication technology of the plurality of communication technologies; and an application processor interface, wherein the modem device is configured to receive from the application processor a command for configuring the transceiver structure through the application processor interface. The command may include or may be an instruction to the modem device to configure the transceiver structure according to the profile. | 10-16-2014 |
20140308944 | Providing an Indicator of Presence of a First Access Network that is Capable of Interworking with a Second Access Network - A mobile station receives a control message containing an indicator of presence of a first access network that operates according to a first protocol that is capable of interworking with a second access network that operates according to a second, different protocol. In response to receiving the indicator, the mobile station performs a procedure to establish a personality for the mobile station that specifies the configuration to allow the mobile station to use features of the first access network that enable interworking with the second access network. | 10-16-2014 |
20140308945 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACQUIRING AND/OR CONFIGURING A MOBILE PLATFORM TO PROVIDE A SUITE OF SERVICES - A system and method for determining a service provider set of one or more service providers to provide a service suite of one or more services in a platform (e.g., a mobile device platform) and configuring such platform to utilize such service provider set to provide such service suite to a user, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 10-16-2014 |
20140308946 | LOGICAL ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT IN A CLOUD CELL - A method and system for assigning a unique logical address in a cloud cell having a mobile station, slave base stations and a master base station are provided. The method includes determining at least one unassigned logical address from respective address spaces associated with the slave base stations and the master base station in the cloud cell by the master base station, selecting the unique logical address from the at least one unassigned logical address determined from the respective address spaces associated with the plurality of base stations, and assigning the selected unique logical address to the mobile station in the cloud cell. The mobile station and each of the plurality of base stations communicate in the cloud cell using the assigned unique logical address. | 10-16-2014 |
20140315531 | SYSTEM & METHOD FOR ENABLING OR RESTRICTING FEATURES BASED ON AN ATTENTION CHALLENGE - An attention challenge is provided to a user to ensure that while a mobile device is in motion, the user is not operating a vehicle. Failure at the attention challenge results in a restricted set of features so that the user is not able to interact with the mobile device in a manner that would impair driving. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315532 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INFORMATION TRANSMISSION - The invention can be applied to the field of communication, and provides a method and apparatus for information transmission. The method includes: detecting call status changing information of a voice call module; determining whether the call status changing information is failure information; selecting a communication number of a current callee, if the call status changing information is the failure information; triggering an edit mode in a SMS module and setting the communication number of the selected callee as a SMS recipient. As a consequence, a user can automatically enter the edit mode of the SMS module once the call fails and also automatically acquire the communication number of the current callee as the recipient number. The complex operations of switching to the SMS module and looking for the contact number can be avoided, the efficiency of information transmission is increased and meanwhile convenient user operations can be achieved. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315533 | Method and Mobile Terminal for Activating InSIM Chip in Mobile Terminal - A method and a mobile terminal for activating an integrated subscriber identity module (InSIM) chip are provided. The mobile terminal comprises: a secure digital input/output (SDIO) port configured to receive an InSIM chip activation command; a connection controller configured to receive the InSIM chip activation command through the SDIO port, and establish a connection between the SDIO port and an InSIM chip according to the InSIM chip activation command; and the InSIM chip configured to obtain activation information through the connection. In solutions of the present invention, an SDIO port of a mobile terminal is used to activate an InSIM chip, which does not require an extra InSIM chip test point on an exterior of the mobile terminal and is conducive to size reduction of the mobile terminal and electrostatic discharge protection. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315534 | Selective Activation of VAMOS-2 Mode - Method of data processing for selectively activating, at a mobile station ( | 10-23-2014 |
20140323108 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ADJUSTING POWER SETTINGS OF A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method of adjusting power settings on a wireless device is described. The method includes applying a default power setting. The method also includes receiving region information from a central configuration device. The method also includes determining a power setting based on the region information. The method also includes applying the power setting. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323109 | CELLULAR COMMUNICATION BLOCKING DEVICE - A system for cellular communication disablement comprising: a cellular blocking device, where the cell blocking device transmits a blocking signal to block cellular communication in a localized area; leads extending from the blocking device, where the leads engage electronic indicators of a vehicle; and active signals over the leads indicating the vehicle's transmission position, wherein the cell blocking device becomes active upon receipt of active transmission signals. The active transmission signals may indicate placement of the vehicle's transmission in either park, drive, reverse or neutral. Any active signals indicating placement of the vehicle's transmission into drive or reverse causes the cell blocking device to become active. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323110 | MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF PERFORMING SWITCHING FROM MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATION TO POINT-TO-POINT COMMUNICATION - There is provided a method of switching from multipoint communication to point-to-point communication while a device performs the multipoint communication with a plurality of participant devices. The method comprises: sharing, by the device, peer-to-peer (P2P) connection information of the device and P2P connection information of each of the plurality of participant devices, with the plurality of participant devices; and switching by the device, from the multipoint communication to the point-to-point communication using the P2P connection information of remaining participant devices of the plurality of participant devices in the multipoint communication when a total number of the remaining participant devices of the multipoint communication decreases to two. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323111 | CONTROL METHOD FOR INCOMING MESSAGE AND MOBILE TERMINAL USING THE SAME - A control method for incoming messages includes steps of: controlling a mobile terminal to enter into a safe driving mode in response to a receiving of a command for controlling the mobile terminal to enter into the safe driving mode; obtaining a predetermined block condition and determining whether there is a need to automatically block an incoming message or not according to the obtained predetermined block condition when the incoming message is received by the mobile terminal; and rejecting and responding the incoming message with a predetermined message when it is determined that there is a need to automatically block the incoming message. A mobile terminal is also provided. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323112 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING DUAL SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULES - Method of switching dual subscriber identity modules (SIMs) of an electronic device includes predetermining a number of sequences. Each of the sequences represents a combination of a number NUM1 of a first state value, and a number NUM2 of a second state value. The first state value represents that the SIM is available, and the second state value represents that the SIM is unavailable. When a connected base station transfers a phone call to the SIM of the electronic device and the connected base station is not the default base station, a probability of missing the phone call of the SIM with each of the sequences is calculated. Based on the calculated probabilities, an optimized sequence is determined. The optimized sequence has a minimum probability and corresponds to a maximum ratio of NUM2 to NUM 1. According to the optimized sequence, a standby time of the electronic device is divided. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323113 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM FOR CHANGING USER TERMINAL SETTINGS - A vehicle communication methods and device for changing a user terminal setting by using a push message is provided. The vehicle communication device includes a storage unit configured to map at least one vehicle mode information to terminal identification information of the user terminal, to which a message is transmitted, and each vehicle information, including vehicle state information or operation information, and store the mapped information; a vehicle information collector configured to collect vehicle information; a message generator configured to generate a transmission message including at least one vehicle mode information mapped to the collected vehicle information and the stored terminal identification information; and a message transmitter configured to transmit the generated transmission message to the user terminal through a push message server. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323114 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BUILT-IN MICROPHONE OF PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for controlling a built-in microphone of a portable terminal is provided. The method includes checking whether a connection device connected to the portable electronic device includes an external microphone; operating the built-in microphone of the portable electronic device to receive a first signal, upon connecting a call, when the connection device does not include the external microphone; and selecting, upon connecting the call while a plurality of connection devices are connected to the portable electronic device, one connection device from among the plurality of connection devices to output a second signal. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323115 | Communication Method And Infrastructure Supporting Device Security And Tracking Of Mobile And Portable Multimedia Devices - From a laptop and a client server interface, a subscriber securely initiates tracking and/or disabling of an electronic device by a server. The subscriber receives location and/or usage reports for the electronic device. The subscriber is provided with the capability to modify a profile, device status and/or transfer ownership of the electronic device via a client server interface. Based on the profile, detection of a particular event triggers tracking and/or disabling of the device by the server. The electronic device registers with the server utilizing its unique device ID and/or the subscriber identity information when accessing the internet. The server is enabled to communicate a status and/or a request for tracking information, to the electronic device. The server is also enabled to receive tracking and/or location information and communicates it to the subscriber's laptop. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323116 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING THE POWER EFFICIENCY OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method and system for enhancing the power efficiency of a first wireless device that includes an energy receiver. In one implementation, the method includes receiving a transmitted signal at the first wireless device, converting the transmitted signal into power through the energy receiver, and providing the power to the first wireless device. | 10-30-2014 |
20140323117 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTIVELY ACTIVATING MULTIPLE SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULES - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided to selectively establish communications with one or more of a plurality of mobile terminals in accordance with a predefined criteria, such as a predefined schedule. In the context of a method, a mobile terminal maintains at least a first subscriber identity module (SIM) and a second SIM is mapped to different subscriber identification numbers. In this regard, the second SIM is mapped to the same subscriber identification number as the SIM of at least one other mobile terminal. The method may also activate the second SIM in accordance with a predefined criteria and may then subsequently deactivate the second SIM. For example, the second SIM may be activated and subsequently deactivated in accordance with a predefined schedule, such as a shift schedule, that identifies one or more time periods in which the second SIM is to be activated. | 10-30-2014 |
20140329512 | Method and Apparatus for Silencing a Communications Device - A method, apparatus and computer program product for silencing a communications device is presented. A disable signal is received wirelessly from an external source at the communications device. In response to receiving the disable signal, notifications related to the communications device are disabled. | 11-06-2014 |
20140329513 | PREVENTING CELL PHONE USE WHILE DRIVING - A first biometric sensor is configured to obtain a first biometric identifier from the driver of a motor vehicle and provide the driver's biometric identifier to a computer. A second biometric sensor coupled to a cell phone or other wireless communications device enabler/disabler, is configured to obtain a second biometric identifier from a person who attempts to operate the motor vehicle-located wireless communications device. The second biometric identifier is also provided to the same computer. A comparison of the two biometric identifiers enables a determination of whether the driver, or someone else, attempts to use the wireless communications device. | 11-06-2014 |
20140329514 | CONCEPTS FOR ENHANCED CALL CONTROL - Computer program products, methods, systems, apparatus, and computing entities are provided for call control. In one embodiment, it can be determined whether an outbound phone number is one of a plurality of target telephone numbers. Responsive to determining that the outbound phone number is one of the plurality of target telephone numbers, one or more call control rules associated with the outbound phone number can be identified. Responsive to identifying the one or more call control rules associated with the outbound phone number, one or more actions to be carried out by the apparatus in accordance with the one or more call control rules can be identified. | 11-06-2014 |
20140329515 | Systems, Methods, Circuits and Associated Software for Augmenting Contact Details Stored on a Communication Device with Data Relating to the Contact Contained on Social Networking Sites - Disclosed are methods, circuits, systems and applications for providing messaging services which may provide for download, synchronization, voicemail-message to text-message translation, direct access and handling of selected voicemail messages through a user's user interface. Further disclosed are systems, methods, circuits and associated software for retrieving data associated with contacts stored on a communication device from social networking sites and integrating the retrieved data into the operation of the communication device. | 11-06-2014 |
20140329516 | Traffic Characteristic Based Selection of Serving Base Station - For the purpose of selecting a base station ( | 11-06-2014 |
20140329517 | Operating Broadband Public Safety Mobile Communication - A method includes providing a broadband public safety network PSN that includes at least a first MS | 11-06-2014 |
20140335841 | DEVICE, COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM, AND METHOD FOR RETAINING SERVICES - A portable device includes a processor; a receiver configured to receive a first message, the first message comprising a notification and a first instruction; a transmitter; a display; and a module card. The module card includes a memory, which is configured to store the first message, a toolkit comprising a plurality of commands, and a second instruction. The second instruction, when executed by the processor, instructs the module card to function as an interpreter configured to interpret the first instruction. The first instruction, when executed by the interpreter, implements the plurality of commands. Implementing the plurality of commands then causes the processor to function as a display device that displays the notification on the display; a receiving device that receives an input as a response to the notification; a determining device configured to determine whether the response corresponds to a confirmation to continue services; and a sending device that sends a second message via the transmitter when the response corresponds to the confirmation to continue services, such that the second message comprises the response to the notification. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335842 | CUSTOMIZABLE TASK EXECUTION FLOW - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a subscriber interface node of providing a service to a subscriber. The method may include: defining a service having an execution flow comprising a plurality of predefined operations; defining a plurality of tasks, each task occurring within one of the predefined operations and comprising a service call to a role of a plug-in representing an external service provider; and executing the operations in the predefined order according to the defined tasks. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335843 | Wireless Communications Device having Contact Specific Silent Mode Disabling Capabilities - A wireless communications device includes a memory, an output device, an input device and a processor. The memory is adapted to maintain individual profiles relating to each of a plurality of user contacts. The profiles include a silent notification mode setting. The output device is operable to emit audible notifications responsive to incoming communications from the user contacts. The input device is operable to change a notification mode of the device between an audible notification mode and a silent notification mode. The processor is operable for processing user selections of the silent notification mode setting between a silent mode enabled setting and a silent mode disenabled setting for the profiles. The processor is configured to cause the output device to emit audible notifications responsive to incoming communications from the user contacts having the silent mode disabled, when the device is in the silent notification mode. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335844 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTENT IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method of transmitting contents in a portable terminal is provided. The method includes allowing a portable terminal of a transmitter to be connected to a portable terminal of a receiver by a control communication, allowing the portable terminal of the transmitter to select a type of the data transmission communication with the portable terminal of the receiver through the control communication, allowing the portable terminal of the transmitter to transmit setting data corresponding to the selected type of data transmission communication to the portable terminal of the receiver through the control communication, and allowing the portable terminal of the transmitter to be connected to the portable terminal of the receiver by the control communication and to transmit the content which are requested to be transmitted, to the portable terminal of the receiver. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335845 | Small Cell Base Station DTX Mode - The present disclosure is directed to a system and method for transitioning small cell base stations out of a discontinuous transmission (DTX) mode. The system and method comprise monitoring at the small cell base stations uplink transmissions from user terminals (UTs) to a macrocell base station while the small cell base stations are in the DTX mode. The small cell base stations can use the monitored uplink transmissions to, for example, measure received power levels from the UTs and/or measure uplink path losses between the small cell base stations and the UTs. The small cell base stations can report these measured values back to the macrocell base station through a backhaul network. Based on these measurements, the macrocell base station can determine which small cell base stations can support which UTs without transitioning the small cell base stations out of the DTX mode. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335846 | Cellular device Identification and Location with Emergency Number Selectivity Enforcement (CILENSE) for Moving Vehicles - A system for restricting operation of wireless devices, for example cell phones, comprises a controller and a plurality of sensors. The system restricts device usage, while permitting emergency phone calls, for example 911 calls. The sensors receive transmissions from devices, and use the transmissions for identification and determining whether a device is within a restricted zone. One disclosed method is triangulation, using time of arrival of transmissions at the sensors. If the device is within the zone, the controller sends device identification, and possibly a customized restriction request, to a remote node, for example a control node of a cell phone network operator. The operator then uses its network resources to implement the requested restrictions. Communication between the controller and the remote node is secure, possibly encrypted, to minimize malicious interference. A wireless control can define vertices of the zone and exempt certain devices from restrictions. Jamming is not required. | 11-13-2014 |
20140342714 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC MOBILE ENDPOINT DEVICE CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT BASED ON USER STATUS OR ACTIVITY - A method, non-transitory computer readable medium, and apparatus for automatically configuring a mobile endpoint device are disclosed. For example, the method stores one or more pre-defined configuration settings for the mobile endpoint device, receives a location of the mobile endpoint device, identifies a location characteristic of the location of the mobile endpoint device and configures the mobile endpoint device with one of the one or more pre-defined configuration settings based upon the location and the location characteristic of the mobile endpoint device. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342715 | VIRTUALIZED SUBSCRIBER IDENTIFICATION MODULE (SIM) - This disclosure is directed to systems and methods for implementing a virtualized subscriber module (SIM). In general, a device equipped with virtualization resources may be configured to load at least one virtualized SIM. Wireless communication resources in the device may be configured to access the at least one virtualized SIM when, for example, initializing a connection to a wireless network. Some embodiments may include more than one virtualized SIM. For example, a plurality of virtualized SIM may be loaded at the same time (e.g., for use in initializing connections to different wireless networks). In a different embodiment, a determination to be made as to which virtualized SIM to load based on, for example, the detection of available wireless networks. It may also be possible to load a single virtual machine (VM) to emulate various hardware-based SIMs based on, for example, varying information input into the virtual machine. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342716 | APPLICATION BASED NETWORK INFORMATION MAINTENANCE - Various communication systems may benefit from notifications of network information. For example, cellular optimization may be accomplished by selective use of a data technique by applications on network devices, which may further benefit from notifications that may reduce the need for external data requests, used in coordination with application observations of current network conditions. According to certain embodiments, a method can include monitoring network service viability for a user or application. The method can also include sending a push message to a user equipment when network service viability is detected for the user or the application. The push message can indicate at least one threshold associated with network service viability. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342717 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DISABLING COMMUNICATION AND/OR OTHER APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ON A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - An application, embedded in a computer readable medium, that is configured to disable certain communication and/or other application functions on a mobile communication device. The application is configured to (i) receive one or more sample signals, which are indicative of ambient motion of the mobile communication device in the vehicle, from an accelerometer (ii) ascertain when the mobile communication device is in an undesirable motion state from the patterns of ambient motion, and (iii) disable one or more communication and/or other application functions when the mobile communication device is in the undesirable motion state. By using the accelerometer to generate the one or more sample signals, patterns of motion of the mobile communication device relative to the vehicle can be ascertained. When the motion patterns indicate that the vehicle is in motion, then the one or more communication and/or other application functions are disabled. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342718 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DISABLING COMMUNICATION AND/OR OTHER APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ON A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - An application, embedded in a computer readable medium, that is configured to disable certain communication and/or other application functions on a mobile communication device. The application is configured to (i) receive one or more sample signals, which are indicative of ambient motion of the mobile communication device in the vehicle, from an accelerometer (ii) ascertain when the mobile communication device is in an undesirable motion state from the patterns of ambient motion, and (iii) disable one or more communication and/or other application functions when the mobile communication device is in the undesirable motion state. By using the accelerometer to generate the one or more sample signals, patterns of motion of the mobile communication device relative to the vehicle can be ascertained. When the motion patterns indicate that the vehicle is in motion, then the one or more communication and/or other application functions are disabled. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342719 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING VIRTUAL SMART CARDS - Various methods are provided for facilitating a software smart card environment consisting of multiple virtual UICCs (vUICC). One example method may comprise determining the location of one or more applications stored on a plurality of vUICCs, wherein the plurality of vUICCs are hosted in a secure environment. The method may also comprise receiving a request from a terminal application to execute an application of the one or more applications stored on the plurality of vUICCs. The method may further comprise determining a vUICC identification relating to the requested application. The method may further comprise causing a logical channel to be established with the requested application on a vUICC using the determined vUICC identification. Similar and related example apparatuses and example computer program products are also provided. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342720 | MOBILE TRAFFIC CATEGORIZATION AND POLICY FOR NETWORK USE OPTIMIZATION WHILE PRESERVING USER EXPERIENCE - Systems and methods of mobile traffic categorization and policy implementation for network use optimization are disclosed. In one aspect, embodiments of the present disclosure include a method, which may be implemented on a system, of detecting an activity state of an application on a mobile device to which traffic is originated from or directed to, detecting a time criticality of data contained in the traffic to be sent between the mobile device and the host server, determining a timing with which to allow the traffic to pass through, based on the activity state or the time criticality and/or controlling radio use on the mobile device based on the timing with which the traffic is allowed to pass through. The method may further include selecting a network configuration in the wireless network for use in passing traffic to and from the mobile device. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342721 | MANAGING A NETWORK ELEMENT - A method for managing a network element involves receiving via a first interface field data from a communication network. The field data is compared with available network status data such, that a difference between network status data and field data can be determined. A configuration data is generated such that the configuration data are adapted to align the network status data and the field data. Then, a corresponding network element for receiving the configuration data is determined and the configuration data is distributed via a first interface to a corresponding network element. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342722 | AUTOCORRECT FOR PHONE NUMBERS - A system and method are provided for automatic correction of numeric input, such as telephone numbers. The communications device configured to perform automatic correction can receive a numeric input string indicating a numerical address with which to initiate a communication, and compare the numeric input string to a database of known valid numerical addresses. Then, upon determining that the numeric input string has no match within the database of known valid numerical addresses, the communications device can identify a known valid numerical address that is within a threshold similarity to the numeric input string, and correct the numeric input string. The communications device can initiate communication using the corrected numeric input string. Also set forth herein are a system and method for automatic completion of partially entered numerical addresses. | 11-20-2014 |
20140349629 | MOBILE DEVICE THAT ACTIVATES UPON REMOVAL FROM STORAGE - A mobile device includes a motion sensor configured to acquire motion data, a light sensor configured to detect an ambient light level and generate light data, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive the motion data from the motion sensor, receive the light data from the light sensor, analyze the motion data to determine displacement data corresponding to a displacement of the mobile device, analyze the light data to detect a light transition, and analyze the displacement data and the light transition to determine whether to initiate an action. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349630 | PORTABLE WIRELESS NODE LOCAL COOPERATION - Disclosed herein are example embodiments for local cooperation between or among portable wireless nodes. For certain example embodiments, at least one device, such as a portable wireless node: (i) may identify at least one cooperative portable wireless node to participate in an antenna assembly configuration parameter architecture; or (ii) may communicate with at least one cooperative portable wireless node to share one or more antenna assembly configuration parameters that are associated with at least one orientation position of at least one portable wireless node. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, or so forth. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349631 | MOBILE DEVICE THAT ACTIVATES UPON REMOVAL FROM STORAGE - A mobile device includes a motion sensor configured to acquire motion data, a light sensor configured to detect an ambient light level and generate light data, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive the motion data from the motion sensor, receive the light data from the light sensor, analyze the motion data to determine displacement data corresponding to a displacement of the mobile device, analyze the light data to detect a light transition, and analyze the displacement data and the light transition to determine whether to initiate an action. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349632 | MOBILE DEVICE THAT ACTIVATES UPON REMOVAL FROM STORAGE - A mobile device includes a motion sensor configured to acquire motion data, a light sensor configured to detect an ambient light level and generate light data, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive the motion data from the motion sensor, receive the light data from the light sensor, analyze the motion data to determine displacement data corresponding to a displacement of the mobile device, analyze the light data to detect a light transition, and analyze the displacement data and the light transition to determine whether to initiate an action. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349633 | MOBILE TERMINAL ARCHITECTURE FOR DUAL PERSONALITY WIRELESS DEVICES - Disclosed in some examples is a user-equipment including a transceiver; one or more processors configured to: provide a first mobile personality associated with a first mobile application executing on the one or more processors; provide a second mobile personality associated with a second mobile application executing on the one or more processors; and provide a first virtual mobile device associated with the first mobile personality and a second virtual mobile device associated with the second mobile personality, wherein the first and second virtual mobile devices provide independent connectivity to the first and second mobile applications via the transceiver. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349634 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH MULTIPLE SERVICE PROVIDERS - Configuring a mobile wireless communication device using a carrier service configuration profile selected from a set of stored carrier service configuration profiles. Carrier service configuration profiles are selected based on one or more combinations of identifier values stored in the mobile wireless communication device. Carrier service configuration profiles are priority ranked based on a specificity of the one or more combinations of identifier values. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349635 | Method and Device for Implementing Multi-Cell Service on Base Station Device - The present invention discloses a method and a device for implementing multi-cell service on a base station device, and relates to the communications field. The base station device includes at least two base station function entities, a base station function entity provides service to one or more cells and the base station function entity corresponds to a global identifier. The method further includes creating, by the base station device, a communication interface with a network node by using the global identifier. Data from the network node is received at the base station device by using the communication interface. The data is sent by the network node according to the global identifier of the base station function entity. The data is forwarded to the base station function entity corresponding to the global identifier of the base station function entity. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349636 | COMMUNICATION DELIVERY FILTER FOR MOBILE DEVICE - Messages received by a mobile device can be processed in one of at least two modes. In the normal mode, the messages are handled in accordance with the normal settings of the mobile device. In the filtered mode, or “night-time” mode, incoming messages are examined to determine if they are to be filtered or if they are exempt from filtering. If a message is exempt from filtering, it is processed in accordance with the normal mode. However, if the message is to be filtered, the mobile device is prevented from providing normal message reception alert notifications. Messages can be identified as being exempt to being filtered by editing an address book or selecting entries from an address book. All messages not identified as exempt then get filtered. | 11-27-2014 |
20140357246 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPT-IN COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS - Disclosed are methods, systems and paradigms for opt-in compliance with regulations. A region in physical space is defined. A condition for the region is defined, the condition being a capability of a communicator such as video recording, still image recording, audio recording, audio output, text messaging, audio communication, or remote connection. The presence and location of a communicator with the capability is detected in the region, and a message is sent to the communicator with a request for a response accepting or rejecting remote deactivation of the capability of the communicator. If an acceptance response is received, the communicator capability is deactivated. If an acceptance response is not received, a notification is generated that includes the lack of acceptance response and the location of the communicator. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357247 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CREATING AND REFINING RULES FOR PERSONALIZED CONTENT DELIVERY BASED ON USERS PHYSICAL ACTIVITES - A method (and structure) includes receiving an input from a sensor on a mobile device. Based on the sensor input, a processor determines whether a user of the mobile device is engaged in a specific physical activity. A control setting on the mobile device is set for delivering content during a period the specific physical activity is detected. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357248 | Apparatus and System for Interacting with a Vehicle and a Device in a Vehicle - A vehicle interface module configured to communicate with a nomadic device and a vehicle. The vehicle interface module comprising a wireless transceiver configured to communicate with a nomadic device and a vehicle transceiver configured to communicate with a vehicle data bus. The vehicle interface module also includes a processor configured to receive a signal from the vehicle data bus using the vehicle transceiver, wherein the signal was initiated by a user input to a vehicle computer system. Furthermore, the processor is also configured to determine that the signal prompts activation of a voice recognition session on the nomadic device, and provide input to the nomadic device using the wireless transceiver, wherein the input initiates a voice recognition session of the nomadic device. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357249 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING DEVICE FUNCTIONALITY DURING LONG BLOCKING UICC OPERATIONS - Methods and apparatuses are presented herein for improved operation of a Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC) of one or more user equipment (UE). For example, an example method of wireless communications is presented, which may include monitoring, by a UE, one or more items received from a UICC of the UE during a UICC operation. In addition, the example method may also include determining that at least one of (a) a number of the one or more items having a first item type exceeds a threshold number, or (b) an elapsed time since the UICC operation started exceeds a threshold time. Moreover, the example method may include providing, based on the determining, a notification to a user interface associated with the UE indicating that the UICC operation is ongoing. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357250 | TESTING A MOBILE APPLICATION - Systems, methods, and computer-readable and executable instructions are provided for testing a mobile application. Testing a mobile application can include simulating a cellular network condition for each of a plurality of locations utilizing a network simulation engine. Furthermore, testing a mobile application can include testing performance of the mobile application for each of the simulated cellular network conditions. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357251 | USE OF PROXIMITY SENSORS FOR INTERACTING WITH MOBILE DEVICES - Various arrangements for handling a call by a mobile device and/or selecting a function for execution by the mobile device are presented. A phone call may be commenced by a mobile device. During the phone call, the mobile device may collect proximity data that indicates the mobile device is not proximate to an ear of a user. The microphone of the mobile device may be muted in response to the proximity data that indicates the mobile device is not proximate to the ear of the user. | 12-04-2014 |
20140364099 | DEVICE LOCATOR DISABLE AUTHENTICATION - A device locator mode or find my device (FMD) mode can allow a lost, stolen, or misplaced mobile device to be located. The FMD mode can be enabled or disabled on a mobile device. Sometimes thieves or unauthorized parties attempt to disable the FMD mode. To prevent this, the mobile device can transmit a unique device identifier to a remote server. The remote server can link the device identifier to a cloud-based user account associated with the user of the mobile device. Before an FMD mode is disabled on the mobile device, before the content or settings can be erased, and/or before a mobile device is permitted to be activated/reactivated, a user of the mobile device can be challenged for the credentials of the cloud-based user account. If valid credentials are provided, FMD can be disabled, the content or settings can be reset, and/or the device can be activated/reactivated. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364100 | CATEGORY-BASED FENCE - Techniques of category-based fence are described. A category-based fence can correspond to a group of signal sources instead of a point location fixed to latitude and longitude coordinates. The group of signal sources can represent a category of entities, e.g., a particular business chain. The signal sources can be distributed to multiple discrete locations. A category-based fence associated with the group, accordingly, can correspond to multiple locations instead of a single point location and a radius. Each signal source in the group can be associated with a category identifier unique to the group and uniform among signal sources in the group. The category identifier can be programmed into each signal source. A mobile device can enter the category-based fence by entering any of the discrete locations when the mobile device detects the signal identifier. The mobile device can then execute an application program associated with the category-based fence. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364101 | FINE GRAIN POSITION DATA COLLECTION - Method, mobile device, computer program product, and apparatus for performing Fine Grain Position Data Collection are described. In one embodiment, a server can receive position data collected by a mobile device with a first positioning configuration. In one embodiment, the server can determine, from the position data received at the server, a mobile device position and create a second positioning configuration according to at least the mobile device position. In one embodiment, the server can send the second positioning configuration to the mobile device. In one embodiment, a mobile device can collect position data according to a first positioning configuration and send the position data to a server. In one embodiment, the mobile device can receive a second positioning configuration from the server created according to at least the mobile device position. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364102 | Determination of Device Body Location - In some implementations, a mobile device can analyze motion sensor data during a voice call to determine whether the mobile device is on a stationary object or worn on a user's body (e.g., in the lap or pocket of a user of the mobile device). The mobile device can adjust the transmit power level of the telephony transceiver during the voice call based on the determination | 12-11-2014 |
20140364103 | NON-INTRUSIVE REGION NOTIFICATION - Techniques of non-intrusive region notification are described. A mobile device can be programmed to trigger an application program when the mobile device enters or exits a region. The region can be defined by various virtual fencing technologies. If, at the time of entry or exit of a region, the mobile device is in a power-saving operating mode, the mobile device can transition to an active operating mode temporarily, register a fence-crossing event (entry or exit of the region) with the application program, and then transition back to the power-saving operating mode. The mobile device can launch the registered application program in response to the mobile device receiving a user input to enter the active operating mode. The application program can provide a user interface associated with the region on a display surface of the mobile device in place of a home screen or other user interface. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364104 | Push Notification Initiated Background Updates - In some implementations, a mobile device can be configured to monitor environmental, system and user events. The occurrence of one or more events can trigger adjustments to system settings. In some implementations, the mobile device can be configured to keep frequently invoked applications up to date based on a forecast of predicted invocations by the user. In some implementations, the mobile device can receive push notifications associated with applications that indicate that new content is available for the applications to download. The mobile device can launch the applications associated with the push notifications in the background and download the new content. In some implementations, before running an application or accessing a network interface, the mobile device can be configured to check energy and data budgets and environmental conditions of the mobile device to preserve a high quality user experience. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364105 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND FREQUENCY CONTROL METHOD - A communication device includes a first circuit configured to communicate with another communication device and generate first information that indicates whether or not the first circuit is performing communication with the another communication device, and a second circuit that includes a processor configured to control the first circuit, and control an operation frequency of the processor based on the first information. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364106 | MOBILE PHONE HAVING A NON-TELEPHONE FUNCTION AND TIMING RESET UNIT - The present invention is a mobile phone having a non-telephone function (e.g. a radio function) that is different from a telephone function, and includes: a timer operable to count time; a non-telephone function unit operable to execute the non-telephone function, the non-telephone function comprising a function of illuminating a backlight provided to the mobile phone; a non-telephone function stop unit operable to cause the timer to operate during execution of the non-the telephone function, and automatically stop the execution of the non-telephone function when the timer indicates an elapse of a predetermined time period; a telephone unit operable to execute the telephone function; and a reset unit operable, if the timer is being operated in response to the execution of the non-telephone function, to reset the timer to an initial state when a certain operation relating to an application is executed, wherein when the timer is reset to the initial state, the timer starts to measure the predetermined time period, and the non-telephone function stop unit stops the execution of the non-telephone function at the elapse of the predetermined time period from when the certain operation relating to an application is executed. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364107 | QUICK COMMUNICATION METHOD AND DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A quick communication method and device, and a storage medium are disclosed in the in present disclosure which belongs to the field of mobile communication. The method includes: displaying a quick communication key on the lock screen interface of a terminal; invoking a shortcut panel according to an operation triggered by a user on the quick communication key, and the shortcut panel includes contact information of a part or all of the contact objects from the contact list in the terminal; receiving a contact object selected by the user, and communicating with the contact object; and the device includes: a display module, an invoking module, and a communicating module. Quick communication with a contact object can be implemented by the present invention through the quick communication key on the lock screen interface of the terminal to improve the efficiency of terminal communication. | 12-11-2014 |
20140370869 | System and method for controlling mobile services using sensor information - A system includes a database of image data associated with a vehicle; and control logic configured to cause a user device to capture one or more images and compare data associated with the one or more images with the image data to determine if a user is present in a vehicle and disable a text messaging function at least in part responsive to the determination using the image data. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370870 | METHOD OF PROCESSING AN INCOMING COMMUNICATION SIGNAL AT A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A mobile communication device and method of communication is disclosed. A communication signal having a message class is received at the mobile communication device conveyed by a vehicle. A message class of the received communication at the mobile communication device is obtained. A station of motion of the vehicle is determined at the mobile communication device. The message class and the determined state of motion is used to select an action to relay the communication to a driver of the vehicle. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370871 | Method and Apparatus for Automatically Selecting an Outbound-Call Modality - A portable electronic device has a plurality of different outbound-call modalities. By one approach this device includes a control circuit configured to automatically select use of a particular one of the outbound-call modalities when initiating a particular call to a particular party. This automatic selection can be based, in whole or in part, upon locally-stored information and/or remotely-accessed information. By one approach the locally-stored information comprises information regarding first evaluation criteria by which relative appropriateness of using a given one of the outbound-call modalities is determined. By one approach the remotely-accessed information comprises information regarding second evaluation criteria by which relative appropriateness of using a given one of the outbound-call modalities is determined. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370872 | DISPLAY INTERFACE CONVERTING SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - The present invention discloses a display interface converting system and a method thereof, which belongs to the technical field of mobile terminal interface transformation. The system comprises a display interface adjustment module, a storage module and a condition capturing module. The display interface adjustment module is respectively connected to the condition capturing module and the storage module. The storage module has preconfigured a transformation condition data used for adjusting the display interface of the mobile terminal operating system and has preconfigured the corresponding adjustment strategy. The method includes: transmitting the captured condition data to the display interface adjustment module by the condition capturing module; comparing the condition data with the preconfigured transformation condition data by the display interface adjustment device compares; obtaining the corresponding adjustment strategy and adjusting the display interface according to the adjustment strategy by the display interface adjustment module if the comparison is successful. The beneficial effects of this technical scheme are that as follows: it provides the user with different display interface corresponding to the different circumstances in the mobile terminal, consequently the mobile terminal is more personalized, and the user's application experience is improved. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370873 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING FUNCTION IN CALL MODE AND PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD - A method and electronic device are disclosed for performing a particular function in a call mode in response to inputs received from a rotating part of a camera. The electronic device includes a wireless communication unit for a call, and a camera having a rotating part. A rotation of the rotating part is recognized while the electronic device operates in a call mode, and, in response to the rotation, a predefined particular function is executed. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370874 | ASSOCIATING A PARTICULAR ACCOUNT CONFIGURATION DURING THE OUT OF BOX EXPERIENCE FOR A MOBILE DEVICE - A method of providing particular account configurations to a user of a mobile device based on a predetermined account configuration offering between a mobile device manufacturer and a third-party service provider based on a code stored on the mobile device. During the out-of-box experience (OOBE) when the user is initially configuring the mobile device, the third-party provider receives user information, a code, and a mobile device identification number. The third-party service provider confirms that the mobile device is eligible for the particular account configuration by using the code and mobile device identification number. Once account configuration eligibility is confirmed, the third-party service provider associates the particular account configuration with either an existing user account or with a new user account established during the OOBE. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370875 | CONFIGURING AN IDENTIFIER FOR AN ACCESS POINT - An access point is configured based on acquired information. An access point may be configured based on the configuration(s) of at least one other access point. An identifier to be transmitted by an access point may be selected based on the identifier(s) transmitted by at least one other access point. An access point may configure itself with assistance from a configuration server. For example, the access point may send information such as the location of the access point to a configuration server and the configuration server may respond with a list of neighboring access points for that access point. A configuration server may provide configuration information to an access point based on the location of the access point. A configuration server also may direct an access point to a different configuration server. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370876 | Provisioning User Attributes for use with Mobile Computing Device - A mobile computing device hosts an operating system and mobile applications. A provisioning application communicates with a secure element and near field communication (NFC) subsystem. It causes display of an interface for users to enter personal attributes for storage in the secure element. Users discriminately select items from their personal attributes for transmission to a third party recipient so only attributes relative to the third party are sent. Software, interfaces, methods, and apparatus typify the embodiments. | 12-18-2014 |
20140378111 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN PROVIDING CONTEXT-AWARE IDENTIFICATION OF MOBILE DEVICE APPLICATIONS - Various methods, apparatuses, devices, and articles of manufacture are provided for use by one or more electronic devices to provide or otherwise identify applications for potential use by a mobile device with respect to a particular environment. For example, a computing device may apply a context-aware filter to identify a list of applications for potential use by a mobile device; and, in response to a first event proffer one or more applications for use by the mobile device; and, in response to a second event withdraw the application for use by the mobile device. In another example, a mobile device may, in response to a first indication that an application has been proffered for use, initiate activation of the application; and, in response to a second indication that the application has been withdrawn for use, initiate deactivation of the application. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378112 | APPLICATION SEARCH SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EASY OPERATION - An application search system includes a mobile terminal, a device, and a server, connected to a network. The mobile terminal transmits mobile terminal OS information to the device. The device receives the mobile terminal OS information from the mobile terminal, and transmits the mobile terminal OS information and device identification information to the application management server. The server: i) receives the mobile terminal OS information and the device identification information; ii) generates, from the mobile terminal OS information and the device identification information, a list of applications installable in the mobile terminal and used for operating the device from the mobile terminal; and iii) transmits the list of applications to the device or the mobile terminal. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378113 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - An electronic device and a method of controlling the same are provided. The electronic device includes a wearable band. The electronic device is controlled to operate in a different mode depending on the way the user is wearing the band, and a user interface for each operation mode is provided. Accordingly, the electronic device with the wearable band can be easily used in various ways. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378114 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENTLY TRANSMITTING SMALL AMOUNTS OF DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - According to one embodiment of the present disclosure, the method by means of which a mobility management entity (MME) determines the communication mode of a terminal in a communication system includes the steps of: receiving, from the terminal, an access request including information on the position of the terminal; transmitting a message to a home subscriber server (HSS) on the basis of the received access request; receiving, from the HSS, specific position information for setting a first mode; comparing the information on the position of the terminal with the specific position information; and determining the communication mode of the terminal according to the result of the comparison. According to the present disclosure, the frequent transmission of small amounts of data can be supported in an efficient manner. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378115 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - A mobile terminal and a method of controlling the same are provided. The mobile terminal includes: a body; a sensing unit for acquiring a motion of the body; a camera provided in at least one side of the body to photograph an image; at least one display provided in at least one side of the body; and a controller for forming information related to at least one object included in the photographed image into a group according to the acquired motion and for controlling to display the information in the at least one display. Therefore, information is formed into a group and displayed according to a motion of a body and thus a state that can easily select necessary information can be provided. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378116 | Method And System For Sending Notification Message, Management Control Apparatus, And Terminal Device - A method and system for sending a notification message, a management control apparatus, and a terminal device. After a control server receives a management control response message returned by a terminal device, the control server triggers, according to a sending address of a notification message, a notification message sending server to send the notification message to a receiving device corresponding to the sending address of the notification message. As such, a user can learn through the receiving device in time that it is possible to perform a management control operation on the terminal device. | 12-25-2014 |
20140378117 | INSTANT ACTIVATION AND PROVISIONING FOR TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICES ON A MOBILE DEVICE - Methods and systems for instant activation of virtual PBX services on a mobile device are disclosed. In one aspect, a user request for activating virtual PBX services is received on a mobile device. An available primary identification number for the virtual PBX services is retrieved from a telecommunication service provider (TSP). A user interface is presented on the mobile device including a first interface portion presenting the available primary identification number and a second interface portion configured to receive a user identifier. Upon receiving the user input specifying the user identifier and while the user interface is still presented on the mobile device, a user instruction for activating the virtual PBX services is received. Upon receiving the user instruction, the user identifier is sent to the TSP. Then, a confirmation is received from the TSP. | 12-25-2014 |
20150011195 | Automatic volume control based on context and location - The present disclosure involves a method of automatic volume adjustment based on context and location. A determination is made that a mobile computing device has been placed in a vehicle. The determination may be made by detecting that the mobile computing device has been plugged into a dock inside the vehicle, or by detecting that a movement speed of the mobile computing device is within a normal speed range of the vehicle. The mobile computing device has a programmable audio output volume. In response to the determination, the audio output volume of the mobile computing device is automatically increased to a predefined audio output volume. In some embodiments, the volume setting of the mobile computing device is recorded before the volume is automatically increased, and the mobile computing device restores the original volume setting after the mobile computing device is taken out of the vehicle. | 01-08-2015 |
20150011196 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR USE IN PROVIDING LOCATION PARAMETERS TO MOBILE APPLICATIONS - Techniques are provided that may be implemented in a mobile device to provide one or more location parameters to one or more mobile processes (e.g., applications) provided and/or otherwise supported, at least in part, by the mobile device. For example, a mobile device may be configured to monitor one or more processes hosted on a first processor, and initiate a communication on a bus connecting the first processor to a positioning engine external to the first processor to obtain at least one updated location parameter in response to detection of activity of at least one of the one or more processes. In certain instances, the updated location parameter(s) may have been previously determined by the positioning engine. | 01-08-2015 |
20150011197 | SELF-OPTIMIZING WIRELESS NETWORK - Optimizing a plurality cell sites or sectors in a wireless network including receiving network data regarding a plurality of cell sites or sectors; determining a critical zone in which communication is degrade; determining best neighbor cell sites or sectors among the neighbor cell sites or sectors associated with the critical cell sites or sectors; determining if the critical cell sites or sectors in the critical zone have available resources for achieving a desired improvement in communications; determining if the best neighbor cell sites or sectors have available resources for achieving the desired improvement in communications; and altering wireless network parameters of the critical cell sites or sectors, or the best neighbor cells sites or sectors for achieving the desired improvement in communications. Altering wireless network parameters of the critical cell sites or sectors, or the best neighbor cell sites or sectors is performed continuously until the desired improvement in communications in the wireless network is achieved. | 01-08-2015 |
20150011198 | ANTENNA TILT OPTIMIZATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Optimization of a wireless communications network may be accomplished by evaluating relationships between a source cell and a plurality of target cells, determining an optimization value based on the evaluated relationships, and adjusting an antenna parameter of the source cell based on the optimization value. | 01-08-2015 |
20150011199 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHODOF CONTROLLING THE SAME - An electronic device with watch phone functionality and a method of controlling the same are provided. Upon receiving predetermined input on the display of the watch phone, the electronic device transmits a control signal for creating a wireless link to a mobile terminal which will connect with the watch phone, and transmits location information on the mobile terminal and a captured image of the surroundings to the watch phone. Accordingly, the user can locate the mobile terminal more easily using the watch phone. | 01-08-2015 |
20150011200 | OTA File Upload Servers - Devices and methods are disclosed which relate to gathering a plurality of data from a SIM card on a wireless communications device and recording the plurality of data onto a database where the plurality of data can be viewed at a later time. A network device requests a plurality of data from a SIM card on a wireless communications device. An OTA platform receives the request and gathers the plurality of data from the SIM card. The OTA platform, which normally sends the plurality of data back to the network device, sends the plurality of data to a file upload server instead. The file upload server records the plurality of data to a database where the plurality of data can be viewed by the network device. In certain examples, the file upload server sends a notification to the network device that the plurality of data is ready for viewing. | 01-08-2015 |
20150011201 | Universal Near Field Self-Configuring Femtocell - Embodiments of the present invention include a method for configuring a femtocell. In one embodiment, the method includes identifying a cellular device within near-field communication range of the femtocell. The method identifies a carrier network associated with the cellular device and automatically configures the femtocell to operate on the carrier network associated with the cellular device. | 01-08-2015 |
20150011202 | Method and Terminal for Loading Operator Configuration Information - The present invention discloses a method and a terminal for loading operator configuration information. The method includes obtaining network identification information of a terminal. The network identification information includes a mobile country code and a mobile network code. Secondary network identification information of the terminal is obtained when it is determined that the terminal corresponds to at least two groups of operator configuration information according to the network identification information. The secondary network identification information includes a group identifier GID. The operator configuration information corresponding to the terminal is obtained and loaded according to the secondary network identification information. | 01-08-2015 |
20150011203 | Mobile Device Safe Driving - In embodiments of mobile device safe driving, a mobile device can display a device lock screen on an integrated display device, and transition from the device lock screen to display a driving mode lock screen. The transition to display the driving mode lock screen occurs without receiving a PIN code entered on the device lock screen. The mobile device implements a safe driving service that is implemented to activate a safe driving mode of the mobile device, and disable features of the mobile device while the safe driving mode is activated. | 01-08-2015 |
20150017962 | INTELLIGENT SIM SELECTION SUPPORTING RICH CONTEXT OF INPUT FACTORS - Various user interfaces and other technologies for interacting with devices that support multiple SIM cards can be implemented. For example, intelligent handling of SIM card selection can help users deal with multiple SIM card scenarios. A user interface for overriding SIM card selection can be supported. Users can interact with their devices more efficiently and with less frustration. A wide variety of use default SIM card scenarios are supported. SIM cards can be selected based on any of a rich set of input factors. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017963 | METHOD, ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND COMPUTER READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM FOR PROVIDING LOCATION BASED SERVICES - An electronic device provides location-based services. The electronic device may include a communication module configured to receive information on a wireless network device, including identification information of at least one electronic device, from the wireless network device. The electronic device may also include a controller configured to perform at least some functions of the electronic device, based on at least one piece of action information corresponding to the identification information, when the identification information corresponding to the electronic device is included in the received information. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017964 | Method and System for Downloading Application - A method for downloading an application includes sensing an outgoing call to a preset connected line identification from a mobile device, sending a message for downloading an application on the mobile device, when the outgoing call is sensed; and downloading the application on the mobile device from an application server, in which the application is stored, in response to a user gesture for the message. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017965 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal and controlling method thereof are disclosed, which facilitates a terminal to be used in further consideration of user's convenience. The present invention includes a sensing unit including at least one sensor and a controller analyzing a user's mobile terminal use pattern based on a sensing signal received through the at least one sensor, the controller controlling a power of the at least one sensor based on the use pattern and a remaining power of the mobile terminal. Accordingly, powers of a plurality of sensors can be efficiently controlled based on a user's use pattern and/or a remaining power level. And, a user can activate a specific application and/or view a content with ease in a manner of analyzing a user's use pattern for a mobile terminal and then estimating and providing an application and/or a content necessary for the user based on a result of the analysis. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017966 | SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES MANAGEMENT SETTING CONTROL - A method of configuring a mobile terminal within a Long Term Evolution (LTE) compliant mobile wireless communications network. The method comprises controlling a first mobile terminal setting and communication the first mobile terminal setting from a network node to the mobile terminal. The first mobile terminal setting indicates whether supplementary services management setting controls originating from a mobile terminal are to be transmitted between the mobile terminal and an application server through an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. The first mobile terminal setting instructs the mobile terminal to modify a first configuration parameter within a first Open Mobile Alliance (OMA) Managed Object (MO) stored at the mobile terminal to indicate whether supplementary services management setting controls originating from the mobile terminal are to be transmitted through an IMS network. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017967 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING A PREDICTED DURATION OF A CONTEXT - An approach is provided for determining a predicted duration of a context. A context duration platform causes, at least in part, a determination, a prediction, or a combination thereof of one or more contexts associated with at least one device. The context duration platform further processes and/or facilitates a processing of context information associated with the at least one device, other context information associated with one or more other devices, or a combination thereof to determine one or more predicted durations of the one or more contexts. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017968 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING INFORMATION REGARDING MULTIPLE SUBSCRIPTIONS - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided in which the network is informed of a device supporting multiple subscriptions as well as other information related to the operation of the mobile terminal having the multiple subscriptions. In this regard, a network entity is caused to be informed that a mobile terminal supports a plurality of subscriptions. The method may also cause information regarding the networks capable of being monitored by the mobile terminal to be provided to the network entity. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017969 | IN-VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, IN-VEHICLE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An in-vehicle communication system includes: an in-vehicle communication apparatus equipped to a vehicle; a first mobile communication terminal connected in a communicable manner with the in-vehicle communication apparatus; and a second mobile communication terminal connected in a communicable manner with the first mobile communication terminal. The in-vehicle communication apparatus, the first mobile communication terminal, and the second mobile communication terminal each has a cooperative application program for executing multiple contents cooperatively with one another. The first mobile communication terminal forbids operational input and/or screen output of a predetermined content. When a travel determination unit determines that the vehicle is running, the in-vehicle communication apparatus forbids operational input and/or screen output with respect to the predetermined content. The second mobile communication terminal enables operational input and/or screen output with respect to the predetermined content. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017970 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO BASE STATION CONTROLLER, AND TRANSITION CONTROL METHOD - A radio base station apparatus includes a count retrieval unit configured to retrieve a call origination/reception count and a handover count within a predetermined time interval, an idle transition timer value controller configured to adjust an idle transition timer value representing a time period from completion of communication with a mobile station until the mobile station is caused to transition to an idle mode based on the retrieved call origination/termination count and the retrieved handover count, and an idle transition controller configured to cause the mobile station to transition to the idle mode based on the adjusted idle transition timer value. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017971 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE INCLUDING ACTUATOR FOR PROVIDING TACTILE OUTPUT - An electronic device includes a base, a membrane coupled to and spaced from the base, an actuator disposed between the base and the membrane, and spaced from the membrane when the actuator is not actuated, and a controller configured to control actuation of the actuator to cause the actuator to contact the membrane. | 01-15-2015 |
20150024727 | MOBILE DEVICE REGULATION THROUGH A DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE OF A VEHICLE TO MINIMIZE VEHICULAR ACCIDENTS - A method, system, and apparatus related to mobile device regulation through a diagnostic device of a vehicle to minimize vehicular accidents are disclosed. In one aspect, a method of mobile device regulation involves accessing a diagnostic device of the vehicle, generating a local area wireless network through the diagnostic device of the vehicle and determining that a mobile device located in an interior portion of the vehicle is a controlled mobile device. Also, the method involves controlling a functionality of at least one of the mobile device and the controlled mobile device based on a criterion stored in a database of an administration server. The method may also include establishing a communication with the mobile device located in the interior portion of the vehicle. The method involves associating a level of control that corresponds with the controlled mobile device described in the database of the administration server. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024728 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal and controlling method thereof are disclosed. The present disclosure includes a transparent display unit having a front side and a rear side, the transparent display unit configured to display information on each of the front side and the rear side, and a controller configured to determine which one of the front side and the rear side faces toward a user based on at least one state of the mobile terminal and to control the information to be displayed on the transparent display unit according to a result of the determination. Accordingly, an information display of a transparent display unit is controlled depending on a result from determining whether one of front and rear sides of the transparent display unit faces toward a user based on at least one state of the mobile terminal. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024729 | System and Method for Automated Outgoing Caller Messages - Provided is a system and method for centralizing common messaging functionality across a plurality of heterogeneous Mobile data processing System (MS) applications, and for synergistically bringing new messaging functionality to those applications. Outgoing Caller Messages (OCMs) include messages that can be left automatically to a phone call recording system by a caller. During an active call, a user of a calling device can request background processing to automatically handle the call for leaving an Outgoing Caller Message (OCM) at a callee's (i.e. called) recording system. The caller is free to perform other application processing while background processing occurs. No location based processing, nor location information, is required. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024730 | APPLICATION PROVIDING SYSTEM, PORTABLE TERMINAL DEVICES, SERVER DEVICE, APPLICATION PROVIDING METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAMS - An application providing system is provided. The application providing system includes a portable terminal device having an IC chip configured to perform radio communications; and a server device; the application providing system connecting the portable terminal device and the server device through a communication network, wherein the portable terminal device includes a transmitted message receiver section, an application determination section, an application transmission request generation section, and an application storage section, wherein the server device includes a transmitted message generation section, a transmitted message sender section, an application transmission request receiver section, an application storage section, and an application sender section. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024731 | In-Car Information System, In-Car Device, and Information Terminal - An information terminal includes: an operation assignment information storage unit that stores operation assignment information; an actuation information reception unit that receives from an in-car device actuation information; an assignment unit that, on the basis of the operation assignment information and the actuation information, assigns some among a plurality of operations in the information terminal to each of one or more actuations among a plurality of types of actuation that can be inputted with an actuation unit provided to the in-car device respectively, according to priority levels; an actuation signal reception unit that receives an actuation signal outputted from the in-car device; and a conversion unit that, on the basis of the result of assignment by the assignment unit, converts the actuation signal into an operating command that corresponds to one among the plurality of operations. | 01-22-2015 |
20150031345 | FACILITATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN CONJUNCTION WITH ORIENTATION POSITION - Disclosed herein are example embodiments for facilitating wireless communication in conjunction with orientation position. For certain example embodiments, at least one device, such as a portable wireless node: (i) may obtain one or more antenna assembly configuration parameters that are associated with at least one orientation position of at least one portable wireless node; or (ii) may utilize one or more antenna assembly configuration parameters that are associated with at least one orientation position of at least one portable wireless node. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, or so forth. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031346 | SHARING WIRELESS CONNECTION PROFILES BETWEEN MULTIPLE OPERATING SYSTEMS - Embodiments of a system, apparatus and method for sharing wireless connection profiles between multiple OSs are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a first wireless connection may be established between a wireless communication device and an access point of a wireless network or one or more other devices of a peer-to-peer networking group while the wireless communication device is running in an OS. A wireless connection profile for the first wireless connection may be stored in a shared profiles storage associated with the device, and then may be retrieved from the shared profiles storage responsive to the device being booted in a different OS. A second wireless connection may be automatically established between the device booted in the different OS and the access point or the one or more other devices using the wireless connection profile retrieved from the shared profiles storage. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031347 | METHOD FOR EXECUTION CONTROL USING COVER AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method for execution control using a cover and an electronic device supporting the same are provided. The method includes acquiring a sensing value of a cover sensor included in the cover and a sensing value of a main body sensor included in a main body of the electronic device, due to a physical change generated in the electronic device, comparing the sensing value of the main body sensor with the sensing value of the cover sensor, and controlling execution in the main body according to the sensing value of the cover sensor, when a result of the comparison meets a preset criterion. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031348 | METHOD FOR CONTINUING OPERATION ON MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE, MOBILE DEVICE USING THE SAME, WEARABLE DEVICE USING THE SAME, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - The present disclosure provides a method, a mobile electronic device, a wearable electronic device and a computer readable medium for continuing an operation initiated on the wearable electronic device on the mobile electronic device based on motion coherence between movements of the mobile electronic device and a wearable electronic device without providing an input. In the disclosure, an operation would be initiated on the wearable electronic device. The wearable electronic device would transmit an application data associated with the operation initiated on the wearable electronic device to the mobile electronic device. Then, an application program associated with the operation would be automatically launched on the mobile electronic device to continue the operation initiated on the wearable electronic device according to the application data in response to a motion coherence of the mobile electronic device and the wearable electronic device. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031349 | DRIVER DISTRACTION DISABLING VIA GESTURE RECOGNITION - A method and system for preventing distracted driving caused by mobile devices are disclosed. The method and system may determine whether a user is driving by the traveling speed and the gestures of the user. In addition, the orientation of the mobile device may be used for detecting whether the user is a driver. | 01-29-2015 |
20150038129 | Network Device Configuration by Mobile Device - In one implementation, a wireless network device is automatically accessed and configured through a mobile device. The mobile device receives provisioning data encoded for installation and operation of a network device and decodes the provisioning data to identify at least one access parameter for the network device. The mobile device accesses a wireless network of the network device according to the access parameter. Once access has been established, the mobile device transmits a configuration signal including a network configuration setting through the wireless network to the network device for the installation of the network device. The network device is provisioned based on the network configuration setting. | 02-05-2015 |
20150038130 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OBTAINING A CONFIGURATION PROFILE - A method for obtaining a configuration profile, including obtaining test results for customer-tested configuration profiles, including operable configuration profiles, from customer mobile devices. A shared data repository is populated with the test results and the customer-tested configuration profiles. The customer-tested configuration profiles are related to customer mobile device profiles of the customer mobile devices. A target mobile device profile, describing mobile device properties, is received from a target mobile device. A subset of the customer mobile device profiles having a threshold degree of similarity to the target mobile device profile are selected from the shared data repository. For each of the operable configuration profiles in the subset, a probability of compatibility is calculated, and the operable configuration profiles in the subset are tested on the target mobile device in an order defined by the probability of compatibility. The shared data repository is updated with the modified test result. | 02-05-2015 |
20150038131 | System and Method for Simplifying Mobile Device Account Creation and Verification - A method is provided for establishing a verified user account record for a user using a device. A text message is received on the user's device addressed by phone number. The text message includes a custom URL. When the user actuates the custom URL from the device, a session is established of a dedicated web page on the user's browser, and the Device ID of the device is passed together with the phone number for storage in a non-transitory record associated with the user. | 02-05-2015 |
20150038132 | METHOD FOR USE IN A FIRST DEVICE TO MANAGE WRITING AN ANSWER TO A MESSAGE RECEIVED FROM A SECOND DEVICE - A method is provided for use in a first device for managing writing an answer after receiving a message coming from a second device. At least one possible answer to the message is received by the first device from the second device for selection. | 02-05-2015 |
20150045007 | Mind-Controlled virtual assistant on a smartphone device - Generally described, the present application relates to a system and method for processing input to control a set of functions and features. More specifically, however, the present application relates to user devices that can be controlled through brain activities or similar actions. In an illustrative embodiment, brain activities are monitored through electroencephalography (EEG). Through EEG, input waves that can be appropriately monitored can be sent to a virtual assistant. The virtual assistant can decipher the number of signals coming and determine a correct output such as a function or feature to be manipulated. In the implementation presented herein, features and functions of a smartphone can be manipulated. Other types of user devices can also be controlled, such as in-vehicle systems, head units, televisions, tablets, computer, laptops, etc. | 02-12-2015 |
20150045008 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING CELL CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS IN A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for determining a set of replacement transmission parameters for a plurality of cells ( | 02-12-2015 |
20150045009 | Mobile Telephone and Method for Declining an Incoming Call - The present invention relates to a mobile telephone comprising a housing and a touch screen, wherein the mobile telephone is switchable into a locked mode in which the touch screen is not responsive to an user input unless a predetermined operation is performed, wherein the mobile telephone is configured to receive an incoming call when the mobile telephone is in the locked mode and accept the incoming call after a predetermined user acceptance input, characterized in that the mobile telephone is also configured to decline the incoming call after a predetermined user decline input on the touch screen and/or housing while the mobile telephone remains in the locked mode. | 02-12-2015 |
20150045010 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A mobile phone | 02-12-2015 |
20150045011 | BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, BASE STATION CONTROL METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND BASE STATION CONTROL PROGRAM - [Problems] Because it is not possible to reduce sufficiently the number of base stations that starts uselessly in spite of being in low traffic state, it is not possible to lower interference between adjacent cells and power consumption sufficiently. | 02-12-2015 |
20150050922 | MOBILE DEVICE SECURITY SYSTEM - A location based mobile device security enforcement system includes: (a) a mobile device management (MDM) server, (b) a security control module, (c) an entry point security system, and (d) a mobile device security application, when installed and executed on a mobile device, configured to register the mobile device and its user to create a mobile device user profile for the mobile device user, when the mobile device and its user enter a secure area, authenticate the mobile device user, maintain constant contact with security control module, and make security adjustments to the mobile device if contact between mobile device and security control module is lost, mobile device security application becomes non-operational, current time is beyond the mobile device user authorized access time period, and current mobile device location is outside of mobile device user authorized access area or crosses borders between one area security level to another area security level. | 02-19-2015 |
20150050923 | DETERMINING EXIT FROM A VEHICLE - Methods and mobile devices determine an exit from a vehicle. Sensors of a mobile device can be used to determine when the user is in a vehicle that is driving. The same or different sensors can be used to identify a disturbance (e.g., loss of communication connection from mobile device to a car computer). After the disturbance, an exit confidence score can be determined at various times, and compared to a threshold. A determination of the exit of the user can be determined based on the comparison of the exit confidence score to the threshold. The mobile device can perform one or more functions in response to the exit confidence score exceeding the threshold, such as changing a user interface (e.g., of a navigation app) or obtaining a location to designate a parking location. | 02-19-2015 |
20150050924 | MOBILE STATION, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING MOBILE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - In one embodiment, a mobile station ( | 02-19-2015 |
20150050925 | Self-Organizing Network Mechanism for Energy Saving During an Outage - Described herein is a self-organizing network (SON) configured to receive information indicating that access network equipment is experiencing a power outage. In response, the SON determines at least one of a time since the power outage, a present configuration of the access network equipment, a characteristic of the access network equipment, or a value of a performance indicator associated with the access network equipment. The SON then generates an updated configuration of the access network equipment based at least in part on the at least one of the time since the power outage, the present configuration of the access network equipment, the characteristic of the access network equipment, or the value of the performance indicator. Further, the SON then provides the updated configuration to the access network equipment. | 02-19-2015 |
20150050926 | LOW POWER TIMING, CONFIGURING, AND SCHEDULING - A device reduces its energy consumption using a relatively lower frequency and lower power secondary oscillator to maintain timing information when a higher frequency and higher power primary oscillator is inactivated. The secondary oscillator maintains timing information at a higher resolution than the period of the oscillator, so as to conserve synchronization when the higher frequency, higher power primary oscillator is inactivated. In some embodiments, a microsequencer is programmably configured to control an integrated radio receiver and transmitter using less power than an associated microprocessor would use to perform the same functions. In other embodiments, flexible event timing facilitates the merging of wake-up events to reduce the energy consumed by wake-up operations in the device. | 02-19-2015 |
20150056972 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNITY BASED MOBILE DEVICE PROFILING - A method, computer program product, and system is provided for community based mobile device profiling. In an implementation, a method may include receiving, via a first mobile device, a wireless signal associated with a second mobile device. The method may also include determining an identity of a user associated with the second mobile device. The method may further include establishing at least one setting of the first mobile device based upon, at least in part, a mobile device profile associated with the first mobile device and the identity of the user associated with the second mobile device. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056973 | USING VEHICLE DATA TO MAKE CALL TERMINATION DECISIONS - A method and apparatus for terminating a call directed to a mobile device using vehicle operating information. In some embodiments, the method may include receiving a call request to establish a call with the mobile device, selecting a call termination procedure based on the vehicle operating information, and causing the call to be terminated using the selected call termination procedure. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056974 | PORTABLE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR RESTRICTING USE OF PORTABLE DEVICE - A method for restricting a use of a portable device is provided. The method includes receiving an input for selecting an icon displayed on a screen of the portable device, the icon corresponding to an application for executing a concentration improvement mode that restricts the use of the application, setting a restriction time for the concentration improvement mode, deactivating the selected icon in the concentration improvement mode, and blocking a notification message provided by the application corresponding to the selected icon in the concentration improvement mode. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056975 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal and controlling method thereof are disclosed, by which data useful in an external device among data accumulated through the mobile terminal can be transmitted only. The present invention includes a display unit, a wireless communication unit configured to communicate with at least one external device, a memory configured to store a plurality of data accumulated via the mobile terminal, and a controller configured to search the stored data for at least one data useful in the external device, and the controller controls the wireless communication unit to transmit the searched data to the external device. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056976 | OPERATION REGULATION METHOD, OPERATION REGULATION PROGRAM PRODUCT, MOBILE TERMINAL, VEHICULAR APPARATUS, AND VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile terminal requiring operation regulation is communicably connected with a vehicular apparatus via wireless communication and executes an application for cooperating with the vehicular apparatus. An operation regulation method performed by the mobile terminal and the vehicular apparatus includes transmitting, from the vehicular apparatus to the mobile terminal, vehicle information indicating whether a vehicle including the vehicular apparatus is in a traveling state, determining, with the mobile terminal, whether the vehicle is in the traveling state based on the vehicle information when the vehicular apparatus is connected with the mobile terminal based on handsfree communication protocol, and, when the mobile terminal determines that the vehicle is in the traveling state, performing, with the mobile terminal, a regulation process for regulating one of (i) an operation of the application for cooperating with the vehicular apparatus or (ii) all or part of functions provided to the mobile terminal. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056977 | Telephone Call Log - A telephone call log including a system to produce the log and methods is described. A programmable telephone is programmed to monitor telephone activity on a telephone and create a calendar entry in a calendar application also operating on the telephone. The calendar entry can be synchronized across devices such that notes can be created on a separate device and associated with the calendar entry. In one embodiment handwritten notes may be linked as a file to the calendar entry. In another embodiment the phone log application further monitors the location of the phone and the calendar entry of the phone log further includes the location, speed and heading of the phone at the time the call was made or received. | 02-26-2015 |
20150065105 | System and Methods for Deferred and Remote Device Branding - Methods and systems for delivering branding information to a portable electronic device based on a brand SKU. The brand SKU is assigned to a device in addition to or to replace an OEM SKU that may have been used for testing and traceability. Based on detection of a brand SKU and a determination as to what brand is associated with the brand SKU, upon power up downstream in the supply chain at the OEM, or at the distribution center, or at the point of sale, a brand payloads based on the brand SKU is sent to the portable electronic device. The brand payloads may comprise logos, configurable options, and access options for hardware and software to various network services including voice services and data services. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065106 | LINKING USER EQUIPMENT CONTEXTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SAME PHYSICAL DEVICE - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product are provided. The apparatus may be configured to link user equipment contexts associated with same physical device. A network entity may determine a link between a first context and a second context of a user equipment, and may combine procedures related to the first and the second contexts when the first context and the second context are linked. The first context and the second context may be associated with a common international mobile equipment identity of the UE and different international mobile subscriber identities. A wireless device may maintain a first wireless communications link corresponding to a first subscription and a second wireless communications link corresponding to a second subscription. The wireless device may refrain from performing a first radio resource procedure in relation to the first subscription after performing a similar radio resource procedure in relation to the second subscription. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065107 | MANAGEMENT OF MOVEMENT STATES OF AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - Systems, methods, and computer-readable media for managing movement states of an electronic device are provided that may leverage pass data from a pass application when determining a current or future movement state of an electronic device. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065108 | COORDINATED SCHEDULING WITH ADAPTIVE MUTING - Systems, methods, apparatuses, and computer program products relating to coordinated scheduling with adaptive muting are provided. One method comprises transmitting, by a network element, calculated impact information for a cell of the network element when taking an action related to a cell of the network element and/or taking an action related to a cell of a second network element. The method may also comprise transmitting a request for taking the action related to the cell of the second network element under certain circumstances | 03-05-2015 |
20150065109 | ENHANCED IDLE MODE MECHANISMS FOR POWER EFFICIENT DEVICES - Methods and apparatuses for improved power management of a user equipment (UE) are presented. In an aspect, an example method is presented that includes detecting a first trigger event, transitioning an operational mode of the UE from a first mode to a second mode based on detecting the first trigger event, wherein a paging cycle rate and a cell measurement rate of the UE are based on the operational mode of the UE. The example method further includes monitoring a paging channel of a serving cell associated with the UE according to the paging cycle rate and performing cell measurement of one or more available cells according to the cell measurement rate while the UE is operating according to the second mode. Furthermore, the example method includes detecting a second trigger event and transitioning the operational mode of the UE from the second mode to the first mode. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065110 | PORTABLE INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - A portable information processing device includes: a sensor configured to detect physical amount which changes according to a location within predetermined space; a first storage unit configured to store an association between the information of the physical amount and location information; a first processor configured to execute an application program; a second storage unit of which the storage capacity is smaller than that of the first storage unit, configured to store a part of the associations; and a second processor, which is connected to the sensor, configured to acquire the current location from the information of the physical amount detected by the sensor, and the associations stored in the second storage unit; wherein the first processor extracts a part of the associations from the associations stored in the first storage unit according to change in the current location due to movement of the portable information processing device. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065111 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND CONTROL METHODS AND CONTROL PROGRAMS THEREOF - An apparatus of this invention is directed to an information processing apparatus that selects an appropriate combination of a device connected to a mobile terminal and a program used in the information processing apparatus to operate the device via a network and the mobile terminal, based on a history of the combination. The information processing apparatus accumulates the history of the combination of the device connected via the network and the mobile terminal, and the program used in the information processing apparatus to operate the device. When receiving information about the device connected to the mobile terminal from the mobile terminal via the network, the information processing apparatus selects the combination of the device and the program based on the history of the combination of the device and the program accumulated in an accumulator. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065112 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANGING CELL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for changing a physical cell identity (PCI) of a mobile relay node (MRN) cell in a wireless communication system is provided. When a donor eNodeB (DeNB) changes the PCI of the MRN cell, the DeNB transmits a message indicating a change of the PCI of the MRN cell to an MRN if it is determined that the PCI of the MRN cell collides with the PCI of a DeNB cell or a PCI of neighbor cells. When the MRN changes the PCI of the MRN cell, the MRN transmits a message including the changed PCI of the MRN cell to user equipments (UEs) served by the MRN. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065113 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE HAVING PLURALITY OF SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONES - A portable electronic device includes a display unit, a first audio unit, a second audio unit, a first sensing unit, a second sensing unit, and a controlling unit. The first audio unit includes a first speaker and a first microphone. The second audio unit includes a second speaker and a second microphone. The first sensing unit senses an orientation of the portable electronic device. The second sensing unit senses whether a user is close to one of the first speaker and the second speaker. The controlling unit triggers one of the first audio unit and the second audio unit to output and input audio signals according to the orientation of the portable electronic device and turns off the display unit when the user is close to the one of the first speaker and the second speaker. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065114 | NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION (NFC) METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM EMPLOYING A CELLULAR-COMMUNICATIONS CAPABLE COMPUTING DEVICE - Cellular-capable computing device and a related system and methodology are disclosed. The computing device includes a touch screen display, one or more processors, a memory device, and a first near field communication (NFC) module and first NFC antenna configured to be communicatively coupled to a second NFC module and second NFC antenna of an electronic device. The computing device includes a network transceiver configured to communicate with a cellular communications network. The memory device stores one or more applications configured to be executed by the one or more processors, and the computing device is configured to transmit to the at least one electronic device a representation of one or more electronic credentials stored in the at least one memory device based on the first NFC antenna being within a radio frequency (RF) field of the second NFC antenna. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065115 | MANAGING DATA REPRESENTATION FOR USER EQUIPMENTS IN A COMMUNICATION SESSION - In an embodiment, an application server receives, from a given UE, data that is configured to visually represent physical user input detected at the given UE at a first level of precision. The application server determines data presentation capabilities of a target UE and/or a performance level associated with a connection between the application server and the target UE. The application server selectively transitions the received data from the first level of precision to a second level of precision based on the determination, and transmits the selectively transitioned data to the target UE for presentation. In another embodiment, the application server receives a request to adjust display settings of the target UE from the given UE responsive to detected physical user input. The application server selectively adjusts the target UE's display settings based on the received request. | 03-05-2015 |
20150072667 | COMMUNICATING PHYSICAL LAYER WIRELESS PARAMETERS OVER AN APPLICATION PROGRAMMING INTERFACE - Methods, systems, and devices are described for communicating physical layer wireless parameters over an application programming interface. A wireless modem of a wireless device may measure at least one physical layer wireless parameter. The wireless modem may report the at least one physical layer wireless parameter to an application running on the wireless device over an application programming interface between the wireless modem and the application. A behavior of the application may be adapted to control wireless communications between the application and a network based on the at least one physical layer wireless parameter reported by the wireless modem. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 03-12-2015 |
20150072668 | MANAGING WIRELESS VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS - A method of controlling wireless voice and data communications includes identifying a radio access technology (RAT) in use at a vehicle telematics unit; establishing a wireless connection between the vehicle telematics unit and a central facility; wirelessly transmitting the identity of the RAT from the vehicle telematics unit to the central facility; receiving a message at the vehicle telematics unit from the central facility based on the identity of the RAT causing the vehicle telematics unit to: carry out simultaneous voice and data communications over a single wireless connection with the central facility when the identified RAT supports simultaneous voice and data communications; and establish a voice call with the central facility and receive data via short message service (SMS) messages when the identified RAT does not support simultaneous voice and data communications. | 03-12-2015 |
20150072669 | PORTABLE CELLULAR NETWORK SYSTEM - A system for setting up a cellular network is provided. The system includes a base station module and a core network module. The base station module has a transmitter, a receiver, and a processor configured to provide base station functions to handle transmission and reception of radio signals to and from cellular devices within the cellular network via the transmitter and receiver. The core network module has a processor configured to provide core network functions to handle cellular communication services for the cellular devices. The system has a switch connected to supply power to the base station module and the core network module from a power source. Activating the switch causes the base station functions and core network functions to be automatically and systematically started up to enable full functionality of the cellular network system. The system is sufficiently compact so that it can be carried by hand. | 03-12-2015 |
20150072670 | DUMMY PHONE NUMBERS TO MANAGE STATES ON MOBILE PHONES - A user is enabled to change state on a mobile phone through a peripheral device, such as a vehicle or headset. The mobile phone is coupled with the peripheral device by a communication link. Contacts stored by the mobile phone are copied to the peripheral device. The contacts include contact names and corresponding dummy phone numbers. Each contact name and corresponding dummy phone number is associated with a corresponding mobile phone state. A user can interact with the peripheral device to select a contact name of the contacts as if initiating a phone call with the corresponding dummy phone number to cause the corresponding mobile phone state to be activated at the mobile phone. Examples of mobile phone state activations/changes include activating an application in the mobile phone, or activating a particular SIM (subscriber identity module) of multiple SIMs of the mobile phone. | 03-12-2015 |
20150072671 | CONFIGURABLE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH CONFIGURABLE FRONT-END - A configurable wireless communication device includes a baseband processing module, a transmitter section, a receiver section, an antenna, transmit/receive isolation circuits, high frequency switches, and a configuration module. The baseband processing module converts outbound data into an outbound symbol stream and converts an inbound symbol stream into inbound data. The transmitter section converts the outbound symbol stream into an outbound signal and the receiver section converts an inbound signal into the inbound symbol stream. The configuration module, in a power combining mode, couples, via a set of high frequency switches, the antenna to a set of transmit/receive isolation circuits, wherein a number of the transmit/receive isolation circuits in the set of transmit/receive isolation circuits is based on a desired combined transmit power. | 03-12-2015 |
20150072672 | Headset Computer (HSC) As Auxiliary Display With ASR and HT Input - The present invention related to human/computer interfaces and more particularly to a headset computing display device that accepts voice commands and tracks head motions to provide command inputs to and receive display information from a software application executed on a host computing device. An example embodiment of the present invention includes a method of, and corresponding system for, operating a native Smartphone or PC application, simultaneously displaying an output of the application through the Smartphone or PC screen and a headset computing display device, and using speech and head tracking commands to control the native application. The present invention enables hands-free operation of a Smartphone or PC application. | 03-12-2015 |
20150079960 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMIC MOBILE APPLICATION PROCESSING - System and methods for dynamic mobile applications are disclosed herein. In one embodiment, a non-transitory computer readable medium storing executable instructions is provided. The instructions, when executed by a processor, cause the processor to authenticate a user and to retrieve a connectivity data. The instructions further cause the processor to connect with at least one external system based on the connectivity data and to retrieve an application programming interface (API) from the at least one external system. The instructions additionally cause the processor to execute the API to customize a graphical user interface (GUI), and to display the GUI on a display of a mobile device | 03-19-2015 |
20150079961 | TECHNIQUES FOR PHONE NUMBER AND DATA MANAGEMENT - Techniques for phone number and data management are described. A storage module may be configured to store contact information for a plurality of users, which may be members of a social network. A server device may be configured to receive a SIM change event from a mobile device associated with a first user of the plurality of users. The SIM change event may include updated contact information for the first user. The server may further be configured to identify one or more users from the plurality of users associated with the first user, and provide the updated contact information to one or more mobile devices associated with the one or more identified users. | 03-19-2015 |
20150079962 | CONTROLLING BEHAVIOR OF MOBILE DEVICES - A method of determining context-appropriate behavior for mobile devices | 03-19-2015 |
20150079963 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DISPLAYING NOTICE INFORMATION - A method for an electronic device to display notice information, includes: receiving notice information sent from an application program, the received notice information including one or more operation elements provided by the application program; and displaying, on a display of the electronic device, the received notice information in a predetermined area, the predetermined area being at least one of an area displaying a status bar or an area adjacent to the status bar, the status bar being arranged along an edge of the display. | 03-19-2015 |
20150079964 | Method, Server, Mobile Terminal and System for Program Execution - A program execution method, a server, a mobile terminal, and a system. The method includes: receiving a user action UA record sent by a mobile terminal; searching the UA record for a UA sequence that repeatedly appears; determining an association relationship between UAs in the UA sequence that repeatedly appears; creating a corresponding use mode according to the association relationship; and sending the use mode to the mobile terminal, so that the mobile terminal uses a use mode corresponding to a monitored UA, wherein the user action refers to an operation performed on an application program on the mobile terminal. In addition, a corresponding server, a mobile terminal, and a program execution system are provided. The present invention meets a personalized requirement of a user, and moreover reduces complexity of a user operation, saves the user's time and energy, and improves user experience. | 03-19-2015 |
20150087282 | AUTO-SETTING SILENT/VIBRATE MODE FOR CALL RECEPTION ON A MOBILE PHONE DEVICE - A system and method to auto-set a mobile phone device in silent or vibrate mode. The system and method may include an audio sensing component and a video sensing component of the phone environment, and a software application/service module for detecting and gathering data of a user's current surroundings or environment. The software application/service module may be configured to automatically set the mobile phone in silent or vibrate mode based on the user's current surroundings analysis and captured audio and video data. | 03-26-2015 |
20150087283 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Provided are a radio communication system allowing D2D communication to be provided by using a radio access network such as LTE while controlling the radio communication terminals from the network side. A radio base station | 03-26-2015 |
20150087284 | GENERATING REQUEST MESSAGE TO OBTAIN WIRELESS SERVICES USING A MINIMAL SET OF SERVICES THAT ARE DESIGNATED BY DEFAULT FOR A ROAMING CONDITION - A roaming condition is detected on a wireless device, in which the wireless device is operational in a region where the wireless device is not permitted in have wireless services other than a designated minimal set of services. A service request message is generated on the wireless device. The service request can be structured for handing by a home region service provider that can initiate one or more wireless services for the computing device using a local service provider for the region. The service request message can be transmitted from the computing device using the designated minimal set of services. | 03-26-2015 |
20150087285 | METHOD FOR REPRODUCING MUSIC FILE OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND MOBILE TERMINAL IMPLEMENTING THE SAME - Mobile communication terminals and methods are provided. A mobile communication terminal includes a transceiver, audio processing unit, speaker, connecting unit, display unit, input unit, and control unit. The control unit is configured to control to display, while in a silent mode, a user interface for reproduction of a music file, in response to a user input while in the silent mode, control to reproduce the music file and to output audio signals corresponding thereto through the speaker, in response to receiving an incoming call in the silent mode, stop reproduction of a music file, and output an indication of the reception of the incoming call by vibration or without sound according to a setting of the silent mode, and while in the silent mode, control reproduction of a music file depending upon detection of a change of a connection state of an external audio output device. | 03-26-2015 |
20150087286 | METHOD OF MANAGING AT LEAST ONE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE OF A TERMINAL, AND A TERMINAL - A method of managing at least one wireless communications interface of a terminal by performing an obtaining step (E | 03-26-2015 |
20150087287 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATIONS WITH A MOBILE-ORIGINATED-ONLY MODE - A method and apparatus for supporting machine-type communications (MTC) are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may configure itself to operate in a mobile-originated-only mode. The WTRU may perform no, or a subset of, radio resource control (RRC) idle and/or non-access stratum (NAS) idle/standby state procedures in the mobile-originated-only mode. For example, the WTRU may perform cell reselection but not paging monitoring in the mobile-originated-only mode. Alternatively, the WTRU may perform paging monitoring but not cell reselection and location update. The operation in the mobile-originated-only mode may be triggered explicitly or implicitly. For example, the WTRU may operate in the mobile-originated-only mode if an inactivity timer expires. The WTRU may switch the mode in accordance with a pre-configured schedule. After transition of the operation mode, the WTRU may send a message to the network indicating such mode switch. | 03-26-2015 |
20150094050 | MULTIVARIANT MOBILE OPERATING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION - Techniques are described for configuring a multivariant mobile operating system. The current state of a mobile computing device can be determined by determining keys to use for obtaining configuration settings. The determined keys can be used to retrieve configuration settings. The configuration settings can be prioritized. The prioritized configuration settings can be applied to configure the multivariant mobile operating system. | 04-02-2015 |
20150094051 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR PROGRAMMING USER-DEFINED INFORMATION INTO ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A device for programming user-defined information into an electronic device is provided. The programmer allows a user to program customized information, such as user-selected audio, video, or Internet access information into his or her programmable device. Such electronic devices include wireless telephones, pagers, and personal digital assistants. The programmer allows a user to, among other things, customize the device to suit his or her particular taste. | 04-02-2015 |
20150099500 | VEHICLE OPERATOR/DRIVER AND WIRELESS DEVICE SYNCHRONIZATION AND USES THEREOF - A vehicle operator/driver and device synchronization application is disclosed herein and includes: a two-way communication device, a software application stored on and executed from the device, from a network or a combination thereof, a vehicle communication component, a velocity determination component, and a driver identification component. | 04-09-2015 |
20150099501 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA BY USING MULTIPLE CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To solve the above-mentioned problem, the method for transmitting and receiving a signal by user equipment (UE) through one or more cells, according to one embodiment of the present specification, comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, a first message indicating whether one or more cells usable by the UE are enabled; determining which cells to enable or disable on the basis of the first message; and enabling or disabling the selected cells. According to the embodiment of the present specification, by aggregating carriers amongst different base stations, a possibility for the UE to transmit and receive high-speed data through carrier aggregation can increase. | 04-09-2015 |
20150099502 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CUSTOMIZING CONFIGURATION OF PRINTING APPLICATION - A method of customizing a configuration of a printing application of a mobile terminal, a mobile terminal, and a system are provided. The method includes establishing a wireless connection with an image forming device by using tag information written on a near field communication (NFC) tag of the image forming device, receiving usage authority information representing a function allowed for a user of the mobile terminal among functions of the image forming device, and selectively installing at least one plug-in corresponding to the usage authority information among a plurality of plug-ins that the printing application supports. | 04-09-2015 |
20150099503 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SMALL CELL ENHANCEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses are for small cell enhancement in a wireless communication system. The method includes the user equipment (UE) receiving a first Radio Resource Control (RRC) message from the first cell to configure a second cell to the UE. The method further includes the UE receiving a first Medium Access Control (MAC) control element to activate the second cell. The method include the UE receiving a second MAC control element to deactivate the second cell, wherein a field is included in the second MAC control element to indicate which signal the UE should measure on the second cell after the second cell is deactivated. | 04-09-2015 |
20150099504 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BLACKOUT, RETUNE AND SUBSCRIPTION ENFORCEMENT IN A CELLULAR NETWORK MULTIMEDIA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - A method for blackout, retune and roaming enforcement in a cellular network multimedia distribution system. The method includes the steps of receiving a plurality of service regions in the cellular network multimedia distribution system; determining an affiliation of the client with one of the service regions in the plurality of service regions; and, processing a service region specific message based on the affiliation. An apparatus, as well as a computer readable medium having instructions stored thereon, the stored instructions, when executed by a processor, cause the processor to perform the method are also disclosed. | 04-09-2015 |
20150105057 | Simplified Cell Phone - A simplified cell phone is provided. The present simplified cell phone is able to call only a single pre-programmed phone number and automatically calls that number when the phone is opened, without any additional actuation by the user. The device has a simplified design, allowing the device to be utilized by users who lack the technological acumen to properly make use of modern mobile phones, such as elderly individuals or extremely young children. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105058 | METHOD OF SIM/USIM PERSONALIZING USER EQUIPMENT - When SIM/USIM personalizing a user equipment, a unique ICCID, which is not protected by PIN, of a specific smartcard is used as feature data. Even in a PIN-locked status, the user equipment may directly access an integrated circuit card identity elementary file of a currently inserted smartcard and then determine whether the currently inserted smartcard is the specific smartcard without waiting for the PIN-unlock process to complete. Therefore, the present method of performing SIM/USIM personalization does not influence the efficiency of the booting process. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105059 | Method of Managing the Connectivity of a Terminal - The invention proposes in particular a method of managing the connectivity of a terminal connectable to a cellular communication network characterized in that it comprises the following steps carried out in the terminal:
| 04-16-2015 |
20150105060 | Message-strength-based ringing method, device and mobile terminal - A method, device and mobile terminal for message-strength-based ringing are disclosed. The method includes, when there is a current message service coming, making a query to an unprocessed message service database to obtain unprocessed historical service information corresponding to a current contact person, and acquiring the message strength of the current message service according to the unprocessed historical service information; and adjusting a current ringtone type and/or ringtone volume according to the message strength and a preset mapping table between a message strength and a ringtone type and/or ringtone volume. According to the disclosure, a mobile terminal is enabled to compute the current message strength of the current contact person, and flexibly set the ringtone type and ringtone volume of the current message service according to the message strength, thus giving a user more prompt information from a ringtone perspective, and ensuring better timely communication. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105061 | OBSERVATION PLATFORM FOR USING STRUCTURED COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods for using structured communications in an observation platform are disclosed. A signal is received from a first communication device at a second communication device associated with a computer system wherein a first characteristic of the signal corresponds to an audible source and a second characteristic of the signal corresponds to information indicative of a geographic position of the first communication device, and wherein the second communication device is associated with a radio range. A first user associated with the first communication device is recognized at the computer system. Context information is derived for the signal at the computer system. The signal is relayed to a destination derived from the context information via a network, wherein the destination is outside of the radio range of the second communication device. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105062 | METHOD FOR REPORTING USER EQUIPMENT ASSISTANCE INFORMATION REPORTING, USER EQUIPMENT, AND BASE STATION - The present invention provides a method for reporting user equipment assistance information, a user equipment, and a base station. The method includes: if a configuration in a user equipment UE for forbidding sending UE assistance information is not started or is closed, sending, by the UE, the UE assistance information to a base station; or, if a configuration in a UE for allowing sending UE assistance information is started, sending, by the UE, the UE assistance information to a base station. The foregoing method does not increase a signaling overhead of an air interface, and meanwhile, enables abase station to better optimize performance of a UE according to UE assistance information. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105063 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE MANAGEMENT - A method and system that limits the use of a communication device present in an area controlled by an intelligent controller. The intelligent controller detects any present communication devices in the area and conducts an inventory providing information about each detected device. The intelligent controller compares that information to a standard of use data, which specifies the conditions need to be present for allowing the usage of a communication device. If such conditions are not met, the intelligent controller sends commands to the communication device to restrict its functionality. Else if, the intelligent controller is incapable of restricting the communication device, it can notify authorities of unauthorized usage of a communication device in the restricted area. | 04-16-2015 |
20150111554 | FEMTO BASE STATION APPARATUS, OPERATION SYSTEM - In operation control for a femto base station apparatus, file updating is performed only for an apparatus needing updating only when needed to prevent the bandwidth of the network from being narrowed. Version information of a file necessary for the operation control for a femto base station apparatus is obtained before performing the operation control. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the obtained version information matches the version information of the file stored in the storage unit. The operation control is performed when matching is confirmed. Contrarily, a version of the file necessary for the operation control is obtained and the file updating is performed when a version confirming unit confirms mismatching of the version information. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111555 | SAFETY OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - Systems and methods for improving safety of a multi-function portable personal communications device can include determining a first position of the personal communications device, after a predetermined time interval, determining a second position of the personal communications device, determining the distance between the first position and the second position, determining the time interval in which the personal communications device moved from the first position and the second position, calculating an average velocity of the personal communications device based on the first position, the second position and the time interval and, if the average velocity of the personal communication device exceeds a predetermined value, sending an alert or inhibiting a function of the personal communications device. Other systems and methods that improve safety are also disclosed. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111556 | MOBILE STATION - To provide restriction control independently from the packet call and the voice call. A mobile station UE according to the present invention is configured to perform SSAC for determining whether or not to permit transmission of an IMS-related originating signal according to a SSAC restriction information broadcasted. IMS function | 04-23-2015 |
20150111557 | METHOD OF MANAGING CONTACT INFORMATION FOR MOBILE DEVICES ACCORDING TO NETWORK MESSAGES - When equipped with a smartcard which stores a plurality of contact numbers, a mobile device may send a communication request to a network by dialing a specific contact number. When unable to establish a connection with the specific number, the network is configured to send an error code to the mobile device. If the mobile device determines that the specific contact number is no longer valid based on the error code, all data related to the specific contact number is deleted in the smartcard and stored in the memory of the mobile device. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111558 | WEARABLE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A smart watch including a wireless communication unit configured to provide wireless communication; a battery configured to supply power to the smart watch; a base including a display configured to display information; first and second bands connected to the base such that the smart watch is attachable to a wrist of a user; and a processor configured to receive a palm touch input of the user on the display, and change a current status of the smart watch based on the received palm touch input. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111559 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND ARTICLE FOR MANAGING MOBILE DEVICES - A parent mobile device sends a communication to a child mobile device, such as a phone call or an SMS message. The child device has an application installed which responds to the communication by determining whether receipt of the communication satisfies a mobile-device-lock-down criteria. When the communication satisfies the lock down criteria, the mobile device selectively limits functionality of the mobile device based on the determination. A child using the mobile device may attempt to unlock the device, for example, by returning a phone call to the parent device. When an attempt is made to unlock the mobile device, the application determines whether the attempt satisfies a mobile-device-unlock criteria. The application selectively restores functionality of the mobile device based on the determination of whether the attempt satisfies the mobile-device-unlock criteria. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111560 | DISABLING WIRELESS TELEPHONE USE WHILE IN VEHICLE - A method includes determining that a wireless telephone is in a moving vehicle using, e.g., speed as calculated by the telephone using GPS signals or co-location of the telephone with a vehicle as might be determined by receiving the vehicle's position via Bluetooth. Use of the telephone is selectively denied if it is determined that the telephone is in a vehicle. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111561 | Communication System And Method - The invention relates to a communication system which comprises at least one user equipment having a plurality of identities associated therewith. The user equipment has means for storing at least one of the identities. Storage means are provided for storing at least one of the plurality of identities and means for receiving identity information from the user equipment, for obtaining from the storage means at least one identity associated with the received identity information and for sending to the user equipment the at least one obtained from the storage means. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111562 | Radio Based Location Power Profiles - Methods and systems of managing radio based power may include a mobile platform having a plurality of radios and logic to detect changes in location for the mobile platform. The logic may also deactivate at least one of the plurality of radios in response to the changes in location. The changes in location may be detected based on location information obtained from one or more active radios in the plurality of radios and connection losses with respect to active radios in the plurality of radios. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111563 | Service Control Method, Terminal, and Network Device - A service control method, a terminal, and a network device. The method includes measuring, by a terminal, a service status of interaction between the terminal and a network and/or a moving speed of the terminal; and reporting, by the terminal, measured service status information and/or speed information to a network device, so that the network device configures a network parameter of the terminal according to the service status information and/or the speed information. Therefore, a network throughput is improved, and terminal energy consumption is reduced. | 04-23-2015 |
20150119012 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND SOFTWARE FOR RECEIVING COMMANDS WITHIN A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATION - In an embodiment, a method provides for receiving commands within a mobile communications application running on a mobile communication device. The method includes monitoring text entered into a text input region of a touchscreen keyboard module within a user interface on the mobile communication device for an interrupt code, and detecting an interrupt code. The method also includes determining a command from a plurality of commands, based on user inputs following the interrupt code, identifying an action from a plurality of actions corresponding to the plurality of commands, and initiating the action corresponding to the command. | 04-30-2015 |
20150119013 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - The present disclosure relates to a mobile terminal and methods for entering memo that is associated with a telephone number used in communication. A mobile terminal according to one embodiment of the present disclosure may include a display unit configured to display a record of communication with a telephone number that is not available in an address book of the mobile terminal; and a controller configured to activate a memo input mode to enter a memo associated with the telephone number when the record is selected, store a memo entered in association with the telephone number separately from the address book when the memo is entered through the memo input mode, wherein the controller controls the display unit to display the entered memo associated with the telephone number in response to a communication with the telephone number. | 04-30-2015 |
20150119014 | FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT METHOD IN WIRELESS SYSTEM - A frequency management method and device as well as a wireless system are provided by which acceptable transmit power is efficiently determined for transmitting stations in a system on the interfering side, neither with concentration of processing load on some part nor with redundant processing. When a frequency management apparatus ( | 04-30-2015 |
20150119015 | APPLICATION ACCESS CLASS BARRING - Technology for supporting application access class (AAC) barring is disclosed. An evolved node B (eNB) may communicate to a user equipment (UE) that the eNB has a capability to support application access class (AAC) barring. An AAC message may be generated that includes one or more AAC parameters related to the AAC barring. The AAC message may be sent from the eNB to the UE, wherein the UE is barred from loading one or more applications UE based on the one or more AAC parameters in the AAC message. | 04-30-2015 |
20150119016 | DEVICE ACCESS - A technique for operating a wireless communication apparatus is provided. According to an example embodiment, the technique comprises operating a wireless communication apparatus in one of a plurality of states, said plurality of states comprising at least a discoverable state wherein the wireless communication apparatus is discoverable but not connectable and a connectable state wherein the wireless communication apparatus is both discoverable and connectable, receiving, when operating the wireless communication apparatus in the discoverable state, one or more requests from a remote wireless communication apparatus, and changing from the discoverable state to the connectable state in response to said requests fulfilling predefined criteria. | 04-30-2015 |
20150126170 | Multifactor Drive Mode Determination - A system and method of determining whether a device user is driving provide an improved ability to switch between a normal mode and a driving mode with fewer false positives and false negatives. Bluetooth connectivity and motion sensor readings are fused to make the drive mode determination and to set the timing of nay switch. In an embodiment, Bluetooth devices correlated with driving are used to modify the confidence level and the decision threshold associated with sensor input. When a node having a driving correlation higher than a particular threshold is connected to a device, a lower threshold is applied to the motion sensor input for entering drive mode and a higher threshold is applied for exiting drive mode. Similarly, when a user device is not connected to any highly correlated node, default thresholds may be used for entering and exiting the drive mode. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126171 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING A PERSONAL COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN A VEHICLE - An apparatus for detecting a personal communication device (PCD) in a vehicle is provided. The apparatus includes one or more near field communication (NFC) devices positioned about a driver zone of the vehicle for being wirelessly coupled to the PCD. The PCD is configured to (i) determine if the vehicle is moving above a predetermined vehicle speed, (ii) wirelessly transmit a first signal to the one or more NFC devices in the vehicle, and (iii) determine that the PCD is positioned in the driver zone of the vehicle in response to a second signal from the one or more NFC devices. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126172 | REMOTE VERIFICATION FOR CONFIGURATION UPDATES - In various embodiments, a control client is configured to determine whether or not the most current configuration profile has been installed within a corresponding mobile device. In particular embodiments, the client is configured to store its own copy of a configuration profile and to compare its copy with the most current configuration profile generated by a device management system as well as to the configuration profile currently installed and applied by a configuration manager within the mobile device. Each configuration profile includes an embedded verification token that facilitates this process. Furthermore, the client may be configured to inform the device management system as to whether or not the current configuration profile has been installed. The device management system may govern enterprise access by the mobile device based on whether or not the current configuration profile has been installed. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126173 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS OF ADJUSTING ANTENNA ELECTRICAL TILT - There is provided a computer-implemented method for selecting an electrical tilt angle for at least one cellular antenna comprising: receiving at least one parameter indicative of mobile client resource use associated with at least one cellular antenna, the at least one cellular antenna being part of a plurality of antennas arranged in at least one cluster as part of a cellular network; and iteratively adjusting an electrical tilt angle of the at least one antenna so that the at least one parameter indicative of client resource use is maintained within at least one predefined threshold, thereby providing users of the mobile clients of the at least one cellular antenna with at least a level of service within the at least one predefined threshold. | 05-07-2015 |
20150133098 | DO-NOT-DISTURB MODES - Methods related to do-not-disturb modes activated by a mobile device are provided. An example method may include receiving a do-not-disturb notification by a mobile device indicating that the mobile device is in a do-not-disturb mode. The method may further include temporarily disabling, when the mobile device is in the do-not-disturb mode, causing at least one communications feature associated with the mobile device and one or more additional communications features associated with one or more ancillary devices to be temporarily disabled. Another example method may include detecting whether a mobile device is in one of a stationary display screen face down state or a moving display screen face down state, and, when the mobile device is in at least one of the stationary display screen face down state or the moving display screen face down state, causing a first communications feature associated with the mobile device to be temporarily disabled and sending a do-not-disturb notification to a server. Systems and computer-readable media are also described. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133099 | MIGRATION OF A VIRTUAL ACCESS POINT - A microcell wireless network includes at least one access controller (AC) and multiple physical APs in wireless communication with mobile stations. The AC configures an independent virtual AP for each mobile station in the microcell wireless network on a first physical AP associated with the mobile station. When migration of a virtual AP configured for a mobile station is required, the AC transferring the virtual AP from the first physical AP to a second physical AP according to a predetermined policy. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133100 | CABLE CHIP SYSTEM - The present invention relates to communications systems incorporating peripheral devices such as a push-to-talk (PTT) or similar and interface cables to connect these to a headset and/or a communication device such as a man worn two-way radio, vehicle intercom system, mobile phone, etc. In particular, the invention relates to such interface cable having an integrated functionality. The basic idea of the invention is to use an interface between a first and a second device in a voice communication system, which interface is specific to the second device and holds digital information allowing the first device to identify or adapt to the second device. This allows the first device to automatically adapt its settings and/or functionality to, and thus to function with, several different second devices without any need for updating, re-configuration, or user intervention. Thus the first device can be hot swapped or hot plugged with different second devices simply by using a cable specific to each particular second device. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133101 | Terminal and method for activating terminal - Provided are a terminal and a method for activating a terminal to facilitate awakening the terminal by a user in a dark environment. The method for activating a terminal includes: when the terminal is in a dormancy state, it is detected whether a screen triggering signal is received that meets a preset condition; if the screen triggering signal is received that meets the preset condition, a light emitting module arranged near a dormancy awakening key is lighted; an awakening signal generated by pressing the dormancy awakening key by a user is received and the terminal is activated upon receiving the awakening signal. Through implementation of the present disclosure, when a user needs to activate the terminal in a dark environment, he/she only needs to perform on the screen a slide operation or a long-press click operation that meets a condition so that the light emitting module can be lighted, and with the guidance of the light emitting module, the terminal is easily activated through the dormancy awakening key, thus avoiding blind operation and improving user experiences. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133102 | TRIGGERING OF DIRECT DISCOVERY SIGNALS - Embodiments of systems and methods enabling Device-to-Device (D2D) discovery in a cellular network assisted D2D communication system are disclosed. In some embodiments, a method of operation of a wireless device comprises receiving at least one trigger for D2D discovery from a controlling node of the wireless device in a cellular communications network. The method of operation of the wireless device further comprises transmitting multiple transmission instances of a discovery signal of the wireless device for a D2D discovery event in response to the at least one trigger using resources selected from a group consisting of: different time resources, different frequency resources, different code resources, different time and frequency resources, different time and code resources, different frequency and code resources, and different time, frequency, and code resources. In this manner, detection of the discovery signal by other proximate wireless devices is substantially improved. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133103 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING POWER AMPLIFIERS - A method for an electronic device includes amplifying a signal by a first power amplifier, obtaining a temperature of the first power amplifier during the amplification of the signal, comparing the temperature of the first power amplifier to a predetermined threshold value, and switching the first power amplifier to a second power amplifier for amplifying a signal if the temperature of the first power amplifier is higher than a threshold value. An electronic device for switching power amplifiers are also disclosed. | 05-14-2015 |
20150133104 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING UP AN INTERFACE IN A MOBILE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method set up an interface in a mobile terminal. The method includes: storing an interface setup application including customized data unique to countries and operators; determining whether a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card is inserted into the mobile terminal when the mobile terminal is powered on; detecting a Mobile Country Code (MCC) and a Mobile Network Code (MNC) included in the SIM card, if the SIM card is inserted into the mobile terminal; executing the interface setup application and searching for customized data corresponding to the detected MCC and MNC from among the customized data unique to countries and operators; and installing an interface of the mobile terminal based on the searched customized data. | 05-14-2015 |
20150140981 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO MANAGE MOBILE DATA NETWORK USAGE FOR VOIP CALLS - A method and system to select an operating mode of a mobile device, the method including: detecting a request for a call; determining by a processor of the mobile device a data usage limit; determining by a processor of the mobile device a cumulative amount of data sent using the data connection during a current billing period; determining, by a processor of the mobile device, an availability of a data connection; and setting a communication mode of the mobile device depending upon the availability of a data connection and a comparison of the cumulative amount of data sent to the data usage limit. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140982 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PRE AND POST PROCESSING OF BEACON ID SIGNALS - A wireless beacon message management system and method of operating the system with a mobile device. At least one wireless beacon is strategically located in a premises, such as a building or other geocentrically defined area. Each wireless beacon has means for transmitting a wireless beacon signal, wherein the wireless beacon signal includes a beacon data message that has a beacon identification that identifies the beacon transmitting the signal, and optionally the content being delivered. A mobile device such as a smartphone, tablet or the like receives the wireless beacon signal and analyzes it to extract the beacon identification and optional beacon content. The mobile device may then apply one or more software filters to the beacon data message that enables the mobile device to initiate an action based on the filtered beacon data message. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140983 | TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Control means | 05-21-2015 |
20150140984 | Method, system and related device for overriding low priority and/or EAB - A method, system and related device for overriding low priority and/or Extended Access Bar (EAB) are disclosed. The method includes the following steps: an Open Mobile Alliance (OMA) Device Management (DM) server sends dual-priority User Equipment (UE) a low priority overriding indicator and/or an EAB overriding indicator; and the dual-priority UE determines whether to override low priority and/or EAB according to the low priority overriding indicator and/or the EAB overriding indicator. The disclosure determines an EAB processing manner of dual-priority UE, implements the NAS functional parameter management for the dual-priority UE, and facilitates the application and promotion of the dual-priority UE. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140985 | Device and method of driving multi-PDP data communication for mobile broadband device - A device and method of driving multi-Packet Data Protocol (PDP) data communication for a mobile broadband device are disclosed. The device includes: a Radio Interface Layer (RIL) module which is configured to receive a function call request message based on data or a configuration service, and call a PDP management module through an extended multi-PDP support interface; a PDP management module, which is configured to acquire a PDP type of an access device corresponding to the function call request and currently supported by the system, trigger a PDP control module, and update and maintain a PDP resource state table; a PDP control module which is configured to encapsulate the function call request message into a Qualcomm MSM Interface (QMI) instruction or covert it into an AT instruction, carry in the instruction identifier information of the access device and output the instruction to a device management module; and a device management module, which is configured to send the instruction to the corresponding access device to perform PDP setup. The present disclosure is capable of supporting a multi-PDP data communication mode and increasing the access speed for a radio broadband device. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140986 | Auxiliary Channel Remote Device Management, Diagnostics, and Self-Installation - A remote device management, diagnostics, and self-installation architecture employs multiple wireless links, which may include a local wireless link and a remote wireless link. The architecture employs cellular channels for remote management of customer premises equipment (CPE). Within the architecture, test devices may operate on the CPE. As examples, the test devices may include a cellular radio, or the test devices may be in communication with another device that includes the cellular radio. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140987 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication device including: a first memory to store a plurality of program modules into which a first program is divided, the first program providing a first radio access technology (RAT), a second memory to store a second program providing a second RAT for executing, a first processor to input a command to a second processor when a RAT used by the radio communication device is changed from the second RAT to the first RAT, the second processor to execute a program or a program module that is stored in the second memory, wherein the first processor predicts the command based on a communication state of the radio communication device, selects at least one preferential program module among the plurality of program modules based on the predicted command, and controls to load the at least one preferential program module from the first memory to the second memory preferentially. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140988 | METHOD OF PROCESSING EVENT AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - A device and method in which an electronic device processes an event by interlocking with another electronic device are provided. The method of operating an electronic device includes detecting occurrence of an event. The method also includes determining state information of the electronic device. The method further includes determining whether to interlock event information with at least one second electronic device based on the state information of the electronic device. The method includes transmitting event information to the at least one second electronic device in response to event information interlocking determination with the at least one second electronic device. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140989 | System And Method For Managing A Mobile Device - A system and method for managing a mobile device(s) to provide for a notification(s) when specified thresholds are reached and/or execute defined rules for the mobile device(s). The rules can relate to any function of the mobile device(s), including but not limited to, notification when a percentage of voice/data/SMS is reached during a billing cycle, notification when a mobile device(s) leaves a geo-fence, and restrict a mobile device(s) when a threshold is reached. The system provides a versatile management system allowing a user to effectively control use of a mobile device(s) and manage costs. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140990 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING HOME DEVICES ON GROUP BASIS IN A HOME NETWORK SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for controlling home devices on a group basis in a home network system are provided. The method includes collecting operation state information about a plurality of home devices, generating control history information about the plurality of home devices based on the collected operation state information, receiving a group control command for a group of home devices from among the plurality of home devices, the group of home devices being set based on the control history information, and controlling operations of the group of home devices according to the received group control command. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140991 | AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION OF A VEHICLE DRIVER BASED ON DRIVING BEHAVIOR - A method and apparatus are disclosed that identify a motor vehicle operation and whether a driver is operating a mobile device. One example of operation may include a method that includes receiving vehicle data based on active operation of a vehicle and compiling a candidate driver identification profile (DIP) based on the received vehicle data. The method may also include comparing the candidate DIP to a pre-stored DIP and determining a match between the candidate DIP and the pre-stored DIP. The method may also include applying a restriction to a mobile station operated by a driver of the vehicle responsive to the match determination. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140992 | INITIATION OF WIRELESS SERVICE - Disclosed are various embodiments for implementing wireless service for a wireless device. In a representative embodiment, a service initiation system is executed in a computing device that communicates with a service provider system over a network to activate a wireless service associated with a newly purchased wireless device. The service initiation system also generates a network page to send to a client over the network, where the network page has a component that initiates a porting of a contact designation associated with a prior wireless device to the newly purchased wireless device separate from the activation of the wireless service for the newly purchased wireless device. | 05-21-2015 |
20150140993 | USING IDENTIFIERS TO ESTABLISH COMMUNICATION - Confusion resulting from assigning the same node identifier to multiple nodes is resolved through the use of confusion detection techniques and the use of unique identifiers for the nodes. In some aspects an access point and/or an access terminal may perform operations relating to detecting confusion and/or providing a unique identifier to resolve confusion. | 05-21-2015 |
20150148018 | VEHICLE OPERATOR SPECIFIC USER DEVICE MANAGEMENT - An embodiment provides a method, including: detecting, in a vehicle, a user device is proximate to a receiver device of the vehicle; determining, using a processor, that the user device is associated with a current operator of the vehicle; permitting access to the vehicle; and disabling a communication capability of the user device. Other aspects are described and claimed. | 05-28-2015 |
20150148019 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS TO ENSURE THAT THE USER OF A TOUCH OR KEYPAD OPERATED DEVICE WITHIN A MOVING VEHICLE MUST USE TWO HANDS FOR DEVICE OPERATION - Systems and methods are directed to configuring a portable electronic device such that a user of the portable electronic device is required to use two hands to operate the portable electronic device. In some configurations, the portable electronic device determines whether the portable electronic device is moving at a rate of speed that is greater than a predetermined threshold before requiring the user to use two hands. Alternatively, or in addition, a function, feature, and/or application of the portable electronic device may be inhibited such that two hands are required. Once the portable electronic device determines that the user is using two hands, an operation, feature, function, and/or application may then be enabled although still be inhibited. | 05-28-2015 |
20150148020 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELF-ACTIVATING A MOBILE DEVICE - To activate a pre-provisioned mobile device on a network, an initial data communication for device activation is allowed between the device and an self-activation portal. At this point, the network prevents other more regular communication of the mobile device via the network. The portal automatically collects identification information from the mobile device and collects information from the user to activate the device on a network service account. The portal causes a provisioning system to provision data to network elements to activate device service in the network. After provisioning is complete, a notification is sent to the mobile device; and after device communication is completed a record that controlled routing to the portal before activation is deleted. The mobile device then communicates via the network to obtain data for storage in the device, to complete activation and permit normal operation of the mobile device via the network. | 05-28-2015 |
20150148021 | Methods and Systems for System Updating of Mobile Devices Operating in Privacy or other Informationally Restricted Modes | 05-28-2015 |
20150148022 | CONCURRENT USES OF NON-CELLULAR INTERFACES FOR PARTICIPATING IN HYBRID CELLULAR AND NON-CELLULAR NETWORKS - The subject matter describes software, devices, networks, and methods to configure a non-cellular interface of a wireless device to establish two or more wireless links in a hybrid of cellular network and a non-cellular network. The advantage of concurrent uses of non-cellular interfaces maximizes the use of computing and communication resources to perform multi-hop communication and to expand the coverage of cellular networks. | 05-28-2015 |
20150148023 | System and Method for Managing an Alarm Clock - A system and a method for managing an alarm clock are disclosed. The method includes the follow steps: activating a periodic alarm clock setting; receiving an activation command of the periodic alarm clock setting; deactivating the periodic alarm clock setting according to the activation command and displaying a reactivation setting interface; receiving a reactivation time of the periodic alarm clock setting inputted by a user from the reactivation setting interface; and reactivating the periodic alarm clock setting automatically at the reactivation time of the periodic alarm clock setting. | 05-28-2015 |
20150148024 | UE CONFIGURATION METHOD, NETWORK SIDE DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR PROXIMITY AWARENESS - Disclosed are a UE configuration method, network side device and system for proximity awareness in the present invention, which are used to achieve the function of obtaining the service information by proximity awareness between terminals in a cellular communication system. The network side device configures the service ID of each service type to be sent by the transmission UE and the temporary device ID, and the network side device configures the service ID filtering template for the receiving UE according to the service types to be received by the receiving UE, and thus the configured transmission UE and the receiving UE can obtain the service information by proximity awareness. | 05-28-2015 |
20150148025 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CELL DENSITY, CELL CONTROLLING APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The disclosure relates to an electronic device, method for controlling cell density in a wireless communication system and a non-transitory computer readable medium. The electronic device includes a circuitry configured to determine a target density of cells and a target energy efficiency based on current network status. The circuitry is further configured to control adjusting operating states of a plurality of cells to fit the target density of cells. A current density of cells of the plurality of cells is different with the target density of cells. | 05-28-2015 |
20150148026 | CONTROLLING WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS ON BEHALF OF PUBLIC SERVICE AGENCIES | 05-28-2015 |
20150296021 | MARITIME COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - The present invention relates to a maritime communication system and method and provides a maritime communication system and method, the maritime communication system comprising: a plurality of user terminals by which a SNS can be used on the sea, and in which an application for providing content is installed; at least one maritime communication server for providing the SNS and the content for the user terminal on the sea; a land communication server for communicating with the maritime communication server and controlling communication between a user of the maritime communication server and a user located on land or a user of another maritime communication server; a content server for providing the content of the application via the land communication server; and a management server for producing and distributing the application installed in the user terminals or controlling operations of all the servers. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296074 | LIMITING USER INTERACTION WITH A COMPUTING DEVICE BASED ON PROXIMITY OF A USER - A first computing device monitors a presence of a second computing device, and determines when the second computing device has moved out of an area proximate to the first computing device. In response to determining that the second computer moved out of the area, the first computing device is automatically configured to limit user interaction with one or more applications currently operating on the first computing device to a predetermined set of commands while preventing user interaction with other applications provided by the first computing device. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296075 | System for prevention of texting while driving - A system for prevention of texting while driving is comprised of an always-on mobile application which is installed in the user's smartphone or other mobile electronic device, and a proximity sensor and transmitter which is preferably mounted on the steering column of the user's vehicle. The sensor detects any electronic device with the mobile application installed within a specific short distance, consistent with the user being seated in the driver's seat with the electronic device activated. The sensor transmits a periodic SMS text message which is received by the electronic device. The electronic device receives the text message, and the mobile application covers the visual display with a prohibitive message. Optionally, the mobile application may also disable the keys of the electronic device. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296320 | ENFORCEMENT OF REGULATORY GUIDELINES ASSOCIATED WITH A DRIVE MODE OF A VEHICLE - In an example, a method of enforcing regulatory guidelines related to functionality of an electronic device associated with a vehicle when the vehicle is in a drive mode includes interfacing an application of an electronic device associated with a vehicle with an Application Programming Interface (API). The method additionally includes determining that the vehicle is in the drive mode. In the method, the API may modify a functionality of the application of the electronic device in accordance with regulatory guidelines associated with operation of the electronic device when the vehicle is in the drive mode. The modification may be based on the determination that the vehicle is in the drive mode. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296322 | METHOD OF SELECTING AN EXTERNAL ELECTRONIC DEVICE CONNECTED WITH AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING SAME - A method of selecting an external electronic device connected with an electronic device is provided. The method determining, among the plurality of external electronic devices, at least one external electronic device connected with the electronic device, transmitting signals to the at least one external electronic device, receiving data corresponding to the signals from the at least one external electronic device, selecting one of the at least one external electronic device based on the received data and transmitting an operation execution signal for the data to the selected external electronic device. A method of selecting an external electronic device connected with electronic device is provided. The method includes receiving a signal from the electronic device, transmitting data corresponding to the signal to the electronic device, receiving an operation execution signal for the data from the electronic device and performing at least one of various operations according to the operation execution signal. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296368 | DEVICE POLICY MANAGER - Various technologies described herein pertain to policy management on a mobile device. The mobile device includes a device policy manager system that includes a unified interface component and a policy handler component. The unified interface component is configured to receive policy configuration requests from multiple policy sources, including at least an internal policy source component executed by the mobile device and a device management server external to the mobile device. The policy configuration requests include at least a first policy configuration request (a first policy value for a policy) from a first policy source and a second policy configuration request (a second policy value for the policy) from a second policy source. The policy handler component is configured to resolve the conflict between the first and second policy values based on a conflict resolution technique to set a current policy value for the policy that controls the mobile device. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296369 | Handling of Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Cards with Multiple Profiles - Various embodiments provide methods implemented on a mobile communication device for generating a database of information associated with a plurality of profiles associated with a SIM installed in the mobile communication device in order to enable the device to efficiently switch between profiles by utilizing the information stored in the database. In various embodiments, the mobile communication device may populate the profile database with information, data, and/or values needed to acquire service/camp on a network for each of a plurality of profiles associated with the SIM by activating each profile, collecting such service information associated with each activated profile, and storing the service information in the profile database for use in switching between the plurality of profiles at a later time. Specifically, by using information already determined to be relevant to and/or necessary for acquiring service with a profile, the mobile communication device may switch to that profile quickly. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296554 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE CAPABLE OF COMMUNICATING WITH ANOTHER DEVICE - An electronic device comprises a first communicating unit wirelessly communicating with the other electronic device and a controller establishing wireless communication with the other electronic device through the first communicating unit by using setting information. The controller permits the other electronic device to remotely control the operation of the electronic device within a first range if the setting information used for establishing the communication is information not-temporarily issued (for example, a permanent SSID, a permanent PW). The controller permits the other electronic device to remotely control the operation of the electronic device within a second range limited as compared to the first range if the setting information used for establishing the communication is information temporarily issued (for example, a temporary SSID, a temporary PW). | 10-15-2015 |
20150304480 | Terminal and operation method for controlling terminal - A terminal and method for controlling the terminal are provided to resolve the problem of poor versatility of current terminal-control technology. The method includes: the pressure acting upon a terminal is collected and pressure information is obtained by calculating the collected pressure; a control operation mapping table is invoked, wherein the control operation mapping table contains at least one item of standard pressure information and a control operation command corresponding to said standard pressure information; it is determined whether the control operation mapping table contains standard pressure information matching the pressure information and, if such standard pressure information exists, the control operation command corresponding to the standard pressure information is invoked and executed. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304481 | Application of the invoke facility service to restrict invocation of compound wireless mobile communication services: division 2 - vehicular safety measures - This invention provides a mechanism for restricting invocation of wireless mobile terminal (Smartphone) apps whose execution creates a vehicular driving hazard. Events that cause such hazards are included. An event example is “being a vehicle's driver” and attempting to do the app of texting. Events to restrict an app invocation are also included. These include remote restrictions, such as parents remotely turning off the texting app of their children driving an automobile. Spatial parameters, such as driving on high speed and/or heavy traffic roads, also represent restricting events. Events are inserted within an Invoke facility service's Boolean expression by the builder of an Invoke facility service. The Boolean expression determines whether the invocation of its related app takes place. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304483 | Bluetooth-Based Limitation of Functionality of Motor Vehicle Drivers' Personal Electronic Mobile Smart Devices During Driving - A system for managing operation of a personal electronic mobile smart device when it is on board a motor vehicle; wherein the personal electronic mobile smart device and the motor vehicle are each provided with a Bluetooth-based short-range bidirectional wireless communication system operable to detect the presence of short-range bidirectional wireless communication systems within its communication range and to connect to the short-range bidirectional wireless communication systems detected within its communication range; and wherein the personal electronic mobile smart device is configured to implement a number of user-accessible functions and to automatically reconfigure access to its user-accessible functions when its short-range bidirectional wireless communication system is Bluetooth-connected to the short-range bidirectional wireless communication system of the motor vehicle. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304485 | A MOBILE TERMINAL AND AN INCOMING CALL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal and an incoming call processing method thereof are disclosed. The method comprises the following steps: controlling the incoming call controller to be shown on a pre-designated position of a screen when the mobile terminal is in a screen-locked state and the incoming call arrives; detecting by the mobile terminal whether the incoming call controller is dragged for a predetermined distance, and controlling an Answer and Decline selection interface to be shown on the screen when the incoming call controller is dragged for the predetermined distance; receiving by the mobile terminal an operating instruction from a user through the Answer and Decline selection interface and entering an in-call interface or declining the incoming call. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304792 | System and method for adapting an electronic device for different desired persona - A system and method are described for automatically or manually adapting the user interface of a mobile electronic device (“MED”) for a desired persona of the system user. This will permit the system user to provide a desired personal image to the outside world. The ability of a system user to adapt the MED for a system user's persona will include the changing the user interface consistent with the persona the system user desires to represent internally and externally. This will also permit the system user to change the external connections of his/her MED consistent with that persona, which will remain the active persona until the system user decides to change the persona. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304862 | SELF-CONFIGURATION OF A PHYSICAL CELL IDENTITY (PCI) AT A CELL - The present disclosure presents a method and an apparatus for self-configuring a physical cell identify (PCI) at a cell upon detecting a PCI confusion at a neighbor cell. For example, the method may include detecting that a PCI confusion exists at a second cell based on a message (e.g., configuration update message or a X2 setup response message) received from the second cell. The first cell may initiate a timer that is selected from a first timer and a second timer, the first timer longer in duration than the second timer. The first cell then configures a new PCI for the first cell when the timer expires or maintains a current PCI for the first cell when the timer is reset prior to expiration. As such, self-configuration of PCI at a cell may be achieved. | 10-22-2015 |
20150312395 | PERFORM AN ACTION BASED ON DIALED DIGITS - A method includes receiving, via an input interface of a mobile communication device, user input corresponding to dialed digits. The method includes causing a transmitter of the mobile communication device to transmit a connection signal to a communication network device based on the dialed digits. The method includes determining, at a processor of the mobile communication device, whether the dialed digits are associated with an action based on action information stored at a memory of the mobile communication device. The method further includes when the dialed digits are associated with the action, automatically causing the transmitter to transmit a disconnect signal to the communication network device, the disconnect signal indicating termination of a communication session associated with the dialed digits, and performing the action using the processor. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312403 | Wireless Communications Device having Contact Specific Silent Mode Disabling Capabilities - A wireless communications device includes a memory, an output device, an input device and a processor. The memory is adapted to maintain individual profiles relating to each of a plurality of user contacts. The profiles include a silent notification mode setting. The output device is operable to emit audible notifications responsive to incoming communications from the user contacts. The input device is operable to change a notification mode of the device between an audible notification mode and a silent notification mode. The processor is operable for processing user selections of the silent notification mode setting between a silent mode enabled setting and a silent mode disenabled setting for the profiles. The processor is configured to cause the output device to emit audible notifications responsive to incoming communications from the user contacts having the silent mode disabled, when the device is in the silent notification mode. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312404 | DEVICE CONTEXT DETERMINATION - Systems and methods are provided for context determination. In one implementation one or more indications can be received, each of the one or more indications corresponding to a perception of one or more access points in relation to a user device. The one or more indications can be processed to determine one or more characteristics of at least one of the one or more access points. Based on the one or more characteristics, a context of the user device can be determined. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312696 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETECTING AND USING OCCUPANT LOCATION IN A BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - Systems and methods for using occupant location in a building management system are provided. A plurality of wireless emitters are provided at various locations in a building. Each of the wireless emitters broadcasts a different emitter identifier. Mobile devices in the building run an application which causes the mobile devices to detect and report, to the building management system, an emitter identifier associated with a nearby wireless emitter. The building management system uses the reported emitter identifier to determine a building zone in which the mobile device is located. The building management system provides information to the mobile device based on the location of the mobile device in the building. In some embodiments, the information includes a user interface for monitoring and/or controlling the building zone in which the mobile device is located. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312697 | DYNAMIC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY AND CERTIFICATION FOR RADIO APPLICATION DISTRIBUTION - Embodiments described herein relate generally to providing a radio application to a radio device for alteration of one or more radio characteristics of the radio device. A radio device may contact a reconfiguration market platform to request a radio application. The reconfiguration market platform may determine whether the radio device is authorized to operate the radio application. The reconfiguration market platform may contact a regulatory certificate platform to make this determination, or the reconfiguration market platform may cause the radio device to contact the regulatory certificate platform to facilitate this determination. If the reconfiguration market platform determines that the radio device is authorized to operate the radio application, the reconfiguration market platform provides the radio application to the radio device. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312699 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PROVISIONING SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY DATA IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Apparatus and methods for provisioning wireless devices for operation in one or more networks. In one embodiment, a provisioning service may provide access client (e.g., Subscriber Identity Module) data to a secure element in the wireless user device. The device may be preloaded with a provisioning SIM profile. The device may use the provisioning profile to roam onto a carrier, and communicate with a provisioning service, which may present the user with a list of available wireless carriers, such as carriers that service the user's current geographic location. In response to a user selection, the provisioning service may load a SIM profile associated with the selected carrier onto the secure element. The loaded SIM profile can be used to obtain wireless service from the selected carrier. The user may add multiple SIM profiles, and/or may delete SIM profiles. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312730 | MOBILE PHONE - A mobile phone provided with a push-to-talk function and methods for operating a mobile phone provided with a push-to-talk function are disclosed. An operation receiving module is configured to receive a user operation. A display control module is configured to cause a display module to display both first information relevant to a push-to-talk call and second information relevant to a function other than the push-to-talk, if the user operation for executing the function other than the push-to-talk is received during the push-to-talk call. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312745 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PROVISIONING USING STATE TRANSITION RULES - A method for wireless communication provisioning is disclosed. A first wireless communication provisioning state associated with one or more identifiers is defined. A second wireless communication provisioning state associated with one or more identifiers is defined. A state transition rule is defined, wherein the state transition rule defines a transition between the first wireless communication provisioning state and the second wireless communication provisioning state, wherein the first wireless communication provisioning state and the second wireless communication provisioning state are based on the lifecycle of the service of a wireless communication device associated with the first and second wireless communication provisioning states. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312750 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CELL BROADCAST MESSAGE MANAGEMENT - During a booting procedure, a user equipment is configured to update the language option of a CBS user interface according to a language indication elementary file of a smartcard. After receiving a CBM, the CBM is displayed or filtered via the CBS user interface according to the language option. When receiving a user command associated with updating the language option, the language option and the language indication elementary file are updated according to the user command. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312779 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR PROGRAMMING USER-DEFINED INFORMATION INTO ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A device for programming user-defined information into an electronic device is provided. The programmer allows a user to program customized information, such as user-selected audio, video, or Internet access information into his or her programmable device. Such electronic devices include wireless telephones, pagers, and personal digital assistants. The programmer allows a user to, among other things, customize the device to suit his or her particular taste. | 10-29-2015 |
20150319281 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING SCREEN OFF DURING AUTOMATIC RESPONSE SYSTEM SERVICE IN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method of avoiding screen off during an Automatic Response System (ARS) service is provided. The method includes enabling a proximity sensor in a call connection, detecting one of a first gesture and a second gesture during a call, and upon detecting the first gesture, disabling the proximity sensor. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319283 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR RUNNING AN APPLICATION THEREIN - A mobile communication terminal and method are provided for running an application therein. When a user inputs a variable in an idle state, variable-related applications are displayed. When the user selects a predetermined application, the input variable is input as an input value of a predetermined input field of the selected application. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319289 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE CAPABLE OF SWITCHING USER INTERFACES AND METHOD THEREOF - A mobile electronic device includes a storage unit, a display module, an audio speaker module, a sound receiving module and a control unit. The storage unit is for storing at least one character data. The display module is for selectively displaying a first user interface or a second user interface. The audio speaker module is for playing a voice. The sound receiving module is for receiving the voice played by the audio speaker module. The control unit is coupled to the storage unit, the display module and the sound receiving module. The control unit is for generating a character signal corresponding to the voice and controlling the display module to switch from the first user interface to the second user interface when determining the character signal matches the at least one character data. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319290 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MOTION DETECTING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method detect a motion in a mobile station. A motion is determined via a motion detecting function in the mobile station. A parameter for motion detection is determined from sensor data obtained via a sensor. The extracted parameter for the motion detection is transmitted to a counterpart mobile station. A parameter for motion detection determined by the counterpart mobile station is received from the counterpart mobile station. The extracted parameter is compared with the parameter received from the counterpart mobile station to determine a function associated with a motion input by a user. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319293 | Learning guard system - A Learning Guard System protects the attention of students in a classroom by requiring the student to download an ‘app’ from the Learning Guard website. During installation the ‘app’ requires the student to provide their name and a list of emergency contacts which are stored in the memory of the smart phone and by the Learning Guard cloud database. When a student enters a classroom doorway cube transmitter mounted thereon interacts with the ‘app in the smart phone to thereby acquire the smart phone ID and turn off the smart phone functionality, including voice, text communication, Internet access, playing music and videos. This prevent communication of the student with others, excepting emergency contacts both public and private. The cube transmitter communicates the smart phone ID to a base station linked to the Learning Guard cloud database, which creates a database of students in the classroom. When the student exits the classroom through the doorway, all of the previously extant smart phone functionalities are turned on. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319625 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INCREASING PERFORMANCE OF A COMMUNICATION LINK OF A COMMUNICATION NODE - A system that incorporates aspects of the subject disclosure may perform operations including, for example, monitoring performance parameters in a communications network, identifying a degradation in performance of one or more nodes of the communications network according the monitored performance parameters, and initiating corrective action to mitigate the degradation in performance of the one or more nodes of the communications network. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 11-05-2015 |
20150326991 | Mobile Device Configuration System and Method - An asset bundle package is created with asset bundle package records for at least two user types and from one or more mobile phone service operators. The asset bundle package and asset bundle record selection criteria are installed on a mobile computing device. A boot routine uses the asset bundle record selection criteria to select asset bundle records required to configure the mobile computing device for at least one of the two user types. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327041 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PORTABLE COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication system includes a wireless master device, a wireless client device, and a base station, wherein, the wireless client device starts wireless transmission to the base station when the wireless client device receives a start instruction sent from the wireless master device in accordance with a predetermined operation performed with respect to the wireless master device and stops the wireless transmission when the wireless client device receives a stop instruction from the wireless master device after the starting of the wireless transmission. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327043 | SMALL CELL ACTIVATION CONTROL OF PORTABLE MULTI-PURPOSE WIRELESS DEVICE - In a network node, wireless device, or both, a method for controlling activation or deactivation of a small cell activity of a portable multi-purpose wireless device in a wireless communications network may include determining a geographic location of a portable multi-purpose wireless device. The device may be capable of two or more different states of small cell activity, including an activated state, a deactivated state, or a latent state. The method may include controlling a current one of the two or more different states of the small-cell capability of the portable multi-purpose wireless device, based at least in part on the geographic location. The network node, the wireless device, or both may activate or deactivate the small cell activity, or place it into a latent state, based on additional factors. In addition to its small cell capabilities, the wireless device may perform user function unrelated to the wireless network. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327084 | Provisioning a Wireless-Capable Device for a Wireless Network - Disclosed are exemplary embodiments of apparatus and methods for provisioning a wireless-capable device for a wireless network. In an exemplary embodiment, a wireless-capable device, e.g., a thermostat, generally includes provisioning component(s) configured to receive from, and without a wired connection to, a wireless user device at least a network profile for provisioning the wireless-capable device for a wireless network. The provisioning components have no capability to receive the network profile through the wireless network. The provisioning component(s) are further configured to provide information for provisioning control of the wireless-capable device to a user account accessible through the wireless network. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327102 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR MEASURMENT REPORT MESSAGES TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A wireless device determines ( | 11-12-2015 |
20150327300 | VEHICLE-MOUNTED DEVICE, METHOD AND ARTICLE OF MANUFACTURE FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A vehicle-mounted device, a method and an article of manufacture for controlling the same are provided. The method for controlling the vehicle-mounted device storing at least one first parameter value therein includes steps as follows. At least one second parameter value is provided to a mobile device; the mobile device and the vehicle-mounted device are communicatively connected; a determination is made as to whether a difference exists between the first parameter value and the second parameter value; by replacing the first parameter value in the vehicle-mounted device with the second parameter value when the difference exists, the vehicle-mounted device is set according to the second parameter value such that the vehicle-mounted device operates according to the second parameter value. | 11-12-2015 |
20150334215 | FAR-END SOUND QUALITY INDICATION FOR TELEPHONE DEVICES - A sound quality metric may be determined at a near-end telephone system, the sound quality metric associated with far-end sound quality received at a far-end telephone system. A signal adjustment may be determined, based on the sound quality metric. The signal adjustment may thus be provided at an earpiece of the near-end telephone system. In this way, a user of the near-end telephone system may be alerted that the sound quality of a far-end user is unacceptably low, so that the near-end user may take corrective action at the near end to improve the far-end sound quality. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334223 | METHOD, DEVICE AND STORAGE MEDIUM FOR SETTING POSITION OF FUNCTION SETTING KEY OF MOBILE TERMINAL - Described are a method, a device and a storage medium for setting a position of a function setting key of a mobile terminal, belonging to the computer field. The method includes obtaining display information and trigger event information of a function setting key of a target application, and setting each function setting key in a page of a notification center. When an order for opening the notification center is received, the method further includes displaying each function setting key in the page of the notification center, according to the display information of each function setting key. When it is detected that an operation to the function setting key displayed in the page of the notification center matches a trigger operation recorded in the trigger event information of the function setting key, the method may perform the corresponding processing procedure, according to the trigger event information of the function setting key. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334558 | METHODS FOR CONFIGURING A MOBILE DEVICE AND RELATED MOBILE DEVICES - A method for configuring a mobile device is provided. First, a voice phone call dialed by a remote terminal is received in a standby mode. Thereafter, the voice phone call is rejected. Next, the mobile device is being waked up from the standby mode to a normal mode to perform at least one predetermined operation for controlling the mobile device. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334608 | BASE STATION - A base station includes a receiving unit, a determining unit, a control unit, and a transmitting unit. The receiving unit receives a connection request signal when the base station is in a power-saving state. The determining unit, when the receiving unit receives the connection request signal, determines whether a priority of the base station is higher than a priority of a different base station that belongs to a same group as the base station. The control unit, when the determining unit determines that the priority of the base station is higher than the priority of the different base station, causes the base station to return from the power-saving state to a normal state. The transmitting unit wirelessly transmits a notification signal after the base station is returned to the normal state by the control unit. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334752 | METHODS, DEVICES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS IMPROVING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - The present invention proposes methods, devices and computer program products improving device-to-device communication. In order to improve D2D communication, the invention proposes a centralized communication concept involving a centralized control unit and those devices participating at the D2D communication. The concept involves a three-party RTS/CTS exchange. | 11-19-2015 |
20150341483 | User Mode Estimation on Mobile Device - Methods, program products, and systems of user mode estimation on mobile device are disclosed. For example, a method includes: collecting one or more information items on a mobile device; determining whether or not a condition related to a person substantially collocated with the device is true; performing, in response to the determination of said condition, a predetermined task. The condition can be determined to be true when and only when the person is determined to be in a predetermined mode at a given time. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341778 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIPLE NETWORK ACCESS BY MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICES - Systems and methods for multiple network access by mobile computing devices are disclosed. In one embodiment, a data bus is used to couple multiple baseband processor endpoints to multiple network access cards, such that each baseband processor endpoint may communicate over the data bus to any of the network access cards. In an exemplary, non-limiting embodiment, the baseband processor endpoint is a modem and the network access cards are subscriber interface module (SIM) cards or universal integrated circuit cards (UICCs). By allowing each of the baseband processor endpoints to use any of the network access cards, different networks may be used for different purposes by the mobile computing device. Further, the use of a single bus in this manner may allow for greater scalability, while also saving pin count, silicon area, board area, and power consumption within the computing device. Such savings ultimately improve the cost of the device. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341779 | Systems and Methods for Providing Modem Behavior-Based Setup for User Devices - Systems and methods are described for enabling a mobile device to connect with a data network, based on the type of account associated with the mobile device. The system transmits a first signal to the data network and receives one or more network codes in response. The network codes may correspond to a type of SIM card associated with the mobile device. The system may display one or more setup screens on the mobile device based on the received network codes. The setup screens may guide the user of the mobile device to access the data network using an existing account, or setup a new account to access the data network. | 11-26-2015 |
20150350407 | THERMAL CONTROL METHOD AND THERMAL CONTROL SYSTEM - The invention provides a thermal control method and a thermal control system. The thermal control method comprises: detecting a temperature variance of a component of the electronic device to generate a detecting result; and determining a temperature threshold value for the integrated circuit as a throttling point according to the detecting result. The thermal control system comprises: a detecting unit, for detecting a temperature variance of a component of the electronic device to generate a detecting result; and a determining unit, for determining a temperature threshold value for the integrated circuit as a throttling point according to the detecting result. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350410 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE DEVICE CONTROL DELEGATION - A system and method for implementing controls corresponding to a particular mobile device. The method includes receiving from a first party corresponding to the particular mobile device a designation of a second party and receiving control instructions from the second party. A particular geographic area and/or a particular time frame is associated with the second party. A processor alternately delegates one or more device controls of the particular mobile device from the first party to the second party based on a current location of the particular mobile device relative to the particular geographic area and/or a current time relative to the particular time frame. The control instructions received from the second party are applied when the one or more device controls are delegated to the second party. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350413 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - An embodiment disclosed in the present disclosure discloses a mobile terminal for performing communication with a vehicle control apparatus installed in a vehicle, and the mobile terminal may include a wireless communication unit configured to form a network comprising the vehicle control apparatus and the mobile terminal, respectively, as one node thereof, and a controller configured to allow the vehicle control apparatus or the mobile terminal to perform an operation corresponding to an event according to whether or not the vehicle is moving or whether a user is getting on or off the vehicle based on the event generated from at least one node. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350809 | TERMINAL PERIPHERAL MANAGEMENT METHOD AND M2M GATEWAY - Provided is a method for managing a terminal peripheral, including that an M2M gateway obtains a policy definition of an event, and obtains, from the policy definition of the event, an operation priority indication corresponding to an operation in the event; and when the event is triggered by the M2M gateway and if it is determined that an operation of the same type as the operation in the event exists in a corresponding terminal peripheral, whether to deliver the operation in the event to the corresponding terminal peripheral is decided according to the operation priority indication in the policy definition of the event and a priority judgment policy. An M2M gateway is also provided. Processing priorities of operations of the same type can be determined according to priority indications of the operations by adopting the present disclosure, thereby avoiding operation conflict and system error reporting occurring on a terminal peripheral, and improving the efficiency of an M2M gateway in managing a terminal peripheral or a terminal peripheral group. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350885 | Dynamic Adjustment of Mobile Device Based on Thermal Conditions - In some implementations, a mobile device can be configured to monitor environmental, system and user events associated with the mobile device and/or a peer device. The occurrence of one or more events can trigger adjustments to system settings. The mobile device can be configured to keep frequently invoked applications up to date based on a forecast of predicted invocations by the user. In some implementations, the mobile device can receive push notifications associated with applications that indicate that new content is available for the applications to download. The mobile device can launch the applications associated with the push notifications in the background and download the new content. In some implementations, before running an application or communicating with a peer device, the mobile device can be configured to check energy and data budgets and environmental conditions of the mobile device and/or a peer device to ensure a high quality user experience. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350926 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM, AND TERMINAL APPARATUS - Provided is a communication control apparatus including: a selection unit that uses information related to one or more terminal apparatuses operable as an access point for a small cell to select a protection target cell to be protected from interference caused by a new small cell newly configured, among one or more existing cells; and a control unit that gives an instruction of an operation of the new small cell to the at least one terminal apparatus existing at a position determined in a manner that interference to each of the protection target cells selected by the selection unit does not exceed an allowable level. | 12-03-2015 |
20150358088 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal and controlling method thereof are disclosed, by which various convenience functions can be provided in association with a device contacted with or proximate to a user's body to enable a human body communication. The present disclosure includes a human body communication unit, a touch screen, and a controller, if a 1 | 12-10-2015 |
20150358456 | Method and System for Supervising Information Communication Based on Occupant and Vehicle Environment - A vehicle computer system includes one or more processors configured to receive context data representative of a vehicle's environment from one or more modules. The one or more processors are programmed and configured to receive the context data from one or more modules, determine an attention demand value utilizing the context data and a workload value corresponding to the context data, and output an indicator to activate or adjust a do not disturb feature based on the attention demand value. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358757 | NETWORK SELECTION FOR A GIVEN APPLICATION OR CONTEXT - A network usage manager in an operating system executing on a mobile device is configured to enable selection among different cellular data connections by application (“app”) or by app class so that end users can tailor cellular network allocation, app performance, and costs to meet their specific needs while mobile operators can improve network utilization and provide more comprehensive data plan offerings. The network usage manager applies app usage policies to select among different cellular data connections which may be supported on the mobile device using single or multiple SIM/UICC (Subscriber Identity Module/Universal Integrated Circuit Card) cards. The app usage policies can be set for a given app or class of app on the mobile device so that, for example, apps that implement background synchronization processes can use typically less expensive, lower bandwidth connections while typically more expensive, higher bandwidth connections are selected for data intensive apps. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358810 | Software Configurations for Mobile Devices in a Collaborative Environment - Methods, non-transitory processor-readable storage media, devices, and systems for improving user experience, energy consumption, and performance of a mobile device by automatically configuring applications. An embodiment method includes operations for obtaining, by a processor, operating conditions of the mobile device using an application programming interface, identifying a first of a plurality of software configurations based on the obtained operating conditions of the mobile device, wherein each in the plurality of software configurations define a set of operating parameters for the application, activating the first software configuration with respect to the application, obtaining a first portion of a task shared between a plurality of nearby collaborating devices based on the activated first software configuration, wherein the task may be processing data collectively stored across the plurality of nearby collaborating devices, and performing, by the processor, the first portion of the task using the application configured with the activated first software configuration. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358837 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SERVICE PLATFORM, NETWORK PARAMETER CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - An object is to provide a mobile communication system capable of optimizing network processing based on a change in a utilization characteristic. A mobile communication system according to the present invention includes a network operator device ( | 12-10-2015 |
20150365513 | INTER-DEVICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - The present invention relates to an inter-device communication system, an apparatus and a control method therefor that determines compliance with driver distraction regulations and that provides restricted services to a device. More particularly, the present invention relates to an inter-device communication system comprising: a server device for providing one or more services to client devices; and a plurality of client devices for receiving the one or more services from the server device, for storing driver distraction support information indicating whether services comply with the driver distraction regulations, and for restrictedly outputting the received one or more services based on the stored driver distraction support information. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365516 | MOBILE STATION - A user is easily informed of applications to be restricted easily when restriction processing on per application basis is being carried out. A mobile station according to the present invention includes: a storage unit configured to store one or more applications executable on the mobile station; a display unit configured to display an icon for each application on a display; and a determination unit configured to determine an application to be restricted based on SSAC information or ACDC information. The display unit is configured to use different display methods between the icon for the application to be restricted and the icon for the application other than the application to be restricted. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365541 | Operation Method and Apparatus of Mobile Terminal - Provided are an operation method and an apparatus of a mobile terminal. According to the operation method of the mobile terminal, it is determined that a display screen of a mobile terminal is in a damaged state; it is judged whether a preset key or key combination is triggered; in a case where a judging result is that the preset key or key combination is triggered, the mobile terminal is controlled to execute a preset operation corresponding to the preset key or key combination in the damaged state. The technical solution solves a problem in a related technology that the mobile terminal is difficult to operate in a case where the display screen is damaged, improves operability of the mobile terminal and expands an application scope of the mobile terminal. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365819 | SERVICE PROVISIONING SYSTEM AND METHOD, AND MOBILE EDGE APPLICATION SERVER AND SUPPORT NODE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a service provisioning system and method, a mobile edge application server and support node. The system includes: at least one mobile edge application server (MEAS) and at least one mobile edge application server support function (MEAS-SF), where the MEAS is deployed at an access network side; and the MEAS-SF is deployed at a core network side, connected to one or more MEAS. In the service provisioning system provided in the embodiment, services that are provided by an SP are deployed in the MEAS. When the MEAS can provide the user equipment with a service requested in a service request, the MEAS directly and locally generates service data corresponding to the service request. Therefore, the user equipment directly obtains required service data from an RAN side, which avoids data congestion between an RAN and a CN and saves network resources. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365837 | SYSTEM FOR TESTING BASE STATION - A system for testing a base station apparatus includes a circuit board frame including a plurality of interfaces for a plurality of testing modules, and a central processing circuitry. The plurality of testing modules is detachably attachable to the interfaces, and each testing module comprises hardware that is configured to connect a determined interface of the base station apparatus and a reprogrammable processing circuitry. The central processing circuitry is configured to detect testing modules attached to the circuit board frame, determine a testing program to execute, and to program reprogrammable processing circuitries of the detected testing modules to execute testing functions of the testing program. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365901 | Dynamic Geographic Beacons for Geographic-Positioning-Capable Devices - In one embodiment, a processor may identify information about an entity represented by a first node in a social graph for a social-networking system. The information may comprise a location for the entity and an affinity score for the entity with respect to a user, wherein the user is represented by a second node in the social graph. The processor may then determine a region defined with respect to the location of the entity, wherein the region is defined based in part on the affinity score for the entity, as well as determining that a location of a mobile device associated with the user is within the region. Finally, the processor may cause the mobile device to transition from a sleep state to an active state. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365902 | TASK MANAGEMENT ACROSS LOW-POWER WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Technologies related to task management across low-power wireless communications are generally described. In some examples, proximal devices in range of low-power wireless communications may cooperate to allow one or more of the proximal devices to suspend task operations, while one or more of the proximal devices manage the task operations. The task operations may be associated with an energy consumption that exceeds an energy consumption associated with the low-power wireless communications, allowing the proximal devices that suspend task operations to reduce their overall energy consumption. | 12-17-2015 |
20150373184 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal is disclosed. The mobile terminal comprises a display unit; a sensing unit being formed on one side of the mobile terminal and sensing other terminals located within a predetermined distance from the mobile terminal; a wireless communication unit for transmitting and receiving information to and from a terminal sensed by the sensing unit; and a controller transmitting screen information about a displayed image to other terminals through the wireless communication unit when the sensing unit senses other terminals so that other images related to an image displayed on the display unit can be displayed on the other terminals. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373504 | USER CONTEXT NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD - A user context system and method are provided. The system may define a user context and then one or more rules based on that device and those connected on the context of the user. The system may also have an orbit user interface that displays the users who context has been distributed by the system. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373512 | INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, TERMINAL APPARATUS AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - An information processing method executed by a processor included in an information processing apparatus that includes a display device that displays an image and a speaker, the information processing method includes determining, when update of an image displayed on the display device is detected while the information processing apparatus is in a state of voice call, notification sound corresponding to a substance of the update; and outputting the notification sound from the speaker. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373534 | MEMORY SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING MEMORY SYSTEM - According to an embodiment, a memory device includes a nonvolatile first memory, a nonvolatile second memory, a first controller, and a second controller. The first controller is configured to write, to the first memory, data received over a short-range radio communication by using power generated in the short-range radio communication. The second controller is configured to execute, at a startup of the memory device, a transfer process of reading a file written in the first memory and storing the read file to the second memory. | 12-24-2015 |
20150381421 | FEMTO PARAMETER PROFILES BASED UPON NEARBY ACCESS POINT - Operating parameters for a femto access point (FAP) are efficiently and accurately defined. During provisioning of the FAP, the system obtains operating parameters utilized by a nearby FAP expected to have a substantially similar radio environment as the provisioning FAP. Moreover, weighting is applied to the nearby FAP to determine which set of operating parameters to utilize at the provisioning FAP. Accordingly, pre-existing operating parameters, optimized by the nearby FAP are employed to augment initial network listen measurements performed at the provisioning FAP, and thus improve speed and accuracy of initial FAP parameter provisioning. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381797 | TOUCH BAR AND MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a touch bar and a mobile terminal apparatus. An interface module of the touch bar is connected to a touch panel; the interface module is connected in a matching manner to an interface on the mobile terminal; the touch panel is configured to sense a touch operation, generate a corresponding sensing signal, and transmit it to a processor in the mobile terminal by using the interface module, so that the processor controls the mobile terminal according to the sensing signal and content currently displayed on a display interface of the mobile terminal. Functions such as flicking a browser page up and down, turning pages of an ebook, and adjusting volume are implemented effectively; the operability is enhanced, and the user experience is prevented from being affected because the screen is blocked due to a tap operation or flick operation, improving the user experience effectively. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382179 | INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATION LINE SELECTION SUPPORTING RICH CONTEXT OF INPUT FACTORS - Various user interfaces and other technologies for interacting with devices that support multiple communication lines can be implemented. For example, intelligent handling of communication line selection can help users deal with multiple communication line scenarios. A user interface for overriding communication line selection can be supported. Users can interact with their devices more efficiently and with less frustration. A wide variety of use default communication line scenarios are supported. Communication lines can be selected based on any of a rich set of input factors. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382181 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING BUSINESS CARD BETWEEN MOBILE TERMINALS AND STORAGE MEDIUM - The present disclosure provides a method performed by a sending terminal for exchanging business cards with one or more receiving terminals. According to the method, the sending terminal establishes a wireless connection with one or more receiving terminals and enters a business card exchange mode with the one or more receiving terminals; then, a receiving terminal list including user identifiers is displayed on a display of the sending terminal. After detecting a user selection operation of selecting at least one user identifier in the receiving terminal list, a business card is displayed on the display of the sending terminal. Finally, in response to a sliding operation performed on the business card on the display of the sending terminal, the sending terminal sends the business card to one receiving terminal that corresponds to the selected user identifier. Such an operation manner of sending a business card is simple and intuitive. | 12-31-2015 |
20160014258 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF | 01-14-2016 |
20160014263 | Apparatus, System, and Method for Preventing Distracted Driving | 01-14-2016 |
20160014265 | INTRA-VEHICULAR MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT | 01-14-2016 |
20160014541 | Wireless Device Configured to Operate Under a Plurality of Different Brands and a Plurality of Different Networks and Configured to be Customized to One Brand and One Network | 01-14-2016 |
20160014547 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING BLUETOOTH LOAD | 01-14-2016 |
20160014622 | EFFICIENT CELL SITE OUTAGE MITIGATION | 01-14-2016 |
20160021236 | Electronic Device and Method for Managing Modes of the Device - An apparatus and a method in an electronic device for managing modes are disclosed herewith. The electronic device retrieves a meeting time from a meeting event stored in a scheduling application of the electronic device. The electronic device further identifies connectivity identification information from the meeting event and changes the operating mode to a meeting mode in response to detecting usage of the connectivity identification information at the electronic device during the meeting time. The scheduling application may be a calendar application, notes, tasks, reminders, etc. The connectivity identification information may be a conference call number, a telephone number, a user identification information, a video conference, or a web link to a virtual meeting. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021238 | RESTRICTING MOBILE DEVICE USAGE - Systems and methods are provided for selectively restricting a mobile device. In one implementation, a visual capture can be to identify one or more indicators within the visual capture. Based on the indicators, an implementation of a restriction at the mobile device can be adjusted. In another implementation inputs can be processed to compute a determination, determination reflecting at least one of the in-vehicle role of the user as a driver and the in-vehicle role of the user as a passenger; and, an operation state of the mobile device can be modified based on such a determination. According to another implementation, one or more outputs can be projected from a mobile device, inputs can be received, and such inputs and outputs can be processed to determine a correlation between them. A restriction can then be modified based on the correlation. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021240 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA FOR TIMER-BASED MANAGEMENT OF COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method of management of a communication device in an aircraft may include transitioning the communication device from a normal mode to a disabled mode based on a calculated device sleep time based on data associated with transportation information of the device. One of these modes may be a state of the device in which a transceiver of the device is deactivated and the other mode may be a state of the device in which the transceiver is activated. Therefore, the device sleep time determines when the wireless device's transceiver may not be activated. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021484 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SELECTIVE COMMUNICATION SERVICE IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a sensor network, Machine Type Communication (MTC), Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communication, and technology for Internet of Things (IoT). The present disclosure may be applied to intelligent services based on the above technologies, such as smart home, smart building, smart city, smart car, connected car, health care, digital education, smart retail, security and safety services. A user equipment in a communication system, according to various embodiments of the present disclosure, includes: a controller that determines at least one communication service to deactivate among communication services that are able to be provided and a transmitter that transmits, to a server, a message for identifying the at least one communication service to deactivate. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021530 | Method and Apparatus for Selectively Granting or Denying Mobile Applications Access to Cellular Networks - The present disclosure describes methods and a wireless mobile device for selectively granting or denying mobile applications (“apps”) access to a cellular network. In various implementations, a wireless mobile device having both WiFi capability and cellular data capability receives a data packet from an app executing on the wireless mobile device. If the app is not whitelisted and the wireless mobile device is not connected to a WiFi network, the wireless mobile device drops the data packet. If, on the other hand, the app is whitelisted, the wireless mobile device transmits the data packet over the cellular network. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021603 | USER PREFERENCE AND NETWORK POLICY BASED RADIO LINK SELECTION - In embodiments, apparatuses, methods, and storage media may be described for presenting, by a user equipment (UE), a parameter of a network policy to a user, and receiving an indication of the user preference related to that parameter of the network policy. In response to receiving the indication, the UE may select one or more radio links with which the UE should communicatively couple based on the user preference and the network policy. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 01-21-2016 |
20160028872 | Method for updating software of a measuring device, smart computer and computer readable program product - The present invention relates to a method for updating software of a measuring device in a RF sensitive environment is provided, the method comprising: providing a smart computer having a radio operation mode for wireless communication and providing a measuring device that is RF sensitive and that comprises software for the operation of the measuring device; downloading software update data from a software server by wireless coupling the smart computer to the software server via the Internet; decoupling the smart computer from the Internet after the software update data is downloaded; updating the software of the measuring device by directly connecting the smart computer to the measuring device and by uploading the software update data from the smart computer to the connected measuring device. The present invention also relates to a smart computer and to a computer readable program product. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028877 | DEVICES, SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENABLING NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - Techniques, including systems, devices and methods, for enabling network connectivity are described. In particular, systems, devices and methods for flexibly configuring network connections for reliability and/or extensibility are described. Such techniques include improving reliability of network connections by adaptively utilizing multiple network and electrical power configurations. The disclosed techniques also include enabling user-definable network functionality through a variety of methods. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029145 | DYNAMIC MOBILE DEVICE FEEDBACK METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND APPARATUS - A dynamic mobile device feedback system is described. Feedback may be obtained using a device feedback client residing on the mobile device and a feedback server remote to the mobile device. The device feedback client may receive feedback solicitation inquiries (invitations/queries) and presentation rules from the feedback server, monitor the mobile device, identify trigger events associated with the mobile device, present the feedback solicitation inquiries in accordance with the presentation rules, and receive feedback from the user of the mobile device. The feedback may be sent to the feedback server for further processing. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029184 | CABLE CHIP SYSTEM - The present invention relates to communications systems incorporating peripheral devices such as a push-to-talk (PTT) or similar and interface cables to connect these to a headset and/or a communication device such as a man worn two-way radio, vehicle intercom system, mobile phone, etc. In particular, the invention relates to such interface cable having an integrated functionality. The basic idea of the invention is to use an interface between a first and a second device in a voice communication system, which interface is specific to the second device and holds digital information allowing the first device to identify or adapt to the second device. This allows the first device to automatically adapt its settings and/or functionality to, and thus to function with, several different second devices without any need for updating, re-configuration, or user intervention. Thus the first device can be hot swapped or hot plugged with different second devices simply by using a cable specific to each particular second device. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029203 | Device Connectivity - A method of operating a device comprising connecting to an external data source via a network, determining that the network connection has been broken, determining that the network connection has been restored, detecting that a user is accessing an application that requires access to the network connection, and prioritizing the accessed application with respect to the required access to the network connection. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029204 | MULTI-SIM BASED DEVICE AUTO CONFIGURATION SYSTEM AND PROCESS - Systems and methods are described for configuring a user equipment (“UE”). The UE stores a plurality of configuration routines and receives at least one subscriber identity module (SIM). The UE selects a target set of configuration routines from the plurality of configuration routines based, at least in part, on at least one parameter value stored on one of the at least one SIMs, the target set of configuration routines comprising at least one of the plurality of configuration routines. The target set of configuration routines includes some, but not all of the plurality of configuration routines stored by the UE. At least one setting of the UE is then configured based, at least in part, on the target set of configuration routines. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029205 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TRANSFERRING CONTROL OF A REMOTE RADIO HEAD BETWEEN BASE-BAND UNIT (BBU) PROCESSING POOLS - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of transferring control of a Remote Radio Head (RRH) between Base-Band Unit (BBU) processing pools. For example, a Base Band Unit (BBU) processing pool may include a transport network interface to communicate with a plurality of Remote Radio Heads (RRHs) via a transport network; and a pool processor to manage a plurality of BBUs, the plurality of BBUs configured to control the plurality of RRHs according to a RRH control protocol, the pool processor being configured to transfer control of at least one RRH of the plurality of RRHs from at least one BBU of the plurality of BBUs to at least one target BBU processing pool. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029296 | Interworking between Networks Operating According to Different Radio Access Technologies - There is provided a method of operating a terminal device in a first network that is operating according to a first radio access technology, RAT, the terminal device supporting and operating according to a network interworking feature that enables and controls interworking between the first network and a network operating according to a second RAT, the method comprising determining whether a first cell in the first network that is serving the terminal device supports the network interworking feature ( | 01-28-2016 |
20160029341 | Radio Access Point Location Verification using GPS Location and Radio Environment Data - Techniques are provided to perform location verification of a radio access point device such as femtocell. The radio access point device is configured to receive signals from global positioning system (GPS) satellite transmitters to produce GPS location data representing a GPS location of the radio access point device. The radio access point device is also configured to receive wireless signals at one or more specified channels and to generate radio environment data representing characteristics of received wireless signals. A comparison is made between the GPS location data and reference GPS location data for an expected location of the radio access point device. When the GPS location data substantially matches the reference GPS location data, operations of the radio access point device are enabled and the radio environment data is stored to be used as reference radio environment data for purposes of subsequent location verification of the radio access point device. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029370 | POSITION INFORMATION ASSISTED NETWORK CONTROL - A network controller including processing circuitry may be configured to receive dynamic position information indicative of a three dimensional position of at least one mobile communication node, compare fixed position information indicative of fixed geographic locations of respective access points of a network to the dynamic position information to determine a relative position of the at least one mobile communication node relative to at least one of the access points based on the fixed position information and the dynamic position information, and provide network control instructions to at least one network asset based on the relative position. | 01-28-2016 |
20160036758 | ONLINE GIFT DELIVERY CONFIRMATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - An online delivery servicing system includes a server that functions with a customer computing device to obtain delivery confirmation request information associated with an online gift purchased by a customer for a recipient in which the delivery confirmation request information is associated with a quantity of delivery confirmation messages to be transmitted to a recipient of the online gift and a period of elapsed time for each delivery confirmation message. At each period of elapsed time, the server transmits one of the delivery confirmation messages to a recipient computing device associated with the recipient such that, when a response to the one delivery confirmation message is received, the server transmits a customer confirmation message to the customer computing device, and when the quantity of delivery confirmation messages have been transmitted and no response has been received from the recipient computing device, the server transmits a customer delivery failure message to the customer computing device. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036961 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING CALL WHEN RECEIVED ON MOBILE DEVICE - The present invention relates to a method for connecting a call when received on a mobile device and, more specifically, relates to a method for connecting a call when received on a mobile device, wherein, if a call arrives in circumstances under which it is difficult to use a lock function without the free use of both hands, it is possible to connect the call even without using the lock function by converting a user voice signal incoming from a microphone (MIC) of the mobile device into text data and comparing same with stored reference text data and, if there is a match, controlling the mobile device as instructed by an applicable command, so as to either send text or connect the call immediately. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036962 | UNIFIED COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A unified communications system enables a user to simultaneously manage real time voice communication with background audio streams such as a music. In one embodiment, the system comprises a plurality of devices connected through a persistent voice over IP channel, where each device is playing background audio independently, and each device is operatively coupled to a microphone. When a connected user speaks, Voice Activity Detection results in the automatic adjustment of background audio on other connected devices, the adjustments based upon user-input settings on each device. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036963 | MOBILE DEVICE AND METHOD OF EXECUTING APPLICATION BASED ON PARTICULAR ZONE - Provided is a mobile terminal that executes an application in a predetermined area, and a method performed by the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal that executes the application in the predetermined area may include a memory; a location finder configured to obtain location information of the mobile terminal; a communicator configured to communicate with a server; and a controller configured to receive, via the communicator, the application that is executable in a predetermined area corresponding to the obtained location information and an operating system (OS) for executing the application from a server that corresponds to the obtained location information, and to install the application and the OS in the memory. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036964 | DETERMINING THAT A USER IS IN A VEHICLE OR DRIVING A VEHICLE BASED ON SENSOR DATA GATHERED BY A USER DEVICE - A device may receive sensor data regarding a user device; and determine, based on the sensor data, that a user of the user device is in a vehicle or driving the vehicle. When determining that the user of the user device is in the vehicle or driving the vehicle, the device may compare the sensor data, received from the user device, with a reference dataset that includes reference data associated with users being present in or driving a vehicle, or determine that a value of a measurement, received as part of the sensor data, satisfies a threshold that is related to whether the user is in the vehicle or driving the vehicle. The device may output a particular control instruction to the user device based on determining that the user is in the vehicle or is driving the vehicle. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037334 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATIONS WITH A MOBILE-ORIGINATED-ONLY MODE - A method and apparatus for supporting machine-type communications (MTC) are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may configure itself to operate in a mobile-originated-only mode. The WTRU may perform no, or a subset of, radio resource control (RRC) idle and/or non-access stratum (NAS) idle/standby state procedures in the mobile-originated-only mode. For example, the WTRU may perform cell reselection but not paging monitoring in the mobile-originated-only mode. Alternatively, the WTRU may perform paging monitoring but not cell reselection and location update. The operation in the mobile-originated-only mode may be triggered explicitly or implicitly. For example, the WTRU may operate in the mobile-originated-only mode if an inactivity timer expires. The WTRU may switch the mode in accordance with a pre-configured schedule. After transition of the operation mode, the WTRU may send a message to the network indicating such mode switch. | 02-04-2016 |
20160044153 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A mobile terminal including a wireless communication unit configured to provide wireless communication; a touchscreen; and a controller configured to receive a diagonal sliding input from one side of the touchscreen, display a notification panel on the touchscreen including at least first and second regions, wherein the first region includes at least a first application icon corresponding to a first unconfirmed notification, in response to the diagonal sliding input, receive a horizontal drag input following the diagonal sliding input, and display details of the first unconfirmed notification in the second region in response to the horizontal drag input. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044155 | MOBILE DEVICE INHIBITOR - To block calls and other mobile device network activities in a vehicle while the vehicle is being operated, a vehicle cellphone inhibitor system is provided. A femtocell device can be provided to reroute communications between a cellular network and the mobile device through the femtocell device. The vehicle cellphone inhibitor system can selectively block calls or other network operations on the mobile device that are routed through the femtocell device on the mobile device while leaving the mobile device otherwise operational. The blocking can be activated whenever the vehicle is moving, which can be determined via GPS, accelerometers, or a connection via the vehicle's electronic control unit (“ECU”) utilizing vehicle data to determine whether the vehicle is in motion or being operated. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044156 | DRIVING WITHOUT DISTRACTION SUPPORT SYSTEM - A processor-implemented system for supporting use of a reduced driving distraction program on a mobile device is disclosed. The system detects whether the mobile device is in a moving vehicle. If so, a driving mode is set in which driving is determined to be protected driving if the reduced distraction program is being followed and unprotected if the reduced distraction program is not being followed. The system then tracks unprotected driving and protected driving and aggregates the unprotected driving and protected driving. A party is then notified regarding the aggregation of unprotected driving and protected driving. Other drivers can be asked to join the reduced driving distraction program and awards can be given to drivers for meeting pre-determined milestones of protected driving. Either the mobile device or a remote computer may aggregate driving and send notifications. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044157 | METHOD FOR MANAGING DATA TRAFFIC OF SOFTWARE AND PORTABLE ELECTRONIC APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A method for managing data traffic of software adapted for a portable electronic apparatus is provided. The method includes steps of: providing a user interface through the portable electronic apparatus; receiving a user input via the user interface; determining the user input to select at least one first application to be traffic managed from an application group; and turning off the data traffic of the at least one first application after the portable electronic apparatus enters a standby mode. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044498 | HOST DEVICE COUPLED TO A MOBILE PHONE AND METHOD OF OPERATING THE SAME - Some embodiments relate to a host-side surrogate tool configured to service mobile phones from a host device that is coupled to one or more peripheral cell phones. The presently-disclosed host-side surrogate tool executes on the host device concurrently with one or more software components of a vendor-compliant phone maintenance tool. In some embodiments, the concurrently-executing host-side surrogate tool may cause the vendor-compliant phone maintenance tool to provide functionality for which it was not intended. In some embodiments, it may be said that the host-side surrogate tool provides a ‘semi-virtual’ environment under which host-side vendor-compliant phone maintenance tool operates. Related methods, devices and systems are disclosed herein. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044525 | METHOD OF PROVIDING INFORMATION ON A SERVER STATUS, USER EQUIPMENT, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment configured for communication with a cellular network determines a server status of a third party server which is not under the control of a cellular network operator. The user equipment transmits information on the server status to at least one further user equipment by device-to-device communication. | 02-11-2016 |
20160050309 | RESTRICTIVE CELL PHONE USE AND ANTI-TEXTING APPARATUS AND METHODS - Provided is a communications device system for simultaneously enabling and disabling a vehicle and a mobile communications device, the vehicle being for transporting at least a vehicle operator, the vehicle having an enabled mode for permitting motion of the vehicle and a disabled mode for preventing motion of the vehicle, the system comprising: mobile communications device for transmitting and receiving communication signals, the communications device having a fully operational mode for permitting transmission and reception of communication signals and an idle mode for preventing transmission of communication signals; a receiving receptacle secured within the vehicle and configured for receiving and securing the communications device within receiving receptacle so that the communications device is in the idle mode whenever the communications device is secured within the receiving receptacle; and, a vehicle enabling mechanism secured within the receiving receptacle and secured in communication with one or more operating components of said vehicle, the vehicle enabling mechanism being configured so that placement of the communication device into the receiving receptacle activates the vehicle enabling mechanism to put the vehicle in the enabled mode, and so that removal of the communication device from the receiving receptacle deactivates the vehicle enabling mechanism to put the vehicle in the disabled mode by way of RFID. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050510 | Method Of Determining User Intent To Use Services Based On Proximity - A method for accessing functionality of a mobile electronic device through a vehicle system onboard a motor vehicle. The method includes making functionality of the mobile electronic device accessible through the vehicle system based on where a sensor that the mobile electronic device is paired with is physically located about the vehicle. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050512 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVELOPING, DISTRIBUTING AND EXECUTING APPLICATIONS - A computer-implemented method and apparatus, the method comprising: responsive to a user of a mobile device selecting a specific application, starting a parent application with a parameter associated with the specific application, wherein the parent application is configured to provide a functionality of the specific application; retrieving from a local database in the mobile device a configuration of the specific application, wherein the configuration comprises a set of modules used by the specific application and a manner of usage thereof; and activating the set of modules to provide the functionality of the specific application by the parent application. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050539 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A mobile phone (mobile electronic device) includes an acceleration sensor that detects an acceleration, a communication module that performs communication, and a controller. When the number of steps based on the acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor has reached a first step count during an ON-state of the communication function of the communication module, the mobile phone shifts from a stop state to a walking state. The controller maintains the ON-state of the communication function of the communication module when the mobile phone shifts from the stop state to the walking state. The controller turns OFF the communication function of the communication module when the number of steps based on the acceleration has reached a second step count larger than the first step count. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050618 | Systems and Methods of Controlling Access of Multiple Radio Protocol Stacks Within a Subscription - Embodiments include systems and methods of controlling access to radio access protocol stacks within a subscription. A processor of a communication device may establish a connection to a communication network under a subscription associated with the communication device. The processor may select a protocol stack from among two or more protocol stacks associated with the subscription to communicate with the communication network. The processor may send an attention command to the selected protocol stack within the subscription. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050642 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING NOTIFICATIONS - A method of controlling a portable electronic device includes, in response to receipt of selection of an option to enter a do not disturb mode at the portable electronic device, suppressing notifications for the communications received at the portable electronic device while in the do not disturb mode. The method also includes, in response to exiting the do not disturb mode, discontinuing suppressing notifications for new communications received at the portable electronic device, providing an option to view the communications received at the portable electronic device while in the do not disturb mode and, in response to receipt of selection of the option to view the communications received while in the do not disturb mode, displaying a consolidated list of the communications received at the portable electronic device while in the do not disturb mode. The consolidated list includes a plurality of electronic communication types. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050686 | Managing Transmitter Collisions - Various embodiments implemented on a mobile communication device (e.g., a multi-SIM-multi-active communication device) mitigate degraded transmit performance typically experienced by a lower-priority subscription during a Tx collision event in which a higher-priority subscription receives a shared Tx resource of the mobile communication device to the exclusion of the lower-priority subscription. Specifically, in various embodiments, a processor of the mobile communication device may determine when an upcoming transmission of the lower-priority subscription will collide with a scheduled transmission of the higher-priority subscription (i.e., may determine when a Tx collision event will occur between the subscriptions) and may implement one or more Tx collision management strategies in response to determining that the lower-priority subscription's upcoming transmission will collide with a transmission of the higher-priority subscription, thus improving the lower-priority subscription's overall performance. | 02-18-2016 |
20160057002 | REMOTE VERIFICATION FOR CONFIGURATION UPDATES - In various embodiments, a control client is configured to determine whether or not the most current configuration profile has been installed within a corresponding mobile device. In particular embodiments, the client is configured to store its own copy of a configuration profile and to compare its copy with the most current configuration profile generated by a device management system as well as to the configuration profile currently installed and applied by a configuration manager within the mobile device. Each configuration profile includes an embedded verification token that facilitates this process. Furthermore, the client may be configured to inform the device management system as to whether or not the current configuration profile has been installed. The device management system may govern enterprise access by the mobile device based on whether or not the current configuration profile has been installed. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057276 | Mode Changing Of A Mobile Communication Device And Vehicle Settings When The Mobile Communications Device Is In Proximity To A Vehicle - A driver of a vehicle is identified and a command is sent to a mobile communications device that is associated with the identified driver and that is in proximity of the vehicle to force the mobile communications device to change modes such as to enter a hands-free or other suitable mode. The driver may be identified through one or more techniques including biometric sensing, key detection, switch controls, and so forth. Additionally, the driver and/or feature settings preferred by the current driver may be identified by receiving data from the mobile communications device. The data may identify the driver ID with preferred feature settings, the mobile communications device which has an association to a driver ID with preferred feature settings, or the data may specify the preferred feature settings. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057277 | Portable Electronic Apparatus, Method of Operating Portable Electronic Apparatus - A method of operating a portable electronic apparatus, a portable electronic apparatus, and a computer readable storage medium are described. The method includes detecting a motion amplitude of the portable electronic apparatus and vibrating the portable electronic apparatus by a vibrating amplitude that is based upon the detected motion amplitude of the portable electronic apparatus. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057279 | Method and Device for Adjusting Call Volume, and Mobile Terminal - Provided are a method and device for adjusting a call volume and a mobile terminal, wherein the method includes detecting gravity location information of a terminal when a given detection time is reached, and adjusting a current call volume in accordance with a given volume adjustment rule when the gravity location information and gravity location information obtained by last detection are separately located on two sides of a pre-set gravity zero line. The application of the present disclosure solves a problem in the related art that a user in a call using a left ear and a right ear alternatively usually needs to continuously adjust volume of an earphone manually because there is a hearing difference between the left ear and the right ear, which results in much inconvenience when answering a call, and thus the call volume during a call can be automatically adjusted, a performance of the mobile terminal is enhanced and user experience is improved. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057280 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD, AND CONTROL PROGRAM - In one aspect, a mobile electronic device includes a sound input module and a controller for performing off-hook when sound input to the sound input module is accepted at a time of incoming call. The mobile electronic device performs off-hook when a response operation to the incoming call is detected through a touch screen, starts to accept sound input through the sound input module when a response operation to the incoming call is not detected through the touch screen, and performs off-hook when the sound input is accepted. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057591 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CREATING AND PROVIDING SMS HTTP TAGGING - A system and method for sending text messages and, more particularly, a system and method for forcing SMS capable devices to communicate via SMS using, for example, SS7 protocol. A method includes providing a tag forcing a return text message to be sent via SS7 protocol. In use, the system and method is configured to force the use of SMS messages via the SS7 protocol. The system and method can be implemented over any network, for example, and any existing mobile device and related infrastructure can be modified to take advantage of the benefits and functionality of the system and method of the invention. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057704 | MOBILE PHONE HAVNG A NON-TELEPHONE FUNCTION AND TIMING RESET UNIT - A mobile phone includes: a microprocessor; a timer; and a memory storing computer-executable instructions for execution by the microprocessor, wherein the computer-executable instructions configure the microprocessor to: execute the non-telephone function; cause the timer to operate during execution of the non-telephone function, and automatically stop the execution of the non-telephone function when the timer indicates an elapse of a predetermined time period; and if the timer is being operated in response to the execution of the non-telephone function, to reset the timer to an initial state when an operation for ending a telephone call is received, wherein when the timer is reset to the initial state, the timer starts to measure the predetermined time period, and the microprocessor stops the execution of the non-telephone function at the elapse of the predetermined time period from when the operation for ending the telephone phone call is received. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057713 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING STATE OF WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for a wireless router to adjust a state of a wireless network provided by the wireless router, includes: monitoring whether the state of the wireless network satisfies an adjusting condition of adjusting the state of the wireless network; when the state of the wireless network satisfies the adjusting condition, sending an adjusting prompt to a wireless terminal, the adjusting prompt being configured to ask for user permission to adjust the state of the wireless network; and if the wireless router receives from the wireless terminal an acceptance instruction to accept the adjusting, adjusting the state of the wireless network. | 02-25-2016 |
20160066122 | CELLULAR DEVICES AND PAIRING SERVER IMPLEMENTING A PAIRING METHOD - Cellular devices and a pairing server implementing a Pairing method are described. The first cellular device includes a first subscriber identity module (SIM) card, a controller and a transceiver. The first SIM card is configured to store a first international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI). The controller is configured to receive a pairing command. The transceiver is configured to transmit the first IMSI without a Mobile Subscriber Integrated Services Digital Network-Number (MSISDN) in response to the pairing command. | 03-03-2016 |
20160068135 | SYSTEMS, DEVICES AND METHODS FOR VEHICLES - Certain embodiments described herein are directed to devices, systems and methods for use in vehicle operations. In some examples, the devices, systems and methods described herein can be used to permit safe operation of a vehicle where the vehicle operator may have one or more mobile devices in their possession. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072538 | DETERMINING AND CONTROLLING RADIATION ABSORPTION - An instantaneous value for the specific absorption ratio of user terminal is determined, the instantaneous value is compared to a predetermined threshold; and the voice call and data transfer capabilities of the user terminal are controlled on the basis of the comparison and the call connection and data transfer status of the user terminal. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073253 | Method and System for inhibiting access to a device in a moving vehicle - A system and method for inhibiting certain functionality of a personal communications device within a moving vehicle is disclosed. The disabled functionality is limited to the personal communications device of the operator of the vehicle and will not disable functionality of personal communication devices of other passengers within the vehicle. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080551 | Notification of Mobile Device Events - A computer-implemented user notification method includes displaying, in a status area near a perimeter of a graphical interface, a notification of a recent alert event for a mobile device, receiving a user selection in the status area, and in response to the receipt of the user selection, displaying, in a central zone of the graphical interface, detail regarding a plurality of recent messaging events for the mobile device. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080628 | PICTURES USING VOICE COMMANDS - A system and method is disclosed for enabling user friendly interaction with a camera system. Specifically, the inventive system and method has several aspects to improve the interaction with a camera system, including voice recognition, gaze tracking, touch sensitive inputs and others. The voice recognition unit is operable for, among other things, receiving multiple different voice commands, recognizing the vocal commands, associating the different voice commands to one camera command and controlling at least some aspect of the digital camera operation in response to these voice commands. The gaze tracking unit is operable for, among other things, determining the location on the viewfinder image that the user is gazing upon. One aspect of the touch sensitive inputs provides that the touch sensitive pad is mouse-like and is operable for, among other things, receiving user touch inputs to control at least some aspect of the camera operation. Another aspect of the disclosed invention provides for gesture recognition to be used to interface with and control the camera system. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080904 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIRMING DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM TARGET(S) - Provided is a system and method for enabling a user, of a wireless radio equipped mobile data processing system, to: aim the mobile data processing system, perform a shoot action, and subsequently confirm the target(s) shot. Aim information is transmitted outbound by radio frequency from the mobile data processing system to a remote data processing system (e.g. a targeted data processing system) for determining the target being successfully shot. Information for confirmation is transmitted inbound by radio frequency to the mobile data processing system (e.g. from a targeted data processing system), for example to complete the shoot action. Aim information may include location information, directional and posture information, distance information, target size, and/or other shooting data to further qualify the shoot action. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080927 | GLOBAL MOBILITY INFRASTRUCTURE FOR USER DEVICES - Real-time mobility data relating to a user and devices associated with the user are collected. The collected mobility data to a device being used in a respective environment is applied. The operation of the device based on the applied data is activated and controlled. The mobility database is updated with new data relating to the location of the user as the user enters a new operating environment. New data includes mobility and environmental data relating to a third-party. The third-party data is relevant to the user and to operation of a mobile device. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080929 | JURISDICTION-BASED ADAPTIVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Embodiments of systems and methods for jurisdiction-based adaptive communication are disclosed herein. In some embodiments, a wireless device may be configured to store different jurisdiction identifiers, each jurisdiction identifier in association with a stored set of wireless communication operation constraints. In some such embodiments, the wireless device may receive a jurisdiction identifier nominally representative of a jurisdiction in which communication hardware of the wireless device is located, and may validate or invalidate the received jurisdiction identifier. If the received jurisdiction identifier is validated, the wireless device may apply the stored set of wireless communication operation constraints corresponding to the received jurisdiction identifier to adapt the operation of the communication hardware of the wireless device. Other embodiments may be disclosed and/or claimed. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080932 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING NETWORK SERVICE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE - An electronic device and method of providing network service are provided. The electronic device includes at least one processor configured to select a subscriber profile to be used by an external electronic device functionally connected to the electronic device from among a plurality of subscriber profiles available in the electronic device, and a communication interface configured to provide, to the external electronic device, a network service based on the subscriber profile selected. The method includes receiving a network connection request from an external electronic device functionally connected to an electronic device; selecting a subscriber profile to be used by the external electronic device from among a plurality of subscriber profiles available in the electronic device in response to the network connection request received by the electronic device; and providing, by the electronic device, a network service based on the selected subscriber profile to be used by the external electronic device. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080934 | TERMINAL AND PROCESSING METHOD FOR HEAD PORTRAIT OF CONTACT PERSON - The present invention provides a terminal which includes a program determining unit configured to determine at least one associated application program corresponding to a designated contact person in an address book of the terminal, and a displaying unit configured to simultaneously display head portraits of the designated contact person in the address book and the at least one associated application program under the condition that the address book or a designated interface provided by any of the at least one associated application program is displayed. The present invention further provides a processing method for head portraits of a contact person. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080951 | Communications Links Assessment - There is provided a method, a communications device, a vehicle and a computer program for adaptation of operation for communication between communications devices. An application is executed by a first communications device. The application involves data communications with a second communications device. A predicted impact on at least one communications link used for the data communications is acquired. The predicted impact is based on information of current link parameters of the at least one communications link. Operation of the first communications device is adapted based on the predicted impact. | 03-17-2016 |
20160088137 | COMPUTER READABLE METHOD FOR SPEED DIALLING NUMBERS INCLUDING REPETITIVE-DIGITS AND 800 - The various embodiments herein provide a computer readable method for speed dialling a user preferred number comprises downloading and installing the computer readable method in a mobile device and updating a keypad with a set of speed dialling keystrokes. The user selects a number format in a Graphical User Interface (GUI) provided by the computer readable method for speed dialling resulting into an appearance of a keyboard and a text field on the GUI. The intended keyword is entered by the user in the appeared text field through the keyboard. The GUI displays suggestions of the probable numbers on the basis of the entered keyword. The user selects an intended number from the displayed probable numbers. The number is automatically dialled on the selection of the intended number. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088148 | MOBILE DEVICE HAVING A TOUCH-LOCK STATE AND METHOD FOR OPERATING THE MOBILE DEVICE - A mobile device with a touch panel and a touch-lock operating method thereof are provided. The mobile device preferably includes an RF communication unit for supporting communication services; a touch panel for sensing input touches; a display unit for displaying a screen, where the screen includes at least one of a preset image, text, and map; and a controller for setting a touch-lock in the touch panel according to a preset condition. The controller also controls the display unit to display at least one of a text and image or at least one particular icon corresponding to the information reception event that occurs, based on the RF communication unit, in the touch-lock state. A portion of the display screen can be locked, or only certain predetermined touch functions permitted. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088439 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING OPERATION OF A SYSTEM - The invention relates to controlling the operation of a communication system. The method according to the invention comprises measuring ( | 03-24-2016 |
20160088467 | SIMULATING MULTI-SIM MULTI-SUBSCRIPTION FUNCTIONALITY ON DIFFERENT MOBILE EQUIPMENT USING SHORT RANGE COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES - A method for multi-Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) operation on a mobile communication device includes: activating, in a first mobile communication device having a local SIM profile, a client module configured to obtain SIM profile information from a SIM profile of a second mobile communication device; sending a short range communication (SRC) signal to the second mobile communication device causing the second mobile communication device to activate a server module configured to share the SIM profile information of the SIM profile for the second mobile communication device with the first communication device; remotely accessing the shared SIM profile information of the shared SIM profile by the first mobile communication device; and operating the first mobile communication device in a multi-SIM mode using SIM profile information of the local SIM profile and the shared SIM profile information. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088469 | Method and Apparatus for Selective Mobile Application Lockout - A system includes a processor configured to determine that an application is running in a foreground. The processor is also configured to receive a mobile device speed. The processor is additionally configured to determine if the mobile device speed is above a predetermined threshold. Also, the processor is configured to determine if an interface threshold has been exceeded and lock out the application from use if the mobile device speed is above the predetermined threshold and the interface threshold has been exceeded. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088545 | A NODE AND METHOD FOR SMALL DATA COMMUNICATIONS - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a mobility management node (e.g., MME, SGSN or S4-SGSN), and corresponding methods therein, for managing at least one communications functionality of a device configured for small data communications. Such management may lead to a restriction on services or functions available to the device, thereby avoiding unnecessary utilization of network resources. | 03-24-2016 |
20160094707 | RESTRICTIONS ON MOBILE DEVICE USAGE WHEN DRIVING A VEHICLE - Disclosed are various embodiments for restricting usage of a mobile device when a user is driving a vehicle. In one embodiment, it is determined that a mobile device is in use by a driver of an active vehicle. A functionality of the mobile device is then restricted based at least in part on determining that the mobile device is in use by the driver of the active vehicle. For example, a touch screen of the mobile device may be disabled, and the use of a hands-free interface may be made mandatory. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094931 | Generic Mobile Devices Customization Framework - A method for open mobile alliance (OMA) device management (DM) and over-the-air customization of a generic mobile device is disclosed. The method comprises receiving an activation message from the generic mobile device to register with a service provider, wherein the generic mobile device is pre-configured to support a plurality of functions. The method also comprises associating the generic mobile device with a service provider from the service providers as indicated by the activation message. The method further comprises sending one or more OMA service objects to customize the generic mobile device according to the service provider, wherein the one or more OMA service objects enable or disable each of the pre-configured functions on the generic mobile device to support one or more service features available by the service provider. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094984 | Methods and Systems for Managing Resources on a Mobile Trading Device - Certain embodiments provide a method including obtaining data at a first time using at least one sensor associated with a mobile computing device, the at least one sensor arranged to gather data regarding at least one operating factor for the mobile computing device, the mobile computing device configured to receive market data and execute a trading application. The example method includes analyzing the data obtained from the at least one sensor to determine the at least one operating factor. The example method includes determining a first operating state of the mobile computing device based on the at least one operating factor. The example method includes altering a function of the mobile computing device with respect to the trading application based on the first operating state. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095072 | BODY PRESENCE SENSOR CALIBRATION - Technologies for the calibration of a body presence sensor include a mobile computing device configured to calibrate the body presence sensor based on a present physical configuration mode of the mobile computing device. The mobile computing device may be adjustable into multiple physical configuration modes based on the intended use of the mobile computing device. The mobile computing device controls a transmit power level of an associated communication circuit based on whether the body presence sensor detects a body presence within proximity to the mobile computing device. | 03-31-2016 |
20160099771 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUDITING AND CORRECTING CELLULAR ANTENNA COVERAGE PATTERNS - A method for adjusting a base station antenna may include receiving measured data including signal strength data for a signal received from the base station and location data from one or more user equipment, receiving planned radio coverage data, comparing the measured data with the planned radio coverage data, generating adjustment parameters based on a result of the comparison, and adjusting the antenna based on the adjustment parameters. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100322 | SAMPLING OF DEVICE STATES FOR MOBILE SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS - A method for monitoring software application performance and one or more device states affecting a software application on a periodic basis on a mobile device. The method includes one or more computer processors identifying a software application on a mobile device. The method further includes the one or more computer processors identifying a plurality of sampling plans and one or more respective triggers within the plurality of sampling plans that are respectively associated with the software application and are stored on the mobile device. The method further includes the one or more computer processors determining a first value associated with the one or more respective triggers. The method further includes the one or more computer processors selecting a first sampling plan from the plurality of sampling plans for the software application based, at least in part, on the value associated with the one or more respective triggers. | 04-07-2016 |
20160105792 | A SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING A WIRELESS DEVICE WITH CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC SERVICES - A mobile wireless device which operates in a wireless network is capable of: displaying a request for a user specified subscriber identification code on a GUI, receiving a single entry of the user specified subscriber identification code from the GUI, appending a code specifying a request for a type of activation and a request for data representing customer specific services to the subscriber identification code to form an activation code, transmitting the activation code to a control center wherein the transmission of the activation code results from the single entry of the user specified subscriber identification code into the GUI, receiving data representing customer specific services from the control center in response to the transmission of the activation code, and storing the received data representing the customer specific services in the memory. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105793 | MOBILE PHONE AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY UPDATING A CURRENTLY ACTIVE SYSTEM MODE OF A MOBILE PHONE - A computer-implemented method for updating a currently active system mode is disclosed. The method includes: receiving, from an electronic device at a mobile phone, a command that requests deactivation of a first mode and activation a second mode in the mobile phone, wherein the first mode is a currently active mode, and each of the first mode and the second mode includes at least one system parameter; determining, at the mobile phone, whether the first mode is consistent with the second; and deactivating, at the mobile phone, the currently active system mode and activating the second if the currently active mode is inconsistent with the second. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105840 | ASSEMBLY AND METHOD FOR PREVENTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION WHILE DRIVING - A wireless communication network access controller assembly for preventing texting while driving includes a portion shaped to fit within a standard power port of a vehicle. The assembly includes at least one engagement member that places the assembly in a coupling arrangement with the power port of the vehicle and prevents removal of the assembly by the driver. A network access controller creates a local wireless network that is an overlay to a part of an existing wireless network and that prevents wireless communications access to the existing wireless network. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105852 | Dynamic Duty-Cycling of Processor of Mobile Device Based on Operating Condition of Mobile Device - In one embodiment, the first processors of a mobile device determine an operating condition of the mobile device. These operating conditions are based on a current velocity of the mobile device, and the current time of day. If the operating conditions satisfy an operating criteria for the mobile device, the first processors send a message to second processors of the mobile device, causing one or more of the second processors to wake up from a sleeping state to an active state. | 04-14-2016 |
20160112530 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING AN ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING SYSTEM VIA A MOBILE DEVICE - A method and apparatus for accessing an enterprise resource planning system via a mobile device is described. In one embodiment, the method includes parsing data from a host application access application into at least one object in an application-specific format, converting the data into an intermediate format that is compatible with a mobile device and communicating the converted data to the mobile device. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112559 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS - A mobile terminal apparatus includes: a microphone; a switch control unit, which switches between a normal mode, in which a voice uttered toward the microphone is transmitted to an intended party, and a mute mode, in which the voice is not transmitted to the intended party; and a proximity sensor, which detects whether a detection object is in proximity to the proximity sensor, wherein, while the mute mode is being executed, if the detection object is detected by the proximity sensor, the switch control unit switches to the normal mode. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112844 | METHOD FOR DETECTING MOBILE DEVICE CHARGING POINTS - As disclosed herein a method, executed by a computer, for detecting charging points for mobile devices includes determining the current location of the mobile device, identifying a charging point proximate to the current location, determining the probable travel time to the identified charging point, and activating a power conservation mode if the probable travel time is greater than the remaining estimated battery life. The current location may be completely stationary or stationary relative to some sort of transportation. The method may determine the likelihood the mobile device will visit a charging point. The method may also identify a location as a potential charging point, and after multiple uses, the location may be confirmed as a charging point. Additionally, the method may remove inactive charging points from a list of charging points. A computer system, and computer program product corresponding to the method are also disclosed herein. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112866 | AUTOMATICALLY QUIETING MOBILE DEVICES - A method may include receiving one or more of calendar data, user location data and third-party location data. The calendar data may include activity instructions that indicate that a mobile device be in a quiet mode during a particular activity included in the calendar data. The user location data may include user location instructions that indicate that the mobile device be in the quiet mode when the mobile device is at a particular location based on the particular location being of a particular location type. The third-party location data may include external request instructions that indicate that the mobile device be in the quiet mode when the mobile device is at a third-party location. The method may also include placing the mobile device in the quiet mode based on one or more of the activity instructions, the user location instructions and the external request instructions. | 04-21-2016 |
20160119467 | DEVICE FUNCTION DISABLEMENT DURING VEHICLE MOTION - A method and system for disabling functions of a movement detection enabled device is provided. The method includes monitoring a movement detection signal of the movement detection enabled device in a vehicle and determining that the vehicle is currently in motion. An electronic tag in the vehicle is detected and instructions associated with the movement detection enabled device are retrieved. It is determined that the movement detection enabled device is located within a specified proximity to a driver location of the vehicle and that a user of the device is a driver of the vehicle. In response, specified functions of the movement detection enabled device are disabled. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119754 | QUERY BASED VOLUME DETERMINATION - An approach, carried out by one or more processors, for providing volume information to communication devices. The approach may further comprise receiving a query for a set of volume information for a first communication device. The volume information includes at least a volume range for audible communicating. The approach may further comprise determining if a second communication device is in a vicinity of the first communication device. Responsive to determining the second communication device is in the vicinity of the first communication device, the approach may further comprise determining a first location and a second location for the respective first communication device and second communication device. The approach may further comprise determining the set of volume information for the first communication device based on at least the second location of the second communication device. | 04-28-2016 |
20160127529 | Mobile Communication Terminal, Control Method Thereof, Auxiliary Terminal And Vehicle - A mobile communication system provides new services to a mobile terminal mounted in a vehicle through an auxiliary terminal by connecting the auxiliary terminal to the mobile terminal. A mobile communication system includes a first terminal mounted in a vehicle, and a second terminal configured to detect application programs available in the first terminal and transmit an application program list indicating the detected application programs to the first terminal. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127887 | CONTROL OF DEVICE FEATURES BASED ON VEHICLE STATE - Methods and systems for a controlling device features based on vehicle state and device location are provided. Specifically, the device may be any type of electrical device capable of transmitting and/or receiving a signal (such as a phone, tablet, computer, music player, and/or other entertainment device). In some instances, the device may be associated with one or more vehicles. Although the device may be configured to run one or more applications, the functionality of the one or more applications may be controlled by a system associated with the vehicle. In some cases, this control may depend on the device application type, device location (either inside or outside of a vehicle), law, operator state, and/or vehicle state. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127888 | RULE BASED MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT DELEGATION - Rule-based mobile device management delegation is disclosed. A set of rules are applied to attributes associated with a mobile device to assign the mobile device to one of a plurality of management partitions. The mobile device is managed according to a policy associated with the assigned management partition. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127923 | APPARATUS, METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORK - An apparatus ( | 05-05-2016 |
20160134744 | Apparatus and method to prevent distraction from a mobile device while driving when that device is determined to be within a restricted zone inside the vehicle - A method and apparatus for controlling the operability of a mobile device while that mobile device is inside a vehicle equipped with a concealed NFC transmitter located inside the vehicle's cigarette lighter DC connector that transmits a signal, which is directed by deflection to ideally cover the driver's seat area. When that signal is received and decoded by nearby mobile devices using specific software, a process that begins by determining whether such mobile device is located within the vehicle and proximate to the driver's seat gets started, then, the system defines the transmitted signal coverage area as a restricted zone in which the mobile device use is partially or fully prohibited. The area where the radio signal is weaker or null is identified as a safe zone in which all or some of the functionality of the mobile devices is enabled. Once it's determined that a mobile device is within a restricted zone, a determination is made as to whether any usage prohibition conditions are satisfied. If usage prohibition conditions are satisfied, then particular functions of the mobile device may be disabled or overridden in a restricted zone. If prohibition conditions are not met, the mobile device may be totally enabled, partially enabled to allow certain functions, or the mobile device is never disabled. If any of the passenger's mobile devices are present and within the restricted zone range, they can override the prohibition by selecting who's their driver and systematically blocking the driver's mobile device. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134746 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTEXT BASED USER INTERFACE PRESENTATION - Through use of the illustrative embodiments, users can have device-related applications presented at the appropriate times when the user is proximate to a given device, in communication with the device, and will likely want to use an application related to the device. Since the user can configure the menu, undesired applications can be relegated to lower levels of importance when display space is limited, and when devices cannot communicate with a user mobile device, other context can be utilized to determine which applications to load. Other context can also be used whenever desired in lieu of communicating with devices, to determine the presentation and ordering of applications on a mobile device, so a user can benefit from these concepts even if communication with local devices or applications unrelated to local devices are desired. Efficient and appropriate usage of limited display space can be automatically obtained, so that a user is never too many clicks or scrolls away from a relevant application for a given situation based on that user's preferences. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135019 | ALERT PERIPHERAL FOR NOTIFICATION OF EVENTS OCCURRING ON A PROGRAMMABLE USER EQUIPMENT WITH COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES - An alert peripheral device that provides sensory notification to a user of the device includes: a power subsystem; a communication mechanism by which notification signals is received from a first user equipment (UE) that generates and transmits the notification signals in response to detection of specific events at the first UE; and a response notification mechanism that provides a sensory response of the peripheral device following receipt of a notification of a detected event (NDE) signal. The device further includes an embedded controller coupled to each of the other components and which includes firmware that when executed on the embedded controller configures the embedded controller to: establish a communication link between the communication mechanism and the first UE; and in response to detecting a receipt of the NDE signal from the first UE, trigger the response notification mechanism to exhibit the sensory response. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135025 | CONVERSATION ASSISTANT - Usage data associated with a user of a telephonic device is accessed by a remote learning engine. A service or a product that is likely to be of interest to the user is identified by the remote learning engine based on the accessed usage data. A recommended voice bundle application for the user is determined by the remote learning engine based on the accessed usage data, the recommended voice bundle application being a voice application that, when executed by the telephonic device, results in a simulated multi-step spoken conversation between the telephonic device and the user to enable the user to receive the identified service or the identified product. A recommendation associated with the recommended voice bundle application is transmitted from the remote learning engine to the telephonic device. The recommendation is presented by the telephonic device to the user through voice communications. The user through voice communications has accepted the recommendation determining is determined by the telephonic device. In response to determining that the user has accepted the recommendation, the recommended voice bundle application on the telephonic device is executed by the telephonic device. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135039 | REMOTE TELEMATICS UNIT BAND CONTROL WITH DYNAMIC MEMORY - A system and method of remotely changing use of a cellular protocol at a vehicle includes: storing, in a network access device (NAD) at the vehicle, identities of one or more cellular bands that provide cellular service according to an up-to-date cellular protocol; wirelessly receiving at the vehicle a computer-readable instruction that deactivates the up-to-date cellular protocol; and in response to the computer-readable instruction, the vehicle: obtains the identities of the cellular bands stored in the NAD; stores the obtained identities in a non-volatile memory device located apart from the NAD; and erases in the NAD the identities of the cellular bands that provide cellular service according to an up-to-date cellular protocol. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135064 | Method and System for Establishing a Self-Organized Mobile Core in a Cellular Communication Network - A method for establishing a self-organized emergency mobile core in a cellular communication network, the cellular communication network having a core element. The method includes the step of storing program code for implementing core network functionality on at least one stationary network element of the cellular communication network allowing to host virtual network functionality. The core network functionality remains inactive when the core element is available. The method includes the steps of detecting an emergency event within the cellular communication network resulting in an unavailability of the core element, and starting operating the core network functionality in order to establish a self-organized emergency mobile core in response to the detected emergency event. | 05-12-2016 |
20160142531 | CATEGORY-BASED FENCE - Techniques of category-based fence are described. A category-based fence can correspond to a group of signal sources instead of a point location fixed to latitude and longitude coordinates. The group of signal sources can represent a category of entities, e.g., a particular business chain. The signal sources can be distributed to multiple discrete locations. A category-based fence associated with the group, accordingly, can correspond to multiple locations instead of a single point location and a radius. Each signal source in the group can be associated with a category identifier unique to the group and uniform among signal sources in the group. The category identifier can be programmed into each signal source. A mobile device can enter the category-based fence by entering any of the discrete locations when the mobile device detects the signal identifier. The mobile device can then execute an application program associated with the category-based fence. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142885 | VOICE CALL PROMPTING METHOD AND DEVICE - A voice call prompting method, includes: acquiring a current time at which voice information from a terminal device is received; determining a time interval between the current time and a last time of broadcasting voice information; and if the time interval is longer than a predetermined time period, generating a prompt of broadcasting the received voice information. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142907 | METHOD TO PARAMETERIZE A COMMUNICATION SERVICE PROVIDED BY A SERVER OF A SERVICE PROVIDER TO A USER'S COMMUNICATION MODULE VIA A PORTABLE DEVICE - One embodiment relates to a method to parameterize a communication service delivered by a server of a service provider to a communication module of a user, the communication service being configured in accordance with an availability status, comprising detecting a change in context of use of a portable device of said user separate from said communication module, determining a new availability status as a function of the detected change in context of use, and transmitting a message relating to the new availability status to the server of the service provider or the communication module so that the communication service is configured on the basis of the determined new availability status. | 05-19-2016 |
20160150096 | METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR CHANGING SETTING OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for changing a setting of a mobile communication device is disclosed. The method includes receiving context information of the mobile communication device, changing the setting of the mobile communication device according to the context information and a user preference rule, and updating the user preference rule according to the context information and the changed setting. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150388 | METHOD FOR ACQUIRING RECOMMENDING INFORMATION, TERMINAL, AND SERVER - A method for acquiring recommending information, a terminal and a server are provided. In the method, a first terminal receives a second telephone number affiliated with a second terminal sent by a recommender using a third terminal The first terminal sends a request for recommending information to a server according to the first telephone number of the first terminal, a telephone number of the recommender, and the second telephone number, so that the server generates recommending information according to the request for recommending information, and pushes the recommending information to the second terminal affiliated with the second telephone number. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150394 | Method and Apparatus for Automatically Adjusting the Operation of Reminders Based on Device Event History - A processor-based personal electronic device (such as a smartphone) uses combinatorial logic to automatically adjust alarms, notifications, reminders, and the like based on data from device event histories, on-board sensors, user-entered data, and similar information. One particular representative embodiment comprises a process for automatically deleting an unneeded reminder. For example, a user may have a personal electronic device that is set to issue a reminder for a meeting in a certain place, on a certain date at a certain time. If location sensors detect that the user is already at the certain place on the certain date at (or reasonably before) the certain time, the now superfluous reminder is automatically cancelled. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150398 | WEARABLE DEVICE, PORTABLE DEVICE AND ASSOCIATED CONTROL METHOD - A wearable device includes a plurality of sensors, a wireless communication unit and a control unit. The wireless communication unit is arranged for communicating with an electronic device having a plurality of sensors. The control unit is arranged for receiving at least one sensed data from the electronic device via the wireless communication unit, and comparing the at least one sensed data of the electronic device with sensed data generated by at least one of the sensors of the wearable device to generate a comparison result, and determining whether the electronic device is in a aware status according to the comparison result. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150399 | METHOD FOR PREVENTING CALL-UP OPERATION ERRORS AND SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A method for preventing call-up operation errors and system using the same are provided. The method includes the steps of: (S | 05-26-2016 |
20160150400 | OPERATING METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION PROFILE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE SUPPORTING THE SAME - An electronic device is provided. The electronic device includes a first communication module configured to establish a communication channel to an external electronic device based on wired communications or short-range communications, a second communication module that supports a communication service provided via a base station; a control module configured to obtain a communication profile required for operating the second communication module using the external electronic device connected through the first communication module, and a memory configured to store the communication profile. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150401 | SMART PACKAGING - The disclosure is related to systems and methods of smart packaging. In one example, a package can include an embedded data storage element that is readable at a point-of-sale terminal and includes custom data stored on the data storage element. The custom data may be associated with a specific product related to the package, such as a SIM card or phone. The custom data can include information to allow a process related to the product to be performed. The process may include allowing activation of the product only when an indicator at a server indicates the package was processed at an authorized terminal. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150422 | Wifi Home Phone to Cell - Building on my previous patent application for a WiFi Home Phone, this idea would connect the numbers of the home phone to the cell phone. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150478 | Data Processing Method, Terminal, Subscriber Identity Module Card, and System - A method for processing data, a terminal, a subscriber identity module card and a system are disclosed. The method includes: when a terminal is in a dormant state, keeping providing a working power supply for a subscriber identity module card and a specified electronic device within the terminal, so that the subscriber identity module card and the specified electronic device keep in a working state; the subscriber identity module card collecting working data of the specified electronic device and then storing the working data; and when the terminal quits from the dormant state, the terminal extracting the working data. | 05-26-2016 |
20160156758 | State-dependent Query Response | 06-02-2016 |
20160156772 | Automatic Switching of Modes and Mode Control Capabilities On a Wireless Communication Device | 06-02-2016 |
20160156774 | TECHNIQUES FOR ENHANCING CONTENT ON A MOBILE DEVICE | 06-02-2016 |
20160157042 | MANAGEMENT OF NETWORK TECHNOLOGY SELECTION AND DISPLAY IN MULTI-TECHNOLOGY WIRELESS ENVIRONMENTS | 06-02-2016 |
20160157093 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UPDATING FIRMWARE THROUGH HETERO-NETWORK | 06-02-2016 |
20160157112 | COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND SAVING METHOD | 06-02-2016 |
20160157169 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR ENABLING A MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION (MTC) COVERAGE ENHANCEMENT MODE | 06-02-2016 |
20160164735 | DEVICE MIGRATION - Personalization data such as settings and/or state is migrated across devices including mobile phones. Device personalizations are pushed to a cloud service or other mechanism for backup and subsequent transmission to other devices. The personalization data can later be employed to configure one or more other devices in the same manner as a first device. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165040 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DRIVING-AWARE NOTIFICATION - A system and method for driver-aware notification that collects and analyzes contextual information about the driving environment to free a device owner from having to decide whether or not to answer an incoming message. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165421 | PERIODIC AMBIENT WAVEFORM ANALYSIS FOR DYNAMIC DEVICE CONFIGURATION - In one embodiment, a method includes generating a waveform fingerprint based on captured ambient audio data; calculating a location of the computing system; sending the generated waveform fingerprint and the location to a server; and receiving instructions from the server to adjust one or more device settings of an output device of the computing system. The instructions being based at least in part on identifying one or more audio fingerprints that match the generated waveform fingerprint and correlating one or more of the identified audio fingerprints to a physical environment of the computing system. The method also includes adjusting one or more of the device settings of the output device of the computing system in accordance with the received instructions. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165535 | BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, BASE STATION CONTROL METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND BASE STATION CONTROL PROGRAM - Because it is not possible to sufficiently reduce the number base stations that start uselessly in spite of being in a low traffic state, it is not possible to lower interference between adjacent cells and power consumption sufficiently. A base station starts transmission of a control signal with predetermined power when communication between another base station and a mobile station is started and a first predetermined condition is satisfied. | 06-09-2016 |
20160172753 | Antenna Ground And Feed Swapping In Handheld Applications | 06-16-2016 |
20160173681 | Wireless Communications Device having a Silent Mode Disabled Setting for User Contacts | 06-16-2016 |
20160174062 | MATCHING CLIENT DEVICE TO APPROPRIATE DATA PACKAGE | 06-16-2016 |
20160174066 | Method for Activating an Unlocked, Inactive Mobile Device Using a Universal Integrated Circuit Card Pre-Provisioned With a Service Plan | 06-16-2016 |
20160174132 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LIMITING THE USE OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE | 06-16-2016 |
20160174142 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO TERMINAL APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INTER-TERMINAL DIRECT COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM | 06-16-2016 |
20160174149 | METHOD BY WHICH BASE STATION TRANSMITS COVERAGE COMPENSATION REQUEST MESSAGE TO DETERMINE SWITCHING TO DORMANT STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SAME | 06-16-2016 |
20160174158 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR SETTING OPERATION MODES OF COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK | 06-16-2016 |
20160183078 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | 06-23-2016 |
20160183128 | COST EFFECTIVE MULTIBAND RF FRONT-END ARCHITECTURE FOR MOBILE APPLICATIONS | 06-23-2016 |
20160191691 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A data processor is configured to perform first processing to acquire data that is included in reception signals received by an antenna and is transmitted in accordance with a first wireless communication scheme and second processing to acquire data that is included in the reception signals and is transmitted in accordance with a second wireless communication scheme. The data processor has, as an operating mode, a first operating mode and a second operating mode. The first operating mode is a mode in which, when the first processing is performed, the second processing is intermittently performed in place of the first processing. The second operating mode is a mode in which, when the first processing is performed, the second processing is intermittently performed in place of the first processing at intervals longer than intervals in the first operating mode. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191694 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION-RELATED INFORMATION - An electronic device is provided including: a display unit that displays an indication of a communication counterpart; a processor configured to: select a first application from a plurality of applications that are associated with the communication counterpart based on a preset condition; and display a first indication of the first application on the display unit, wherein the first application is used for communication with the communication counterpart. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192106 | LIGHTWEIGHT APPLICATION INTEGRATION FOR MOBILE CLOUD COMPUTING - Disclosed herein are technologies to provide lightweight software applications deployable on mobile devices that allow users and intermediary solution providers to receive specific data or information from application or solutions. In accordance with one aspect, a configuration file is uploaded and an input message is received from a user. The input message is mapped to one or more commands related to the configuration file, and the one or more mapped commands is run in order to extract data requested by the input message. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192151 | MOBILE DEVICE TRACKING WITH PEER-TO-PEER MOBILE DEVICE NETWORK - Methods, systems, computer-readable media, and apparatuses are presented for determining positions of mobile devices in a peer-to-peer network group. In some embodiments, a server receives information regarding a distance between a group owner mobile device and a client mobile device in a peer-to-peer network group. The server determines whether the distance between the group owner mobile device and the client mobile device exceeds a threshold distance. If the threshold distance is not exceeded, the server associates a position of the group owner mobile device with a position of the client mobile device. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192178 | CLOUD STORAGE FOR MOBILE DEVICES BASED ON USER-SPECIFIED LIMITS FOR DIFFERENT TYPES OF DATA - Techniques described herein may enable users to manage the division of storage, for multiple applications and on a per-content type basis, between cloud storage and local storage. A mobile device may receive user preference information relating to storage limits, each of the storage limits being applicable to an aggregate amount of data, of a particular content type, and associated with a number of applications executed by the mobile device. The mobile device transfer data, to and from cloud storage, to enforce the storage limits included in the user preference information. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192432 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system capable of reducing energy consumption of a network node in a local area range. When judging that there is a shift trigger, a local eNB shifts from a normal operation to an energy saving operation. In the energy saving operation, the local eNB stops the operation of transmitting at least a part of downlink transmission signals to be transmitted to a user equipment (UE) and performs the operation of receiving an uplink transmission signal transmitted from the UE. When judging that it has received the uplink transmission signal (RACH) in the energy saving operation, the local eNB shifts to the normal operation. | 06-30-2016 |
20160198040 | Maintaining Audio Communication in a Congested Communication Channel | 07-07-2016 |
20160198346 | SYNCHRONISING RADIO CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS | 07-07-2016 |
20160204073 | Semiconductor Package and Method of Manufacturing the Same | 07-14-2016 |
20160205239 | STANDARD MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE DISTRACTION PREVENTION AND SAFETY PROTOCOLS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205539 | Configurable base station | 07-14-2016 |
20160205543 | METHOD AND SERVICE PROVIDER FOR MANAGING EXPIRED OR CONSUMED APPLICATIONS BEING STORED IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES | 07-14-2016 |
20160205706 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 07-14-2016 |
20160255187 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING FUNCTION AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE SUPPORTING THE SAME | 09-01-2016 |
20160380743 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COORDINATED MANAGEMENT OF NETWORK ACCESS POINTS - A method for coordinated wireless network management applicable to overlay network access points. The method includes sending, from an overlay access point of a plurality of overlay access points to a coordinator device, wireless operational parameters characterizing operation of the one of the plurality of overlay access points. The overlay access point receives suggested operational information provided by the coordinator device. The suggested operational information causes modification of a perceived value of at least one operational parameter of the one of the plurality of overlay access points wherein the perceived value is different from an actual value of the operational parameter. The method further includes adjusting an operational mode of the overlay access point based upon the perceived value. The adjusting may be further based at least in part upon a negotiation of wireless access parameters between the overlay access point and one or more local wireless devices. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381181 | System and Method for Automatic Data Security, Back-up and Control for Mobile Devices - Systems and methods for providing security, monitoring, and control of mobile communications device activity including at least one mobile communication device with software operable thereon for receiving rules provided by an authorized user of the device(s) and in accordance with those rules administering actions to provide for controlling, monitoring, and security data stored or generated on the device(s), including logging data and activities related to the mobile communications device, blocking and filtering calls, messages, websites, emails, and combinations thereof, via wireless communication with a remote server computer having a corresponding software module operable thereon for managing and implementing the rules. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381205 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION DETECTION FOR DETERMINING HANDS FREE MODE SETTINGS - A mobile communication device includes wireless local area network (WLAN) baseband hardware with at least one WLAN transceiver; non-volatile, non-transitory memory that stores a transportation model based on aggregated basic service set identification (BSSID) information collected from a plurality of WLAN access points; at least one sensor that is operative to detect motion of the mobile communication device; and at least one processor, operatively coupled to the WLAN baseband hardware, the memory and to the at least one sensor. The at least one processor is operative to determine that the mobile communication device is located on public transportation using the transportation model in response to a motion detection signal received from the at least one sensor. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381207 | INCONSPICUOUS MODE FOR MOBILE DEVICES - A communication device is configured to switch from a normal mode of operation to an inconspicuous mode of operation in which a reduced set of information is presented on a home screen of a display of the device in comparison to a set of information presented on the home screen in the normal mode of operation. In addition, other display properties such as contrast and brightness may be adjusted to make them less conspicuous. The home screen in the inconspicuous mode of operation is less obtrusive or conspicuous to individuals than in the normal mode of operation. The device may enter the inconspicuous mode upon user request or by detecting at least one environmental condition using a sensor available to the mobile communication device. The environmental condition may be anything that the device can detect or sense in its surrounding environment such as ambient light or sound. The device may return to the normal mode of operation by user request or when the environmental condition is no longer present. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381208 | INCONSPICUOUS MODE FOR MOBILE DEVICES - A communication device is configured to switch from a normal mode of operation to an inconspicuous mode of operation in which a reduced set of information is presented on a home screen of a display of the device in comparison to a set of information presented on the home screen in the normal mode of operation. In addition, other display properties such as contrast and brightness may be adjusted to make them less conspicuous. The home screen in the inconspicuous mode of operation is less obtrusive or conspicuous to individuals than in the normal mode of operation. The device may enter the inconspicuous mode upon user request or by detecting at least one environmental condition using a sensor available to the mobile communication device. The environmental condition may be anything that the device can detect or sense in its surrounding environment such as ambient light or sound. The device may return to the normal mode of operation by user request or when the environmental condition is no longer present. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381209 | VEHICLE COMPUTING SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DELIVERY OF A MOBILE DEVICE LOCKOUT ICON - A vehicle computing system includes at least one processor configured to provide a lockout icon to a mobile device using a uniform resource identifier. The at least one processor is further configured to, in response to established communication with the mobile device having a user-interface display, retrieve the uniform resource identifier based on an application being executed at the mobile device. The at least one processor is further configured to transmit the uniform resource identifier to the mobile device to lockout the user-interface display with the lockout icon associated with the uniform resource identifier. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381211 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA FOR TIMER-BASED MANAGEMENT OF COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method of management of a communication device in an aircraft may include transitioning the communication device from a normal mode to a disabled mode based on a calculated device sleep time based on data associated with transportation information of the device. One of these modes may be a state of the device in which a transceiver of the device is deactivated and the other mode may be a state of the device in which the transceiver is activated. Therefore, the device sleep time determines when the wireless device's transceiver may not be activated. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381233 | Mobile Terminal Talk Mode Switching Method, Device and Storage Medium - The present document discloses a method for switching a talk mode of a mobile terminal, the method includes: detecting in real time a distance between a mobile terminal in a calling state and a current user; identifying whether the mobile terminal remains in the calling state when the distance is detected to exceed a first preset threshold; detecting a sight of the current user when identifying that the mobile terminal remains in the calling state, and switching the talk mode of the mobile terminal from a microphone mode to a speaker mode when detecting that the sight of the current user covers a screen area of the mobile terminal. At the same time, the present document further discloses an apparatus and a storage medium for switching a talk mode of a mobile terminal. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381505 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING MODE SETTINGS OF VEHICLE PASSENGERS - A method includes detecting, by a first mobile communication device, a group of mobile communication devices that are in proximity to the first mobile communication device; initiating pairing of each mobile communication device of the group with the first mobile communication device and with each other; providing, by the first mobile communication device, an alphanumeric code to the group of mobile communication devices along with a drive mode disable command; determining that the first mobile communication device is associated with the vehicle driver; and placing the first mobile communication device in drive mode and broadcasting an advertising packet to the other mobile communication devices of the group. The advertising packet contains a disable drive mode command and the alphanumeric code. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381623 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING SKIPPING OF ACCESS CLASS BARRING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for indicating skipping of access class barring (ACB) in a wireless communication system is provided. An upper layer of a user equipment (UE) receives ACB skip bits, which indicates whether ACB check is skipped for a specific application or service, from a lower layer of the UE, initiates the specific application of service, and transmits an ACB skip indication to the lower layer of the UE, if skipping of the ACK check is allowed for the specific application or service according to the ACB skip bits. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237849 | ANTI-DISTRACTED DRIVER SYSTEM | 08-17-2017 |
20170238259 | BACKGROUND TRANSFER SERVICE FOR APPLICATIONS ON MOBILE DEVICES | 08-17-2017 |
20180026669 | PHONE DOCKING STATION FOR ENHANCED DRIVING SAFETY | 01-25-2018 |
20180026931 | ONLINE GIFT DELIVERY CONFIRMATION SYSTEM AND METHOD | 01-25-2018 |
20180027076 | VEHICLE INTERNET RADIO INTERFACE | 01-25-2018 |
20180027354 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING A SMART MOBILE DEVICE FOR REMOTE CONTROL OF A TARGET PROCESS | 01-25-2018 |
20180027407 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING A REMOTE MANAGEMENT OF A MULTI-SUBSCRIPTION SIM MODULE | 01-25-2018 |
20180027408 | Methods and Systems for Managing Resources on a Mobile Trading Device | 01-25-2018 |
20180027428 | ROBUSTNESS OF CELLULAR NETWORK BY ASSOCIATING A SHAPLEY VALUE WITH EACH MACROCELL | 01-25-2018 |
20190149652 | MOBILE DEVICE FEATURE DISABLEMENT | 05-16-2019 |
20190149654 | RESTRICTIONS ON MOBILE DEVICE USAGE WHEN DRIVING A VEHICLE | 05-16-2019 |
20190149964 | Personalized Management of Connected Devices | 05-16-2019 |
20190149981 | Methods and Systems for Managing Resources on a Mobile Trading Device | 05-16-2019 |
20190149982 | Learning Gamification and Safety Control Application for Mobile Devices | 05-16-2019 |
20190150060 | Activity Mode for a Cellular Connection | 05-16-2019 |
20190150099 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INCREASING PERFORMANCE OF A COMMUNICATION LINK OF A COMMUNICATION NODE | 05-16-2019 |
20190150210 | DATACENTER, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
20220141642 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DISTRIBUTION OF ESIM PROFILES TO A PLURALITY OF ENTERPRISE ENDPOINT DEVICES - An information handling system operating an enterprise endpoint embedded subscriber identification module (eSIM) provisioning system may comprise a processor, memory, and network interface device for transceiving data with an endpoint computing device having an embedded universal integrated circuit card (eUICC) capable of programmable selection among networks including at least one network in a 5G New Radio frequency band, the processor executing code of an enterprise client management (ECM) system for management of eSIM profiles for plural endpoint computing devices, the ECM system associating a unique hardware derived device IDentification based on hardware components of the endpoint computing device with a level of wireless service for the endpoint computing device based on enterprise allocation of service for the endpoint computing device via the ECM system, and the network interface device transmitting an eSIM profile to the endpoint computing device for implementation at the eUICC for the assigned level of service. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141650 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ALLOCATING TELEPHONE NUMBERS - A telephone number (TN) from a group of telephone numbers may be assigned/allocated to a user device (e.g., an internet-of-things (IoT) device, a computing device, a sensor, a smart meter, a tablet, a network device, a session initiation protocol (SIP) device, a web real-time communication (webRTC) enabled device, and/or any other device that is configured for communication (e.g., voice communication, video communication, signal communication, etc.) for a time period (e.g., the duration of timer, etc.) during which the TN may be used to make and/or receive calls. Once the time period expires the TN may be placed in a group of telephone numbers available to be assigned/reassigned to user devices. | 05-05-2022 |